Standard - Specifications For Road Works 2000

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA
MINISTRY OF WORKS
Standard Specification for Road Works - 2000

Standard
Specification
for
Road Works
June 2000
ISBN 9987 - 8891 - 2 - 3
THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA
MINISTRY OF WORKS
Standard
Specification
for
Road Works
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000
-81(
,6%1
Reproduction of extracts from this document may

be made subject to due acknowledgement of the
source.
Although this document is believed to be correct at
the time of printing, the Ministry of Works does not
accept any contractual, tortious or other form of
liability for its content or for any consequences
arising from its use. People using the information
contained in the document should apply and rely
on their own skill and judgement to the particular
issue that they are considering
Printed by: Novum Grafisk AS, Skjetten, Norway

Layout: Rolf Johansen, ViaNova and Jan Edvardsen, ICG, Norway
THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS ,,

$FNQRZOHGJHPHQWV
This Standard Specifications for Road Works - 2000 has been prepared as a
component under the Institutional Cooperation between the Ministry of Works (MoW),
Central Materials Laboratory (CML) and the Norwegian Public Roads Administration
(NPRA). The Government of Tanzania and the Norwegian Agency for International
Development (NORAD) have jointly financed the project, which forms part of a
programme to establish technical standards, guidelines and specifications for road and
highway engineering.
This document has been prepared by a Working Group under the supervision of a
Steering Committee comprising the following members from the Ministry of Works:
Mr. JL Ngumbulu Director of Trunk Roads (&KDLUPDQ)
Mr. JW Kijazi Director of Rural Roads
Mr. DJ Mariki Ag. Chief Engineer, CML
Mr. LJ Mujjungi Ag. Chief Engineer, Design and Construction, Trunk Roads
Mr. GJ Kinyero Ag. Chief Engineer, Design and Construction, Rural Roads
The Working Group consisted of the following members:

Mr. AS Idabaga MoW
Mr. ST Rwegumisa MoW
Mr. C Overby NPRA
Mr. R Johansen ViaNova (6HFUHWDU\)
The Steering Committee and the Working Group wish to acknowledge the significant
contribution from all people giving critical comments and advice during the preparation
of this document. In particular, the comprehensive input from contributors within the
Ministry of Works and the private sector who commented on the draft, is gratefully
acknowledged.
THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS ,,,

7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
Acknowledgements
Table of Contents
Crossection Terminology
Series 1000 General

Series 2000 Drainage
Series 3000 Earthworks and Pavement Layers of Gravel or Crushed Stone
Series 4000 Bituminous Layers and Seals
Series 5000 Ancillary Roadworks
Series 6000 Structures
Series 7000 Tolerances, Testing and Quality Control
Appendices:
Appendix 1 Summary of Pay Items
Appendix 2 List of Clauses Referring to the Special Specifications or Drawings
THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS ,9

&URVVHFWLRQ7HUPLQRORJ\
THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS 9

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 SERIES 1000 - GENERAL
SERIES 1000
General
SECTION PAGE
1100 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS 1000-2
1200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND
PROVISIONS 1000-6
1300 CONTRACTOR’S ESTABLISHMENT ON
SITE AND GENERAL OBLIGATIONS 1000-20
1400 ENGINEER’S ACCOMMODATION AND
ATTENDANCE UPON ENGINEER AND
HIS SITE PERSONNEL 1000-22
1500 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC 1000-30
1600 OVERHAUL 1000-34
1700 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND
WASTE DISPOSAL 1000-35
CONTENTS OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD WORKS 2000:

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
CROSSECTION TERMINOLOGY
SERIES 1000 GENERAL
SERIES 2000 DRAINAGE
SERIES 3000 EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED STONE
SERIES 4000 BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND SEALS
SERIES 5000 ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SERIES 6000 STRUCTURES
SERIES 7000 TOLERANCES, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
APPENDICES
THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 1

SERIES 1000: GENERAL Unless inconsistent with the context, in these

Specifications, the following terms, words or
expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned
SECTION 1100: DEFINITIONS to them. CROSSECTION TERMINOLOGY, page V, refers for
details on the cross-sectional elements of the road.
AND TERMS
1101 ACCEPTED
CONTENTS: Accepted in writing by the Engineer (or by the Employer
where appropriate) as meeting the requirements of the
CLAUSE PAGE Contract Documents and of any authorised variations
1101 ACCEPTED 1000-2 thereto. “Acceptance” means accepted in writing as
1102 ACCESS CULVERT 1000-2 aforesaid. “Acceptable” means acceptable to the
1103 AGGREGATE 1000-2 Engineer as aforesaid.
1104 APPROVED 1000-2
1105 ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING 1000-2 1102 ACCESS CULVERT
1106 BASE COURSE 1000-2 An access culvert provides an opening under an
1107 BITUMINOUS MIX 1000-2 intersecting side road or entrance to plots along the
1108 BITUMINOUS SEAL 1000-2 project road.
1109 BORROW AREA 1000-2
1110 BORROW PIT 1000-2 1103 AGGREGATE
1111 BORROW MATERIAL 1000-2 Crushed stone of specified size and quality to be used
1112 BRIDGE 1000-2
in the Works.
1113 CARRIAGEWAY 1000-3
1114 CATCHWATER DRAIN OR BANK 1000-3
1115 CERTIFICATE OF GUARANTEE 1000-3 1104 APPROVED
1116 COMMON EXCAVATION 1000-3 Approved in writing by the Engineer, including
1117 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 1000-3 subsequent written approval or confirmation of previous
1118 CROSSFILL 1000-3 verbal approval by the Engineer. “Approval” means
1119 CULVERT 1000-3 approval in writing as aforesaid.
1120 CUT 1000-3
1121 DIRECTED 1000-3 1105 ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING
1122 EARTHWORKS 1000-3 The layer - or layers - of a bituminous mix constructed
1123 EARTHWORKS MATERIAL TYPES 1000-3 on top of the base course made of a mixture to
1124 EMBANKMENT 1000-3 predetermined proportions of aggregate, filler and
1125 FILL 1000-3 bituminous binder material prepared in a mixing plant to
1126 FORMATION LEVEL 1000-3 meet the requirements for surfacing material class
1127 GRADE LINE 1000-3 AC20, AC14 or AC10 and placed by means of a paving
1128 GRADING MODULUS (GM) 1000-3 machine.
1129 IMPROVED SUBGRADE 1000-3
1130 INLET AND OUTLET DRAINS 1000-3 1106 BASE COURSE
1131 LANE 1000-3 A layer of material constructed on top of the subbase or
1132 LOT 1000-3 in the absence thereof, the improved subgrade layer. A
1133 MEDIAN 1000-3 base course may extend to outside the carriageway.
1134 MEDIAN DRAIN 1000-3
1135 MITRE DRAIN AND BANK 1000-3 1107 BITUMINOUS MIX
1136 OVERBURDEN 1000-3
A mixture of a bituminous binder and aggregate, but
1137 PAVEMENT 1000-3 excluding penetration macadam.
1138 PAVEMENT MATERIAL CLASSES 1000-3
1139 PIONEER LAYER 1000-4
1140 PRESPLITTING 1000-4 1108 BITUMINOUS SEAL
1141 ROADBED 1000-4 A bituminous surfacing made by the application of one
1142 ROAD PRISM 1000-4 or more layers of bituminous binder with layers of
1143 ROAD RESERVE OR RIGHT-OF-W AY 1000-4 aggregate in successive layers.
1144 ROCK EXCAVATION 1000-4
1145 ROLLER PASSES 1000-4 1109 BORROW AREA
1146 SERVICES 1000-4 An area within designated boundaries, approved for the
1147 SHOULDER 1000-4 purpose of obtaining borrow materials.
1148 SHOULDER BREAKPOINT 1000-4
1149 SIDE DRAIN 1000-4 1110 BORROW PIT
1150 SIDEFILL 1000-4 The excavated pit in a borrow area.
1151 SLOPE 1000-5
1152 SPECIFICATIONS 1000-5 1111 BORROW MATERIAL
1153 SPOIL (MATERIAL) 1000-5
Any gravel, sand, soil, stones or ash obtained from
1154 STABILISATION 1000-5 borrow areas, dumps or sources other than cut within
1155 SUBBASE 1000-5 the road prism and which is used in the construction of
1156 SUBGRADE, IMPROVED 1000-5
the Works. It shall not include crushed stone or sand
1157 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM 1000-5 obtained from commercial sources and blasted rock for
1158 SUBSIDIARY W ORKS 1000-5 crushing.
1159 SUBSTRUCTURE 1000-5
1160 SUITABLE MATERIALS 1000-5
1161 TOPSOIL 1000-5 1112 BRIDGE
1162 TRAVELLED W AY 1000-5 A structure for carrying motor, railways, pedestrian or
1163 UNSUITABLE MATERIALS 1000-5 other traffic or services over a river, watercourse,
1164 VERGE 1000-5 railway line or any other gap, with a single span length,
1165 WORKING DRAWINGS 1000-5 or sum of span lengths, of 2.0 metres or more. The
1166 QUARRY 1000-5 length is measured between the abutment faces, or pier
head faces respectively, along the centre line of the
road at girder-bed level.

1113 CARRIAGEWAY classified as fill when placed below the improved

The surface normally traversed by vehicles and which subgrade layers.
consists of one or a number of contiguous traffic lanes,
include auxiliary lanes and shoulders. 1126 FORMATION LEVEL
The level of the top of the final layer of earthworks upon
1114 CATCHWATER DRAIN OR BANK which the pavement layers are placed.
A longitudinal drain or bank outside the road prism for
diverting water that should otherwise flow into the road 1127 GRADE LINE
prism. The grade line is a reference line in the Drawings of the
longitudinal sections of the road indicating at regular
1115 CERTIFICATE OF GUARANTEE intervals the elevations according to which the road is to
A signed statement by a person having legal authority be constructed. The grade line may refer to the level of
to bind a company or supplier to its product, and which the completed road, base or any other layer and may
confirms that the materials and test results conform to indicate the elevations either along the carriage way
the standards of the Specifications. centre line or along any designated position on the road
cross-section.
1116 COMMON EXCAVATION
Classification of excavation for payment purposes. 1128 GRADING MODULUS (GM)
Denotes all excavation, except rock excavation, The cumulative percentages by mass of material in a
required from the road prism, drains, etc. according to representative sample of aggregate, gravel or soil
the Drawings and the Specifications. retained on the 2 mm, 0.425 mm and 0.075 mm sieves,
divided by 100.
1117 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
The appropriate edition of the General Conditions of 1129 IMPROVED SUBGRADE
Contract issued for execution of the Contract together The upper layer or layers of the earthworks, which is
with any Special or Particular Conditions of Contract constructed directly onto the fill or in some cases onto
forming part of the Contract. the roadbed.
1118 CROSSFILL 1130 INLET AND OUTLET DRAINS

Crossfill is earthworks materials taken from cuts in the Channels leading into or discharging from culverts
road reserve and placed in embankments at a distance storm water conduits and minor bridges.
of 50m or less from its original position, measured along
the centreline of the road. 1131 LANE
Part of a travelled way intended for a single stream of
1119 CULVERT traffic in one direction, which has normally been
A structure other than a bridge, which provides an demarcated as such by road markings.
opening under the carriageway or median for drainage
or other purposes. 1132 LOT
A sizeable portion of work or quantity of material which
1120 CUT is assessed as a unit for the purpose of quality control
A section of the road where the formation level is below and selected to represent material or work produced by
the original ground level requiring excavations for the essentially the same process and materials.
construction of the pavement layers.
1133 MEDIAN
1121 DIRECTED The area between the two travelled ways of a dual
Direction in writing by the Engineer including verbal carriageway, excluding the inner shoulders.
direction when subsequently confirmed in writing.
1122 EARTHWORKS 1134 MEDIAN DRAIN
Term describing all processed material below the A longitudinal drain situated between the inner
formation level including improved subgrade layers, fill shoulders of a dual carriageway.
and prepared roadbed.
1135 MITRE DRAIN AND BANK
1123 EARTHWORKS MATERIAL CLASSES A drain constructed at an angle to the centreline of the
Materials used in earthworks, complying with the road to divert water from a side drain. Mitre drains
requirements of the Specifications, classified as follows: include mitre banks placed across the side drains.
G15 natural gravel/soils with nominal CBR value 1136 OVERBURDEN

of minimum 15 Material within a borrow area, which is not required or is
G7 natural gravel/soils with nominal CBR value unsuitable for use in construction.
of minimum 7
G3 natural gravel/soils with nominal CBR value 1137 PAVEMENT
of minimum 3 The upper layers of the road comprising the improved
DR Dump rock, un-graded waste rock subgrade, subbase, base or gravel wearing course or
bituminous surfacing and the shoulder layers.
1124 EMBANKMENT
A section of the road where the formation level is above 1138 PAVEMENT MATERIAL CLASSES
the original ground level. Materials used in the pavement, complying with the
requirements of the Specifications, classified as follows:
1125 FILL
That portion of the road prism consisting of approved Unbound natural gravel materials:
imported material which lies above the roadbed and is G80: natural gravel with nominal CBR value of
bounded by the side slopes, on which the improved minimum 80
subgrade layers, subbase, base course, shoulders and G60: natural gravel with nominal CBR value of
are to be constructed. Material imported to replace minimum 60
unsuitable material in the roadbed shall also be
G45: natural gravel with nominal CBR value of Sand seal: bituminous seal made with
minimum 45 approved sand for aggregate, placed in a
G25: natural gravel with nominal CBR value of single layer or in two layers as specified
minimum 25 Slurry seal: bituminous layer made with
GW: gravel wearing course for gravel roads or approved crusher dust for aggregate, mixed
unpaved shoulders with bitumen emulsion and water to form a
mixture poured into the surface as specified
Unbound crushed aggregate for base course:
CRR: crushed aggregate made from fresh, 1139 PIONEER LAYER
quarried rock compacted to a percentage of An initial layer constructed over a weak roadbed where
the apparent density of the rock, with selected material is used to provide a stable platform for
enhanced requirements for workmanship the construction of subsequent layers.
during construction
CRS: crushed aggregate made from stones,
1140 PRESPLITTING
boulders, oversize from borrow pits or
Establishment of a free surface, or shear plane, in rock
quarried rock, compacted to a percentage
cuts, by controlled use of explosives in specially aligned
of the maximum dry density of the material
and closely spaced drill holes along the slope line.
at BS-Heavy compaction
Cemented materials for base course or subbase: 1141 ROADBED

C2: material with a nominal unconfined The natural in situ material on which the fill, or in their
compression strength of minimum 2 MPa absence, any pavement layers, are to be constructed.
cemented by stabilisation with an approved
chemical stabiliser 1142 ROAD PRISM
C1: material with a nominal unconfined That portion of the road construction included between
compression strength of minimum 1 MPa the original ground level and the outer boundaries of the
cemented by stabilisation with an approved slopes of cuttings, fills and side drains. It shall not
chemical stabiliser include the selected layer, subbase, base course,
CM: material with a nominal unconfined surfacing, shoulders or roadbed.
compression strength of minimum 0.5 MPa
modified by stabilisation with an approved 1143 ROAD RESERVE OR RIGHT-OF-WAY
chemical stabiliser The entire area included by the boundaries of road as
proclaimed.
Bituminous mixes for base course:
DBM40: hot mixed material of bitumen and
1144 ROCK EXCAVATION
aggregate having a maximum particle
Classification of excavation for payment purposes.
size of 40 mm
Denotes excavation required from the road prism,
DBM30: hot mixed material of bitumen and
drains, etc. according to the Drawings and the
aggregate having a maximum particle
Specifications, that requires drilling and blasting or the
size of 30 mm
use of pneumatic or hydraulic jackhammers in order to
LAMBS: hot mixed material of bitumen and
be loosened sufficiently for loading and transportation.
aggregate have large particle size as
prescribed in the Specifications
BEMIX: cold mixed material of bitumen emulsion 1145 ROLLER PASSES
and aggregate Unless otherwise specified in the Specifications, an
FBMIX: cold mixed material of foamed bitumen area will be taken to have received one roller pass
and aggregate when a roller has passed over such area once.
Additional passes made only as a result of nominal
Penetration macadam for base course: overlapping so as to ensure full coverage shall not be
PM80: penetration macadam where the main taken into account.
fraction of the aggregate has largest
particle size of a 80 mm 1146 SERVICES
PM60: penetration macadam where the main Cables, pipes or other structures, such as conduits for
fraction of the aggregate has largest electricity, telephone and telegraph connections, water,
particle size of a 60 mm sewage, etc.
PM30: penetration macadam where the main
fraction of the aggregate has largest 1147 SHOULDER
particle size of a 30 mm (a) When referring to this as a surface: The area
between the outside edge of the travelled way and
Bituminous surfacing: the shoulder break point.
AC20: hot mixed asphalt concrete material of (b) When referring to this as a pavement layer: The
bitumen and aggregate having a maximum upper pavement layer lying between the outside
particle size of 20 mm edge of the base course and the shoulder
AC14: hot mixed asphalt concrete material of breakpoint.
bitumen and aggregate having a maximum 1148 SHOULDER BREAKPOINT
particle size of 14 mm
The line along which the extended flat planes of the
AC10: hot mixed asphalt concrete material of
surface of the shoulder and the outside slope of the fill
bitumen and aggregate having a maximum
and pavement intersect.
particle size of 10 mm
Surface dressing: bituminous seal made with
approved chipping of near similar particle 1149 SIDE DRAIN
size, placed in a single layer or in two An open longitudinal drain situated adjacent to and at
layers as specified the bottom of cut or fill slopes.
Otta Seal: bituminous seal made with
approved graded aggregate, placed in a 1150 SIDEFILL
single layer or in two layers as specified That portion of the imported material which lies outside
the compacted fills, shoulders, base course and
subbase and is contained within such surface slopes as

shown on the Drawings as side fill or as directed by the 1165 WORKING DRAWINGS
Engineer. Shop drawings, steel bending schedules, stress sheets,
fabrication and erection drawings, falsework drawings,
1151 SLOPE and any other supplementary drawings or data which
Unless otherwise stated, slope is given in terms of the the Contractor is required to submit to the Engineer for
ratio of the vertical difference in elevation between any approval before such Works commence.
two points and the horizontal distance between them.
This ratio may also be expressed as a percentage. 1166 QUARRY
Area other than cuts within the road prism where rock is
1152 SPECIFICATIONS extracted for production of crushed aggregate and
The Specifications relating to a specific project, which which is used in the construction of the Works.
form part of the Contract documents for such project,
and which contain the Standard Specifications together
with supplementary and/or amending specifications
issued in the Special Specifications.
1153 SPOIL (MATERIAL)

Material originating from construction operations and
which is not utilised for construction purposes.
1154 STABILISATION
The treatment of the materials used in the construction
of the roadbed, earthworks or pavement layers by the
addition of a cementitious binder such as lime or
Portland cement. Asphalt mixes and concrete shall not
be considered as materials that have been stabilised.
1155 SUBBASE
The layer of material on top of the improved subgrade
layers or fill and below the base course and shoulders.
1156 SUBGRADE, IMPROVED

The layer of material on top of the roadbed, or fill, and
below the subbase.
1157 SUBSIDIARY WORKS

Works which are subsidiary to or necessary or essential
to, or in support of, or usual to, the execution and
completion of other Works.
1158 SUBSTRUCTURE
All of that part of the structure below the bearings of
simple and continuous span bridges, below skewbacks
of arches, below deck slab of box and slab culverts,
together with return walls and wingwalls.
1159 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM

A system of subsoil drainage pipes (including any
permeable material) constructed to intercept and
remove subsoil water.
1160 SUITABLE MATERIAL

Materials that comply with the requirements of these
Specifications in respect of the relevant layer or position
where the material is intended to be used.
1161 TOPSOIL
Organic or unsuitable materials in the upper strata
encountered after clearing of the vegetation.
1162 TRAVELLED WAY

That portion of the carriageway, which includes the
various traffic lanes and auxiliary lanes but excludes the
shoulders.
1163 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL

Materials that do not comply with all the requirements of
these Specifications in respect of the relevant layer or
position where the material is intended to be used.
1164 VERGE
The area between the outer edge of the road prism and
the boundary of the road reserve.

SERIES 1000: GENERAL 1201 SCOPE

(a) General
SECTION 1200: GENERAL This Section covers matters which relate to the Contract
as a whole. Definitions, phrases or wording which would
REQUIREMENTS AND otherwise require repetition in other sections of the
PROVISIONS Specifications are also covered by clauses in this
Section. Matters covered by the Conditions of Contract
are not repeated in this Section, except where
CONTENTS: necessary for providing more detailed information.
CLAUSE PAGE
(b) Modifications of and amendments to the
1201 SCOPE 1000-6 Standard Specifications
1202 SERVICES 1000-6 The Standard Specifications are to be read together
1203 ROAD INTERSECTIONS AND JUNCTIONS 1000-7 with modifications, additions or amendments which are
1204 PROGRAMME OF W ORKS AND written in the Special Specifications.
TEMPORARY W ORKS 1000-7
1205 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL 1000-8 (c) Precedence of Specifications
1206 THE SETTING OUT OF WORK AND In any case where there appears to be any conflict
PROTECTION OF BEACONS 1000-8 between the Standard Specifications and the Special
1207 NOTICES, SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS 1000-9 Specifications, the Special Specifications shall govern.
1208 METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS 1000-10
1209 METHODS OF PAYMENT 1000-10
1210 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF THE 1202 SERVICES
WORKS 1000-11
1211 TRAFFIC OVER COMPLETED PAVEMENT (a) Location of Services
LAYERS 1000-11
The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the position
1212 ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS AND OFFERS 1000-11 of all existing services, such as drains, underground
1213 VARIATION FROM SPECIFIED NOMINAL and overhead telephone and electricity lines, ducts,
RATES OF APPLICATION OR NOMINAL
poles, water mains, fittings, railway lines, etc. before
MIX PROPORTIONS 1000-12 any excavation or other work likely to affect the existing
1214 CONTRACTOR’S ACTIVITIES IN RESPECT services is commenced.
OF PROPERTY OUTSIDE THE ROAD
RESERVE AND OF SERVICES MOVED, The Employer will, in the Contract documents, provide
DAMAGED OR ALTERED 1000-13 information regarding the location of existing utility
1215 LAND ACQUISITION 1000-14
services, but the Employer does not accept
1216 INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE responsibility for the accuracy of this information.
EMPLOYER 1000-14
1217 PROTECTION OF THE W ORKS AND
The Contractor shall check and determine on the site
REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE the position of any services shown on the Drawings.
CONSTRUCTION OF W ORK 1000-14 This shall be done by consultation with owners of
1218 FAULTY W ORK, REMEDIAL WORK 1000-15
services, visual inspections, using detecting apparatus
1219 WATER 1000-15 and by making excavations as required to expose the
1220 AUTHORISED MEASUREMENTS AND position of the service. This shall also be done where
TOLERANCES 1000-16
no services are nevertheless believed to be present.
1221 DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE The positions of all services so detected shall be
CONTRACTOR 1000-16 marked carefully and then drawn in on the Drawings.
1222 USE OF EXPLOSIVES 1000-16
These services will then be defined as known services.
1223 WORK ON, OVER, UNDER OR
ADJACENT TO RAILWAY LINES 1000-17 (b) Damage to Services
1224 THE HANDING-OVER OF THE SITE 1000-17
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions not
1225 HAUL ROADS 1000-17 to damage the services during the search, when the
1226 MEASUREMENT OF DEPTH OF onus shall rest with him to prove that, in the event of
TRENCHES AND FOUNDATION
damage being done to such services during the search,
EXCAVATIONS 1000-17 it was not his fault that they had been damaged. The
1227 ACCESS TO CONTRACTOR’S RECORDS, Contractor will be held responsible for any damage
MONTHLY SITE MEETINGS AND
caused by him to known services, unless he can prove
PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS 1000-17 that he has taken all the above precautions to the
1228 LEGAL PROVISIONS 1000-18 satisfaction of the Engineer
1229 FINAL CLEARANCE 1000-18
1230 RECORDING OF INFORMATION The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to
RELATING TO CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL protect existing services during construction and during
COMPENSATION OR EXTENSION OF
the relocation of such services. Where protective
TIME 1000-18 measures involve the construction of permanent work,
1231 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY 1000-18 the Contractor shall execute the work in accordance
1232 POSITION OF WORKS 1000-18
with the Engineer’s instructions, and payment shall be
1233 ACCESS TO SITE 1000-18 made as provided for in the Special Specifications.
1234 COOPERATION AT SITE 1000-18
1235 ROADS AND SITE TO BE KEPT CLEAN 1000-18
All pipes, cables, conduits or other known services of
1236 SECURITY OF THE W ORKS 1000-18 any nature whatsoever damaged as a result of the
1237 SAFETY 1000-18 Contractor’s operations shall be repaired and reinstated
1238 METHOD OF W ORKING 1200-19
forthwith by the Contractor or by the Authority
1239 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1200-19 concerned, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all at the
expense of the Contractor.

(c) Safety by overhead power lines (g) Payment

Where work is to be carried out in the vicinity of Any work required to be undertaken by the Contractor
overhead power lines, the Contractor shall ensure that in protecting or moving and relocation of public services
all persons working in such areas are aware of the for which no provision is made in the Contract
relatively large distance that high voltage electricity can Documents, will be classified and paid for at Daywork
“short” to earth when cranes, or other large masses of Rates, or if no applicable Daywork Rates exist, the
steel, are in the vicinity of power lines. The Contractor Contractor shall submit a quotation for the Engineer’s
shall be required to work outside the clearances stated approval.
in BS 162 which gives safe clearance for the various
voltages. 1203 ROAD INTERSECTIONS AND JUNCTIONS
Except where otherwise specified, no additional
(d) Relocation of Services payment over and above payment for the various items
It shall be clearly understood that, in certain instances, of work included in this Contract will be made for the
existing services can be relocated only after the construction, in a confined space, of curves, tapers, bell
Contractor has advanced sufficiently on or has mouths, traffic islands, farm accesses and other
completed certain sections of earthworks or certain appurtenant Works in connection with the construction
structures. Whenever services are encountered which and maintenance of road intersections and junctions.
interfere with the execution of the Works and which
require to be moved and relocated, the Contractor shall The Contractor shall be required to provide the safe and
advise the Engineer, who will determine the extent of unrestricted flow of public traffic at all times during the
work, if any, to be undertaken by the Contractor in construction and maintenance of such intersections and
moving, relocating and reinstating or protecting such junctions.
services.
The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the 1204 PROGRAMME OF WORKS AND
removal or alteration of such services in conjunction
with and to specifications of the relevant statutory TEMPORARY WORKS
authority subject to the prior agreement of the Engineer
and where necessitated by the Works. (a) Programme of works
In accordance with relevant clauses of the Conditions of
A Provisional Sum for this work has been included in Contract and prior to commencement of permanent
the Bill of Quantities. Subject to prior agreement of the works, the Contractor shall submit a fully detailed and
Engineer, and upon production of receipts, the time related programme showing the order of procedure
Contractor will be reimbursed the net cost of such work and method in which the Contractor propose to carry
plus the percentage inserted by the Contractor in the out the Works. The programme shall be so detailed as
Bill of Quantities for his overheads and costs, in making to show:
the arrangement, for co-ordinating the work and − The order of work.
effecting payment. − Planned rate of progress.
− Amount and type of equipment proposed.
(e) Negotiations with owners of services − Details of methods to be employed.
The Contractor shall work in close co-operation with − Details of Temporary Works.
private Owners or public authorities controlling services,
which have to be protected, moved or relocated. The programme shall not be in form of a bar chart only,
Details regarding the state of negotiations concluded but shall show clearly the anticipated quantities of work
between the Employer and the Owner at the time of to be performed each month, as well as the anticipated
bidding in respect of the time when either the Owner is earnings for the various sections of work. Further it shall
prepared to start moving such services or when the show the critical path of activities.
Contractor is required to or will be allowed to start
moving the services, and the duration of such The Works shall be carried out so as to achieve a
operations, will either be stated in the bid documents or continuous and consecutive output of fully completed
be made available to bidders. Further such road. The order of execution of the Works shall be
consultations and negotiations with private owners or subject to reasonable adjustment as requested by the
public authorities shall be carried out as required by the Engineer.
Contractor. Should the Owners of services refuse to
co-operate with the Contractor in a reasonable manner Should the Contractor fall behind with the programme
in connection with the protection or moving of services submitted by him in terms of the relevant clause of the
belonging to them, the Contractor shall refer the matter Conditions of Contract, which programme has been
to the Engineer. approved by the Engineer, or if the sequence of
operations is altered, or if the programme is deviated
(f) Programming relocation of services from in any other way, the Engineer may, without
When the Contractor details his program of work as prejudice to the Employer’s rights in terms of the
referred to in the relevant clause of the Conditions of relevant clause of the Conditions of Contract, require
Contract, he shall, in consultation with the Engineer, the Contractor to submit, within seven days of the date
clearly indicate as to when he proposes to start with on which he has received a notice to this effect, a
and conclude the moving of each service or when he revised programme in terms of this Clause, which
will require the Owner to start with and conclude the indicates the manner in which the Contractor
moving of each service. Should it there after, through undertakes to complete the Works within the required
delays on the part the Employer or the Owner of the time. Any proposal in the revised programme to
service to be moved, be impossible to adhere to the accelerate the rate of progress shall be accompanied
programme of work, such programme shall be suitably by positive steps to increase production by more and/or
amended by the Contractor in consultation with the better labour and equipment being provided on the site
Engineer so as to limit, in so far as is possible, the or by the available labour and equipment being utilised
extent of any damages or delays. Should it be more effectively.
impossible to limit entirely the damages or delays
resulting from the amendments necessary to the Failure on the part of Contractor to work according to
programme of work, the Contractor shall be reimbursed the programme or revised programmes, shall be
for any additional costs incurred or damages suffered sufficient reason for the Employer to take steps as
by him. provided for in the Conditions of Contract and shall be

construed, as not executing the Works in accordance adequate proof of compliance with the specified
with the Contract. requirements.
The approval by the Engineer of any programme shall No specific pay items are provided as compensation for
have no contractual significance other than that the the above obligations, including the provision of all
Engineer would be satisfied if the work is carried out in samples delivered to the Engineer, the repair of places
accordance with such programme and that the from which samples were taken, and the provision of
Contractor undertakes to carry out the work in the necessary personnel and testing apparatus and
accordance with the programme. facilities, for which compensation shall be included in
the bid rates of the Contractor for the various items of
(b) Temporary works work to which these obligations apply.
The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with drawings
for approval showing the layout and general The Contractor’s attention is also drawn to the
arrangement of all Temporary Works he proposes to provisions of SERIES 7200 in regard to instituting
construct for the purpose of the Contract including, but specific process-control systems. The Contractor's
not limited to: attention is also drawn to the provisions of the various
sections of the Specifications regarding the minimum
− Camps, including accommodation for staff and frequency of testing that will be required to undertake
labour. process control. The Contractor shall at his own
− Offices discretion increase this frequency where necessary to
− Laboratory ensure adequate control.
− Workshops
− Stores The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
− Aggregate crushing plants examination, the results of all relevant tests,
− Bitumen storage facilities, etc. measurements and levels indicating compliance with
the Specifications on completion of every part of the
− Concrete manufacturing plants
Work.
− Precast concrete yards
− Temporary river crossings
− Temporary bypass and access roads.
1206 THE SETTING OUT OF WORK AND
PROTECTION OF BEACONS
No separate payment will be made for Temporary The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements
Works, the relevant cost being included in the rates of of the relevant clause of the Conditions of Contract, and
the Bill of Quantities for other work. he shall also comply with all legal provisions in regard
to surveying and setting out work.
1205 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and
CONTROL accurate setting out of the works as required in the
The onus rests with the Contractor to produce work Contract documents. The Contractor shall provide all
which conforms in quality and accuracy of detail to all survey and measuring equipment and instruments
the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings, necessary for his use in the execution of the scheduled
and the Contractor shall, at his own expense, institute a Works.
quality control system and provide experienced
engineers, foremen, surveyors, materials technicians, The Contractor shall allow in his bid rates for being
other technicians and other technical staff, together with unable to use up to 30% of the Engineer’s control points
all transport, instruments and equipment, to ensure where such are provided in the Contract, through loss
adequate supervision and positive control of the Works or damage occasioned prior to the commencement
at all times. The Contractor shall provide chainmen and date. When the Contractor requires the establishment
labourers as necessary for the Engineer to carry out of a new control point or points due to the above
checks on the Works. mentioned loss or damage he shall advise the Engineer
who will, if he deems it necessary, arrange for the
The Contractor shall conduct tests or have them establishment of a new control point or points.
conducted continually on a regular basis, to check the
properties of natural materials and processed natural Control points not affected by the works shall be
materials and of products manufactured on the site, protected and preserved by the Contractor. In the case
such as concrete and asphalt. Although not a of negligence on the part of the Contractor, or his
requirement for the Contractor to conduct regular tests employees, resulting in the destruction of control points,
on any commercially produced products such as an amount equal to the cost of replacing the same may
cement, bitumen, steel and pipes, the Contractor shall be deducted from subsequent payments due the
remain fully responsible for any defective material or Contractor.
equipment provided by him. Similarly, the quality of all
elements of the Works shall be checked on a regular Control points affected by the works shall be offset by
basis so as to ensure compliance with the specified the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
requirements.
The Contractor shall, prior to any setting out, submit to
The intensity of control and of tests to be conducted by the Engineer for his approval, the method of setting out
the Contractor in terms of these obligations is not he proposes to employ. The plan shall include the
specified but shall be adequate to ensure that proper accuracy, positions of the various types of stakes,
control is being exercised. method of marking stakes, and methods to be used for
protecting stakes, etc. No survey work shall proceed
Where any natural materials or products made from prior to the Engineer's approval of the Contractor's plan.
natural materials are supplied, and upon completion of At least 24 hours before he intends to survey any
each element of the construction work, the Contractor portion of the Works, the Contractor shall give written
shall test and check such materials, products and/or notice to the Engineer. Such notice shall include time,
elements for compliance with the specified location and type of Works to be set out. The Contractor
requirements and shall submit his results to the shall set out the Works and obtain approval of his
Engineer for approval. Such submission shall include setting out before proceeding with construction.
all his measurements and test results and shall furnish

In general, the Contractor shall check for the existence trigonometrical survey beacons, all as shown on the
of original marks, lines and levels of reference not less Drawings.
than one month prior to commencing works in any
section, to allow sufficient time for reinstatement of Accurate control of line and level shall be provided by
markings, and checking of lines and levels. Any the Contractor at all stages of construction as detailed
discrepancies encountered shall be immediately in SECTION 7300 of these Specifications.
reported to the Engineer, for instruction and co-
ordination. The Contractor shall be deemed to have Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
allowed in his bid price for checking and reinstatement provide to the Engineer camber boards to the profile of
of original markings. the normal camber, 3.0 m long straight edges and
measuring wedges.
Special care shall be exercised during construction not
to damage, displace or disturb property and The camber boards shall be constructed of stout timber,
trigonometrical survey beacons. If such beacons are angle iron or metal tubes so as to span 6.5 m without
disturbed or destroyed by the Contractor they shall be deflection, and preferably supported on trollies and
replaced without delay by a registered land surveyor at fitted with a device for raising and lowering the board.
the Contractor's expense. In cases where displacement The bottom of a timber board shall be shoed with steel
of or damage to such beacons is unavoidable the plate, the width of the timber, and at least 5 mm thick.
Contractor shall also be responsible for relocation or The construction of the boards shall be to the
suitably referencing later reinstatement of such beacon satisfaction of the Engineer.
at his own cost.
The 3.0 m long straight edges and measuring wedges
The Engineer may if he deems it necessary, revise the shall be made of durable strong materials such that
line and grade and will require the Contractor to adjust they are inflexible and will not warp and do not suffer
the stake-out accordingly. from abrasion.
The Contractor shall check the condition of all reference The setting-out of work will not be measured and paid
and level beacons and shall satisfy himself that they for separately, and compensation for the work involved
have not been displaced and are true in regard to will be deemed to be covered by the rates bid and paid
position and level. If beacons have been destroyed, for in the various items of work included in this Contract.
displaced or damaged before the site is handed over to No separate payment will be made to the Contractor for
the Contractor, the Engineer will arrange to have new the provision of camber boards, straight edges and
beacons installed. A beacon, which has been displaced, measuring wedges, their cost being included by the
shall not be used unless its true position and level have Contractor in his rates in the Bill of Quantities.
been re-established and the new values verified by the
Engineer. No separate payment will be made for stake-out,
adjustments to the stake-out, or to establish and
Where a beacon is likely to be displaced during compute new points/benchmarks the relevant costs
construction operations, the Contractor shall establish being deemed to be included in the bid rates for other
suitable reference beacons at locations where they will items in the Bill of Quantities.
not be displaced during construction. No beacon shall
be covered over, displaced or destroyed before 1207 NOTICES, SIGNS AND
accurate reference beacons have been established and ADVERTISEMENTS
details of the positions and levels of such beacons have
The Contractor and subcontractors shall not erect any
been submitted to and approved by the Engineer. The
signs, notices or advertisements on or along the Works
Contractor’s reference beacons shall be of at least the
or the site of the works without the approval of the
same quality and durability as the existing beacons.
Engineer or according to format given by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the method
No sign boards other than those specified above will be
of setting-out he proposes to employ. To ensure
permitted on or adjacent to the Works, except that the
beyond all doubt that the complex elements of the road,
Contractor may permit each of his sub-contractors to
such as traffic interchanges, structures and other 2
display one, and only one, signboard of less than 2 m at
important features are located truly and correctly, the
the works office.
Contractor shall check all setting-out by a second
method. The Engineer may at any time request the
At each end of the Works the Contractor shall provide
Contractor to submit proof that his setting-out has been
and erect, as part of his obligations under SECTION
satisfactorily checked.
1300, and on approved locations, at the starting and
ending points of the Works, sign boards of sound,
In cases where the displacement of or damage to
weather proof construction, painted by an approved firm
property beacons or trigonometrical survey beacons is
of sign writers in accordance with the details shown on
unavoidable, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
the Drawings.
good time so that he may arrange to have such
beacons suitably referenced and later on reinstated.
These signs are to be erected not later than one month
The cost of such work, if paid for by the Contractor,
after the Contractor has been given access to the site.
shall be reimbursable as extra work, as provided for in
the Conditions of Contract.
The Engineer shall have the right to have any sign,
notice or advertisement moved to a better position or to
For the purposes of this Clause and of the relevant
have it removed from the site of the Works if it should in
clause of the Conditions of Contract, any beacon made
any way prove unsatisfactory, inconvenient or
from a metal peg cast in concrete and any boundary
dangerous to the general public.
beacon, whether or not cast in concrete, shall be
regarded as a beacon. Centre-line pegs shall not be
All advertisements, notices and signs shall be removed
classified as beacons.
by the Contractor upon issuance of the final certificate
of completion.
To protect beacons, the boundary fences of the road
reserve shall be splayed at corners so as to avoid the
use of corner posts in the same position as property or

1208 METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS The Contractor shall note that the cost of all Works and
materials for minor construction details at bridges, for
(a) Units of measurements example small quantities of caulking compound and
All work shall be measured in accordance with the SI joint filler (other than expansion joints), anchor-bar
system of metric units. covers, etc, not shown in the Bill of Quantities, shall be
included in the bid rates for concrete.
(b) Bill of Quantities
The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are This CLAUSE shall apply in full to all pay items except
estimated quantities and are used for the comparison of where these requirements may be specifically amended
bids and for awarding the Contract. It must be clearly in each case.
understood that only the actual quantities of work done
or materials supplied will be measured for payment, and
that the scheduled quantities may be increased or (c) The Meaning of certain phrases in payment
decreased as provided for in the Conditions of Contract. clauses
(c) Measurement of completed Work (i) Procuring and furnishing (material).

All distances along the centre line of the road as shown Where any of the words “supply”, “procure”,
on the Drawings are horizontal distances, which will be “provide”, “provision of”, “furnish (material)”, are
used in calculating the quantities of fill and pavement used in the description of a pay item, it shall mean
layers for purposes of payment. All cross-sections shall the supply and delivery to the point of use of all
be taken in a vertical plane. materials of any kind required for the work covered
by the particular pay item, including all tax,
No material shall be measured in the vehicle for purchase costs, claims, damages, royalties and
payment purposes. transport costs involved, but excluding overhaul. In
the case of borrow materials, stone and sand, it
The quantity of bituminous and similar materials to be shall also include all negotiations with the Owners
paid by volume shall be measured at the temperature of concerned, excavating, producing, preparing,
application and paid for in accordance with approved processing, testing, hauling and delivering the
application rates. material to the point of use; the construction, repair,
maintenance and making good after completion of
The quantity of bitumen in mixes and stabilisers in all access roads, and all work required in opening,
cemented materials shall be paid by mass in using and finishing off borrow pits unless covered
accordance with approved mix design proportions. by other pay items in the Bill of Quantities.
Structures shall be measured to the neat lines shown (ii) Placing Material
on the Drawing and shall include any changes ordered The phrase “placing material” shall mean the off-
in writing by the engineer and, for purposes of payment, loading, spreading, blending, processing, watering,
the calculated volume of concrete structures shall mixing, shaping and compacting (where specified)
include the volume of reinforcing steel, and minor ducts of the material in the pavement layer, fills and
up to 150 mm in diameter. bypasses, as well as the procuring, furnishing,
applying and admixing of water, the breaking-down
of oversize material, the removing of oversize
1209 METHODS OF PAYMENT material which cannot be broken down, correcting
irregular or uneven surfaces or layers, the thickness
of which is not to specification, finishing-off to
(a) Contract rates
within the specified tolerances, the refilling of test
In computing the final Contract amount, payment shall
holes and maintaining the completed work. In the
be based on the actual quantity of authorised work
case of asphalt course and bituminous seals, it
done in accordance with the specifications and
shall also mean the heating and spraying of binder,
drawings. The bid rates shall apply, subject to the
the spreading of aggregate or asphalt mixtures,
provisions of the Conditions of Contract, irrespective of
rolling, compacting, finishing-off to within the
whether the actual quantities are more or less than the
specified tolerances, and maintaining the completed
scheduled quantities.
work.
Where no rate or price has been entered against a pay
The phrase, “procuring, furnishing and placing”
item in the Bill of Quantities by a bidder it shall be
shall mean procuring and furnishing in addition to
understood that he does not require any compensation
placing, all as defined herein.
for such work. Where, however, a pay item described
in these Specifications or in the Special Specifications
(d) Pay Items
does not appear in the Bill of Quantities, the Contractor
The description under the pay items in the various
will receive reasonable compensation for such work if
sections of the Specifications, indicating the work for
required, unless anything to the contrary has been
which allowance shall be made in the bid rates for such
determined elsewhere.
pay items, are for the guidance of the Contractor and
do not necessarily repeat all the details of work and
(b) Rates to be inclusive
materials required by and described in the
The Contractor shall accept the payment provided for in
Specifications.
the Contract and represented by the rates bid by him in
the Bill of Quantities, as payment in full for executing
These descriptions shall be read in conjunction with the
and completing the work as specified, for procuring,
relevant Specifications and Drawings, and the
furnishing, placing and installing all materials, for
Contractor shall, when bidding, bear in mind that his
procuring and providing labour, supervision,
rates shall be inclusive as specified in SUBCLAUSE (b)
constructional plant, tools and equipment, for wastage,
above.
transport, loading and off-loading, handling,
maintenance, temporary work, testing, quality control
(e) Materials on the Site
including process control, overheads, profit, risk and
Payment in terms of the relevant clause of the
other obligations and for all other incidentals necessary
Conditions of Contract for materials on the site, which
for the completion of the work and maintenance during
have not yet been incorporated in the works, will be
the period of maintenance.
calculated at 80% of their purchase price, or, in the

case of crushed stone which has not been purchased 1211 TRAFFIC OVER COMPLETED PAVEMENT
but has been produced on the site, at 50% of the bid LAYERS
rate for such material.
Traffic over structures or pavement layers of an
uncompleted road shall, in addition to other restrictions
The Engineer may at his sole discretion allow payment
specified elsewhere, be restricted to equipment
under “materials on the site” in respect of articles such
required for its construction, with the provision that
as precast beams manufactured and stored off site,
traffic for hauling material over pavement layers, in so
subject to their having been completed, to proof of their
far as is possible, shall be limited to a minimum by the
ownership as being that of the Contractor, and to the
use of construction roads and deviations.
articles being clearly marked with the Contractor’s
name, the Contract number and other particulars in
Traffic over all public roads, structures or the completed
accordance with the Engineer’s instructions.
road will be restricted to the maximum axle load
permitted in terms of statutory provisions. Any damage
(f) Rate-only items
caused by the Contractor’s traffic shall be repaired at
Against an item in the Bill of Quantities where no
his own cost.
quantity is given but a rate only is required, the
Contractor shall fill in a rate or amount which will
constitute payment for work which may be done in 1212 ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS AND OFFERS
terms of this item. Such rate only item is used where it Unless anything to the contrary has been determined
is estimated that little or no work will be required under elsewhere in the Contract documents, a bidder may,
the item, or where the item is to be considered as an together with his bid for the original designs contained
alternative for another item where a quantity is given, in the Contract documents, submit alternative designs
or for variations in rates of application or mix and offers for consideration. Such alternative designs
proportions in terms of CLAUSE 1213. and offers shall be subject to the following conditions
and requirements.
Work under rate-only items will be paid for only if it has
been executed in terms of a written instruction by the (a) Bids
Engineer. An alternative offer or design will be considered only if
the bid for the original items has been fully priced and
(g) Provisional Sums completed.
The Bill of Quantities may contain Provisional Sums, so
designated, which are entered as a preliminary Unless the alternative offer stipulates to the contrary, it
allowance to cover the cost of work, materials, goods or shall be assumed that the period for completion of the
services to be provided by the Contractor and which Works shall be the same as for the original design.
have not been fully specified or measured or to cover
the cost of unforeseen items of work or contingent An alternative offer or design shall be submitted
expenditure, for which no rates are applicable but for together with the bid for the original items or design,
which the Contractor is to be paid according to the otherwise it will not be considered when bids are
applicable provisions of the Contract. adjudicated.
Work done under such Provisional Sums shall only be Calculations, drawings and a modified Bill of Quantities
executed upon a written order by the Engineer which (as determined hereafter) in respect of each alternative
order shall also specify the method of payment. The offer or design shall accompany the alternative bid
expenditure in respect of a Provisional Sum for work offer.
ordered by the Engineer shall be entirely at his
discretion and any final expenditure in respect of a (b) Design codes
Provisional Sum may be more, less or equal to the Alternative designs shall be executed strictly in
amount provided in the Bill of Quantities. accordance with the appropriate design codes and
prescriptions of the Employer. Copies of such codes
Payment as specified in the order given by the Engineer and prescriptions will be available for perusal at the
shall be either at contract rates, where such are office of the Engineer, but the onus rests with the
applicable, or where none is applicable, the Contractor Contractor to ensure that he complies with the design
shall submit a separate quotation to the Engineer. requirements of the Employer.
(h) Retention money (c) Preliminary calculations

All payments are subject to deduction of Retention Preliminary calculations for an alternative design shall
Money, as provided in the Conditions of Contract. be submitted with the bid. Such calculations shall give
adequate details so as to enable an assessment to be
1210 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF THE made of the general efficacy of the design and of its
principal elements, also of the degree to which the
WORK design prescriptions and codes of the Employer are
A certificate of completion of the Works (Taking Over being complied with. The calculations shall be clear
Certificate) in terms of the relevant clause of the and in a logical sequence and shall clearly reflect all the
Conditions of Contract will be issued only if the design assumptions.
following sections of the Works as may be applicable
have, inter alia, been duly completed. (d) Preliminary drawings
− the gravel wearing course, seals, asphalt or Preliminary drawings of the alternative designs shall
concrete pavement. also be submitted with the bid. These drawings shall
− all above-ground and subsoil drainage structure comprise adequate layout plans, elevations and
− all fencing. sections and shall clearly illustrate the general efficacy
− the finishing-off of medians and slopes of cuts and of the design and its principal elements. Foundation
fills depths and other elements depending on foundation
− all the necessary road signs and road-surface conditions shall, in so far as may be applicable, be in
markings. accordance with foundation particulars appearing in the
− all guard-rails Contract document.
− all structures.
Drawings for alternative designs shall be prepared in
accordance with the provisions of CLAUSE 1221.

(e) Quantities No work which will be affected by an alternative design

Each alternative offer shall be accompanied by a may be commenced, unless the Drawings, Bill of
modified priced Bill of Quantities compiled in Quantities and prices for such alternative design have
accordance with the Standard Specifications, in so far been approved. Should the Contractor fail to modify any
as it is applicable. In addition to the Bill of Quantities, a drawings, calculations, quantities, prices or any other
set of calculations shall be supplied to show how the particulars to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the
quantities have been determined. All assumptions in alternative design will be rejected and the original
regard to foundation conditions or other factors which design shall be constructed for the same amount as has
will determine quantities shall be clearly and been bid for the alternative design.
conspicuously marked by underlining or colouring, and
shall indicate whether or not the assumptions have (j) Responsibility for alternative design
been based on information furnished in the Contract The approval of a design by the Engineer shall in no
documents (with the necessary references). way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to
produce a design which conforms in all respects to all
(f) Further details the specified requirements and which will be suitable for
Should the Engineer find that the calculations and the purpose envisaged.
drawings submitted for alternative designs are not
complete enough for proper adjudication of the Should it appear later during construction or during the
alternative designs, it may mean that no further maintenance period that the design does not conform to
consideration will be given to such alternative designs. the specified requirements, the Contractor only shall be
The Employer, however, reserves the right to call on the liable for any damage arising therefrom and he shall, at
bidder to submit such further calculations and drawings his own expense, do all the necessary work to ensure
as may be required. If such further details are not that the structure conforms to all the specified
submitted within ten days of having been requested, the requirements.
alternative designs may possibly not be given further
consideration (k) Payments for alternative design
Payments for alternative designs will be based on the
(g) Preliminary adjudication of alternative designs finally approved Bill of Quantities and rates for such
The Engineer will undertake a preliminary scrutiny of designs. The lump sum for an alternative design will
any alternative designs for compliance with the remain fixed and will be the final amount payable to the
specified requirements of the Employer. Should he find Contractor in regard to such design, except only for
any mistakes or unsatisfactory aspects, he may afford deviations arising from:
in the Contractor the opportunity to rectify them within a − foundation conditions which differ from foundation
period to be determined by the Engineer. However, it is conditions shown in the contract documents, or in
emphasised that the preliminary scrutiny of the design regard to assumptions regarding foundation
and bid by the Engineer, by its very nature, cannot be conditions stated in his bid by the Contractor and
comprehensive, and no guarantee can be given in this accepted by the Engineer.
regard that all the mistakes made by the Contractor will − changes not arising from any failure or fault of the
in fact be detected. Any correction of such mistakes Contractor, but from modifications requested by the
shall be made with the bid price of the Contractor being Engineer.
retained, and, wherever necessary, the priced Bill of
Quantities for the alternative design shall be adjusted (l) Cost of checking alternative designs
accordingly. The Contractor shall, in his bid for each alternative
design, include an item to cover the cost for checking
(h) Acceptance of alternative design his design. This item shall be 5% of the bid amount of
The Contractor shall note that the acceptance of a bid the design without any price adjustment in terms of the
which includes alternative designs shall mean that the relevant clause of the Conditions of Contract being
alternative designs have been approved in principle considered, and the amount will be payable to the
only. If the final calculations, drawings and details do Engineer only upon an authorisation issued by the
not comply with the specified requirements, such Employer.
alternative designs may be rejected, unless they are
suitably amended by the Contractor so as to be (m) Alternative Offers
acceptable to the Engineer. Alternative offers in this context shall mean offers not
relating to a structure, such as a bridge, which requires
(i) Final drawings and calculations and the price. a comprehensive structural analysis. It involves, in the
Bill of Quantities main, offers for the use of other materials, construction
Where a bid with an alternative design has been programmes, alternative routes, etc. In this case the
accepted, the Contractor shall, not less than three provisions of CLAUSE 1212 will still apply, except in the
months before he intends starting with the construction case where the Employer may agree to amend or
of such design, submit to the Engineer a complete set delete certain of the provisions, depending on the
of working drawings, detailed calculations and a nature of the offer, but subject to a written agreement
complete Bill of Quantities, for approval. The Bill of beforehand with the Employer.
Quantities shall be based on the preliminary Bill of
Quantities, but with the necessary adjustments in 1213 VARIATION FROM SPECIFIED NOMINAL
quantities and prices and with the bid price for the
alternative design being retained.
RATES OF APPLICATION OR NOMINAL
MIX PROPORTIONS
Within six weeks of having received the above, the The various sections of these specifications specify
Engineer will indicate which drawings, calculations, nominal rates of application or nominal mix proportions
quantities, prices and other particulars are acceptable for materials such as bituminous materials, aggregates,
to him and which not, with reasons furnished. The fillers, stabilising agents, paint and the like. Bidders
Contractor shall then submit to the Engineer in good shall base their bids on these nominal rates of
time any modified drawings and other particulars for application and mix proportions.
approval, for which he will require two weeks. Any delay
arising from the fact that the amended particulars do not Where such nominal rates of application or mix
meet the requirements shall be the responsibility of the proportions are specified, provision is made for
Contractor. deviations in the quantities of material in consequence
of the rates of application or mix proportions prescribed

by the Engineer in each particular case in consideration (iii) The reinstatement of property occupied, used,
of the available materials and the conditions on the site. damaged or destroyed, or compensation therefor in
lieu of reinstatement.
Where the actual rates of application or mix proportions
used in the works vary from the specified nominal rates (iv) The procedure for the moving of services and
and mix proportions, adjustment of compensation will details as to how and when this is to be done.
be made:
(v) Any similar matter directly related to the
− as a payment to the Contractor in respect of any Contractor’s activities on or in respect of private
authorised increase in quantities which exceed property or services.
those specified, where such increase has been
ordered, in writing, by the Engineer These agreements shall be signed by all the parties
or concerned and delivered to the Engineer.
− as a refund to the Employer in respect of the
decrease in quantities which are less than those Where the Contractor cannot obtain the Owner’s
specified, irrespective of whether such decrease agreement in writing, he shall refer the matter to the
results from an authorised decrease in the rates of Engineer and shall furnish him with details, in writing, of
application or mix proportions, or from unauthorised any verbal agreement made.
reduction on the part of the Contractor.
(c) Notice on owner
Payment for a prescribed rate of application or mix Where, in addition to any agreement with the Owner of
proportion shall be based on the actual rate of any property to be entered upon or temporarily
application or mix proportion used, provided that this occupied or any service to be moved, it is understood or
does not exceed the prescribed rate of application or required that the Contractor shall serve notice on the
mix proportion, plus any tolerance in the rate of Owner immediately before actually entering upon or
application or mix proportion allowed. If the actual rate occupying the private property or moving a service,
of application or mix proportion is below the prescribed and shall give proper notice thereof in writing, and the
rate of application or mix proportion ordered, payment Engineer shall be supplied with a copy of such notice,
shall be based on the actual rate of application or mix together with acknowledgement of receipt.
proportion regardless of any tolerance allowed.
Notwithstanding the above, the Engineer shall be fully (d) Completion statement from owner
entitled to reject work which has not been constructed On completion of his operations, the Contractor shall
in accordance with the specifications or the rate of obtain, from the owner concerned, a written statement
application or mix proportions prescribed by him. to the effect.
The Employer shall be refunded for any decrease in the (i) that the Contractor has fulfilled his obligations under
specified rates of application or mix proportions at the a written agreement
same rate per unit of measurement as that bid by the
Contractor for additional materials required by an (ii) in the absence of a written agreement, that the
increase in the rates of application or mix proportions. Owner has received all the compensation he is
entitled to and is also satisfied that all property
occupied, including borrow pits, haul roads and
1214 CONTRACTOR’S ACTIVITIES IN construction roads, has been properly restored and
is in a satisfactory condition.
RESPECT OF PROPERTY OUTSIDE THE
ROAD RESERVE AND OF SERVICES All such statements shall be signed, dated and
MOVED, DAMAGED OR ALTERED delivered to the Engineer.
(a) Statutory provisions (e) Use of land outside provided area

The Contractor shall exercise any rights that may be Should the Contractor wish to use land outside the area
ceded to him by an Authority in terms of any statutory provided by the Employer for storing or keeping
provisions for purposes of executing the Contract, on material or equipment required for the construction of
condition that: the permanent works, it will be subject to the following:
(i) the Contractor complies strictly with the (i) That the Engineer approves any area selected for
requirements of such statutory provisions, this purpose.
particularly in regard to the matters relating to
serving notice on the Owner or consultation with (ii) That such land be physically separated from any
him. production plant or activities and suitably fenced in.
(ii) In each case a written agreement is made with the (iii) That the area used for the aforesaid purpose be
Engineer regarding the details of the Contractor’s surveyed, and, where the land does not belong to
proposed actions before the rights of the Contractor the Contractor, he shall enter into a contract of
in terms of the statutory provisions are exercised. lease with the Owner of such land in respect of the
full period for which such land shall be used for
(b) Agreements with Owners or Legal Users of such purpose,
property
The Contractor shall put in writing all his agreements (iv) Which contract shall stipulate that the Owner shall
with Owners of property outside the road reserve or of not have any right whatsoever to any material
services inside or outside the road reserve in respect of stockpiled on such land during the currency of the
the following matters: contract of lease. That suitable, permanent
reference beacons, approved by the Engineer, be
(i) The location, extent and use of borrow pits, haul placed next to the area, at the cost of the
roads, construction roads and bypasses outside the Contractor, for use by the Engineer with a view to, if
road reserve. applicable, taking cross-section for determining
quantities.
(ii) Compensation, if applicable, for land or materials
taken or for land temporarily used or occupied. (v) That only material use for this contract shall be

stored on such land. which conclusions can be drawn from any

investigations made. It also applies to any materials
(f) Fences, gates and signs (private) utilisation plan provided, as the diagram may be subject
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that to major alterations during the progress of the work,
livestock cannot stray as a result of his operations or depending on site conditions.
enter a construction area including borrow areas. When
existing fences and gates have to be removed or The Employer will not accept any liability for the
altered for the proper execution of the Works or are correctness or otherwise of the information furnished or
required to exclude livestock, the Contractor shall, at his for any resulting damage, whether direct or
own expense, erect temporary fencing and gates, and if consequential, should it appear, during the course of
necessary, provide watchmen to ensure that livestock the Contract, that the information supplied is either
cannot stray. New tension wires shall be used when re- incorrect or not representative.
erecting existing mesh fences. For permanently
relocated existing fences and new fences, each
horizontal wire shall be tensioned between braced 1217 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS AND
posts using a wire strainer. Each wire shall also be REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE
securely fixed to each post using wire ties through
drilled holes. CONSTRUCTION OF WORK
The permanent relocation of existing fences and private (a) Nature of ground and condition of work
signs and the construction of new permanent fences as The Contractor must satisfy himself as to the general
shown or as directed by the Engineer shall be paid for circumstances at the site of the Works and the
at the contract price per unit of measurement shown in construction thereon, the form of river beds, and banks,
the Bill of Quantities which price shall include for the flows in the rivers, the surface of the ground and
furnishing and placing all materials, including all labour, nature of the materials to be excavated, the possibility
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete of subsidence from soft ground and bad and broken
the work. materials, and falls of rock in or arising out of the
Works, and the possibility of floods and landslides, and
1215 LAND ACQUISITION the rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities will be held
to cover all such contingencies.
All land to be permanently used or occupied by the
Works will be provided by the Employer, but the
In order to minimise the possible adverse effects of
approval of the Engineer must be sought before entry
flooding the drainage of the natural ground in the
upon the land.
vicinity of the earthworks and the drainage works
generally shall be carried out in advance of the rest of
In all cases, the Contractor shall be required to make all
the Works.
necessary arrangements with local authorities and
owners or legal occupants of the land and to pay the
(b) Landslides
cost of compensation on behalf of the Employer. For
The removal of materials in slips, slides or subsidences
this purpose, the Contractor will liaise with the regional
and overbreaks of rock extending beyond the lines and
administration or the appropriate authority and advise of
slopes or below the levels shown on the Drawings or
the intention to commence work of any kind.
required by the Engineer will not be paid for unless
such occurrences were, in the opinion of the Engineer,
The Employer will refund to the Contractor such
beyond the control of the Contractor and could not have
payments, as provided in the Bill of Quantities, and all
been prevented by the exercise of due care and
lands so purchased shall be the property of the
diligence.
Employer.
Where payment is made for the removal of such
The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the
materials, it will be paid as a variation at the appropriate
provisions of CLAUSE 1214 as regards his activities on
rate inserted in the Bill of Quantities having regard to
private land and to SECTION 3400 for acquisition of land
the condition and situation of the material at the time of
for borrow pits, quarries and temporary works.
removal and regardless of its condition and situation
prior to the slip.
The Contractor shall observe all the legal provisions
and the provisions of the Special Specifications in
(c) Drainage
respect of his activities at borrow pits and when
The provision of temporary drainage work such as
finishing off the borrow pits.
drains, open channels, banks, etc and providing and
operating temporary pumps and such other equipment
The Contractor shall satisfy himself that all necessary
as may be necessary for adequately protecting,
negotiations have been made with the Owner or Legal
draining and de-watering the Works and temporary
Occupants of the ground prior to entry.
works. This will be in addition to any permanent
drainage works specified and installed, and in addition
1216 INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE to any temporary drainage works specifically paid for
EMPLOYER separately as in the case of deviations.
Certain information contained in these contract
documents or provided separately is being offered in (d) Damage by wet material
good faith, but, in the circumstances pertaining to the Material in borrow pits shall not be allowed to become
type of information furnished, no guarantee can be excessively wet. All completed layers shall be properly
given that all the information is necessarily correct or drained, dumps of material on completed layer work
representative of the in situ condition. shall not inhibit surface drainage or form wet spots
under and around dumps, and all parts of the Works
This applies more specifically to all soil tests, soil shall be protected against erosion by floods and rain.
mapping, drilling results, geophysical survey, geological
reports, borrow-pit information, material surveys and Material shall not be spread on a layer that is so wet as
reports, and similar information, the accuracy of which to result in the danger of any damage being caused to
is necessarily subject to the limitations of testing, the layer during compaction of a subsequent layer, or
sampling, the natural variation of material or formations when opened to traffic.
being investigated and the measure of certainty with

When material is spread out on the road, the Contractor In particular, remedial measures shall ensure full
shall ensure that, during wet periods, it will have a good compliance with the requirements of the Specifications
cross-fall and a light compaction on the surface in order of the final product, shall not endanger or damage any
to facilitate run-off during rainy weather. other part of the Works, and shall be carefully controlled
and submitted to the Engineer for examination when
(e) Fill and cut slopes completed or at any intermediate stage as may be
Fill and cut slopes shall be repaired immediately required.
whenever damaged by surface water. Where erosion
occurs on high fills, the slopes shall be repaired by For the guidance of the Contractor, an indication is
cutting back to form benches and by compacting the given below of what would normally be required in the
backfill mechanically to the specified densities, using more common cases of defects or damage, but the
suitable light equipment. Engineer will in no way be bound to accept or approve
the measures given below, as the actual remedial
(f) Excavations measures will be dictated by the circumstances of each
Excavations for pipe drains, culverts, service ducts and particular case.
similar structures shall be adequately protected against
the possible ingress of water during rainstorms.
(b) Earthworks
(g) Completed layer work
All completed layer work shall be protected and (i) Where a cut slope has been over excavated or
maintained until the following layer is constructed. undercut or where the floor of a cutting has been
Maintenance shall include immediate repairs to any taken too deep, back filling and re-compaction shall
damage or defects which may occur and shall be be carried out as set out in SECTION 7400. All
repeated as often as may be necessary to keep the necessary measures shall be taken to drain away
layer continuously intact and in good condition. groundwater that may accumulate in back filled
sections.
(h) Preparation of layer work
Before any completed layer is primed or a succeeding (ii) Excess width of fills shall to be trimmed down if
layer is constructed thereon, any damage to the existing required by the Engineer.
layer shall be repaired, so that, after repair or
reconstruction if necessary, it will conform in all (iii) Where erosion has damaged the surface of cuts or
respects to the requirements specified for that layer. All fills, the damage shall be made good by back filling
repair work other than minor surface damage repairs with suitable material and re-trimming. In more
shall be submitted to the Engineer for inspection before serious cases in the opinion of the Engineer, the
it is covered up. slopes shall be cut back by benching, back filled
and compacted to the required standard of
The previously constructed layer shall be thoroughly compaction with suitable light equipment and then
cleaned by the removal of all foreign material before re-trimmed, all in accordance with SECTION 7400.
construction of a succeeding layer or application of a
prime coat, surfacing or surface treatment. In the case (c) Stabilising
of all bituminous work in particular, the existing layer Any sections failing to meet the requirements specified
shall be thoroughly broomed and all dung, clay, mud or damaged to the extent that they require breaking-up
and other deleterious material completely removed. and re-compaction will have to be re stabilised with the
Where necessary, the surface shall be sprayed with type and quantity of stabilising agent ordered by the
water before, during and after brooming to remove all Engineer. The Engineer may also order that the layer
foreign material. be removed entirely and replaced with fresh material to
be stabilised.
Work performed as part of the above obligations shall
not be measured and paid for separately, and the cost (d) Local defects in pavement layers
thereof shall be included in the rates bid for the various Where remedial measures are taken to make good
items of work requiring protection and the items for the local defects, the width of the area to be repaired by
Contractor’s establishment on the site, as specified in machines shall be such as will be necessary to
SECTION 1300. accommodate the full width of the machines used, and
it shall be of a reasonable length to ensure effective
operation by the machinery. The depth to which
1218 FAULTY WORK, REMEDIAL WORK material will have to be removed will depend on the
type of material. Gravel will require breaking up to a
(a) General depth of at least 75 mm and crushed stone will usually
Any work which fails to comply with the Specifications require breaking up over its full depth. Asphalt material
shall be rejected and the Contractor shall, at his own will normally require removal over its full depth.
expense, make good any defects, as directed by and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. (e) Concrete
Concrete work will normally require the cutting-back
When any part of the Works or any equipment or and complete removal of any weak or honey combed
material is found, upon examination by the Engineer, sections and making good by using special epoxy
not to conform to the requirements or at any stage adhesives to bind fresh concrete to old concrete.
before final acceptance is damaged so that it no longer Cracks, when permitted to remain, shall be injected with
conforms to the requirements of the Specifications, the suitable epoxy compounds, and test cores shall then be
Engineer may order its complete removal and drilled for testing the efficacy of the injection process.
replacement, at the Contractor’s expenses, with
satisfactory work, equipment or material, or he may 1219 WATER
permit the Contractor to apply remedial measures in It is the Contractor’s responsibilities to provide clean
order to make good any such defects or damage. The and sufficient supply of fresh water for both construction
actual remedial measures taken shall at all times be purposes and also for all the houses, camps, offices,
entirely at the Contractor’s own initiative, risk and costs, workshops, laboratories, etc.
but subject to the Engineer’s approval regarding the
details thereof. The construction water shall be clean, free from
suspended solids and undesirable concentrations of
deleterious salts and from any matter in quantities

considered by the Engineer to be deleterious to the The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
proposed work. The water shall be applied at the adjudication one transparent polyester print, 0.05mm
location, in the amounts, and during the hours, including thick, of each drawing prepared by him. The standard
nights, as directed by the Engineer. of detailing and quality of print shall be the same as
those of the Drawings supplied to the Contractor under
The distributors used for watering shall be equipped the Contract.
with spray bar and shall be of ample capacity and of
such design as to ensure uniform application of water in The Drawings shall be compiled in the English
the amounts directed by the Engineer. language and shall comply in all respect with the
requirements of the Employer.
Water supplied to the Resident Engineer’s offices,
laboratories and all houses and camps shall be Accepted Drawings shall form an integral part of the
drinkable to the satisfaction of the Medical Officer of the Contract documents, and any drawing not accepted and
Area and the Engineer. The water for drinking and signed will not be permitted on the site of the Works for
cooking purposes shall be filtered, boiled or treated as construction purposes and/or used for the manufacture
necessary for human consumption. All water sources of any item. Notwithstanding the approval and/or
used shall be approved by the Engineer. acceptance and signing of the Drawings, the Contractor
shall take full responsibility for all details, discrepancies,
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact that no omissions, errors, etc, in respect of the said Drawings
separate payment will be made for the provision of as well as for the consequences thereof.
water and the Contractor shall include in his rates and
lump sum items for the provision of all water required in The Contractor shall submit only fully complete
and for the Works. Drawings in accordance with this specification and shall
not be entitled to claim for delays resulting from the
1220 AUTHORISED MEASUREMENTS AND submission of incomplete drawings. The Engineer will
TOLERANCES require a period of four to eight weeks, depending on
circumstances, for reviewing the complete drawings.
The work specified in the various sections of these
specifications shall comply with the various dimensional
No direct payment for design, preparation and
and other tolerances specified in each case. Where no
submission of Drawings will be made and all costs shall
tolerances are specified, the standard of workmanship
be included in the rates bid for the relevant pay items as
shall be in accordance with normal good practice. No
provided in the Bill of Quantities. The cost of reviewing
representation is made that the full specified tolerances
the design/drawings shall be for the Contractor’s
will be available independently of each other, and the
account.
Contractor is cautioned that the liberal or full use of any
one or more tolerances relating to other aspects of the
Work may lead to its rejection. The latter would apply 1222 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
particularly in respect of level tolerances on layer work For handling of explosives and blasting, the Contractor
and the related requirements regarding layer shall employ only persons experienced in blasting and
thicknesses. these persons must be in possession of an approved
current blasting certificate or be able to demonstrate
In the description of certain pay items, where it is stated their experience to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
that quantities will be determined from the authorised purchase, transport, storage and use of explosives shall
dimensions, this shall be taken to mean the dimensions be carried out in accordance with the most recent
as specified or shown on the Drawings, or, if changed, Explosive Ordinance and Rules issued by the
as finally instructed by the Engineer, without any Government of Tanzania.
allowance for tolerances being specified. If the work is
therefore constructed in compliance with the authorised The Contractor shall use explosives for blasting in
dimensions, plus or minus any tolerances allowed, connection with the Works only at such times and
quantities will be based on the authorised dimensions places and in such a manner as the Engineer may
regardless of the actual dimensions to which the work is approve but such approval shall not relieve the
constructed. Contractor from his responsibilities for injury, loss,
inconvenience and annoyance to persons, damage to
Where the work is not constructed in accordance with the work and adjoining structures, roads, places and
the authorised dimensions, plus or minus any things, and injury or damage to animals and property
tolerances allowed, the Engineer may nevertheless, in consequent to the use of such explosives. The
his sole discretion, accept the work for payment. In Contractor shall be entirely liable for any accident which
such cases no payment will be made in respect of may occur and shall save the Employer and the
quantities of work or material in excess of those Engineer harmless and indemnified from all claims
calculated from the authorised dimensions and where arising therefrom. Where loss, inconvenience, injury or
the actual dimensions are less than the authorised accident is likely to be caused to persons, animals,
dimensions, minus any tolerance allowed. Quantities for works, property, places and things, the Engineer shall
payment shall be based on the actual dimensions as have the power to regulate or prohibit blasting and in
constructed. the event of such regulations or prohibition the
Contractor shall have no claims against the Employer.
1221 DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE
Contractor will be permitted to use explosives for
CONTRACTOR breaking up rock and hard materials during excavation,
Where the Contractor is required to prepare any for demolishing existing structures, and for such other
drawings for the purpose of this Contract, they shall be purposes for which it may normally be required, on the
prepared as specified below and in accordance with approval of the Engineer and subject to the following
any further requirements specified by the Engineer. conditions:
The Contractor shall be provided with one transparent − The Engineer will have the right to prohibit the use
polyester standard drawing sheet and one steel of explosives in cases where, in his opinion, the risk
schedule sheet, which shall be used as masters for all of injury to persons or damage to property or
drawings prepared by him and submitted to the adjoining structures is too high. Such action by the
Engineer for consideration Engineer shall not entitle the Contractor to any
additional payment for having to resort to other less falsework and formwork plans.
economical methods of demolition unless otherwise
provided in the Special Specifications or the Bill of 1224 THE HANDING OVER OF THE SITE
Quantities. The Site will be handed over to the Contractor for
− The provisions of SECTION 3300 shall be complied construction, subject to such conditions as may be
with. specified in the Special Specifications regarding matters
− Legal provisions in regard to the use of explosives such as the sequence in which sections will be handled
and the requirements of the Inspector of Explosives over and must be completed, the maximum total length
or equivalent shall be strictly complied with. of bypasses that will be allowed to be in operation at
− The Contractor shall, at his own cost, make any time and any other matters relating to the
arrangements for supplying, transporting, storing Contractor’s use and occupation of the Site.
and using explosives.
− Before any blasting is undertaken, the Contractor 1225 HAUL ROADS
together with the Engineer, shall examine and The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
measure up any buildings, houses or structures in approval full details of any haul construction roads he
the vicinity of the proposed blasting and establish proposes to build. Such details shall be submitted well
and record, together with the Owner thereof, the in advance in order to afford the Engineer sufficient time
extent of any cracks or damage that may exist to investigate their implications. Haul roads may not be
before blasting operations are commenced. It shall built without the Engineer’s prior approval, and shall be
be the responsibility of the Contractor to make kept to a minimum, particularly in areas where their
good, at his own expense, any further damage to impact on the environment may be serious.
such houses, buildings or structure which results
from the blasting operations. 1226 MEASUREMENT OF DEPTH OF
− Where there is danger of damage to power or
telephone lines or underground or other services or TRENCHES AND FOUNDATION
any other property, the Contractor shall suitably EXCAVATIONS
adapt his method of blasting and the size of the Where trenches or foundation excavations are required
charges, and shall take adequate protective below the level of mass excavations for the road prism,
measures, such as cover blasting, in order to limit the depth of excavation of the trenches or foundation
the risk of damage as far as possible. shall be measured from ground level after completion of
− The Engineer shall, twenty- four hours before each the mass excavation, unless the Engineer is satisfied
blasting operations is carried out, be advised that the excavation of the trenches or foundation from
thereof, in writing, unless otherwise agreed on the the original ground level or any lower lever was
Engineer. unavoidable. The Contractor shall ensure that he
− No explosives of any kind shall be used by the obtains such instructions in good time and, where
Contractor without the prior consent of the Engineer required, shall submit proposals to the Engineer for
in writing. The Contractor shall purchase and import approval.
his own explosives for use in connection with the
Works and shall comply with all relevant 1227 ACCESS TO CONTRACTOR’S RECORDS,
ordinances, instructions and regulations which the MONTHLY SITE MEETINGS AND
Employer, or other person or persons having due
authority, may issue from time to time regarding the
PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
handling, transportation, storage and use of The Engineer shall at all times have full access to all
explosives. files, drawings, documents, records and whatsoever in
connection with the execution of the Works.
− The Contractor shall comply with the Statutory
Regulations in force in Tanzania regarding the use
The Contractor or his authorised representative shall
and storage of explosives.
attend monthly meetings on the site with
− Before commencing demolition work on any unit the
representatives of the Employer and Engineer, at dates
Contractor shall ensure that all affected public
and times to be determined by the Employer. Such
utilities have been disconnected as directed by the
meetings will be held for evaluating the progress of the
Engineer and any necessary temporary
Contract which any of the parties represented may wish
arrangements made. Any material or equipment
to raise.
required by the Employer shall be transferred to his
own store and the remaining debris shall become
The Contractor shall arrange with a photographer
the property of the Contractor who shall dispose of
approved by the Engineer for the taking of progress
it from the Site.
photographs during the construction of the Works The
− The Contractor shall at all times when engaged in Contractor shall submit each month good quality
blasting operations post sufficient warning flags and photographs of at least 5 different subjects as agreed
other measures to the full satisfaction of the with the Engineer. For each subject, the Contractor
Engineer. shall supply at least three colour photographs plus the
negatives reproduced in three sets in size 100 x 150
1223 WORK ON, OVER UNDER OR ADJACENT mm. The photographs shall be arranged in plastic
TO RAILWAY LINES photo-pockets with 3 photographs on each side and
All work carried out on, over, under or adjacent to with a label next to the photograph giving appropriate
railway lines shall be carried out strictly in accordance title and a number with reference to a suitable key plan.
with the latest edition of the Specifications of the Negatives shall also be suitably filed and referenced.
relevant Rail Authority, a copy of which will normally be
included in the Special Specifications or where the copy If so specified in the Special Specifications the progress
included in the Special Specifications is amended or photographs shall be taken by digital camera (min. 2.1
superseded by another, the Contractor shall obtain the million pixels). In this case a CD-ROM with the
latest edition, which shall be kept on the site before any photographs as well as prints as specified above shall
work of this nature is commenced. be provided. No separate payment will be made for
attending site meetings or furnishing progress
Attention is drawn particularly to the requirements photographs, the relevant cost being included by the
contained in the Specifications regarding the approval Contractor in his rates in the Bill of Quantities.
that must be obtained from the Rail Authority for a work
permit or occupation of its property and the approval of

1228 LEGAL PROVISIONS expense. He must make allowances for the use of the
The Contractor shall keep himself fully conversant with said supplies and equipment by all sub-contractors.
the latest enactment, provisions and regulations of all
legislative and statutory bodies and in all respects and Once equipment becomes redundant and having
at all time shall comply with such enactment, provisions received the approval from the Engineer, the Contractor
and regulations in regard to executing the Contract. shall disconnect and remove said equipment and make
good any works disturbed at his own expense.
1229 FINAL CLEARANCE
Upon completion of each section of the Works, 1232 POSITION OF WORKS
Contractor shall cleanup the site, remove all temporary The Works are shown on the Drawings, but the precise
buildings, plant and debris. He shall level off and fine positions, lines and directions of all the Works are not
grade all excavated material which is surplus to necessarily indicated and will be determined by the
requirements. The whole of the site shall be left in a Engineer as the Contract proceeds.
clean and workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made for 1233 ACCESS TO SITE
any work included in the paragraph and the costs shall The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for
be deemed to be included in the rates of the relevant access to the various parts of the Site where works are
items entered in the Bill of Quantities. to be constructed but all such accesses shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
1230 RECORDING OF INFORMATION
RELATING TO CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL Where the access to the Site proposed to be used by
Contractor lies across the land of any third party, the
COMPENSATION OR EXTENSION OF Contractor shall produce to the Engineer the written
TIME consent of the owner and the occupier of the land over
Should any circumstances arise or order be given by which the access lies before making use of the same.
the Engineer which the Contractor considers may fairly The Contractor shall also make a record to be agreed
entitle him to additional compensation, or extension of by the Engineer of the conditions of the surfaces of any
time for completion of the Contract, then the Contractor land (and of any crops on such land) over which access
shall at the earliest practicable opportunity inform the lies before he uses it for access purposes and he shall
Engineer of these circumstances so that he may have keep all such surfaces in a reasonable state of repair
the opportunity to investigate the circumstances and during the execution of the Works. On the termination of
take such action as he considers desirable in order to the Contractor's use of such access he shall restore the
reduce possible costs to the Employer. The Contractor lands to a condition at least equal to that existing before
shall at the same time inform the Engineer of his his first entry on them.
intention either to claim additional compensation or
extension of time, or to reserve his right to claim at a 1234 CO-OPERATION AT SITE
later stage. The Contractor shall also state on which All work shall be carried out in such a way as to allow
clause or clauses of the Conditions of Contract, the access and afford all reasonable facilities for any other
Special Specifications or other parts of the Contract Contractor and his workmen and for all the workmen of
Documents his claim is based. the Employer and any other person who may be
employed in the execution and/or operation at or near
In order that the extent and validity of such claims may the Site of any work in connection with the Contract or
be properly assessed when they are submitted at a otherwise.
later date, all circumstances relating to claims must be
investigated, recorded and agreed upon as far as The Contractor shall use his best endeavours to co-
possible between the Contractor and the Engineer as operate with such persons without interfering with them
and when they occur. For this purpose the Contractor and shall observe all the instructions and orders of the
shall furnish the Engineer from day to day with records, Engineer in that connection.
in a form approved by the Engineer, of all the facts and
circumstances that the Contractor considers relevant In the preparation of his programme of work the
and may wish to rely upon in support of his claims. The Contractor shall at all times take full account of and co-
Engineer may in turn record such other facts and ordinate with the programming of work of other
circumstances as he considers relevant and the contractors.
Contractor shall for this purpose, supply him with all the
information that he may require in this respect. 1235 ROADS AND SITE TO BE KEPT TIDY
The Contractor shall take all necessary care and
The Engineer and the Contractor shall at the time of
precautions to ensure that roads and thoroughfares
recording, indicate in writing and by signature, their
used by him either for the construction of the Works or
agreement or disagreement as to the correctness of the
for the transport of equipment, labour and materials are
information recorded. Additional compensation shall for
kept in good repair and conditions and not damaged or
the purposes of this Clause be taken to mean
made untidy as a result of such construction or
compensation over and above the payments at unit
transport. In the event of their becoming thus dirtied in
rates and prices bid or agreed upon for work ordered by
the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall
the Engineer.
immediate take all necessary steps to rectify as
required by the Engineer.
1231 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own 1236 SECURITY OF THE WORKS
expense his own electricity supply. This supply must be
Watching of the Works shall be provided by the
adequate to supply the area set aside for the housing of
Contractor at his own expense. If the Engineer
his staff and for his own and the Engineer's office, site
considers it necessary he will order in writing that
laboratory as well as for the housing of the Engineer's
additional watchmen be provided all at the Contractor's
staff.
expense.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary
temporary power and lighting and all associated 1237 SAFETY
apparatus for the duration of the Contract at his own The Engineer shall be notified by the Contractor
immediately any accident occurs whether on Site or off

Site in which the Contractor is directly involved which the Contractor’s his overheads and costs in making the
results in any injury to any person whether directly arrangement, for co-ordinating the work and effecting
concerned with the Site or whether a third party. Such payment.
initial notification may be verbal and shall be followed
by a written comprehensive report within 24 hours of
the accident.
Transportation of any material by the Contractor shall

be in suitable vehicles which when loaded do not cause
spillage and all loads shall be suitably secured. Any
vehicle which does not comply with this requirement or
any of the local traffic regulations and laws shall be
removed from the Site.
Arrangement shall be made with the appropriate

Authority before entering in or working on existing and
associated works.
1238 METHOD OF WORKING

The method of working to be adopted shall be such as
to permit the satisfactory completion of the Works and
to limit disturbance and damage to a minimum.
Constructional equipment used in the execution of the
Works shall be of a design and be used in a manner
approved by the Engineer.
The Engineer may at any time withdraw his approval

and Contractor shall immediately adopt another method
of working. The Contractor shall have no claim against
the Employer for costs incurred by him in changing the
method of working or in the provision and use of other
equipment.
1239 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

ITEM UNIT
12.01 LAND ACQUISITION:
(a) ARRANGE AND PAY COMPENSATION PROVISIONAL
FOR ACQUISITION OF LAND FOR THE SUM
WORKS.
(b) ALLOW FOR CONTRACTOR’S PERCENT (%)
OVERHEADS AND PROFITS AS A
PERCENTAGE OF SUBITEM 12.01(a)
The Provisional Sum shall be for reimbursed the net

cost for compensation and purchase of land subject to
the agreement of the Engineer, and upon production of
receipts. The percentage inserted by the Contractor
shall be for overheads and costs.
ITEM UNIT
12.02 RELOCATION OF SERVICES:
(a) ARRANGE AND PAY FOR REMOVAL PROVISIONAL
AND/OR ALTERATION TO SERVICES SUM
PROVIDED BY AGENCIES FOR
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY, WATER
SUPPLY OR TELECOMMUNICATION
SERVICES.
(b) ALLOW FOR CONTRACTOR’S PERCENT (%)
OVERHEADS AND PROFITS AS A
The Provisional Sum shall be for reimbursement of the

net cost for arranging the removal or alteration of all
existing services, such as drains, underground and
overhead telephone and electricity lines, ducts, poles,
water mains, fittings, railway lines, etc. before any
excavation or other work likely to affect the existing
services is commenced. Payment is subject to the
agreement of the Engineer, and upon production of
receipts
The percentage inserted by the Contractor shall be for

SERIES: 1000 GENERAL comply with the Conditions of Contact, particularly in

respect of the insurance’s and sureties required and his
general obligations to the public and the Employer. He
SECTION 1300: CONTRACTOR’S shall comply with all the regulations of statutory bodies.
ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE (f) Liaison with Government and Police Officials

The Contractor shall take all the necessary steps to
AND GENERAL comply with the Conditions of Contract. The Contractor
OBLIGATIONS shall keep in close contact with the Police and other
Government officials of the area regarding their
requirements in the control of traffic and other matters
CONTENTS: and shall provide all assistance or facilities which may
CLAUSE PAGE be required by such officials in the execution of their
duties.
1301 SCOPE 1000-20
1302 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1000-20
1303 CONTRACTOR’S OFFICES, STORES, 1303 CONTRACTOR’S OFFICES, STORES,
WORKSHOPS, CAMPS, ETC. 1000-20
1304 PAYMENT 1000-21 WORKSHOPS, CAMPS, ETC.
(a) General
If the Contractor needs areas in addition to the land
made available to him, it is entirely up to him to make
1301 SCOPE whatever arrangements he deems necessary with land
This Section covers the establishment of the occupiers regarding use of additional land for the
Contractor’s organisation, camp and constructional
purpose of erecting camps, workshops, garages,
plant on the site and their removal on completion of the stockpiling of materials, housing of labour and staff,
contract. It also covers payment for certain general
welfare facilities, etc, and all costs incurred in
obligations, risk and liabilities and general items of cost connection with rental or lease of such land shall be at
not covered elsewhere. the Contractor’s expense.
However, offices for the Contractor’s supervisory staff

1302 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and administration shall be erected by the Contractor at
his own expense at a location to be agreed upon with
(a) Camps, constructional plant and testing the Engineer.
facilities
The Contractor shall establish his construction camps, The land available to the Contractor shall be as follows:
offices, stores, workshops and testing facilities on the − The Land occupied by the Permanent Works.
site. The exact location of these facilities shall be − The Land occupied by approved temporary
approved beforehand by the Engineer. Accommodation, diversion routes.
ablution and other facilities for site staff shall also be − The Land indicated on the Drawings or
provided as required and the standard of subsequently approved by the Engineer as borrow
accommodation and the location of all facilities shall areas or as quarries.
comply with the requirements of the authorities − The Land required for housing, plant yard,
concerned and those of the Engineer. workshops and offices subject to the Engineer’s
approval of locations and layouts of such
Prior to starting with construction, the Contractor, shall installations.
also move all constructional plant and personnel to the
− Subject to the approval of the Engineer, any land
Site. On completion of the work and after receiving
lying within the boundaries of the right-of-way (as
approval in writing from the Engineer, all constructional
shown on the plan and profile drawings) may also
plant, buildings, fencing and other temporary structures
be made available to the Contractor as working
shall be removed and the camp site shall be restored to
space or borrow areas for fill material.
its original condition and left neat and tidy.
Before giving such approval the Engineer will give
(b) Building regulations
particular attention to the temporary and permanent
All buildings erected by the Contractor upon the site
effects of the proposed activities on the drainage of the
and camp site or sites and the layout of the buildings
area and the Contractor’s proposals for reinstatement.
and the sites shall comply with the Laws of Tanzania
and all Bye-Laws in so far as they are applicable.
(b) Contractor’s offices, stores and workshops
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at an
(c) Sign boards
approved location a suitable main office together with
The Contractor shall provide and erect a sign board at
such site offices as may be necessary for the efficient
the main entrances to the Site and at the site camp,
control of the Works. He shall also provide and maintain
where directed by the Engineer. The boards, with
on approved sites sufficient suitable stores, tanks and
suitable inscription, shall include the name of the
workshops for the proper storage of materials, fuel,
Project, the name of the Employer, the name of the
plant and equipment and the efficient maintenance of all
Financing Institution, the name of the Consultant and
such plant and equipment.
the name of the Contractor etc. The boards approx.
3.30 m x 3.20 m size, shall be approved by the
The stores shall be of such size and construction as to
Engineer, before erection.
provide adequate storage and protection for stocks of
materials, fuel, spares and the like in quantities
(d) Maintenance during construction
ensuring uninterrupted progress of the work and the
During construction the Contractor’s camps, staff living
workshops shall be suitably equipped for carrying out
quarters and other facilities shall be maintained in a
major repairs, overhaul or modification by the
neat and tidy condition.
Contractor of all plant and equipment in or on the Works
and other work connected with the permanent work.
(e) Legal and contractual requirements and
responsibility to the public
The Contractor shall take all the necessary steps to
(c) Contractor’s quarters and camps

The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and clear
away on completion all quarters and camps for staff and
labour necessary for the efficient control and execution
of the Works. Suitable, sufficient and properly equipped
messing, cooking and sanitary accommodation, an
adequate supply of clean water, proper disposal of
refuse and sewerage and sufficient labour in
attendance shall be provided. The Contractor shall be
responsible for meeting the requirements of the local
authorities, labour officers and other officers regarding
the camp accommodation, sanitation and messing of all
workmen and provide the staff necessary for proper
control and supervision.
All sites selected by the Contractor for the erection of

offices, stores, workshops, quarters, camps and the like
are subject to the prior approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall, by notice in writing, indicate his
requirements for sites well in advance in order that the
Engineer and the Regional Administration may consult
local interests.
(d) First aid

The Contractor shall provide, equip and maintain
adequate first-aid stations throughout the Works, and
erect conspicuous notice boards directing where these
are situated and provide all requisite transport. The
Contractor shall comply with the government medical or
labour requirements at all times and provide, equip and
maintain base dressing stations where directed and at
all times have experienced first-aid personnel and
dressers available throughout the Works for attending
minor injuries.
(e) Measurements and payment

Compliance with the requirements, performance of all
work, furnishing of all equipment, materials, including
water, labour, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Clause shall not be
measured for direct payment but shall be considered as
a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, covered under
the prices quoted for other contract items.
1304 PAYMENT
ITEM UNIT
13.01 CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS:
(a) SURETIES LUMP SUM
(b) INSURANCE OF W ORKS LUMP SUM
(c) INSURANCE OF CONSTRUCTIONAL LUMP SUM
PLANT & EQUIPMENT
(d) THIRD PARTY INSURANCE LUMP SUM
Payment of the lump sum bid under SUBITEMS 13.01(a),

(b), (c) and (d) shall include full compensation for the
Contractor’s charges in respect of the general
obligations. Should the value of the works (excluding
any payment in terms of the Conditions of Contract)
increase or decrease by more than 25 percent (less
allowances, if any, in the bid price adjustments in terms
of the General Conditions of Contract), the lump sum
bid for SUBITEMS 13.01(a), (b), (c) and (d) will be
increased or decreased by an equal percentage which
is in excess of the said limit of 25 percent.
Payment in respect of compliance with the provisions of

this Clause will be made in full at the lump sum entered
in the Bill of Quantities when the Contractor has fulfilled
all the requirements of this Clause.

SERIES 1000: GENERAL stock of all expendable items, such as light bulbs, light
tubes, kitchenware, soap, towels, toilet paper, paper
towels, drinking cups, materials and accessories and at
SECTION 1400: ENGINEER’S all times ensure proper and continuing functioning of all
components and parts of the Engineer’s houses and
ACCOMMODATION AND office.
ATTENDANCE UPON ENGINEER The houses, offices and installations, etc. including all
AND HIS SITE PERSONNEL required equipment to be provided under this Contract
shall be handed over to the Engineer in finished and
fully habitable condition not later than 4 months after
CONTENTS: the Engineer’s order to commence Work (according to
the relevant clause of the Conditions of Contract) and
CLAUSE PAGE
such buildings shall be to the entire satisfaction of the
1401 SCOPE 1000-22 Engineer. Suitable temporary office and residential
1402 FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER 1000-22 accommodation for the Engineer and his staff shall be
1403 HOUSES FOR THE ENGINEER 1000-11 provided from the date of the order to commence the
1404 OFFICE FOR THE ENGINEER 1000-11 Works until such time as the permanent office and
1405 WASH HOUSE 1000-11 residential accommodation are available for use.
1406 SITE CABIN / OFFICE 1000-11
1407 VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER AND (b) Siteworks for “Engineers Compound”
EMPLOYER 1000-11 The houses and buildings shall be sited within the
1408 ATTENDANCE UPON ENGINEER 1000-11 “Engineers Compound” to the satisfaction of the
1409 PROVISION OF SURVEY EQUIPMENT 1000-11 Engineer. The Type I, II and III houses shall be placed
1410 LABORATORY 1000-11 on separate plots of approximately 0.2 hectares each.
1411 MEALS IN CONTRACTOR'S MESS HALL 1000-11 The location of the houses shall be separate from that
1412 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1000-11 of the Contractor’s staff housing.
Separate access roads 3 m wide shall be provided for

each house and shall be surfaced with at least 150mm
1401 SCOPE consolidated thickness of gravel properly graded,
The Section covers the provision of accommodation cambered, drained and culverted.
and facilities for the supervisory staff of the Engineer
and for the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for raising the
ground (if necessary), grading and drainage in the
vicinity of each facility, with suitable access walkways,
1402 FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER gravelling, seeding and sodding of the ground, all as
directed and approved by the Engineer. Also, the
(a) General Contractor shall construct a roofed parking area for the
Engineer near the buildings, large enough for 8
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an office,
houses, site cabins, vehicles, survey equipment etc. for vehicles, and a satisfactory access road to the parking
area. The ground around the buildings, the parking area
the Engineer, his staff and for the Employer. Materials
and the access road shall be raised high enough for
and workmanship shall be to generally recognised
standards for temporary, prefabricated or permanent them not to be inundated during the rainy season.
buildings of this type. Detailed drawings showing the
Outside lighting, around the buildings and on the
design, the construction details, the type of materials
proposed and their characteristics, shall be submitted parking area, shall be installed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, and appropriate signs shall be erected to
by the Contractor for the Engineer’s approval, which
inform the public of the purpose of the facilities.
shall be obtained before starting the construction of the
office or houses or ordering the relevant materials.
The whole of the “Engineer’s Compound” shall be
fenced with chain link fencing (or equivalent) 2.0 m
All buildings for accommodation, offices and
laboratories shall be constructed from approved high, with necessary gates complete with padlock and
chain as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
materials. Materials containing asbestos shall not be
be responsible for the security of the compound and
used.
shall provide such gatemen and watchmen, etc., as
required to ensure this security.
The Contractor shall provide the buildings with potable
water, electricity, sanitary installations, sewage disposal
(c) Construction
arrangements, air-conditioning, furniture and
The housing shall consist of concrete block masonry or
equipment, and shall maintain them, all to the
prefabricated timber units on concrete floors raised not
satisfaction of the Engineer 24 hours of the day during
the Contract Period. less than 150 mm above natural ground level.
The roofs shall be constructed from aluminium or

All facilities shall conform to the best standards for the
required types. The facilities described herein shall be corrugated iron roof sheeting and the roof space
between the sheeting and the ceilings shall be
understood to represent the minimum requirements.
adequately ventilated and the openings shall be
The Contractor shall provide all additional incidentals
necessary, so that the facilities will be completely screened with mesh screening to prevent the entry of
vermin, etc. into the roof space.
adequate and satisfactory in every respect for the
intended use. All equipment and furniture shall be new
and unused when initially put in place. The ceilings shall not be less than 2.8 m inside height
and shall be of 10 mm hard boarding or similar
approved materials.
The Contractor shall maintain, replace and/or restore as
directed, any facilities or parts thereof that become
Air conditioners shall be wall mounted - not window
damaged, worn out, lost or stolen, except through
mounted.
causes due to negligence of the occupying Engineer’s
staff. The Contractor shall also provide an adequate
Internal wall partitions shall be of timber framed

construction lined both sides. All doors shall be of flush (b) Furniture and equipment
timber type, plywood faced and a minimum size of 2.0 The general description of the type of houses to be
m x 0.80 m. All timber construction shall be termite supplied is as follows:
proofed.
(i) Type I House
The windows shall be dust proof, of aluminium framing As illustrated in the Drawings having an internal
2
with glass tightly fitted or similar approved and shall be floor area of approximately 150 m complete with
located in the design to provide the maximum amount furnishings and equipment as listed in TABLE
of cross ventilation. 1403/1. The cost of providing the houses,
furnishings, equipment, water, electrical supply,
The kitchens shall be equipped with adequate benches, drainage and maintenance during the whole period
wall cupboards and shelves and with a stainless steel of the Contract shall be deemed to be included in
double sink with hot and cold running water built into a the Bill of Quantities.
special sink cabinet.
The bedrooms shall be provided with built in wardrobes TABLE 1403/1

and wall mirrors. TYPE I HOUSE FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT.
NEW FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, TO THE APPROVAL OF
Bathrooms shall be provided with western flush type THE ENGINEER.
WC with hinged cover, shower with hot and cold
running water and soap dish on wall, wash basin with Furniture
hot and cold running water, and wall mirror with light Kitchen Table (Formica Top) 1 No.
above. Kitchen Chair 4 No.
Dining Table 1 No.
Toilets shall be provided with western flush type WC Dining Chairs 6 No.
with hinged cover, wash basin with hot and cold running Dining Chairs with arms 2 No.
water and wall mirror with light above. Writing Desk (3 drawer) 1 No.
Book shelf 1 No.
(d) Finishing Settee (3 cushions) 1 No.
All external walls and doors shall be provided with one Easy Chairs 4 No.
prime coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats of Coffee Tables 2 No.
gloss paint. Internal walls, doors and ceilings shall be Sideboard 2 No.
painted with one prime coat, one undercoat and two
finishing coats of P.V.C. emulsion paint. All paint shall Beds, double with inner-spring mattress 2 No.
be from an approved manufacturer. The concrete floor Beds, single with inner-spring mattress 3 No.
shall be covered with an approved type of P.V.C. floor Pillows 10 No.
tiles or sheeting. Side Tables 5 No.
Dressing Tables with mirrors 2 No.
All windows and doors shall be burglar-proofed and Dressing Table Stools 2 No.
insect-screened to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Chest of Drawers 3 No.
Bedside Chairs 5 No.
(e) Services
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and install the Bathroom Cabinet with Mirror 1 No.
following services to the Engineers approval : Bathroom Stool 1 No.
Floor Rugs 5 No.
(i) Adequate piped supply of clean potable water
connected to toilets, bathrooms and kitchens in Equipment
each house. Air Conditioner 12,000 BTU/hr 4 No.
2
Refrigerator min. 0.40 m (Electric frost
(ii) An automatic 270 litre electric immersion water free) 1 No.
heater in each house Types I-III (see below) Electric or gas cooker with 4 burners,
connected to the piped water supply. separate grill and oven 1 No.
Fume Hood 1 No.
(iii) 220 Volt, 50 cycle A.C. electricity supply with Water Filter 2 No.
sufficient wiring, light fittings and socket outlets Dust Bin metal with lid (outdoor type) 1 No.
in each house. The power shall be adequate to Door Mats 2 No.
operate the electrical equipment specified. Vacuum Cleaner (electric) 1 No.
Socket outlets shall be provided in each room Ceiling Fans 3 No.
to the Engineers approval. Set of 8 pieces crockery, cutlery, Glassware 1 Set
Set of Kitchen utensils 1 Set
(iv) Suitable soil and waste water drainage. Set of Pots, pans, etc. 1 Set
2
Deep Freeze cabinet 0.40 m 1 No.
(v) Water borne sewage disposal Fire Extinguisher 2 No.
Standard lamps 2 No.
(vi) Rubbish disposal by providing outside bins and Table Lamps 2 No.
a daily collection service to a central disposal Toilet Tissue Holders 2 No.
area. Waste Baskets 5 No.
Vacuum Cleaner (electric) 1 No.
Mixer (Electric Portable) 1 No.
1403 HOUSES FOR THE ENGINEER Bedside lights 5 No.
Wall lights 6 No.
(a) General Pelmets and runners all windows
Upon completion of the Contract, the houses, furniture, Curtains all windows
equipment and services specified herein shall revert to Bedsheets 20 No.
either the Contractor or the Employer as set out in the Pillow cases 10 No.
Special Specifications. Blankets 10 No.
Towel rails 2 No.

(ii) Type II House furnishings, equipment, water, electrical supply,

As illustrated in the Drawings having an internal drainage and maintenance during the whole period
2
floor area of approximately 130 m complete with of the Contract shall be deemed to be included in
furnishings and equipment as listed in TABLE the Bill of Quantities.
1403/2. The cost of providing the house,
furnishings, equipment, water, electrical supply
drainage and maintenance during the whole period TABLE 1403/3
of the Contract shall be deemed to be included in TYPE III HOUSE FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT.
the Bill of Quantities. NEW FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, TO THE APPROVAL OF
THE ENGINEER.
TABLE 1403/2 Furniture

TYPE II HOUSE FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT. Kitchen Table (Formica top) 1 No.
NEW FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, TO THE APPROVAL OF Kitchen Chair 4 No.
THE ENGINEER. Dining Table 1 No
Dining Chairs 4 No.
Furniture Writing Desk (2 drawers) 1 No.
Book Shelf 1 No.
Kitchen Table (Formica top) 1 No. Settee (3 Cushion) 1 No.
Kitchen Chair 4 No. Easy Chairs 2 No.
Dining Table 1 No. Coffee Table 1 No.
Dining Chairs 4 No. Sideboard 1 No.
Dining Chairs with arms 2 No. Beds, single with inner-spring mattresses 2 No.
Writing Desk(3 drawers) 1 No. Pillows 2 No.
Book shelf 1 No. Side Table 1 No.
Settee (3 cushions) 1 No. Dressing Table 1 No.
Easy Chairs 3 No. Dressing Table Stool 1 No.
Coffee Tables 2 No. Chest of Drawers 1 No.
Sideboard 1 No. Bathroom Cabinet with Mirror 1 No.
Beds, single with inner-spring mattress 3 No. Bathroom stool 1 No.
Beds, double with inner-spring mattress 1 No. Floor Rugs 4 No.
Pillows 8 No.
Side Tables 4 No. Equipment
Dressing Tables with mirrors 1 No. Air Conditioner 12,000 BTU/hr 2 No.
Dressing table stools 1 No. Refrigerator min. 0.40 cu.m (Electric frost
Chest of Drawers 2 No. free) 1 No.
Bedside Chairs 4 No. Beds, single with inner-spring mattress 2 No.
Bathroom Cabinet with Mirror 1 No. Electric or gas cooker with 2 burners,
Bathroom Stool 1 No. separate grill and oven 1 No.
Floor Rugs 4 No. Fume Hood 1 No.
Water Filter 1 No.
Equipment Dust Bin Metal with Lid (outdoor type) 1 No.
Air Conditioner 12,000 BTU/hr 2 No. Door Mats 2 No.
2
Refrigerator min. 0.40 m (Electric frost Vacuum Cleaner (electric) 1 No.
free) 1 No. Ceiling Fans 2 No.
Electric or gas cooker with 4 burners, Set of 4 pieces crockery, cutlery, glassware 1 Set
separate grill and oven 1 No. Set of Kitchen utensils 1 Set
Fume Hood 1 No. Set of Pots, pans, etc. 1 Set
Vacuum Cleaner (electric) 1 No. Mixer (Electric Portable) 1 No.
Fire Extinguisher 2 No. Fire Extinguisher 1 No.
Mixer (Electric Portable) 1 No. Standard lamps 1 No.
Water Filter 1 No. Bedside lights 2 No.
Dust Bin Metal with lid (outdoor type) 1 No. Wall lights 3 No.
Door Mats 2 No. Pelmets and runners all windows
Ceiling Fans 2 No. Curtains all windows
Set of 6 pieces crockery, cutlery, glassware 1 Set Bedsheets 8 No.
Set of Kitchen utensils 1 Set Pillow cases 4 No.
Set of Pots, pans, etc. 1 Set Blankets 4 No.
2
Deep Freeze cabinet 0.40 m 1 No. Towel rails 1 No.
Standard lamps 2 No. Toilet Tissue Holder 1 No.
Bedside lights 4 No. Waste Baskets 2 No.
Wall lights 5 No.
Pelmets and runners all windows
Curtains all windows (iv) Multiple Living Accommodation
Bedsheets 16 No. 1 block of 4 units of multiple living accommodation
2
Pillow cases 8 No. each unit consisting of 17m , containing two rooms
Blankets 8 No. with common ablution block, kitchen, dining room
Towel rails 2 No. and external veranda all to the approval of the
Table Lamps 1 No. Engineer, as shown in the Drawings, complete with
Toilet Tissue Holders 1 No. furnishings and equipment as listed in TABLE
Waste Baskets 4 No. 1403/4.
(iii) Type III House

As illustrated in the Drawings having an internal
floor area of approximately 70 sq.m. complete with
furnishings and equipment as listed in TABLE
1403/3. The cost of providing the house,

TABLE 1403/4 and telefaxes. The Contractor shall pay all charges
MULTIPLE LIVING ACCOMMODATION, HOUSE FURNITURE associated with the Engineer’s electricity supply and
AND EQUIPMENT. telephone/fax including toll calls lawfully demanded by
NEW FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, TO THE APPROVAL OF the electricity authority and the telecommunication
THE ENGINEER. service throughout the Contract Period.
Furniture The Contractor shall provide an access road at least 3.0

Kitchen Table (Formica Top) 1 No. m wide to the Engineer’s office and parking area for 10
Kitchen Chair 4 No. cars. The road and car park shall be surfaced with a
Dining Table 1 No. minimum of 150 mm compacted thickness of gravel.
Dining Chairs 8 No.
Sideboard 2 No. The office shall be erected and handed over to the
Beds, single with mattresses 8 No. Engineer fully furnished and equipped, within three
Pillows 8 No. months from the date of the Engineers order to
Side Table 8 No. commence work.
Bedside Chair 16 No.
Bathroom Cabinet with Mirror 2 No. (b) Construction
Bathroom stool 2 No. The office shall be dimensioned as shown in the
Drawings with a minimum of 2.8 m headroom internally,
Equipment complete with ceiling, smooth concrete or wooden floor
Electric Fan 8 No. and a 2.7 m wide covered veranda extending along the
2
Refrigerator min. 0.40 m (Electric or full length of the front. The rooms shall be adequately
equivalent) 1 No. ventilated and lighted.
Fire Extinguisher 4 No.
Vacuum Cleaner 1 No. The roofs shall be constructed from aluminium or
Electric Cooker with 4 burners, separate corrugated iron roof sheeting and the roof space
large grill and oven 1 No. between the sheeting and the ceilings shall be
Water Filter 1 No. adequately ventilated and insulated and the openings
Dust Bin Metal with Lid (outdoor type) 1 No. shall be screened with mesh screening to prevent the
Door Mats 2 No. entry of vermin, etc. into the roof space.
Ceiling Fans 2 No.
Set of 10 pieces crockery, cutlery, Internal wall partitions shall be timber framed and lined
glassware 1 Set both sides. All doors shall be of flush timber type,
Set of Kitchen utensils 1 Set plywood faced and a minimum size of 2.0 m x 0.80 m.
Set of Pots, pans, etc. 1 Set All doors shall be provided with locks with three keys
Mixer (Electric Portable) 1 No. outside doors with cylinder locks. All external walls and
Wall lights 3 No. doors shall be provided with one prime coat, one
Pelmets and runners all windows undercoat and two finishing coats of gloss paint.
Curtains all windows Internal walls, doors and ceilings shall be painted with
Bedsheets 32 No. one prime coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats
Pillow cases 16 No. of P.V.C. emulsion paint. All paint shall be from an
Blankets 16 No. approved manufacturer.
Towel rails 3 No.
Toilet Tissue Holder 1 No. (c) Furniture and equipment
Waste Baskets 2 No. The Site office for the Engineer shall be complete
with furnishings and equipment as listed in TABLE
Each unit shall be furnished with one bed, complete 1404/1.
with mattress, one table and 2 chairs and one electric
fan. The cost of providing the block of 4 units, furniture,
equipment, water, electrical supply, drainage and TABLE 1404/1
maintenance during the whole period of the Contract OFFICE FOR THE ENGINEER. FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT.
shall be deemed to be included in of the Bill of NEW FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, TO THE APPROVAL OF
Quantities. THE ENGINEER.
Meeting table 3.0 m x 1.2 m with 6

1404 OFFICE FOR THE ENGINEER chairs 1 No.
Ceiling fans 6 No.
(a) General Air conditioners 12,000 BTU/hr. 4 No.
Upon completion of the Contract, the Engineer’s office Desks 1.5 m x 0.75 m with 2 chests of
buildings, furniture, equipment and services specified drawers. 8 No.
herein shall revert to either the Contractor or the Chairs with arms. 8 No.
Employer as set out in the Special Specifications. Table 1.5 m x 0.75 m with 2 drawers
and 2 chairs. 1 No.
The Contractor shall provide, furnish and maintain office Typist’s table with 1 chest of drawers
accommodation for the Engineer as detailed hereunder. and chair. 1 No.
Typewriter, Electric 430 mm carriage. 1 No.
The Site office shall be erected at a location to be Plan tables and stools. 2 No.
agreed with the Engineer. The plot shall be not less Personal computers in number and
than 0.3 hectares in area and if so required shall be equipped as specified in Special
fenced with a 2.0 m high chain link fence and gate, with Specifications.
padlock and chain. Laptop computers in number and
equipped as specified in Special
A telephone and telefax shall be provided for the use of Specifications.
the Engineer and the offices shall be provided with A3 laser printer or equivalent,
electric lighting all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. compatible with the above personal
The telefax shall have a separate dedicated telephone computer with supply of A4 and A3
line. The Engineer’s telephone and telefax shall be paper and consumables, as specified
completely independent of the Contractor’s telephones and number as in Special

Specifications. included in the rates the Bill of Quantities.

Colour printer inkjet or equivalent
compatible with above laptop computer Upon completion of the Contract, the Engineer’s wash
with supply of A4 paper and house, furniture, equipment and services specified
consumables, in number and as herein shall revert to either the Contractor or the
specified in Special Specifications. Employer as set out in the Special Specifications.
UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply)
with surge protector, capable to support 1406 SITE CABIN / OFFICE
and back-up all computer equipment as The Contractor shall, if so instructed by the Engineer,
specified in Special Specifications. provide and maintain during the duration of the Contract
Complete set of the latest editions of portable site cabins. Each site cabin shall have a floor
software complete with manuals and 2
area of at least 10 m and shall be equipped with one
floppy discs/CD-ROM of a type bedstead including mattress, blankets, pillows, bed
compatible with the personal computer sheets, one wardrobe, one desk with drawers, one
disc drives, as specified in Special metal cabinet, shelves, two chairs and a small gas
Specifications. refrigerator These units shall be positioned always
Safe for cash and valuables, min. size close to the Work and moved from one location to
approx. 0.8 m x 0.5 m x 0.4 m, to be another by the Contractor as may be directed by the
concreted in place (either wall or floor Engineer. The Contractor shall supply the units with
mounted) complete with lock and keys. 1 No. light, potable water if possible and sanitary facilities.
2 Drawing tables A1 size with Drawing
machines 2 No. The cost of providing the Site Cabins furnishing,
2 Drawing table stools 2 No. equipment, water, electrical supply (where available),
1 Set plan drawers (6 drawers) 1 No. moving the site cabins to different locations and
1 Two drawer steel lockable filing maintenance during the whole period of the Contract
cabinet 1 No. shall be deemed to be included in the price inserted in
Set of transparent plastic curve guides, ITEM 14.04 of the Bill of Quantities.
metric. 1 No.
Electronic calculators, in number and Upon completion of the Contract, the Engineer’s site
type as specified in Special cabin/office, furniture, equipment and services specified
Specifications herein shall revert to either the Contractor or the
Electronic desk calculators with printer, Employer as set out in the Special Specifications.
type as specified in Special
Specifications 1 No. 1407 VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER AND
Fire Extinguisher, type as specified in
Special Specifications 3 No. EMPLOYER
First aid kits 2 No. The Contractor shall provide new vehicles as listed
Snake bite kit 1 No. below licensed and comprehensively insured for
Adjustable planimeters 2 No. replacement value and shall maintain and provide fuel,
Stapling machines 8 No. oil and replacement parts during the whole of the
Paper punches 8 No. Contract period. The vehicles shall be for the exclusive
Binding machine 1 No. use of the Engineer, his staff and the Employer during
A3 size photocopy machine with the Contract period. The Contractor shall also insure
accessories and supplies as specified the vehicles and passengers fully comprehensively for
in Special Specifications 1 No. any driver at all times throughout the Contract Period.
Single side band multi-channel radio
communication equipment of minimum (i) 4 Wheel Drive Station Wagon
2,500 km range together with free (iii) 4 Wheel Drive Pickup, with double cabin.
standing antenna of appropriate heights
and one set of matching crystals with The vehicles under (i) shall have factory installed air-
that of the Employer’s communication conditioning units and power steering. The vehicles
system Base and mobile sets in shall have diesel-engines and shall be provided with the
number and as specified in the Special following optional equipment, factory installed seat
Specifications. belts, rear pintle hook, front hook, door mirrors, two
Water filters 4 No. spare wheels, toolbox with necessary tools, jack etc.
Thermos jug 4.5 litres capacity 8 No. Makes of vehicles shall be approved by the Engineer
12 Cups, 12 glasses and coffee sets prior to ordering.
All other office equipment necessary
including stationery. The Contractor shall service and maintain in good
working order the vehicles at all times. In the event of
The Site office shall be connected to a water and an any vehicle being unavailable for the use due to
electricity supply. The Contractor shall be responsible accident, damage or its being maintained or repaired,
for cleaning and maintaining the office and toilets and the Contractor shall immediately provide a substitute
shall provide soap, towels and all necessary fittings and acceptable to the Engineer.
cleaning materials.
In the event of the Contractor defaulting on this
1405 WASH HOUSE obligation, the Engineer shall be authorised to hire a
substitute similar vehicle for the period of non-
The Contractor shall provide a Washhouse comprising
2 availability of the Contractor’s vehicles, and the cost
two rooms of 20 m each with electricity, water, waste
incurred will be recovered from the Contractor.
water outlet and water borne sewage disposal and
equipped with two automatic washing machines, two
Upon completion of the Contract, the Engineer’s
stainless steel tubs with hot and cold running water and
vehicles specified herein shall revert to either the
automatic electric water heater, all to the approval of
Contractor or the Employer as provided for in the
the Engineer.
Special Specifications.
The cost of providing the house, furnishing, equipment,
water, electrical supply and maintenance during the
whole period of the Contract shall be deemed to be
1408 ATTENDANCE UPON ENGINEER Reflective road safety vests 12 No.

Drawing boards (fieldbook frames A4
(a) Staff size,metal or wood with plastic cover) 10 No.
The Contractor shall provide night and day watchmen,
gardeners, labourers, cleaners and sanitary staff as well The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
as all necessary cleaning materials as may be required maintenance of all such instruments and shall ensure
by the Engineer to keep the offices, the laboratory and that they are at all times in good condition and
houses in first class condition. adjustment. Repairs shall only be carried out by
persons or organisations approved by the Engineer.
(b) Stationery
The Contractor shall provide any stationery required for Supply of miscellaneous survey items (e.g. spray paint,
the office and laboratory of the Engineer. beacon materials, spades, axes, rubber boots,
assistants, drawing equipment, approved surveying
(c) Assistance to the Engineer forms A4 size and field-surveying books).
The Contractor shall provide all assistance such as
labourers, all tools and protective clothing, wooden
pegs, iron pins and pickets, water, cement and 1410 LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER
aggregate for concreting, transport for labour and
materials, as may be required by the Engineer and his (a) General
staff for checking, setting out, surveying and measuring The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain for the
or testing the work. duration of the Contract a laboratory adjacent to the
Engineers Representative’s office or where directed by
(d) Payment the Engineer.
No separate payment will be made for attendance upon
the Engineer the relevant cost being included by the Upon completion of the Contract, the Engineer’s
Contractor in rates in the Bill of Quantities or laboratory buildings, Laboratory equipment, air
elsewhere. If the Contractor fails in his obligations conditioners and furniture specified herein shall revert
under this Specifications, the Engineer is authorised to to either the Contractor or the Employer depending on
employ any staff and/or labourer and to buy any which of the pay items in CLAUSE 1412 are invoked in
material, as mentioned above, and the costs incurred the Special Specifications.
will be recovered from the Contractor.
The Laboratory shall be dimensioned as shown in the
1409 PROVISION OF SURVEY EQUIPMENT Drawings with a minimum of 2.8 m headroom internally
The Contractor shall provide at all times during the complete with ceiling, smooth concrete floor and a 5m
period of the Contract all such workmen and wide covered veranda extending along the length of the
instruments for the exclusive use of the Engineer as he front with a concrete floor for drying of material and
may deem to be necessary for carrying out his duties in sufficient covered outdoor space for location of soaking
connection with the Contract. The workmen shall be basins for CBR testing where required.
selected for their intelligence and knowledge of the
English language and as far as possible the same men The rooms shall be adequately ventilated and lighted.
shall be provided throughout the period of the Contract. Walls shall be constructed of prefabricated timber
sections or sand cement blocks. All external doors shall
Upon completion of the Contract, the Engineer’s survey be provided with cylinder locks with three keys.
equipment specified herein shall revert to either the
Contractor or the Employer as set out in the Special The working area floor shall have a strengthened
Specifications. section incorporated consisting of 3.0 m x 3.0 m x 450
mm mass concrete plinth. A separate sample store of at
The instruments to be provided include those given in least 12 m² floor area shall be provided.
TABLE 1409/1 or equivalent as specified in Special
Specifications: The laboratory shall be provided with electric lighting
and power points to the satisfaction of the Engineer (to
be 220 Volts, 50 cycles).
TABLE 1409/1
NEW SURVEY EQUIPMENT, TO THE APPROVAL OF THE The permanent fixtures in the laboratory shall include
ENGINEER. − 2 no. double draining board stainless sinks, piped
drinkable water supply to each and waste water
Item Number outlets.
Total station of approved type 1 No. − Work benches, comprising a working surface and
Electronic Distance Meter 1 No. one full length and width shelf under, of seasoned
Tripods 3 No. timber 1.0 m wide and 0.9 m high.
Levels 2 No. − Soaking tanks for CBR and concrete specimens
Metal levelling staves 5m (foldable) 3 No. shall be provided at floor level, in the stores section
Steel tape 50 m 2 No. of the laboratory and on the veranda. The CBR tank
Steel tape 25 m 5 No. shall have drainage pipes built in.
Fibre-glass tapes 50 m 4 No.
Ranging rods, 2.5 m long 8 No. The laboratory for the Engineer shall be complete with
Ranging rods 2.5 m (metal, joinable) 6 No. furnishings and equipment as listed in TABLE 1410/1.
Optical squares 1 No.
Spare batteries 2 No.
Rapid Charger 1 No. TABLE 1410/1
Reflectors with mounts 5 No. LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER. FURNITURE AND
Triple prism mount with reflectors 1 No. EQUIPMENT. NEW FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT, TO THE
Tribrachs 4 No. APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.
Steel hammers (4 kg) 2 No.
Spirit levels for staves 6 No. Desks 1.5 m x 0.75 m with 2 chests of
Metal pocket rules (5m) 10 No. drawers. 2 No.
Surveying umbrella 2 No. Arm chairs 2 No.
Chairs 6 No.
Air Conditioners 12,000 BTU/hr. 5 No. 2 No. MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR MULTIPLE UNIT)
Work benches in numbers as given in the ACCOMMODATION UNITS FULLY X (MONTH)
Special Specifications FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE
Curing tanks. 3 No. ENGINEER
Stationery cupboard 2 cu. m. 2 No. (j) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE
Book-cases, purpose made to accept box MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR FULLY UNIT)
files 2 No. FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED X (MONTH)
Shelves 2.0m long 2 No. TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION AND
Stools, lm high 4 No. OFFICES FOR THE ENGINEER
Stools, 0.4m high 4 No.
Metal Filing Cabinet 2 drawers 2 No.
All SUBITEMS 14.01(a) to (j) shall be applied in the case
where the houses, furniture and equipment reverts to
(b) Testing equipment, materials and testing either the Employer or Contractor upon completion of
standards the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide and install in the laboratory
2 stainless steel fan-circulated drying ovens, minimum
70 litre capacity, and all the necessary apparatus and ITEM UNIT
materials for the performance of all tests required for 14.02 OFFICES FOR THE ENGINEER
the testing and control of the works and materials. (a) PROVIDE FULLY FURNISHED AND LUMP SUM
EQUIPPED OFFICES FOR THE ENGINEER
The Contractor shall supply one new copy of the latest
edition of the Specifications for all referred material (b) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (OFFICE
MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR FULLY UNIT)X
standards and testing standards used for the Contract.
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED OFFICES (MONTH)
FOR THE ENGINEER
All the laboratory equipment, including air conditioners,
shall be new and of a make approved by the Engineer.
Both SUBITEMS 14.02(a) and (b) shall be applied in the
The Contractor shall immediately after the award of the case where the houses, furniture and equipment reverts
Contract prepare and submit for the approval of then to either the Employer or Contractor upon completion of
Engineer a list showing all instruments and apparatus to the Contract.
be purchased.
1411 MEALS IN CONTRACTOR'S MESS HALL ITEM UNIT

The contractor, when so required by the Engineer, shall 14.03 WASH HOUSE FOR THE
provide meals in the Contractor's mess hall for the ENGINEER:
Employer’s visiting staff and other official visitors on (a) PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN FULLY LUMP SUM
agreement with the Engineer. Meals shall include food FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED WASH
and drinks of good quality and in an adequate quantity. HOUSE FOR THE ENGINEER
(b) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (WASH HOUSE
MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR FULLY UNIT) X
1412 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED WASH (MONTH)
HOUSE FOR THE ENGINEER
ITEM UNIT
14.01 HOUSES FOR THE ENGINEER: Both SUBITEMS 14.03(a) and (b) shall be applied in the
(a) PROVIDE TYPE I HOUSE FULLY LUMP SUM case where the houses, furniture and equipment reverts
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE to either the Employer or Contractor upon completion of
ENGINEER the Contract.
(b) PROVIDE TYPE II HOUSE FULLY LUMP SUM
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE
ENGINEER ITEM UNIT
(c) PROVIDE TYPE III HOUSE FULLY LUMP SUM 14.04 SITE CABIN/OFFICE FOR THE
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE ENGINEER:
ENGINEER (a) PROVIDE FULLY FURNISHED AND LUMP SUM
(d) PROVIDE MULTIPLE ACCOMMODATION LUMP SUM EQUIPPED SITE CABIN / OFFICE
UNITS FULLY FURNISHED AND FOR THE ENGINEER
EQUIPPED FOR THE ENGINEER (b) cabin / office for the Engineer (SITE CABIN
(e) PROVIDE FULLY FURNISHED AND LUMP SUM MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS /OFFICE UNIT)
EQUIPPED TEMPORARY AND MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR X (MONTH)
ACCOMMODATION AND OFFICES FOR FULLY FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED
THE ENGINEER SITE
(f) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE

MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR TYPE I UNIT) Both SUBITEMS 14.04(a) and (b) shall be applied in the
HOUSE FULLY FURNISHED AND X (MONTH) case where the houses, furniture and equipment reverts
EQUIPPED FOR THE ENGINEER to either the Employer or Contractor upon completion of
the Contract.
(g) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE
MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR TYPE II UNIT)
HOUSE FULLY FURNISHED AND X (MONTH)
ITEM UNIT
EQUIPPED FOR THE ENGINEER
14.05 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE STATION
(h) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE
WAGON FOR THE ENGINEER:
MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR TYPE III UNIT)
HOUSE FULLY FURNISHED AND X (MONTH) (a) PROVIDE VEHICLES FOR THE LUMP SUM
EQUIPPED FOR THE ENGINEER ENGINEER (SPECIFY TYPE AND
NUMBER)
(i) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE

(b) OPERATE AND MAINTAIN VEHICLES VEHICLE equipment, wash house and site cabin for the
(SPECIFY TYPE AND NUMBER) FOR AN X MONTH Engineer’s Representative will be made at the Lump
AVERAGE OF 2500 KM PER MONTH Sum entered in the Bill of Quantities, for each single
(c) OPERATE VEHICLES SPECIFIED FOR KILOMETRES item of each type, on the following basis:
TRAVEL DISTANCE IN EXCESS OF (km)
AVERAGE 2500 KM PER MONTH (i) 50% of the Lump Sum when the respective facilities
are completed, and accepted by the Engineer, fully
furnished and equipped.
All SUBITEMS 14.05(a) to (c) shall be applied in the case
where the vehicles revert to the Employer or Contractor (ii) 50% of the Lump Sum will be paid in equal
upon completion of the Contract. instalments over the Contract period. The
instalments shall be deemed to cover maintenance
of buildings, furniture, equipment and services,
ITEM UNIT supply of electricity and water as specified in the
14.06 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE DOUBLE Specifications. The Employer may withhold or
CAB PICK-UP FOR THE ENGINEER reduce any instalments if the Contractor fails in his
(a) PROVIDE VEHICLES FOR THE LUMP SUM maintenance obligations.
ENGINEER AND EMPLOYER (SPECIFY (LS)
TYPE AND NUMBER) All payments are subject to deduction of Retention
Money, as provided in the Conditions of Contract.
(b) OPERATE AND MAINTAIN VEHICLES VEHICLE X
(SPECIFY TYPE AND NUMBER) FOR MONTH Payment for operating and maintaining vehicles under
AN AVERAGE OF 2500 KM PER
ITEMS 14.05 and 14.06, SUBITEMS (b) and (c) above, for
MONTH
the Engineer, his staff and the Employer’s, will be made
(c) OPERATE VEHICLES SPECIFIED FOR KIILOMETRES as follows:
AVERAGE 2500 KM PER MONTH (i) By rates per vehicle month, SUBITEM (b). Such rates
shall include for the first 2,500 km per vehicle
All SUBITEMS 14.06(a) to (c) shall be applied in the case travelled in any calendar month. Should a vehicle
where the vehicles revert to either the Employer or be used for less than 2,500 km in a particular
Contractor upon completion of the Contract. month, then the unused distance shall be offset
against months when the distance travelled
exceeds 2,500 km.
ITEM UNIT
(ii) By a rate per km, SUBITEM (c), over and above the
14.07 SURVEY EQUIPMENT FOR THE LUMP SUM
first 2,500 km per vehicle travelled in any one
ENGINEER calendar month, subject to the condition mentioned
(a) PROVIDE SPECIFIED SURVEY LUMP SUM in above.
EQUIPMENT FOR THE ENGINEER
(b) MAINTAIN SPECIFIED SURVEY MONTH The rates bid by the Contractor shall include for
EQUIPMENT FOR THE ENGINEER provision of the vehicle all licensing, insurance, fuel,
lubricants, maintenance and repairs, drivers salaries
and allowances and replacement of the vehicles should
Both SUBITEMS 14.07(a) and (b) shall be applied in the this be considered necessary by the Engineer.
case where the survey equipment reverts to either the
Employer or Contractor upon completion of the All payments are subject to deduction of Retention
Contract. Money, as provided in the Conditions of Contract.
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

14.08 LABORATORY FOR THE LUMP SUM
14.10 MEALS IN CONTRACTOR’S MESS NUMBER
ENGINEER HALL FOR THE EMPLOYER’S STAFF (no)
(a) PROVIDE LABORATORY FULLY LUMP SUM
FURNISHED FOR THE ENGINEER
Payment for provision of meals shall be made at the
(b) MAINTAIN LABORATORY FULLY MONTH unit price for which payment shall be full compensation
FURNISHED FOR THE ENGINEER for all costs incurred for providing either breakfast,
lunch or supper respectively as required.
case where the laboratory and furniture reverts to either
the Employer or contractor upon completion of the
Contract.
ITEM UNIT
14.9 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT FOR LUMP SUM
THE ENGINEER
(a) PROVIDE SPECIFIED LABORATORY LUMP SUM
(b) MAINTAIN SPECIFIED LABORATORY MONTH
case where the laboratory equipment reverts to either
the Employer or Contractor upon completion of the
Contract.
Payment for providing vehicles, for providing and

maintaining houses, offices, laboratory, survey

SERIES 1000: GENERAL survey beacons. In exceptional cases where this is not
possible, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
good time so that he may arrange to have them suitably
SECTION 1500: ACCOM- referenced before they are displaced.
MODATION OF TRAFFIC (e) Access to properties

The Contractor shall also provide and grant access to
CONTENTS: persons whose properties fall within or adjoin the area
over which he is working, and in this respect the
CLAUSE PAGE Contractor’s attention is drawn to the Conditions of
1501 SCOPE 1000-31 Contract.
1502 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1000-31
1503 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL (f) Approval of deviations
FACILITIES 1000-31 The need for details concerning all deviations shall be
1504 CONSTRUCTION OF DEVIATIONS 1000-32 approved by the Engineer before the construction of
1505 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE W ORKS 1000-32 such deviations commences, and the Contractor shall
1506 EARTHWORKS FOR DEVIATIONS OR satisfy himself before bidding that he can make
EXISTING ROADS USED AS DEVIATIONS 1000-33 arrangements in respect of any deviations as may be
1507 GRAVELLING OF DEVIATIONS OR OF necessary for the safe and convenient passage of
EXISTING ROADS USED AS DEVIATIONS 1000-33 traffic.
1508 ASSISTANCE TO THE PUBLIC 1000-33
1509 USE OF MINOR PRIVATE ROADS AS (g) Temporary Works
DEVIATIONS 1000-33 The deviations provided by the Contractor shall include
1510 RIDING QUALITY AND MAINTENANCE OF the construction of temporary gates, grid gate, fences,
DEVIATIONS AND EXISTING ROADS drainage works and other incidentals considered by the
USED AS DEVIATIONS 1000-33 Engineer to be necessary.
1511 SIGNS, BARRIERS AND TEMPORARY
FENCING, GATES AND GRID GATES 1000-34 (h) Public services
1512 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC W HERE The Contractor, in cooperation with the Engineer, shall
THE ROAD IS CONSTRUCTED IN HALF make arrangements for all public services such as
WIDTHS 1000-34 power lines, telephone lines, water mains, etc, to be
1513 THE USE OF DEVIATION BY THE moved where required for the construction of deviations
CONTRACTOR 1000-34 and he shall be solely responsible for the safety of such
1514 OBLITERATION OF DEVIATIONS 1000-34 services. No payment will be made for any additional
1515 PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO COMPLY expenses caused by delays in moving such services.
WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS 1000-34 Where the moving of services is not required, the
1516 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1000-34 Contractor shall clearly indicate where such services
cross the deviation so that these points will be clearly
visible to the operating staff.
1501 SCOPE
This section covers the construction and maintenance 1503 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
of the necessary deviations and detours, barricades FACILITIES
and signs, and everything necessary for the safe and
easy passage of all public traffic during the construction (a) Programme for control of traffic
and maintenance periods also the obliteration of Following the award of the Contract, the Contractor
deviations as they become redundant. shall submit to the Engineer a detailed Programme for
Passing of Traffic. Such programme shall be approved
by the Engineer before the Contractor commences
1502 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS work, and shall show amongst other things the method
of protection of the public and give details of the hours
(a) Handing over the Site of operation, location, types and numbers of traffic
The Site will be handed over to the Contractor in the safety devices, barricades, warning signs, flagmen and
lengths and sequence specified in the Special the like. The Programme for Passing of Traffic shall be
Specifications in accordance with and complementary to the
Programme of Works submitted under SECTION 1200
(b) Providing deviations above.
Except where the existing road is to remain in use for
through traffic, the Contractor shall provide, construct or In the preparation of this Programme of Passage of
put in order such deviations as may be provided for Traffic, the Contractor should take into consideration
deviating traffic from such sections of the road as are the following:
handed over to him. − The Contractor shall conduct his operation in such
a manner that no greater length or amount of work
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and is undertaken than he can carry out efficiently
easy passage of public traffic past or over sections of having due regards to the rights and convenience of
roads of which he has occupation. The Contractor shall the public.
at all times in all his operations and in using his − If the Contractor proposes a road closure he shall
constructional equipment take the necessary care to provide an alternative routing of the traffic which
protect the public and to facilitate the flow of traffic. must be approved by the Engineer.
− No revisions shall be made to the approved
(c) Minimum vertical clearance Programme for Passing of Traffic without the prior
The minimum vertical clearance over any section of a written permission of the Engineer, and the
deviation shall be 5m. Contractor shall allow 14 days for the Engineer to
review any request for a revision of the Programme
(d) Property and survey beacons for Passage of Traffic.
Where possible, deviations shall be constructed so as − The Programme for Passage of Traffic shall
not to damage or displace property or trigonometrically- conform in all respects with the requirements of this

Specification. passing through, over or across the Works, shall be

kept to a minimum. They shall, in no case exceed half
(b) Traffic control devices an hour and should normally be less than 20 minutes.
Traffic –control devices involve, but are not restricted to, Any method of working which requires road closures in
the use of flagmen, traffic lights, portable STOP and GO excess of 30 minutes shall be the subject of 48 hours
sings, and traffic – control signs, whichever may be the prior notice to and agreement of the Engineer, who may
most suitable methods under prevailing circumstances. refuse to allow such closure in default of due notice.
The type of construction, spacing and placement of The Contractor shall take particular care, when passing
traffic control facilities shall be in accordance with the traffic through his Works, that all excavations and other
prescriptions and recommendation of the latest edition hazards are properly protected with barriers and are
of the relevant Road Traffic Signs Manual, and in illuminated at night.
accordance with the drawings and instructions of the
Engineer. The various traffic- control facilities which
may be required are the following, or as directed by the 1504 CONSTRUCTION OF DEVIATIONS
Engineer:
(a) General
(i) Road signs and barricades Where in the opinion of the Contractor it is preferable
Road signs shall include all road signs in the R, W not to pass traffic through the Works, the Contractor
and G series, which shall also include danger plates will, upon previous approval of the Engineer, be allowed
and movable barricades (ROAD CLOSED signs to construct and maintain deviations provided that such
and the chevron type). Road signs shall be made of deviations are passable to traffic at all times, subject to
steel sheets, 1.40 mm thick, or other materials the provisions of SECTION 1507 below.
approved by the Engineer; all background letters
and symbols shall be of engineering – grade The length of the deviations shall be of the shortest
reflective material. Road signs shall comply with practical length having regard to gradient and
the requirements of SECTION 5400. obstruction and shall be sited as agreed between the
Engineer and the Contractor.
(ii) Channelisation devices and barricades
Channelisation devices shall include cones, Where required in the Special Specifications or by the
delineators and drums. Barricades include barrier Engineer, temporary deviations shall be provided with
lattices or other types as shown on the Drawings bituminous surfacing in accordance with the
and movable barricades. requirements of the Special Specifications or of SERIES
4000, or as may be prescribed by the Engineer.
Steel drums shall be cut, painted white and
provided with reflective tape strips as shown on the (b) Widths, gradient, camber
Drawings. Drums shall be kept in position with For the deviation of an existing trunk road, the
ballast of sand or soil.. Stones shall not be used for carriageway width of the temporary road shall be the
this purpose. Drums shall be maintained in a clean width of the existing carriageway or 6.0m whichever is
and serviceable condition. the lesser. If wider deviations are required, such widths
shall be specified in the Special Specifications or on the
(iii) Barriers Drawings.
Barriers for preventing vehicles from leaving the
permitted lanes may consist of guardrails on both For the deviation of a minor public road or a private
sides of steel drums for separating two opposite road, the width of the temporary carriageway shall be
traffic streams, movable concrete barriers (New the same as the existing carriageway, or such lesser
Jersey type), or ordinary guardrails which comply width as agreed by the Engineer.
with the provision of SECTION 5200.
Where in the opinion of the engineer, it is impracticable
(iv) Warning devices and traffic lights to provide a two-lane deviation, a single lane
Warning devices consist of amber flicker lights. carriageway not less than 3.0 m wide with traffic control
Traffic lights shall be operated automatically, by and passing places shall be provided.
radio or manually in a proper manner by adequately
trained staff. The verges of the deviation shall be cleared and
maintained clear for a width of at least 1.5 m beyond
(v) Road markings the edge of the carriageway or such lesser width as the
Road markings, as specified in SECTION 5500, may Engineer may agree.
be required on sealed surfaces and will include
road marking studs wherever necessary. The road The gradient of any deviation shall not be greater than
markings shall be made in accordance with the 10% except with the express approval of the Engineer,
provisions of SECTION 5500. Any painted road and any acute intersection of gradient shall be properly
markings which no longer apply shall be removed graded to a smooth vertical curve, to the satisfaction of
or over painted with black road paint. Road marking the Engineer.
studs shall be removed completely.
(c) Passage and control of traffic

1505 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE WORKS
It is an intention of the Contract that public traffic should
be able to pass along the road to be
(a) General
reconstructed/rehabilitated including bridges at all times
Temporary ditches and culverts of adequate size and
during construction and in all weather. For this purpose,
strength shall be provided alongside and under the
the Contractor will be required to order his work etc. in
temporary road to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
such a way as to assure that a single lane at least 3.0m
wide is available for public traffic at all times and he
The Contractor shall construct the necessary temporary
shall furnish sufficient pilot-cars and drivers, competent
drainage works such as side drains, catch water drains,
flagmen and the like to control and regulate the flow of
mitre drains, culverts, etc to deal adequately with
traffic under one-way traffic operations.
surface runoff. The temporary culverts of adequate
type and size shall be installed on existing drainage
The frequency and duration of delays to traffic while

channels wherever required by the Engineer. Any required minimum density.

suitable prefabricated culverts salvaged from an
existing road or an abandoned deviation may be re- 1508 ASSISTANCE TO THE PUBLIC
used if in a good condition and approved by the The Contractor shall be responsible for safely
Engineer. maintaining and directing traffic through or around any
part of the Works included in the Contract, with the
(b) Temporary bridges maximum practical convenience, for the full twenty four
Where it is necessary to construct a deviation to permit hours of each day.
construction of a new bridge the Contractor shall
provide and maintain a temporary bridge over the The Contractor shall render to the public all possible
waterway. The minimum clear width of a temporary assistance when they are passing over roads
bridge shall be 3.5 m and the strength shall be maintained by him and over minor, private or temporary
adequate for normal road vehicles. The bridge design roads or bridges when used as deviation or when
and specification shall be approved by the Engineer passing through the Works.
before construction is commenced. Approach roads
shall comply with CLAUSE 1504 above. Whenever the Contractor’s operations create a
condition hazardous to traffic or to the public, he shall
(c) Drifts furnish, erect and maintain such fences, barricades,
Where a road is deviated to cross a large watercourse lights, signs and other services, as are necessary to
which is impracticable to bridge or culvert, a drift shall prevent accidents or damage or injury to the public.
be constructed of stones or small boulders with the
intersections filled with spalls to make a firm bottom. The Contractor shall also train and furnish such guards
This pitching shall be carried up the banks of the and flagmen as are necessary to give adequate
watercourse above the flood level of the stream. The warning to traffic or to the public of any dangerous
dimension of the drift shall be such that there is less conditions that might be encountered and shall provide
than 0.15 m of water over the road at all times, except prompt assistance to any vehicle experiencing difficulty
in flood. The edge of the drift shall be defined with posts in passing over the Works under construction, or
or other markers and a gauge installed to indicate the through any deviations or roads maintained by the
maximum depth of water over the road. The minimum Contractor, if necessary by providing a towing vehicle,
width of the drift shall be 3.5 m. labour and tow rope to assist such vehicles.
The Contractor shall render to the public all possible Should the Contractor appear to be neglectful or
assistance, particularly in times of flood, and if negligent in furnishing warning and protective
necessary shall provide a vehicle, labour and tow rope measures, as above provided, the Engineer may direct
to extract vehicles immobilised in the drift. attention to the existence of hazard, and the necessary
warning and protective measures shall be furnished and
1506 EARTHWORKS FOR DEVIATIONS OR installed at the Contractor’s expense. Should the
EXISTING ROADS USED AS DEVIATIONS Engineer point out the inadequacy of warning and
The Contractor shall shape and grade the deviations protective measures, such action on the part of the
and shall make full use of all material that can be Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from
obtained from alongside the deviation, from side cuts or responsibility for public safety or relieve him of his
from the immediate vicinity. If an adequate quantity of obligation to furnish and pay for these devices.
material cannot be obtained in this manner, he shall
import material from other sources. Where necessary, 1509 USE OF MINOR PRIVATE ROADS AS
cuttings shall be made to obtain a satisfactory vertical DEVIATION
alignment. The Contractor shall also perform the Where agreed by the Engineer that the Contractor may
necessary clearing and grubbing, including the removal use a minor or private road as a deviation, the
of all trees and stumps. Where the subgrade is not Contractor shall be entirely responsible for negotiation
sufficiently dense in its natural state, it shall be given with and obtaining the prior consent of the authorities
three roller passes compaction as specified in SERIES and owners, and shall pay for any additional
3000 prior to the construction of the earthworks. maintenance costs or shall if necessary, himself
maintain the minor road for the period it is used as a
All material shall be watered, mixed and compacted deviation, shall reinstate the road afterwards to the
with suitable compaction equipment to give sufficient satisfaction of the authority or owner, and shall
density to the material so that it will be capable of compensate the authority or owner for any damage
carrying traffic without undue wear or distress. In case arising out of the use of the road as a deviation.
of disagreement between the Engineer and the
Contractor as to the adequacy of this compaction, dry The standard of such minor or private road when used
density of 90% of BS-heavy density shall be taken as as a deviation shall at least comply with Clause above
the required minimum density. for temporary roads and if necessary the Contractor
shall, at his own expense improve the road to bring it to
Wherever possible, fords shall be constructed from rock this standard before it is used as a deviation, and shall
fill or course material. Pollution and siltation of water maintain it to that standard while it is used as deviation.
courses shall be controlled. The Contractor shall
construct cuttings where required. The length of the deviation shall not be excessive and
shall be kept as short as practicable. As a guide, any
1507 GRAVELLING OF DEVIATIONS OR part of the deviation shall generally not exceed twice
EXISTING ROADS USED AS DEVIATIONS the undeviated length of the corresponding part of the
The deviations shall be provided with a wearing course original road, while the total route distance via all
of suitable gravel approved by the Engineer. deviations shall generally not exceed that via the
original road by more than 25%.
The Contractor shall provide, spread, water mix and
compact such material to a density where it can carry 1510 RIDING QUALITY AND MAINTENANCE
traffic without undue wear and tear. In case of OF DEVIATIONS AND EXISTING ROADS
disagreement between the Engineer and the contractor USED AS DEVIATIONS
as to the adequacy of compaction, a dry density equal
The surface of all deviations shall be maintained
to 90% of BS-Heavy density shall be taken as the

smooth, free from ruts and potholes and loose material, two way traffic over the entire width at the end of each
and shall be graded and watered as required. day’s work the Contractor shall provide adequate
flagmen, signs, traffic lights, barricades, light a and the
Where existing roads are to be used as deviations, the necessary staff at his own cost to ensure a free flow of
Contractor shall after consultation with the Owner or traffic alternatively in each direction through the entire
Authority having control of such road, carry out any period when the roadway is open to one way traffic
improvements, repairs, alterations or additions to such only.
roads as may be required to bring them to a conditions
suitable for traffic and to the satisfaction of the 1513 THE USE OF DEVIATIONS BY THE
Engineer. CONTRACTOR
Where the Contractor constructs haul or construction
All deviations and existing roads used as deviation shall
roads for accommodating construction traffic, he shall
be maintained by the Contractor in a safe trafficable
construct and maintain them at his own cost and in
condition. The roads and deviations shall be graded
accordance with details previously agreed with the
and watered to provide a smooth riding surface free
Engineer, in writing. Such roads shall be obliterated and
from corrugations and to keep dust down. All potholes
their surfaces properly reinstated when no longer
shall be repaired immediately.
required, all at the Contractor’s owns cost.
The Contractor shall also water the deviations to keep
The Contractor shall have the right to use public roads,
down dust or to facilitate the proper suppressant as
including deviations open to public traffic, but where his
may be required instead of water if considered by the
own traffic causes excessive damage or wear to such
Engineer to be more effective. All drainage works shall
roads or constitutes a condition hazardous to public
be maintained in a good working order.
traffic, the Engineer shall have the right to regulate his
traffic over such deviations and require the Contractor
1511 SIGNS, BARRIERS AND TEMPORARY to provide at his own cost, such maintenance as in the
FENCING, GATES AND GRID GATES Engineer’s opinion will be necessary.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision,
erection, maintenance and removal of all temporary 1514 OBLITERATION OF DEVIATIONS
signs and barriers necessary for safety and When traffic is routed permanently onto the new road
convenience, to pass traffic not only upon the existing following the completion of construction, the deviations
road to be constructed or realigned and such temporary which are no longer required and , unless otherwise
roads or bridges as he may construct, but also on all instructed by the Engineer, such sections of obsolete
minor and private roads off the site of the Works which roads and road marking as instructed by the Engineer,
are used as deviations. Temporary “Advance Detour shall be obliterated in accordance with SECTION 5800.
Signs” shall be erected before any road junction and a
“Detour Sign” shall be erected at the junction of the 1515 PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO COMPLY
deviation route and other minor roads where there is
any possibility of the diverted traffic mistaking the route WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS
of the detour, and there shall be mounted on the same If the Engineer is not satisfied that the Contractor has
posts, a sign bearing the inscription “Detour”. fully complied with the provisions of these
Specifications having given adequate notice to the
In addition, any hazard such as a narrow bridge, drift, Contractor and in the event of the Contractor’s
level crossing, steep hill, sharp bend, etc. occurring on subsequent default, the Employer shall deduct from any
the deviation shall be marked by the Contractor with the payments due to the Contractor all reasonable
appropriate sign, if the existing sign is inadequate or expenses necessitated by the failure of the Contractor
none existent. All sharp bends, and all places where the to properly comply with the provisions of these
shoulder is higher than 2.0 m above the natural ground Specifications.
shall be marked with painted posts.
Where ordered by the Engineer or specified on the No separate payment will be made in respect of work
Drawings or in the Special Specifications, the undertaken in compliance with the provisions of this
Contractor shall make his own arrangements for Section. The relevant cost shall be included by the
providing either new fencing and gates or moving and Contractor in his rates in the Bill of Quantities or
subsequently reinstating existing fencing and gates in elsewhere, except where separate payment is specified
accordance with the provisions of SECTION 5300. in the Special Specifications and included in the Bill of
Quantities.
1512 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC WHERE
THE ROAD IS CONSTRUCTED IN HALF Construction of temporary deviations provided with
bituminous surfacing shall be taken to require separate
WIDTHS payment under the relevant items provided in SERIES
Whereby for reasons of difficult terrain or for any other 4000.
reason, the construction of deviations is not feasible,
the Contractor shall upon the written instruction the
Engineer, construct the road in half widths to allow
traffic to use that half of the road not under construction.
The length of the half width construction shall be kept to
a minimum, with provision for traffic travelling in
opposite directions to pass at frequent intervals.
The Contractor shall arrange his work so as to allow

traffic to have free one way access to at least half the
width of the roadway at all times during the
Construction period. He shall maintain that half of the
road, which is being used for traffic for the time being,
free from corrugations, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer
Should the road be not in a safe trafficable condition for

SERIES 1000: GENERAL shortest route approved by the Engineer. The haul
distance for borrow materials shall be measured to the
nearest 0.1 km.
SECTION 1600: OVERHAUL
Any handling of materials such as stabilisation, crushing
and/or screening oversize materials, etc. shall not have
CONTENTS: any effect on the haul distance.
CLAUSE PAGE
(c) Free- haul distance
1601 SCOPE 1600-35 The free haul distance shall be the distance which
1602 DEFINITIONS 1600-35 material as described in SUBCLAUSE 1602(a) must be
1603 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1600-35
transported on any trip before overhaul becomes
payable. This distance shall be as given in TABLE
1602/1 for material in the respective layers.
1601 SCOPE Overhaul shall apply to all overhaul in excess of the
This Section covers the hauling of overhaul materials as distance given for materials where the following
defined herein from the place of excavation to the material types are prescribed as a minimum quality in
position of placement, where such haul distance is in the Specifications or on the Drawings:
excess of free haul distance as defined herein.
Overhaul will be paid for as specified in the Special TABLE 1602/1

Specification. FREE HAUL DISTANCES
Free haul
1602 DEFINITIONS Material for layer distance
(km)
(a) Layers to which overhaul applies Fill and improved subgrade layers 1.0
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to that overhaul will (G3, G7, G15, DR)
only be paid for in the cases where it is so specified in Subbase and base course 2.0
the Special Specification. Overhaul material shall be (G25, G45, G60, G80, C2, C1, CM)
transported material to which overhaul applies when
hauled in excess of the free haul distance and shall Gravel wearing course (GW) 5.0
include only the gravel materials, soil or rock materials
used in the construction of fills, pavement layers, banks (d) Overhaul distance
and dykes as follows: The overhaul distance shall be the total haul distance,
minus the free haul distance measured to the nearest
(i) Earthworks where the following material types are 0.1 km.
prescribed as the minimum quality:
− Fill materials: G3, Dumprock (e) Quantity of material
− Improved subgrade: G7, G15 The quantity of material overhauled shall in all cases be
measured in the same manner as the item for the layer
(ii) Pavement layers where the following material types to which the overhaul applies.
are prescribed as the minimum quality:
− Subbase or base course: G25, G45, G60, G80, 1603 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
C2, C1, CM Overhaul will only be paid for in the cases where it is so
− Gravel wearing course: GW specified in the Special Specifications. In the cases
where overhaul is paid for, the measurement and
Overhaul shall not be paid for materials made from payment shall be as follows:
crushed stone or crushed rock such as material types
CRR and CRS, nor for materials used in side fill,
bituminous layers and bituminous seals, concrete and ITEM UNIT
rip-rap.
16.01 OVERHAUL OF MATERIAL
HAULED IN EXCESS OF ITS
(b) Haul distance
RESPECTIVE FREE HAUL DISTANCE
The haul distance shall be the distance between the
centre of volume of the overhaul material in the cut or (a) MATERIAL FOR FILL OR IMPROVED CUBIC METRE
borrow pit before excavation and the centre of volume SUBGRADE LAYERS X KILOMETRE
3
of the portion of the fill constructed with the overhaul (m km)
material. (b) MATERIAL FOR PAVEMENT LAYERS CUBIC METRE
AS SPECIFIED X KILOMETRE
3
The distance between the centres of volume shall be (m km)
measured along the centre line of the road, and any (c) MATERIAL FOR GRAVEL WEARING CUBIC METRE
additional distance of haul ascribed to the following of a COURSE X KILOMETRE
3
different haul route will not be considered. Cut and fill (m km)
volumes for ramps, road approaches and connections
on either side of the road shall be considered as The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
concentrated at the centre line of the main roadway overhaul material for layers described in CLAUSE
under construction for computing overhaul quantities for 1602(a), measured in accordance with CLAUSE 1602(e),
payment, unless otherwise specified in the Special hauled in excess of free haul distance prescribed in
Specifications. CLAUSE 1602(c), multiplied by the overhaul distance
measured for payment purposes in as described
The haul distance for material from borrow pit shall be CLAUSE 1602(d),
measured along the shortest route determined by the
Engineer as being feasible and satisfactory. Should the The bid rates overhaul shall include full compensation
Contractor choose to haul material over some other for hauling material in excess of the free haul distances.
long route, computations for payment shall nevertheless
be based on the haul distance measured along the
SERIES 1000: GENERAL undesirable visual impact of straight lines. Movement

of labour and equipment within the right-of-way and
over routes provided for access to the work shall be
SECTION 1700: performed in a manner to prevent damage to grazing
land, crops, or property.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Except as otherwise provided in this Specifications
PROTECTION AND WASTE special reseeding or replanting will not be required
DISPOSAL under these specifications; however, on completion of
the work, all work areas not seeded shall be scarified
and left in a condition which will facilitate natural
CONTENTS: revegetation, provide for proper drainage, and prevent
CLAUSE PAGE erosion. All unnecessary destruction, scarring, damage,
or defacing of the landscape resulting from the
1701 SCOPE 1000-36 Contractor’s operations shall be repaired, replanted,
1702 GENERAL 1000-36 reseeded or otherwise corrected as directed by the
1703 LANDSCAPE PRESERVATION 1000-36 Engineer, and at the Contractor’s expense.
1704 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION CONTROL 1000-37
1705 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND The species used for replanting must not be listed as a
SHRUBBERY 1000-37 noxious weed and the seed blends used must not
1706 PREVENTION OF W ATER POLLUTION 1000-38 contain seeds from such.
1707 ABATEMENT OF AIR POLLUTION 1000-38
1708 DUST ABATEMENT 1000-38 The use of fertiliser can only be carried out with the
1709 NOISE ABATEMENT 1000-39 approval of the Engineer. Especially near open water
1710 LIGHT ABATEMENT 1000-39 and at sandy soils near drinking water interests, the use
1711 PRESERVATION OF HISTORICAL AND of fertilisers should be avoided. Leaching from manure
ARCHEOLOGICAL DATA 1000-39 to open water areas could also cause nutrients pollution
1712 PESTICIDES 1000-39 to the waters, and the application of such should
1713 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL OF W ASTE therefore be avoided, and only carried out if approved
MATERIALS 1000-39 by the Engineer. When available well decomposed
1714 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1000-40 compost should be preferred to manure.
(b) Construction roads

The location, alignment, and grade of construction
1701 SCOPE roads shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
This section covers the Environmental Protection and When no longer required by the Contractor,
Waste Disposal to be exercised by the Contractor in all construction roads shall, if required by the Engineer, be
work on the Contract. The obligations herein do not restored to the original contour and made impassable to
prejudice any other clauses in this Specification. vehicular traffic. The surfaces of such construction
roads shall be scarified as needed to provide a
1702 GENERAL condition which will facilitate natural revegetation,
The Contractor shall comply with the Statutory provide for proper drainage, and prevent erosion.
Regulations in force in Tanzania regarding
environmental protection and waste disposal and shall (c) Construction facilities
liase with the responsible national and local authorities. The Contractor’s workshops, office, and yard area shall
be located and arranged in a manner to preserve trees
The Contractor shall for those of his activities which and vegetation to the maximum practicable extent. On
have, or are likely to have, an impact on the abandonment, all temporary buildings, including
environment, keep records relating to: concrete footings and slabs, and all construction
- The amount of waste and by-products generated by materials and debris shall be removed from the site.
the activity The area shall be regraded, as required, so that all
- The economic value of the activity surfaces drain naturally, blend with the natural terrain,
- The observable effects of the environment and are left in a condition that will facilitate natural
- How far, in the opinion of the Contractor, the revegetation, provide for proper drainage, and prevent
provisions of the Statute has been complied with. erosion.
The Contractor shall afford the officials of the relevant (d) Blasting precautions
authorities free access to inspect the project site, plant, In addition to any requirements of local regulations, the
workshops and the like to check whether the provisions Contractor shall adopt precautions when using
in the Statute are being complied with. explosives which will prevent scattering of rocks,
stumps, or other debris outside the work area, and
prevent damage to surrounding trees, shrubbery, and
vegetation.
1703 LANDSCAPE PRESERVATION
(e) Quarries, borrow pits and storage areas etc.
(a) General
Problems with erosion in the borrow pit must be
The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the avoided, if necessary by the construction of temporary
natural landscape and shall conduct his construction
banks, but preferably by the choice of pits.
operations so as to prevent any unnecessary
destruction, scarring, or defacing of the natural When they are no longer required, all quarry sites,
surroundings in the vicinity of the work. Except where
borrow pits and areas used for the disposal or storage
clearing is required for permanent works, approved of surplus materials and asphalt plants shall be
construction roads, or excavation operations, all trees, reinstated by landscaping including the replacement
native shrubbery, and vegetation shall be preserved
and spreading of topsoil as directed by and to the
and shall be protected from damage by the Contractor’s satisfaction of the Engineer. Steep quarry walls shall be
construction operations and equipment. The edges of fenced to prevent livestock and people falling in the
clearings and cuts through trees, shrubbery, and quarry. Permanent water holes shall be left unchanged
vegetation shall be irregularly shaped to soften the unless very close to settlements. Under these

circumstances the local people should decide on the Where erosion is a problem, clearing and grubbing
future of the water holes. operations shall be so scheduled and performed that
grading operations and permanent erosion control
Material not capable of supporting vegetation shall be features can follow immediately thereafter if conditions
used as fill and subsequently evenly covered with soft permit; otherwise, temporary erosion control measures
materials. Spoil from road building, excess stockpiled may be required between successive construction
material etc. can only be used for fill in the borrow pit, stages.
provided it does not effect the hydrology of the site. If
there is not sufficient soft material the remaining The Engineer will limit the area of clearing and
portions shall be scarified along the contours to avoid grubbing, excavation, borrow and embankment
erosion. operations in progress commensurate with the
Contractor’s capability in keeping the finished grading,
Haul roads must be obliterated, scarified and earth mulching, seeding and other permanent erosion control
banks constructed to prevent erosion and all damaged measures current in accordance with the schedule.
fences and structures reinstated. Should seasonal limitations make such co-ordination
unrealistic, temporary erosion control measures shall be
Erosion mitigating measures shall be given priority to taken immediately to the extent feasible and justified.
ensure proper drainage, being of the great importance
around human habitation, where permanent water holes The Engineer may increase or decrease the amount of
might be a health risk. surface area of erodible earth material to be exposed at
one time by clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow
It must be noted that the Taking-Over Certificate will not and fill operations as determined by his analysis of
be issued, before a proper reshaping and replanting of project conditions.
borrow pits has been carried out to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. In the event that temporary erosion control measures
are required due to the Contractor’s negligence,
carelessness or failure to install permanent controls as
1704 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION CONTROL part of the Works, scheduled or ordered by the
Engineer, such Works shall be carried out by the
(a) Scope Contractor at his own expense.
These Works shall consist of temporary control
measures as shown on the Drawings or required by the The Works prescribed in this Clause shall not be
Engineer during the process of the Works, to control measured for direct payment, but shall be considered
soil erosion and water pollution, by use of berms, as subsidiary Works, the costs of which will be deemed
dykes, silt fences, brush barriers, dams, sediment to be included by the Contractor in his rates in the Bill of
basins, filter mats, netting, gravel, mulches, grasses, Quantities for other items of work.
slope drains, and other erosion control devices or
methods. Appropriate control measures will be required
to avoid emission of high concentration of sediments 1705 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND
into wetlands, swampy areas and other particular SHRUBBERY
sensitive areas.
(a) Preservation
The temporary erosion control provisions shall be All trees and shrubbery which are not specifically
coordinated with permanent erosion control features to required to be cleared or removed for construction
assure economical, effective and continuous erosion purposes shall be preserved and shall be protected
control throughout the period of the Works. from any damage that may be caused by the
Contractor’s construction operations and equipment.
(b) Construction Special care shall be exercised where trees or shrubs
A schedule of proposed temporary (and permanent) soil are exposed to injuries by construction equipment,
erosion control Works shall be developed by the blasting, excavating, dumping, chemical damage, or
Contractor at the commencement of the Contract, in other operations; and the Contractor shall adequately
consultation with the Engineer and to his satisfaction. protect such trees by use of protective barriers or other
methods approved by the Engineer. The removal of
The Contractor shall carry out (and maintain) temporary trees or shrubs will be permitted only after prior
erosion control to prevent soil erosion that will adversely approval by the Engineer.
affect construction operations, damage adjacent
properties, or cause contamination of adjacent streams The layout of the Contractor’s construction facilities
or other watercourses, lakes, ponds, swamps or other such as workshops, ware houses, storage areas, and
areas of water impoundment. Such Works may involve parking areas; location of access and haul routes; and
construction of temporary berms, dykes, dams, operation in borrow and spoil areas shall be planned
sediment basins, slope drains or use of temporary and conducted in such a manner that all trees and
mulches, mats, seeding or other control devices or shrubbery not approved for removal by the Engineer
methods as necessary to control erosion. Cut and fill shall be preserved and adequately protected from either
slopes shall be seeded and mulched as the excavation direct or indirect damage by the Contractor’s
proceeds, to the extent considered desirable and operations. Except in emergency cases or when
practicable by the Engineer. otherwise approved by the Engineer, trees shall not be
used for anchorage. Where such use is approved, the
Temporary erosion control may include construction trunk shall be wrapped with a sufficient thickness of
outside the right-of-way where such work is necessary, approved protective material before any rope, cable, or
as a result of roadway construction, such as borrow pit wire is placed.
and quarry operations, haul roads and equipment
storage sites. (b) Repair or treatment of damage
The Contractor shall be responsible for injuries to trees
The Contractor shall incorporate all permanent erosion and shrubs caused by his operations. The term “injury”
control features as shown on the Drawings into the shall include, without limitation, bruising, scarring,
Works at the earliest practicable time as outlined in his tearing, and breaking of roots, trunk or branches. All
schedule, to minimise the need for temporary erosion injured trees and shrubs shall be repaired or treated
control measures.
without delay, at the Contractor’s expense. If damage flocculating processes that are not harmful to fish,
occurs, the Engineer will determine the method of repair recirculation systems for washing of aggregates, or
or treatment to be used for injured trees and shrubs as other approved methods. Any such wastewaters
recommended by an experienced horticulturist or a discharged into surface waters shall contain the least
licensed tree surgeon provided by and at the expense concentration of settleable material possible. For the
of the Contractor. All repairs or treatment of injured purpose of these specifications, settleable material is
trees shall be performed under the direction of an defined as that material which will settle from the water
experienced horticulturist or a licensed tree surgeon by gravity during a 1-hour quiescent detention period.
provided by and at the expense of the Contractor.
(b) Compliance with laws and regulations
(c) Replacement The Contractor shall comply with all applicable
Trees or shrubs that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are Tanzanian laws, orders, regulations, and water quality
beyond saving shall be removed and replaced early in standards concerning the control and abatement of
the next planting season. The replacements shall be water pollution.
the same species, or other approved species, and of
the maximum size that is practicable to plant and If wells or other water sources, nevertheless, are
sustain growth in the particular environment. polluted, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to
Replacement trees and shrubs shall be stayed, compensate for this and provide the consumers with
watered, and maintained for a period of 1 year. Any clean drinking water transported through pipes from an
replacement tree or shrub that dies shall be removed unpolluted source if required in the opinion of the
and replaced, as directed by the Engineer, with such Engineer.
replacements being maintained for a period of 1 year
from the date of replacement. 1707 ABATEMENT OF AIR POLLUTION
The Contractor shall comply with applicable Tanzanian
To obtain the maximum success with the planting, the laws and regulations concerning the prevention and
trees shall be well suited for the environment. This will control of air pollution.
normally mean native species of trees or cultivated
trees from local nurseries. Notwithstanding the above in conduct of construction
activities and operation of equipment, the Contractor
shall utilise such practicable methods and devices as
1706 PREVENTION OF WATER POLLUTION are reasonably available to control, prevent, and
otherwise minimise atmospheric emissions or
(a) General discharges of air contaminants.
The Contractor’s construction activities shall be
performed by methods that will prevent entrance, or The emission of dust into the atmosphere shall be
accidental spillage, of solid matter, contaminants, strictly controlled during the manufacture, handling, and
debris, and other pollutants and wastes into streams, storage of concrete and road aggregates, and the
flowing or dry watercourses, lakes, and underground Contractor shall use such methods and equipment as
water sources. Such pollutants and wastes include, but are necessary for the collection and disposal, or
are not restricted to, refuse, garbage, cement, concrete, prevention, of dust during these operations. The
sanitary waste, industrial waste, radioactive Contractor’s methods of storing and handling cement
substances, oil and other petroleum products, and pozzolans shall also include means of eliminating
aggregate processing tailings, mineral salts, and atmospheric discharges of dust.
thermal pollution.
Equipment and vehicles that show excessive emissions
Dewatering work for structure foundations or earthwork of exhaust gases due to poor engine adjustments, or
operations adjacent to, or encroaching on, streams or other inefficient operating conditions, shall not be
watercourses shall be conducted in a manner to operated until corrective repairs or adjustments are
prevent muddy water and eroded materials from made.
entering the streams or watercourses by construction of
intercepting ditches, bypass channels, barriers, settling Burning of materials resulting from clearing of trees and
ponds, or by other approved means. Excavated brush, combustible construction materials, and rubbish
materials or other construction materials shall not be will be permitted only when atmospheric conditions for
stockpiled or deposited near or on streambanks, lake burning are considered favourable and when authorised
shorelines, or other watercourse perimeters where they by the Engineer. In lieu of burning, such combustible
can be washed away by high water or storm runoff or materials may be disposed of by other methods as
can in any way encroach upon the watercourse itself. provided in this SPECIFICATION. Where open burning is
permitted, the burn piles shall be properly constructed
Turbidity increases in a stream or other bodies of water to minimise smoke, and in no case shall unapproved
that are caused by construction activities shall be materials, such as tires, plastics, rubber products,
strictly controlled. When necessary to perform required asphalt products, or other materials that create heavy
construction work in a stream channel, the turbidity may black smoke or nuisance odours, be burned.
be increased, as approved by the Engineer, for the
shortest practicable period required to complete such 1708 DUST ABATEMENT
work. This required construction work may include During the performance of the work required by these
such work as deviation of a stream, construction or specifications or any operations appurtenant thereto,
removal of cofferdams, specified earthwork in or whether on right-of-way provided by the Employer or
adjacent to a stream channel, pile driving, and elsewhere, the Contractor shall furnish all the labour,
construction of turbidity control structures. Mechanised equipment, materials, and means required, and shall
equipment shall not operate in flowing water except as carry out proper and efficient measures wherever and
necessary to construct crossings or to perform the as often as necessary to reduce the dust nuisance, and
required construction. to prevent dust which has originated from his operations
from damaging crops, orchards, cultivated fields, and
Wastewaters from aggregate processing, concrete dwellings, or causing a nuisance to persons. The
batching, or other construction operations shall not Contractor will be held liable for any damage resulting
enter streams, watercourses, or other surface waters from dust originating from his operations under these
without the use of such turbidity control methods as specifications on the right-of-way or elsewhere. The
settling ponds, gravel-filter entrapment dikes, approved
Engineer may direct sprinkling or other measures for Contractor must be up to date on the definitions and
dust abatement if necessary to obtain adequate control. regulations pertaining to hazardous substances. These
are defined as substances (or compounds thereof)
1709 NOISE ABATEMENT which may endanger health of human, animals or the
The Contractor shall comply with applicable Tanzanian environment by reason of its toxic, corrosive, irritant,
laws, orders, and regulations concerning the sensitising, inflammable or radioactive nature.
prevention, control, and abatement of excessive noise. Hazardous substances are also such as depletes the
ozone layer.
Workers shall be sufficiently supplied with ear-
protection as required in the opinion of the Engineer For hazardous substances a permit for the possessing,
and instructed in using them. handling, import etc. is needed. The Contractor must
assure that he gets the needed permits for hazardous
Blasting, the use of jackhammers, pile driving, rock substances from a Licensing Officer appointed by the
crushing, or other operations producing high-intensity Minister. The Contractor must allow a certified inspector
impact noise may be performed at night only upon to control the Contractor's handling of hazardous
approval of the Engineer. compounds.
1710 LIGHT ABATEMENT

The Contractor shall exercise special care to direct all 1713 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE
stationary floodlights to shine downward at an angle MATERIALS
less than horizontal. These floodlights shall also be
shielded so as not to be a nuisance to surrounding (a) Cleanup
areas. No lighting shall include a residence in its direct The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the construction
beam. area, including storage areas used, free from
accumulations of waste materials or rubbish.
The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting All waste water and sewage from office, residential and
lighting problems when they occur as directed by the mobile camps shall be piped to soak pits or other
Engineer. disposal areas constructed in accordance with local
government regulations, and where and when such
1711 PRESERVATION OF HISTORICAL AND regulations require it the Contractor shall obtain a
ARCHEOLOGICAL DATA permit or other appropriate documentation approving
the disposal methods being used.
The Contractor agrees that should he or any of his
employees in the performance of this contract discover
All used fuels, oils, other plant or vehicle fluids, and old
evidence of possible scientific, historical, prehistorical,
tyres and tubes shall be collected to a central disposal
or archaeological data he will notify the Engineer
point, on a regular basis and disposed of as specified
immediately giving the location and nature of the
below.
findings. Written confirmation shall be forwarded within
2 days. The Contractor shall exercise care so as not to
All household, office, workshop and other solid waste
damage artifacts or fossils uncovered during excavation
shall be collected to a central disposal area, on a daily
operations and shall provide such cooperation and
basis and disposed of in a manner approved by the
assistance as may be necessary to preserve the
Engineer.
findings for removal or other disposition by the
Employer.
Servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles shall
whenever possible be carried out at a workshop area.
Where appropriate by reason of a discovery, the
This workshop area shall be equipped with secure
Engineer may order delays in the time of performance,
storage areas for fuels oils and other fluids constructed
or changes in the work, or both. If such delays, or
in such a way as to contain any spillages which may
changes, or both, are ordered, the time of performance
occur, and similar storage where used fluids can be
and contract price shall be adjusted in accordance with
stored securely prior to their disposal.
the applicable clauses in the Conditions of this
Contract.
When servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles is
carried out away from the workshop area it shall be
The Contractor agrees to insert this Clause in all
done at locations and in such a manner as to avoid
subcontracts which involve the performance of work on
spillage and contamination of streams and other
the terrain of the site.
drainage courses. Any spillages shall be cleaned up by
either burning in place or collecting the contaminated
1712 PESTICIDES, TOXIC WASTE AND soils and burning them at the central disposal area, all
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Pesticides include herbicides, insecticides, fungicides,
rodenticides, piscicides, surface disinfectants, animal Prior to completion of the work, the Contractor shall
repellents, and insect repellents. Should the Contractor remove from the vicinity of the work all plant facilities,
find it necessary to use pesticides in work areas of this buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms,
contract, he shall submit his plan for such use to the and other like material, belonging to him or used under
Engineer for written approval. his direction during construction. All work areas shall
be graded and left in a neat manner conforming to the
The Contractor shall read and comply with all labelling natural appearance of the landscape as provided
requirements when using pesticides. elsewhere in the Specifications.
Toxic waste must be collected in appropriate containers Any residue deposited on the ground from washing out
(depending on the compound) and kept in approved transit mix trucks or any similar concrete operations
storage. Depending on the compound in question shall be buried or cleaned up in a manner acceptable to
different ways of destruction will be necessary. the Engineer.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to seek the In the event of the Contractor’s failure to perform the
required permissions to handle substances or above work, the work may be performed by the
compounds that are defined as hazardous, i. e. the Employer, at the expense of the Contractor, and his

surety or sureties shall be liable therefor.
(b) Disposal of waste material

(i) General
Waste materials including, but not restricted to,
refuse, garbage, sanitary wastes, industrial wastes,
and oil and other petroleum products, shall be
disposed of by the Contractor. Disposal of
combustible materials shall be by burying, where
burial of such materials is approved by the
Engineer; by burning, where burning of approved
materials is permitted; or by removal from the
construction area. Disposal of noncombustible
materials shall be by burying, where burial of such
materials is approved by the Engineer, or by
removal from the construction area. Waste
materials removed from the construction area shall
be dumped at an approved dump.
(ii) Disposal of material by burying

Only materials approved by the Engineer may be
buried. Burial shall be in pits the location, size and
depth of which shall be approved by the Engineer.
The pits shall be covered by at least 0.6 metre of
earth material prior to abandonment.
(iii) Disposal of material by burning

All materials to be burned shall be piled in
designated burning areas in such a manner as will
cause the least fire hazards. Burning shall be
thorough and complete and all charred pieces
remaining after burning, except for scattered small
pieces, shall be removed from the construction area
and disposed of as otherwise provided in this
SUBLAUSE.
The Contractor shall, at all times, take special

precautions to prevent fire from spreading beyond
the piles being burned and shall be liable for any
damage caused by his burning operations. The
Contractor shall have available, at all times, suitable
equipment and supplies for use in preventing and
suppressing fires and shall be subject to all laws
and regulations locally applicable for
presuppression, suppression, and prevention of
fires.
(iv) Disposal of material by removal

Material to be disposed of by removal from the
construction area shall be removed from the area
prior to the completion of the work under these
specifications. All materials removed shall become
the property of the Contractor.
Materials to be disposed of by dumping shall be

hauled to an approved dump. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to make any
necessary arrangements with private parties and
with local officials pertinent to locations and
regulations of such dumping. Any fees for charges
required to be paid for dumping of materials shall
be paid by the Contractor and shall be included in
the prices bid in the Bill of Quantities for other items
of work.

Except as specifically included in the Bill of Quantities
or otherwise provided above no separate measurement
or payment will be made for any work included in this
Section, the relevant cost of all these requirements
being included by the Contractor in his rates in the Bill
of Quantities for other items of work.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 SERIES 2000 - DRAINAGE
SERIES 2000
DRAINAGE
SECTION PAGE
2100 DRAINS 2000-2
2200 PREFABRICATED CULVERTS 2000-8
2300 CONCRETE KERBING, CONCRETE
CHANNELLING, OPEN CONCRETE
CHUTES AND CONCRETE LININGS
FOR OPEN DRAINS 2000-19
2400 ASPHALT AND CONCRETE BERMS 2000-24
2500 PITCHING, STONEWORK AND
PROTECTION AGAINST EROSION 2000-26
2600 GABIONS 2000-31

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
SERIES 1000 GENERAL
APPENDICES

SERIES 2000: DRAINAGE All culverts indicated by the Engineer shall be cleared.
The Contractor shall remove all undesirable materials,
all silt, sediment, driftwood, debris and rubble that have
SECTION 2100: DRAINS accumulated in and around the culvert inlet and outlet
structures and in the culvert barrels. All materials
resulting from the clearing operations shall be disposed
CONTENTS: of at locations approved by the Engineer. The clearing
CLAUSE PAGE shall preferably be done by means of hand tools in
order to prevent damage to existing drainage and other
2101 SCOPE 2000-2 structures. The Contractor shall repair all structures
2102 OPEN DRAINS 2000-2 damaged by him at his own cost, and to the satisfaction
2103 BANKS AND DYKES 2000-2
of the Engineer.
2104 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE 2000-2
2105 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS 2000-4
2106 MANHOLES, OUTLET STRUCTURES AND 2103 BANKS AND DYKES
CLEANING EYES 2000-4 Mitre banks, catchwater banks and dykes shall be
2107 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2000-4 constructed of approved soil or gravel obtained from
2108 open-drain excavation or, if no suitable material can be
obtained from that source, from suitable alternative
sources, and be placed in such a way that the water will
flow on the natural ground and against the bank.
2101 SCOPE The banks and dykes shall be properly compacted to
This Section covers all work in connection with the 90% of BS-Heavy density in layers not exceeding 150
excavation and construction of open drains, subsoil
mm in thickness or as approved by the Engineer.
drainage and banks and dykes at the locations and to
the sizes, shapes, grades and dimensions as shown on If so preferred by the Contractor and approved by the
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, and the
Engineer, mitre banks may also be constructed of hand-
test flushing of subsoil drains. packed stone, provided that the interstices are filled
with an approved cohesive soil.
It also covers the cleaning of open drains and the
repairing of subsoil drainage. In special circumstances
this work may be executed outside the road reserve.
2104 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
It also covers the clearing of existing culverts, including
amongst others the removal of all undesirable materials (a) Materials
that have accumulated in and around inlet and outlet
structures and in the barrels of the culverts. (i) Pipes
Pipes for subsoil drainage shall have the specified
internal diameter, which shall be not less than 100
2102 OPEN DRAINS mm, and shall be one of the following types:
Open-drain excavation shall involve the excavating of
open drains and channels, including channels to direct (1) Perforated pitch-fibre pipes complying with
the course of streams, all as shown on the Drawings or
SABS 921 or equivalent.
as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Perforated or slotted unplasticised PVC pipes
Any excavation required for constructing a channel or
complying with SABS 791 or equivalent.
open drain within the road prism, such as median
drains, side drains and open drains on excavation-slope (3) Perforated high-density polyethylene pressure
benches, shall be classed as Common Excavation or
pipes complying with the requirements of SABS
Rock Excavation as defined in CLAUSE 3603 and shall 533, Part II or equivalent.
be measured and paid for under SECTION 3600.
The size of perforations in perforated pipes shall in
Open drains shall be constructed true to line, grade and
all cases be 8 mm in diameter ±1.5 mm and the
cross-section and shall be so maintained for the
number of perforations per metre shall be not less
duration of the Contract.
than 26 for 100 mm pipes and 52 for 150 mm pipes.
Perforations shall be spaced in two rows for 100
Care shall be taken to avoid excavation below the
mm pipes and four rows for 150 mm pipes. All rows
required grades for the open drains and any excavation
shall be in the lower half of the pipe but no row shall
carried beyond the required grade shall be backfilled
be closer than 36 degrees to the invert. Perforations
with suitable, approved, material and compacted to at
in each row shall be a maximum of 100 mm centre
least 90% of BS-Heavy density by the Contractor at his
to centre.
own expense.
Slotted pipes shall have a slot width of 3 mm ±1.0
Material resulting from the excavations for open drains
mm and slot length of 8 mm ±1.5 mm and the inlet
shall be used in the construction of fills, banks and 2
area per metre shall not be less than 22.5 cm /m
dykes, or for other purposes, or shall be disposed of to
pipe. The arrangement of slots shall be to the
spoil, all as directed by the Engineer.
Engineer's approval.
If ordered by the Engineer, all existing open drains, but
Pipes without slots or perforations required for
excluding open drains constructed by the Contractor
conveying ground water from the subsoil drainage
himself, shall be cleared and, where necessary, shaped
proper to the point of discharge, shall be
by removing the sediment and trimming the floors and
unperforated pitch fibre, PVC or polyethylene pipes
sides.
of the types specified above, or concrete pipes
complying with the requirements of SABS 677, or
Any pitching of open drains ordered by the Engineer
equivalent.
shall be done in accordance with the requirements of
SECTION 2500. The concrete lining of open drains shall
be done as specified in SECTION 2300.

(ii) Permeable filter material Pipes of the type and size required shall then be
Permeable filter materials for bedding and firmly bedded on the natural permeable filter
surrounding of drain pipes shall consist of crushed material, true to level and grade, and be coupled in
stone of suitable grading. Crushed stone shall be of accordance with the requirements. Thereafter the
hard, clean rock. If permeable filter material trench shall be backfilled with natural permeable
conforming to the criteria given below is not filter material in layers not exceeding 250 mm
obtainable in the opinion of the Engineer, then thickness and lightly compacted to such height
geotextile shall be used as directed by the above the pipes as shown on the Drawings or as
Engineer. directed by the Engineer. The natural permeable
filter material shall be lightly compacted and
Permeable filter material shall be free of organic trimmed to the required level. Further layers of finer
material, silt or clay lumps and shall conform to the natural permeable filter material shall then be
following requirements: placed, lightly compacted and finished to an even
(1) d85 for the permeable filter material shall be surface, as directed by the Engineer. The
minimum 1.25 times the width of the slots in the remainder of the trench, if any, shall be backfilled
drainage pipe with approved impermeable material and as
required by the Engineer, in layers not exceeding
(2) d15 for the permeable filter material shall be 100 mm, and compacted to at least the same
maximum 5 times d85 for the adjacent soils density as the surrounding material. The trench
(3) d50 for the permeable filter material shall be shall be specially protected against the ingress of
maximum 25 times d50 for the adjacent soils water until the impermeable layer has been
(4) d15 for the permeable filter material shall be completed. The width of the backfill that will be
minimum 5 times d15 for the adjacent soils measured for payment shall not exceed the
specified width of the trench.
(5) the permeable filter material shall have
maximum 50 % passing the 2 mm sieve The total thickness of each type of natural
(6) the permeable filter material shall have permeable filter material shall be carefully
maximum 3 % passing the 0.075 mm sieve controlled, and when the thinner layers are placed,
suitable spacers shall be used. When successive
where: layers are placed, the lower layer shall not be
d15, d50 and d85 are the corresponding grain walked on and, as far as possible, shall not be
sizes which 15%, 50% and 85% respectively disturbed. Care shall be taken to prevent the
passes in the sieve analysis contamination of natural permeable filter material
during construction of the subsoil drainage system
The filter criteria shall be complied with for both the and all natural permeable filter material
surrounding soil (subgrade) and for possible contaminated by soil or silt shall be removed and
pavement layers above the drain pipe. replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Sieve analysis of the surrounding subgrade and or Perforated and slotted pipes shall be jointed by
subbase shall be performed at each 100 m trench means of couplings. Perforated pipes shall be laid
and the filter material shall be adjusted according to with perforations at the top or bottom as may be
the above specified filter criteria. If necessary, the prescribed.
Engineer can at any position demand further sieve
analysis. The higher end of each subsoil drainage pipe shall
be sealed off with a loose concrete cap of class
The sieve analysis for the subgrade, subbase and 20/19 concrete, as shown on the Drawings, and at
filter materials must be approved by the Engineer the lower end the pipe shall be built into a concrete
before commencement of the drain pipe works. All head wall providing a positive outlet or it shall be
costs to perform sieve analysis are to be included in connected to storm water pipes or culverts. The
the rates for subsoil drains. complete system, together with head walls, shall be
constructed in one process starting at the lower
(iii) Geotextile fabric head wall.
Should the use of geotextile fabric in subsoil
drainage, or as filter blankets, or for any other Any section of a subsoil drainage system
purposes, be specified, it shall comply with the constructed of pipes without perforations or slots
requirements as specified in CLAUSE 3605. The shall be backfilled with impermeable backfill
fabric shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for material as described herein. Where suitable, the
prolonged periods and shall be protected from excavated material may be used for backfilling.
mechanical damage during installation and
construction. (ii) With polyethylene lining to trenches for subsoil
drainage systems
(iv) Composite in-plane draining fabric Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the
The make and class of fabric shown on the Engineer, trenches for subsoil drainage systems
Drawings or approved by the Engineer shall be shall be lined with approved polyethylene sheeting
used. 0.15 mm thick. The polyethylene sheet shall cover
the bottom of the trench and shall extend upwards
on both sides for as far as may be directed by the
(b) Construction of subsoil drainage systems Engineer in each particular case, in order to form a
waterproof channel. At joints the polyethylene
(i) With natural permeable filter material sheeting shall be heat-welded together or lapped by
Trenches for subsoil drainage systems shall be a minimum of 200 mm.
excavated to the dimensions and gradients shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. When backfilling the trench with natural permeable
filter material, care shall be taken not to displace or
A layer of natural permeable filter material of the damage the polyethylene lining in any way. The
grade and thickness as shown on the Drawings use of plastic other than polyethylene will be
shall be placed on the bottom of the trench and be considered, provided that the material is of equal
lightly tamped and finished to the required gradient. quality and is approved by the Engineer.

(iii) With geotextile fabric (a) Rock material

Where specified that geotextile fabric shall be used Material which conforms with the definitions in CLAUSE
for lining in subsoil drainage systems, it shall be 3603 shall be classified as rock material.
procured, furnished and installed as specified and
shown on the Drawings. The fabric shall not be (b) Soft Material
displaced or damaged in any way when the trench All materials not classified as rock material in
is being filled with natural permeable filter material. accordance with CLAUSE 3603 shall be classified as soft
The filter fabric shall be lapped both longitudinally material.
and transversely by at least 300 mm or as
prescribed by the manufacturers. The transverse 2106 MANHOLES, OUTLET STRUCTUREES
lap shall be positioned on top of the box forming the AND CLEANING EYES
drain and shall be stitched together with
Manholes, outlet structures and cleaning eyes for
plastic/galvanised wire or strong synthetic thread at
subsoil drainage systems shall be constructed in
1.0 m intervals. The longitudinal lap shall be in the
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings or
direction of flow.
in positions as instructed by the Engineer.
Geotextile fabric shall meet the requirements in
CLAUSE 3605 and shall be stored under suitable
cover. The fabric shall not be exposed to direct 2107 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
sunlight for prolonged periods and shall be
protected from mechanical damage during ITEM UNIT
installation and construction. 21.01 EXCAVATION FOR OPEN DRAINS:
(a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL
(iv) With composite in-plane drainage fabric SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING
Wherever specified, composite in-plane drainage DEPTH RANGES BELOW THE
systems shall be constructed in accordance with SURFACE LEVEL:
the details shown on the Drawings. The elements of
the system shall be assembled above ground in (i) 0.5 m UP TO 1.5 m CUBIC METRE
3
manageable lengths, and all exposed surfaces shall (m )
be sealed with an approved geofibre seal. The (ii) Exceeding 1.5 m AND UP TO CUBIC METRE
3
trench sides shall be vertical and the composite in- 3.0 m (m )
plane system shall be installed against the side (iii) Exceeding 3.0 m PER CUBIC METRE
3
through which the subsoil flow is expected. The INCREMENT OF 1.5 m (m )
trench shall then be backfilled with sand, which (b) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 21.01(a) FOR CUBIC METRE
shall be saturated with water after placement, up to EXCAVATION IN ROCK AS DEFINED IN
3
(m )
the prescribed level. The upper part of the trench CLAUSE 3603, IRRESPECTIVE OF
shall be backfilled with impermeable material which DEPTH:
shall be compacted to the density of the
surrounding material, in layers not exceeding 100
mm in thickness. The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material excavated in accordance with the authorised
(c) Test flushing dimensions, measured in place before excavation.
Final acceptance of longitudinal subsoil drains will be
subject to satisfactory test flushing after completion and Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation, the
installation of the rodding eye inlets. Flushing tests shall quantity of material in each depth range shall be
be carried out in the presence of the Engineer’s measured and paid for separately.
representative by flushing the drain and metering the The bid rates shall include full compensation for the
outflow to ensure the drain is clear of blockage. Should excavation of the material to the required lines, levels
blockages be apparent the Contractor shall locate and and grades and the disposal of the material as directed,
clear the obstruction and repeat the test. including all haulage.
(d) Transport and storing of drain pipes

The full length of the pipe shaft shall rest on the loading ITEM UNIT
area of the lorry used for transporting the pipes. 21.02 CLEARING AND SHAPING CUBIC
3
Overhanging of pipes, to prevent sagging and EXISTING DRAINS: METRE (m )
deformation shall be avoided. Rough handling and
dragging of pipes and fittings shall be avoided. All pipes The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
and fittings shall be protected from sunlight during material excavated in accordance with the authorised
transportation by use of tarpaulins. Grass cover will not dimensions, measured in place before excavation.
be accepted.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for
The Contractor shall advise the manufacturer of the excavating the material to the required lines, levels and
climatic and transporting conditions at the site of the grades, protecting the existing drainage structure,
Works and shall seek his advice on the storage of PVC trimming the sides and floors of the open drains and the
materials on site. Subject to the Engineer's approval, disposal of the material as directed, including all
this advice shall be followed at all times. haulage.
PVC pipes shall not be stored on top of each other to a The clearing of existing concrete side drains will be
height exceeding 1.5 m. Pipes shall be staggered to measured and paid for under ITEM 21.18.
prevent the sockets to rest on the shaft of the pipes.
The first tier shall be placed on a well drained layer of
sand. ITEM UNIT
2105 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS 21.03 EXCAVATION FOR SUBSOIL
All excavations for open drains and subsoil drainage DRAINAGE SYSTEMS:
systems shall be classified as follows for payment
purposes. (a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL
SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING
DEPTH RANGES BELOW THE

SURFACE LEVEL: deducted when calculating the volume of the permeable

(I) 0.5 m UP TO 1.5 m CUBIC METRE material.
3
(m )
(II) Exceeding 1.5 m AND UP TO CUBIC METRE The bid rate shall include full compensation for
3.0 m
3
(m ) procuring, furnishing and transporting from the borrow
areas and placing the material as specified.
(III) Exceeding 3.0 m PER CUBIC METRE For payment purposes a distinction shall be made
3
INCREMENT OF 1.5 m (m ) between the different grades of crushed stone.
(b) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 21.03(a) CUBIC METRE
3
FOR EXCAVATION IN ROCK AS (m )
DEFINED IN CLAUSE 3603, (b) CRUSHED STONE OBTAINED CUBIC
IRRESPECTIVE OF DEPTH: FROM COMMERCIAL SOURCES ON METRE
3
THE SITE (STATE GRADE) (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material excavated in accordance with the authorised The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
dimensions, measured in place before excavation. crushed stone in place in the drains, calculated in
accordance with the authorised dimensions. The
Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation, the volume occupied by the pipes shall be deducted when
quantity of material in each depth range shall be calculating the volume of the permeable material.
measured and paid for separately.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for
The bid rates shall include full compensation for the procuring, furnishing and transporting approved
excavation of the material to the required lines, levels crushed stone from commercial suppliers, including the
and grades and the disposal of the material as directed, cost of transporting the material to the site, and placing
including a free haul of 1.0 km. the materials as specified. For payment purposes a
distinction shall be made between the different grades
Where subsoil drainage systems are adjacent to of crushed stone.
structures such as culverts, that part of the excavation
for subsoil drainage systems which can be made by
widening the excavation for the structure shall be ITEM UNIT
measured and paid for under excavation for such 21.07 NATURAL PERMEABLE
structure, and not under excavation for the subsoil MATERIAL IN SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
drainage systems. SYSTEMS (SAND):
(a) SAND OBTAINED FROM CUBIC
ITEM UNIT APPROVED SOURCES ON THE METRE
3
SITE (STATE GRADE) (m )
21.04 IMPERMEABLE BACKFILLING CUBIC
TO SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
3
METRE (m ) (b) SAND OBTAINED FROM CUBIC
APPROVED SOURCES OUTSIDE METRE
3
THE SITE (STATE GRADE) (m )
completed backfill, measured in place in the subsoil
drainage systems and calculated in accordance with the The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
authorised dimensions. approved sand in place in the drains, calculated in
accordance with the authorised dimensions. The
The bid rate shall include full compensation for volume occupied by the pipes shall be deducted when
procuring, furnishing, placing and compacting the calculating the volume of the permeable material.
backfilling including all haulage.
procuring, furnishing, transporting from the borrow
ITEM UNIT areas and placing the sand as specified.
3
21.05 BANKS AND DYKES CUBIC METRE (m ) For payment purposes a distinction shall be made
between the different grades of sand.
material, measured in place in the banks or dykes, and
calculated in accordance with the authorised ITEM UNIT
dimensions. 21.08 PIPES IN SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
SYSTEMS:
procuring, furnishing, placing, watering, compacting, (a) PITCH-FIBRE PIPES AND FITTINGS METRE
shaping and trimming the material in the banks and COMPLETE WITH COUPLING (STATE (m)
dykes including all haulage SIZE AND WHETHER OR NOT
PERFORATED)
(b) UNPLASTICISED PVC PIPES AND METRE
ITEM UNIT FITTINGS, NORMAL DUTY, COMPLETE (m)
21.06 NATURAL PERMEABLE WITH COUPLINGS (STATE SIZE AND
MATERIAL IN SUBSOIL DRAINAGE WHETHER OR NOT PERFORATED
SYSTEMS(CRUSHED STONE): SLOTTED)
(a) CRUSHED STONE OBTAINED CUBIC

FROM APPROVED SOURCES ON
3
METRE (m ) (c) HIGH-DENSITY TYPE POLY-ETHYLENE METRE
THE SITE (STATE GRADE) PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS, (m)
COMPLETE WITH COUPLINGS (STATE
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of SIZE, TYPE AND CLASS AND WHETHER
approved crushed stone in place in the drains, OR NOT PERFORATED)
calculated in accordance with the authorised (d) CONCRETE PIPES (STATE TYPE AND METRE
dimensions. The volume occupied by the pipe shall be DIAMETER) (m)

The unit of measurement for pipes shall be the metre of keeping the excavations safe, dealing with any surface
pipe, measured in place along its centre line, including or subsurface water, procuring and furnishing all
the length of fittings. materials, providing, erecting and removing formwork,
mixing, transporting, placing and curing the concrete,
The bid rate shall include full compensation for and all labour and constructional plant required for
procuring, furnishing, laying and jointing the pipes and constructing the concrete outlet structures, manhole
fittings as specified. boxes, junction boxes and clearing eyes, complete as
specified.
ITEM UNIT
21.09 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING, SQUARE
ITEM UNIT
2
0.15 mm THICK, OR SIMILAR METRE (m ) 21.13 CONCRETE CAPS FOR SUB SOIL NUMBER
APPROVED MATERIAL, FOR DRAIN PIPES (no)
LINING SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
SYSTEM The unit of measurement shall be the number of caps
supplied and the bid rate shall include full compensation
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of for supplying and installing the caps.
polyethylene sheeting installed, measured net from the
specified dimensions.
ITEM UNIT
The bid rate shall include full compensation for 21.14 REPAIRING OR REPLACING PROVISIONAL
procuring, supplying, cutting, overlapping, jointing, EXISTING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS SUM
placing and protecting the sheeting as specified, as well
as for wastage.
The provisional sum given for repairing existing
drainage systems shall be expanded in terms of the
ITEM UNIT Conditions of Contract.
21.10 SYNTHETIC-FIBRE FILTER SQUARE
2
FABRIC (DESCRIBE TYPE AND METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
GRADE)
21.15 BACKFILLING EXISTING CUBIC
3
ERODED SIDE DRAINS METRE (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
filter fabric supplied and installed as specified.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
furnishing procuring, cutting, overlapping, jointing, approved granular material placed and compacted to
placing and protecting the filter fabric as specified as 90% of BS-Heavy density, measured in place after
well as for wastage. compaction, where instructed by the Engineer.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for trimming

ITEM UNIT the side drains disposing of the resulting material and
procuring, furnishing, transporting, placing and
21.11 COMPOSITE IN-PLANE SQUARE compacting the granular material and all haulage.
2
DRAINAGE SYSTEMS METRE (m )
(DESCRIBE TYPE AND GRADE)
ITEM UNIT
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of 21.16 TEST FLUSHING OF PIPE NUMBER
composite in-plane drainage system measured in place SUBSOIL DRAINS (no)
along the centreline of the system.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for The unit of measurement shall be the number of tests
procuring, furnishing, assembling, installing and jointing satisfactorily completed on unblocked sections of drain.
the composite in-plane drainage system, including No payment will be made for tests which have to be
perforated or other types of pipes, complete as repeated due to blocked pipes or faulty workmanship.
specified
The bid rate shall include full compensation for the
provision of a water tanker, water, equipment and
ITEM UNIT labour necessary to carry out the tests, complete as
specified.
21.12 CONCRETE OUTLET
STRUCTURES, MANHOLE BOXES,
JUNCTION BOXES AND CLEANING ITEM UNIT
EYES FOR SUBSOIL DRAINAGE:
21.17 EXCAVATION FOR THE
(a) OUTLET STRUCTURES NUMBER (no) CLEARING OF EXISTING DRAINAGE
(b) MANHOLE BOXES NUMBER (no) SYSTEMS:
(c) JUNCTION BOXES NUMBER (no) (a) MANHOLES AND INLET AN OUTLET CUBIC METRE
3
(d) CLEANING EYES NUMBER (no) STRUCTURES (m )
(b) CULVERT BARRELS CUBIC METRE
3
The unit of measurement shall be the number of outlet (m )
structures, manhole boxes, junction boxes and cleaning (c) CONCRETE SIDE DRAINS CUBIC METRE
3
eyes for subsoil drainage systems constructed in (m )
accordance with the details on the Drawings and the
Engineer’s instructions. The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material excavated and removed, measured in place
The bid rates shall include full compensation for all before excavation.
excavation, backfilling, compacting to 90% of BS-Heavy
density, disposing of surplus excavated material,

The bid rate include full compensation for excavating

the material, protecting the existing drainage structures,
dealing with any surface or subsurface water and
disposing of the excavated material, including shaping
and levelling - off piles of soil material. The bid rate
shall also include full compensation for all haulage of
the material.
ITEM UNIT
21.18 SELECTED BACKFILL CUBIC METRE
3
MATERIAL UNDER CONCRETE- (m )
LINED SIDE DRAINS COMPACTED
TO 90 % BS-HEAVY DENSITY

compacted material and the quantity shall be calculated
from the authorised dimensions given on the Drawings.

procuring as if from soft excavation or borrow pits,
breaking down, placing and compacting the material in
150 mm layers, transporting the top surface in
accordance with the Drawings.

SERIES 2000: DRAINAGE (c) Corrugated metal culvert units

Corrugated metal culvert units shall comply with the
requirements of CKS 176 or equivalent for riveted and
SECTION 2200: PREFABRICATED nestable pipes and pipe arches, and CKS 437 or
equivalent for multiplate pipes and pipe arches.
CULVERTS
Metal culvert shall be supplied with inlet and outlet ends
CONTENTS: finished by one of the following two methods whichever
is shown on the Drawings or has been prescribed by
CLAUSE PAGE the Engineer:
2201 SCOPE 2000-8
2202 TYPES OF CULVERTS 2000-8 (i) Where no concrete inlet and outlet structures but
2203 MATERIALS 2000-8 bevelled pipe ends are required, inlet and outlet
2204 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 2000-9 units shall be bevelled to suit the skew angle of the
2205 EXCAVATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY culverts and the side slope of the fill and pavement.
THE TRENCH METHOD 2000-9
2206 PREPARATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY (ii) Where concrete inlet and outlet structures are
THE EMBANKMENT METHOD 2000-9 required, the ends of the culvert units shall be cut to
2207 UNSUITABLE FOUNDING CONDITIONS 2000-10 the required plan skew (if any ) and provided with
2208 CLASSIFICATION EXCAVATION 2000-10 anchor bolts projecting radially around the edge as
2209 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL 2000-10 shown on the Drawings for bonding the metal
2210 LAYING AND BEDDING OF culvert into the concrete inlet and outlet structures.
PREFABRICATED CULVERTS 2000-10
2211 BACKFILLING OF PREFABRICATED The Contractor shall not store any nestable culvert units
CULVERTS 2000-11 on the site in such a manner that moisture can
2212 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES, accumulate between the contact faces of the nested
CATCHPITS AND MANHOLES 2000-12 units, as this may adversely affect the spelter coating
2213 REMOVAL OF EXISTING W ORK 2000-13 and render the units liable to rejection. Any units
2214 JOINING NEW W ORK TO OLD 2000-13 damaged by corrosion shall, if not rejected, be repaired
2215 SERVICES DUCTS 2000-13 by cleaning all affected areas and applying at least two
2216 CULVERTS ON STEEP GRADIENTS 2000-14 coasts of an approved zinc- rich epoxy primer which
2217 STORMWATER DUCTS, TREMIES AND complies with the requirements of SABS 926 or
OTHER CLOSED CONDUCTS 2000-14 equivalent, in accordance with the manufacture’s
2218 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2000-14 instructions, or as directed by Engineer.
(d) Fine granular material

Wherever the use of fine granular material is specified
in this Section for bedding of culvert, it shall mean sand
2201 SCOPE or other cohesionless material, all of which shall pass
This Section covers work in connection with the through a 6.3 mm sieve and not more than 10% which
construction from prefabricated units of culvert and
shall pass through a 0.15 mm sieve.
other closed conduits such as storm water ducts,
tremies and service ducts, together with inlet and outlet (e) Protective coating for metal culverts
structures, manholes and other appurtenant structures.
Where soil or water conditions are likely to cause
excessive corrosion of metal culvert, the Engineer may
2202 TYPES OF CULVERT order that prefabricated units be protected by the
For the purpose of this specification, the term application of a mastic asphalt protective coating. The
“prefabricated culvert “ shall mean culvert constructed coating shall be applied to either the inside, the outside
from: or both sides of the metal culvert units as may be
− prefabricated concrete pipes with circular sections, directed by the Engineer.
hereafter referred to as “concrete pipe culverts”.
− prefabricated concrete culvert other than pipe The mastic asphalt shall bear a registered trademark,
culvert hereafter referred to as “portal culvert “ or and approved filler and shall be supplied as a spray or
“rectangular culvert “. brush-grade material as prescribed.
− prefabricated corrugated metal pipes and pipe
arches, hereafter referred to as “metal culvert” The surfaces to be protected shall be cleaned to
remove all moisture, dirt, oil, paint, grease, alkalis, rust,
Other types of prefabricated culvert not mentioned mill scale or other deleterious matter.
above such as wooden culverts or others, will be
specified in the Special Specifications or Bill of The material shall be mixed until all filler is uniformly
Quantities or on the Drawings as required. distributed.
2203 MATERALS Spray-grade mastic shall be applied by means of an

The prefabricated culvert units shall be factory airless gun and shall be of a suitable consistency
produced by a reputable manufacturer of these articles without the addition of harmful amount of thinners.
and shall comply with the following requirements:
Brush-grade mastic shall be applied with an ordinary
(a) Prefabricated concrete pipe culvert units roofing brush, with the second coat being applied at
Prefabricated concrete pipe culvert units shall comply right angles to the first coat.
with the requirements of SABS 677 or equivalent. Pipes
with ogee joints shall be provided, unless otherwise The final film thickness measured on the crest of
specified. corrugations shall be a minimum of 1.3 mm or such
other thickness as may be specified.
(b) Portal and rectangular prefabricated concrete
culvert units Care shall be taken not to damage the protective
Portal and rectangular prefabricated concrete culvert coating, and all damage to the coating shall be repaired
units shall comply with the requirements of SABS 986 before the culvert is put to use.
or equivalent.
(f) Skewed ends 2205 EXCAVATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY

Where culverts are to be constructed at a skew angle, THE TRENCH METHOD
the culvert shall be supplied with skew ends by the
manufacturer, if required. The cutting of skewed ends
(a) Depth of excavation
on site shall not be allowed.
In the case of culverts to be constructed by the trench
method, the Contractor shall first construct the fill,
Portal and rectangular units shall be provided with
subgrade and if necessary, the subbase to such level of
square ends and any portions that would otherwise be
the top of the culvert, as described herein after for the
cut off, shall project beyond the culvert head walls.
various types of culvert. The Contractor may then
commence excavating the trench for the culvert.
Where instructed by the Engineer, portal and
rectangular culverts shall be provided with skewed ends
The amount by which the excavation is to exceed the
constructed from cast in situ reinforced concrete in
proposed level of invert of the culvert shall be sufficient
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
to allow the type and thickness of bedding material to
be placed as specified or as shown on the Drawings.
(g) Defects
All broken, bent, chipped, cracked, dented, corroded or
(i) Concrete pipe culverts
otherwise damaged units shall be repaired to the
The minimum height of embankment construction
Engineer’s satisfaction or where this is not possible,
over the top of the proposed pipe culvert before
they shall be removed and replaced with undamaged
excavation may be commenced, shall be the
units.
minimum cover specified on the Drawings for the
type of pipe and bedding onto which it shall be laid.
Culvert units, which are thinner than the specified
thickness, or the spelter coating of which has been
The minimum amount by which the excavation is to
bruised or broken, or which may exhibit signs of faulty
exceed the proposed lever of the bottom side of the
work, will be rejected.
pipe shall be 75 mm or such other as may be
required for accommodating the type of bedding
The following defects will be rejected as poor work, and
required for the pipe in each case.
the presence of any of or all such defects or any other
defects in any individual unit or in general shall
(ii) Portal and rectangular culverts
constitute adequate reason for rejection: Uneven joints,
distorted shapes, deviations from a straight centre line,
over the top of the proposed culvert before
irregular or diagonally ruptured sides, loose rivets not in
excavation may be commenced, shall be 100mm or
line or irregularly spaced, poorly finished rivet heads,
such greater height as may be shown on the
illegible trade marks, or a lack of rigidity.
Drawings, whichever is the greater.
(h) Material at joints
Joint filter seating material shall comply the
exceed the proposed level of the bottom of the
requirements of CLAUSE 6603.
culvert invert slab shall be 75 mm in the case of
culvert with pre cast invert slabs. In the case of
(i) In situ concrete
culverts with cast in situ invert slabs, the excavation
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance
shall exactly accommodate the invert slab.
with the requirements of SECTIONS 6200, 6300 and
6400.
(iii) Metal culverts
2204 CONSTRUCTION METHODS over the top of the proposed metal culvert before
Prefabricated culverts shall be installed by either: excavation may be commenced, shall be the
− the “trench method”, where the units are laid in a minimum cover specified on the Drawings for the
trench excavated below the existing ground lever or type of metal culvert, or 0.25 times the diameter of
in a trench excavated in previously constructed pipes, or 0.25 times the span of pipe arches,
subgrade and if necessary, subbase layers; or whichever is the greatest.
− the “embankment method “, where the units are laid
approximately on the existing ground surface and
exceed the proposed lever of the bottom of the pipe
the subgrade is then constructed on either side and
shall be 75 mm or such other amount required for
over the culvert.
accommodating the type of bedding required for the
culvert in each case.
Culverts shall be constructed by the method shown on
the Drawings or given in the Special Specifications
(b) Width of excavation
The width of excavations shall be sufficient to allow the
The large sizes of metal culvert and the large portal or
proper laying, bedding and backfilling of culverts. The
rectangular culverts shall normally be constructed by
widths of the excavation for each type and size of
the embankment method.
culvert shall be as shown on the Drawings or as may be
prescribed by the Engineer in writing.
Surface drainage shall controlled by the construction of
temporary earth berms and drainage channels.
If the width of an excavation is increased by the side of
the trench slipping or collapsing, the Contractor shall
The Contractor shall comply strictly with all the
immediately inform the Engineer and shall not proceed
appropriate statutory provisions in regard to trench
with any further laying of culverts or backfilling until the
excavations.
Engineer has reviewed the circumstances and has
given instructions as to the need for altering the class of
culvert or type of bedding.
2206 PREPARATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY

THE EMBANKMENT METHOD
Where culvert are to be constructed by the
embankment method as defined in CLAUSE 2204 above,

the Contractor shall level existing ground by excavating, the lower part of the pipe, which concrete shall
filling and compacting as may be necessary so as to extend upwards on both sides of the pipe to a
provide exactly the required slope and a uniform density specified portion of its height.
over the entire length of the culvert.
Before concreting, the pipes shall be supported on
The finished level of the ground for the bedding of the suitably shaped cradles at the correct level. No
culvert shall be the same depth below the proposed longitudinal construction joints on the horizontal
bottom level of the culvert as specified above in CLAUSE plane will be permitted.
2205 for the various types of culverts.
(ii) Class B and C beddings
2207 UNSUITABLE FOUNDING CONDITIONS The pipe shall be laid on a bedding cradle of
Where the bottom of the trench does not provide a compacted selected granular material as specified.
suitably firm foundation for the culvert on account of The bedding shall extend upwards on both sides of
soft, mucky or otherwise unsuitable material being the pipe to a specified portion of its height, as
encountered, the unsuitable material shall be excavated shown on the Drawings. Joint holes shall be formed
to a depth below the bottom of the culvert as may be in the bedding cradle for pipe sockets and
indicated by the Engineer. couplings, to ensure that each pipe is fully
supported throughout the length of its barrel on the
The Contractor shall excavate the unsuitable material to bedding cradle.
the depth indicated and shall replace it with gravel or
other approved material properly compacted to provide (iii) Class D bedding
a firm earth cushion. The pipes shall be laid on the situ material in the
excavation bottom after the bottom has been hand
The width of the excavation shall be as prescribed by trimmed to support the pipe along the entire length
the Engineer, but in the case of culverts to be of its barrel in accordance with the details shown on
constructed by the embankment method, the width shall the Drawings. Wherever necessary, the in situ
be at least one diameter or span, as the case may be material shall first be stabilised in accordance with
wider than the culvert on each side. the details shown on the Drawings or as prescribed
by the Engineer.
Other special construction methods may be shown on
the Drawings or specified in the Special Specifications (iv) Rock foundation
in specific cases. Where rock, shale or other hard material is
encountered on the bottom of excavations, the
2208 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION installation of pipes on Class B bedding shall
proceed as follows:
All excavations for prefabricated culverts shall be
classified as provided in CLAUSE 2105 for payment
(1) The material below the pipe shall be excavated
purposes.
and replaced with a bed of sand or approved
gravel or soil to a depth as shown on the
2209 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL Drawings or prescribed by the Engineer. Such
Where excavated material does not comply with the material shall be classed as backfill for
requirements for backfilling material as specified purposes of payment.
hereinafter or is surplus to backfilling requirements,
such excavated material shall be removed from the site (2) The backfill material shall be watered and
and used for rehabilitation of borrow pits or at other compacted to provide a firm earth cushion.
places as directed by the Engineer. Class B bedding shall then be prepared as
described in SUBCLAUSE 2210(a)(ii).
Material suitable for use in the Works, however, shall be
used as prescribed by the Engineer. (v) Concrete casing
Where shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Payment for such material will be made as for Engineer, pipes shall be fully encased in concrete
excavation under ITEM 22.01, and also under the according to class and dimensions as shown on the
appropriate item for such part of the Works as may be Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer. Supports
constructed from such material. shall be provided close to the pipe ends to support
the pipes during the placing of concrete. The
No haulage will be paid for excavated material. concrete shall be so placed as to fill all spaces
below the pipe completely. Poker vibrators shall be
used to ensure the proper filling of all spaces below
2210 LAYING AND BEDDING OF and around the pipes with concrete. Concrete
PREFABRICATED CULVERTS casing shall be cast in one continuous operation
until completed.
(a) Concrete pipe culverts
Concrete pipe culverts shall be laid on Class A, B ,C or
D bedding as shown on the Drawings or as directed by (b) Portal and rectangular culverts
the Engineer. The pipe ends shall be laid hard up
against each other so as to obtain tight joints. Ogee (i) Cast in situ floor slabs
pipes shall be laid with their spigot ends downstream. Cast in situ floor slabs shall be constructed to the
The joints shall be sealed on the outside with two layers dimensions and at the locations as shown on the
of bitumen impregnated burlap as specified in Drawings or as may be prescribed by the Engineer.
SUBCLAUSE 2210 (b). They shall be reinforced with steel reinforcement as
detailed on the Drawings. Joints of the types
The insides of the culvert shall be smooth and without detailed on the Drawings shall be formed in the
any displaced joints. All pipes shall be laid true to line floor slabs, and the inlet and outlet structures.
and level.
(ii) Prefabricated floor slabs
(i) Class A bedding A layer of fine-grained material at least 75 mm thick
The pipe shall be laid with its bottom part on a 20 shall be placed on the bottom of the excavation,
MPa concrete bedding of specified thickness below levelled, compacted and trimmed to line and grade

to form a bed to receive the precast slabs. The Jointing shall be done in accordance with CLAUSE 2214.
slabs shall be carefully placed on the prepared bed,
true to line and grade and so bedded that they will After completion of the extension or partial replacement
be uniformly supported over their whole area on the of a culvert, new approach slabs, head walls, wing
bedding. walls, catchpits etc, shall be constructed in accordance
with the Drawings and CLAUSE 2212.
(iii) Placing the portal portions of culverts
The portal portions of portal and rectangular (e) Construction of culverts in half widths in
culverts shall be placed accurately and existing roads
symmetrically on the floor slabs with a thin layer of If necessary for accommodating traffic or for any other
mortar of one part of cement and six parts of sand reasons or if so instructed by the Engineer, culverts
between the contact surface to ensure a firm and shall be constructed in half widths.
uniform support.
Unless otherwise prescribed, the downstream section
The units shall be butted end to end with butt joints, shall be constructed first. The end of the excavation
which joints shall be covered with two layers of adjoining the traffic lane shall be properly supported to
2
burlap of 340 g/m , pre-impregnated with a prevent displacement from occurring. The necessary
bituminous emulsion, or a similar approved warning signs shall be erected in accordance with
material. The strip of burlap shall be at least 150 requirements of SECTION 1500.
mm wide and placed symmetrically over the joint.
The units shall first be treated with a primer of 60% Where the culvert is constructed in an existing road and
bitumen emulsion over the width of the strip of it has been so prescribed by the Engineer, the
burlap. pavement layers at least shall be benched and
recompacted during backfilling. The depth of benching
Where two or more culverts are placed side by side shall equal the respective layer thickness, and the width
to form a multi-barrel culvert, the space between shall be at least 150 mm.
the culvert shall be filled with concrete up to the
level of the top of the culvert. Where prescribed, (f) General
filter fabrics shall be applied to the vertical outer The construction of culverts shall be commenced at one
faces in accordance with the details shown on the end of the culvert, the position of which shall be fixed as
Drawings. shown on the Drawings or as prescribed by the
Engineer.
(c) Metal culverts
The excavation shall be trimmed to the shape of the Units which have been deformed or cracked, or which
invert of the culvert and a bed of fine granular material are not constructed to the required lines, levels and
not less than 75 mm thick shall be placed, watered, grades or which become displaced in the process of the
compacted and shaped to enable the culvert to be work during the defects liability period shall be removed
bedded as shown on the Drawings. and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Where rock is encountered, the depth of excavation Prefabricated units shall be lifted and handled by
shall extend to a depth of at least 200 mm below the means of approved lifting devices only. Lifting eyes
invert of the culvert, and shall be filled with granular shall be caulked with a suitable mortar after the units
material as before. have been installed.
The culverts shall be installed in accordance with the The Contractor shall exercise due care not to damage,
manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the overstress or displace any prefabricated culverts with
Engineer. Where these Specifications are inconsistent his own traffic or compaction equipment. Where loads
with the manufacturer’s recommendations, these exceeding those prescribed in the appropriate statutory
Specifications shall have preference. Anchor bolts shall provisions are likely to pass over completed culverts,
be installed at the ends of metal pipe culverts in the Contractor shall provide additional cover over the
accordance with the manufacture’s instructions to bond culverts to ensure that design stresses on the culverts
them into inlet and outlet head walls, which head walls will not be exceeded.
shall be constructed as soon as possible after
installation of the culverts. All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance
with provisions of SERIES 6000.
No concrete bedding or casing shall be used in the
installation of metal culverts. When the Contractor is required to supply and install
culverts at slope exceeding 1:4, the work shall be
Where prescribed, the invert of metal culverts with carried out as specified in CLAUSE 2216.
diameters or spans exceeding 1500 mm which are laid
on steep grades shall be protected with a layer of 2211 BACKFILLING OF PREFABRICATED
concrete with dimensions and class shown on the CULVERTS
Drawings.
After the culverts have been firmly laid on the required
bedding as described in CLAUSE 2210, backfilling shall
(d) Extension of existing culverts
be carried out as follows:
Where an existing culvert requires extension or partial
replacement, the new section shall be placed at the
(a) Material for backfilling
same grade and where it joins the existing structures at
The material used for the backfilling of those portions of
the same level as the existing structure.
culverts subject to traffic loads shall be selected
Any sections of existing wing walls, approach slabs and
material of at least subbase quality or such other lower
head walls which may obstruct any work shall be
quality as may be permitted by the Engineer. Where the
demolished and removed. Existing culvert ends shall
excavated material is not of adequate quality, selected
not be damaged, but should damage occur, the repair
material shall be imported for this purpose. The
work shall be done before the placement of any fresh
Contractor shall in advance, ascertain from the
concrete or new culverts. Loose material shall be
Engineer as to which portions will require selected-
removed and joint faces thoroughly cleaned to the
quality material for backfilling.
satisfaction of the Engineer.

In the case of concrete pipe culverts on Class B shall be packed to prevent the soil cement from flowing
bedding and metal culverts the backfilling material shall beyond the required limits.
be thoroughly tamped in under the flanks of the culverts
to provide a uniform bedding all to the Engineer’s Soil cement shall not be used for backfilling corrugated
satisfaction. Metal culverts shall be temporarily metal culverts.
ballasted during backfilling to prevent them from lifting.
(e) Haulage
(b) Backfilling When haulage is paid for in accordance with the
Backfilling alongside and over all culverts shall be Special Specifications a free haul distance of 1.0 km
placed at or near the optimum moisture content of BS- shall apply in respect of all imported materials used for
Heavy and compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm backfilling the culverts. No overhaul shall be paid on
after compaction, or less if required, to a density of at any cement, water or concrete aggregates used.
least the density required for the material in adjoining
layers of fill, subgrade and subbase. The density of 2212 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES,
backfilling in excavations made in natural ground shall CATCHPITS AND MANHOLES
be at least 90% of BS-Heavy density.
Inlet and outlet structures for prefabricated culverts as
well as catchpits and manholes shall be constructed in
Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and
equally on both sides of a culvert to prevent unequal
lateral forces from occurring.
(a) Excavation and backfilling
The specifications given elsewhere in this Section for
Where the Engineer so directs, metal culverts with large
excavating and backfilling the culverts shall apply with
diameters or spans or multi – barrel culverts shall be
changes as required to inlet and outlet structures,
constructed by the embankment method as defined in
catchpits and manholes.
SUBCLAUSE 2204(b). In such cases, the backfilling shall
be carried out to the same standard as described
No backfilling of a concrete structure may be done for a
above, simultaneously and equally on both sides of the
period of at least seven days after the structure has
culvert and placed over the culvert until the minimum
been completed, unless otherwise specified or directed
specified cover is obtained. The width of backfill on
by the Engineer.
each side of the culvert, after completion, shall be at
least equal to the diameter (or span) of one of the
(b) Concrete work
openings of the culvert.
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with
the provision of SERIES 6000 and the Drawings.
Metal culverts shall be backfilled symmetrically to
prevent distortion of the units, and the Contractor shall
(c) Brickwork
also ensure that the required cover as specified is in
Bricks shall be engineering bricks conforming to the
place to allow construction equipment to pass over it
requirements of SABS 227 or equivalent.
without causing damage.
The limit for water absorption in the 24-hour immersion
(c) Backfilling with concrete
test shall be 8%.
Whenever specified or as may be instructed by the
Engineer, the backfilling shall consist of concrete placed
Brickwork shall be built in English bond in a mortar
between the side of the culvert and the excavation up to
consisting of one part of cement and six parts of sand,
the top of the culvert.
or in stretcher bond where its thickness does not
exceed 115 mm. It shall be well and regularly bonded
(d) Backfilling with soil-cement
without any false headers. All bricks shall be unbroken,
When specified or ordered by the Engineer, the
except where required as closers. Bricks shall be well
backfilling of culverts shall be done using a wet or a stiff
wetted before laying and each brick shall be exceeding
mixture of soil cement in lieu of compacted gravel or
10 mm in thickness. All joints shall be filled solid with
lean concrete. A wet mixture of soil cement shall consist
mortar, and joints for exposed faces shall be pointed as
of an approved soil or gravel mixed with 5% of Ordinary
the work proceeds.
Portland cement and only sufficient water to give a
consistency that will permit the soil cement to be placed
Where pipes enter brickwork they shall be thoroughly
with vibrators, so that all voids between the pipes and
caulked into the wall and rendered with mortar.
the sides of excavations and between culverts in the
case of multi barrel culverts will be properly filled. A stiff
(d) Plaster
mixture of soil cement shall contain 3% of Ordinary
Where the plastering of brickwork is required, all joints
Portland cement and just sufficient water for it to be
shall be well raked out and the brick face thoroughly
placed and compacted like ordinary backfill material.
wetted before plaster is applied. Plaster shall not be
The height to which the soil cement backfill shall be
less than 12 mm or more than 20 mm thick. Plaster
taken shall be as prescribed by the Engineer or as
finish shall be smooth and even and shall not show any
shown on the Drawings, and any remaining backfill
trowel marks. Unless otherwise specified, all plaster
shall be carried out as described above with a granular
shall be finished with a steel trowel. Plaster shall consist
material.
of one part of cement to four parts of approved fine
sand.
The aggregate used for soil cement shall preferably be
a sandy material but may contain large particles up to
(e) Manhole covers, grid inlets etc
38 mm. It shall not have a Plasticity Index exceeding
Manhole covers and frames, grid inlets and other metal
10%. Detrimental percentages of silt or clay shall be
accessories shall be supported and or/or manufactured
avoided and the aggregate shall be obtained from an
in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
approved source.
Road and pavement manhole covers and frames shall
comply with the requirements of SABS 558 or
The soil cement shall be mixed on the Site with suitable
equivalent and shall be of the size and type indicated.
concrete mixers, and the water and cement contents
shall be carefully controlled. The material shall be
Before fixing manholes covers and frames they shall be
placed and then thoroughly compacted so that all voids
dipped in an approved preservative and gratings and
are filled as described above. At culvert ends, stones
frames painted with two coats of bituminous paint.

Manhole frame shall be set firmly in a cement mortar to Fresh concrete shall be bonded to the old concrete in
leave the covers flush with the final surface. accordance with the requirements with the
requirements specified in SECTION 6400.
(f) Prefabricated concrete chambers and shafts
Prefabricated chambers and shafts shall be constructed Reinforced or plain concrete removed in the process of
from non-pressure concrete pipes which comply with partial demolition shall be measured and paid for under
the requirements of SABS 677 or equivalent. Pipes with ITEM 22.12 and the installation of dowels and those
ogee joints shall be provided unless otherwise surfaces treated with an epoxy bonding compound will
specified. The pipes shall be to the diameters specified. be paid for separately but no separate payment will be
All chambers and shafts shall be installed with the made for any other work described above, the cost of
spigot ends pointing upwards and shall be bedded in which shall be deemed to be included in the rates bid
mortar thoroughly caulked to ensure watertight joints. for the concrete supplied for extensions to the existing
structures.
(g) Benching
All benching shall be rendered in 20 mm granolithic 2215 SERVICE DUCTS
plaster and finished smooth and true with a steel trowel. Where required the Contractor shall construct services
Corners shall be rounded to dimensions shown on the ducts for the easy installation and maintenance of
Drawings. existing, new and future cables and other services.
Services ducts shall be constructed from one or more of
(h) Prefabricated inlet and outlet structures the following materials:
Where specified for use, prefabricated inlet and outlet − Normal – duty PVC pipes in accordance with SABS
structures shall be manufactured in accordance with the 791 or equivalent.
dimensions shown on the Drawings. The units shall be − Pitch-fibre pipes in accordance with SABS 921 or
laid and jointed generally as specified for prefabricated equivalent.
concrete pipe culverts. − Fibre-cement pressure pipes in accordance with
SABS 1223 or equivalent. Class C pipes shall be
(i) Prefabricated energy dissipaters in outlet
used unless other types are specified.
structures
− Reinforced-concrete pipes in accordance with
Where shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall
SABS 677 or equivalent.
supply and install in the outlet structures, prefabricated
reinforced concrete energy dissipaters of Class 25/19
Where required, the pipes shall be cut length-wise and
concrete with dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
accurately in two halves. The actual type of pipe
All concrete work shall comply with the requirements of
required shall be in accordance with the Specifications.
SERIES 6000.
The pipes shall be installed in the required positions,
and accurate record shall be kept regarding the depth,
2213 REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK position and number of pipes installed in each duct.
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Pipes shall be laid at the grades shown on the
Engineer existing inlets and outlets to pipe culverts shall Drawings to facilitate flushing with water and shall,
be demolished and debris or rubbish disposed of in an where required, be encased in concrete or soil cement.
approved waste site as directed by the Engineer.
Existing pipes shall be removed where necessary and The width of excavation for service – duct trenches
saved for later use. All such work shall be carried out to shall be equal to the nominal inside diameter of the
prevent damage being done to former work which is to pipe, plus 150 mm on each side of the duct. Where
remain. ducts consist of two or more units, the minimum
spacing between the units shall be 75 mm, and the 150
The Contractor’s attention is directed to the provisions mm side clearance specified above shall apply to the
of SECTION 3100 which specifies any structures which outside units of the group.
have to be removed as part of the clearing and
grubbing operations, the removal of which will therefore Below the carriageway the depth of excavation shall
not be measured and paid for under this Section. accommodate a minimum cover of 1.0 m above the
upper side of the installed services duct.
Pipes shall be carefully removed from existing culverts
and thoroughly checked. All pipes shall be joined with watertight couplings made
from the same materials as the pipe. Fibre-cement
Undamaged pipes shall be re-used in the Works where couplings shall be of rubber – ring type.
indicated by the Engineer. Pipes which cannot be re-
used shall remain the property of the Employer and Spit pipes shall normally be used only for providing
shall be stacked within the road reserve or where ducting for existing services which cannot be severed
directed by the Engineer. and threaded through the ducts. The pipes shall be
accurately cut longitudinally in two halves and opposite
2214 JOINING NEW WORK TO OLD halves shall be matched as sawn. Split pipes shall be
Where partial demolition is required for extension work placed around the service as required, firmly bound by
to existing structures, the contact face shall be cut to steel straps and finally encased in concrete if required.
predetermined lines and levels, any loose and
fragmented material shall be removed and projecting Excavating, laying and bedding the pipes shall be in
steel cleaned and bent as directed by the Engineer. accordance with the Specifications for prefabricated
Where partial demolition is not required, but extension culverts with any modifications as may be necessary or
work only, the contact surface shall be roughened and specified here.
cleaned of all dirt and loose particles.
Duct ends shall be provided with suitable conical
If dowels are required, they shall be installed in holes wooden stoppers to prevent dirt from entering the ducts.
drilled into the existing structures, in accordance with Two strands, 2.5 mm in diameter of galvanised steel
the details shown on the Drawings and secured by wire shall be threaded through each unit and shall
means of an approved type of epoxy resin grout. extend 2 m beyond each end and firmly wedge into
position with the wooden stoppers.

The end of each duct shall be marked with a marker The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
block constructed to the details shown on the Drawings. material excavated within the specified widths over the
Each duct marker block shall be at least 50 mm proud lengths and depths authorised by the Engineer in each
of the finished surface level. case. Excavation in excess of the widths specified or
authorised by the Engineer shall not be measured for
2216 CULVERTS ON STEEP GRADIENTS payment.
Where culverts are constructed on gradients exceeding
1:4, they shall be referred to as inclined culverts. Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation, the
Inclined culverts shall be constructed from the type of quantity of material in each depth range shall be
unit required, normally either circular concrete pipe measured and paid for separately.
units or metal culvert units as described in CLAUSE
2203. When measuring excavation for the removal of existing
culverts, the volume occupied by the culvert shall not be
Particular care shall be taken to protect excavations subtracted from the calculated volume of excavation.
against stormwater damage. The trenches shall be
excavated down to firm ground, and backfilled with In the case of manholes, catch pits and inlet and outlet
selected gravel or concrete if it is necessary to over- structures, the dimensions for determining the volume
excavate for obtaining a firm floor. of excavation shall be the neat outside dimensions of
the structure, plus an allowance of 0.5 m of working
After the outlet structures has first been completed, the space around the structure.
culvert units shall be laid in the normal manner by
starting from the lower end and placing successive units The bid rates shall include full compensation for all
firmly against each other to prevent subsequent excavation, temporary timbering, shoring and strutting,
movement. The lower unit shall be securely cast into for preparing the bottom of the excavation for the
the outlet structure, and metal culverts shall be provided culvert beds, the disposal of excavated material
with the necessary anchor bolts at both inlet and outlet unsuitable for backfilling, keeping excavations safe,
structures and also at all thrust and anchor blocks. dealing with any surface or subsurface water, and for
any other operations necessary for completing the work
Thrust and anchor blocks shall be constructed from as specified.
concrete as required in accordance with Drawings and
details furnished by the Engineer. Anchor bolts, straps No haulage will be paid.
and other anchoring devices required at anchor and
thrust blocks shall be provided.
ITEM UNIT
The backfilling of trenches shall be done in horizontal 22.02 BACKFILLING:
layers starting at the lower end. (a) USING EXCAVATED MATERIAL CUBIC METRE
3
(m )
2217 STORMWATER DUCTS, TREMIES AND (b) USING IMPORTED SELECTED CUBIC METRE
3
OTHER CLOSED CONDUITS MATERIAL (m )
The specifications given in this Section for culverts, (c) EXTRA OVER SUBITEMS 22.02 CUBIC METRE
including the method of measurement and payment, (a) AND (b) FOR SOIL CEMENT
3
(m )
shall apply with changes as required to the construction BACKFILLING (PERCENTAGE OF
of stormwater ducts, tremies or any other closed CEMENT INDICATED)
conduits constructed from the prefabricated units
described in CLAUSE 2203, whether intended for
drainage or for any other purpose.
material in place after compaction. The quantity shall be
calculated from the leading dimensions of the backfilling
No distinction will be made in the Bill of Quantities
as specified or as authorised by the Engineer.
between the construction of culverts as defined in
SECTION 1100 and that of the other closed conduits
If excavation were carried out in excess of the
described above, all being classed as culverts.
dimensions authorised by the Engineer, the quantity of
backfilling will nevertheless be based on the authorised
Tremies constructed from prefabricated units shall be
dimensions. The volume occupied by the culvert shall
classed as inclined culverts where laid to a grade
be subtracted when calculating the volume of
steeper than 1:4.
backfilling.

2218 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT backfilling under, alongside and over conduits, for
watering, and for compacting the backfill material to the
ITEM UNIT specified density. The bid rate for SUBITEM 22.02(b)
22.01 EXCAVATION: shall, in addition, include full compensation for
(a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL supplying selected material of sub base quality from
approved sources, including a free haul of 1.0 km in the
cases where haulage is paid for in accordance with the
SURFACE LEVEL: Special Specifications..
(I) 0.5 m UP TO 1.5 m CUBIC METRE The bid rate for SUBITEM 22.02(c) shall be additional to
3
(m ) the rates bid for SUBITEMS 22.02(a) and (b) and shall
(II) Exceeding 1.5 m AND UP TO CUBIC METRE include full compensation for all incidentals required for
3
3.0 m (m ) the complete backfilling with soil cement as specified.
(III) Exceeding 3.0 m PER CUBIC METRE
3
INCREMENT OF 1.5 m (m )
ITEM UNIT
3
FOR EXCAVATION IN ROCK AS (m ) 22.03 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS:
DEFINED IN CLAUSE 3603, (a) ON CLASS A BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m)
IRRESPECTIVE OF DEPTH: DIAMETER INDICATED)

(b) ON CLASS B BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m) INDICATED)

DIAMETER INDICATED) (b) WITHOUT PREFABRICATED FLOOR METRE (m)
(c) ON CLASS C BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m) SLABS (SIZE AND TYPE INDICATED)
DIAMETER INDICATED)
(d) ON CLASS D BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m) The unit of measurement for prefabricated portal or
DIAMETER INDICATED) rectangular culverts shall be the metre of culvert laid as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The unit of measurement for concrete pipe culverts
shall be the metre of culvert laid as shown on the The length shall be measured along the soffit of the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer. The length shall culvert.
be measured along the soffit of the culvert.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for supplying, testing, loading, transporting and off-loading
providing, testing, loading, transporting and unloading all culverts, providing and placing the fine-grained
the culverts, for providing and placing the fine-grained material where required for installing the culverts, and
material, where required, and for the installation, laying installing, laying and jointing the culverts as specified,
and jointing of the culverts, as specified. including cutting them on the site, and waste.
Should it be inevitable for a section to be cut off from a Payment will be made separately for floor slabs of cast
concrete pipe unit of standard length, the full standard in situ concrete.
length of the unit shall be measured for payment. No
additional compensation for cutting and disposing of Payment shall distinguish between the different sizes
such section will be paid. and types of culverts and between culverts installed
with or without prefabricated floor slabs.
Upon payment, differentiation shall be made between
the various types and sizes of culverts and between the
culverts placed on A, B, C and D classes of bedding. ITEM UNIT
22.06 EXTRA OVER ITEMS 22.03 METRE
22.04 AND 22.05 FOR (m)
ITEM UNIT CONSTRUCTING INCLINED CULVERTS
22.04 METAL CULVERTS: STEEPER THAN 1:4.
(a) SIZE, WALL THICKNESS AND TYPE METRE (m)

INDICATED The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert
installed at a grade steeper than 1:4 as specified in
(b) CUTTING OFF BEVELLED AND/ OR NUMBER (no) CLAUSE 2216.
SKEW ENDS (SIZE AND TYPE
INDICATED) The bid rate shall include full compensation for
(c) ANCHOR BOLTS NUMBER (no) additional or more difficult work of any nature in regard
to laying, excavating and backfilling as may be required
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert for installing the culverts at a grade steeper than 1:4.
laid, the number of cuts made and the number of
anchor bolts installed as shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the Engineer. ITEM UNIT
22.07 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE AND
In the case of a metal pipe, the culvert length shall be FORM WORK:
measured along the pipe centre line. In the case of a (a) IN CLASS A BEDDING, SCREEDS AND CUBIC
metal pipe arch, the culvert length shall be measured THE ENCASING FOR PIPES, INCLUDING METRE
along the bottom of the pipe arch. In both cases, the FORMWORK, (CLASS OF CONCRETE
3
(m )
length of bevelled and/or skew ends shall be included. INDICATED)
The bid rates shall include full compensation for (b) IN FLOOR SLABS FOR PORTAL OR CUBIC
providing, testing, loading, transporting and off-loading RECTANGULAR CULVERTS, INCLUDING METRE
3
the culverts, for providing and placing fine-grained FORMWORK AND CLASS U2 SURFACE (m )
material where required for the installation of culverts, FINISH (CLASS OF CONCRETE
and for installing, laying and jointing the culverts as INDICATED)
specified. Upon payment, a differentiation shall be (c) IN INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES, CUBIC
made between the various types and sizes of culverts CATCHPITS, MANHOLES, THRUST AND METRE
3
and also between culverts with differing wall ANCHOR BLOCKS, EXCLUDING (m )
thicknesses. FORMWORK BUT INCLUDING CLASS
U2 SURFACE FINISH (CLASS OF
Payment shall be made separately for the cutting of CONCRETE INDICATED)
bevelled and/or skew ends, and the bid rate shall (d) FORMWORK OF CONCRETE UNDER SQUARE
include full compensation for all work in connection with SUBITEM 22.07 (a) ABOVE TYPE OF METRE
the cutting of ends. FINISH INDICATED)
2
(m )
The bid rate per anchor bolt shall include full (e) IN CONCRETE LININGS FOR THE CUBIC
compensation for procuring, providing and installing the INVERTS OF METAL CULVERTS, METRE
3
bolts. INCLUDING FORMWORK AND CLASS (m )
CONCRETE INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
22.05 PORTAL AND RECTANGULAR Measurement of formwork and cast in situ concrete
CULVERTS: shall be as specified in SECTIONS 6200 and 6400.
(a) COMPLETE WITH PREFABRICATED METRE (m) Payment for formwork and cast in situ concrete shall be
FLOOR SLABS (SIZE AND TYPE made as provided in SECTIONS 6200 and 6400, except

that payment for the formwork for concreting in The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
SUBITEMS 22.07(a), (b) and (e) shall not be made existing concrete removed.
separately, and the Contractor’s rates for concrete shall
include full compensation therefor. The bid rates shall include full compensation for all
demolition and for loading, transporting and disposing
No separate payment shall be made for the of the products of demolition, including a free haul of
construction of joints in culvert floor slabs or at inlet and 1.0 km.
outlet structures, and the bid rates for concrete shall
include full compensation for forming the joints Payment shall distinguish between plain and reinforced
complete in accordance with the details shown on the concrete. For the purpose of this item, reinforced
Drawings. concrete shall be defined as concrete containing at
least 0.2% of steel reinforcement measured by volume.
ITEM UNIT The bid rates shall also include full compensation for
22.08 CONCRETE BACKFILL FOR CUBIC cutting straight grooves of the specified depth at joint
CULVERT (CLASS INDICATED)
3
METRE (m ) positions where shown on the Drawings.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of ITEM UNIT

concrete backfill. The quantity shall be calculated from
the dimensions of the excavation as specified or as may 22.13 REMOVING AND RE-LAYING METRE (m)
be authorised by the Engineer, minus the volume taken EXISTING PIPES (SIZE AND TYPE OF
up by the culverts, irrespective of whether the actual BEDDING INDICATED)
excavation to be backfilled exceeds the specified or
authorised dimensions. The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing
pipe removed and re-laid.
Payment shall be made as for concrete in ITEM 22.07
(a) above. The bid rate shall include full compensation for lifting,
loading, transporting, off-loading, and laying pipes
according to the Specifications. No haulage will be paid.
ITEM UNIT
22.09 PREFABRICATED CONCRETE NUMBER Payment for any excavation and backfilling required for
INLETS AND OUTLETS TO CULVERTS (no) the removal and relaying of existing pipes shall be
(SIZE AND TYPE INDICATED) made separately under ITEMS 22.01 and 22.02.
Where existing pipes are loaded, transported and used

Prefabricated concrete inlets and outlets for concrete in diversions, they shall not be measured for payment
pipe culverts shall be measured per inlet or outlet, under this item, but payment therefor shall be made in
complete in position. terms of SECTION 1500.
procuring, providing, loading, transporting, off-loading ITEM UNIT
and installing the inlets or outlets as specified.
22.14 REMOVING AND STACKING METRE
EXISTING PREFABRICATED PIPES (m)
ITEM UNIT (ALL SIZES)
22.10 STEEL
REINFORCEMENT: The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing
prefabricated culverts removed and stacked.
(a) MILD STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
(b) HIGH-TENSILE STEEL BARS TONNE (t) The bid rate shall include full compensation for lifting,
(c) WELDED STEEL FABRIC KILOGRAMME (kg) loading, transporting to stack, off-loading, and stacking
the prefabricated culverts.
Measurement and payment for steel reinforcement shall Payment for any excavation and backfilling required for
be made as specified in SECTION 6300. removing, transporting and stacking the existing
prefabricated culverts shall be made separately under
ITEMS 22.01 and 22.02. No haulage will be paid.
ITEM UNIT
22.11 DOWELS FOR JOINING OLD KILOGRAMME
AND NEW CONCRETE (kg) ITEM UNIT
22.15 TREATING SURFACES WITH LITRE (l)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilogram of steel EPOXY RESIN FOR JOINING NEW TO
dowels installed. OLD CONCRETE (TYPE OF EPOXY
RESIN SPECIFIED)
supplying all materials, all cutting, drilling and grouting, The unit of measurement shall be the litre of epoxyresin
and any other operation or item necessary for the compound used at the specified rate of application.
proper execution of the work.
providing and applying the epoxy-resin compound.
ITEM UNIT
22.12 REMOVING EXISTING
CONCRETE: ITEM UNIT
3
(a) PLAIN CONCRETE CUBIC METRE (m ) 22.16 PROTECTIVE MASTIC SQUARE
2
(b) REINFORCED CONCRETE CUBIC METRE (m
3
) ASPHALT COATING FOR METRE (m )
CORRUGATED METAL CULVERT
UNITS (STATE WHETHER TO BE

APPLIED BY BRUSH OR BY ITEM UNIT

SPRAY GUN) 22.18 BRICKWORK:
2
(a) 115 mm THICK SQUARE METRE (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of 2
protective coating applied as specified and as directed (b) 230 mm THICK SQUARE METRE (m )
2
by the Engineer. When both inside and outside surfaces (c) 345 mm THICK SQUARE METRE (m )
are treated, both surfaces shall be measured.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for brickwork built, calculated from the leading dimensions
procuring and furnishing the mastic asphalt, applying of the brickwork. Areas in walls occupied by conduits,
the material, and for all other additional work and shall not be included in the areas measured, and
incidentals required for providing the protective coating corners and intersections common to more than one
as specified. brick wall shall be measured only once.
The bid rates per square metre shall include full
compensation for the brickwork complete as specified,
ITEM UNIT including pointing and the building in of conduits.
22.17 MANHOLES, CATCHPITS, PRECAST
INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES
COMPLETE: ITEM UNIT
2
(a) MANHOLES (TYPE INDICATED) NUMBER 22.19 PLASTER: SQUARE METRE (m )
(no)
(b) CATCHPITS (TYPE INDICATED) NUMBER The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
(no) plaster work provided.
(c) PRECAST INLET AND OUTLET NUMBER
STRUCTURES (TYPE INDICATED) (no) The bid rate shall include full compensation for raking
(d) EXTRA OVER OR LESS THAN SUBITEM METRE out joints in the brick work and applying a 1:4 plaster,
22.17 (a) FOR VARIATIONS IN THE (m) as specified, to all surfaces where required.
DEPTHS OF MAN HOLES FROM THE
STANDARD DEPTH DESIGNATED FOR
BIDDING PURPOSES (STANDARD DEPTH ITEM UNIT
AND TYPE OF CATCHPIT INDICATED) 22.20 BENCHING: SQUARE METRE (m
2
)
(e) EXTRA OVER OR LESS THAN SUB ITEM METRE
22.17 (b) FOR VARIATIONS IN THE (m) The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
DEPTHS OF CATCHPITS FROM THE benching, measured in plan, constructed in Class 20/19
STANDARD DEPTH DESIGNATED FOR concrete with granolithic rendering.
BIDDING PURPOSES (STANDARD DEPTH
AND TYPE OF CATCHPIT INDICATED) The bid rate shall include full compensation for
procuring and furnishing all materials, placing the
The unit of measurement, in the case of SUBITEMS (a), concrete benching and rendering with the specified
(b) and (c) above, shall be the complete unit as shown granolithic rendering.
on the Drawings, including all concrete, brickwork,
covers, frames, grids and other accessories.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for ITEM UNIT
procuring, furnishing and installing, and laying where 22.21 ACCESSORIES:
applicable, the complete units except for excavation
and backfilling, which shall be measured separately. (a) MANHOLE COVERS INCLUDING NUMBER
FRAMES (DESCRIPTION) (no)
The bid rate shall also include full compensation for
connecting up to and building any conduits into the (b) INLET GRIDS INCLUDING FRAMES NUMBER
walls of the various structures. (DESCRIPTION) (no)
(c) STEP IRONS (DESCRIPTION) NUMBER
The unit of measurement in the case of SUBITEMS (d) (no)
and (e) above shall be the metre of increased or (d) ETC. FOR OTHER ACCESSORIES NUMBER
decreased depth of the manhole or catchpit measured (no)
in relation to the standard depth furnished for bidding
purposes. The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
type of accessory delivered and installed.
The bid rates per metre shall be an adjustment to the
compensation for the standard item, payable either as The bid rates shall include full compensation for
an increased compensation to the Contractor in the procuring, furnishing and installing the accessories.
case of an increased depth, or as a decrease in
compensation in the case of a decreased depth in
relation to the standard depth. ITEM UNIT
Where the above items of work cannot be conveniently 22.22 ANCHORS FOR PIPES NUMBER
standardised for payment according to complete units, (DESCRIPTION) (no)
the various types of work and items of material provided
shall be measured separately in accordance with ITEMS The unit of measurement shall be the number of
22.18 to 22.21 and such other items as may be complete anchors installed, including straps, bolts, etc,
necessary. but excluding any concrete work, which shall be
measured under SUBITEMS 22.07(c) and (d).
Concrete and formwork shall be measured and paid for
under SUBITEMS 22.07 (c) and (d) respectively, The bid rate shall include full compensation for
excavation under ITEM 22.01 and backfilling under ITEM procuring, providing and installing the anchors.
22.02.

ITEM UNIT The unit of measurement for SUBITEMS 22.26(a) to (d)

22.23 SERVICE DUCTS: shall be the square metre of the layer reinstated where
instructed by the Engineer.
(a) ORDINARY PIPES (TYPE AND METRE
DIAMETER INDICATED) (m) The unit of measurement for SUBITEM 22.26(e) shall be
(b) SPLIT PIPES (TYPE AND DIAMETER METRE the metre of kerbing replaced due to trench excavations
INDICATED) (m) where instructed by the Engineer.
The unit of measurement shall be a metre of service Any reinstatement required beyond the agreed or
duct laid. instructed dimensions owing to damage caused by the
Contractor will not be measured for payment.
procuring, providing, and laying the pipes, including end The appropriate Sections of the Specifications shall
stoppers, draw wires and complete installation, but shall also be applicable to the reinstatement of the trenches.
exclude excavation, backfilling, and encasing with
concrete, which shall be measured for payment under The bid rates shall include full compensation for
the appropriate items of payment of this Section. procuring, furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing
all materials, providing all labour and constructional
plant, cutting and preparing the edges of the existing
ITEM UNIT surfacing, and protecting and maintaining the
completed reinstatement as specified.
22.24 DUCT MARKER BLOCKS NUMBER
(TYPE INDICATED) (no)
ITEM UNIT
The unit of measurement shall be the number of marker 22.27 PREFABRICATED REINFORCED NUMBER
blocks installed, and the bid rate shall include full CONCRETE SKEW END UNITS FOR (no)
compensation for manufacturing, delivering and CONCRETE CULVERTS CONSTRUCTED
installing the marker blocks, complete as shown on the AT A SKEW ANGLE (TYPE AND
Drawings. DIMENSIONS OF UNIT AND CLASS OF
BEDDING INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
22.25 HAND EXCAVATION TO CUBIC
type and size of prefabricated reinforced-concrete skew
DETERMINE THE POSITIONS OF METRE
3 end unit provided and installed, irrespective of the angle
EXISTING SERVICES (m ) of skew.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of The bid rates shall include full compensation for
material excavated within the lengths and widths providing, testing, loading and unloading the units,
authorised by the Engineer and the depth required to constructing the prescribed class of bedding, and for
expose the service. Excavation in excess of the installing, laying and joining the units, complete as
authorised dimensions shall not be measured for specified and in accordance with the details shown on
payment. the Drawings.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for all

excavation, backfilling, compacting to 90% of BS-Heavy
density, disposing of any surplus excavated material,
keeping the excavations safe, dealing with any surface
or subsurface water, taking special care to ensure that
services are not damaged in any way and any other
operation necessary for completing the work. The bid
rate shall also include all haulage of material. Any
damage to a service caused by the Contractor shall be
repaired at his own costs, to the satisfaction of the
Owner of the service and the Engineer.
No distinction will be made between rock and soft

material, neither will distinction be made between the
various types of services to be exposed or the depths to
which excavations are taken.
ITEM UNIT
22.26 REINSTATING TRENCHES
CROSSING ROADS:
(a) IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYERS SQUARE
2
METRE (m )
(b) SUBBASE LAYERS SQUARE
2
METRE (m )
(c) BASE COURSE LAYERS SQUARE
2
METRE (m )
(d) BITUMINOUS SURFACING SQUARE
2
INCLUDING TACK COAT) METRE (m )
(e) KERBING METRE (m)

SERIES 2000: DRAINAGE in situ only, except that side slabs may be precast.
Downpipes shall be prefabricated units.
SECTION 2300: CONCRETE

2304 CONSTRUCTION
KERBING, CONCRETE
CHANNELLING, OPEN (a) Excavation, and preparation of bedding
CONCRETE CHUTES AND (i) Kerbs and channels

Trenches for kerbs and channels shall be
CONCRETE LININGS FOR OPEN excavated to the required depth and all unsuitable
material shall be removed and replaced with a layer
DRAINS of approved bedding material at least 75 mm thick.
The bedding shall be compacted and accurately
CONTENTS: shaped to the required grade. No concrete or
precast concrete unit shall be placed on
CLAUSE PAGE uncompacted or disturbed material.
2301 SCOPE 2000-19
2302 MATERIALS 2000-19 (ii) Concrete linings
2303 TYPES OF STRUCTURES 2000-19 The excavation work for open drains shall be
2304 CONSTRUCTION 2000-19 executed and paid for in accordance with the
2305 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES AND provisions of SECTION 2100.
TRANSITION SECTIONS 2000-21
2306 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND The excavations shall then be neatly trimmed to the
SURFACE FINISH 2000-21 lines and levels specified so as to permit the
2307 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2000-21 accurate construction of the concrete linings. All
loose material shall be compacted to a density of
not less than 90% of BS-Heavy density.
2301 SCOPE Where the in situ material is unsuitable, the

This Section covers the construction of concrete Engineer may order that it be removed to the
kerbing and channelling, open concrete chutes and required depth and replaced with selected material
concrete linings for open drains at the locations and to compacted to a density of 90% of BS-Heavy
the details as shown on the Drawings or as directed by density.
the Engineer.
Where excavations for open drains are in rock, over
break shall be backfilled as ordered, either with
2302 MATERIALS mass concrete or with selected natural gravel or soil
compacted to a BS-Heavy density of at least 90%.
(a) Concrete
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance (iii) Chutes
with the requirements of SECTIONS 6200, 6300 and
Excavations for chutes shall be neatly trimmed. All
6400. loose material shall be thoroughly compacted, and
where overbreak occurs in rock material, the
(b) Kerbing and channelling
excavations shall be backfilled with mass concrete.
Prefabricated kerbing and channelling shall comply with If required by the Engineer, the excavations shall be
the requirements of SABS 927 or equivalent. Cast in taken deeper to accommodate a concrete screed
situ kerbing and channelling shall be of the class of
cast to act as a working platform for the
concrete indicated. construction of the chutes.
(c) Joint sealant
(b) Prefabricated concrete kerbing and channelling
− Cold-applied joint sealant shall be a two-part Prefabricated concrete kerbing and channelling shall be
polysulphide sealing compound conforming to the laid on the approved bedding with close joints filled with
requirements of BS 4254. 3:1 sand: cement mortar not exceeding 10mm in
− Polyurethane-based joint sealants shall comply with thickness and neatly pointed with a pointing trowel. The
the requirements of SABS 1077 or equivalent. exposed faces of kerbs and edging shall be constructed
− Silicone-based joint sealants shall comply with the true to line and elevation. Kerbing around curves shall
requirements of the Special Specifications. first be laid along the full curve length before the joints
are filled, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
(d) Bedding material Kerbs shall be temporarily propped during construction.
The material on which concrete kerbs and channels are
to be bedded shall consist of crushed stone, cinders, Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer,
slag, sand or other approved porous material with a prefabricated concrete kerb units shall be 1.0 m in
maximum particle size of 14mm. length, except at curves at road junctions, where they
shall be 0.3 m in length.
Concrete may also be prescribed as bedding material,
in which case it shall comply with the requirements of Prefabricated concrete kerbs shall be laid with a Class
SECTION 6400. 1:4:8/25 cast in situ concrete support behind the kerbs
in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
2303 TYPES OF STRUCTURES
Kerbing shall include barrier kerbs, mountable and (c) Prefabricated concrete chutes on side slopes of
semi-mountable types. All these elements may be fills and cuts
prefabricated units or constructed in a continuous Prefabricated concrete chutes shall be manufactured in
operation using slipforms. Channelling may be cast in accordance with the dimensions shown on the
situ, prefabricated units or else of slipform construction. Drawings, and the units shall fit neatly into each other
Chutes may be either prefabricated units or cast in situ, as shown. The bottom unit shall rest against the outlet
and the concrete lining of open channels shall be cast structure or footing as shown on the Drawings.

The units shall be laid true to line and grade from the of pure bitumen by mass, or with an approved anti-
bottom up so that each unit fits neatly into the previous adhesive before any adjoining slabs are cast.
one.
Expansion joints shall be made in accordance with the
A transition section shall be constructed at the inlet to Drawings.
lead the water into the chute as shown on the
Drawings. Where required, the surfaces on which concrete lining
is to be cast shall, after having been trimmed, be
(d) Slip – form kerbing covered with polyethylene sheeting 0.15 mm thick and
Slip-form kerbs and channels shall be placed on an all joints in the sheeting shall be overlapped by at least
approved bedding by a continuous process with an 150 mm.
approved machine. Contraction joints shall be sawn at
intervals shown on the Drawings or prescribed by the (h) Backfilling
Engineer in a manner so as not to cause the concrete After completing the concrete work, the spaces at the
to spall at the joint. The concrete shall be cured in backs of kerbs shall be backfilled with approved
accordance with the requirements of CLAUSE 6409. material to pavement or road shoulder level. Spaces
adjoining chutes shall be backfilled level with the side
The kerbs and channels shall be constructed true to line slope. Such backfill shall be placed in layers not
and elevation and shall have a neat appearance. exceeding 150 mm, or less as required, and each layer
Where transverse cracks occur, the Contractor shall shall be compacted to 90% of BS-Heavy density at or
replace the entire section between the contraction joints around optimum moisture content before the
at his own cost. succeeding layer is placed thereon.
(e) Cast in situ kerbs and channels Where kerbs and channels are laid after construction of
Forms for kerbs and channels shall be accurately set to the base, the spaces between the concrete and
line and elevation and shall be firmly held in position adjoining base shall be backfilled with premixed
during the placing of the concrete. Stops and jointing bituminous material.
material at the ends of sections shall be accurately
placed so as to ensure that joints between adjacent (i) Construction sequence
sections are truly perpendicular to the surface of the
concrete and at right angles to the edge of the road. (i) Where kerbs and channelling are constructed
before the base course:
After concrete has been placed in the forms, it shall be In this case, slip-form units or cast in situ units may
tamped and worked until mortar entirely covers any be constructed. During working and constructing
exposed faces. Exposed faces shall then be finished to the base, precautionary measures shall be taken to
smooth and even surfaces and edges shall be rounded prevent the concrete work from being damaged or
to the radii shown on the Drawings. shifted.
Forms shall be removed from any concrete surface that (ii) Where kerbs and channelling are constructed after
will be exposed, within a period of 24 hours of the the base course:
concrete having been placed. Minor defects shall be The base shall be constructed wider than the
repaired with a 2:1 sand: cement mortar. Plastering specified width, after which a neat trench shall be
shall not be permitted on exposed faces and all rejected dug for the kerbing or channelling. Any over-
portions shall be removed and replaced at the excavation shall be filled with concrete cast
Contractor’s expense. When completed, the sections simultaneously with the kerbs and channelling.
shall be cured in accordance with the requirements
specified in CLAUSE 6409. (iii) Where kerbs and channelling are constructed after
the asphalt surfacing:
The completed kerbs and channels shall be true to line The asphalt surfacing shall be constructed wider
and elevation and shall have an even and neat than the specified width and shall be cut back
appearance. accurately with a mechanical saw to a marked line
to give a neat joint line between the kerbs or
(f) Cast in situ chutes on cut slopes channelling and the asphalt layer. The base shall
Cast in situ concrete chutes on cut slopes, together with then be removed to the required depth.
the inlet and outlet structures, shall be constructed in
accordance with the Drawings. The class of concrete Any concrete spilt onto the asphalt surface shall be
shall be as indicated on the Drawings. removed. Where so required by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall, without any additional
Where required by the Engineer, a concrete screed compensation paint emulsion over the stained
shall first be cast on excavations that cannot be surface.
trimmed accurately. The screed shall be accurately
finished to the level of the underside of the chute floor (j) Protection
slab and allowed to set before the floor slab is cast. During transporting and laying care shall be taken to
Where the material being excavated cannot be protect all precast units against chipping or breakage.
accurately trimmed or where the chute sides have to
extend above the surface of cut slopes, the outer faces Concrete kerbing and channelling as well as any other
of the sides shall be cast against formwork. structures adjacent to the road shall be protected
against staining by bitumen being sprayed or premix
(g) Concrete-lined open drains being placed. Where bitumen is to be sprayed, all such
The exposed surfaces of the concrete linings of open work shall be completely covered with polyethylene
drains shall be given a Class U2 surface finish as sheeting at least 0.25 mm thick, specially reinforced
defined in CLAUSE 6209. Concrete shall be cured in paper or other approved material, properly secured to
accordance with the requirements of CLAUSE 6409. prevent the sheeting from lifting during windy
conditions. Any work stained by bitumen shall be
Sealed joints in concrete shall be in accordance with broken down and replaced, unless all such bitumen is
the details indicated on the Drawings and the provisions completely removed so as not to show any stains.
of SECTION 6600. Cold joints shall be painted with a Painting over stained concrete is strictly prohibited.
coat of approved bituminous emulsion containing 60%

(k) Cutting existing bituminous surfacing and All cross–sectional dimensions shall be within 6 mm
pavement layers of the specified dimensions except that the
Where the Engineer instructs kerbing, channelling or underside of channelling may extend up to 25 mm
concrete – lined drains to be constructed against below the level at which it would have the required
existing bituminous surfacing, the full depth of the thickness.
bituminous surfacing, and the base and subbase if
necessary, shall be accurately cut with a mechanical (b) Concrete – lined opens drains and concrete
saw to the required line before the kerbing, channelling chutes
or concrete- lined drain is constructed. The edge shall Concrete – lined opens drains and concrete chutes
be vertical for kerbing and channelling. The concrete shall be constructed to within the following tolerances:
shall then be placed directly against the cut edge
without formwork. All material outside the cut edge shall (i) Horizontal alignment
be removed to the required depth before the concrete is The maximum deviation from the true position of
placed. The debris shall be disposed of at a dumping the edges or centre line shall be 25 mm.
site to be provided by the Contractor subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The bituminous surfacing (ii) Vertical alignment
shall be protected and kept clean to the Engineer’s The invert level of concrete lined open channels
satisfaction. shall nowhere deviated by more than 25 mm from
the required level and nowhere shall the open drain
2305 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES AND inverts have an adverse grade.
TRANSITION SECTIONS
(iii) Trueness of exposed surface
Transition sections on kerbing, kerbing-channelling
When tested with a 3 m straight edge, no exposed
combinations and concrete- lined open drains shall be
surface shall show surface irregularities exceeding
constructed to the same standards and by the same
10 mm.
methods as described for the uniform sections, but with
the required modifications. Sections may be either
(iv) Cross – sectional dimensions
precast or cast in situ units.
All cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 10
mm of the specified dimensions and the average
Inlet and outlet structures may be either precast or
thickness of a floor or side slab shall not be less
partially precast concrete units or of cast in situ
than the specified thickness when considering any
concrete.
complete slab or slab sections with a surface area
2
of 10 m or more, and disregarding a thickness
Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the
exceeding 10 mm of the specified thickness.
Engineer, the Contractor shall supply and install in the
outlet structures energy dissipaters consisting of
(c) Surface finish
prefabricated reinforced concrete blocks of Class 20/19
All unformed exposed concrete surfaces shall have a
concrete of the dimensions shown on the Drawings or
Class U2 surface finish and all formed exposed
listed in the Bill of Quantities. All concrete work shall
concrete surfaces shall have a Class F2 surface finish
comply with the requirements of SERIES 6000.
as defined in CLAUSE 6209.
Components such as grids, covers and frames shall be 2307 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings
and the requirements of SUBCLAUSE 2212 (e). ITEM UNIT
23.01 CONCRETE KERBING (CLASS
OF CONCRETE INDICATED FOR CAST
2306 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND IN SITU CONCRETE):
SURFACE FINISH (a) (DESCRIPTION OF TYPE WITH METRE (m)
REFERENCE OF DRAWING)
(a) Concrete kerbing and channelling (b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES METRE (m)
Concrete kerbing and channelling shall be constructed
to within the following dimensional and alignment
tolerances:
ITEM UNIT
(i) Horizontal alignment 23.02 CONCRETE KERBING –
The maximum deviation of edges, centre line, or CHANNELLING COMBINATION (CLASS
vertical surfaces from the specified position shall be OF CONCRETE INDICATED FOR CAST
25 mm. IN SITU CONCRETE):
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF TYPE WITH METRE (m)
Further to the above, the maximum deviation of REFERENCE OF DRAWING)
edges, centre line or vertical surfaces from the
(b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES METRE (m)
specified alignment, shall be 1:500 when taken over
any section exceeding 10m in length.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete
(ii) Vertical alignment and level kerbing, or a combination kerbing and channelling,
The inside edge of channelling shall nowhere be complete as constructed, measured along the front face
above the finished road nor more than 10 mm of the kerb.
below the finished road level. The invert level of
channels and open drains and the top of kerbing The bid for each metre of concrete kerbing and/or
shall nowhere deviate by more than 10 mm from kerbing channeling combination shall include full
the required level and nowhere shall channels or compensation for the necessary excavation and
drains have adverse grade. preparation of bedding, backfilling, formwork, finishing
and for procuring, furnishing and installing all materials,
(iii) Trueness of exposed surfaces kerbing and channeling and protecting it against
When tested with a 3 m straight – edge, no surface staining, supporting the kerbs with in situ cast concrete
irregularities shall exceed 6 mm. and filling and painting all joints, all complete as
specified.
(iv) Crossectional dimensions

ITEM UNIT of which shall be deemed to be included in the rates bid

23.03 CONCRETE CHUTES (TYPICAL for concrete.
DESIGNS ):
The unit of measurement for other components such as
(a) (DESCRIPTIONS OF TYPE WITH METRE (m) grids shall be number of each type of component
REFERENCE TO DRAWING. STATE installed. The bid rates shall include full compensation
WHETHER PREFABRICATED OR CAST for procuring, furnishing and installing the components,
IN SITU AND CLASS OF CONCRETE including any painting or protective coating required in
(b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES METRE (m) the Special Specifications or as shown on the
Drawings.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
completed chute as constructed, including any overlap
measured along the slope as laid but excluding ITEM UNIT
transition sections and inlet and outlet structures 23.07 TRIMMING OF
measured separately. EXCAVATIONS FOR CONCRETE-
LINED OPEN DRAINS:
The bid rate per metre shall include full compensation (a) IN SOFT MATERIAL AS DEFINED IN SQUARE
for procuring, furnishing and installing the completed CLAUSE 3603
2
METRE (m )
chutes as specified and all excavation and the
preparation of bedding, backfilling, formwork and (b) IN ROCK AS DEFINED IN CLAUSE SQUARE
2
finishing required. 3603 METRE (m )

ITEM UNIT excavation trimmed to receive concrete lining.
23.04 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE
CHUTES (MEASURED BY The bid rates shall include full compensation for all
COMPONENTS): labour, plant, material and other additional work and
incidentals necessary for trimming the excavations for
(a) CONCRETE (CLASS INDICATED ) CUBIC METRE open drains to the standard of finish required for the
3
(m ) construction of concrete linings. All excavation,
(b) FORMWORK (SURFACE FINISH SQUARE including the removal of unsuitable ground and
2
INDICATED ) METRE (m ) backfilling with suitable material, shall be measured and
paid for under SECTION 2100. Payment shall distinguish
Measurement and payment for formwork and concrete between trimming in soft material and trimming in rock
shall be as specified in SECTIONS 6200 and 6400 except material as defined in SECTION 2105. No extra payment
that payment for excavation and gravel or soil shall be made in respect of any soil or gravel backfilling,
backfilling shall be deemed to be include in the rates bid additional concrete or mass – concrete backfilling
for concrete and shall not be measured and paid for required on account of overbreak or unavoidable
separately. unevenness of the excavations in difficult ground, the
cost of which shall be deemed to be included in the bid
rates for trimming in rock material.
ITEM UNIT
23.05 INLET , OUTLET, TRANSITION
AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES (TYPICAL ITEM UNIT
DESIGNS): 23.08 CONCRETE LINING FOR
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE, NUMBER (no) OPENS DRAINS:
TYPE, ETC, WITH REFERENCE TO (a) CAST IN SITU CONCRETE LINING CUBIC METRE
3
DRAWING AND CLASS OF (CLASS OF CONCRETE AND TYPE (m )
CONCRETE) OF OPEN DRAIN INDICATED)
(b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES NUMBER (no) (b) CLASS U2 SURFACE FINISH TO SQUARE
2
CAST IN SITU CONCRETE (TYPE OF METRE (m )
The unit of measurement and payment shall be the OPEN DRAIN INDICATED )
number of completed units of each type of structure
constructed, and payment shall include full Measurement of and payment for concrete shall be as
compensation for all formwork, concrete, excavation, specified in SECTION 6400, but the bid rate shall include
trimming and backfilling, including such accessories as full compensation for painting open joint surface as
grids, etc as may be specified on the Drawings. specified.
The unit of measurement for surface shall be the

ITEM UNIT square metre of finished surface.
23.06 INLET, OUTLET,
TRANSITION AND SIMILAR The bid rate for surface finish shall include full
STRUCTURES (MEASURED BY compensation for all labour, plant, material and other
COMPONENTS): additional work and incidentals required for trimming the
concrete lining specified.
(a) CONCRETE (CLASS INDICATED) CUBIC METRE
3
(m ) ITEM UNIT
(b) FORMWORK (SURFACE FINISH SQUARE
INDICATED )
2
METRE (m ) 23.09 FORMWORK TO CAST IN SITU
CONCRETE LINING FOR OPEN DRAINS
(c) OTHER COMPONENTS NUMBER (no)
(CLASS F2 SURFACE FINISH):
(a) TO SIDES WITH FORMWORK ON THE SQUARE
The measurement and payment for formwork and INTERNAL FACE ONLY
2
METRE (m )
concrete shall be as specified in SECTIONS 6200 and
6400, except that excavation, trimming and backfilling (b) TO SIDES WITH FORMWORK ON SQUARE
2
shall not be measured and paid for separately, the cost BOTH INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL METRE (m )
FACES (EACH FACE MEASURED)

(c) TO ENDS OF SLABS SQUARE The various layers shall not be measured separately for
2
METRE (m ) payment.
Measurement of and payment for formwork shall be as The bid rate shall include full compensation for all
specified in SECTION 6200. Formwork under SUBITEM labour, constructional plant and materials required for
23.09(a) shall be measured and paid for only when the cutting the surfacing and pavement layers to the
side slope of the slabs exceeds 1:2 and the slabs required depth, removing and disposing of the debris
cannot be constructed without formwork even when a and protecting and keeping the surfacing clean, all as
stiff concrete mix is used. When the Contractor elects to specified.
use precast side slabs, payment will be made for
formwork as if cast in situ concrete had been used.
ITEM UNIT
23.15 PRECAST CONCRETE NUMBER
ITEM UNIT BLOCKS IN OUTLET STRUCTURES (no)
23.10 SEALED JOINTS IN CONCRETE METRE
LININGS OF OPEN DRAINS (m) The unit of measurement shall be the number of
(DESCRIPTION OF TYPE WITH precast concrete blocks provided and installed as
REFERENCES TO DRAWING) shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.

completed joint of each size and type.
supply of all materials and for all labour, formwork and
incidentals necessary for sealing the joint as shown on
the Drawings or set out in the Special Specifications.
ITEM UNIT
23.11 CONCRETE SCREED OR CUBIC
BACKFILL BELOW CHUTES (CLASS OF METRE
3
CONCRETE INDICATED) (m )

concrete screed or backfill as may be instructed by the
Engineer to be placed below chutes.

furnishing, procuring and placing the concrete in screed
or backfill.
ITEM UNIT
23.12 STEEL REINFORCEMENT:
(b) HIGH TENSILE STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
(c) WELDED STEEL FABRIC TONNE (t)
Measurement and payment shall be in accordance with

the provisions of SECTION 6300.
ITEM UNIT
23.13 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING SQUARE
2
(0.15 mm THICK ) FOR CONCRETE- METRE (m )
LINED OPEN DRAINS

area covered with polyethylene sheeting.

procuring, furnishing and installing the polyethylene
sheeting, including wastage and overlap.
ITEM UNIT
23.14 CUTTING BITUMINOUS METRE (m)
PAVEMENT LAYERS FOR CONCRETE
KERBING, CHANNELLING OR
CONCRETE-LINED DRAINS

bituminous surfacing and pavement layers cut where
instructed by the Engineer, irrespective of the depth cut.

SERIES 2000: DRAINAGE The composition of the asphalt mix shall in all cases be
subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
SECTION 2400: ASPHALT AND (b) Mixing plant

The mixing plant shall be in accordance with the
CONCRETE BERMS requirements of CLAUSE 4204.
(c) Mixing, transporting and placing

CONTENTS:
Asphalt with penetration – grade bitumen shall be
CLAUSE PAGE mixed, transported and placed in accordance with the
2401 SCOPE 2000-24 requirements of SECTION 4200, and asphalt with mix-
2402 MATERIALS 2000-24 grade bitumen emulsion in accordance with the
2403 COMPOUNDING, MIXING AND requirements of the Special Specification.
TRANSPORTING ASPHALT MIXES 2000-24
2404 PREPARING THE BERM FOUNDATION 2000-24 2404 PREPARING THE BERM FOUNDATION
2405 PLACING 2000-24 If shown on the Drawings, the prime coat sprayed onto
2406 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2000-25 the base and shoulders shall extend over a wider area
to allow space for the berms to be placed.
Where the Engineer so instruct that berms shall be

2401 SCOPE constructed, the specified width of the base projecting
This Section covers the construction of asphalt or beyond the sides of the paved shoulders shall be
concrete berms at outer edge of paved shoulders. thoroughly cleaned. The shoulder material adjacent to
Berms shall be cast in situ in moulds or by means of a the base shall be compacted and trimmed to the upper
suitable machine to the dimensions shown on the level of the base and all loose material removed.
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
A prime coat consisting of 30% bitumen-emulsion shall
2
be applied at a rate of 0.40 l/m onto that part of the
berm foundation falling outside the paved surface of the
2402 MATERIALS road. In the case of asphalt berms, a tack of 0.40 l/m
2
over the entire berm foundation. The tack coat shall be

(a) Bituminous binder
left to break before the berm is placed.
Bituminous binder shall be a penetration –grade
bitumen or a mix- grade bituminous emulsion as may
be prescribed by the Engineer. Spray – grade emulsion 2405 PLACING
may be used as primer and tack coat. When the berms are placed, proper care shall be taken
at all times to ensure that the toe of the berm does not
The various bituminous materials shall comply with the encroach on the side of the carriageway or shoulder by
following specifications: more than 25 mm.
− Penetration- grade bitumen: AASHTO M20-70
or equivalent (a) Placing by hand
− The mixture shall be placed and shaped in situ in a rigid
Bituminous emulsions: AASHTO M140-88
and M208-96 or equivalent portable mould to form a trapezoidal kerb of the
dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
(b) Asphalt
Asphalt containing penetration- grade bitumen shall In the case of asphalt berms the mixture shall be
thoroughly compacted to form a hard unyielding berm,
comply with the requirements of SECTION 4200. The
aggregate grading shall lie between the limits indicated true to level shape and line with the specified
in TABLE 4202/3 for a fine continuously graded mix. tolerances. The moulds may be removed as soon as
the material has cooled to air temperature, or in the
The material of asphalt which contains mix –grade case of a cold asphalt mix as soon as it has hardened.
bitumen emulsion shall comply with the requirements of
(b) Placing by machine
the Special Specification.
A machine of approved design may be used for placing
The grading of the aggregate shall be subject to the the berm. In general, machine- placed work will not
prior approval of the Engineer. require any additional compaction. In areas where, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the compaction is
(c) Concrete inadequate, the machine shall be weighted with
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance additional mass, or other measures shall be taken to
with the details shown on the Drawings and the ensure that adequate compaction is obtained.
requirements of SECTIONS 6200 and 6400.
(c) Placing under guardrails
Should the berm be placed first, the holes for the
guardrail posts shall be excavated with care to prevent
2403 COMPOUNDING, MIXING AND damage being done to the berm. Where chutes are
TRANSPORTING ASPHALT MIXES required against fills, the berm shall be discontinued for
the width of the top of the chute and finished to form a
(a) Compounding the mixtures proper inlet for the water into the chute, as indicated on
Asphalt containing penetration grade bitumen shall the Drawings.
contain by mass of the dry aggregate, 7% by total
weight of 60/70 or 80/100 penetration grade bitumen or (d) General requirements
as specified, and 1% of active filler. The berms shall be placed true to level, shape and line.
All berms deviating more than 10 mm from the specified
Asphalt containing mix- grade bitumen emulsion shall line when measured at the inner edge of either their
contain by mass of the dry aggregate, 7% of net crests or their bases, or of which the height or width,
bitumen. The asphalt mix shall be in accordance with measured at the crest, varies by more than 5mm from
the requirements of the Special Specifications. the specified height or width, will be rejected and shall

be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s own Payment shall be made under this item for the coat if,
expenses. as instructed by the Engineer, it is applied in a separate
strip independently from the prime coat of the road or
The surface of concrete berms placed by machine, and shoulder surface.
all unformed surface, shall be given a Class U2 finish,
and formed surfaces a Class F2 finish. Joints shall be If applied as an integral part of the prime coat of the
provided at 3 m intervals in all concrete berms either by road or shoulder surface by the prime coat being
casting in alternate sections or by cutting machined- sprayed over a wider area to provide space for the
placed sections. All such joints shall be neatly formed berms, payment for the prime coat will not be made
and finished so as not to leave any irregularities or under this item.
loose concrete at the joints.
ITEM UNIT
2406 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 24.04 TRANSITION SECTIONS FOR NUMBER
NEW JERSEY TYPE OF RAILS) (no)
ITEM UNIT
24.01 ASPHALT BERMS: The unit of measurement shall be the number of
(a) PLACED WHERE THERE ARE NO METRE (m) completed asphalt transition sections constructed to the
GUARDRAILS (TYPES OF ASPHALT AND details shown on the Drawings.
BINDER INDICATED)
(b) PLACED AT EXISTING GUARDRAILS METRE (m)
procuring, providing, mixing and placing all material and
(TYPES OF ASPHALT AND BINDER for all labour, formwork and incidentals required for
INDICATED)
constructing complete transition sections as specified.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of asphalt

berm placed as specified.

procuring, furnishing, mixing and placing the material
and all other work necessary for completing the asphalt
berms as specified.
The prime and tack coats shall be paid for under ITEM
24.03.
ITEM UNIT
24.02 CONCRETE BERMS:
(a) PLACED WHERE THERE ARE NO METRE (m)
GUARDRAILS (CLASS OF CONCRETE
INDICATED)
(CLASS OF CONCRETE INDICATED)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete

berm placed as specified.

procuring, furnishing, mixing and placing the material
and all other work necessary for completing the
concrete berms as specified. The prime coat shall be
paid for under ITEM 24.03
ITEM UNIT
24.03 PRIME AND TACK COATS:
(a) PRIME COAT:
(i) UNDER ASPHALT BERMS SQUARE
2
(PRIME INDICATED) METRE (m )
(ii) UNDER CONCRETE BERMS SQUARE
2
(PRIME INDICATED ) METRE (m )
(b) TACK COAT (TYPE INDICATED) SQUARE
2
METRE (m )

completed prime coat or tack coat applied in
accordance with the Specifications.

procuring and providing all material and for mixing and
applying the adhesive and primer complete as
specified, including cleaning, compacting and trimming
the coat being primed.

SERIES 2000: DRAINAGE (c) Sand
(i) Sand for concrete

SECTION 2500: PITCHING, Sand for concrete, cement slurry and cement
mortar shall comply with the relevant requirements
STONEWORK AND PROTECTION of SUBCLAUSE 6402(b) subject to testing in
accordance with the relevant CML test methods.
AGAINST EROSION
(ii) Sand bedding
CONTENTS: Sand for bedding used for paving blocks shall not
contain any deleterious impurities and shall comply
CLAUSE PAGE
with the grading requirements in TABLE 2502/ 1
2501 SCOPE 2000-26
2502 MATERIALS 2000-26
2503 STONE PITCHING 2000-27 TABLE 2502/1
2504 RIPRAP 2000-27 GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR BEDDING SAND
2505 STONE MASONRY W ALLS 2000-28
2506 SEGMENTAL BLOCK PAVING 2000-28 Sieve size (mm) % Passing
2507 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE PITCHING 2000-29 10 100
2508 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2000-29 5 95-100
2.36 80-100
1.18 50-85
0.600 25-60
2501 SCOPE 0.300 10-30
This Section covers the furnishing of materials and the 0.150 5-15
construction of a protective covering in stone pitching, 0.075 0-10
cast in situ concrete pitching, bricks or prefabricated
concrete blocks on exposed surfaces such as earth (iii) Sand for joints
slopes, drains and stream beds, as well as heavier Sand used for being brushed into the joints
protective layers in the form of riprap and the between pavement blocks shall all pass through a
construction of stone masonry for walls , all as shown 1.18 mm sieve, and between 10 and 15% of it shall
on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer. pass through a 0.075 mm sieve.
(d) Paving blocks

2502 MATERIALS Paving blocks shall comply with the requirements of
SABS 1058 or equivalent for Class 25 paving blocks
(a) Stone where paving blocks are made from concrete, and
bricks used as paving blocks shall be facebrick units
(i) Pitching which shall comply with the requirements of SABS 227
Stone for pitching shall be sound, tough and or equivalent. Engineering units may also be used
durable, without any stones less than 200 mm in instead of facebrick units.
minimum dimension, except that smaller pieces or
spalls may be used for filling spaces between the The surface texture and colour of all units shall be
large stones. The shapes of the rocks or stones uniform.
shall be so as to form a stable protective layer of
the required thickness. Rounded boulders shall not Paving blocks for sidewalks shall be square
be used on slopes steeper than 2:1 unless grouted. prefabricated concrete blocks, 450mm x 450 mm x 50
mm in size and fabricated from Class 30 concrete. As to
All stone intended for use on a particular pitching appearance, the blocks shall comply with the
job shall be subjected to the prior approval of the requirements of Clause 3.3 of SABS 927 or equivalent.
Engineer. The upper surface shall have an approved pattern to
provide proper skid resistance.
(ii) Riprap
Stone for riprap shall be hard field or quarry stone Concrete grass blocks shall consist of concrete slabs of
not susceptible to disintegration or excessive the dimensions shown on the Drawings, with openings
weathering on exposure to the atmosphere or through the slab totalling at least 20% of the surface
water. It shall be free from soft material such as area.
sand, clay, shale or organic material and shall not
contain an excessive quantity of elongated stones. (e) Concrete
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with
The required size of the stone will depend on the provision of SECTION 6200, 6300 and 6400.
“critical mass” specified. At least 50% by mass of
the material comprising the riprap shall consist of (f) Wire
stones with a mass heavier than the critical mass, Wire for pitching kept in position by wires shall consist
and not more than 10% by mass of the material of 4 mm diameter galvanised wire, which complies with
shall consist of stones with a mass of less than 10% the requirements of SABS 675 or equivalent.
of the critical mass or more than 5 times the critical
mass. (g) Permeable material for filter layer
Permeable material for filter layers shall comply with the
(b) Cement requirements specified for permeable material for
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement complying subsoil drains in CLAUSE 2104.
with the requirements of TZS 177:1999, BS 12 of the
latest issue or equivalent standard on approval of the (h) Geotextile fabric
Engineer. Synthetic- fibre filter fabric shall be of the grade and
type specified in the Bill of Quantities or Special
Specifications and shall comply with the requirements
of CLAUSE 3605.

2503 STONE PITCHING Where required, weep holes shall be formed in the
pitching.
(a) Plain stone pitching
The area shall be prepared by excavating, shaping and (c) Wired and grouted stone pitching
trimming necessary for pitching and by thoroughly The area to be pitched shall be prepared as described
compacting the area by hand ramming to prevent in SUBCLAUSES 2503(a) and 2503(b) concrete bed
subsequent settlement. A trench shall be excavated as (Class 15 concrete) with a thickness of at least 75 mm
directed by the Engineer along the toe of any slopes to shall then be placed. The stone pitching shall be of
be pitched or along the unprotected edge of the pitching stones with a minimum dimension of 200 mm, which
in the beds of streams. Two pitching methods follow, shall be laid while the concrete is still fresh. Openings
and the method to be adopted shall be decided on by between stones shall be filled with cement grout as
the Engineer. described in SUBCLAUSE 2503(b), and care shall be
taken not to spill the grout onto the finally exposed
(i) Method 1 surfaces of the stones. Grout spilt onto the exposed
Commencing at the bottom of the trench, the stones surface of the stone shall be removed while still soft and
shall be laid and firmly bedded into the slope and the joints between stones shall be neatly finished.
against adjoining stones. The stones shall be laid
with their longitudinal axes at right angles to the Curing shall be done as described for grouted stone
slope and with staggered joints. The stones shall be pitching in SUBCLAUSE 2503(b).
well rammed into the bank or surface to be
protected and the spaces between the larger stones The completed pitching shall have an even compacted
shall be filled with spalls of approved pitching stone appearance and nowhere may the surface deviate by
securely rammed into place. more than 25 mm from the specified lines and grades.
Placing of rock by dumping shall not be allowed.

2504 RIPRAP
(ii) Method 2
The technique and requirements laid down in (a) General
Method 1 shall also apply to Method 2, except in Riprap shall consist of a course of large rock placed on
the following aspects: bank slopes and toes in stream and river beds and at
other localities where protection of this type may be
(1) No small stones or spalls shall be used to fill in required.
spaces between larger stones.
Two types of riprap are specified here, viz. one type
(2) Simultaneously with the placing of stones, top where the rocks are individually packed, which is
soil shall be introduced between individual designated as packed riprap, and the other type where
stones, and sufficiently rammed so as to the rock is dumped and then spread by machines,
provide a firm bonded structure. The topsoil which is designated as dumped riprap.
shall be provided to the full depth of the stone
pitching at any point. The surface of areas to receive riprap shall be neatly
trimmed to line and level and all loose material
(3) Rooted grass or tufts of grass shall then be compacted. The perimeters of riprap areas shall be
planted in the soil between stones and watered protected by the construction of either rock- filled
immediately and copiously and thereafter at trenches, walls or other structures as may be required.
regular intervals until the grass has been Perimeter trenches shall normally be backfilled with
established. rock of the same size and quality as that used in the
construction of the adjoining riprap, but any voids shall
Whichever of the above two methods is adopted, be filled with similar stone and the entire backfill shall
the finished surface of the pitching shall present an be well compacted.
even, tight and neat appearance with no stones
varying by more than 25 mm from the specified (b) Filter bed
surface grades or lines. The thickness of the The filter bed shall consist of a layer or layers of
pitching, measured at right angles to the surface, permeable material placed on the prepared surface to
shall not be less than 200 mm. the required thickness and each layer shall be finished
to an even surface and thickness. Compaction of
(b) Grouted stone pitching pervious material will not be required. Care shall be
The work shall be done in accordance with all the taken not mix various grades of filter material nor to
requirements specified for plain pitching in SUBCLAUSE disturb material already placed when subsequent layers
2503(a) above, except that the stone shall be or riprap are being placed.
thoroughly cleaned of adhering dirt or clay, moistened
and embedded in freshly laid cement mortar composed When the use of synthetic- fibre filter fabric is required,
of one part of cement to six parts of sand. Any spaces the material shall be placed on the prepared surface on
between the stones shall be filled with cement grout of the filter bed, depending on the instructions. The
the same composition as the mortar. The mortar and overlap between adjacent sheets shall be 150 mm
the grout shall be placed in a continuous operation for unless otherwise specified. Care shall be taken not to
any days run at any one location. The grout shall be damage the filter fabric when subsequent layers are
worked into the pitching to ensure that all spaces or being placed, nor to expose the filter fabric to the sun
voids between the stones will be completely filled with for periods exceeding three days before it is covered.
grout to the full depth of the stone pitching. Grout spilt
onto exposed surface of the stone shall be removed (c) Packed riprap
while still soft, and the joints between stones shall be Packed riprap shall be constructed from rocks placed
neatly finished. individually to stagger the joints and so as to be firmly
bedded in the prepared surface. The spaces between
The grouted pitching shall be cured with wet sacking or larger stones shall be filled with spalls or smaller stones
other approved wet cover for a period of not less than securely rammed into place. On inclined surfaces the
four days after grouting, and shall not be subjected to rock shall be laid in long horizontal strips starting from
loading until adequate strength has been developed. the bottom, and not in strips up the slope.

The completed riprap shall present a tight and even environmentally compatible herbicide and ant poison
surface. Local surface irregularities of the riprap shall before the layer of sand for bedding is placed.
not exceed 150 mm.
(b) Sand for bedding
(d) Dumped A layer of sand for bedding shall be placed on top of the
Dumped riprap shall be constructed by dumping the prepared surface, and when still loose, accurately
stone on the prepared surface, spreading it by bulldozer floated to an uncompacted thickness of 30mm (±5mm)
or other suitable earth-moving equipment, and trimming so as to afford the correct level to the pavement after
it to the required lines and levels. The material shall be compaction. Sand for bedding shall be placed
placed in a manner that will prevent the segregation of immediately before the paving blocks are laid and shall
the smaller and larger stones and the top layer shall be not be compacted before the blocks have been laid.
tight with a minimum of voids.
(c) Laying the paving blocks
The pattern for laying the paving blocks shall be that as
2505 STONE MASONRY WALLS shown on the Drawings or approved or prescribed by
the Engineer. Unbroken blocks shall first be laid and
(a) General filler pieces afterwards. Filler pieces shall be neatly
Stone masonry walls may be plain packed stone walls sawn or hewn to fit exactly into the space to be filled.
with dry joints or otherwise mortared stone walls with Spaces of less than 25% of a full-sized block may be
stones bedded in cement mortar as indicated on the filled with 25 MPa concrete. The joints between blocks
Drawings, as specified or as may be ordered. shall be sized between 2 and 6 mm and the top faces of
blocks shall be flush. After the paving blocks have been
The minimum mass of each stone used shall be 10 kg laid, the pavement shall be compacted by two passes of
and its minimum dimension 75 mm. a suitable vibrating-plate compactor operating at a
frequency of 65 to 100 Hz and a low amplitude. Its plate
2
(b) Plain packed stone walls surface shall be 0.2 to 0.4 m and shall develop a
A foundation trench shall be excavated down to rock or centrifugal force of 7 to 16 kN.
to material with an adequate bearing capacity at a
minimum depth of 300 mm below ground lever. Larger After compaction of the pavement as described above,
selected stones shall be used for the foundation layer. joint sand shall be spread and brushed into the joints
Flat and stratified stones shall be laid with the largest until the joints have been properly filled. Any surplus
dimension in the horizontal plane. Stones shall be sand shall then be broomed off and pavement shall
packed individually to stagger the joints and to provide then be subjected to two further passes by the plate
a minimum of voids, and shall be firmly bedded against vibrator.
adjoining stones. The spaces between the larger
stones shall be filled with spalls securely rammed into (d) Edge beams
place. The larger stones shall not bear on the spalls Concrete edge beams or any such other edge supports
used for filling the voids. The top and ends of the wall shall be constructed onto the supporting layer in
shall be neatly finished with selected coping stones. accordance with the details shown on the Drawings,
and shall be constructed and left to cure before any
The appearance of the completed wall shall present an paving blocks are laid.
even and tight surface.
(e) Paving blocks for sidewalks
(c) Cement – mortared stone walls Paving blocks for sidewalks shall be laid in the same
The walling shall be constructed as specified in (b) way as that described above for paving blocks, also on
above, with the exception that the stones shall be a bed of sand but on the proviso that where so
wetted and set in a 6:1 sand:cement mortar. The specified, joints shall be filled with a 6:1 sand:cement
exposed parts of the stones on the wall faces shall be mortar instead of with sand only. In this case the width
cleaned of all mortar by washing or wire brushing. The of the joints between the stones shall be strictly in
mortar shall be flush pointed to the satisfaction of the accordance with the dimensions shown on the
Engineer, who may require a capping and end Drawings and the pavement shall be fully compacted
treatment of the same mortar. before the joints are filled.
Weep holes shall be provided as prescribed and shall (f) Concrete grass blocks
be cleaned of mortar or any other clogging material that Concrete grass blocks of the size specified or shown on
may have entered during construction. the Drawings shall be placed on areas prepared for
grassing as specified in SECTION 5700. The holes in the
The walling shall be protected from the elements and blocks shall be filled with topsoil, and grassed with
kept moist for a minimum period of four days after grass cuttings or hydro-seeding as specified in SECTION
completion. 5700.
2506 SEGMENTAL BLOCK PAVING (g) Finishing requirements
(a) General (i) Segmental block paving

The completed paving shall be even and neat, flush
The underlying layers for surfaces to be pitched shall be
constructed as specified or as indicated on the with the kerb or edge – beam and may not lie below
Drawings. Where no specified requirements have been the side of the kerbing. The final surface levels shall
nowhere deviate by more than 15 mm from the
set in respect of the underlying layers, the top layer
shall be mechanically compacted to at least 90% of BS- specified levels and and planes, and no
Heavy density down to at least 150 mm from the top. irregularities exceeding 10 mm may occur during
testing with a 3m straight- edge.
During this process the top layer shall be trimmed to the
required grades and levels.
(ii) Grass block pavement
The completed grass-block pavement shall have a
Where specified or required by the Engineer the
prepared surface shall be treated with approved neat and even appearance. The final surface of the
pavement may nowhere deviate by more than 15
mm from the specified levels and planes.

2507 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE PITCHING CONSISTING OF:

3
The areas where cast in situ concrete pitching is to be (i) CRUSHED STONE CUBIC METRE (m )
constructed, trimmed and prepared as described in (ii) FILTER SAND OBTAINED CUBIC METRE (m
3
)
CLAUSE 2506 for block paving. The areas shall also be FROM BORROW PITS
treated with an environmentally compatible herbicide
and ant poison if required. The concrete shall comply (d) SYNTHETIC FIBRE FILTER FABRIC SQUARE METRE
2
with the requirements of SERIES 6000. (TYPE , CLASS AND GRADE (m )
STATED)
Prior to placing the concrete the surface shall be
watered and kept damp until the concrete has been The unit of measurement for riprap and filter layer
placed. The type of concrete used shall, unless (SUBITEMS 25.02(a), (b) and (c) above) shall be the
otherwise specified, be Class 20 and the concrete shall cubic metre of riprap or filter layer in place and shall
be accurately laid in alternate panels to the lines and include rock used in trench backfill. The unit of
levels indicated, after which the remaining panels shall measurement for SUBITEM 2502(d) shall be the square
be similarly placed. Accurately set-up guides shall be metre of filter fabric laid as specified, including overlaps.
used to achieve the required line and slope. The
concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and finished to The rates bid for SUBITEMS 25.02(a), (b) and (c) shall
a Class U2 surface finish. include full compensation for preparing the surfaces,
including excavation (but excluding excavation for
Where indicated, the concrete pitching shall be trenches and bulk excavations ) and for the furnishing,
contained by concrete edge beams being constructed transporting , handling and placing of riprap or filter
as described in SUBCLAUSE 2506 (d). layers. The rate bid for SUBITEM (d) shall include full
compensation for procuring and furnishing the filter
The concrete pitching shall be cured for at least seven fabric and for laying it as specified, including wastage.
days and no traffic shall be allowed to move across the Collectively the rates shall also include full
pitching before the specified 28-days strength has been compensation for all other incidentals necessary for
reached. completing the work as specified.
The final surface may nowhere deviate by more than 25

mm from the specified levels and planes and no ITEM UNIT
irregularities exceeding 10 mm occur during testing with 25.03 STONE MASONRY
a 3 m straight – edge. WALLS:
3
(a) PLAIN PACKED STONE WALLS CUBIC METRE (m )
3
2508 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (b) CEMENT-MORTARED STONE CUBIC METRE (m )
WALLS
ITEM UNIT
25.01 STONE PITCHING: The unit of measurement for stone masonry walls shall
be the cubic metre of actual walling constructed and
(a) PLAIN PITCHING
2
accepted.
(i) METHOD 1 SQUARE METRE (m )
2 The bid rate for each type of stone wall shall include full
(ii) METHOD 2 SQUARE METRE (m )
2 compensation for furnishing all materials, trimming the
(b) GROUND STONE PITCHING SQUARE METRE (m )
2
areas, placing the stones and cement-mortared
(c) WIRED AND GROUTED STONE SQUARE METRE (m ) masonry where necessary, and all other work
PITCHING (TOTAL THICKNESS necessary for completing the walls in accordance with
INDICATED) the Specifications. Excavation of foundation trenches
will be paid for separately.
The unit of measurement for pitching shall be the
square metre of each type of pitching in place.
ITEM UNIT
The bid rate for each type of stone pitching shall include 25.04 CONCRETE PITCHING AND
full compensation for furnishing all materials, making all BLOCK PAVING:
excavations excluding trench and bulk excavations,
(a) CAST IN SITU CONCRETE SQUARE
compacting and trimming the excavated surfaces, 2
PITCHING (CLASS OF CONCRETE METRE (m )
forming and cleaning the weep holes, placing stones
AND THICKNESS OF PITCHING
and grouting or wiring and grouting where applicable,
INDICATED)
grassing and watering (applicable to Method 2) and for
all other work necessary for completing the pitching as (b) SEGMENTAL BLOCK PAVING SQUARE
2
specified. The bid rate for grouted stone pitching on a (TYPE AND THICKNESS METRE (m )
concrete bed shall also include full compensation for INDICATED)
the concrete bed. (c) PREFABRICATED CONCRETE SQUARE
2
GRASS BLOCKS METRE (m )
Excavations for foundation trenches and concrete edge
(d) PREFABRICATED CONCRETE SQUARE
beams and the construction of the concrete edge 2
PAVING BLOCKS FOR SIDEWALK METRE (m )
beams will be paid for separately.
PAVEMENT (THICKNESS
INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
25.02 RIPRAP:
each type constructed.
3
(a) PACKED RIPRAP (CRITICAL MASS CUBIC METRE (m )
OF STONES INDICATED) The bid rates shall include full compensation for
3 furnishing all material, all excavation (but excluding bulk
(b) DUMPED RIPRAP (CRITICAL CUBIC METRE (m )
MASS OF STONE INDICATED ) excavation and excavation for foundation trenches and
edge beams), compacting and trimming all the
(c) FILTER BACKING (SUBCLAUSE
excavated areas, providing a sand bedding (SUBITEMS
2104 (a) (ii) AND 2504 (b)

25.04(b) and (d)), laying and compacting the paving

blocks (SUBITEMS 25.04(b) and (d)), laying concrete
grass blocks (SUBITEM 25.04(c)), topsoiling and
grassing, (SUBITEM 2504(c)), constructing concrete
pitching, including normal formwork and the shaping of
surfaces (SUBITEM 25.04(a)), making and cleaning
weepholes (SUBITEM (a)) and for all other work
necessary for completing the work as specified.
ITEM UNIT
25.05 CONCRETE EDGE BEAMS CUBIC METRE
3
(CLASS OF CONCRETE (m )
INDICATED)
The unit measured shall be the cubic metre of concrete

in edge beams constructed as instructed.

furnishing all materials and labour, including formwork
as necessary, placing concrete and shaping all surfaces
and all excavations required (in all classes of material).
ITEM UNIT
25.06 PROVISION OF HERBICIDE
AND ANT POISON:
(a) PROVISION OF MATERIALS PRIME COST
SUM
(b) CONTRACTOR’S CHARGES AND PER CENT (%)
PROFIT ADDED TO THE PRIME
COST SUM
Payment under the prime cost sum for providing

environmentally compatible ant poison and herbicide
and the Contractor’s cost and profit in this respect shall
be made in accordance with the provisions of the
General Conditions of Contract, but, in addition, the
Contractor’s bid rate for costs and profit shall include
full compensation for applying the chemicals as
specified.
ITEM UNIT
3
25.07 FOUNDATION TRENCHES CUBIC METRE (m )

material excavated for foundation trenches irrespective
of the class or depth of material. The quantity shall be
calculated according to the dimensions shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

excavation of the foundation trenches irrespective of the
class or depth of material complete as specified, or as
shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.

SERIES 2000: DRAINAGE 2603 CONSTRUCTING GABION CAGES

(a) General
SECTION 2600: GABIONS Gabion cages shall be made from wire mesh of the size
and type and selvedge as specified below. The cages
CONTENTS: shall be subdivided into cells by wire mesh diaphragms
and will be of two types.
CLAUSE PAGE
2601 SCOPE 2000-31 (i) Boxes which are generally used for the construction
2602 MATERIALS 2000-31 of gabion walls. These boxes are subdivided into
2603 CONSTRUCTING GABIONS CAGES 2000-31 cells by diaphragms spaced at 1.0 m intervals. No
2604 CONSTRUCTING GABIONS 2000-32 diaphragms are required for a box of which the
2605 MEASUREMENT 2000-32 length does not exceed 1.5 m.
(ii) Mattresses which are generally used as single-layer

aprons only in revetments, channel linings, etc and
in which the maximum width shall be subdivided by
2601 SCOPE diaphragms into cells with a width of 600 mm or 1.0
This Section covers the construction of gabion walls m as specified in the Bill of Quantities.
and aprons for constructing retaining walls, lining
channels, revetments and other anti erosion structures.
The standard sizes of boxes and mattresses are as
follows:
Gabions shall be flexible galvanised steel – wire wire-
mesh cages packed with rock.
(1) Boxes:
− Length. 1, 2, 3 and 4 m
− Width 1.0 m
2602 MATERIALS − Depth . 0.3 m, 0.5 m and 1.0 m
− Diaphragm spacing 1.0 m
(a) Rock
Rock used as filling for cages shall be clean, hard, un- (2) Mattresses:
weathered boulders or rock fragments. No rock
− Length 6m
fragment shall exceed the maximum size given in
− Width 2m
TABLE 2602/ 1, and at least 85% of the rocks shall be of
a size equal to or above the average least dimension − Depth 0.2 m , 0.3 m and 0.5 m
size in TABLE 2602/1. − Diaphragm 600 mm or 1.0 m as specified
Other gabions may be supplied, provided that the

TABLE 2602/1 Engineer’s prior permission has been obtained.
ROCK SIZES
(b) Selvedges
Depth of Rock size according to the largest The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of
cage (m) dimension of rock gabions, except the bottom edges of diaphragms and
end panels, shall be selvedged with wire with a
Average least Maximum
diameter as specified in SABS 1580 or equivalent.
dimension (mm) (mm)
0.2 125 150
Where the selvedge is not woven integrally with the
0.3 125 200
mesh but has to be tied to the cut ends of the mesh, it
0.5 125 250
shall be attached by tying the cut ends of the mesh to
1.0 125 250
the selvedge, so that a force of not less than 8.5 kN
applied in the same plane as the mesh at a point on the
(b) Wire
selvedge of a mesh sample of 1.0 m in length will be
All wire for making the gabions and for tying during the required to separate it from the mesh.
construction of the gabions shall comply with the
requirements of SABS 675 or equivalent for mild- steel (c) Diaphragms and end panels
wire. The diaphragms and end panels shall be selvedged on
the top and vertical sides only. The end panels shall be
(c) PVC- coated wire
attached by the cut ends of the mesh wires at the
The gabions of PVC –coated mesh shall be of an bottom of the panel being twisted around the selvedge
acknowledged make which shall be subject to approval on the base of the gabion. Similarly, the diaphragms
by the Engineer.
shall be attached by the cut ends of the mesh being
twisted to the twisted joints of the mesh in the base of
(d) Galvanising
the gabion. In each case the force required to separate
All wire used in the making of gabions shall be
the panels from the base shall be not less than 6 kN/m.
galvanised in accordance with the provisions of SABS
675 or equivalent for Class A heavy galvanised mild- (d) Binding and connecting wire
steel wire.
Sufficient binding and connecting wire for all the tying to
be done during construction of the gabions as specified
(e) Wire mesh
in CLAUSE 2604 below, shall be supplied with the
Wire mesh shall comply with the requirements of SABS
gabion cages. The diameter of the wire shall be 2.2
1580 or equivalent. mm.
(e) Tolerances
The tolerance on the specified diameter of all wire shall
(f) Geotextile filter below the gabions
be +2.5%. The length of the cages shall be subject to a
Geotextile filter materials shall comply with the
tolerance of ±10% and the width of the cages shall be
subject to a tolerance of +5% and the depth of the
cages shall be subject to a tolerance of +5%.

2604 CONSTRUCTING GABIONS The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
each class of excavation made in accordance with the
(a) Preparing the foundation and surface authorised dimensions.
The surface on which the gabion cages are to be laid
prior to their filled with rock shall be levelled to the The bid rates shall include full compensation for
depth shown on the Drawings or as directed by the excavating in each class of material, including
Engineer so as to present an even surface. If unavoidable overbreak, the trimming of trenches and
necessary, cavities between rock protrusions shall be compacting the trench inverts, backfilling and
filled with material similar to that specified in SUBCLAUSE compacting the backfill, and the disposing of surplus
2602(a). Where required, a foundation trench along the excavated material.
toe of the revetment or wall shall be excavated to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings or indicated by the No haulage will be paid.
Engineer.
(b) Filter fabric ITEM UNIT

One layer of Grade 3 filter fabric shall be placed where 26.02 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR SQUARE
2
indicated on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer. BEDDING THE GABIONS METRE (m )
The material shall placed, in accordance with the
instructions, in strips with a minimum overlap of 300 The unit of measurement for levelling and preparing
mm at the joints, and shall be properly fastened to surfaces for receiving the gabions shall be the square
prevent any movement or slipping while the gabions are metre to the neat dimensions of revetments, aprons or
being placed. wall foundations.
(c) Assembly
The methods of constructing, stretching, placing in excavating, filling any cavities with rock and levelling
position, wiring and filling the gabions with rock shall the ground surface so as to be ready for receiving the
generally be in accordance with the manufacturer’s gabion cages for retaining walls, aprons and
instructions which have been approved by the revetments.
Engineer, but nevertheless sufficient connecting wires
shall be tensioned between the vertical sides of all the
outer visible cells to prevent the deformation of boxes ITEM UNIT
as they are being filled with stone.
26.03 GABIONS:
It is essential that the corners of gabion cages be (a) GALVANISED GABION BOXES CUBIC
3
securely wired together to provide a uniform surface (DIMENSIONS OF BOX AND MESH METRE (m )
and ensure that the surface does not resemble a series SIZE INDICATED)
of block or panels. (b) PVC- COATED GABION BOXES CUBIC
3
(DIMENSIONS OF BOX AND MESH METRE (m )
The layout and the tolerances for the layout of the SIZE INDICATED)
boxes shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer. (c) GALVANISED GABION CUBIC
3
MATTRESSES ( DIMENSIONS OF METRE (m )
MATTRESS, MESH SIZE AND
(d) Rock filling DIAPHRAGM INDICATED )
(d) PVC- COATED GABION CUBIC
3
(i) Boxes in retaining walls MATTRESSES, MESH SIZE AND METRE (m )
Particular care shall be taken in packing the visible DIAPHRAGM SPACING INDICATED)
faces of gabion boxes, where only selected stone of
the specified size shall be used so as to obtain as The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of the
even–faced finish. The boxes shall be filled in rock – filled cages and the quantity shall be calculated
layers to prevent deformation and bulging. Boxes from the dimensions of the gabions indicated on the
shall be filled to just below the level of the wire Drawings or prescribed by the Engineer, irrespective of
braces, after which the braces shall be twisted to any deformation or bulging of the completed gabions.
provide tension. Care must be taken to ensure that
consecutive layers of cages are filled evenly to a The bid rates shall include full compensation for
level surface ready to receive the next course. supplying all the materials, including rock fill, wire–mesh
cages, tying and connecting wires, loading transporting
(ii) Mattresses used in revetments and aprons and off-loading, the assembling and filling of the cages,
The 0.2 m, 0.3 m and 0.5 m gabions forming aprons and any other work necessary for constructing the
and revetments shall be filled by random stones gabions.
being packed in the first layer and selected stones
being used for the top layer so as to resemble
normal stone pitching. ITEM UNIT
26.04 FILTER FABRIC (TYPE AND SQUARE
2
GRADE INDICATED) METRE (m )
2605 MEASUREMENT AND PAVEMENT
ITEM UNIT The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
area covered with filter fabric placed in position.
26.01 FOUNDATION TRENCH
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING:
(a) IN SOLID ROCK AS DEFINED IN CUBIC METRE supplying the filter fabric, cutting, waste, placing,
3
CLAUSE 3603 (m ) joining, overlapping and securing the material in
(b) IN ALL OTHER MATERIAL THAN ROCK CUBIC METRE position.
3
AS DEFINED IN CLAUSE 3603 (m )

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 SERIES 3000 - EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED STONE
SERIES 3000
EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT
LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED
STONE
SECTION PAGE
3100 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND REMOVAL
OF TOPSOIL 3000-2
3200 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 3000-4
3300 BREAKING UP EXISTING PAVEMENT
LAYERS 3000-6
3400 BORROW PIT AND QUARRY
ACQUISITION AND EXPLOITATION 3000-10
3500 SELECTING AND UTILISING
MATERIALS FROM BORROW PITS AND
CUTTINGS 3000-13
3600 EARTHWORKS 3000-16
3700 PAVEMENT LAYERS OF NATURAL
GRAVEL MATERIAL 3000-23
3800 STABILISATION 3000-29
3900 CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE
COURSE 3000-33

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
SERIES 1000 GENERAL
APPENDICES

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT include Baobab trees. Clearing shall also include the
3
removal of all rocks and boulders of up to 0.15 m in
LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED STONE
size which are exposed or lying on the surface.
SECTION 3100: CLEARING, Clearing shall include complete removal and disposal of
structures that obtrude, encroach upon or otherwise
GRUBBING AND REMOVAL OF obstruct the work, including existing bridge structures
and removal of foundations to a depth of one metre
TOPSOIL below the bed level shown on the Drawings.
CONTENTS: Structures which cannot be cleared by reasonable

means in the opinion of the Engineer shall be broken
CLAUSE PAGE down in accordance with the requirements of the
3101 SCOPE 3000-2 Special Specifications.
3102 DESCRIPTION OF W ORKS 3000-2
3103 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3000-3 Clearing shall include removal of mounds and nests
from moulds, termites, ants or other insects or
burrowing animals. Such removal shall be carried out
by excavation to the required depth as directed by the
Engineer, and subsequent poisoning with approved
3101 SCOPE pesticides in the case of ants and termites. No
This Section covers the clearing of the site and the additional payment will be made for removal of such
grubbing necessary for construction of the Works nests, but backfilling and compaction with approved fill
covered by the Contract, in accordance with these
materials will be paid as ordinary earthworks fill under
Specifications the relevant pay item. Poisoning with approved
pesticides will be paid for separately.
3102 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS In the roadway all stumps and roots exceeding 50 mm
in diameter shall be removed at least to the depth which
(a) General is the larger of the following:
No clearing and grubbing shall be done unless − 600 mm below the finished road level
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall note − 100 mm below the ground level after removal of
that, in order to avoid re-clearing, the clearing and topsoil
grubbing may have to be done at the last practicable − 300 mm below the top of improved subgrade or
stage of construction. formation level.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to All stumps and roots, including matted roots, shall be
prevent damage to structures and other private or removed to a depth of at least 300 mm below the
public property. formation level (top of improved subgrade).
Any unauthorised damage to or interference with The cavities resulting from the grubbing shall be
private property or public including trees shall be made backfilled with approved material and compacted to
good to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner comply with the Specifications for the relevant layer.
at the Contractor’s sole expense.
(d) Removal of topsoil
(b) Area to be cleared, grubbed and removed of Topsoil shall be removed to a depth as instructed by the
topsoil Engineer and conserved as instructed by the Engineer.
The area to be cleared, grubbed and removed of topsoil The entire roadway shall be stripped of topsoil as
shall generally extend to 3 metres beyond the top of the directed by the Engineer. The rate paid for clearing,
slope in cuts and 3 metres beyond the toe of the slope grubbing and removal of topsoil shall include all cost for
of embankments in accordance with the Drawings or as the removal of topsoil to the depth instructed by the
directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall designate Engineer. Payment for removal of any material below
the areas to be cleared, which shall not necessarily be this level will be paid for as Common Excavation to
limited to those mentioned above. Spoil in accordance with SECTION 3600 in case the
material is spoiled. No additional payment will be made
The shoulders on each side of existing carriageways for conservation measures, stockpiling or re-handling of
are included in the clearing and grubbing, but not the topsoil, whether paid for as Common Excavation to
existing carriageway itself. Spoil, or included in the rate for pay ITEM 31.01.
No trees which fall between the extent of works and the (e) Conservation of topsoil
limits of clearing and grubbing shall be removed or If not used immediately, the topsoil shall be transported
damaged without the written authorisation of the and deposited in stockpiles or spoil banks provided by
Engineer. Individual trees designated by the Engineer the Contractor at his own expense and at locations
shall be left standing and uninjured. approved by the Engineer. No additional payment will
be made for stockpiling or re-handling topsoil. The cost
Within built up areas clearing and grubbing shall be of stripping and disposal of topsoil shall be included in
strictly limited to the extent of cut or fill as shown in the the price bid for clearing, grubbing and removal of
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. No private topsoil.
property e.g. buildings, crops, signs, fences etc shall be
removed, relocated or altered without the authorisation (f) Conservation of vegetation and cutting of trees
of the Engineer. Where provided for in the Special Specifications, certain
designated plants encountered in the road reserve shall
(c) Clearing and grubbing be carefully protected by the Contractor. He shall
Clearing shall consist of the removal of all trees, bush, include in his bid rates for clearing and grubbing full
shrubs and other vegetation, rubbish, fences and all compensation for omitting or the careful removal and
other objectionable material, including the disposal of all planting of the plants in a protected and fenced-off area,
material resulting from the clearing and grubbing. The and, on completion of the road, the replanting of the
clearance of trees within the extent of the Works shall plants in suitable positions in the road reserve in

accordance with the Engineer’s instructions. The Engineer. The unit of measurement for SUBITEM
Contractor’s attention is specifically drawn to SECTION 31.01(b), removal of topsoil as specified or instructed by
1700: Environmental Protection and Waste Disposal, the Engineer, shall be the cubic metre measured in
which requirements he shall fulfil in all parts of his place at the depth and width specified.
operations.
The bid rate shall included full compensation for all
In the cases where cutting of trees has been approved work necessary for the clearing of the surface, removal
by the Engineer they shall be cut in sections from the of topsoil to the depth as specified or as instructed by
top downwards. The branches of trees to be left the Engineer after removal of the vegetation cover, the
standing shall be trimmed so as leave a 7 m clearance removal and grubbing of trees and tree stumps (except
above the carriageway. large trees and stumps as defined below), cutting of
branches, backfilling of cavities, demolishing and
Where clearing and grubbing would involve the cutting disposal of structures except where otherwise provided
down of indigenous forest containing a significant in the Special Specifications, and the removal,
number of trees with a trunk diameter exceeding 200 transporting and disposal or conservation of material all
mm, the Contractor shall inform the officials of the as specified in this Section. The Contractor’s attention
responsible Government Department at bidding stage is drawn to SUBCLAUSE 3102(d) for further explanation
before commencing with clearing and grubbing of such of the work included under this pay item.
areas so as to enable that Government Department to
salvage any usable timber and to identify the trees
before they are removed. ITEM UNIT
31.02 REMOVAL AND GRUBBING OF
(g) Disposal of material LARGE TREES AND TREE STUMPS:
Material obtained from clearing, grubbing and removal
of topsoil, shall be disposed of as indicated by the (a) GIRTH EXCEEDING 1.0 m UP TO UP NUMBER
Engineer, in stockpiles for later use in the case of INCLUDING 2.0 m (no)
topsoil, borrow pits or other suitable places and covered (b) GIRTH EXCEEDING 2.0 m UP TO UP NUMBER
up with soil or gravel in the case of other debris. The INCLUDING 3.0 m (no)
burning of material will only be permitted on the prior (c) GIRTH EXCEEDING 3.0 m IN STEPS NUMBER
written approval of the Engineer. All statutory provisions OF 1.0M OF GIRTH (no)
with regards to air pollution shall be carefully observed.
All tree trunks and branches in excess of 150 mm in The girth of trees or stumps shall be measured at the
diameter shall be cleared of secondary branches, sawn narrowest point of the tree or stumps in the first meter
into suitable lengths and stacked at sites indicated by of its height above ground level. Trees and stumps with
the Engineer. Such timber shall not be used by the a girth exceeding 1.0 m shall be measured individually
Contractor and shall remain the property of the and classified according to the size in increments of 1.0
Employer unless otherwise agreed on with the m as indicated above.
Engineer.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for all work
(h) Re-clearing of vegetation necessary for the clearing and grubbing of trees and
When portions of the road reserve or other areas have stumps of all sizes, the backfilling of holes and the
been cleared in accordance with the Specifications, but removal and disposal of material, all as described in this
vegetation grows again in the course of time during Section.
construction, the Engineer may, if he considers it
necessary, order that the area be re-cleared. No Where construction is carried out through plantations or
additional payment will be made for such re-clearing. where the number of trees with a girth exceeding 1.0 m
renders individual measurement impractical, the Special
Such re-clearing of areas previously cleared includes Specifications may provide that the clearing and
the removal and disposal of grass, shrubs and other grubbing of trees in such areas be measured in
vegetation in the same manner as for the first clearing hectares. If this method of measurement is used, the
operation. areas where it applies will be shown on the Drawings,
stated in the Special Specifications, included to bids
during site inspection, or as instructed by the Engineer.
3103 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Where the Special Specifications provide payment for
No payment will be made for the moving of soil or the cleaning and grubbing of large trees per hectare in
gravel material which may be inherent in or unavoidable such specific cases, the bid price shall include full
during the process of clearing. compensation for all work as described in connection
with individual trees above.
Clearing, grubbing and removal of topsoil required for
quarries, borrow areas, material sources, for haul roads
and all temporary construction will not be measured for ITEM UNIT
payment.
31.03 APPLYING APPROVED PESTICIDES LITRES (l)
TO ANT AND TERMITE NESTS
ITEM UNIT
31.01 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND The unit of measurement for applying approved
REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL: pesticides to ant and termite nests shall be the litres as
instructed by the Engineer applied in accordance with
(a) CLEARING AND GRUBBING HECTARE
these Specifications.
(ha)
(b) REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL CUBIC
The bid rate shall included full compensation for all
3
METRE (m )
work necessary for applying approved pesticides to ant
and termite nests.
The unit of measurement for SUBITEM 31.01(a), clearing
and grubbing, shall be the hectare (to the nearest 0.1
ha) designated by the Engineer and cleared of the
vegetation cover and grubbed and in accordance with
these Specifications, all to the satisfaction of the

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT and if required the salvaged stones shall be stockpiled
where directed by the Engineer.
3204 REMOVAL OF BRIDGES, CULVERTS
SECTION 3200: REMOVAL OF AND OTHER DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Bridges, culverts, and other drainage structures shall
EXISTING STRUCTURES not be removed until satisfactory arrangements have
been made to accommodate traffic and the flow of
CONTENTS: water.
CLAUSE PAGE Unless otherwise indicated, the existing substructures
3201 SCOPE 3000-4 shall be removed down to the natural stream bottom
3202 GENERAL 3000-4 and those parts outside the stream shall be removed
3203 REMOVAL OF GROUTED STONE SIDE 300 mm below natural ground surface. Portions of
DITCHES 3000-4 existing structures within the limits of a new structure
3204 REMOVAL OF BRIDGES, CULVERTS AND shall be removed to accommodate the construction of
OTHER DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 3000-4 the proposed structure.
3205 REMOVAL OF PIPE CULVERT 3000-4
3206 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE ENTRANCES, Bridges designated as salvaged material shall be
KERBS, ETC 3000-4 dismantled without damage and match marked.
3207 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES 3000-4 Structures designated to become the property of the
3208 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3000-4 Contractor shall be removed from the Site.
Blasting or other operations necessary to remove

existing structures or obstruction, which may damage
3201 SCOPE new construction, shall be completed prior to placing
This Section covers the requirements for removing the the new work.
existing kerb and gutter, grouted stone side ditch,
buildings, concrete entrance slabs and other 3205 REMOVAL OF PIPE CULVERTS
obstructions that are not designated to remain. Sections of pipe lost from storage or damaged by
negligence shall be replaced at the Contractor’s
3202 GENERAL expense. Pipe shown on the plans to be plugged shall
The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all be left in place and the ends plugged.
buildings, foundations, bridges, drainage structures and
other obstructions within the limits of the Works, except 3206 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE ENTRANCES,
items designated to remain and utilities and KERBS, ETC
obstructions to be removed under other provisions of All concrete pavement, kerbs, channels, buildings,
this Contract. Refer also to SECTION 3100: CLEARING, foundations, slabs, etc designated for removal shall be
GRUBBING AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL. disposed of by the Contractor at any distance as
ordered by the Engineer, unless otherwise specified.
All designated salvage material shall be removed,
without damage, in sections or pieces that may be Concrete designated for use as riprap shall be broken
readily transported, and shall be stored by the into pieces not exceeding 80 kg and stockpiled at
Contractor at Employers depots as directed. Unusable designated locations for use on the project.
perishable material shall be destroyed. Non-perishable
material, waste concrete and masonry shall as far as 3207 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES
practicable be placed in slopes of embankments. Any
The removal of existing utilities required to permit
broken concrete or masonry which cannot be used in orderly progress of work will be accomplished by local
construction, and all other materials not considered agencies, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
suitable for use elsewhere, shall be disposed of by the
Whenever a telephone or telegraph pole, pipeline,
Contractor. In no case shall any discarded materials be conduit, sewer, or other utility is encountered and must
left in windrows or piles adjacent to or within the Site. be removed or relocated the Contractor shall advise the
The manner and location of disposal of materials shall
proper local authority or owner and arrange for its
be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall not removal.
create an unpleasant or objectionable view. When the
Contractor is required to locate a disposal area outside
the Site at his own expense, he shall obtain and file with
the Engineer, permission in writing from the property 3208 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
occupier for the use of his property for this purpose.
ITEM UNIT
Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall be 32.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING
filled to the level of the surrounding ground and, if they STRUCTURES:
are within the roadbed, the backfill shall be compacted (a) REMOVAL OF EXISTING PIPE NUMBER (no)
in accordance with the relevant requirements in this CULVERT INCLUDING
Specification. HEADWALLS, WINGWALL AND
APRON
Existing utilities through at or near existing structures
shall be protected and/or relocated as directed by the (b) REMOVAL OF BOX CULVERTS AND NUMBER (no)
Engineer. SLABS INCLUDING HEADWALLS,
WINGWALL AND APRON
3203 REMOVAL OF GROUTED STONE SIDE (c) REMOVAL OF BRIDGE INCLUDING NUMBER (no)
ABUTMENT, WINGWALL AND
DITCHES
APRON
Existing grouted stone side ditches shall be preserved
as far as feasible, in accordance with the instructions of (d) REMOVAL OF KERB AND CHANNEL LINEAR METRE
the Engineer. However, where necessary, they shall be (lm)
totally or partially removed, as directed by the Engineer, (e) REMOVAL OF EXISTING GROUTED SQUARE
2
METRE (m )

STONE PITCHING
Measurement of removal of kerb and channel shall be

according to the number of linear metres of kerb and
channel acceptably removed, as directed by the
Engineer.
Measurement of removal of grouted stone side ditch

shall be according to the number of square metres of
surface of grouted stone side ditch acceptably removed,
Measurement of the removal of existing culverts and

slabs shall be the number of upstream openings of the
structure(s), irrespective of length, material type or
whether precast or cast-in-situ. Slabs shall include all
structures up to 6 m clear span.
The quantities, determined as provided above for kerb,

channel and grouted stone side ditch shall be paid at
the rate per unit of measurement, respectively, for each
of the particular pay items listed below, included in the
Bills of Quantities which price and payment shall be full
compensation for all materials, labour, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the work of
demolishing, removing, disposing or stockpiling, as
applicable, including supply and compaction of material
for backfilling.

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT (e) Milled material

Milled material shall be bituminous material or
cemented material excavated with an approved milling
machine. Milled material will be classified as such only
SECTION 3300: BREAKING UP when milling is specified or ordered by the Engineer.
Payment will distinguish between milling of asphalt,
EXISTING PAVEMENT LAYERS concrete and of cemented material where so specified
in the Bill of Quantities.
CONTENTS:
CLAUSE PAGE 3304 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
3301 SCOPE 6
3302 SELECTING THE MATERIAL 6 (a) Milling equipment
3303 CLASSIFYING THE MATERIAL 6 Only approved milling equipment may be used. The
3304 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 6 equipment shall be capable of milling asphalt and/or
3305 CONSTRUCTION 6 cemented material to the prescribed depth in one
3306 STORING RECOVERED PAVEMENT operation over the width specified in the Special
MATERIAL 8 Specifications. The milling depth shall be controlled
3307 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 8 electronically.
The direction and speed of the milling machine and the

speed of rotation of the milling drum shall be adjustable
so as to obtain the required grading of the milled
3301 SCOPE material. The machine shall be capable of making a
This Section covers the breaking up and excavation of neat vertical cut at the outer edges when milling the
existing pavement layers by conventional means or by layer and to leave the floor of the cut level and with a
milling, selecting the material, and the removal thereof
uniform texture.
to spoil dumps or to stockpiles for later reprocessing or
recycling. Unless otherwise specified in the Special
Specifications, the milling machine shall be equipped
3302 SELECTING THE MATERIAL with a self-loading conveyor belt, which can be easily
Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall removed and installed and adjusted for slope and
remove the layers of the existing pavement, taking care direction.
not to damage the existing kerbs and/or gutters, if any.
In case of damage to the existing kerbs or gutters, they (b) General
shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at The equipment to be used for the conventional
the Contractor’s expense. breaking-up and excavation of existing pavement layers
will be determined by the size and depth of the
Material from existing pavements may only be used for pavement section to be processed or excavated, taking
purposes approved by the Engineer. The material shall consideration of the fact that work may have to be
be so excavated that material from the various carried out in restricted areas. Only approved cutting or
pavement layers, or materials of different types, will not sawing equipment may be used for cutting or sawing
be mixed unless so permitted by the Engineer. the pavement layers. The equipment shall be capable
of cutting the pavement layers to the specified depth in
3303 CLASSIFYING THE MATERIAL one operation without fragmenting the material, and in
Material from existing pavements shall be classified as straight lines within the required tolerances.
follows for excavation and processing purposes:
(a) Existing bituminous material 3305 CONSTRUCTION

Existing bituminous material shall be asphalt or other
bituminous seal or base course material removed (a) General
separately from the pavement on the instruction of the Where all or a part of the existing surfacing material is
Engineer. Where underlying material is broken down or to be reprocessed together with the underlying layer,
excavated together with bituminous materials, the the surfacing shall be properly broken down and mixed
mixture will not be classified as bituminous material. through the full depth of the existing base material to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Fragments of
(b) Non-cemented material bituminous material shall be broken down to sizes not
Non-cemented material shall be existing pavement exceeding 40 mm.
material which in the opinion of the Engineer can be
ripped with the teeth of a bulldozer, such as Caterpillar Where specified in the Special Specifications or ordered
D6 or equivalent, and which can be made usable for by the Engineer, the existing bituminous material shall
pavement material by breaking with the tracks of the first be removed before the underlying layers are
bulldozer by reasonable efforts in the opinion of the broken up.
Engineer.
Bituminous material may be milled out or otherwise
(c) Cemented material broken up and removed to approved stockpile sites for
Cemented material is classified as existing pavement recycling or to spoil sites, whichever is required. The
materials made from gravel or crushed stone, which, in exposed surface shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of
the opinion of the Engineer, cannot be ripped and made the Engineer after removal of the bituminous material.
usable for pavement material by the method described Not more than 5% of the surface may be covered with
in SUBCLAUSE 3303(b). Unless specified as such in the bituminous material.
Special Specifications, cemented material will not be
classified as concrete. The existing pavement material shall be broken down to
the specified depth and removed, or reprocessed in
(d) Concrete place, whichever may be required. The underlying
Concrete is classified reinforced or un-reinforced layers may not be damaged, and material from one
Portland cement concrete when specified as such in the layer may not be mixed with that of another layer.
Special Specifications or as decided by the Engineer.
Where such mixing occurs or where the material is loading, the floor of the excavation or the underlying
contaminated in any other way by the actions of the material shall not be damaged.
Contractor, he shall remove such material and replace it
with other approved material, all at his own cost. The milled material shall be inspected and
classified in accordance with the various types of
Where a layer or layers require to be broken down over asphalt and its suitability for recycling. Different
part of the pavement width only, the limit of the work stockpiles shall be used for the different types of
shall be clearly demarcated, which limit shall not be material as ordered by the Engineer. Contamination
exceeded by the Contractor by more than 100 mm. of the asphalt with underlying material will not be
Pavement layers broken down outside the specified permitted, and the Contractor shall adjust the
limits shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own depths of milling in accordance with the thickness of
cost, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. the layer.
Where so ordered by the Engineer, asphalt and (iv) Cemented material

cemented layers shall be cut or sawn through to the Unless otherwise specified milled cemented
specified depth along the measured limit with approved material to be reprocessed on the road shall first be
equipment. Payment will be made for sawing only windrowed with a view to inspecting the underlying
where specified on the Drawings or ordered, in writing, surface for any patches of poor or unsuitable
by the Engineer. material. Where unsuitable material is encountered
in the floor of the excavation, such material shall
Payment will not be made for sawing or cutting work first be removed by further milling (where the
where the existing layer requires removal by milling. underlying layer also consists of the cemented
material), or by other approved methods, all to the
Where existing roads have to be widened, the existing satisfaction of the Engineer. The unsuitable material
pavement layers shall be cut back to a firm, well shall be replaced with approved material of the
compacted or cemented material. Material so broken required type, which shall be placed in accordance
up, if acceptable, may be used together with imported with the specifications for the relevant underlying
material in the widening process provided the mixture layer.
consistently meets all requirements for the material type
specified for the layer in question. Where in the opinion of the Engineer, it may be
necessary, he may instruct the Contractor to taper
Where pavement layers are broken down over a section the ends or edges of a milled excavation. No
of the road width or where pavement layers are additional payment will be made for tapering the
widened, the Engineer may order, that the various ends or edges of a milled excavation.
pavement layers be excavated in benches in
accordance with his instructions. No additional payment (v) Coring of cemented material
will be made for excavating benches. Where existing cemented layers are to remain as a
structural layer in the new pavement the Engineer
Where underlying layers are still structurally sound and may instruct the Contractor to drill cores from the
are included as structural layers in the new design layer and have them tested for compressive
drawings, care must be taken not to break them up strength in accordance with the provisions of SABS
during removal of the surfacing or underlying layers. Method 865 or equivalent. The number of cores to
be drilled out and the drilling locations will be
determined on site by the Engineer.
(b) Milling
(vi) General
(i) Preparing the pavement surface The floor of the milled excavation shall have an
Before milling may be commenced, the pavement even texture and any loose patches or patches of
surface shall be clean and free from soil or other unsuitable material shall be remedied in
deleterious material. Where only part of the accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
pavement is to be milled out, the milling area shall Payment for removing and replacing unsuitable
be properly demarcated. Milling may not exceed the material and remedying loose patches shall be as
required width by more than 50 mm. Payment will specified elsewhere.
not be made for milling beyond the required width,
which shall be backfilled with approved material in The floor of an excavation shall comply with the
accordance with the provisions for the specified requirements of the surface level, grade and
pavement material at the cost of the Contractor. regularity for the layer which it will form in the new
pavement.
(ii) Trial milling
Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor Payment for milling will not distinguish between
shall execute trial milling on the various materials to various types of milled material and between
be milled. During the trial work, the Contractor will various milling depths unless such distinction is
be expected to vary the direction and speed of the given in the Bill of Quantities.
milling machine, the speed of rotation of the milling
drum, and also the milling depth, in order to obtain (c) Sawing or cutting
milled material of the required grade. No payment Where required in the opinion of the Engineer, diamond
will be made for trial milling. blade sawing or cutting shall be employed if necessary
to achieve the required edge finish of milled layers. No
(iii) Asphalt additional payment will be made for sawing or cutting
Where the asphalt and/or the cemented base must unless deemed necessary and approved by the
be reused, the asphalt shall be removed separately. Engineer.
Where the asphalt consists of layers of various
mixes or grades, the Engineer may instruct the (d) Treatment of pavement excavation floor
separate removal of the layers to different The floor of any pavement excavation, whether or not
stockpiles. Where the milled material is not excavated by milling, shall be treated and paid for as
conveyed directly by conveyor belt and then loaded, specified in the relevant sections of the Specifications.
and the Engineer so approves, the material shall
first be cut to windrow and then loaded. During

3306 STORING RECOVERED PAVEMENT (ii) Material from an existing pavement which is not
MATERIAL reprocessed
Existing gravel pavement material, or existing
Excavated pavement material intended for reprocessing
bituminous material not intended for reprocessing,
but which cannot be reprocessed in place or, in the
may be spoiled or be used in other layers or items
opinion of the Engineer, cannot be windrowed next to
of work where approved by the Engineer. Payment
the excavation, nor placed in position directly at any
for the excavation of pavement material to be
other place, and material intended for recycling or
spoiled will be made directly under ITEM 3601(a).
reprocessing in a plant, shall be transported to
Dumping shall only occur on approval of the
approved stockpiles with the written permission of the
Engineer in an approved waste site.
Engineer.
Where used for other purposes full compensation
Stockpile sites for material intended for recycling or
for excavating shall be included in the rates bid for
reprocessing in a plant shall be set out at the
the various pavement layers and items or work in
corresponding mixing or crushing plant or at such other
which the material is used.
locations as approved by the Engineer.
(iii) Measurement for excavating existing pavement
The stockpile site shall be cleaned, and all loose
material and underlying fill
stones, vegetation and other materials which may
Where payment is made separately for the
cause contamination shall be removed. The site shall
excavation of existing pavement material and
be graded smooth with an adequate slope to ensure
underlying fill, the quantity will be calculated in
proper drainage. Where so instructed by the Engineer,
accordance with the authorised horizontal
the surface shall be watered and compacted to a depth
dimensions of the excavated layer and the average
of at least 150 mm to a density of 90% of BS Heavy
depth of excavation. The average depth of
density.
excavation will be determined in accordance with
the test holes made or cores drilled at intervals not
The compacted surface shall be firm without any loose
exceeding 10 m, and which are so distributed over
patches. Where asphalt is recovered for recycling, the
the surface that a realistic estimate of the depth can
Engineer may order the surface to be chemically
be obtained.
stabilised to a depth of 150 mm. Upon completion, this
surface shall be swept clean.
ITEM UNIT
Stockpile sites shall be sufficiently large to allow the
placing of stockpiles of different types of material or 33.01 EXCAVATING MATERIAL
types of recovered asphalt without the stockpiles FROM AN EXISTING PAVEMENTS:
3
overlapping or the limits of the prepared site being (a) GRANULAR MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
exceeded. The enlargement of the stockpile site after 3
(b) BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
the stockpiles have already been placed will not be 3
permitted without the approval of the Engineer. (c) CEMENTED MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(d) PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE CUBIC METRE (m )
Stockpiles of milled material shall be made in a manner (INDICATE WHETHER
which prevents segregation and undesirable REINFORCED OR UN-
consolidation or changes in moisture content. Adequate REINFORCED)
approved covers shall be provided as required in the
opinion of the Engineer to prevent them from
undesirable wetting or drying, or being contaminated by
material excavated or milled from the existing pavement
dust.
using approved equipment and methodology.
Upon completion of the work, the stockpile sites shall
be broken up in accordance with the instructions of the
excavating or milling the material from the existing
Engineer.
pavement irrespective of layer thickness, for loading,
transporting, off-loading, and placing the material in
The stockpiling of excavated material will not be paid for
approved spoil dumps or stockpiles as directed by the
directly, but full compensation therefore shall be
Engineer.
included in the rates for the various items of work in
which the stockpiled material will be used. Separate
payment will not be made for the preparation of storage ITEM UNIT
sites.
33.02 SAWING OR CUTTING
CONCRETE, ASPHALT OR
CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS:
(a) BITUMINOUS MATERIAL LINEAR METRE (m)
(a) General (b) CEMENTED MATERIAL LINEAR METRE (m)
(c) PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE LINEAR METRE (m)
(i) Material to be reprocessed
(INDICATE WHETHER
Direct payment will be made for breaking up and
REINFORCED OR UN-
excavating existing pavement material that is to be
REINFORCED)
reprocessed and reused, when:
(1) The material is milled out in accordance with
the provisions of the Special Specifications or The unit of measurement shall be the linear metre of
upon the written instruction of the Engineer. sawcut area calculated in accordance with the
(2) Bituminous surfacing or other bituminous authorised length of sawcut.
pavement layers are removed separately from
the underlying material in accordance with the The bid rate shall include full compensation for all
Special Specifications or the written instructions material and sawing or cutting costs and for all
of the Engineer. incidentals for cutting or sawing the pavement in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.

ITEM UNIT
33.03 DRILLING AND TESTING
CORES FROM CONCRETE, ASPHALT
OR CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS:
(a) BITUMINOUS MATERIAL NUMBER (no)
(b) CEMENTED MATERIAL NUMBER (no)
(c) PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE NUMBER (no)
(INDICATE WHETHER REINFORCED
OR UN-REINFORCED)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of cores

drilled on the instructions of the Engineer.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for setting

out the core locations, for drilling the cores and testing
their strength in the laboratory as specified.

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the
provisions of CLAUSE 1214 as regards his activities on
private land.
SECTION 3400: BORROW PIT The Contractor shall observe all the legal provisions
and the provisions of the Special Specifications in
AND QUARRY ACQUISITION AND respect of his activities at borrow pits and when
finishing off the borrow pits and quarry areas.
EXPLOITATION
3403 ACCESS TO BORROW PITS AND
CONTENTS: QUARRIES
CLAUSE PAGE The Contractor shall satisfy himself that all necessary
negotiations have been made with the Owner or Legal
3401 SCOPE 3000-10 Occupants of the land on which any borrow pit or quarry
3402 NEGOTIATIONS W ITH LANDOWNERS, is situated, prior to the entry upon such area.
AUTHORITIES AND LEGAL OCCUPANTS OF
LAND 3000-10 The Contractor shall notify the affected Owners or Legal
3403 ACCESS TO BORROW PITS AND Occupants of land both verbally and writing at least
QUARRIES 3000-10 seven days before prospecting for materials.
3404 OBTAINING BORROW OR QUARRIED
MATERIALS 3000-10 The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least thirty
3405 OPENING AND WORKING BORROW PITS 3000-11 days notice of his intention to enter a borrow area or
3406 REINSTATING BORROW AND QUARRY quarry and shall not enter thereon until compensation to
AREAS AND HAUL ROADS 3000-11 owners or legal occupants is effected and the approval
3407 DISPOSAL OF BORROW OR QUARRY of the Engineer has been given.
MATERIAL 3000-12
3408 OWNERSHIP OF BORROW PITS AND
QUARRIES 3000-12 3404 OBTAINING BORROW OR QUARRIED
MATERIALS
(a) General
Borrow materials shall be obtained from approved
3401 SCOPE sources of supply listed and described on the borrow-pit
This Section covers the work involved in obtaining
plans, or from such other sources as may from time to
borrow materials for work under this contract, including time be tested and approved by the Engineer. Borrow-
negotiations with Owners or Legal Occupants of the pit material complying with the requirements of the
land on which borrow areas and quarry sites are
Specifications for the use for which the material is
situated. Legal Occupants of Land are holders of legal intended, shall be selected from these approved
documentation giving them permission to occupy the sources.
land according to law.
(b) Borrow-pit and quarry plans
Borrow-pit and quarry plans are not included in the
3402 NEGOTIATIONS WITH LANDOWNERS, contract documents unless so specified in the Special
AUTHORITIES AND LEGAL OCCUPANTS Specifications. The information shown on the plans
OF LAND reflects the results of site investigations and laboratory
tests conducted by or for the Employer and is supplied
(a) Land compensation and royalties in good faith as to the sufficiency in quantity and quality
Land that may be required by the Contractor for of the material for the due and proper completion of the
opening of borrow pits and for the construction of Works. The provision of these plans shall not in any
temporary works will be provided by the Employer, but way be construed as limiting the obtaining of borrow or
the approval of the Engineer must be sought before quarry material to the indicated areas nor to the depth
entry upon the land. The same applies to quarry sites of working specified pits shown on the plans or as
for use in the Works. necessarily limiting the use of the material to that
described on the plans.
In all cases, the Contractor shall be required to make all
necessary arrangements with local authorities and If, at any time during construction, it appears that the
owners or legal occupants of the land and to pay the quality or quantity of material available in a borrow pit or
cost of compensation on behalf of the Employer. For quarry is inadequate or insufficient, the Contractor shall
this purpose, the Contractor will liaise with the Regional locate and make use of other borrow or quarry areas
Administration or the appropriate authority and advise approved by the Engineer, irrespective of whether or
of the intention to commence work of any kind. not such other areas are shown on the plans for borrow
pits or quarries.
The Employer will refund to the Contractor such
payments, as provided in the Bill of Quantities, and all (c) Use of borrow or quarry materials
lands so purchased shall be the property of the Payment will not be made for moving the Contractor's
Employer. plant from one location to another at any of the
individual sources.
A Provisional Sum for this purchase has been included
in ITEM 12.01 of the Bill of Quantities. Subject to the Should the Contractor elect to obtain material from
agreement of the Engineer in advance, and upon sources other than those shown on the plans, he shall
production of receipts, the Contractor will be reimbursed excavate the necessary trial holes, take such samples
the net cost of such purchasing, plus the percentage and conduct or have conducted such tests as are
inserted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities for deemed to be necessary by the Engineer. The
overheads and, profit. Contractor shall submit the results and sufficient details
to the Engineer to satisfy him that the quality and
quantity of the material available in the proposed area

are acceptable for the intended use, all at the regards to his obligations to fulfil all requirements of the
Contractor's own expense. Specifications in respect of the quality of materials for
earthworks or pavement layers.
The Contractor shall plan his exploitation of the borrow
pits or quarries in such a manner that the various types c) Protecting borrow pits and quarries
of materials extracted can be selected and utilised Borrow pits and quarries shall be continuously
without contamination or admixture of unsuitable protected against the ingress of surface water, and the
material. Contractor shall construct such temporary banks as
may be required for diverting surface water, and, in so
(d) Borrow materials obtainable in the road prism far as is possible, his operations shall be planned ins
or within the road reserve boundaries such a way that the borrow pit and quarry will be self
Where suitable sources of materials are available in draining. Where this is not possible, borrow pits and
existing cuttings and side drains, such materials may be quarries shall be dewatered by pumping. The
used for the Works if approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall be solely responsible for keeping
borrow areas and quarry sites dry and ensuring that
borrow material is sufficiently dry when required for use.
3405 OPENING AND WORKING BORROW PITS
d) Access roads
a) Excavating borrow material The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's prior
All opening and working of borrow pits shall be approval to the siting of junctions of access roads with
undertaken in a manner which prevents contamination existing roads and shall comply with he Engineer's
or undesirable mixing of materials. conditions of access particularly regarding clearance of
obstructions to provide adequate sight lines, temporary
Where any borrow pit contains different types of drainage or culverts and the provision of signs and
materials which require mixing to produce a suitable traffic control.
product, the materials shall be excavated and handled
by use of methods approved by the Engineer. The provision of access roads shall not be measured
for payment.
The Contractor shall take all precautionary measures so
as to avoid contamination of the suitable material by the e) Private access roads
inclusion of clayey or otherwise unsuitable material from Where private roads are to be used as access roads,
the floor of the borrow pit, the overburden, any the Contractor shall after consultation with the Owner or
unsuitable layers, or areas beyond the approved limits Authority having control of such road, carry out any
of the borrow area. During loading, any hard oversize repairs, alterations or additions to such roads as may
material which will not break down during processing on be required to bring them to an acceptable condition
the road shall be excluded as far as is practicable. suitable for traffic. Where materials from a borrow pit or
quarry are hauled on private access roads, such roads
During borrow operations, and especially when shall be maintained properly to the satisfaction of the
excavating material near the floor and outer boundaries Engineer during borrow and quarry operations. No
of the borrow areas, the Contractor shall plan his additional payment will be made for this work, and full
operations so as to reduce, in so far as is possible, the compensation for maintaining private access roads
amount of earth moving work that will be necessary for used as haul roads will be regarded as being included
finishing-off the borrow pits. Indiscriminate excavation in the bid rates and paid for in the various items of work
without due regard being had to the desired final shape where the materials are used.
of the borrow pit will not be permitted.
The material in borrow pits shall be blasted or ripped 3406 REINSTATING BORROW AND QUARRY
and excavated in a manner that will ensure the effective AREAS AND HAUL ROADS
breaking-down of the material in the borrow pit before it
is loaded. Rippable material which tends to break into a) Borrow and quarry areas
large blocks shall be cross-ripped. On completion of his operations in a borrow and quarry
area, the Contractor shall reinstate the entire area so as
b) Control at borrow pit to blend it with the surrounding area and to permit the
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling his re-establishment of vegetation. For this purpose the
operations at every borrow pit where material is being borrow area shall be shaped to even contours without
excavated to ensure compliance with all the any slopes being steeper than 1:3, except where the
requirements of the Specifications. Engineer so permits in specified cases. All material in
and around the borrow areas, where spoil from clearing
The Contractor shall carry out sufficient tests on the and grubbing operations or excess overburden, shall be
material being excavated from the borrow pit to satisfy used or disposed of as directed by the Engineer. Solid
himself that the quality of the material will comply with waste and rubbish may not be dumped into the borrow
the specific requirements for the particular layers for area. Material incapable of supporting vegetation shall
which it will be used. If required for the proper control of be buried and used for shaping the borrow area and
quality, in the opinion of the Engineer, the materials shall subsequently be covered with soft material. All
shall be stockpiled prior to loading and tests of the available soft material shall be spread evenly to the
stockpiles carried out as required. prescribed thickness, and where sufficient material is
not available for so covering the entire area, the
If there is any doubt concerning the quality of the remaining portions shall be scarified along contours so
borrow material being excavated at any time, the as to avoid undue erosion.
Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately, and in
any case before such material is brought onto the road. The shaping and reinstatement of the borrow pit shall
The results of all tests carried out by the Contractor be done in such a manner that the borrow pit will be
shall be submitted to the Engineer on request. The properly drained wherever practicable, and, where
Engineer may, after further testing or inspection if required, the Contractor shall place earth banks to
necessary, approve the use of the material in the divert surface water from the borrow area. If so
borrow area, or he may order the borrow pit to be directed, the borrow and quarry area shall be fenced off
finished off and abandoned. Any such approval by the and provided with gates as specified in SECTION 5300,
Engineer does not indemnify the Contractor with
and topsoiled and/or hydro-seeded as specified in

SECTION 5700.
The reinstatement of the borrow and quarry areas shall

be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer and the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a signed
certificate from the Landowner, or Legal Occupants of
land or relevant Government Agency stating that the
finishing-off complies with all necessary legal
provisions. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the
provisions of CLAUSE 1214 in this respect.
(b) Haul roads

Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the
Engineer all haul roads shall be obliterated and their
surfaces scarified, earth banks shall be constructed to
prevent erosion, and all damaged fences and other
structures shall be reinstated.
Where materials from a borrow pit or quarry are hauled

on private access roads, such roads shall be restored to
their original condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer when operations at the borrow pit and quarry
are completed, unless otherwise specified.
No additional payment will be made for obliteration, or

restoration respectively, of haul roads or access roads
to borrow pits or quarries. Full compensation for this
work is regarded as being included in the bid rates and
paid for elsewhere
3407 DISPOSAL OF BORROW OR QUARRY

MATERIAL
The Contractor shall not have the right to use material
obtained from borrow pits or quarries for any purpose
other than for the execution of this Contract. He shall
not dispose of any such material whether processed or
not either by sale or donation to any person without the
authorisation of the Employer.
3408 OWNERSHIP OF BORROW PITS AND

QUARRIES
Upon completion of the Contract all borrow pits and
quarries acquired for the Works shall revert to the
Employer regardless of licensee to operate the same.

No separate measurement and payment will be made
for procuring and providing borrow or quarry material,
but it will be regarded as an obligation on the part of the
Contractor to be covered by the contract prices paid for
the various items of work for which the material is used
as prescribed in these Specifications.
Such bid rates related to procuring and providing

borrow or quarry material shall also include full
compensation for all obligations, costs, activities and
work as prescribed in SECTION 1200, as well as for all
supervision, labour, plant, tools and incidentals
required, including all costs as may be necessary for
conducting control tests on all materials, draining and
protecting all borrow or quarry areas, and concluding all
negotiations with Owners or Legal Occupants of land
(except negotiations that are conducted by the
Employer himself) as specified, also for finally shaping
and finishing the borrow pits and quarries.

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT any stockpiling of material may be done, the site shall
be cleaned, and all material which may cause pollution
shall be removed. During use, the lower 100 mm of
stockpiled material shall not be utilised for construction.
SECTION 3500: SELECTING AND After the stockpiled material has been removed, the site
shall be reinstated as closely as possible to its original
UTILISING MATERIAL FROM condition, and the surface shall be lightly scarified to
promote vegetation growth.
BORROW PITS AND CUTTINGS
No separate payment will be made in regard to
CONTENTS: stockpiling of materials.
CLAUSE PAGE
3501 SCOPE 3000-13 3503 BREAKING DOWN OVERSIZE
3502 SELECTING AND STOCKPILING MATERIALS
MATERIALS 3000-13
3503 BREAKING DOWN OVERSIZE MATERIALS 3000-13 (a) Material from cuts or borrow pits
3504 CONTROLLING THE MOISTURE The material from cuttings and borrow pits shall be
CONTENT OF MATERIALS 3000-14 broken down in the cuttings or borrow pits, alternatively
3505 LAYER THICKNESSES AND SPREADING in the road, to the maximum size specified for the
OF MATERIALS 3000-14 respective layer where it will be used.
3506 COMPACTION OF MATERIALS 3000-15
3507 DRAINAGE AND PROTECTION 3000-15 Spoil material need be broken down only sufficiently for
3508 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3000-15 convenient loading and transporting, but the Engineer
may require sufficient material to be broken down to a
maximum size of 500 mm with a view to effectively
trimming the spoil areas.
3501 SCOPE
This Section describes the selection of materials from Material intended for crushing need only be broken
borrow pits and cuttings for the various purposes for down sufficiently to permit acceptance by the crusher.
which they are required in the Works, stockpiling the
materials excavated but which can not be dumped In order that the material can be broken down to the
directly where required, breaking down the material appropriate sizes, the Contractor shall adjust and
during the excavation process when it is processed on control his blasting, ripping, excavating and other
the road, or when special processing for breaking-down operations so that the desired result can be achieved as
by crusher is required, controlling the moisture content, effectively as possible.
placing and compacting the soil and gravel layers and
constructing the rock fills. Care shall be taken not to load oversize material and to
bring it onto the road. The Contractor shall, at his own
In addition, this Section describes the treatment of cost remove such oversize material from the road or
material recovered from existing pavements, and break it down further to the required size on the road.
construction in restricted areas during rehabilitation
work. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the working methods
of the Contractor are such that unnecessarily large
Unless inconsistent with the context, the provisions of quantities of oversize material are produced, the
SECTION 3500 relating to borrow pits or the material Contractor shall change his methods in order to
obtained from borrow pits shall apply with changes as produce less oversize material, and the material shall
required to such places where material is recovered be broken down to the sizes as specified for each layer
from an existing road, and to the material recovered by using equipment suited to this purpose. The
from an existing road respectively. Contractor shall be at liberty to employ any methods
and equipment he may prefer, but where any difference
3502 SELECTING AND STOCKPILING of opinion may arise in regard to the practicability of the
breaking-down process or the suitability of the methods
MATERIALS and equipment employed by the Contractor, the
The Contractor shall use materials strictly in Engineer may require use of grid-rollers, pad-foot rollers
accordance with the purpose for which they have been or other equipment giving similar effect as a grid roller
approved. During his activities in borrow pits or cuttings,
to be used on the road. The results so obtained will
he shall ensure that approved materials are not polluted then serve as the norm of the degree to which the
with unsuitable material or that approved materials are breaking-down shall be attained by any alternative
not unnecessarily wasted.
methods. No separate payment will be made for
breaking down material to the required size.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall so plan his activities that materials
Where surplus oversize material is available and the
excavated from borrow pits and cuttings, in so far as is Engineer so agrees, the Contractor, instead of breaking
possible, can be transported direct to and placed at the down any oversize materials may spoil it. The Engineer
point where it is to be used. However, where utilisation
may also require oversize materials to be used for other
of materials in this manner is impracticable, or if so purposes, such as for rock fills or rip-rap.
instructed by the Engineer, materials shall be
temporarily stockpiled for later loading and
Any oversize material still remaining after processing in
transportation to where it will be used. If, in the opinion accordance with any of the processes described above
of the Engineer, materials need to be stockpiled for the shall be removed from the road.
purpose of quality control or for mixing to become
sufficiently homogenous, the Contractor shall carry out The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the risk of
stockpiling as required to ensure proper quality control causing excessive breaking down of the finer fraction of
and to meet the Specifications consistently.
the materials and thereby altering the properties of the
material by inappropriate working methods or
Stockpiling areas and maximum height and extent of equipment. Any material which does not meet the
stockpiles shall be approved by the Engineer. Before

requirements of these Specifications after compaction for addition of stabiliser for the purpose of using wet
shall be replaced or made good on the Contractor’s material. The Contractor himself shall decide and
expense. submit his proposed method of work for the approval of
the Engineer.
(b) Existing cemented layers
Existing cemented layers to be broken down and
reprocessed may be reprocessed either on the road, or 3505 LAYER THICKNESSES AND SPREADING
it may be hauled to a crusher for processing, whichever OF MATERIALS
is specified or required by the Engineer.
(a) General
(c) Crushing and screening
All material shall be placed in the correct quantity, and
Where the material intended for use in pavement layers
to the required grade, line and thickness, in a manner
cannot be suitably broken down by the methods set out
which prevents segregation and contamination of any
herein, the Contractor shall use alternative sources or
kind.
apply crushing or screening, or both, as required to
meet the Specifications. The crushing plant, shall be
The thickness of layers compacted in one operation
capable of breaking down oversize material to the
shall not exceed the maximum that the equipment and
maximum size specified for the layer concerned.
method of operation can process to meet the
requirements of the Specifications in terms of
No separate payment will be made for crushing or
tolerances and density to the full depth of the layer.
screening material to the required size unless
specifically allowed for in the Special Specifications and
The thickness of layers compacted in one operation
the Bill of Quantities.
shall not be less than the minimum that the equipment
and method of operation can process without lamination
(d) Disposing of oversize materials
unless special precautions are taken on the approval of
All oversize materials removed from the road and all
the Engineer.
excess material removed from the road shall be
disposed of at the Contractor's cost or may be used in
(b) Fill and improved subgrade layers (G15, G7, G3,
the Works for other suitable purposes on the approval
DR)
of the Engineer.
The maximum layer thickness for fill or improved
subgrade layers made of soils or gravel (G15, G7, G3),
The bid rates for constructing all pavement layers shall
compacted in one operation, shall be 250 mm
include full compensation for the removal of oversize
(compacted thickness).
material without any additional payment being made to
the Contractor.
For rock fill (DR) the maximum compacted layer
thickness shall be 1 metre except in areas where
3504 CONTROLLING THE MOISTURE compaction plant is not accessible or is impracticable to
CONTENT OF MATERIALS use in the opinion of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to
prevent material in borrow pits, excavations, stockpiles The maximum particle size for all fill and improved
and on the road from becoming excessively wet as a subgrade layers shall not exceed two thirds of the
result of rain or groundwater or stormwater. Therefore, compacted layer thickness. In order to prevent the layer
the excavation of borrow pits and cuttings shall be so thicknesses from being determined by the presence of
planned and executed as to prevent the damming-up of isolated large fragments, the Contractor shall remove
water in the borrow pits or cuttings, and the Contractor such isolated fragments as directed by the Engineer.
shall also provide the necessary temporary drainage for
this purpose. Where a new layer is constructed on an existing or
already constructed fill or improved subgrade layer and
Material that is too dry shall be mixed thoroughly with the new layer will be less than 100 mm in compacted
water until the required moisture content for compaction thickness, the existing layer shall be scarified to such a
is achieved. depth as will give a layer thickness after compaction of
not less than 100 mm of the new plus the scarified
During the rainy season the Contractor shall take all material together. No additional payment will be made
necessary precautions to prevent material from for this operation.
becoming excessively wet. The methods may include,
but are not restricted to, the following: spreading on the (c) Pavement layers
road with a proper cross slope and temporarily rolling The layer thickness shall comply with the requirements
with flat-wheeled roller in order to improve water run off, as indicated on the Drawings and in the Special
covering of stockpiles with tarpaulins, applying special Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
measures to prevent water to dam up against material
heaps or windrows. Spreading material in restricted areas shall be done in a
manner approved by the Engineer to comply with the
The Contractor shall so plan his construction required levels, grade, line and density to the full depth
programme that material with a high natural moisture of the layer.
content will be used in the dry season and not in the
wet. Where material is too wet, for whatever reason, to Where the thickness of any existing pavement layer
comply with the requirements in regard to moisture requires to be supplemented and the thickness of the
content during compaction, the Contractor shall correct added material after compaction will be less than 100
the moisture content of the material until it is adequately mm, the existing layer shall be scarified to a depth that
dry for compaction, by drying out the material, will give a layer thickness of at least 100 mm after
alternatively mixing with approved dry material, spoiling compacting together the loosened existing and added
and replacing with drier approved material, or applying material. In the case of gravel or crushed aggregate
treatment with lime or cement. base course, the Engineer may direct the existing layer
to be broken down to its full depth.
No separate payment will be made in regard to
measures for keeping material dry, nor for any
measures for correcting the moisture content, neither

3506 COMPACTION OF MATERIALS

(a) General requirements
Compaction shall be carried out in a series of
continuous operations covering the full width of the
layer concerned according to the Drawings. The
Contractor shall reduce the length or width of any layer
compacted in any single operation if the proper
compaction or finish of such layer is not being achieved
in the opinion of the Engineer.
The method of work, type of compaction equipment to

be used and the amount of rolling to be done, shall be
such as to ensure that specified density and finish is
obtained without damage being done to adjacent or
lower layers or structures. During compaction the layer
shall be maintained to the required shape and cross-
section, and all holes, ruts and laminations shall be
removed or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Suitable equipment and methods acceptable to the

Engineer shall be used in restricted areas so that the
required densities will be obtained throughout the
thickness of the layer. If necessary, the layers shall be
placed in thicknesses which are less than the specified
layer thickness.
Rock fill material shall be compacted with vibratory

rollers to achieve a good mechanical interlock of the
rock and the maximum compaction of the finer material
in the spaces between the rock. The type of vibratory
roller used, the operating speed, the number of passes
and the layer thicknesses shall be determined after field
trials and the proposed method shall be to the
(c) In place reworking of pavement layers

Where so specified or instructed by the Engineer, and
the material in any existing layer complies with the
requirements for the new layer, the Contractor shall
scarify the layer to the specified depth, add extra
approved material if necessary, and reprocess the layer
in place. Reprocessing includes watering, mixing, and
compacting the layer to the level, grade line, finish and
density specified for the layer concerned. Payment will
be made as determined for the respective pavement
layers.
3507 DRAINAGE AND PROTECTION

The compacted layers shall be adequately drained and
shaped to prevent water from standing on or along or
causing damage to the completed work. Windrows shall
be removed to facilitate the drainage of water from the
surface.
No material for a subsequent layer may be placed if the

underlying layer has been softened by excessive
moisture and requires repair in the opinion of the
Engineer.

No separate measurement and payment will be made
for procuring and providing borrow material, selection,
stockpiling and breaking down material from borrow pits
and cuttings, nor for placing materials, adding water,
drying, mixing and compacting the layers. It will be
regarded as an obligation on the part of the Contractor
to be covered by the contract prices paid for the various
items of work for which the material is used as
prescribed in these Specifications.

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT 3602 MATERIALS

(a) General
Any test results provided in design documents such as
SECTION 3600: EARTHWORKS the Materials Report, read in conjunction with these
Specifications, may give a preliminary indication as to
the purpose for which the cut material may be used as
CONTENTS: well as the treatment, if any, which the roadbed shall
CLAUSE PAGE receive. Any test results or recommendations of method
of work in the Material Report are solely for information.
3601 SCOPE 3000-16 The Contractor shall undertake his own assessment
and any tests required and submit his proposed
3603 EXCAVATIONS 3000-17 methods of work and test results of all material he
3604 PREPARATION OF THE ROADBED 3000-18 intends to use for the approval of the Engineer.
3605 EMBANKMENTS 3000-18
3606 COMPACTION OF EARTHWORKS 3000-20 The material types (G15, G7, G3, DR) given in the
3607 PROTECTING THE EARTHWORKS AND Drawings denote the minimum quality for a particular
STRUCTURES 3000-20
use in the Works, either specified in the Drawings or as
3608 FINISHING THE SLOPES 3000-21 instructed by the Engineer. In the cases where a
3609 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND minimum quality of earthworks material is not specified,
TESTING 3000-21
the following guidelines shall apply and the Engineer’s
3610 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3000-21 instruction shall be the standard to which materials
quality control is applied:
Material type Typical use

3601 SCOPE G15 Upper improved subgrade layers and fill
This Section covers work in connection with the
construction of cuts and fills, the removal to spoil of G7 Lower improved subgrade layers and fill
material unsuitable for use, the construction and G3 Fill only
compaction of fills and improved subgrade layers with DR Improved subgrade layers and fill
cut material from the road prism or borrow material from
approved borrow pits, the compaction of the roadbed Irrespective of the minimum required quality specified or
and finishing of cuts and fills, up to the stage where fills the above guidelines the highest quality of approved
are ready for the placing of the pavement layers. earthworks material available at economical haul
distances, complying with the requirements of the
This Section covers the requirements for the following Specifications and Drawings, shall be selected for fill or
types of material: improved subgrade layers. Rock fill materials (DR)
− G15 natural gravel/soils with nominal CBR value complying with the requirements of the Specifications
of minimum 15 shall be the preferred material type unless otherwise
− G7 natural gravel/soils with nominal CBR value specified or directed by the Engineer.
of minimum 7
− G3 natural gravel/soils with nominal CBR value (b) Material requirements for fill and improved
of minimum 3 subgrade layers
− DR Dump Rock, un-graded waste rock Materials for earthworks shall be non-expansive soils or
dump rock meeting the requirements given in TABLES
3602/1 and 3602/2.
TABLE 3602/1
REQUIREMENTS FOR FILL AND IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYERS. CML TEST METHODS.
Material properties Material class

CML Tests G15 G7 G3
CBR (%), wet or moderate Minimum 15 after 4 days 7 after 4 days soaking 2) 3 after 4 days soaking,
climatic zones CML1.11 1) soaking 2) measured at 90% of MDD
CBR (%), dry climatic zones Minimum 15 at OMC and Minimum 7 at OMC and of BS-Heavy compaction
CML1.11 1) also minimum 7 after 4 also minimum 3 after 4 days
days soaking 2) soaking 2)
CBR-swell (%) CML1.11 Maximum 1.5 Maximum 2 Maximum 2
Plasticity index (%) CML1.3 Maximum 25 Maximum 30 (no requirement)
Max. particle size CML1.7 2/3 of compacted layer thickness
Maximum layer thickness 250 mm compacted thickness placed in one operation
1. The climatic zones for the project, or respective parts of the project, shall be in accordance with the Drawings or
Special Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
2. CBR values are measured at the specified field density for the respective layer.
TABLE 3602/2
REQUIREMENTS FOR DUMP ROCK (DR) IN FILL AND IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYERS
Material properties Material class: DR (dump rock)

Maximum particle size: Two thirds of compacted layer thickness.
Maximum layer thickness: 1 m placed in one operation.
The content of fines shall be sufficiently low so that the larger particles rest against each other when placed in earthworks
layers. The Engineer’s decision shall be the final in cases where doubt or disagreement exists whether the material can be
classified as DR.

3603 EXCAVATIONS and size are such that, in the opinion of the
Engineer, they cannot be removed without recourse
(a) Classification to one of the methods described under rock
excavation in TABLE 3603/1. Where a portion of
(i) General excavation contains 50% or more by volume of
This SUBCLAUSE 3603(a) sets out the criteria and boulders of this order, such portion shall be
assessment methods to classify all excavations for considered as rock excavation throughout.
measurement and payment. The classification is
valid for excavations of cuts, for structures, drains, (b) Dimensions of cuts
services and for removal of unsuitable materials or The dimensions of cuts shall be in accordance with the
any other excavations measured not paid for details of the Drawings and may further be defined or
separately. amended during the course of construction by
instructions from the Engineer. The Contractor shall
(ii) Classification criteria obtain instructions beforehand from the Engineer
The excavation of material shall be classified in regarding the slope of the sides of cuttings and the
accordance with TABLE 3603/1 for purposes of depth to which cuttings are to be taken, including the
measurement and payment. dimensions of any in situ treatment of cuts that may be
required below the formation level. Cuts in soils shall be
trimmed to a smooth finish to prevent initiation of slope
TABLE 3603/1 erosion.
CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS FROM CUT EXCAVATIONS
In rock cuts, the rock shall be removed to the level that
Classification Description will permit the construction of the subbase layer, unless
otherwise instructed.
Rock Rock excavation shall be
excavation excavation in material which The Contractor shall take proper care when excavating
requires drilling and blasting or cuts not to loosen any material outside the specified cut
the use of hydraulic or pneumatic line, whether by ripping, blasting or by other means.
jackhammers to be loosened and Care shall also be taken not to undercut any slopes,
to be loaded for transportation. and proper control shall at all times be exercised by
Common Common excavation shall be regular survey checking and by using batter poles at
excavation excavation in all material other close intervals.
than rock as defined above,
whether the material is suitable All cuts made outside the specified cut line or below the
for use in the Works, or to be specified level without the approval of the Engineer
spoiled and paid for as Common shall be backfilled with approved material, compacted to
Excavation to Spoil. The the satisfaction of the Engineer and re-trimmed, all at
classification includes excavation the Contractor's own expense and in accordance with
in earthworks or any pavement SECTION 7400.
layers of an existing pavement
not covered by a separate item in The Engineer may, when he considers it necessary,
the Bill of Quantities regardless of instruct the Contractor to widen existing, completed or
the nature of the material partly completed cuttings either uniformly or by altering
excavated, other than rock the slope of the sides of the cutting, or by cutting
excavation. benches, or in any other way.
(iii) Classification assessment (c) Utilisation of excavated material

The Engineer shall decide under which one of the
above classes any excavation shall be classified for (i) General
purposes of payment. In the event of a As far as practical in the opinion of the Engineer,
disagreement between the Contractor and the the material resulting from cuts, widening of cuts or
Engineer, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, other excavations in the road reserve shall be
make available such mechanical plant as required utilised for construction of earthworks or pavement
by the Engineer in order to determine whether or layers depending on their quality. The Engineer’s
not the material can reasonably be removed. The approval to use any material does not indemnify the
decision of the Engineer as to the classification Contractor with regards to his obligations to fulfil all
shall be final and binding. requirements of the Specifications in respect of the
quality of materials for earthworks or pavement
The Contractor shall be at liberty to use any layers.
approved method he wishes to use for excavating
any class of material, but his chosen method of The Contractor shall plan his operations in such a
excavating the material shall not dictate the manner that all cut material may be used to the best
classification of the excavation. advantage of the Employer. This would mean that
no material shall be unnecessarily spoiled,
The Contractor shall immediately inform the borrowed or hauled. The Contractor shall neither
Engineer if and when the nature of the material borrow nor spoil any material without the Engineer's
being excavated changes to the extent that a new approval and without satisfying the Engineer that
classification for further excavation is warranted. this is necessary and the most economical method
Failure on the part of the Contractor to advise the of constructing the Works.
Engineer thereof in good time shall entitle the
Engineer to classify, at his discretion, such Material which will not be used in the pavement or
excavation as may have been executed in material earthworks due to quality or other reasons may be
of a different nature. stockpiled for future use as topsoil or side fill as
required by the Engineer.
(iv) Boulders
Individual boulders greater than one cubic metre in
volume shall be classified as rock when their nature

(ii) Conservation of topsoil achieve a uniform standard of compaction and

Topsoil encountered in excavations shall be strength, or to prevent water-logging and improve
conserved as described in SECTION 3100 where drainage.
directed by the Engineer. No additional payment will
be made for conservation of topsoil. (c) Draining and protecting the roadbed
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to
ensure that the roadbed is kept drained. In the cases
3604 PREPARATION OF THE ROADBED where the roadbed needs to be kept moist due to the
presence of expansive soils he shall carry out watering
(a) Removing unsuitable material and timely dumping and spreading of following layers
as required to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No
(i) Poor material quality separate payment will be made for any such operations
Any roadbed material which the Engineer considers or adjustments of schedules to fulfil such requirements.
to be of a quality that would be detrimental to the
performance of the completed road shall be Waterlogged roadbed, such as saturated material
removed to such widths and depths as he may overlying less pervious strata, shall first be drained by
instruct, and shall be disposed of as prescribed. the installation of all permanent surface or subsoil
The excavated spaces shall then be backfilled with drainage shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the
approved material and compacted according to the Engineer, before any other construction may be started
Specifications. on these sections. Such drains shall be constructed,
measured and paid for in accordance with the
(ii) Wet material requirements of SECTION 2100.
The Engineer may order that roadbed material
which is too wet to provide a stable platform for the
construction of the embankment be removed to 3605 EMBANKMENTS
such widths and depths as he may instruct and be
replaced with approved dry material and compacted (a) General
according to the Specifications. Payment for this Embankments shall be constructed to comply with all
work will only be made if the Engineer is satisfied requirements in the Specifications and Drawings or as
that the high moisture content is not a result of further instructed or amended by the Engineer in
inappropriate or insufficient measures by the respect of dimensions of embankments, installation of
Contractor to protect the roadbed from getting wet subsoil drainage or other structures, work method, such
and that drying of the material could not be done as benching or roadbed preparation. Before the start of
with reasonable efforts and within a reasonable construction the Contractor shall submit plans showing
time, all in the opinion of the Engineer. his proposed method of work, the selection of materials,
the method of compaction, and any other matter that
may affect the construction of the embankment or
(b) Preparing and compacting the roadbed sequence of operations.
(i) Compaction All material used for the construction of embankments

Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer the shall meet the requirements of CLAUSE 3602 and shall
roadbed shall be scarified, watered and compacted be selected so that the minimum required quality of
to a density and depth according to the Drawings material is used in the respective positions of the
and the Specifications or as directed by the embankment according to the Drawings and the
Engineer. If necessary, roadbed material may have Specifications. The density of embankment layers shall
to be temporarily bladed off to windrow in order to comply with the requirements of CLAUSE 3606.
achieve the necessary depth of compaction. The
Engineer may instruct that expansive soils are Embankment shall be placed in successive layers
given different treatment such as watering to parallel to the final road surface, and the construction of
maintain natural moisture content and timely wedge-shaped layers shall be restricted to the bottom
dumping and spreading of following layers. No layers of embankment where this may be unavoidable
separate payment will be made for any such on account of cross fall, the tapering out of
operations or alternative techniques to achieve the embankments, or the superelevation of the final road
specified depth and degree of compaction. The surface.
Contractor shall carry out field trials as required by
the Engineer to show that his proposed method and (b) Materials for earthworks layers
equipment for processing and compacting the Materials for earthworks layers shall meet the
roadbed gives the desired result in accordance with requirements as set out in CLAUSE 3602 in respect of
the Specifications and to the satisfaction of the the specified respective material types given in the
Engineer. Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The better soil
qualities shall be selected where alternative fill
(ii) Adjustment of levels materials all meet the minimum material requirements.
Where any additional material has to be imported to In the situation where material quantities are limited, the
obtain the required level and layer thickness, and better quality materials shall be used in the upper
where the thickness of the layer of imported layers. Dump Rock shall in the cases where instructed
material would be less than the specified layer by the Engineer be the preferred type of material for
thickness after compaction, then the roadbed earthworks. Under special conditions, such as where a
material shall be scarified, the necessary imported near impermeable material is desirable, the Engineer
material placed, and this combined material mixed may instruct that Dump Rock is not to be used in the
and compacted to the full specified depth of the earthworks.
layer. No separate payment will be made for such
operations. (c) Benching
Where the natural cross fall of the roadbed or existing
(iii) Rock or hard material or already constructed embankments exceeds 1:6, the
Wherever shown on the Drawings or as may be fills shall be bonded to the roadbed by means of
directed by the Engineer, the roadbed shall be benches excavated in the roadbed or existing
treated in situ by undesirable formations of hard or embankment. Where the existing fill is loose on the
rocky materials being broken down in order to outside and shows inadequate compaction, benches
shall be cut back further than may be necessary to

accommodate construction equipment until adequately Separate payment for construction of sand filter
compacted material is found. blankets or specially selected gravel to be placed in
conjunction with the construction of sand filter blankets
Benches in rock shall be jagged to give sufficient will only apply as an extra over rate to the layer in
resistance to slippage. question on the approval of the Engineer.
The height of the benches shall be maximum 0.75

metres or as directed by the Engineer. The benches TABLE 3605/1
shall be wide enough to accommodate sufficiently REQUIREMENTS FOR GEOTEXTILES
effective compaction equipment.
Aggregate placed Geotextile, weight
No additional payments will be made for benching. All adjacent to the per area of the
measurement and payment will be made under the geotextile geotextile material
normal payment items for fills. (g/m2)
Aggregate Maximum Placed on Placed
(d) Constructing pioneer layers on unstable ground type particle firm, dry on soft,
Where fill is to be constructed across waterlogged or size, dmax subsoil 1) wet
soft ground exhibiting excessive movement under subsoil
normal compaction equipment and haulage trucks, and 2)
such conditions preclude the effective compaction of Gravel, sand
the bottom fill layers, the Engineer may direct that a Mini-
or graded, Maximum Minimum
pioneer layer be constructed on the unstable ground. mum
crushed 50 mm 140
This layer shall be constructed by placing suitable 200
material:
coarse material in a uniform layer with a thickness Sorted Mini-
sufficient to provide a stable working platform for Maximum Minimum
crushed mum
constructing the further fill layers which are to be 200 mm 200
rock: 320
compacted to a controlled density.
Special
A sand filter blanket of approved materials, alternatively reinforc
Dump rock
approved geotextile filters shall be placed at the bottom Minimum ement
(DR), -
of the pioneer layer if so directed by the Engineer. 320 shall be
unsorted:
Geotextile shall meet the requirements given in TABLE consi-
3605/1. dered
1) Dry subsoil refers to moisture contents below
Light hauling equipment shall be used, and where OMC of BS-Light CML test 1.9.
necessary end tipping undertaken for placing the 2) Soft, wet subsoil is silty or clayey materials in
material. The layer shall be compacted by light waterlogged areas or as defined by the
compaction equipment which will give the most effective Engineer.
compaction without the roadbed being over-stressed.
Pioneer layers will not require compaction to a (f) Placing of rock fill (DR)
controlled density unless so directed by the Engineer. Rock material containing particles larger than two thirds
No additional payment will be made for placing pioneer of the compacted layer thickness shall not be used in
layers except for the provision of geotextile filters where the fill unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer.
this is required.
The Contractor shall, by the judicious planning of the
(e) Sand filter blankets and geotextiles operation by selecting the smaller sized material for
At the bottom of fills, and sometimes at intermediate placing in the thinner fill layers, avoid unnecessary
levels, the construction of sand filter blankets may be spoiling of the larger sized rock material and shall
required to facilitate the drainage of fills and to separate ensure its fullest practicable utilisation in fills.
layers of materials where there is a risk of undesirable
infiltration of fine material into the coarse material. Sand (g) Construction of high fills
filter blankets shall be constructed in accordance with The Contractor shall make allowance for all required
the details on the Drawings and shall consist of a layer measures, special techniques and scheduling of work to
of selected sand with suitable grading to provide prevent the development of excessive pore pressure
effective drainage and to prevent the infiltration of fill or and to ensure the stability of high fills during and after
roadbed material into the sand filter blanket. construction where such measures are required in
accordance with the Special Specifications or as
The sand filter material shall meet the requirements directed by the Engineer. No separate payment will be
given in SUBCLAUSE 2104(a)(ii), however the made for any special measures taken in conjunction
requirements with reference to the slot size of drainage with the construction of high fills.
pipes shall only apply where drainage pipes are to be
constructed adjacent to the sand filter material. (h) Constructing rock protection at the toes of fills
Where required, the toes of fills shall be protected
The surface on which the sand filter blankets is to be against erosion by special rock protection, which shall
constructed, shall be smooth and even and the sand be installed as shown on the Drawings and as further
shall be spread evenly to the required thickness and be directed by the Engineer, by the outer part of the toes of
given a light compaction with suitable rollers. The final fills being constructed from assorted boulders and/or
surface of the sand filter blanket shall be finished off blasted rock, as described below.
true to line and level. The Engineer may require the
layers immediately below and above the filter blanket to The rock protection shall be constructed simultaneously
be constructed from selected soil or gravel. with the rest of the fill and shall consist of selected
durable rock material varying in size between 150 mm
Geotextiles, where specified, shall meet the and 750 mm. If required, a layer of approved geotextile
requirements given in TABLE 3605/1. The fabric shall filter shall be installed at the interface between the
not be exposed to direct sunlight for prolonged periods normal fills and the rock protection.
and shall be protected from mechanical damage during
installation and construction.

The outer part of the rock protection shall consist of The moisture content of earthwork at the time of
larger boulders properly bedded by means of smaller compaction shall not be higher than the optimum
fragments so as to form a stable interlocking rip-rap moisture content (OMC) measured at BS-Light
surface. The rock protection shall otherwise be compaction for roadbed, and BS-Heavy compaction
constructed and compacted as rock fill as described in respectively for earthworks layers. The
the SPECIFICATIONS. corresponding lowest allowed moisture content
shall be 75% of OMC. SUBCLAUSE 3605(d) shall
(i) Widening of fills apply if the natural moisture content of the roadbed
Where required in accordance with the Special is too high and drying it back could not be done with
Specifications, or as instructed by the Engineer, special reasonable efforts and within a reasonable time, all
measures shall be taken to prevent differential in the opinion of the Engineer.
settlements where high fills are being widened. Such
measures may include the use of material from the Dry compaction techniques shall not be employed
existing fill in the construction of the widened part of the unless prescribed in the Special Specifications or
new fill or alternative measures as directed by the directed by the Engineer.
Engineer. Unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications and the Bill of Quantities, no additional The Engineer may instruct that expansive soils are
payments will be made for employing such techniques given treatment such as watering to maintain
in the widening of fills, and payment will be made under natural moisture content and timely dumping and
the normal payment items for fills. spreading of following layers. He may also instruct
compaction to be omitted on such soils as he finds
it appropriate.
3606 COMPACTION OF EARTHWORKS
(ii) Density
(a) General requirements The minimum required compacted density of
earthworks shall be as given in TABLE 3606/1.
(i) Moisture content
TABLE 3606/1
COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR EARTHWORKS
Layer and typical material type specified Minimum dry density, nominal value. CML test 1.9
Upper improved subgrade layer, nominally G15 material or
95% of BS-Heavy
better, for layers less than 150 mm below the formation level
Lower improved subgrade layer, nominally G7 material or
better, for layers from 150 mm to 300 mm below the 93% of BS-Heavy
formation level
Fill, nominally G3 material or better, for layers more than 300
90% of BS-Heavy
mm below the formation level
Fill or improved subgrade layers using rock fill (DR) Compaction method specification shall apply
Roadbed compaction to 150 mm depth after clearing,
grubbing and removal of topsoil or other unsuitable material,
where the roadbed level is:
− less than 150 mm below the formation level 97% of BS-Heavy
− 150 mm to 300 mm below the formation level 95% of BS-Heavy
− 300 mm to 600 mm below the formation level 93% of BS-Heavy
− more than 600 mm below the formation level 100% of BS-Light
(b) Compaction method specification (d) Side fill and spoil dumps
The Engineer may at his own discretion allow Spoil material for side fill shall be spread in successive
compaction to be carried out in accordance with a layers of maximum 300 mm loose thickness, shaped
method specification instead of density control in cases and given a smooth surface and compacted by
where material characteristics or site conditions in his bulldozers or other heavy plant to the satisfaction of the
opinion makes compaction density control Engineer. Where required by the Engineer the same
inappropriate. Trials shall be undertaken to the full procedure shall be followed in the case of spoil dumps.
satisfaction of the Engineer in order to establish the
required type of equipment, processing method and 3607 PROTECTING THE EARTHWORKS AND
number of roller passes. The outcome of the trials shall STRUCTURES
be satisfactory to the Engineer for a method
During construction all earthworks shall be kept well
specification to be employed. All costs for undertaking
drained and protected at all times as specified in
such trials shall be carried by the Contractor.
SECTION 1200. All windrows shall be cut away after
construction to prevent the concentrated flow of water
The use of a compaction method specification may at
on completed earthworks layers, but, where necessary,
the Engineer’s discretion be discontinued any time he
flat berms shall be constructed to prevent the undue
finds it necessary for whatever reason.
erosion of fill slopes. All permanent drains shall be
constructed as soon as possible, together with sufficient
(c) Proof rolling
additional temporary drains as may be necessary to
Proof rolling of any earthworks layer or roadbed using
protect the road prism, and shall be maintained in a
loaded trucks or suitable rollers shall be carried out as
good working order. Ruts, potholes, soft spots or any
required by the Engineer. The equipment and method
other damage developing in the earthworks after
of operation shall be as directed by the Engineer and
completion shall be repaired, and the damaged portions
the Contractor shall make all required equipment
shall be reshaped and re-compacted to the satisfaction
available for proof rolling at any time as required by the
of the Engineer at the Contractor’s own cost.
Engineer.

All erosion and flood damage to slopes shall be 3609 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND
promptly repaired as specified in SECTION 1200. TESTING
Construction tolerances and testing shall be in
Side drains discharging water from cuts and all other
accordance with SERIES 7000.
drains shall be constructed in such a way that damage
to the earthworks by erosion is avoided.
Proper precautions and temporary measures shall be 3610 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
taken in all cases to ensure that the method or The Engineer's decision regarding the crossections to
procedure by which the fills are constructed will not be used for measurement and payment shall be final
impose loads on structures, especially on uncompleted and binding on the Contractor in the cases where the
structures, which may damage or overstress such Contractor proceeds with earthworks before the
structures. Engineer has approved the crossection measurements.
ITEM UNIT
3608 FINISHING THE SLOPES
36.01 EXCAVATIONS:
(a) General (a) COMMON EXCAVATION TO SPOIL CUBIC METRE (m
3
)
Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes 3
(b) ROCK EXCAVATION CUBIC METRE (m )
including the slopes of drainage ditches shall be
rounded as indicted on the Drawings or as ordered by
the Engineer. Slopes at the junctions of cuts and fills The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
shall be adjusted and warped to flow into one another material removed as specified to be spoiled on the
or into the natural ground surfaces without any instruction of the Engineer, measured in its original
noticeable break. position and computed by the method of average end
areas from levelled cross-sections taken prior to
When so directed by the Engineer, adjustment to the excavating the cut, measured along the ground line.
slopes shall be made in order to avoid damage being Measurements of common excavation to spoil shall
done to standing trees and to harmonise with existing exclude materials already paid for as removal of topsoil
landscape features. The transition to such adjusted under ITEM 31.01 and shall also exclude materials paid
slopes shall be gradual. for as crossfill under SUBITEM 36.02(e).
Cut and fill slopes shall be finished to a uniform Rock excavation shall be measured for payment
appearance without any noticeable break which can be irrespective of the use of the material.
readily discerned from the road. The degree of finish
required for all fill slopes and for cut slopes flatter than No excavation in excess of that indicated on the
1:4 shall be that normally obtainable by motor grader or Drawings or as directed by the Engineer shall be paid
hand-shovel operations. for, notwithstanding any tolerances in workmanship
allowed.
The slopes of cuts and fills which are designated for
grassing shall, after finishing, be prepared for grass The bid rates for excavation shall include full
planting and/or for topsoil for grass planting as specified compensation for excavation as classified, loading, off
in SECTION 5700. loading and disposing of the material as specified. No
overhaul will be paid for transporting away the
All trimming of cut slopes shall be completed before any excavated material.
work on the subbase is commenced inside such
cuttings. In case the material is used in pavement layers or
earthworks, overhaul may be paid for as prescribed in
SECTION 1600 when, and only when, payment of
(b) Cut slopes overhaul is prescribed in the Special Specifications. In
such case the material measured for payment of
(i) Cuts in soils overhaul shall be the compacted material in the
The slopes of cuttings shall be trimmed to neat lines respective pavement or earthworks layer for which
and to a standard that is generally attainable with overhaul is paid.
proper care and workmanship in the type of
material concerned. All loose rocks, stones and
nests of loose material shall be removed, especially ITEM UNIT
in solid-rock cuts, which must be completely free 36.02 FILL AND IMPROVED
from such material. The final surface of batters SUBGRADE LAYERS:
must be absolutely smooth to prevent initiation of
(a) IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYER AS CUBIC METRE
slope erosion unless alternative methods for 3
SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS TO (m )
grassing or the establishment of natural vegetation
REQUIRE MINIMUM G15 QUALITY
is instructed by the Engineer.
MATERIAL
(ii) Cuts in rock (b) IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYER AS CUBIC METRE

3
Cuts in rock shall be cleared of all loose stones to SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS TO (m )
the satisfaction of the Engineer. REQUIRE MINIMUM G7 QUALITY
MATERIAL
(c) Fill slopes (c) FILL AS SPECIFIED IN THE CUBIC METRE
3
Fill slopes shall be finished to neat lines with all loose DRAWINGS TO REQUIRE MINIMUM (m )
rocks and un-compacted material removed. The degree G3 QUALITY MATERIAL
of finish required shall depend on the nature of the
(d) FILL OR IMPROVED SUBGRADE CUBIC METRE
material used for the fill slope but shall be as smooth as 3
LAYER USING ROCK FILL (m )
is consistent with the material involved and good
workmanship to the satisfaction of the Engineer. (e) CROSSFILL CUBIC METRE
3
(m )
(f) SIDE FILL COMPACTED BY DOZERS CUBIC METRE
3
OR AS SPECIFIED (m )

(g) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 36.02(a) CUBIC METRE

3
TO (e) RESPECTIVELY, FOR (m )
CONSTRUCTION OF SAND
BLANKETS AS SPECIFIED

material measured in the compacted fill according to the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The quantity
measured shall be computed by the method of average
end areas from levelled cross-sections. The levelled
crossections shall be prepared from the ground line
prior to the construction of the fill after clearing and
grubbing and after corrections for the instructed depth
of the removal of topsoil and the instructed depth of any
excavation and preparatory roadbed treatment specified
or ordered by the Engineer. Filling to compensate for
excessive depth of removal of topsoil, or excessive
depth of spoil excavation, compared to that specified,
ordered or approved by the Engineer, will not be paid
for.
Where the road bed has been lowered due to

subsidence under fills, or the roadbed levels are
lowered due to the roadbed preparation, the quantities
shall be adjusted to make allowance for such lowering,
at the sole discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall lodge such request without delay, and he shall
submit the required supporting evidence to the
Engineer. Where the Engineer is satisfied that
significant lowering is occurring, he shall decide to what
extent, if any, the lowering will be compensated for in
the measurement of earthworks fill. Such adjustment of
quantities shall only be considered where a total
lowering due to subsidence and processing of the
roadbed is in excess of 100 mm. The Contractor shall
allow in his rates for such lowering of up to 100 mm.
That part of the fill placed in excess of the cross

sections shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer, will not be paid for irrespective of the
tolerances in workmanship allowed under the Contract.
Measurement and payment of fill shall not distinguish

between alternative methods of processing and
compacting the materials.

procuring, excavating, loading furnishing, placing,
preparing, processing, shaping, watering, mixing, and
compacting the materials to the densities according to
the Specifications.
When payment for overhaul is specified in the Special

Specifications, the rate shall include a free haulage
distance as defined in SECTION 1600.
When payment for overhaul is not specified in the

Special Specifications, the rate shall include for all
transportation of the material.
Earthworks layers, except rock fill, shall be paid for as

crossfill where the material on the instruction or
approval of the Engineer is taken from cuts in the road
reserve and placed in embankments at a distance of 50
m or less from its original position, measured along the
centreline of the road. The unit of measurement for
crossfill shall be the cubic metre of material measured
in the compacted embankment according to the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. No distinction
shall be made for the earthworks layer in which crossfill
is used, i.e. whether in improved subgrade layers or
common fill.

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT G80 Base course

G60 Base course, low traffic roads
G45 Subbase
G25 Subbase, low traffic roads
SECTION 3700: PAVEMENT Irrespective of the minimum required quality specified or
LAYERS OF NATURAL GRAVEL the above guidelines, the highest quality of approved
gravel for pavement layers available at economical haul
MATERIALS distances, complying with the requirements of the
Specifications and Drawings, shall be selected for fill,
CONTENTS: improved subgrade and the individual pavement layers.
CLAUSE PAGE (c) Soluble salts

3701 SCOPE 3000-23 The Contractor shall discard the material or fulfil all
3702 MATERIALS 3000-23 requirements for appropriate construction techniques
3703 CONSTRUCTION 3000-26 and timing of operations to the satisfaction of the
3704 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS 3000-26 Engineer if assessments of soluble salt contents in
3705 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING GRAVEL base course or subbase materials show deleterious
ROADS 3000-27 values. Such assessments are only required where the
3706 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3000-27 pavement is going to receive a bituminous seal as the
3707 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES 3000-27 only surfacing. No additional payment will be made for
3708 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3000-27 any measures taken, nor for any alterations of the
material utilisation, due to presence of soluble salts in
materials or construction water.
(d) Grading modulus(GM) and shrinkage

3701 SCOPE product(SP)
This Section covers the construction of subbase, base Wherever grading modulus (GM) is referred to the value
course, shoulders and gravel wearing course from
shall be calculated as follows: 

 %pass 2mm + % pass0 .425 mm + %pass 0 .075 mm 
GM = 3 − 
 100 

natural gravel or partially crushed gravel.
This Section covers the requirements for the following

Wherever Shrinkage Product (SP) is referred to the
types of material: value shall be calculated as follows:
− GW Gravel wearing course
− G80 natural gravel with nominal CBR value of
minimum 80
SP = (LS )(% p a s s 0 425 m m )
− G60 natural gravel with nominal CBR value of Where LS = Linear Shrinkage tested in accordance
minimum 60 with CML test 1.4.
− G45 natural gravel with nominal CBR value of
minimum 45 (e) Gravel wearing course (GW) and unpaved
− G25 (natural gravel with nominal CBR value of shoulders
minimum 25 Materials for unpaved shoulders and gravel wearing
course layers of GW materials as specified on the
Drawings shall meet the requirements given in TABLE
3702 MATERIALS 3702/1.
(a) General (f) Material requirements for natural gravel base

Gravel material shall be obtained from approved course (G80)
sources. Any test results provided in design documents Materials for base course layers of G80 materials as
such as the Materials Report, read in conjunction with specified on the Drawings shall meet the requirements
these Specifications, may give a preliminary indication given in TABLE 3702/2.
as to the purpose for which cut or borrow material may
be used as well as the treatment, if any, which the (g) Material requirements for natural gravel base
roadbed shall receive. Any test results or course (G60) for low traffic roads
recommendations of method of work in the Material Materials for base course layers of G60 materials as
Report are solely for information. The Contractor shall specified on the Drawings shall meet the requirements
undertake his own assessment and any tests required given in TABLE 3702/3.
and submit his proposed methods of work and test
results of all material he intends to use for the approval (h) Material requirements for natural gravel
of the Engineer. subbase (G45)
Materials for subbase layers of G45 materials as
The material type (G80, G60, G45, G25, GW) given in specified on the Drawings shall meet the requirements
the Drawings denotes the minimum quality for a given in TABLE 3702/4.
particular use in the Works, either specified in the
Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. In the cases (i) Material requirements for natural gravel
where a minimum quality of earthworks material is not subbase (G25) for low traffic roads
specified, the following guidelines shall apply and the Materials for subbase layers of G25 materials as
Engineer’s instruction shall be the applied standard to specified on the Drawings shall meet the requirements
which materials quality control is applied: given in TABLE 3702/5.
(b) Material type and typical use

GW Gravel wearing course and gravel shoulders
TABLE 3702/1
REQUIREMENTS FOR LAYERS OF GRAVEL WEARING COURSE GW MATERIALS. CML TEST METHODS.

Material properties CML Tests Material class GW
CBR: CML1.11
CBR (%), wet or moderate climatic
Minimum 25 after 4 days soaking 2)
zones 1)
CBR (%), dry climatic zones 1) Minimum 25 at OMC 2)
Grading and Atterberg limits 3)
% passing the 37.5 mm sieve Minimum 95
Shrinkage product, SP Minimum 120, maximum 400 4)
Grading coefficient, GC Minimum 16, maximum 34
1) The climatic zones for the project, or respective parts of the project, shall be in accordance with the Drawings or
2) CBR values shall be measured at 95% of MDD for BS-Heavy compaction. For minor gravel roads the required CBR
value may be reduced to 15 on the approved of the Engineer.
3) It is emphasised that the Atterberg limits shall be measured according to the CML test methods 1.2 1.3 and 1.4. These
methods follow British Standard (BS) procedures and utilise BS equipment. Other laboratory test procedures and
equipment do not give comparable results and shall not be used unless proper correlation to CML/BS has been carried
out to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All grading parameters must be normalise for 100% passing 37.5 mm.
4) In built up areas the maximum SP value shall be 270 or as directed by the Engineer in order to minimise dust problems.
TABLE 3702/2
REQUIREMENTS FOR BASE COURSE LAYERS OF G80 MATERIALS. CML TEST METHODS.
Material class G80

Material properties CML Tests General requirements Coral rock, calcrete or other
pedogenic materials
CBR: CML1.11
zones 1)
CBR (%), dry climatic zones 1) Minimum 80 at OMC and also minimum 60 after 4 days soaking 2)
CBR-swell (%) Maximum 0.5 measured at BS-Heavy compaction
Atterberg limits: 3)
Climatic zone: 1) Wet or moderate Dry Wet Dry or moderate
Max Liquid limit CML1.2 30 40 35 45
Max Plasticity Index CML1.3 8 14 10 16
Max Linear Shrinkage CML1.4 4 7 5 8
Grading: CML1.7
Sieve size Grading limits
(mm) (% passing sieve)
63 100 − The largest particles dmax shall be
37.5 80 – 100 maximum 2/3 of compacted layer
20 60 – 95 thickness.
5 30 – 65 − Grading modulus, GM shall be
2 20 – 50 minimum 2.0
0.425 10 – 30
0.075 5 – 15
Particle strength: CML2.7
Minimum TFV dry 80kN

Ratio dry to soaked value of
TFV TFVsoaked shall be minimum 60% of the corresponding TFVdry value
2) CBR values shall be measured at the specified field density for the layer.
out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
TABLE 3702/3
REQUIREMENTS FOR BASE COURSE LAYERS OF G60 MATERIALS. CML TEST METHODS.

Material class G60

pedogenic materials
CBR: CML1.11
zones 1)
Climatic zone: 1) Wet Dry or moderate Wet Dry or moderate
Grading: CML1.7
Requirements: − The largest particles dmax shall be maximum 2/3 of compacted layer
thickness.
− Grading modulus, GM shall be minimum 2.0
Particle strength: CML2.7
Minimum TFV dry 50kN
TFV TFVsoaked shall be minimum 60% of the corresponding TFVdry value
TABLE 3702/4
REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBBASE LAYERS OF G45 MATERIALS. CML TEST METHODS.
Material class G45

pedogenic materials
CBR: CML1.11
zones 1)
Grading: CML1.7
Requirements: Grading modulus, GM shall be minimum 1.5

TABLE 3702/5
REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBBASE LAYERS OF G25 MATERIALS. CML TEST METHODS.
Material class G25

pedogenic materials
CBR: CML1.11
zones 1)
Grading: CML1.7
Requirements: Grading modulus, GM shall be minimum 1.2
3703 CONSTRUCTION density of not less than that specified in TABLE 3704/1
or as directed by the Engineer.
(a) Requirements applying prior to placing of the
layer (d) Subbase and base course materials
No pavement layer shall be placed until approval is Subbase or base course materials respectively shall be
obtained from the Engineer and the underlying layer is spread, broken down as required, watered, mixed and
placed, compacted and finished in accordance with the compacted in accordance with the Specifications, and
Specifications and is tested and found acceptable to the shall be compacted to a density of not less than that
full satisfaction of the Engineer. Before placing any specified in TABLE 3704/1 or as directed by the
pavement layer the underlying layer shall be inspected Engineer.
and proof rolled as required by the Engineer in order to
establish whether there is any damage, wet spots or
other defects. Any such defect shall be rectified to the 3704 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
satisfaction of the Engineer before the next layer is
placed. (a) General requirements
The minimum required compacted density for pavement
(b) Processing to improve quality layers made of natural gravel shall be as given in TABLE
The Contractor may elect to crush, screen or mix 3704/1.
materials from different sources or undertake other
processing of materials to meet the specified material
requirements. No additional payment will be made for TABLE 3704/1
any such processing unless stated in the Special COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVEMENT LAYERS
Specifications and the Bill of Quantities. MADE OF NATURAL GRAVEL
(c) Shoulders Layer and typical material type Minimum dry

Where the shoulders and the base course are to be specified density,
constructed from the same material, they shall be nominal value.
constructed simultaneously. CML test 1.9
Base course layers, G80 or G60 98% of BS-
Where the base course is to be constructed from a material or better Heavy
different material than the shoulders, the shoulders Subbase course layers, G45 or
shall first be constructed and then neatly cut to the G25 material or better 95% of BS-
required line to provide lateral support for the base Gravel wearing course or Heavy
course. Care shall be taken not to contaminate the base unpaved shoulders GW material
course material with the shoulder material. Where the
base course is made of a bituminous mix, the base (b) Compaction method specification
course may however be constructed before the The Engineer may at his own discretion allow
shoulders. Work shall be so constructed that the road compaction to be carried out in accordance with a
will be adequately drained at all times by means of method specification instead of density control in cases
sufficient drainage pipes passing through the shoulders. where material characteristics or site conditions in his
The Contractor shall not start constructing the final opinion makes compaction density control
bituminous surfacing of any part of the road before he inappropriate. Trials shall be undertaken to the full
has completed the shoulders of such section to the satisfaction of the Engineer in order to establish the
satisfaction of the Engineer. required type of equipment, processing method and
number of roller passes. The outcome of the trials shall
Shoulder material shall be spread, broken down as be satisfactory to the Engineer for a method
required, watered, mixed and compacted in accordance specification to be employed. All costs for undertaking
with the Specifications, and shall be compacted to a such trials shall be carried by the Contractor.

The use of a compaction method specification may at (e) Materials and compaction
the Engineer’s discretion be discontinued any time he The gravel wearing course material, and respectively
finds it necessary for whatever reason. the combination of imported and scarified material, shall
meet the requirements for material class GW as given
in CLAUSE 3702. Where the compacted layer thickness
3705 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING GRAVEL will exceed 200 mm the compaction shall be carried out
ROADS in two operations. Each layer shall be shaped to the
specified grade and compacted to the required density
in accordance with CLAUSE 3704 before the succeeding
(a) General
layer is placed.
Maintenance of existing gravel road surfaces shall be
classified as one or more of the following operations:
3706 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
(i) shaping existing gravel roads The compacted layers shall be adequately drained and
(ii) ripping and processing existing gravel roads shaped to prevent water from standing on or along or
(iii) regravelling existing gravel roads causing damage to the completed work. Windrows shall
be removed to facilitate the drainage of water from the
(b) Shaping existing gravel roads surface.
Shaping existing gravel roads is paid for per square
metre in SUBITEM 37.04(a). No payment shall be made No material for a subsequent layer shall be placed if the
for shaping existing gravel roads on sections where underlying layer has been softened by excessive
regravelling or ripping and processing is carried out. moisture and requires repair in the opinion of the
Shaping existing gravel roads comprises the following Engineer.
operation carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer:
3707 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
(i) Bringing loose material back to the road from the Construction tolerances and testing shall be in
slopes and ditches if instructed by the Engineer. accordance with SERIES 7000.
(ii) Shaping by motor grader, or equivalent equipment
(c) Ripping and processing existing gravel roads
Ripping and processing existing gravel roads is paid for ITEM UNIT
per square metre in SUBITEM 37.04(b) and comprises
the following operations: 37.01 NATURAL GRAVEL FOR
BASE COURSE:
3
(i) Ripping of the existing road to a depth of minimum (a) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G80 CUBIC METRE (m )
100 mm as required by the Engineer. (b) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G60 CUBIC METRE (m
3
)
(ii) Bringing loose material back to the road from the
slopes and ditches if instructed by the Engineer.
(iii) Mixing, breaking of lumps, removal of oversize
ITEM UNIT
particles and watering as required to make a
homogenous material having suitable moisture 37.02 NATURAL GRAVEL FOR
content at or around the optimum moisture content SUBBASE:
of BS-Heavy density. (a) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G45 CUBIC METRE (m
3
)
(iv) Shaping and finishing to the correct grade and 3
(b) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G25 CUBIC METRE (m )
crossfall and compaction to the requirements in
CLAUSE 3704.
(d) Regravelling existing gravel roads ITEM UNIT

Regravelling comprises the following operation, paid for 37.03 NATURAL GRAVEL FOR GRAVEL
per cubic metre in SUBITEM 37.03(b). WEARING COURSE AND UNPAVED
SHOULDERS:
(i) Addition of gravel wearing course material to an
(a) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS GW USED CUBIC
existing road. 3
FOR UNPAVED SHOULDERS FOR METRE (m )
(ii) Processing as specified for in CLAUSES 3703 and
BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS
3704 for GW material by mixing, breaking of lumps,
removal of oversize particles and watering as (b) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS GW USED CUBIC
3
required to make a homogenous material having FOR GRAVEL WEARING COURSE METRE (m )
suitable moisture content at or around the optimum
moisture content of BS-Heavy density. The quantity of natural gravel shall be the number of
(iii) Shaping and finishing to the correct grade and cubic metres completed in place compacted to the
crossfall and compaction to the requirements in depths and widths shown on the Drawings or as
CLAUSE 3704. directed. The quantity shall be measured by the cross
section area shown on the construction drawings times
Ripping of the existing surface shall be carried out as the station length. Where gravel wearing course
required on the approval of the Engineer wherever the material, GW, is placed on an existing gravel road the
compacted layer thickness will not reach minimum 75 measurement of levels before the start of the operation
mm, or as instructed by the Engineer for other reasons. shall form the basis for calculating the cubic metre
Ripping shall be carried out to a depth of minimum 100 quantities. In the cases where gravel wearing course
mm as required by the Engineer. In such cases material is not to be compacted on the approval of the
additional payment per square metre in SUBITEM Engineer, the quantity shall be measured as cubic
37.04(b) will apply. metres in un-compacted state.
Ripping and reprocessing in addition to regravelling The bid rates shall include full compensation for
may be required due to application of thin layers of procuring, breaking down, placing, compacting, testing
imported gravel, poor shape of the existing road or and proof rolling the material including the protection
whatever other reason as deemed necessary by the and maintenance of the layer, all as specified.
Engineer.

When payment for overhaul is allowed for in

accordance with the Special Specifications, the rates
shall include the free haulage distance as defined in
SECTION 1600. When GW materials are used as
unpaved shoulders for paved roads the corresponding
free haul distance shall as for natural gravel subbase
material.
When payment for overhaul is not allowed for in the

Special Specifications, the rates shall include for all
ITEM UNIT
37.04 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING
GRAVEL ROADS:
(a) SHAPING EXISTING GRAVEL SQUARE METRE
2
ROADS WITHOUT SCARIFICATION (m )
OF THE SURFACE
(b) SCARIFICATION, MIXING, SQUARE METRE
2
WATERING AND COMPACTION (m )
The quantity paid for in SUBITEM 37.04(a) shall be the

square metres calculated as the horizontal distance
along the centreline times the distance between the
shoulder breakpoints in accordance with the cross
section drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Imported gravel wearing course material shall be paid

for under SUBITEM 37.03(b). Material brought in from the
side shall be paid for as crossfill under ITEM 36.02 in the
cases where the material on the instruction or approval
of the Engineer is taken from cuts in the road reserve
and placed in embankments at a distance of 50 m or
less from its original position, measured along the
centreline of the road.
The operation of bringing loose material back to the

road from the slopes and ditches on the approval or
instruction of the Engineer shall be included in the
respective rate in ITEM 37.04 and will not be measured
for payment per cubic metre as crossfill or imported fill
or gravel.
The bid rates for in SUBITEM 37.04(a) shall include full

compensation for shaping the existing road by motor
grader as specified.
The bid rates for in SUBITEM 37.04(b) shall include full

compensation for ripping the existing road by approved
equipment, breaking of lumps, removal of oversize
particles and watering as required to make a
homogenous material having suitable moisture content
at or around the optimum moisture content of BS-Heavy
compaction and shaping of the layer to the required
grade and crossfall as specified including the protection
and maintenance of the layer, all as specified.

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT slag mixture, or with lime to form a lime-slag
mixture. The ratio by mass of the ingredients of
each mixture shall be indicated by the Engineer.
SECTION 3800 : STABILISATION Cement-slag and lime-slag mixtures shall be

intimately mixed by means of approved mixers
and/or spreaders prior to their application onto any
CONTENTS: layers to be stabilised, or they may be mixed on the
CLAUSE PAGE road, at the discretion of the Engineer.
3801 SCOPE 3000-29 (v) Other chemical stabilising agents

3802 MATERIALS 3000-29 Other chemical stabilising agents such as fly-ash
3803 CONSTRUCTION 3000-30 may be used if allowed for in the Special
3804 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES 3000-31 Specifications or if approved or so instructed by the
3805 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3000-31 Engineer.
(b) Selection of stabiliser

The most suitable type of stabiliser to use for a
3801 SCOPE particular type of soil shall be as given in the Special
This Section covers the modification or stabilisation of Specifications, or as directed by the Engineer whereby
materials used in the construction of the earthworks or TABLE 3802/1 may be used as a guidance.
pavement layers by the addition of a chemical
stabilising agent such as cement or lime.
TABLE 3802/1
It includes the furnishing, spreading and mixing-in of the GUIDE TO SELECTION OF STABILISER. CML TEST METHODS
stabilising agent and compaction including and
provision of a curing treatment. % passing Plasticity Index (%) Best suited
the 0.075 CML 1.2 and CML stabiliser
This Section covers the requirements for the following mm sieve 1.3
types of material classified according to their nominal CML 1.7
unconfined compression strength (USC): PI is less than 6
C2 (stabilised material with a nominal UCS value of or PI x Cement
minimum 2 MPa) (%pass.0.075mm) is only 1)
C1 (stabilised material with a nominal UCS value of Less than less than 60
minimum 1 MPa) 25% Cement
6 – 10
preferred
CM: (modified material with a nominal UCS value of
Cement or
minimum 0.5 MPa) More than 10
lime
Cement
Less than 10
preferred
3802 MATERIALS More than Cement or
10 – 20
25% lime
(a) Alternative stabilising agents
Lime
The stabilising agent shall be either one or more of the More than 20
preferred 2)
following agents specified on the Drawings, in the Bill of
Quantities or in the Special Specifications or as ordered 1) Lime requires presence of clay particles to react
by the Engineer. and is therefore used for materials with high PI.
Admixture of pozzolans, such as pulverised slag
(i) Road lime or fuel ash from coal fired power plants, can make
Road lime shall comply with the requirements of the stabilisation with lime possible also for materials
national specification for lime or AASHTO M 216-92 with low PI.
or equivalent standard on approval of the Engineer. 2) Cement can be used for stabilisation of material
with high PI although lime is normally preferred in
(ii) Ordinary Portland cement such cases. To use cement under such
Ordinary Portland cement shall comply with the circumstances requires that the workability of the
requirements of TZS 177:1999, BS 12 of the latest material is improved by a pre-treatment with 2%
issue or equivalent standard on approval of the lime prior to cement stabilisation.
Engineer.
(c) Purchase and storage of stabilisers
(iii) Portland blast-furnace cement From the time of purchase to the time of use, all
Portland blast-furnace cement may be used if stabilising agents shall be kept under proper cover and
specified in the Special Specifications, and shall be protected from moisture.
comply with the requirements of the national
specification or AASHTO M240-97 or equivalent Consignments of these materials shall be used in the
standard on approval of the Engineer. same sequence as that in which they are delivered at
the Works. Stock which have been stored on the Site
(iv) Milled blast-furnace slag for periods longer than three months shall not be used
Milled blast-furnace slag may be used if specified in in the Works, unless authorised by the Engineer.
the Special Specifications, and shall comply with
the requirements of AASHTO M240-97 or
equivalent standard on approval of the Engineer, (d) Material properties
and have a specific surface of not less than 0.35
m /g and the residue on a sieve with 75 µm
2
(i) Durability
openings shall not exceed 10% by mass. In order to ensure that an irreversible stabilisation
reaction occurs, the amount of stabiliser added
Milled blast-furnace slag shall not be used on its shall not be less than the initial consumption of lime
own as a stabilising agent, but shall be mixed either
with Ordinary Portland cement to form a cement-
(ICL) as determined according to test method Wherever grading modulus (GM) is referred to the value
CML1.22 plus 1%. shall be calculated as follows:
(ii) Material requirements GM = (3 - (%pass2mm+%pass0.425mm+%pass0.075mm)/100)

The requirements for materials before and after
treatment are given in TABLE 3802/2.
TABLE 3802/2
REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS IN CEMENTED LAYERS. CML TEST METHODS.
Material properties CML Tests Material class

C2 C1 CM
After stabilisation:
Minimum UCS (Mpa) CML1.21) 1) 2 1 0.5
Plasticity index (%) CML1.2 and 1.3 2) Maximum 8
Before stabilisation: 3)
CBR (%) soaked at 95% MDD of BS-
Minimum 30 Minimum 20 (no requirement)
Heavy (%) CML1.11
Plasticity index (%) CML1.2 and 1.3 2) Maximum 20 Maximum 25 Maximum 35
Aggregate strength TFVdry CML2.7 Minimum 50 kN (no requirement) (no requirement)
Grading modulus, GM CML1.7 Minimum 1.5 Minimum 1.2 (no requirement)
Max. particle size CML1.7 2/3 of compacted layer thickness
1) The unconfined compression strength (UCS) shall be measured after 7 days curing and 4 days soaking in accordance
with laboratory test CML 1.21
3) The content of organic matter should preferably not exceed 0.5%, 1% and 2% for C2, C1 and CM materials
respectively.
3803 CONSTRUCTION (c) Watering

Immediately after the stabilising agent has been
(a) Preparing the layer properly mixed with the soil or gravel, the moisture
The material to be stabilised shall be prepared and content of the mixture shall be determined, and the
placed as specified in SECTIONS 3600 and 3700, and required amount of water shall be added.
given at least one pass with a flatwheel roller. The
material shall be damp. Each application or addition of water shall be well mixed
with the gravel or soil so as to avoid the concentration
(b) Applying and mixing in the stabilising agent of water near the surface or the flow of water over the
Mixing of gravel and soils with stabiliser and water in surface of the layer.
stationary or portable plant and laying with pavers shall
be the preferred method. Where specified in the Special Particular care shall be taken to ensure satisfactory
Specification this method shall be adhered to unless moisture distribution over the full depth, width and
otherwise approved by the Engineer. length of the section being stabilised and to prevent any
portion of the work from getting excessively wet after
Where mixing on the road is employed the stabilising the stabilising agent has been added. Any portion of the
agent shall be spread uniformly over the full area of the work that becomes too wet after the stabilising agent
prepared layer at the prescribed rate of application by has been added and before the mixture has been
means of an approved type of mechanical spreader in a compacted, will be rejected, and such portions shall be
continuous process, or it may be spread by other allowed to dry out to the required moisture content and
methods such as motor grader or by hand. Any shall then be scarified, re-stabilised, re-compacted and
equipment and method to be used shall be approved by again finished off in accordance with the requirements
the Engineer. specified herein, all at the expense of the Contractor.
The water supply and watering equipment shall be
Immediately after the stabilising agent has been spread, adequate to ensure that all the water required will be
it shall be mixed with the loose gravel for the full depth added and mixed with the material being treated within
of treatment. Care shall be taken not to disturb the a short enough period to enable compaction and
compacted layer underneath, nor to mix the stabilising finishing to be completed within the period specified in
agent in below the desired depth. Mixing shall be SUBCLAUSE 3803(g).
continued for as long as necessary and repeated as
often as required to ensure a thorough, uniform and (d) Compaction
intimate mix of the soil or gravel and the stabilising During compaction the layer shall be continuously
agent over the full area and depth of the material to be bladed by motor grader, and loss of moisture by
treated and until the resulting mixture is homogeneous evaporation shall be corrected by further light
and of uniform appearance throughout. applications of water.
Mixing shall be done by grader, disc harrow, rotary During compaction of the stabilised layers, the
mixer or equivalent plant approved by the Engineer, Contractor shall lightly harrow or scarify the crust before
working over the full area and depth of the layer to be final rolling. If so required by the Engineer, in order to
stabilised by means of successive passes of the prevent the formation of laminations near the surface of
equipment. the layer. Final rolling shall be done with equipment that

will give a smooth surface finish which conforms to the TABLE 3803/1
surface tolerances specified. Low patches on the CONSTRUCTION LIMITATIONS
surface may not be filled after compaction. The
minimum compaction requirements shall be as Stabilising Maximum time for completion
specified for the particular layer in the various SECTIONS agent and after stabilising agent comes in
of these Specifications. material class contact with the material to be
stabilised
A sufficient number of compacting units shall be Cement, C2, C1 4 hours
employed on the work to ensure that, from the time the and CM
stabilising agent is first applied to the layer, the mixing
process, watering, compacting, shaping and final Lime, C2 and C1 8 hours
finishing will be completed within the periods specified
in SUBCLAUSE 3803(g). Lime, CM 48 hours
(e) Finishing at junctions No stabilisation shall be applied when the moisture

Any finished portion of the stabilised layer adjacent to content of the material to be stabilised exceeds the
new work, which is used as a turn-round area by optimum moisture content by more than 2% of the dry
equipment in constructing the adjoining section, shall be mass of material. No stabilisation shall be done when
provided with a protective cover of soil or gravel of at weather conditions may adversely affect the stabilising
least 100 mm thick over a sufficient length to prevent operations in the opinion of the Engineer. Excessive
damage to work already completed. When the adjoining drying out or rain falling on the working area during the
section is being finally finished, such cover shall be process of stabilisation may be sufficient cause for the
removed to permit the making of a smooth vertical joint Engineer to order any affected areas to be
at the junction of the different sections. Material in the reconstructed at the Contractor's own cost.
vicinity of the joint which cannot be processed
satisfactorily with normal construction equipment shall No traffic nor any equipment not actually used for
be mixed and compacted by hand or with suitable hand- processing the layer may be allowed to pass over the
operated machines. freshly spread stabilising agent. Only equipment
required for curing or priming may be allowed over the
(f) Curing the stabilised work treated layers during the specified curing period. Where
The stabilised layer shall be protected against rapid water spraying equipment causes damage to the layer,
drying-out for at least seven days following completion the Contractor shall carry out watering by side-spraying
of the layer. tankers travelling off the stabilised layer or alternative
methods employed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The methods of protection may be any one or more of
the following: (h) Quality of materials and workmanship
(i) The stabilised layer shall be kept continuously wet The Contractor shall keep detailed records of the
or damp by watering at frequent intervals. This quantities of stabilising agent applied to the road and
method will be permitted for up to a maximum the volume of material stabilised, and shall make these
period of 24 hours, but one of Methods (ii) or (iii) records available to the Engineer. He shall also monitor
shall be applied as soon as the moisture content of the rate of application when using bulk spreading
the stabilised layer so permits. Work which is not equipment, by taking a canvas patch or tray test every
kept continuously wet or damp but is subjected to 200 metres or as required by the Engineer.
consecutive wet-dry cycles, may be rejected by the
Engineer should he consider the layer to have been All spreader equipment shall be calibrated and
adversely affected. approved by the Engineer before use on the road.
(ii) The stabilised layer shall be covered with the The requirements for testing compaction control shall
material required for the following layer while the be in accordance with SERIES 7000.
stabilised layer is still in a wet or damp condition.
The material forming the protective layer shall be (i) Compaction requirements
watered at such intervals as may be required to The minimum required compacted density for pavement
keep the stabilised layer continuously wet or damp, layers made of natural gravel shall be nominally 97% of
and in dry weather this shall be done at least once MDD BS-heavy compaction.
in every 24 hours.
(j) Defective work or materials
(iii) The stabilised layer shall be covered with a curing Any material or work which does not comply with the
membrane consisting of a spray-grade emulsion or requirements specified shall be removed and replaced
cutback bitumen applied at the rate specified or with new materials or be repaired as specified to
instructed by the Engineer. The provisions of comply with the specified requirements if the Engineer
Section 4100 shall apply with changes as required permits.
to the application of a curing membrane. Cutback
bitumen may be used instead of bitumen emulsion 3804 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
if trials show no adverse effect to the stabilised Construction tolerances and testing shall be in
layer, such as loosening of the surface, and the accordance with SERIES 7000.
result is to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.
No additional payment will be made for curing as

described above, except that the application of a curing
membrane when specified or ordered by the Engineer
(a) General
shall be paid for separately under SECTION 4100.
The curing membrane, where required, shall be paid for
(g) Construction limitations under SECTION 4100. The stabiliser agent shall in all
cases be paid for separately under ITEM 38.03. The
For cemented layers, the stabilising agent shall be
process of stabilisation may be paid for in one of the
applied only to an area of such size that all processing,
two alternative ways given below, as specified in the
watering, compacting and finishing can be completed
Special Specifications and the Bill of Quantities:
within the period given in TABLE 3803/1.

− As an extra-over rate for admixture of the stabiliser breaking down, placing, spreading and mixing the
and curing, where all costs for furnishing the natural stabilising agent, curing the stabilised sections, any
gravel layer has been paid for already under extra water required, and all materials, supervision,
SECTION 3600 or SECTION 3700 of these labour, plant, equipment, tools and incidentals
Specifications as relevant, or compacting, testing the material including the protection
− and maintenance of the layer, all as specified.
as a payment for full cost of providing the material
to be stabilised, admixture of stabiliser, compaction
When payment for overhaul is allowed for in the Special
and curing, however at separate payment for the
Specifications, the rates shall include a free haulage
stabiliser.
distance as defined in SECTION 1600.
(b) Alternative payment as an extra-over rate When payment for overhaul is not allowed for in the
ITEM UNIT transportation of the material.
38.01 CHEMICAL STABILISATION,

EXTRA-OVER THE RELEVANT PAY (d) Payment for the stabiliser agent
ITEM FOR STABILISING
MATERIALS ALREADY PAID FOR ITEM UNIT
UNDER SECTION 3600 OR
38.03 CHEMICAL STABILISER AGENTS:
SECTION 3700
3 (a) SLAKED ROAD LIME TONNE (t)
(a) EARTHWORKS MATERIALS CUBIC METRE (m )
3 (b) ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT TONNE (t)
(b) PAVEMENT MATERIALS CUBIC METRE (m )
(c) PORTLAND BLAST-FURNACE CEMENT TONNE (t)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of (d) MILLED GRANULATED BLAST- TONNE (t)
stabilised material, the quantity of which shall be FURNACE SLAG
determined in accordance with the authorised (e) OTHER STABILISING AGENT (STATE TONNE (t)
dimensions of the layers treated as instructed by the TYPE)
Engineer.
The unit of measurement shall be the tonne of
The bid rates for chemical stabilisation under ITEM
stabilising agent. When mixtures of slag and cement or
38.01 shall be paid as an extra-over the rate bid for
lime are used, the quantity of each constituent shall be
constructing the un-stabilised layers. The bid rate for
measured separately and not the mixture as a whole.
chemical stabilisation shall therefore include full
compensation for spreading and mixing the stabilising
The quantity shall be determined in accordance with the
agent, curing the stabilised sections, any extra water
authorised rate of application within the layer
required, and all materials, supervision, labour, plant,
concerned.
equipment, tools and incidentals (extra over those
provided for in the rates bid for constructing the un-
stabilised layer) necessary for completing the specified
providing the stabilising agent at the Works irrespective
work, but excluding the cost of supplying the stabilising
of the rate of application specified or ordered by the
agent. No distinction shall be made in respect of the
Engineer. The rate for milled granulated blast-furnace
type of stabilising agent used, the time for completion or
slag shall include full compensation for premixing the
the specific layer being stabilised, and the extra over
blast-furnace granulated slag with other stabilising
rate bid shall apply to any combination of these.
agents in the required proportion.
When payment for overhaul is specified in the Special
Specifications, the rates paid for under SECTION 3600 or
3700 shall include a free haulage distance as defined in
SECTION 1600 for the respective layer being stabilised.
When payment for overhaul is not specified in the

(c) Alternative payment as a full cost rate
ITEM UNIT
PAYMENT FOR FULL COST OF
PROVIDING:
3
(a) STABILISED LAYER, MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
CLASS C2
3
(b) STABILISED LAYER, MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
CLASS C1
3
(c) STABILISED LAYER, MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
CLASS CM

stabilised material, the quantity of which shall be
determined in accordance with the authorised
dimensions of the layers treated as instructed by the
Engineer.
The bid rates for chemical stabilisation under ITEM

38.02 shall include full compensation for procuring,
SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT a pug mill or by other suitable means to ensure
compliance with the grading requirements.
(b) Soluble salts
SECTION 3900: CRUSHED The Contractor shall discard the material or fulfil all
requirements for appropriate construction techniques
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE and timing of operations to the satisfaction of the
Engineer if assessments of soluble salt contents in
base course materials show deleterious values. Such
CONTENTS: assessments are only required where the pavement is
CLAUSE PAGE going to receive a bituminous seal as the only
surfacing. No additional payment will be made for any
3901 SCOPE 3000-33 measures taken, nor for any alterations of the material
3902 MATERIALS 3000-33 utilisation, due to presence of soluble salts in materials
3903 CONSTRUCTION 3000-33
or construction water.
3904 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3000-35
3905 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND (c) Material requirements – class CRS
TESTING 3000-35
Materials for base course layers of material class CRS
3906 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3000-35 crushed aggregate as specified on the Drawings shall
meet the requirements for grading given in TABLE
3902/1.
3901 SCOPE (d) Material requirements – class CRR
This Section covers the procuring, furnishing and Materials for base course layers of material class CRR
placing of approved crushed aggregate base course crushed aggregate as specified on the Drawings shall
layers in accordance with the requirements of these meet the requirements for grading given in TABLE
Specifications. 3902/2.
This Section covers the requirements for the following

types of material: 3903 CONSTRUCTION
CRS crushed stone or quarried rock compacted to a
percentage of the maximum dry density of the (a) Preparation of the subbase
material at BS-Heavy compaction, with normal No base course shall be placed until approval is
requirements for workmanship during obtained from the Engineer and the subbase is placed,
construction compacted and finished in accordance with the
CRR crushed, fresh quarried rock compacted to a Specifications and is tested and found acceptable to the
percentage of the apparent density of the rock, full satisfaction of the Engineer. Before placing the base
with enhanced requirements for workmanship course, the subbase shall be inspected and proof rolled
during construction as required by the Engineer in order to establish
whether there is any damage, wet spots or other
defects. Any such defect shall be rectified to the
3902 MATERIALS satisfaction of the Engineer before the next layer is
placed.
(a) Source of material, crushing and screening
Crushed aggregate base course class CRR shall on all
accounts be placed on a cemented subbase.
(i) General
The aggregate used for crushed aggregate course
(b) Shoulders
shall contain no contamination or deleterious
Bitumen surfaced shoulders made with the same base
material such as decomposed rock, clay or shale.
course material as the carriageway shall be the
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures
preferred method for construction of shoulders. Where
to prevent segregation of the material, including
the shoulders are nevertheless to be constructed with a
watering during crushing and screening and any
different material than the carriageway, or where any
other measures required in the opinion of the
other obstruction such as kerbstones could impair
Engineer.
drainage of the base course, all work shall be so
constructed that the base course will be adequately
(ii) CRS class of crushed aggregate
drained at all times during and after construction by
Crushed aggregate class CRS shall be made of
means of sufficient drainage pipes through the
hard, durable and un-weathered fragments made
obstructions or by the use of freely draining materials
by the crushing of stones, boulders, oversize from
passing through shoulders. The Contractor shall not
borrow pits or quarried rock. Minimum 50% by
start constructing the base course of any part of the
mass of particles larger than 5 mm shall have at
road before he has ensured sufficient drainage through
least one crushed face. Maximum 30% by mass of
the shoulders to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
material passing 5 mm can be approved soil fines.
(c) Spreading and mixing
(iii) CRR class of crushed aggregate
Crushed aggregate complying with the requirements
Crushed aggregate class CRR shall be made of
specified above shall be placed in quantities sufficient
hard, durable and un-weathered fragments made
to ensure that the completed layer will comply with all
by the crushing of fresh quarried rock or boulders of
the requirements in regard to layer thickness, level,
minimum 0.3 m diameter. Single stage crushing
cross-section and density. Segregation of the aggregate
shall not be allowed and all particles shall be
during spreading shall be prevented by appropriate
crushed, no soil fines is allowed. If the multi-stage
choice of working method to the satisfaction of the
crushing do not directly and continuously provide
Engineer. Allowance shall be made for sufficient extra
materials complying with the grading requirements
material to enable the layer to be properly trimmed.
specified in Clause 3903(d) the crushed material
shall be screened into a sufficient number of
The maximum nominal compacted thickness of any
fractions and reconstituted and mixed thoroughly in
layer of crushed aggregate base course compacted in

one process shall be 150 mm, unless otherwise CRR crushed aggregate base material shall if so
specified or permitted by the Engineer. instructed in the Special Specifications be laid by an
approved type of self-propelled mechanical spreader
The dumps of material shall be spread out to a flat- and finisher capable of laying to the required widths,
surfaced layer with a thickness which will be suitable for thicknesses, profile, camber or cross-fall, without
mixing. The required quantity of water shall then be causing segregation, dragging or other defects.
added and the material mixed until a homogeneous
mixture is obtained.
TABLE 3902/1
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CRS CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Material properties CML Tests Material class: CRS
Max Liquid limit CML1.2 35
Max Linear Shrinkage CML1.4 4
Grading: CML1.7
Grading limits - CRS
Sieve size (mm) (% passing sieve)
Coarse type Fine type
50 100
37.5 90-100 100
28 75-95 90-100
20 60-90 65-95
10 40-75 40-70
5 29-65 29-52
2 20-45 20-40
1.18 17-40 15-33
0.425 12-31 10-24
0.075 5-12 4-12
Particle strength and shape:
Minimum TFV dry CML2.7 110kN

Ratio dry to soaked value of TFVsoaked shall be minimum 60% of the corresponding TFVdry
TFV CML2.7 value
Maximum flakiness index CML2.4 35%
Minimum field density CML1.9 Nominal value minimum 100% MDD of BS-Heavy compaction
(d) Compaction TABLE 3903/1

COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR BASE COURSE OF
(i) General CRUSHED AGGREGATE
After mixing, the crushed aggregate material shall
be placed to the correct thickness and level and Material class Minimum dry density,
thoroughly compacted by suitable equipment so specified nominal value.
that the specified density is obtained throughout the
entire layer. CRS 100% of BS-Heavy CML test 1.9
88% of the aggregate’s
The finally compacted layer shall be free from CRR
apparent density CML test 2.2
surface laminations, portions exhibiting segregation
of the fine and coarse aggregate, corrugations, or The Engineer may allow that the BS-Heavy
other defects that may adversely affect the compaction is used as reference value for class
performance of the layer. CRR materials. In such case the minimum nominal
field density requirement shall be 104% MDD of
(ii) Compaction requirements BS-Heavy.
The minimum required compacted density for
pavement layers made of crushed aggregate shall Compaction method specifications shall not be
be as given in TABLE 3903/1. The Contractor’s used for compaction control of crushed aggregate
attention is drawn to the high density requirements base course.
for class CRR materials and the required high
standards of workmanship necessary to achieve (iii) Processing of class CRR materials
these on site. Class CRR shall be slushed as described herein to
achieve the required field density. After completion
of the compaction described above, short sections
of the surface shall be thoroughly watered, rolled

and slushed by means of steel-wheeled rollers with The slushing process shall be carried out on each
a mass of not less than 12 tonnes each, or with section in one continuous process, and each
pneumatic-tyre rollers. The process shall continue section shall be completed before the next is
until all excess fines are brought to the surface. The proceeded.
grout thus formed shall be uniformly broomed over The completed layer shall be firm and stable with a
the surface with stiff brooms to correct any areas closely-knit surface of aggregate exposed in mosaic
still deficient in fines. whereupon the excess fines and free from nests of segregated material,
shall be broomed from the surface of the layer. This laminations or corrugations.
process shall continue until all excess fines in the
mixture have been brought to the surface of the Excess crushed aggregate shall not be spread over
layer and its specified density has been reached. the shoulders or side fills, but shall be loaded and
Excess fines and loose aggregate shall then be removed from the road. It shall not be re-used
swept from the surface while the surface is still unless it has been re-screened, re-tested and again
damp. The layer shall then receive final rolling with approved for use. It shall not be mixed with
pneumatic-tyre rollers and the layer shall then be approved material unless screened, tested and
allowed to dry out. During slushing operations, care again approved for use on its own.
shall be taken not to roll the surface out of shape.
TABLE 3902/2
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CRR CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Material properties CML Tests Material class: CRR
Max Liquid limit CML1.2 30
Max Linear Shrinkage CML1.4 3
Grading: CML1.7
Grading limits - CRR
Sieve size (mm) (% passing sieve)
Coarse type Fine type
37.5 100
28 87-97 100
20 75-90 87-97
10 52-68 62-77
5 38-55 44-62
2 23-40 27-45
1.18 18-33 22-38
0.425 11-24 13-27
0.075 4-12 5-12
Particle strength and shape
Minimum TFV dry CML2.7 110kN
TFV CML2.7 TFVsoaked shall be minimum 75% of the corresponding TFVdry value
Maximum flakiness index CML2.4 35%

Minimum field density CML2.2 Nominal value minimum 88% the aggregate’s apparent density 2)
2) The Engineer may allow that the BS-Heavy compaction is used as reference value with a minimum nominal field
density requirement of 104% MDD of BS-Heavy.
3904 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3906 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The Contractor shall protect and maintain the
completed layer at his own expense until the surfacing ITEM UNIT
is applied. Maintenance shall include the immediate 39.01 CRUSHED AGGREGATE
repair of any damage to or defects in the layer and shall FOR BASE COURSE:
be repeated as often as is necessary. Repairs shall be
so made as to ensure an even and uniform surface to (a) CRUSHED AGGREGATE CLASS CUBIC METRE
3
be restored after completion of the repair work. Traffic CRS (m )
shall not be allowed directly on any un-primed crushed (b) CRUSHED AGGREGATE CLASS CUBIC METRE
3
aggregate layer unless so authorised or directed by the CRR (m )
Engineer.
The quantity of crushed aggregate shall be the number
3905 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND of cubic metres completed in place compacted to the
TESTING depths and widths shown on the Drawings or as
The completed crushed aggregate layer shall comply directed. The quantity shall be measured by the cross
with construction tolerances and testing requirements section area shown on the construction drawings times
specified in SERIES 7000. the station length.
procuring, placing, compacting, slushing as required

and testing the material including the protection and

maintenance of the layer, all as specified.
The bid rate shall also include full compensation for the
provision and erection of the crusher ready for crushing,
its later dismantling and removal after completion of the
crushing operations, and the work involved in opening
the quarry, including clearing, establishing a working
face, and finishing-off the quarry area upon completion
of the operations.
The rates shall include for all transportation of the

material, no overhaul will be paid.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 SERIES 4000 - BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND SEALS
SERIES 4000
BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND SEALS
SECTION PAGE
4100 PRIME AND CURING MEMBRANES 4000-2
4200 BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE AND
ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACINGS 4000-9
4300 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SEALS 4000-22
4400 SINGLE SURFACE DRESSINGS 4000-32
4500 DOUBLE SURFACE DRESSINGS 4000-35
4600 OTTA SEALS 4000-38
4700 SAND SEALS AND SLURRY 4000-41
4800 SURFACING OF BRIDGE DECKS 4000-44
4900 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS,
PATCHING, REPAIRING EDGE BREAKS
AND CRACK SEALING 4000-45

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
SERIES 1000 GENERAL
APPENDICES

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND − Binder distributor. See SUBCLAUSES 4103(b), (c)
SEALS and (d).
− Water sprinkler. The water sprinkler shall have
efficient spray equipment, capable of spraying a
SECTION 4100: PRIME AND uniform film of water over the whole area to be
primed.
CURING MEMBRANES − Rotary broom. The rotary broom shall be self-
propelled or supplied together with a suitable
pneumatic tyred towing vehicle.
CONTENTS:
− Other equipment such as compressors, hand
CLAUSE PAGE brooms, reinforced paper for joints, string, nails and
4101 SCOPE 4000-2 all other ancillary equipment as required to carry out
4102 MATERIALS 4000-2 the operation efficiently and neatly.
4103 EQUIPMENT 4000-2
4104 WEATHER AND OTHER LIMITATIONS 4000-7 (b) Equipment for heating bituminous materials
4105 PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE The equipment for heating bituminous materials shall
PRIMED OR TO RECEIVE A CURING be of adequate capacity to heat the material properly by
MEMBRANE 4000-7 circulating steam or hot oil through the coils and/or the
4106 APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT OR jacket of a tank or by circulating the bituminous material
CURING MEMBRANE 4000-7 around a system of heated coils or pipes or other
4107 MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC 4000-7 approved means.
4108 TOLERANCES 4000-8
4109 TESTING 4000-8 The heating device shall be so constructed that it will
4110 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4000-8 prevent the direct flame from a burner from striking the
surface of the coils, pipes, or jacket through which the
bituminous material is circulated. The heating device
shall be operated in a manner that will not injure the
bituminous material. The use of any equipment for the
4101 SCOPE agitation of bituminous material to aid in heating will be
This Section covers the application of a bituminous prohibited if it injures or in any way changes the
prime to a prepared pavement layer. This Section also characteristics of the bituminous material or introduces
covers the application of a bituminous curing membrane free steam or moisture into the tank containing the
to a prepared pavement layer made of a cemented bituminous material.
material.
Tank car or truck connections for transferring
bituminous material from tank cars to distributors,
4102 MATERIALS supply tanks, or storage tanks shall be so constructed
that they cannot be used for any other purpose. The
(a) Material for priming use of a tank car or truck connection or any other
The priming material shall be one of the following as equipment by means of which free steam can be
specified or directed by the Engineer, complying with introduced directly into the bituminous material as a
the given relevant material specification or equivalent means of agitation or auxiliary heating shall not be
standards approved by the Engineer: permitted.
− MC-30 cut-back bitumen complying with AASHTO
designation M82-75
− MC-70 cut-back bitumen complying with AASHTO (c) Bitumen distributors
designation M82-75
− Invert bitumen emulsion complying with SABS 1260 (i) General
The distributor vehicle shall be a self-propelled
(b) Aggregate for blinding vehicle mounted distributor of nominal tank capacity
The aggregate used for blinding the sprayed surface not less than 2,000 nor more than 20,000 litres,
shall consist of crushed rock or river sand, with equipped with a spray bar with a width of not less
minimum 85% passing the 6.3 mm sieve and no than 3.5 metres, nor more than 6.0 metres.
particles larger than 10 mm. The aggregate shall be
clean and shall contain no clay, loam or other The spray rate of the bitumen must be controlled by
deleterious matter and shall have no excessive one of the following methods:
contents of fines in the opinion of the Engineer. Type A: Controlling the pressure constant in the
spray bar and precisely controlling the
(c) Material for curing membranes speed of the vehicle.
Curing membranes for cemented pavement layers shall
be made of bitumen emulsion or as specified or Type B: Using a metering bitumen pump, precisely
directed by the Engineer. Bitumen emulsion shall controlling the speed of the pump to give
comply with the relevant requirement: AASHTO constant output, and precisely controlling
designations M140-88 or M208-96 or equivalent the speed of the vehicle.
standards approved by the Engineer. Cutback bitumen, Type C: Using a metering bitumen pump driven at a
MC30 or MC70 complying with AASHTO designation speed proportional to the road speed of the
M82-75 or equivalent standard approved by the vehicle, the vehicle being controlled to
Engineer, may be used on approval of the Engineer within 5% of a predetermined speed.
provided there is no detrimental effect to the cemented
layer. The exhausts of all motors on the vehicle shall be
directed so that fumes do not reach driver or
operator and there is no danger of sparks from the
4103 EQUIPMENT exhausts coming into contact with fumes or
materials coming from the overflow pipe or any
(a) General other inflammable material.
The following equipment shall be available and in good
working order: Self propelled distributors shall have sufficient
engine torque to maintain the steady speeds
required for any application rate between 0.4 and This burner equipment must not be operated while
2.7 litres per square metre on an ascending grade the vehicle is loading or unloading or is in transit or
of 10% when fully laden. when the level of bitumen in the tank is below the
warning mark on the dipstick”.
Self propelled distributors shall be equipped with a
guide arm with suitable pointer and chain, to assist Alternative methods of heating the bituminous
the sprayer driver in following the correct line. The material, with or without heating tubes, may be
guide arm shall be mounted on driver’s side of the applied on approval of the Engineer, provided the
vehicle, forward of, and in full view of the driver, and above levels of performance are achieved.
shall be marked and numbered relative to the spray
bar nozzles. (iv) Thermometers
The tank shall be fitted with a thermometer located
so as to accurately indicate the temperature of the
(ii) Distributor Tanks material as it is sprayed. A second thermometer
shall be fitted as close as possible to the heating
(1) Construction line, near the other end of the tank. The
The tank shall be structurally sound, securely thermometers shall be of dial type, located so that
attached to and positively located on the they can be read conveniently without parallax
distributor vehicle. No part of the tank or its error. The thermometer dials shall read in
fittings shall leak when filled with hot bitumen. increments of not more than 5°C and shall include a
range of at least 70°C to 200°C over a scale
(2) Insulation distance based on 0-200°C of at least 150 mm. The
The tank shall be covered with suitable non- thermometer assemblies shall be readily removable
combustible insulation of adequate thickness. for checking and shall be accurate to within +5°C.
The insulating material shall be firmly secured
so that it does not move in use and protected (v) Speed Control
by a strong waterproof sheathing. Distributors shall be fitted with a dial type road
speed indicator. The speed indicator shall be
The temperature of a full load of bitumen, at an positioned near the driver’s line of sight to the guide
initial temperature (measured 30 minutes after arm. The dial indicator shall be mounted so that it
0
loading) of 150 C, in an ambient temperature of can be read without parallax error by the driver of
15-20°C, shall not fall by more than the rates the distributor.
listed below for self propelled distributors:
The speed indicator shall comply with the
Load at Rest: 10°C/4 hours requirements for an Industrial class 1.5 tachometer
to British Standard 3403:1972. The indicator scale
(3) Circulatory System shall be calibrated in suitable metric units, marked
A system capable of circulating and thoroughly in increments corresponding to a change in speed
mixing the contents over the full length of the of not more than 5%, with not less than 3 mm
sprayer tank shall be provided. spacing between such markings. The road speed
indicator shall be operated from a separate
(4) Dipstick retractable wheel attached to the distributor. The
The tank shall be provided with a dipstick of tyre of the wheel shall be at least 300 mm diameter
rigid construction. It must be mounted in the and constructed of either solid rubber or
centre of the tank, must hang from a ‘T’ piece permanently inflated rubber.
so that wear can be detected and must not
touch the bottom of the tank. A guide shall be For Type C distributors a revolution counter or
provided to hold the dipstick in a vertical speedometer operated by the transmission may be
position as it is withdrawn and surging of substituted, provided that the mounting and
bituminous material as the dipstick is lowered. accuracy of the instrument comply with this clause.
The dipstick shall be graduated in litres, in
increments not more than 50 litres. Where the
spacing between any two markings is less than (vi) Pumping system
10mm, an alternative method of indicating the
load quantity shall be provided. (1) General Requirements
The pumping system, comprising the pump and
The dipstick shall be marked at the level below its associated valves and pipe network, shall be
which heating equipment shall not be used, this capable of the following operations:
level shall be at least 150mm above the highest − Loading and unloading bituminous
part of the heating tubes or elements. materials:
It shall be possible to empty the tank by
(iii) Heating Equipment either the distributor’s own pump or by
The distributor shall be provided with heating tubes gravity flow.
and burners capable of maintaining the material in − Mixing bituminous materials in the tank by
the tank at a steady temperature of up to 190°C, circulation:
and also of raising it from 135°C to 175°C in not The circulation pipe inside the tank shall
more than 4 hours when the ambient temperature is have suitably designed orifices so that the
15°C to 20°C and the tank is fully loaded. The flow of bituminous material into each baffled
heating tubes shall have a slight upward slope compartment is proportional to the volume
away from the burners. No part of the tubes or their of the compartment divided by the total
flues shall pass through the vapour space above volume of the tank.
the bituminous material. Flue outlets shall be fitted
with spark arresters. The burners and their controls The pump shall have sufficient capacity when
shall be so arranged as to avoid the necessity for operating on the tank circulate mode to show
the operator to be directly behind the heating tubes turbulent mixing in each baffled compartment.
when operating the burners. A legible red warning The mixing efficiency shall initially be assessed
sign shall be attached near the burners bearing the by observation through the manhole when the
wording: tank is at least 30% full.

The following test may be used to determine (3) Pump Drive

mixing efficiency when the distributor does not The binder pump drive shall be capable of
comply with the inspections above. driving the pump without appreciable pulsation
or vibration.
Mixing efficiency shall be such that if 25 parts
by volume of lighting kerosene and 100 parts of Where a separate engine drives the pump, the
80/100 bitumen are added separately to the engine shall be fitted with an efficient governor
tank and circulation is undertaken for 20 capable of maintaining the engine at a steady
minutes, with the pump operating at not more speed without “hunting”, and shall be capable of
than 80% of its output when spraying with the controlling the spray pump shaft revolutions
full width of the spray bar, the amount of lighting within +2.5% of the predetermined spraying
kerosene in any sample taken from the output speed within the full operating range.
of the pump as the tank is pumped out shall be
within the limits of 22 and 28 parts per hundred In the case of type (C) sprayers (single engine
parts of bitumen. for propulsion and spraying), the transmission
− Positively emptying the complete pumping between the engine and the pump shall be
and spraying systems of bituminous capable of being adjusted to different ratios. At
materials without requiring the tank to be any selected coupling ratio, the pump output
emptied. These systems shall also be shall vary with the road speed in such a manner
capable of draining by gravity. that for an increase of 20% above a selected
− Flushing the pumping and spraying road speed, the pump output will be between
systems with light oil without the oil entering 16% and 24% greater than the output at the
the tank. selected speed. In like manner, for a decrease
of 20% in road speed, the pump output shall be
In none of the above operations shall significant between 16% and 24% less than the output at
amounts of bituminous materials be permitted the selected speed.
to fall through the vapour space of the tank. No
part of the pumping or spraying system shall (4) Strainers
leak bituminous material under any A strainer must be provided in the pump suction
circumstances. line and/or the pump output line. It must be
easily removable for cleaning and designed so
(2) Pump output that all the bitumen flow will pass through it.
The pump outlet shall have a steady non- The maximum mesh orifice size shall be not
pulsating discharge. Where flat fan type spray greater than 3 mm and the total area of the
nozzles are used, the design and operating orifices shall not be less than seven times the
procedures of the distributor shall be such that, cross sectional area of the pipe in which the
when the spray bar is used to apply any strainer is fitted.
application rate on spray width within the limits
specified the total spray output shall meet the (5) By-pass and relief valves
following requirements, without recourse to Where a by-pass valve is used for controlling
pump system adjustments while spraying. the pressure and the discharge from the
sprayer, it shall be capable of smoothly and
Type (A) and Type (B) distributors shall be uniformly varying the quantity of material by-
operated so that the mean spray output per passed in order to maintain the required
nozzle for any width of spray shall not differ by pressure in the spray bar. It shall be capable of
more than 5 percent from the optimal value by-passing not less than 25% of the maximum
recommended by the distributor manufacturer. output of the pump.
Type (C) distributors (i.e. pump speed Means shall be provided to prevent excessively
proportional to vehicle speed) shall be operated high pressures, due to blockages or other
in accordance with a spraying table that defines causes, from damaging the pumping system.
the vehicle speeds for all application rates and Where relief valves are used, they shall be set
the pump speeds for all bar widths which to a pressure not less than 80% more than the
correspond to the optimal output per spray recommended spraying pressure. Provision
nozzle recommended by the manufacturer. shall be made for checking the operating
pressure of these valves.
For type (B) and type (C) distributors, the total
pump outputs shall be delivered through the
spray nozzles, for all spray widths. (vii) Spraying equipment
The mean output of sprayed binder per (1) Pump Revolution Counter
revolution of the metering binder pump, for any A revolution per minute counter of an approved
pump output rate in the operating range, shall type shall be fitted to show the speed of the
not differ by more than 5 percent from the mean pump shaft. The instrument shall be calibrated
output per revolution when spraying with the full in revolutions per minute and marked at
width of the spray bar. intervals of not more than 5% of the full
operating range which shall occupy a scale
For all distributors, spraying any particular distance of not less than 150 mm. The
spray width in the operating range, the pump instrument shall comply with the requirements
output measured over any 60 second period for an Industrial Class 1.5 tachometer to British
shall not vary by more than +2.5% from the Standard 3403:1972.
mean output over three such 60 second periods
spraying the same width, where the controls are A digital tachometer of similar accuracy may be
moved and then reset and the level of binder in used where the instrument exhibits suitable
the tank is varied between each measurement. damping characteristics and the displayed
increments are not more than 5% of the full
operating range.

Where an accumulating pump revolution Operation of the transverse movement

counter is fitted, it shall be calibrated in pump control shall not cause any associated
revolutions and shall be accurate to +2.5% over rotating movements of the bar. Any
the full range of pump speeds. It must have a associated vertical movements shall be less
reset and start control that may be interlocked than +5 mm.
with the spray controls so that the number of
pump shaft revolutions can be recorded for any The spray bar shall be mounted on the
spray run. sprayer in such a manner that the nozzle
tips are maintained within plus and minus
(2) Pressure Gauge 10% of the optimum height recommended
A pressure gauge complying with BS 1780 by the distributor manufacturer irrespective
‘Bourdon Tube Pressure and Vacuum Gauges of the loading of the sprayer. The maximum
Part 2 Metric Units’ shall be fitted. Type (A) height of the bar shall in no case exceed
distributors (constant pressure type) shall be 325 mm.
fitted with an Industrial Class I gauge of not less
than 100 mm nominal size. Hinged extensions and bar height
adjustments shall incorporate positive stops
All other types of distributors shall be fitted with and locks, non positive adjustment means
an Industrial Class I or II gauge of not less than such as chains, cables or pneumatic or
100 mm nominal size. hydraulic rams shall not be deemed
sufficient.
The gauge shall be fitted so as to measure the
pressure in the spray bar and shall be mounted (4) Spray Nozzles
so that it is protected from heat and vibration in − General
accordance with BS 1780 Part 2. The working Spray nozzles shall be of the flat fan (slot)
fluid in the bourdon tube shall be isolated from type and apart from any approved special
the bituminous material by a suitable pressure end nozzles shall be of similar construction
transmitting device mounted so that all material and interchangeable. Nozzles shall be
in the device is maintained at a minimum mounted with their flow axes vertical and so
temperature of not more than 40°C below that that all nozzle tips are within 3 mm of a
of the main material flow. The gauge shall be straight line parallel with the rear axle of the
protected from both pressure pulsations and vehicle. The nozzles shall be spaced at
steady pressures exceeding 120% of its range. intervals of not more than 110 mm and no
The maximum scale value of the gauge shall be spacing shall vary more than +1.5 mm from
approximately twice the normal bar spraying the mean spacing. All nozzles except end
pressure. nozzles must be mounted with the slots in
the nozzles at the same horizontal angle.
(3) Spray bar At least 1 spare nozzle shall be carried for
− Length: every 5 mounted on the spray bar.
The length of the spray bar, defined as the
distance between centres of the two The construction and mounting of the
extreme end nozzles, shall comply with the sprayer shall be such that all nozzles are
requirements of SUBCLAUSE 4103(c)(i) positively and rigidly set and maintained.
Plain screwed connections must not be
− Circulation and Check Valves: used unless supplemented by some
The bar shall be of the fully circulating type, positive locking device, mark or approved
in which the bituminous material is pumped adjustment tool or gauge to ensure that the
from the tank through the full length of the correct alignment is maintained.
spray bar in use, and returned to the tank
while the valves controlling the individual − End Nozzles:
spray nozzles are closed. The spray An end nozzle or other approved means
nozzles in the bar shall be controlled by a shall be provided to reduce the cut off spray
linkage or other means which shall open or taper at the road shoulder edge of the spray
close the check valves of all nozzles bar to comply with SUBCLAUSE 4103(b)(viii).
equally, simultaneously, and fully, and Where used, three such end nozzles (1
which shall be capable of being operated by spare, 2 on the spray bar) shall be carried
an operator positioned at the rear of the on the distributor.
vehicle with a clear view of all parts of the
spray bar. A check valve shall be provided (5) Hand spray equipment
for each nozzle for at least the 10 nozzles Approved hand spray equipment shall be
nearest one end of the spray bar. For the provided. This equipment shall be suitable for
remainder of the bar, two spray nozzles operation at a pressure of 6.0 bar but must be
may be controlled by a single check valve if capable of withstanding a minimum test
desired. Each check valve shall be readily pressure of 20 bar and a temperature of 205°C.
disconnected from the master control and
operated independently.
(viii) Performance requirements
− Extensions and Transverse Slew:
Spray bars fitted to self propelled (1) Definitions
distributors shall be fitted with readily − SIGNIFICANT WIDTH:
removable or foldable extension sections to The significant width of spray shall be the
enable the bar to be reduced to less than whole sprayed width.
2.5 m and shall be capable of spraying
when shortened. These bars shall also be − EFFECTIVE WIDTH:
capable of being moved at least 400 mm The effective width of spray shall be the
transversely while spraying, such significant width less the permitted spray
movement being readily controlled by an taper widths specified below.
operator at the rear of the vehicle. − SPRAY TAPER WIDTH:
The spray taper width shall be the portion of − The amount of binder sprayed onto any
spray fan width, at either edge of the length of 50 mm within the effective length
significant width, that is overlapped by a shall not differ by more than 10% from the
lower number of spray fans than an average binder application over the
equivalent sprayed width within the effective length.
effective width. − The effective length shall be the full
− END NOZZLE TAPER: sprayed length less 500 mm from each end.
The spray taper width shall be deemed to − The full intensity of spray application shall
be 150 mm when an end nozzle or an be reached or cut-off within a length of
approved equivalent is used. travel of the sprayer not exceeding 500
mm.
− END TAPER WITHOUT AN END NOZZLE:
The spray taper width shall be deeded to be (5) Widths of spray
200 mm when an end nozzle or an In the case of self propelled distributors, the
approved equivalent is not used. application rates and uniformity requirements
specified above shall be met when any set of
(2) Rate of Application six or more adjacent nozzles are operated up to
Distributors shall be capable of applying and including the full bar width.
bituminous material evenly and uniformly to the
road surface at any required temperature not (6) Calibration and check of distributors
exceeding 190°C and at any rate of application All distributors shall be calibrated and checked
required in the range 0.4 to 2.7 litres per square to demonstrate compliance with this
metre. specification before being used on the Work.
The calibration testing of the distributor will be
The distributor shall be capable of achieving done by the Contractor in the presence of the
these spray rates at vehicle speeds not Engineer by the method prescribed by the
exceeding 25 km/hr. manufacturer and/or as directed by the
Engineer. When the test results confirm
(3) Transverse distribution compliance of the Equipment with this
− Within the range of application rates stated Specification the Contractor shall submit a
above, transverse uniformity requirements, written record of the calibration testing to the
specified in terms of the amounts of Engineer for approval.
bituminous binder applied to successive 50
mm widths, are as follows: A certificate of approval will be given to the
− The amount of bituminous material sprayed distributor operator by the Engineer, showing
on to any width of 50 mm within the the record of the calibration and check. This
effective width shall not differ by more than certificate shall be kept in the distributor at all
20% from the average application over the times and shall be available to the Engineer or
effective width. Inspector in charge on each location on which
− The mean amount of bituminous material the distributor is used. This certificate may be
sprayed on to any four adjacent widths of revoked at any time due to unsatisfactory
50 mm shall not differ by more than 12% performance of the distributor and will be
from the average application over the returned only when satisfactory repairs or
effective width. adjustments have been made. Failure to
− The effective width shall be divided into present the certificate will necessitate a re-
three approximately equal sections. The check and if deemed necessary, a re-calibration
mean amount of bituminous material per 50 of the distributor before it can be used on the
mm width sprayed on any one section shall Works. The Contractor shall furnish at his own
not vary by more than five percent from that expense all necessary equipment, materials
on any other section. and assistance necessary for the calibration.
− End Nozzle Taper:
− The amount of bituminous binder sprayed The operation of the distributor will be checked
onto any 50 mm width within the end nozzle by the Engineer the first time it is used and as
taper shall be less than 120% of the often as he deems it necessary thereafter, and
average application over the effective width. when the operation is found to be satisfactory, a
In addition the mean amount of bituminous new certificate will be issued by the Engineer.
material sprayed onto the 3 adjacent 50
mm widths immediately outside the (d) Equipment for preparation of bituminous
effective width shall be greater than 50% of material
the average application over the effective Tanks for the storage of bituminous material shall be
width. equipped to heat and hold the material at the required
− End Taper without an end Nozzle: temperatures. The heating shall be accomplished by
− The mean amount of bituminous material steam coils, electricity, hot oil coils or other approved
sprayed onto the four adjacent 50 mm means so that the flame shall not be in contact with the
widths within this taper shall be between tank. The circulating system for the bituminous material
40% and 60% of the average application shall be designed to ensure proper and continuous
over the effective width. In addition the circulation during the operating period. Provision shall
amount of bituminous material on each 50 be made for measuring and sampling storage tanks.
mm width, within the taper, shall be less Storage tanks shall have sufficient capacity to provide
than the amount on the adjacent 50 mm for continuous operation. The storage tanks shall be
width that is closer to the effective width. calibrated and equipped with a device whereby the
Engineer may determine the amount of bituminous
(4) Longitudinal Distribution material on hand at any time.
Within the range of application rates stated
above, longitudinal uniformity requirements
specified in terms of the amounts of bituminous
binder applied to 50 mm lengths are as follows:

4104 WEATHER AND OTHER LIMITATIONS TABLE 4106/1

TEMPERATURES FOR STORING AND SPRAYING PRIME OR
(i) General CURING MEMBRANES
The Engineer's decision on whether or not to apply
the curing membrane or prime coat under specific Type of Maximum storage Spraying
conditions shall be final. prime or temperature (0C ) tempe-
curing Up to 24 Over 24 rature
(ii) Prime membrane hrs hrs range
No prime shall be applied under the following (0C)
adverse conditions; Cut-back
− during foggy or wet conditions; bitumens:
− when rain is imminent; MC-30 65 30 45-60
− when wind is blowing sufficiently hard to cause MC-70 80 50 60-80
uneven spraying;
− when the surface of the layer is visibly wet, i.e. Bitumen ambient ambient ambient
more than damp; emulsions above
0
− before sunrise; (all types) 10 C
− after sunset;
All cutback bitumen stored in a heated condition shall
− when at any position the moisture content of the
be stored in a container with a properly functioning
base layer is more than 50% of the optimum
circulation system and having a securely fitting lid.
moisture content as determined by the
Engineer
The rate of application shall be as directed by the
− when the layer is soft, i.e. sponging under load;
Engineer after trial applications to short sections.
(iii) Curing membranes for cemented layers
The total width of the sprayed surface shall be as
No curing membrane shall be applied under the
shown on the Drawings or as prescribed by the
adverse conditions as decided by the Engineer.
Engineer, and the edges of the sprayed surface shall be
Curing membranes shall be applied within the time
parallel to the centreline of the road.
limits given in the Special Specifications for the
respective layer and type of cemented material.
The bituminous material shall be applied in one or more
lanes evenly over the full width of the road and allowed
4105 PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE to cure until traffic can pass over the surface without the
PRIMED OR TO RECEIVE A CURING wheels picking up the bituminous material. All traffic
MEMBRANE shall be kept off the surface until this condition is
Prior to prime coat application, the Contractor shall obtained.
carry out the necessary field trials to allow the Engineer
to check the methods of surface preparation and the Where no convenient detour is available for traffic,
performance of the pressure distributor and to establish operation shall be confined to one half the roadway
the exact rate of application and the application width at a time. The Contractor shall provide proper
temperatures of the bituminous material. traffic control so that vehicles may proceed without
damage to the primed area.
Not longer than 24 hours before spraying, the layer to
be sprayed shall be cleaned of all loose or deleterious Where it is not feasible for traffic to use deviations, the
material by means of a rotary broom, hand brooms, bituminous material shall be applied and allowed to
compressed air or as required to the satisfaction of the cure for as long as is practicable in the opinion of the
Engineer. Sweeping shall be done carefully so as not to Engineer before a blinding layer of aggregate is applied
3 2
cause any damage to the layer. A light spray of water, at a rate of 0.004 m /m or as directed by the Engineer.
sufficient to dampen the surface. shall be uniformly Care shall be exercised in this operation to avoid the
applied to the layer immediately before the application aggregate being applied too soon after spraying the
of the prime. If the water is over applied the layer shall bituminous material. Where practicable two to four
be allowed to dry until a uniform damp surface is hours shall elapse as directed by the Engineer. Any
obtained. "caking" of aggregate which may take place and cause
problems during the surfacing process and all loose
Before any material is applied, the layer to be sprayed aggregate shall be removed before the final surfacing is
shall be checked by the Engineer for compliance with commenced.
the surface and other requirements specified. Any
sections not complying with the specified requirements If the bituminous material is applied in more than one
shall be corrected as specified in CLAUSE 1218. strip, allowance shall be made for overlapping of strips
by 100 mm. No additional payment will be made for the
overlapping strips.
4106 APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT OR
CURING MEMBRANE Care shall be taken to protect all kerbing and guttering,
A minimum of 1.0m of reinforced paper or other suitable guard rails and channelling from the bituminous
approved material shall be used at all joints at the material by covering them with a suitable protective
beginning and end of all sprays in order to obtain a neat material when spraying. The Contractor shall, at his
start and cut-off. own cost, replace all soiled items which cannot be
properly cleaned. Painting the soiled surfaces will not
The temperatures for storage and spraying shall be in be accepted as a suitable remedial measure.
accordance with TABLE 4106/1.
4107 MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO
TRAFFIC
The Contractor shall maintain the prime coat until the
next course is applied. Care shall be taken that the
application of bituminous material is not in excess of the
specified amounts; any excess shall be blotted. All
areas inaccessible to the distributor shall be sprayed

manually using the device for hand spraying from the ITEM UNIT
distributor. 41.03 AGGREGATE FOR CUBIC METRE
3
BLINDING: (m )
Where a blinding layer has been applied to the sprayed
surface, the Contractor shall maintain the blinding layer
and the sprayed surface during the period when the The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
surface is opened to traffic, and shall repair all damage aggregate used for blinding the prime coat on the
caused to the blinding layer or the sprayed surface by instruction of the Engineer.
such traffic, as directed by the Engineer, at no
additional payment to the Contractor. The bid rate shall include full compensation for
procuring, furnishing and applying the aggregate for
If it is desired to pass traffic for a period in order to blinding where directed by the Engineer, and for
show up any weak spots in the foundation, the rate of maintenance of the blinding layer, as specified.
application of prime coat may be increased as ordered
by the Engineer and the treated areas shall be blinded
with rock crusher dust or coarse sand at the
approximate rate of 0.004 m³/m².
4108 TOLERANCES
The actual spray rates measured at spraying
temperature shall not deviate from the required spray
rate as specified or ordered by the Engineer by more
2
than 0.10 l/m . The average spray rate shall not be less
than the required spray rate as specified or ordered by
the Engineer calculated over any area of the work
determined by the Engineer.
The sprayed surface shall nowhere be narrower than

the specified edge line.
4109 TESTING
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours
notice of his intention to apply prime or curing
membranes so that the actual spray rates can be
verified and approved by the Engineer. Unless
otherwise agreed in advance the Contractor shall only
spray when the Engineer or his representative is
present and approval of the Engineer has been
obtained.

ITEM UNIT
41.01 PRIME COAT:
(a) MC-30 CUT-BACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
(b) MC-70 CUT-BACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
(c) INVERT BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE LITRES (l)
TYPE AND BITUMEN CONTENT)
ITEM UNIT
41.02 BITUMINOUS CURING
MEMBRANE:
(a) MC-30 CUT-BACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
(c) BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE TYPE AND LITRES (l)
BITUMEN CONTENT)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of bituminous

material measured at spraying temperature and
sprayed as specified. The area of bituminous prime
coat application shall be measured by station length
along the centreline of the roadway for the length
multiplied by the width as shown on the plans or
directed by the Engineer.

supplying the bituminous material, cleaning and
watering the layer to be sprayed as required, applying
the bituminous material and maintaining the sprayed
surface as specified.

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND a manner whereby it is used in the order in which it has
SEALS been received.
The Contractor shall, as often as necessary, test and

SECTION 4200: BITUMINOUS control the materials produced by himself or the
materials received by him from suppliers to ensure that
BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT the materials always comply with the specified
requirements.
CONCRETE SURFACING
The Contractor will not be expected to construct layers
CONTENTS: of which the compacted layer thickness is less than one
and a half times the maximum aggregate size.
CLAUSE PAGE
4201 SCOPE 9
4202 MATERIALS 9 (b) Bituminous binders
4203 COMPOSITION OF MIXTURES FOR
BITUMINOUS BASE COURSENG 13 (i) General
4204 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 13 The various bituminous binders specified shall
4205 GENERAL LIMITATIONS AND comply with the relevant specifications as stated in
REQUIREMENTS AND THE STOCKPILING TABLE 4202/1 or equivalent standards according to
OF MIXED MATERIAL 15 the Special Specifications and on the approval of
4206 PRODUCING AND TRANSPORTING THE the Engineer:
MIXTURE 16
4207 SPREADING THE MIXTURE 17
4208 JOINTS 18 TABLE 4202/1
4209 COMPACTION 18 SPECIFICATIONS FOR BITUMINOUS BINDERS
4210 LAYING TRIAL SECTIONS 19
4211 PROTECTION AND AFTERCARE 19 Type of binder Specification
4212 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND Penetration grade AASHTO designation
FINISH REQUIREMENTS 19 bitumen M20-70
4213 TESTING 20 Cutback bitumen AASHTO designation
4214 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 20 M82-75
Bitumen emulsions, AASHTO designation
anionic M140-88
Bitumen emulsions, AASHTO designation
4201 SCOPE cationic M208-96
This Section covers all the work in connection with the
construction of bituminous base courses and asphalt Representative test certificates showing all relevant
concrete surfacing for new roads, pavement properties of the adhesion agent and bitumen shall
rehabilitation or maintenance. It includes the procuring be submitted for approval of the Engineer. Such
and furnishing of aggregate and bituminous binder, certificates shall be submitted minimum 28 days prior
mixing at a central mixing plant, alternatively on the to proposed use or as required by the Engineer to
road, spreading and compaction of the mixture, all as conduct further testing of the materials. Samples of
specified for the construction of: the materials shall be submitted together with the test
− Continuously graded asphalt concrete surfacing results if required by the Engineer. New test
(AC20, AC14, AC10); certificates and samples shall be provided for
− Hot mixed bituminous base course (DBM40, approval in the event of changes in type or source of
DBM30, LAMBS); adhesion agent, bitumen grade, crude oil source,
− Cold mixed bituminous base course (FBMIX, refinery plant or refinery method, or as deemed
BEMIX); necessary by the Engineer.
− Penetration macadam base course (PM80, PM60,
PM30). (ii) Additional requirements for foamed bitumen
In addition to the general requirements stated in this
SUBCLAUSE foamed bitumen shall meet the
This Section also covers the widening of bituminous
following requirements when tested using a 10 litre
layers.
cylindrical bucket:
This Section also covers the recycling of bituminous
The ratio between the volume of the bitumen in a
materials by reprocessing recovered materials, adding
foamed state and in an un-foamed state shall be
fresh aggregate, bituminous binders and other agents
minimum 15.
for obtaining a bituminous mix, which will comply with
the specified requirements, and placing the recycled
At least one of the following requirements shall be
material. The provisions of SECTION 4200 shall apply
met:
throughout to recycled bituminous materials, except
where explicitly specified otherwise. − The time from the foam is ejected into
atmospheric pressure until the volume has
decreased to half its maximum volume shall be
4202 MATERIALS minimum 15 seconds.
− The ratio between volume of bitumen in a
(a) General foamed state and in an un-foamed state shall
Coarse and fine aggregate shall be clean and free from be minimum 7.5 after 15 seconds have elapsed
decomposed materials, vegetable matter and other since the foam was ejected into atmospheric
deleterious substances and shall meet all relevant pressure.
requirements in the Specifications.
(c) Fillers
All materials shall be handled and stockpiled in a If the grading of the combined aggregates for asphalt
manner that will prevent contamination, segregation or surfacing mixes show a deficiency in fines an approved
damage. Stocks of cement and lime shall be rotated in filler may be used to improve the grading. Filler may

consist of active filler as defined hereinafter or of inert TABLE 4202/2

material such as rock dust having the required grading GRADING LIMITS FOR COMBINED AGGREGATE AND MIX
necessary to improve the grading of the combined PROPORTIONS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING.
aggregates. In no instance shall more than 2% by mass (CML test number)
of active filler be used in asphalt mixes. Inert filler such
as rock dust used to improve grading shall not be Sieve size Asphalt Concrete,
subject to this limitation. (mm) continuously graded
CML 1.7 AC20 AC14 AC10
The Engineer may order the use of any active filler to 28 100
improve the adhesion properties of the aggregate. 20 80-100 100
Active filler shall consist of milled blast furnace slag, 14 60-80 85-100 100
hydrated lime, ordinary Portland cement, Portland blast 10 50-70 72-94 85-100
furnace cement fly-ash, or a mixture of any of the above 5.0 36-56 52-72 55-72
materials. Individual materials shall comply with the 2.36 28-44 37-55 38-57
requirements of the relevant Specifications for such 1.18 20-34 26-41 27-42
material. Active filler shall have at least 70% by mass 0.600 15-27 16-28 18-32
passing the 0.075 mm sieve, all passing the 0.600 mm 0.300 10-20 12-20 13-23
sieve and a bulk density in toluene falling between 0.5 0.150 5-13 8-15 9-16
and 0.9 g/ml. The voids in dry compacted filler shall be 0.075 2-6 4-10 4-10
between 0.3% and 0.5%, when tested in accordance Aggregate 95% 94.5% 94%
with British Standard 85812. Bitumen
content *) 5% 5.5% 6%
Active fillers for use in bituminous base courses shall be CML 3.5
introduced to the mix prior to wetting with the binder. *) The nominal bitumen content is for bidding
Only active filler added on the instructions of the purposes. Exact percentage to use shall be
Engineer, for the purpose of improving adhesion, will be determined after the Engineer’s approval of mix
paid for. No payment will be made for filler added to design and result of field trials. The type of
improve the grading. bitumen shall be 60/70 or 40/50 penetration
grade, or according to the Special Specifications,
or as directed by the Engineer.
(d) Aggregates and mix design requirements for
continuously graded asphalt concrete surfacing TABLE 4202/3
(AC20, AC14, AC10) DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE
SURFACING
(i) Aggregate strength
The TFV of the coarse aggregate used in asphalt Property of mixture and Asphalt Concrete,
concrete surfacing, when determined in accordance laboratory test method continuously graded,
with CML Method 2.7 or equivalent, shall not be (CML test number) (AC20, AC14, AC10)
less than 110 kN. The wet/dry strength ratio shall
Marshall flow (mm) CML
not be less than 75%. 2–4
3.18
Marshall stability
(ii) Absorption
(Newton), all severely
When tested in accordance with CML Method 3.9 or Minimum 9000
loaded areas *) CML
equivalent, the water absorption of the coarse
3.18
aggregate shall not exceed 2% by mass.
Marshall stability
(iii) Grading (Newton), Traffic Load
8000 – 18000
The grading of the combined aggregate including Class TLC20 and TLC50
any filler added in an approved working mix shall be *) CML 3.18
within the limits stated in TABLE 4202/2 for the Marshall stability
respective mixes. The approved grading shall be (Newton), Traffic Load
7000 – 15000
designated as the target grading. The mean grading Class TLC10 and TLC3
of each lot of the working mix (minimum of 6 tests *) CML 3.18
per lot) determined from samples obtained in a Marshall stability
stratified random sampling procedure, shall conform (Newton), Traffic Load
4000 – 10000
to the approved target grading within the tolerances Class TLC1 and lower *)
specified in CLAUSE 4212. CML 3.18
Air voids (%) CML 3.18 3–6
For recycled asphalt the nominal mix ratios of Voids in Mineral For AC20:
recovered asphalt, new aggregate, new bituminous Aggregate(%) CML 3.18 minimum 14
binders, and active mineral filler to be used for For AC14:
bidding purposes, shall be as specified in the minimum 15
Special Specifications. For AC10:
minimum 16
(iv) Design requirements Requirement after refusal
The Contractor shall, by conducting the necessary laboratory compaction Air voids shall be
tests, prove to the satisfaction of the Engineer that (severely loaded areas minimum 3%
he will be able to produce a mixture meeting the only) CML 3.20 *)
design requirements in TABLE 4202/3, using the Indirect tensile strength Minimum 800
aggregate he proposes to supply, within the grading (kPa) CML 3.21
0
tested at 25 C
limits specified.
Immersion index (%)
3–6
CML 3.21
*) The appropriate Traffic Load Class, and whether
requirements for severely loaded areas apply to
any location, shall be as given in the drawings or
Special Specifications. Where such information is
not given, the decision of the Engineer shall apply.

(e) Requirements for hot mixed bituminous base (f) Requirements for penetration macadam base
course (DBM40, DBM30, LAMBS) course (PM80, PM60, PM30)
(i) Aggregate strength (i) Aggregate strength

The TFV of the coarse aggregate used in The TFV of the coarse aggregate used in
bituminous base and surfacing, when determined bituminous base and surfacing, when determined in
dry in accordance with CML Method 2.7 or accordance with CML Method 2.7 or equivalent,
equivalent, shall not be less than 110 kN. The shall not be less than 110 kN. The wet/dry strength
wet/dry strength ratio shall not be less than 75%. ratio shall not be less than 75%.
(ii) Absorption (ii) Flakiness index

When tested in accordance with CML Method 3.9 or When tested in accordance with CML Method 2.4 or
equivalent, the water absorption of the coarse equivalent, the flakiness index of the coarse
aggregate shall not exceed 3% by mass. aggregate of PM60 and PM30 material shall not
exceed 35.
(iii) Grading and mix properties, DBM40 and DBM30
The grading of the combined aggregate including (iii) Grading
any filler added in an approved working mix shall be The grading of the aggregate shall be within the
within the limits stated in TABLE 4202/4 for the limits stated in TABLE 4202/5. The mean grading of
various mixes. The approved grading shall be each lot of the working mix (minimum of 6 tests per
designated as the target grading. The mean grading lot) determined from samples obtained in a stratified
of each lot of the working mix (minimum of 6 tests random sampling procedure, shall conform to the
per lot) determined from samples obtained in a approved target grading within the tolerances
stratified random sampling procedure, shall conform specified in SUBCLAUSE 4212(b).
to the approved target grading within the tolerances
specified in CLAUSE 4212.
TABLE 4202/5
GRADING LIMITS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR PENETRATION
TABLE 4202/4 MACADAM. (CML test number)
GRADING LIMITS AND NOMINAL MIX PROPORTIONS FOR
DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM BASE COURSE. LABORATORY Sieve size
Penetration macadam
TEST METHOD, (CML test number) (mm)
CML 1.7 PM80 PM60 PM30
Sieve size DBM40 DBM30 Main fraction:
(mm) (% passing) (% passing) 100 100 - -
CML 1.7 75 75-100 100 -
50 100 - 63 - 80-100 -
37.5 95-100 100 50 0-50 0-50 -
28 70-95 90-100 37.5 0-25 0-25 100
20 - 70-95 28 0-5 0-5 80-100
14 56-76 58-82 20 - - 0-50
10 53-70 52-73 14 - - 0-25
5.0 39-56 40-56 10 - - 0-5
2.0 24-40 24-40
1.18 19-35 19-35 Key stone *):
0.425 9-25 9-25 50 100 - -
0.300 7-21 7-21 37.5 85-100 100 -
0.075 2-9 2-9 28 0-50 85-100 -
Bitumen 20 0-25 0-50 100
content, *) 4.0% 4.5% 14 0-5 0-25 85-100
CML 3.22 10 - 0-5 0-55
Bitumen type, 60/70 or 40/50 6.3 - - 0-25
CML 3.5 penetration 5 - - 0-10
grade or Layer
according to thickness 125 100 50
the Special (mm).
Specifications, Bitumen
or as directed type 80/100 or 60/70 penetration grade
by the CML 3.5
Engineer. Bitumen
Maximum spray rate 3.5 3.5 2.5
2
compacted l/m *)
80-200 60-150 *) The bitumen spray rates are measured at
layer thickness
(mm) spraying temperature and are for bidding
*) The nominal bitumen content is for bidding purposes. Exact rates shall be determined after
purposes. Exact percentage to use shall be field trials to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If a
determined after the Engineer’s approval of mix bituminous mixture is prescribed instead of using
design and result of field trials. key stone, then the mixture shall meet all
requirements for the specified type in accordance
(iv) Grading, LAMBS with this Specification. The bitumen spray rate
The maximum particle size, dmax, of LAMBS may in such case be reduced on the approval of
materials shall be minimum 37.5 mm and maximum the Engineer after field trial have been conducted
50mm. The target grading LAMBS base courses to prove to the satisfaction of the Engineer that
shall be within the range derived from the formula the reduction causes no adverse effect to the
given in CHAPTER 7.4.2. of the Pavement and layer.
Material Design Manual-1999. The approved target
grading shall be determined after laying a trial
section on site.
(g) Aggregates and mix design requirements for The appropriate Traffic Load Class shall be as
cold mixed bituminous base course (FBMIX, given in the drawings or Special Specifications.
BEMIX) Where such information is not given, the decision of
the Engineer shall apply. The wet strength shall not
(i) Definitions be less than 75% of the dry strength.
The following definitions apply for cold mixed
bituminous base course materials: (iv) CBR soaked 4 days
− FOAMED BITUMEN: Bituminous binder temporarily When tested in accordance with CML Method 1.11
expanded as specified in this SPECIFICATIONS or equivalent, the CBR value shall not be less than
by the aid of appropriate techniques for 30% before admixture of bitumen.
introducing water into hot bitumen.
− FBMIX: Bituminous base course material made (v) Plasticity index
in accordance with this SPECIFICATIONS with When tested in accordance with CML Method 1.3 or
approved foamed bitumen by mixing in an equivalent, the plasticity index before admiixture of
appropriate plant or as specified in a cold bitumen shall not be more than:
process − FBMIX material: 14%
− BEMIX: Bituminous base course material made − BEMIX material: 8%
in accordance with this SPECIFICATIONS with
approved bitumen emulsion by mixing in an (vi) Properties of mixed material
appropriate plant or as specified in a cold The grading of the combined aggregate including
process any filler added in an approved working mix shall be
− BITUMEN CONTENT: Percentage of residual within the limits stated in TABLE 4202/6 for the
bitumen by weight of total mix excluding water respective mixes. The approved grading shall be
− MOISTURE CONTENT: Percentage of water by designated as the target grading. The mean grading
weight of dry aggregate including bitumen when of each lot of the working mix (minimum of 6 tests
bitumen is present per lot) determined from samples obtained in a
− MARSHALL DENSITY: Density of Marshall stratified random sampling procedure, shall conform
specimens excluding water. Standard Marshall to the approved target grading within the tolerances
compaction with 75/75 blows is assumed specified in SUBCLAUSE 4212(b).
unless alternative compaction methods giving
similar densities are used on approval of the TABLE 4202/6
Engineer. GRADING LIMITS FOR COMBINED AGGREGATE AND MIX
PROPERTIES FOR COLD MIXED BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE.
(ii) General (CML test number)
The aggregate shall be natural gravel, crushed
material or approved material milled off existing Sieve size (mm) FBMIX BEMIX
pavement layers. Unless otherwise approved by the CML 1.7 (% passing) (% passing)
Engineer the material shall be placed in stockpile 37.5 100 100
prior to admixture of bitumen. 28 80-100 80-100
20 60-95 60-95
All operations to produce, stockpile and lay 10 42-78 35-70
bituminous base course and shall be carried out in 5.0 30-65 25-50
a manner which ensures a homogeneous mixture 2.0 20-50 18-35
with even distribution of additives, bitumen and 0.425 10-30 10-25
water without segregation or contamination or 0.075 5-15 5-8
excessive variations in moisture contents within the Bitumen type *) Foamed Emulsion
material. All aggregate shall be free from lumps, *) Nominal
soft or unsound particles, clay or other deleterious consumption of
material. Excessive amounts of organic matter or bitumen (litres per 90 90
flat or elongated particles shall not be present in the 3
m of compacted
aggregate. material)
Marshall stability
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer the 0
tested at 40 C (N) 6000 4500
aggregate shall be screened into a minimum of two CML 3.18
fractions before use. Minimum one fraction shall be Marshall flow (mm),
free of fines within a tolerance of maximum 5% 0 2-4 2-4
40 C. CML 3.18
passing the 2.0 mm sieve. The fractions shall be
Minimum E-modulus
combined to achieve the required grading uniformly 0
at 29 C, by indirect
throughout the production of bituminous base. The tensile strength or
mix design shall be based on laboratory tests of 1600 1200
alternative approved
parallel sets of representative samples with a methods (MPa)
minimum of 5 different bitumen contents CML 3.21
respectively. The mix design shall adequately show
Minimum moisture
test results that can be expected on material Mix design moisture less
content at the time
produced within the tolerances given. The mix 1.5% points
of laying (%)
design shall give one moisture content and one
Maximum moisture
bitumen content for the proposed mix recipe. Mix design moisture plus
content at the time
0.5% points
of laying (%)
(iii) Aggregate strength
The TFV of the coarse aggregate used in cold Minimum compacted
mixed bituminous base course, when determined field density (% of 96%
dry in accordance with CML Method 2.7 or Marshall dry density)
equivalent, shall not be less than: *) The nominal consumption of bitumen is for bidding
− 110kN for Traffic Load Class TLC3 and higher purposes. Exact percentage bitumen content shall
be determined after the Engineer’s approval of
− 80 kN for Traffic Load Class TLC1 and lower
mix design and result of field trials. The type of
bitumen shall be according to the Special
Specifications or as specified by the Engineer.

(h) Asphalt reinforcing materials, hot in-situ surface recycling shall comply with
Asphalt reinforcing shall be of the type specified in the the requirements in the Special Specifications.
Special Specifications and shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer. (k) Cold in-situ recycling
Cold in-situ pavement recycling shall comply with the
Where the use of reinforcing for asphalt has been requirements in the Special Specifications.
specified, the Contractor shall, at least three months
before the material is to be used, submit samples of the 4203 COMPOSITION OF MIXTURES FOR
type he intends to use, together with complete BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE AND
specifications of the material, as well as the
manufacturer's instructions for use, to the Engineer for SURFACING
approval. Where the material does not carry the mark of The rates of application and mix proportions of
an acknowledged standards authority, the Engineer bituminous binder, aggregates and fillers which are
may instruct the Contractor to have the material tested given in this SPECIFICATION, are nominal rates and
by an approved laboratory and to submit the results. proportions and shall only be used for bidding
purposes. The rates and proportions actually used shall
be determined to suit the materials used and conditions
(i) Recycling prevailing during construction and any approved
variation on a nominal mix in the bitumen content or
(i) Recovered asphalt active filler content shall be the subject of an adjustment
The Engineer will test the existing asphalt in any in payment for binder or active filler variations as
part of the road and determine its suitability for described in CLAUSE 4214.
recycling before removal. He may instruct the
Contractor to drill additional cores at specified Before production or delivery of the bituminous material
points. Recovered asphalt intended for recycling the Contractor shall submit samples of the materials he
shall be stored separately from other asphalt, and proposes to use in the mix, together with his proposed
the Engineer may also direct different types of mix design as determined by an approved laboratory, to
asphalt to be stored separately. the Engineer in accordance with TABLE 7104/1, so that
the Engineer may test the materials and confirm the use
The recovered asphalt shall be free from any of the proposed mix if he is satisfied that it meets the
underlying base material and other foreign matter. specified requirements.
Asphalt milled out shall be of a maximum size of 28 A mix design shall be submitted for the approval of the
mm, unless another maximum size has been Engineer for each new material source the Contractor
approved by the Engineer. proposes to use or when significant changes in the
material properties are encountered within a material
Asphalt not milled out shall be broken down in an source or as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Any
approved manner so that it can be properly remixed proposed change of mix design for use in Permanent
in a plant to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Mixes Works shall be notified to the Engineer for his approval
of recycled asphalt containing fragments of minimum 7 days in advance of proposed use.
recovered asphalt exceeding 28 mm in size, will not
be accepted. As soon as the materials become available the
Contractor shall produce a working mix in the plant in
Payment for recovered asphalt will distinguish accordance with the design mix. The working mix shall
between milled out and non-milled out material. again be tested by him for compliance with the design
requirements. Samples of the working mix shall also be
Samples shall be taken from the recovered asphalt made available to the Engineer, who will authorise the
intended for recycled mixes in the stockpile and use of the working mix proportions finally approved for
shall be tested for grading and quality of the use. The composition of the approved working mix shall
aggregate, binder content. And properties of the be maintained within the tolerances given in TABLE
binder. 4212/2.
(ii) Bituminous binders The design of the bituminous mixes shall be in

The provisions of CLAUSE 4202 shall apply. The accordance with the relevant design guidelines and the
grade of new binder used in the recycled asphalt mix properties and requirements shall be as specified in
mix shall be such that the mix of new and residual the Special Specifications. The asphalt mixes shall also
binder will comply with the requirements of the comply with the requirements in TABLE 4203/1 unless
Special Specifications. Recycling agents such as otherwise stated in the Special Specifications.
blended oils and other additives may not be used
without prior approval by the Engineer.
4204 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
(iii) New aggregate
New aggregate required for use in recycled asphalt (a) General
mixtures shall comply with the requirements of The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details
SUBCLAUSE 4202(b). of the Construction Plant he proposes to use and the
procedures he proposes to adopt for carrying out the
(iv) Combined aggregate Permanent Works. The Engineer shall have access at
The aggregate mix obtained from new aggregate all times to construction plant for the purpose of
and the aggregate in the recovered asphalt inspection.
including any mineral filler, an approved quantity of
which may be added in accordance with All construction plant used in the mixing, transportation,
SUBCLAUSE 4202(c), shall comply with the laying and compaction of bituminous material shall be
requirements specified in the Special Specifications of adequate rated capacity, in good working condition
for the relevant recycled asphalt layer. and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Obsolete or
worn out plant will not be allowed on the Work.
(j) Hot in-situ surface recycling
With regard to new binder, recycling additives, new All plant shall be so designed and operated to produce
asphalt, new aggregate or combinations of these a mixture complying with the requirements of this

Specification. The plant and equipment used shall be of (iii) Recycling

adequate rated capacity, in good working order and In addition to the requirements set out in CLAUSE
subject to the approval of the Engineer. Obsolete or 4204 the mixing equipment shall be specially
worn-out plant will not be allowed on site. adapted to deal with recycling and any such
adjustments shall be in accordance with the
Prior to the start of the work the Contractor shall supply instructions of the manufacturer of the mixing plant
the Engineer with copies of the manufacturer's on the approval of the Engineer. The recovered
handbooks and copies of check lists prepared in terms asphalt portion of the mix shall not be exposed
of ISO 9002 where applicable pertaining to the mixing, directly to the heating source whilst the feeding rate
remixing and paving plants, containing details of the and proportioning shall be accurately controlled.
correct settings and adjustments of the plant. Before work is commenced, the Contractor shall
submit full details of his mixing equipment to the
Any alteration which has been or is being effected to Engineer for his approval.
any constructional plant, and which does not comply
with the specifications of the manufacturer, shall be (c) Spreading equipment, pavers
brought to the notice of the Engineer. The bituminous base course shall be laid by an
appropriate type of self-propelled mechanical spreader
of a type approved by the Engineer and shall be kept in
(b) Mixing plant a good running condition and adjusted correctly
according to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
(i) General pavers shall be equipped with a powerful tamper and
Mixing of the bituminous mixture shall be carried vibrating screed. The pavers shall be capable of laying
out in an appropriate plant acceptable to the the material to widths, lines, grades cross-fall and
Engineer. thickness within the specified tolerances without
causing separation, dragging or other surface defects.
(ii) Stationery or portable mixing plant
Bituminous mixture shall be mixed by means of an All pavers used for laying Permanent Works shall be
approved type mixer of proven suitability for fitted with automatic electronic screed controls to
producing a mixture complying with all the maintain the required levels, cambers and cross-falls.
requirements of the Specifications. Where skids are used they shall be at least 9m long or
as specified by the Engineer.
The mixing plant may be either automatically or
manually controlled. Two control operators shall be Where levelling beams on multiple skids or sliding
provided. beams are used they shall be at least 9m long.
The heating system of the tanks storing the binder (d) Rollers, general requirements
shall be so designed that the binder will not be Compaction shall be done by means of approved flat
degraded during heating. A circulating system for steelwheel, vibratory or pneumatic-tyred rollers,
the binder shall be provided which shall be of sufficient in size and numbers to achieve the specified
adequate size to ensure the proper and continuous density through the entire depth of the layer. Minimum
circulation between storage tanks and mixer during one roller shall be pneumatic tyred with a weight of
the entire operating period. minimum 2.5 tonnes per wheel and not less than 18
tons total un-ballasted weight. The frequency as well as
Binder storage tanks shall be fitted with the amplitude of vibratory rollers shall be adjustable.
thermometers designed to provide a continuous Vibratory rollers shall be used only where there is no
record of the temperature of the binder in the tank. danger of damage being done to the layer, structures of
Copies of these records shall be supplied to the bridge decks, or other layers. It will be indicated in the
Engineer on a daily basis. Special Specifications whether vibratory compaction
equipment may be used on bridge decks and what the
Satisfactory means shall be provided to obtain the constraining parameters will be. The rollers shall be
proper amount of binder in the mix within the self-propelled and in good working condition, free from
tolerances specified, either by weighing or backlash, faulty steering mechanism and worn parts.
volumetric measurements. Suitable means shall be Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers to
provided for maintaining the specified temperatures keep the drums clean and with efficient means of
of the binder in the pipelines, weigh buckets, spray keeping the wheels wet to prevent mixes from sticking
bars and other containers or flowlines. to the rollers.
In the case of a drum type mixer, the system shall No leakage of any nature may occur in the rollers.
control the cold feeding of each aggregate fraction
and of the filler by mass, by means of a load cell or (e) Binder distributors
another device regulating the feed automatically, Where bituminous binders are to be sprayed onto areas
and by immediately correcting any variation in mass before laying the asphalt is done, the binder distributors
which results from moisture or from any other shall comply with CLAUSE 4103.
cause. The cold feed shall be regulated
automatically in regard to the binder feed so as to (f) Vehicles
maintain the required mix proportion. The asphalt shall be transported from the mixing plant
to the spreader in trucks having tight, clean, smooth
Suitable dust collecting equipment shall be fitted to beds and sides which have been treated to prevent
prevent pollution of the atmosphere in accordance adhesion of the mixture to the truck bodies. A thin film
with the provisions of any local Act governing of soapy water or vegetable oil may be used to prevent
pollution. adhesion but petroleum products shall not be used for
this purpose.
The fuel chosen and control of the burner shall be
such as to ensure the complete combustion of the All vehicles used for transporting asphalt shall be fitted
fuel in order to prevent pollution of the atmosphere with canvas for transport in excess of 10km or when
and the aggregate. weather conditions demand such cover in the opinion of
the Engineer. Such covers shall be securely fixed over
the asphalt from time of departure at the storage or

mixing plant until immediately prior to discharge of the uniformity of temperature or if free water is present on
asphalt into the paver. the working surface, or when the moisture content of
the underlying layer, in the opinion of the Engineer, is
(g) (VOID) too high.
(h) Plant and equipment for recycled asphalt No surfacing shall be placed unless the moisture
Plant and equipment for producing, hauling and placing content of the upper 50 mm of the base course is less
the recycled asphalt shall comply with the provisions of than 50% of the optimum moisture content as
SUBCLAUSES 4204(a) to 4204(g), as applicable, and determined by the Engineer. No overlay shall be placed
subject to the following additional requirements: immediately after a rainy spell on an existing partly
cracked and/or highly permeable surfacing resulting in
The mixing equipment shall be capable of producing the trapping of moisture in the pavement structure. A
asphalt mixes with or without recovered material. minimum delay of 24 hours or such extended period as
Where necessary, the mixing equipment shall be ordered by the Engineer shall apply.
specially adapted to deal with recycling, and any such
adjustments shall be made in accordance with the
instructions of the manufacturer. The equipment, with (c) Surface requirements
any necessary adjustments, shall be so designed,
equipped and used that the measuring, heating and (i) General
mixing of the material will give a uniform asphalt mix Any defects of the surface shall be made good and
which complies with all the specified requirements in no bituminous material shall be laid until the surface
regard to temperatures within the limits necessary for has been approved by the Engineer.
properly placing and compacting the asphalt in
accordance with the specified requirements. Before (ii) Correction of base courses, or subbase in the case
work is commenced, the Contractor shall submit full of bituminous base course.
particulars of his mixing equipment to the Engineer. The base course (after the prime coat has been
applied) or the subbase, as the case may be, shall
be checked for smoothness and accuracy of grade,
4205 GENERAL LIMITATIONS AND elevation and cross section. Any portion of the base
REQUIREMENTS AND THE or subbase, as the case may be, not complying with
the specified requirements, shall be corrected with
STOCKPILING OF MIXED MATERIAL asphalt at the Contractor's own expense, until the
specified requirements are met. The Engineer may,
(a) Weather conditions however, in his sole discretion, allow minor surface
irregularities to remain, provided they can be taken
(i) General up in the following asphalt layer without adversely
Bituminous material may be mixed and placed affecting that layer.
only under favourable weather conditions, and
shall not be mixed or placed when rain is The bituminous material used for the correction of
imminent or during wet conditions. the base or subbase, shall be the same mixture as
specified for the surfacing or as directed by the
(ii) Hot mixes (AC, DBM, LAMBS) Engineer, and the maximum size of aggregate used
The following wind and temperature conditions are shall be dictated by the required thickness of the
regarded as being suitable for paving work with hot correction in each case.
mixed material:
Notwithstanding these provisions for the correction
While the air temperature is rising, work may be of the base or subbase, the Engineer reserves the
performed at temperatures of: right to order the removal and reconstruction of the
− 60C with an allowable wind velocity of less than layer or of portions of the base and subbase layers
25 km/h not complying with the specified requirements,
− 100C with an allowable wind velocity of less instead of allowing the correction of substandard
than 55 km/h, or for asphalt with a compacted work with asphalt material.
thickness of less than 30 mm with an allowable
wind velocity of less than 25 km/h. (iii) Cleaning of the surface
Immediately before applying the tack coat, or where
With falling air temperatures, work must be stopped there is no tack coat, before the application of the
0
when the temperature reaches 6 C regardless of asphalt, the surface shall be cleaned of all loose or
the wind velocity and may not be restarted before deleterious material by means of a rotary broom,
the temperature is definitely rising. and hand brooms, compressed air or as required to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(iii) Cold mixes (FBMIX, BEMIX)
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact that Where the prime coat (if any) has been damaged. it
cold mixed material is likely to be pervious until shall be repaired by hand brushing or spraying
sealed. Damage to unsurfaced layers may occur in priming material over the damaged portions.
wet weather. Due allowance should be provided in
the programme of works during rainy seasons, such The prime coat shall be sufficiently dry before the
that exposure of un-sealed layers are kept to a tack coat and/or the asphalt may be applied. The
minimum. Time limits for the laying operation are Contractor's programme shall allow for delays that
given in SUBCLAUSE 4211(b). The time limits are are a function of the type of prime, rate of
applicable only in dry weather working conditions. application, base porosity and moisture content,
Allowance to weather conditions in the programme and climatic conditions.
of works may include reduction of these maximum
time limits and/or complete stoppage of the laying The surface texture of the subbase shall be such
operations in wet weather. that there is adequate bond between it and the
bituminous layer.
(b) Moisture content
The mixing and placing of asphalt will not be allowed if
the moisture content of the aggregate affects the

(iv) Tack coat 4206 PRODUCING AND TRANSPORTING THE

Where required in these Specifications or the MIXTURE
Special Specifications, or where indicated by the
Engineer, a tack coat shall be applied to the surface
(a) Mixing and storage temperatures of binder
to be paved.
Bituminous binders shall be stored at temperatures not
exceeding those given in TABLE 4206/1 or the Special
The tack coat shall consist of a stable-grade
Specifications, and the aggregate and bituminous
bituminous emulsion diluted to have a 30% bitumen
2 binders shall be heated at the mixing plant to such
content and shall be applied at a rate of 0.55 l/m or
temperatures that the mixed product shall have a
temperature within the range given in TABLE 4206/1.
The use of hand operated equipment for the
application of tack coats shall be at the sole
TABLE 4206/1
discretion of the Engineer and his approval.
TEMPERATURE RANGES FOR BITUMINOUS BINDERS
Portions of kerbing and guttering, bridge kerb and
Bitumen Max. storage Temperature
railing which will be exposed, shall be protected in
type, pen. temperature of range of mix
terms of SECTION 2300 when the tack coat is
grade binder ( 0C ) ( 0C )
applied.
Over Under Continuously
The tack coat shall not be applied more than 24 24 hrs 24 hrs graded mixes
hours before the paving is done. 40/50 pen 145 175 140-165
60/70 pen 135 175 135-160
(v) Preparation for placing overlays
The provisions of SECTION 4900 shall apply to any
surface to be covered with overlays. The type of (b) Production of the mixture
treatment to be applied, if any, will be specified in
the Special Specifications or instructed in writing by (i) Hot mixes using batch plants
the Engineer.
(1) Heating the aggregate
(vi) Preparation where asphalt layers are to be widened The aggregate shall be dried and heated so
or where surfacing over a section of the road width that, when delivered to the mixer, its
0 0
requires replacement. temperature shall be between O C and 20 C
lower than the maximum temperature indicated
The existing asphalt shall be removed as described in TABLE 4206/1 for the mixture. The moisture
in SECTION 3800, where applicable, or as instructed content of the mix shall not exceed 0.5%.
by the Engineer.
(2) Batching
Where a road has to be widened, the overlay shall Each fraction of the aggregate and binder shall
be cut back not less than 100 mm from the existing be measured separately and accurately in the
edge. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings proportions by mass in which they are to be
or instructed by the Engineer. Asphalt joints may mixed. If filler is used, it shall be measured
not fall within a wheel track. separately on a scale of suitable capacity and
sensitivity. The error in the weighing apparatus
used shall not exceed 2% for each batch.
(d) Storage
(3) Mixing
(i) Hot mixes (AC, DBM, LAMBS) The aggregate, filler and binder shall be mixed
Mixing shall not be allowed to take place more than until a homogeneous mixture is obtained in
four hours before paving begins unless provision which all particles are uniformly coated. Care
has been made for storage. Storage of mixed shall be taken to avoid excessively long mixing
material will only be permitted in approved hoppers, times which can cause hardening of the binder.
which are capable of maintaining the temperature of
the mix uniform throughout. in any case storage will (ii) Hot mixes using drum-type mixer plants
not be permitted for a period longer than 12 hours The aggregate and filler shall be accurately
after mixing, unless otherwise approved by the proportioned and conveyed into the drum-mixing
Engineer. unit. The calibrated amount of binder shall be
sprayed onto the aggregates at the correct position
(ii) Cold mixes (FBMIX, BEMIX) so that no hardening of the binder shall take place.
The material for use in Permanent Works shall not A homogeneous mixture and uniform coating of
be laid on the same day as it is mixed unless binder must be achieved and the moisture content
otherwise approved by the Engineer. of the asphalt mixture shall not exceed 0.5%. Once
the final mix temperature has been agreed upon it
The length of time for mixed material to remain in may not be altered without the prior consent of the
stockpile before laying in Permanent Works shall Engineer.
not be more than 7 days after mixing. Should the
Contractor propose to use material which has been (iii) Cold mixes using stationary, portable or in-situ
stockpiled for longer than 7 days, then the Engineer mixing plant
may allow a trial section to be constructed if the Mixing of bituminous base for use in Permanent
proposal is to his satisfaction. The Engineer may Works shall only be carried out in a mixing plant
subsequently allow the material to be used in approved by the Engineer and on the basis of an
Permanent Works if the outcome of the Trial approved mix design. Any proposed change of mix
Section is to his satisfaction. design for use in Permanent Works shall be notified
to the Engineer for his approval minimum 7 days in
All plant used for stockpiling and transportation of advance of proposed use.
the mixture shall have buckets that are cleaned of
all foreign material, fuel, lubricants or other The length of time for storage of additives from the
contamination before use. moment of mixing with hot bitumen until mixed with

aggregates shall be limited to maximum 2 hours, Repairs to joint and isolated surface irregularities
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Such may be carried out by hand or other suitable
approval shall be subject to proof that adhesion methods at a thickness other than the above,
properties are adequate at the time of mixing subject to approval of the Engineer.
bitumen with aggregate.
On restricted areas, inaccessible to the paving
(c) Transporting the mixture equipment used, the mixture may be placed by
The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant hand or other means to obtain the specified results.
to the Works in trucks complying with the requirements Paving shall be carried out in a manner which will
of CLAUSE 4204. Deliveries shall be made so that avoid segregation and which will allow control of
spreading and rolling of all the mixtures prepared for a levels.
days run can be completed during daylight, unless
artificial lighting, as approved by the Engineer, is Paving shall be carried out with good workmanship
provided. Any asphalt which has become unusable in for such operations. This requirement includes, but
the opinion of the Engineer due to rain or any other is not restricted to, particular attention to the
cause will be rejected. Hauling over freshly laid material following:
is not permitted. − paving shall commence at the bottom of the
grades and the lower edges of superelevated
(d) (VOID) curves
− paving shall be done upgrade on grades
(e) Recycled asphalt steeper than 5%
The provisions of SUBCLAUSES 4206(a) to 4206(d) shall − the paver shall be operated in a manner that
apply with changes as required. provides the maximum possible degree of
compaction exerted by the screed, evenly
At least four weeks before paving with recycled material distributed across and along the layer.
will commence, the Contractor shall submit to the − spreading shall be so arranged that longitudinal
Engineer full particulars regarding the recycling joints do not coincide with joints in lower layers
methods he intends to use. of asphalt base or surfacing.
Where recovered asphalt material is taken from a (iii) Base course thickness paved in one operation
stockpile, it shall be done by excavating from the pile Base course with a compacted thickness greater
over its full depth. Where segregated material is fed into than 100 mm may only be placed to its full
the mixing plant, the Engineer will have the right to thickness in one layer if site trials show that
order the work to cease and to instruct the Contractor to satisfactory finish, evenness and compaction of the
remix the stockpile, retest the mixed material and full thickness can be achieved and the result is to
redesign the asphalt mixture all at his own cost. the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(iv) Base course thickness, first layer

4207 SPREADING THE MIXTURE No bituminous base course material shall be placed
as the first layer of the base course in a compacted
(a) General thickness less than 60 mm or less than three times
the aggregate’s maximum particle size, whichever
(i) The paver, general is smaller, for materials other than LAMBS. LAMBS
The paver shall be kept in good working order, and can be placed at 2 times the maximum aggregate
adjustment of the screed tamping bars, feed size.
screws, hopper feed, etc, shall be checked
frequently to ensure uniform spreading of the mix. If (v) Base course thickness, following layers
segregation or other imperfections occur, the Following layers to be placed on freshly laid
spreading operations shall immediately be bituminous base course layers may be placed in a
suspended until the cause is determined and compacted thickness less than the above subject to
corrected. satisfactory results of site trials and on approval of
the Engineer, but not less than twice the maximum
The mixer capacity and the operating speed of the aggregate size for materials other than LAMBS
paver are to be so co-ordinated as to ensure which can be placed at 1.5 times the maximum
continuous laying and to avoid intermittent stopping aggregate size under similar conditions.
of the paver.
(vi) Weather
Unless otherwise stated in the Special Paving shall stop when rain is imminent and
Specifications the paver shall be equipped to compaction of all laid material shall be completed
provide automatic control of levels and cross immediately.
section. In the case of asphalt base construction,
automatic control shall be run off guidewires and in (vii) Hot mixes, special requirements
the case of surfacing and overlays skids or The temperature of hot mixtures shall be controlled
guidewires shall be used. by measuring in a random pattern in the truck
immediately before emptying, and shall not be more
0
(ii) Workmanship than 10 C below the minimum temperature
The bituminous layer shall be laid and compacted in specified for mixing in TABLE 4206/1.
one or more layers giving a total thickness as
specified. (viii) Cold mixes, special requirements
No cold mixed bituminous base course material
The addition and removal of material behind the shall be laid unless the moisture content is within
paver shall normally not be allowed and the paver the specified limits. Should the moisture content of
shall be capable of spreading the mixture to the stockpiled materials fall outside these limits, the
correct amounts that will provide the required Contractor may propose methods to bring the
compacted thickness and surface evenness without moisture content back to comply with the
resorting to spotting, picking-up or otherwise requirements. The Engineer may then allow a Trial
shifting or disturbing the mixture. Section as described in CLAUSE 4210 to be
constructed if the proposal is to his satisfaction. The
Engineer may subsequently allow the material to be 4209 COMPACTION

used in Permanent Works if the outcome of the The mix shall be rolled as soon as possible after it has
Trial Section is to his satisfaction. been laid by vibratory, steelwheel and pneumatic-tyred
rollers in a sequence predetermined and approved
(b) Overlays during the laying of trial sections. Such rolling shall
In the case of overlays, guide wires will be required commence and be continued only for so long as it is
during the placing of the mix if so specified in the effective and does not have any detrimental effect. The
Special Specifications. In all cases, including levelling use of pneumatic-tyred rollers for continuously-graded
courses, the paver shall be provided with skid beams non-homogeneous modified binders shall be assessed
with electronically controlled equipment which can in the trial section.
ensure a constant crossfall and can even out local
irregularities. As many rollers shall be used as are necessary to
provide the specified pavement density and the
(c) Restricted areas required surface texture. During rolling of surfacing
Bituminous material shall be placed in restricted areas only, the roller wheels shall be kept moist with only
with the aid of smaller specially equipped pavers, hand sufficient water to avoid picking up the material.
tools, or other approved equipment. The space
concerned shall be properly filled with asphalt, without After longitudinal joints and edges have been
leaving any gaps between the fresh asphalt and compacted, rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides
existing pavement layers. and gradually progress towards the centre of the
pavement, except on superelevated curves, or where
All the relevant provisions in regard to temperature, mix the area to be paved has a straight cross-fall, when
composition, uniformity, etc, shall remain applicable, but rolling shall begin on the low side and progress to the
layer thickness and control shall be such that the higher side, uniformly lapping each preceding track,
requirements for compaction and surface tolerances covering the entire surface. During breakdown rolling,
can still be attained where bituminous material is laid in the rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed (not
restricted area. to exceed 5 km/h) with the drive roller nearest the
paver, unless otherwise specified on account of steep
(d) Recycled asphalt gradients.
The provisions of SUBCLAUSES 4207(a) to 4207(c) shall
apply with changes as required to recycled asphalt. No movement of the asphalt layer shall occur under
steel wheel rollers once the asphalt temperature has
Where the average thickness of a completed asphalt 0
dropped to below 100 C. Three-wheeled steel rollers,
layer exceeds the specified thickness, and/or recovered with large diameter rear wheels are preferable to
asphalt has been wasted indiscriminately, and, if in the tandem rollers and may be used in conjunction with
opinion of the Engineer it has resulted in a deficiency of pneumatic tyred rollers, provided pick-up of the asphalt
recovered material, the Contractor shall supplement on the wheels does not occur.
such deficiency at his own cost with a quantity of similar
or better material equal to the quantity wasted, as The sequence of rollers used in compaction is at the
determined by the Engineer. discretion of the Contractor provided the completed
pavement shall have a density as measured on
4208 JOINTS recovered core equal to or greater than 96% Marshall
All joints between adjacent sections of the work shall be density determined as described in CML test 3.18 or
made by cutting back the layer against which the equivalent.
material is to be placed unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. All loose and incompletely compacted The Contractor shall utilise a calibrated nuclear gauge
material shall be removed. A cutting wheel shall be for process control during compaction operations.
used for cutting longitudinal joints. Notwithstanding this requirement, the acceptance
control carried out for compaction by the Engineer, shall
Joints shall be either at right angles or parallel to the still be based on cores taken from the compacted layer.
centre line, and joints in the final layer of the surfacing
shall, where possible, correspond with the lane The nuclear device shall:
markings. Joints in lower layers shall be offset not less − be operated by a suitably trained technician.
than 150 mm on either side of the edges of the traffic − comply with all the safety regulations of the relevant
lanes. regulatory Authority.
− be certified to be suitably calibrated.
Before a new layer is placed next to an existing layer,
the cut edge of the existing layer shall be painted with a The portion of trial section having the desired surface
coat of bituminous emulsion of the same type and texture shall be designated as a reference for what is
application rate as used for the tack coat. required in the permanent work.
Joints shall be neat and shall have the same texture The following requirements shall apply to rolling and
and density as the remainder of the asphalt course. All compacting generally:
joints shall be marked out with chalk lines prior to − The material shall not be excessively displaced in a
cutting. longitudinal or transverse direction especially when
changing gears, stopping or starting rollers.
The outside edges of the completed asphalt course − No cracks or hair cracks shall be formed and the
shall be trimmed along the shoulder, and parallel to the bond with the underlying layer shall not be broken.
centre line, to give a finished width, as shown on the − The density shall be uniform over the whole area of
Drawings, within the tolerances specified. the layer and extend over the full depth of the layer.
− Rollers shall not be left standing on the asphalt
Any fresh mixture spread accidentally onto existing layer before it has been fully compacted.
work at a joint shall be carefully removed by brooming it
− In restricted areas where the specified rollers
back with stiff brooms onto the uncompacted work, so
cannot be used, compaction shall be carried out
as to avoid the formation of irregularities at the joint.
with hand-operated mechanical compaction
Whenever the paving operation is stopped due to lack
equipment or approved smaller vibratory rollers.
of mixture, the Contractor shall form a proper joint as
The prescribed density requirements remain
specified above, if so directed by the Engineer.
applicable throughout, over the full layer thickness, shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
irrespective of the method of compaction. expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The provisions of CLAUSE 4209 shall apply with (b) Special requirements for cold mixed base
changes as required, and with the approval of the course material
Engineer, to recycled asphalt. Traffic can under normal dry conditions be allowed on
the fresh layer immediately after the compaction is
4210 LAYING TRIAL SECTIONS completed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
A trial section of minimum 50 m length shall be
constructed prior to the use of any new mix design, Where the base course is placed in more than one
when there are changes in the type or numbers of layer, no more than 7 days shall elapse between
construction plant, or as required by the Engineer. The completion of consecutive layers. No more than 14
Trial Section shall demonstrate that the materials, plant days shall elapse from completion of the base course
and procedures proposed are adequate to achieve a until the surface dressing is constructed.
bituminous base layer in accordance with the
Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The time limits in the above paragraph are applicable
only in dry weather working conditions. The
Any bituminous material laid in a trial area that forms Contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact that the
part of the Permanent Works and subsequently found material is likely to be pervious until sealed. Damage to
unacceptable, shall be removed or made good to unsurfaced layers may occur in wet weather. Due
comply with the Specifications. allowance should be provided in the programme of
works during rainy seasons, such that exposure of un-
The Engineer may require a number of different binder sealed layers are kept to a minimum. This may include
contents, and a number of different moisture contents in reduction of the above maximum time limits and/or
the case of cold mixed material, to be incorporated in complete stoppage of the laying operations in wet
one such trial section to verify the laboratory design weather.
recipe.
If the times specified above are not adhered to the
The specified requirements shall include dynamic test Contractor shall place tack coat or priming in
results obtained from briquettes prepared from material accordance with this Specification on approval of the
obtained in a stratified randomly sampled manner at the Engineer without additional costs to the Employer.
manufacturing plant or behind the paver as directed by Approved crusher dust or clean sand shall at no
the Engineer and/or cores extracted from the completed additional costs to the Employer be evenly spread at a
3 2
trial section and in locations determined in a stratified rate of 0.005 m /m immediately following the spraying
randomly sampled manner. of tack coat. Notwithstanding the above, construction of
consecutive layers or surface dressing shall not be
A period of 10 days shall be allowed to verify dynamic unduly delayed. In no case shall more than 90 days
test results unless otherwise specified in the Special elapse since completion of the previous layer.
Specifications.
Only when such a trial section has been satisfactorily 4212 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND
laid and finished, and complies with the specified FINISH REOUIREMENTS
requirements will the Contractor be allowed to
commence with construction of the permanent work. (a) Construction tolerances
Construction tolerances and finish shall meet all
If the Contractor should make any alterations in the relevant requirements in CLAUSE 7300. The riding
methods, processes, equipment or materials used, or if quality of the final layer shall be to the satisfaction of the
he is unable to comply consistently with the Engineer.
Specifications, the Engineer may require that further
trial sections be laid before allowing the Contractor to (b) Gradings
continue with the permanent work. Any work that does The combined aggregate and filler grading shall not
not comply with the Specifications shall be removed or deviate from the approved target grading for the
made good to comply with the Specifications to the working mix by more than that given in TABLES 4212/2
satisfaction of the Engineer. and 4212/3 respectively for Asphalt Concrete surfacing
and bituminous base course materials.
The trial sections shall be laid where indicated by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare the surface on
which to lay the trial section and shall also, if required
by the Engineer, remove the trial section after
completion and restore the surfaces on which it was
constructed, at his own cost.
No payment shall be made for trial sections and the

Contractor must allow for all costs in his rates.
4211 PROTECTION AND AFTERCARE

(a) General
The Contractor shall protect the bituminous base
course and asphalt surfacing from all damage until the
work is finally accepted by the Employer and he shall
maintain the surfacing work until the issue of the taking
over certificate. Any damage occurring to the completed
base or surfacing, excepting fair wear and tear on
surfacing during the defect liability period, or any
defects which may develop due to faulty workmanship,

TABLE 4212/2 4213 TESTING

AGGREGATE AND FILLER GRADING FOR ASPHALT
CONCRETE SURFACING (a) Sampling
All sampling and testing shall be carried out in
Size of aggregate: Permissible accordance with sampling and testing standards laid
Material passing deviation from the down in the standards of the Central Materials
through the approved target Laboratory or equivalent approved by the Engineer, and
following sieves grading shall be carried out to adequately show compliance with
(mm) the Specifications.
37.5 ± 4.0
28 ± 4.0 Testing shall be carried out by the Contractor at the site
20 ± 5.0 laboratory or an external laboratory approved by the
14 ± 5.0 Engineer. All operations of the testing shall be available
10 ± 5.0 for inspection by the Engineer at all times and the
6.3 ± 5.0 Contractor shall give notice well in advance of all testing
5 ± 4.0 as required by the Engineer. All test results shall at all
2.00 times be available to the Engineer.
± 4.0
1.18
0.600 ± 4.0
All test results representative for Permanent Works
0.300 ± 4.0
shall meet the relevant requirements in the
0.150 ± 3.0
Specifications within the tolerances specified and shall
0.075 ± 1.5 be approved by the Engineer.
(b) Coring of asphalt layers

TABLE 4212/3 The Contractor shall provide suitable coring machines
AGGREGATE AND FILLER GRADING FOR BITUMINOUS BASE capable of cutting 100 mm diameter cores from the
COURSE MATERIALS completed asphalt layers. The Contractor will be paid in
accordance with the relevant pay item for cutting cores
Size of Permissible deviation from the ordered by the Engineer. The cost of extracting cores
aggregate: approved target grading for process control shall be included in the Contractor's
Material prices for the construction of asphalt pavement layers
Individual Average of
passing and will not be paid for separately.
sample three
through the
consecutive
following All core holes shall be neatly repaired with asphalt and
samples
sieves (mm) compacted to the specified density. The cores shall be
Sieve 5 mm filled with the same mix as used for the layer tested.
and larger ± 15 ± 10
(c) Laboratory testing
Sieve smaller
Testing shall be carried out by the Contractor at the site
than 5 mm and
± 10 ±5 laboratory or an external laboratory approved by the
larger than
Engineer. All operations of the testing shall be available
0.075 mm
for inspection by the Engineer at all times and the
Sieve smaller Contractor shall give notice well in advance of all testing
than 5 mm and
±4 ±2 as required by the Engineer. All test results shall at all
larger than times be available to the Engineer.
0.075 mm
All test results representative for Permanent Works
shall meet the relevant requirements in the
(c) Binder content Specifications within the tolerances specified and shall
be approved by the Engineer.
(i) Hot mixed material
The binder content shall be controlled to comply
with the limits given in SECTION 7200.
(ii) Cold mixed material
The maximum accepted deviation in bitumen ITEM UNIT
content of cold mixed bituminous base course 42.01 BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE:
material compared to that of the approved Mix (a) HOT MIX (STATE TYPE, MAXIMUM CUBIC METRE
Design is given in TABLE 4212/4. COMPACTED THICKNESS, TYPE OF
3
(m )
BITUMEN AND MAXIMUM SIZE OF
AGGREGATE)
TABLE 4212/4
AGGREGATE AND FILLER GRADING FOR COLD MIXED (b) COLD MIX (STATE TYPE, MAXIMUM CUBIC METRE
3
COMPACTED THICKNESS, TYPE OF (m )
BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE MATERIALS
BITUMEN AND MAXIMUM SIZE OF
AGGREGATE)
Size of Max. deviation Max. deviation
sample, of sample of any single (c) BITUMEN FOR BITUMINOUS BASE TONNES (t)
number of average from value from the COURSE MIXES (STATE TYPE OF
tests (no) the specified specified BITUMEN)
bitumen bitumen (d) PENETRATION MACADAM (STATE
content (in % content (in % TYPE OF BITUMEN AND MAXIMUM
bitumen) bitumen) SIZE OF AGGREGATE)
5 or less 0.30 0.70
(i) MAIN FRACTION OF CUBIC METRE
6 0.28 0.68 3
AGGREGATE (STATE MAXIMUM (m )
7 0.26 0.66
SIZE)
8 0.24 0.64
9 0.22 0.62 (ii) AGGREGATE KEY STONE CUBIC METRE
3
10 or more 0.20 0.60 (STATE MAXIMUM SIZE) (m )

(iii) BITUMINOUS MIX INSTEAD OF CUBIC METRE

3
KEY STONE (STATE MATERIAL (m )
TYPE AND MAXIMUM SIZE)
(IV) BITUMEN FOR PENETRATION LITRES (l)
(STATE TYPE), MEASURED AT
SPRAYING TEMPERATURE
ITEM UNIT
42.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE
SURFACING:
(a) ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING CUBIC METRE
3
(STATE TYPE OF BINDER AND (m )
MAXIMUM SIZE OF AGGREGATE)
(b) BITUMEN FOR ASPHALT TONNES (t)
CONCRETE SURFACING (STATE
TYPE OF BITUMEN)
The unit of measurement for bituminous mixes shall be

the cubic metre constructed to the thickness specified,
compacted on the road as specified, calculated as the
product of the length instructed to be laid and the
compacted cross-sectional area shown on the Drawings
or instructed by the Engineer.
The binder for asphalt concrete surfacing is paid for

separately for material produced and placed as
specified and accepted by the Engineer. The quantity
calculated from the recipe of the mix design, at Marshall
density, shall be used in the calculation of the binder
quantity. A new mix design and recipe shall be
prepared if, in the opinion of the Engineer, this is
warranted due to significant variations in mix density or
other material properties
The bid rate for bituminous mixes shall include for

procuring, preparing the surface to the satisfaction of
the Engineer, providing, heating, drying or adding water
as required, mixing, transporting, laying and compacting
the mix in accordance with the Specifications and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The rate shall also include
for process control testing, protecting and maintaining
the work as specified.
No payment will be made for material wasted.
ITEM UNIT
42.03 TACK COAT OF 30% STABLE LITRE (l)
GRADE BITUMEN EMULSION
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of 30%

stable-grade bitumen emulsion applied as specified.
The bid rate shall include for the cleaning the surface to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, procuring, furnishing
and application of the material as specified.
ITEM UNIT
42.04 ADDITIVES (STATE KILOGRAMME
TYPE) (kg)
Additives except binder, aggregate, filler or water shall

be paid for separately where these are specified or
instructed by the Engineer. The quantity shall be
calculated as the kilogram used in accordance with the
recipe of the mix design, on approval of the Engineer.

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND all three grades to provide a product with the
SEALS required viscosity properties.
(2) Rubber
SECTION 4300: GENERAL The rubber shall be obtained by processing and
recycling pneumatic tyres. It shall be pulverised,
REQUIREMENTS FOR SEALS free from fabric, steel cord and other
contaminants. A maximum of 4% by mass of
fine particle size calcium carbonate, or talc,
CONTENTS: may be added to the rubber crumbs to prevent
CLAUSE PAGE the rubber particles from sticking together. At
the time of use the crumbs shall be free flowing
4301 SCOPE 4000-22 and dry and comply with the requirements of
4302 MATERIALS 4000-22 TABLE 4302/1.
4303 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 4000-25
4304 GENERAL LIMITATIONS AND
REQUIREMENTS 4000-26 TABLE 4302/1
4305 HEATING AND STORAGE OF RUBBER CRUMBS
BITUMINOUS BINDERS 4000-27
4306 STOCKPILING OF AGGREGATE 4000-28
Sieve analysis: Test
4307 CONSTRUCTION OF SEALS 4000-28
Sieve size Percentage Method
4308 RATES OF APPLICATION 4000-29
(mm) passing by mass
4309 (VOID) 4000-30
4310 DUST CONTROL 4000-30 1.18 100 BR6T
4311 OPENING TO TRAFFIC 4000-30 0.60 40-70 (Sabita) *)
4312 DEFECTS 4000-30 0.075 0-5
4313 MAINTENANCE 4000-30 Other requirements:
4314 TOLERANCES AND FINISH Natural rubber BS 903
REQUIREMENTS 4000-31 hydro-carbon 30% (minimum) Parts B11
4315 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4000-31 content and B12
Fibre length 6 mm (maximum) -
Relative 1100-1250 BR9T
3
density (kg/m ) (Sabita)
4301 SCOPE
This Section covers the materials, construction plant, (3) Extender oils
construction and requirements common to the The extender oil shall be a petroleum derived
construction of all seals detailed in these Specifications. material of high aromaticity and shall comply
with the requirements of TABLE 4302/2.
4302 MATERIALS TABLE 4302/2

EXTENDER OILS
(a) Bituminous binders
Property Requirements
(i) Conventional bituminous binders 0
Flash point 180 C
Bituminous binders shall comply with the following
% by mass of saturated
specifications or suitable equivalent:
hydrocarbons 25% (max)
% by mass of aromatic,
Type of binder Specification
unsaturated hydrocarbons 50% (min)
Penetration grade AASHTO designation
bitumen: M20-70 (4) Dilutent
Cutback bitumen: AASHTO designation The dilutent shall be a distillate of hydrocarbon.
M82-75
(5) Bitumen-rubber blend
Bitumen emulsions, AASHTO designation The bitumen-rubber blend, including extender
anionic: M140-88 oil and/or dilutent, it necessary, shall comply
Bitumen emulsions, AASHTO designation with the requirements of TABLE 4302/3.
cationic: M208-96
Invert bitumen SABS 1260
emulsion: TABLE 4302/3
BITUMEN-RUBBER BLEND
The type and grade of bituminous binder to be used
shall be as specified under the appropriate SECTION Property Requirements
of these Specifications for each type of bituminous % rubber by mass of total blend 20%-24%
seal, or in the Special Specifications. % extender oil by mass of total
blend 6% (max)
% of dilutent by mass of total
(ii) Non-homogeneous (heterogeneous) modified blend 7% (max)
0 0
binders Blending/Reaction temperature 170 C – 210 C
The bitumen-rubber binder shall comply with the Reaction time 0.5 - 2 hours
following requirements:
Prior to commencement of the work, the
(1) Base bitumen supplier shall state in writing the percentage of
The bituminous binder used in the production of rubber and the blending/reaction temperature
the bitumen-rubber shall be a 60/70, 80/100 or he intends to use for his specific product. The
150/200 penetration-grade bitumen respectively actual percentage of rubber shall not deviate by
that complies with the requirements of AASHTO more than 1.0% from the stated value and the
M20-70 or equivalent, or a blend of any two or

actual reaction temperature shall not deviate by Where applicable the following details will be
more than 10% from the stated value. indicated in the Special Specifications:
(1) Type elastomer polymer
A continuous record of both percentage rubber SBR or SBS. Unless otherwise specified SBR
added and reaction temperatures shall be kept shall be used for bidding purposes.
on site by the
Contractor. (2) Grade base bitumen
80/100 penetration grade or 150/200
The bitumen-rubber binder shall comply with penetration grade. Unless otherwise specified
the requirements of TABLE 4302/4. 80/100 penetration grade road grade shall be
used for bidding purposes.
TABLE 4302/4 (3) Modified binder content

BITUMEN-RUBBER BINDER 65% or 70%. Unless otherwise specified 65%
shall be used for bidding purposes.
Property Requirements Test Method
(or equivalent The aforementioned components together with
method on polymer content will dictate the attributes attainable.
approval of
the Engineer) Unless otherwise specified, the properties of
Minimum BR3T (Sabita) cationic modified bitumen emulsion containing SBR
compression or SBS solids shall comply with the requirements in
recovery: TABLE 4302/5.
after 5
minutes 70% A volatile solvent flux content of up to 3% mass by
after 1 hour 70% mass of the bitumen may be added to enhance
after 4 hours 48-55% emulsion performance with regard to prevailing
Ring-and-ball minimum CML Test 3.6 climatic conditions. Any expected change to
0
softening point 55 C specified values shall first be discussed with the
Resilience 13%-35% BR2T (Sabita) Engineer prior to the addition of any such enhancer.
Dynamic 20 35 cPas BR5T (Sabita)
viscosity The properties of the recovered modified bitumen
(Haake at using a rotary vacuum evaporation method or
0
190 C) simple evaporation method as described in CLAUSE
Flow (mm) 20 – 75 BR4T (Sabita) 7108 shall be required to comply with the
requirements of TABLE 4302/6.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with
If there is any discrepancy in the test results on
time-temperature ratios in regard to the above
recovered modified binder, then the results on
properties of his specific product before work
recovered binder obtained from the rotary vacuum
may start in order to determine the final process
evaporation method shall be binding.
and the acceptance limits.
(v) Homogeneous hot-applied modified binders
The methods of testing bitumen-rubber material
(summer grades)
have been published in Manual 3 of the
The requirements for any polymer other than the
Southern African Bitumen and Tar Association
generic types listed in TABLE 4302/7 used for the
(SABITA).
manufacture of homogeneous hot-applied modified
binders will be indicated in the Special
If a supplier uses a dilutent, an ageing test may
Specifications. Where applicable the following
be required in which the binder is placed in an
0 details will be indicated in the Special
oven for 5 hours at 150 C, after which time it
Specifications:
shall comply with the above Specifications.
(1) Generic type (plastomer or elastomer) and type
The Contractor shall provide the performance
polymer.
record for three recent projects of the materials
he intends to use in order to assess the
(2) Grade base bitumen (80/100 or 150/200)
successful use of the materials. The information
required. The aforementioned components
shall include mean values obtained for the
together with polymer content will dictate the
prescribed tests as well as any relevant
attributes attainable.
comments. This information shall be submitted
at bidding stage.
(vi) Homogeneous hot-applied modified binders (winter
grade)
(iii) Non-homogeneous modified binders
Where applicable the requirements for
If non-homogeneous modified binders are required,
homogeneous modified binders (winter grade) will
they shall comply with the requirements in the
be specified in the Special Specifications.
(b) Aggregates
(iv) Homogeneous cold applied modified binders
The aggregate shall consist of approved crushed stone
If any polymer other than the elastomer polymers
or natural material complying with the relevant
styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or styren-
requirements set out for each type of seal and the
butadiene-styrene (SBS) is required for the
grading, flakiness index and hardness and soundness
manufacture of cationic modified bitumen emulsions
shall be as specified for each nominal size of stone.
it shall comply with the requirements in the Special
Specifications.

TABLE 4302/5
CATIONIC MODIFIED BITUMEN EMULSION
Polymer Required Minimum Minimum Maximum Particle Sediment-

modifier properties, modified viscosity at residue on charge ation after
grade of base binder 500C Saybolt sieving 60 rotations
bitumen content (%) Furol (sec.) (g/100ml)
SBR 80/100 70 80 0.25 Positive Nil
150/200 65 70 0.25 Positive Nil
SBS 80/100 70 80 0.25 Positive Nil
150/200 65 50 0.25 Positive Nil
Test Method - ASTM D244 ASTM D244 SABS 548 SABS 548 SABS 548
TABLE 4302/6
RECOVERED MODIFIED BITUMEN
Polymer Required properties Elastic recovery (%)

modifier Grade of Mini-mum Minimum Mini-mum at 50C (%) at 500C
base Soften-ing dynamic ductility at (%)
bitumen point (0C) viscosity at 100C (mm)
1350C (Pa.s)
SBR 90 100
90 100
SBS 80/100 60 1.2 500 55 90 100
150/200 47 1.0 500 60 90 100
Test Method - ASTM D36 ASTM DIN 52013 DIN 52013 DIN 52013
TMH
D4402 methodB11
Note: Modified binder is bitumen plus polymer. The dust content criteria shall be according to TABLE 4302/8 grade 2 stone for
the adhesion test.
TABLE 4302/7
HOT-APPLIED MODIFIED BINDERS, REQUIRED PROPERTIES
Genetic type of Required properties

modified binder Grade of Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Maximum Minimum
base Softening dynamic ductility elastic stability adhesion
bitumen point (0C) viscosity at 10 C0
recovery difference at 50C at 500C
at 1350C (mm) 100C (%) (0C) (%) (%)
(Pa.s)
Plastomerpolymer 150/200 48 0.5 300 45 2 90
(EVA)
Elasto- SBR 80/100 47 1.0 1000 55 2 90 100
merpol- SBS 80/100 49 1.0 500 60 2 90
ymer SBR 150/200 45 0.5 1000 55 2 90
SBS 150/200 47 0.5 500 60 2 90 100
Test - - ASTM ASTM DIN 52013 DIN 52013 DIN 52013 TMH 1 Method
Method D36 D4402 B11
(c) Slurry (e) Precoating
(i) Filler for slurry (i) Precoating of aggregate for stockpiling or for
Ordinary Portland cement shall comply with immediate use
AASHTO M85-98 or equivalent and Portland blast- This method may be used for aggregate intended
furnace cement (PBFC) with the requirements of for immediate use or for stockpiling.
AASHTO M240-97 or equivalent.
The untreated stockpile of aggregate shall be
Road lime shall comply with the requirements of thoroughly sprayed with water, which shall be
AASHTO M216-92, or equivalent (Lime for Soil allowed to drain off. The damp aggregate shall then
Stabilisation). Only one of the above materials shall be loaded into the bucket of a front-end loader and
3
be used throughout, in order to prevent undesirable 10 to 15 litres per m of an approved precoating
colour differences in the surface. fluid shall be sprayed evenly over the aggregate by
means of a watering can.
(ii) Immersion index
The immersion index of briquettes made with slurry The wetting agent approved by the Engineer shall
aggregate and penetration-grade bitumen at the be added to the precoating fluid at a rate of 0.5% of
specified net bitumen content for the slurry shall be the volume of precoating fluid.
not less than 75.
The mixture of aggregate and precoating fluid shall
(d) Hydrophilic aggregates then be dumped on a site prepared as specified in
Where hydrophilic or other aggregates which may CLAUSE 4306. This process shall be repeated until a
3 3
cause problems are encountered, the Engineer may stockpile of approximately 15 m to 20 m has been
order that the stone chips be precoated, as described built up.
below, or that a fog spray be applied, as specified in
SUBCLAUSE 4403(e).

This stockpile shall then be turned over with the (d) Rollers
front-end loader until the aggregate is uniformly Sufficient operational rollers of each of the following
coated with the precoating fluid. Three complete types shall be available on the Works to maintain the
turnings of the stockpile may be required. required tempo of work:
(i) Pneumatic-tyred rollers
The time between the precoating and the placing of Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be of a self-propelled
the aggregate shall not exceed the time given in the type equipped with smooth flat profile pneumatic
Special Specifications or agreed on by the Engineer tyres of uniform size and diameter. The mass of the
and the Contractor. Before the aggregate is used roller shall not be less than 20tonnes (unloaded).
the precoating fluids shall have set or dried
sufficiently in the opinion of the Engineer. The rollers shall be equipped with suitable devices
for keeping the wheels wet and clean during
All aggregates used with hot-applied homogeneous operation.
and non-homogeneous modified binders, shall be
precoated. The wheels of the roller shall be so spaced that one
pass of the roller will provide one complete
(ii) Precoating constraints coverage equal to the rolling width of the machine.
No precoating shall be applied where emulsion The total operating mass and tyre pressure may be
binders are used unless specifically specified or varied by the Engineer at his discretion. Individual
ordered by the Engineer. tyre pressures shall not differ by more than 35kPa
from one another.
4303 PLANT AND EOUIPMENT (ii) Rubber-soled steel-wheeled rollers

Rubber-soled steel-wheeled rollers shall be self-
(a) General propelled, and have a mass of between 6 and 8
All plant and equipment used on the Works shall be of tonnes. It shall be equipped with suitable devices
an adequate rated capacity and in a good working for cleaning and moistening the wheels. The wheels
condition. of the roller shall be so arranged as to give one
complete coverage, by one passage of the roller,
All plant and equipment that will be operated on the over a width equal to the rolling width of the roller.
road during construction of the seal shall be free from
any binder, fuel or oil leaks. and no refuelling or (iii) Steel-wheeled rollers
servicing of any equipment will be allowed to take place Steel-wheeled rollers shall be self-propelled three-
while such equipment is on the road. wheel or tandem rollers of between 6 and 8 tonnes
mass and shall be equipped with suitable devices
for cleaning and moistening the wheels. The mass
(b) Binder distributors of the roller required shall be determined by the
Engineer. No steel-wheeled rollers shall be used
(i) General without the consent of the Engineer.
The binder distributor shall comply with all the
provisions of CLAUSE 4103. (iv) Additional requirements
The type and number of rollers shall be subject to
(ii) Non-homogeneous modified binder the approval of the Engineer for each type of seal
The binder distributor used for non-homogeneous and the proposed programme.
modified binder shall be adapted to spray the
rubber modified binder satisfactorily. The Contractor No seal work shall continue if the required rollers
shall provide proof by way of a test on the site that are not on site or in an operational condition.
the binder distributor has sufficient reserve power to
maintain the required constant speed up the
steepest incline to which spray has to be applied, (e) Brooms
and to obtain a uniform distribution of the mix. The
optimal spray-bar level shall be determined during (i) Drag broom
testing, and the spray-bar level shall be adjusted The drag broom shall be of a size, type and mass
accordingly before each spray. The uneven which will enable the chips to be distributed evenly
application of binder will be unacceptable. In over the surface without dislodging any chips from
addition to the requirements of CLAUSE 4103 the the binder.
equipment shall be capable of heating the binder to
0
210 C. (ii) Rotary broom
An approved rotary broom, complete with towing
(c) Chip spreaders vehicle fitted with smooth pneumatic tyres, shall be
The chip spreaders shall be capable of spreading stone available at all times on the Works.
of the specified size uniformly over widths varying
between 2.4 m and 4 m and shall be capable of (f) Mixer for slurry
adjustment to permit variation of the rate of application A mobile mixer of a type approved by the Engineer shall
within the specified tolerances, and uniform spreading be provided. It may be either a batch mixer or a
in both the transverse and continuous type mixer. The paddles of the mixer shall
longitudinal directions. be so designed as to ensure a complete blending of the
constituents of the slurry.
At least two chip spreaders shall be provided, one of
which shall be self-propelled. For the rapid setting slurry types, the mixing and
application of the slurry shall be done by a mixer
Spreaders which are not self-propelled, shall be of a designed to provide a rapid mixing time, and sufficient
type that can be attached quickly to the rear of trucks, agitation within the spreading system to prevent
and operated while backed over the stone chippings segregation or premature hardening. The mixer shall be
being spread. capable of continuous mixing and application.
The purpose designed mixer for continuous type mixing

of either conventional or rapid setting slurries, shall be

equipped with precise metering systems to enable the (i) Conventional binders
various constituents to be combined continuously to the − Penetration grade bitumen:
0
prescribed formulation. 150/200 penetration-grade bitumen: 20 C
0
No central mixing plant will be allowed. Details of the 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen: 25 C
type of mixer shall be submitted in advance of actual − Cutback grade bitumen MC800/MC3000: 100C
construction, for approval by the Engineer. − Bitumen emulsions: 100C
(g) Loader for slurry (ii) Non-homogeneous modified binders:

A loader, or equivalent capacity labour force where so − Bitumen-rubber (spray application) 200C
required in the Special Specifications, compatible with
the needs and capacity of the mixer unit shall be (iii) Other non-homogeneous modified binders:
available at the stockpiling site. As set out in the Special Specifications.
(h) Spreader box for slurry (iv) Homogeneous cold applied modified binders
The type of spreader box used for spreading the slurry − SBR modified cationic emulsion: 100C
shall be submitted to the Engineer, in advance, for − SBS modified cationic emulsion: 100C
approval. The spreader box for rapid setting slurry shall
be of a proven and approved type, fitted with a proven (v) Homogeneous hot-applied modified binders
and approved device to ensure sufficient agitation − Modified binder 150/200 penetration grade
within the spreader system. 0
base bitumen: 20 C
− Modified binder 80/100 penetration grade base
The spreader box shall be so constructed as to 0
bitumen: 25 C
distribute the weight onto metal skids in such a way that
no damage shall be done to the surface when the box is
(vi) Other homogeneous hot-applied modified binders
in operation.
As set out in the Special Specifications.
Soft rubber belting shall be attached to the framework in
(vii) General
such a manner as to prevent slurry from being spilt past
Whenever the temperature of the road surface falls
the sides of the spreader box when the box is in
below the aforesaid temperature for the binder in
operation.
question, or, in the opinion of the Engineer, will
probably fall below the required temperature before
The spreader box shall be capable of spreading a
spraying the binder, no binder shall be sprayed.
uniform application of the slurry in adjustable widths
from 1.5 m to 4 m, at specified rates, and it shall have
No bituminous work shall be done during foggy or
efficient mechanical means of adjusting the rates and
rainy weather, and, when a cold wind is blowing,
widths of application specified. o
the above temperatures shall be increased by 3 C
0
to 6 C as directed by the Engineer.
(i) Precoating plant
The precoating of chips may be done in any suitable
Conventional slurry shall not be applied at an air
plant capable of uniformly coating the chips. 0
temperature of less than 7 C when temperatures
0
are rising, or less than 13 C when temperatures are
(j) Mass-measuring device
dropping. Rapid setting slurry shall be sufficiently
Where payment per tonne is specified, the Contractor 0
versatile to be laid in air temperatures of 4 C to
shall keep available on the site as directed by the 0
40 C, as well as capable of being laid under damp
Engineer, a suitable gauged mass-measuring device.
conditions.
The device shall be provided with a printer for printing
the mass, the time and date. The printed data shall be
During hot weather slurry operations shall be
submitted to the Engineer on a daily basis.
suspended when aggregate is being displaced by
the spreader box or squeegees.
(k) Miscellaneous equipment
Sufficient equipment for handling and hauling
When the breaking process accelerates to such an
aggregate, binder and slurry, and blending units for
extent that it renders the product unworkable to
non-homogeneous modified binders, shall be provided
attain the required end result, for instance when the
to ensure prompt and continuous placing and 0
surface temperature is in excess of 60 C, or as
application of bituminous materials as specified. The
otherwise prescribed by the Engineer, no sealing
Contractor shall have available all the necessary
shall be done.
ancillary equipment and hand tools to carry out the work
efficiently.
When strong winds are blowing which are likely to
interfere with the proper execution of the work, no
Suitable fire-fighting equipment for dealing with bitumen
sealing, especially spraying of binder, shall be
fires shall be available on site, together with suitable
done.
first aid equipment for dealing with bitumen burns.
(Refer to Sabita Manual 8 : Bitumen Safety Handbook.) (b) Moisture content
No seal shall be placed unless the moisture content of
The Engineer shall be entitled to request reserve plant,
the upper 50 mm of the base is less than 50% of the
should there be any doubt as to the efficiency or
optimum moisture content as determined by the
capability of the equipment provided.
Engineer. No reseal shall be placed immediately after a
rainy spell on an existing partly cracked and/or highly
permeable surfacing resulting in the trapping of
4304 GENERAL LIMITATIONS AND moisture in the pavement structure. A minimum delay of
REQUIREMENTS 24 hours or such extended period as ordered by the
Engineer shall apply.
(a) Weather limitations
The minimum road-surface temperatures at which the
spraying of the different types and grades of binder may
be done are:

(c) Other constraints made to maintain the binder temperature for spraying to
0
within 5 C of the recommended temperature.
(i) The following curing periods shall apply to the
various treatments listed, prior to applying a For single seals the temperature limits for 150/200
seal/reseal unless otherwise given in the Special penetration-grade bitumen, cut back with the indicated
Specifications: amounts of kerosene in parts per 100 parts of bitumen
− Texturing using fine slurries: 6 weeks by volume as described in SECTION 4400, shall be as
− Rapid setting slurry (rut filling, etc): 12 weeks set out in TABLE 4305/3.
− Crack sealing: 2 weeks
− Repair of distressed patches: 6 weeks
TABLE 4305/1
(ii) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, and MAXIMUM STORAGE TEMPERATURES, CONVENTIONAL
subject to the outcome of a trial section, the BINDERS
Contractor shall programme all spraying to cease
each working day at 15:00 hours. Materials Maximum storage
temperature (0C)
Over Up to
(d) Preparation of areas to be sealed 24 hours 24 hours
Pen. grade
(i) General bitumens:
The areas to be sealed shall be cleaned of all dust, 150/200
dirt, dung, oil or any other foreign matter that may pen grade 115 165
be deleterious to the seal. 80/100
pen grade 125 175
(ii) Newly constructed seals Cut-back
Where newly constructed base or shoulder areas bitumens:
are to be sealed, the surfaces shall be checked for MC-800 75 125
compliance with the surface tolerances and all other MC-3000 100 155
requirements specified. Any portions that do not Bituminous
meet these requirements shall first be either emulsions: Air temperature
60 (all types)
corrected or removed and reconstructed before 60%, 65% or (all types)
they are sealed. 70%
(iii) Existing surfaces to be resealed

Existing roads that require resealing shall, if so TABLE 4305/2
specified or ordered by the Engineer, be given a HEATING AND SPRAYING TEMPERATURES, CONVENTIONAL
pretreatment in accordance with one or more of the BINDERS
methods described in SECTION 4900.
Heating and spraying
Any failures shall be repaired as set out in the temperatures (0C)
Special Specifications. Materials
Min Max Recom-
mended
Pen. grade
(e) Demarcation of working area bitumens:
150/200 150 175 165
(i) New work 80/100 165 190 175
The Contractor shall demarcate the area of the Cutback
primed base to be sealed by means of setting out bitumens:
wire lines down each edge of the specified seal MC-800 110 135 125
width. MC-3000 135 155 145
Bituminous
(ii) Reseal work emulsions: Air temp. 60 (all 60 (all
Immediately before the tack coat or bituminous 60%, 65% or (all types) types) types)
binder is sprayed, the centre line of the road shall 70%
be marked by a 3 mm thick sisal or hemp twine,
secured by nails driven, at 15 m intervals on (b) Cutting back bitumen on site
straights and 5 m intervals on curves, into the Kerosene shall be used as the cutter where correction
existing surface. This twine shall be left in position of viscosity is required or cutback bitumen is to be
during all subsequent operations. made on site from penetration grade bitumen.
Allowance shall be made for quantities between 0 –
45% by volume of the total quantity hot sprayed
4305 HEATING AND STORAGE OF bitumen, as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor’s
BITUMINOUS BINDERS attention is drawn to the potential hazards involved in
the cutting back operation and he shall take all
(a) Conventional binders necessary precautions to prevent fire.
The temperature ranges between which bituminous
binders are to be heated shall be as given in TABLES The temperature of the bitumen, when the kerosene is
0
4305/1 and 4305/2. introduced, shall not be higher than 140 C.
Binders stored in a heated condition shall be kept in a The kerosene shall be sucked in measured quantities
container with a securely fitting lid, the circulatory through the bitumen pump to the bottom of the tank and
system of which is functioning properly. The container circulated with the bitumen for a minimum of 45
shall be provided with a built-in thermometer. minutes. During this process all burners shall be shut
off and no open flames allowed near the distributor.
Binders which have been heated above the maximum
temperatures indicated in this table shall not be used The power paraffin shall not be introduced into the
and shall be removed from the site. Every effort shall be distributor through the manhole, which shall be kept

closed. Each distributor shall at all times have two fire Modified binders stored in a heated condition shall be
extinguishers in good working order available. kept in a container having a properly functioning
circulation system and a securely fitting lid.
TABLE 4305/3 Many long chain polymers have low shear stability and
TEMPERATURE LIMITS FOR CUTBACK BITUMEN can be degraded by the action of a high shear rate
pump such as a close tolerance gear pump. Any
Proportion of kerosene Spraying temperature material damaged by handling shall not be used on the
(% of total volume of Lower Upper road and shall be removed from site.
mixed binder) 0
limit C
0
limit C
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of
5% 140 155
the Special Specifications with regard to the storage,
10% 125 145
heating and spraying temperatures, and with regard to
15% 105 125
the information to be provided in the bidding stage,
20% 90 110
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(c) Non-homogeneous (heterogeneous) modified
binders modified with rubber
After completion of the bitumen-rubber reaction, the 4306 STOCKPILING OF AGGREGATE
0
binder shall be cooled to below 160 C. The binder
mixture may not be kept for more than 2 days. The mix (a) General
may only be stored in tanks with circulation systems. Sites for the stockpiling of aggregates shall be prepared
in such a manner that no grass, mud, dirt or other
The spray and storing temperatures of the bitumen- deleterious material will be included when the
rubber binder shall comply with the following aggregates are loaded for use.
requirements:
− Spray temperature (0C): Provided by supplier Access roads to stockpile sites shall be prepared and
− Max storing time at spray temperature: 4 hours maintained in such a way that no dirt is conveyed by
vehicle wheels onto the areas to be sealed or resealed
− Max storing temperature (up to 2 days): 350C below
0 whilst aggregate is being transported to or from the
spray temperature, but not more than 160 C
stockpiles.
Binder that has failed to meet the requirements for
Stockpiles shall be so sited that they will not be
storage and handling shall not be used and shall be
exposed to excessive contamination with dust arising
removed from the site.
from traffic on the road or access roads. Aggregates
(d) Other Non-homogeneous modified binders contaminated to the extent that it contains more than
the allowable percentage of material passing through
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements
the 0.425 mm sieve and 0.075 mm sieve shall not be
given in the Special Specifications with regard to the
used for sealing.
storage, heating and spraying temperatures, and with
regard to the information to be provided in the bidding
(b) Precoating
stage, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Areas used for stockpiling precoated aggregate shall be
(e) Homogeneous cold applied modified binders so sited that dust deposited on the chips is prevented.
Where necessary, temporary diversions and access
Modified bitumen emulsions may be stored at ambient
roads in the immediate proximity shall at the
temperature for long periods, provided that some
Contractor’s own cost be watered, sprayed with a
circulation/mixing takes place from time to time. The
suitable chemical dust suppressant, or sealed.
spraying temperatures of these emulsions are the same
as for conventional bitumen emulsions.
During the wet season when there is danger of the
precoating fluid being washed off the aggregate, the
Excessive temperature over extended periods will
stockpiles shall be covered with tarpaulins or similar
degrade all modified bitumens and negatively affect the
protective coverings.
properties of these binders.
During cooler periods the Engineer may order that
The temperature limits for the storage and spraying of
stockpiles be covered with tarpaulins to ensure that the
modified hot-applied binders shall be as set out in
aggregate temperature remains compatible with the
TABLE 4305/4 unless otherwise approved by the
limiting temperature applicable to the specified binder
Engineer.
type.
TABLE 4305/4
TEMPERATURE LIMITS FOR STORAGE AND SPRAYING, 4307 CONSTRUCTION OF SEALS
MODIFIED BINDERS
(a) General
Bitu- Poly- Max storage Spraying Adequate advance notice shall be given to the Engineer
men mer temp.( 0C) temp.(0C) before the Contractor proceeds with any seal work.
grade type Up to 24 to Max. Min.
used 24h. 48h.
80/100 EVA 175 150 180 170 (b) Single and double aggregate seals
150/200 EVA 175 150 180 170
(i) Application of binder coat and aggregate
80/100 SBR 175 150 210 190 A bituminous coat consisting of the type and grade
150/200 SBR 175 150 200 180 of binder specified in these Specifications under
each of the appropriate Sections for each type of
80/100 SBS 175 150 180 165 bituminous seal, or in the Special Specifications,
150/200 SBS 175 150 180 165 shall be sprayed on the properly cleaned and
prepared base or existing surface over the full
specified width of the seal.

Where the tank of the binder distributor could After completing the spreading of the aggregate,
become empty during spraying against inclines, the the surface shall be rolled with a 15 tonnes
spraying shall be done while the binder distributor is pneumatic-tyred roller for three to four coverages.
moving uphill. Should the Engineer be of the Except in the case of single seals final rolling shall
opinion that the Contractor is unable to place. The then be done with a steel-wheeled roller with a
sealant over the full specified width in one mass of 6 to 8tonnes working parallel to the centre
movement, the Contractor shall execute the line of the road from the shoulders towards the
spraying and the distribution of the chips in strips. crown of the road, until every portion of the surface
The spraying of adjacent strips shall overlap by 100 concerned has been covered by at least two to tour
mm. Chips may not be placed on the 100 mm passes of the roller, provided that only a limited
overlap before the adjacent strip has been sprayed. degree of crushing of the aggregate will take place,
The adjacent strip may not be sprayed before the but if, in the opinion of the Engineer, general
preceding strip, excluding the 100 mm overlap, has crushing occurs under the rollers, such rolling shall
been covered satisfactorily with chips in compliance be stopped regardless of the number of passes
with the Specifications. In so far as is practicable, completed by the roller.
the Contractor shall so place the strips that the joint
between two adjacent chip applications shall fall on The surface shall be well knit and have a uniform
the centre line of the road. appearance free of roller-tyre marks; all aggregate
contaminated by fuel, oil or grease shall be
Immediately after the binder has been sprayed, it removed and replaced with clean aggregate.
shall be covered with clean, dry aggregate of the
size given in these Specifications under each of the (iv) Joints between binder sprays
appropriate Sections for each type of seal. In order to prevent overlapping at junctions of
separate binder applications the previous work
The actual rates of application of binder and along the joint shall be covered with twin-reinforced
aggregate to be used in the construction will be building paper for a sufficient distance back from
determined by the Engineer, after he has tested the the joint to ensure that the sprayer is operating at
aggregates the Contractor proposes to use for the the required rate before the untreated surface is
seal and prior to any sealing being carried out. reached, and also to prevent additional binder
application onto the previously treated section. The
The aggregate shall be applied uniformly by means same method shall be used to ensure a neat joint at
of self propelled chip spreaders, unless otherwise the end of the run.
specified. In the case of single seals, the use of a
self-propelled chip spreader shall be obligatory. The (v) Protection of kerbs, channels, etc
immediate application of the chips is of prime Kerbs, channels, guttering, manholes, guard rails,
importance. The chip spreader shall be so operated bridge railings and any other structures which may
that the tack coat shall be covered with aggregate be soiled by bituminous binders during spraying
before the wheels of the chip spreader or truck pass operations shall be protected in terms of SECTION
over the uncovered tack coat. 2300 during spraying operations.
The quantity of bitumen sprayed in any single spray The Contractor shall replace at his own cost any
operation shall be governed by the quantity of items that have been soiled and cannot be cleaned
aggregate, and the number of trucks available shall entirely. The painting of soiled surfaces will not be
be sufficient to ensure the continuous application of accepted as a suitable remedy.
stone behind the distributor. In addition the
available roller capacity at normal operating speed (c) Slurry seals
shall also govern the extent of the tack coat and Slurry seals shall be applied as specified in SECTION
aggregate that may be applied. 4700.
(ii) Initial rolling of aggregate 4308 RATES OF APPLICATION

Immediately after the aggregate has been applied, Whenever the terms or quantity of bitumen, spray rate
rolling shall be commenced. A self-propelled 15 or application rate are used in these Specifications to
tonnes pneumatic-tyred roller only shall be used in specify the rate of application of the binder for
the case of single seals, and a steel-wheeled roller conventional or homogeneous modified binder, they
may also be used in the case of double seals on shall mean at spraying temperature.
condition that excessive crushing of the aggregate
shall not take place. Rollers shall operate parallel to All binders aggregates and slurry used in the various
the centre line of the road, from the shoulders types of seals shall be applied at the rates of application
inwards towards the crown of the road, until the as determined by the Engineer after tests on the
entire surface has been covered at least three times materials proposed for use.
with the wheels of the roller.
No payment will be made for bituminous binder applied
(iii) Broom drag and final rolling of aggregate in excess of the rate ordered unless, in the opinion of
After the bituminous binder has set-up sufficient to the Engineer, such overspray or any shortages can be
prevent any aggregate from being dislodged, the satisfactorily corrected in the case of a first application
surface shall be slowly dragged with a broom drag by the adjustment of the application rate of a
to ensure even distribution of the aggregate. If there subsequent spray.
are areas which are deficient in stone chips,
additional material shall be added by hand so as to Unless otherwise specified, the nominal rates of
leave a single layer of chips lying shoulder to application of bituminous binders given in further
shoulder. If there are areas with an excess of stone sections, and also the variations in application rate,
chips, such excess shall be removed by hand so as shall be measured at spraying temperature.
to leave a single layer of chips lying shoulder to
shoulder. The importance of applying only a single The nominal rates of application are for bidding
layer of chips is stressed. Every care shall be taken purposes only and will not necessarily be used in
to avoid an over-application of stone. construction. The actual rates of application to be used
on the site shall in all cases be as instructed by the
Engineer.
4309 (VOID) not embedded shall be broomed off the road before
it is opened to traffic. When opening the road to
4310 DUST CONTROL traffic, the affected areas shall be demarcated with
traffic cones and speed limit signs for the first two
Any temporary diversions and construction roads shall
days, care being taken to remove all loose
be kept watered and damp, or sprayed with a suitable
aggregate daily.
chemical dust suppressant, during all sealing
operations and all dust shall be removed from surfaces
Areas where whip-off is excessive after the above
before any binder, aggregate or slurry is applied.
treatment has been carried out shall be retreated in
accordance with the Engineer's instructions.
The supply and application of water or chemical dust
(ii) Method 2: Severe bleeding
suppressants on temporary diversions will be paid for
The method to be used shall be the same as
separately as specified in SECTION 1500, but payment
Method 1, except that the aggregate shall be
for dust control on the haul and construction roads shall
nominal sized 10 mm or 14 mm and they shall be
be included in the unit rates bid for the various types of 3 2 3 2
spread at the rate of 0.007 m /m and 0.010 m /m
seals used.
respectively. If only half the road width is to be
treated, the application of aggregate shall be
4311 OPENING TO TRAFFIC finished in a neat line on the centre line of the road.
The Engineer shall be responsible for determining when
any sealing layer is to be opened to public traffic. (iii) Method 3: Bleeding of single or multiple seals with
varying texture:
The road shall not be opened to traffic until the binder If the surface is non-uniform, ie partly bleeding and
has set sufficiently to retain the aggregate, or in the partly coarse-textured, the surface shall be rectified
case of slurry seals, the slurry has set sufficiently so as by pretreating the coarse areas in accordance with
not to be picked up by the wheels of passing traffic. CLAUSE 4903 (Type 2 treatment) to obtain a uniform
surface, which shall then be covered with a single
The Contractor shall not allow any construction seal in accordance with the standard Specifications.
equipment, which is likely to cause damage, over the The type of aggregate to be used shall be
completed seal. The Contractor shall display speed determined by the Engineer. The pretreated surface
restriction signs in accordance with SECTION 1500 and shall be inspected and the size of aggregate and
the instructions of the Engineer. the rates of application of the tack coat and
aggregate, which the surface can accommodate,
4312 DEFECTS shall be established. Methods 1 or 2 shall be used if
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any so ordered by the Engineer.
unacceptable loss of stone from or bleeding of the road
surface that may occur during the course of the (iv) General
Contract or during the maintenance period can be All operations to correct bleeding shall be carried
attributed to the Contractor not observing any of the out only when the surface temperature is high
requirements of the Specifications, not using the correct enough to promote adherence.
rates of application, or to any other omission or fault on
the part of the Contractor, any corrective work ordered This work shall be effected as soon as possible
by the Engineer shall be at the Contractor's cost, after bleeding occurs.
including the supply, precoating, stockpiling at selected
sites and later removal if not used, of any aggregate Before opening any rectified work to traffic, all the
reserved for corrective work during the period of loose aggregate shall be swept off the surface.
maintenance or thereafter.
It is essential to use a heavy pneumatic-tyred roller
Where the reason for bleeding or loss of stone, in the on all work. Rolling shall continue until the Engineer
opinion of the Engineer, cannot be attributed to any is satisfied that all the aggregate has been properly
fault or neglect on the part of the Contractor, the embedded. No rolling shall be done in wet weather,
Employer shall pay at the bid rates for the cost of any cold weather or early in the morning when the
remedial measures taken on the instructions of the surface is cold.
Engineer.
Notwithstanding the above methods of treatment,
(a) Bleeding the Engineer may order any seal which has not
Bleeding shall be corrected by one or more of the been properly constructed to be removed and
methods described below, as may be ordered by the replaced. The removal of the seal shall be done so
Engineer or by employing alternative methods on as not to damage the existing base. All aggregate
agreement with the Engineer. and binder shall be removed either by grader or by
hand tools and any damage done to the surface
(i) Method 1: Light bleeding shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Nominal 7 mm aggregate conforming to the
requirements of CLAUSE 4302 shall be used. The (b) Loss of stone
aggregate shall be coated as described in Loss of stone shall be corrected in accordance with the
SUBCLAUSE 4302(d) with an approved precoating requirements of the Engineer, with the aid of a fog
3
fluid by using 10 to 12 l/m . spray. The surface to be repaired shall be clean and
dry, and a 30% anionic or cationic spray-grade
2
If the binder of the existing surface has an oxidised emulsion shall be applied at a rate of 0.6 l/m or such
film or if the road has been used by traffic for some other rate as may be approved by the Engineer.
time, it shall be treated either by brushing in power
paraffin to soften the surface of the binder, or the 4313 MAINTENANCE
surface shall be softened up with gas burners. This The Contractor shall maintain the bituminous surface
work shall only be done on hot days. until the work is finally accepted by the Employer. Any
damage done to the surface or any defects which may
The aggregate shall be applied to the surface develop before the issue of the taking over certificate,
3 2
immediately at the rate of 0.004 m /m and rolled fair wear and tear excepted, shall be corrected by the
with a heavy pneumatic-tyred roller until the Contractor at his own cost and to the requirements of
aggregate is firmly embedded. All loose aggregate the Engineer.
4314 TOLERANCES AND FINISH precoating material irrespective of the type of

REQUIREMENTS precoating material used, and for all handling, loading
and off-loading of all materials.
(a) Binder spray rates
The following terms are used for measure of binder
ITEM UNIT
spray rates:
43.02 APPLICATION OF A FOG SPRAY
− CONVENTIONAL BINDERS: Conventional binders
OF 30% SPRAY-GRADE OR
shall be measured at spraying temperature in litres
EQUIVALENT DILUTED STABLE GRADE
per square metre.
EMULSION:
− MODIFIED BINDERS: Whenever the terms “net (a) SPRAY-GRADE EMULSION LITRE (l)
bitumen” or “net quantity of bitumen” are used in
these Specifications to specify the rate of (b) STABLE-GRADE EMULSION LITRE (l)
application of the binder for conventional or
homogeneous modified binder (hot or cold), they The unit of measurement shall be the litre of 30%
shall mean viscosity grade (penetration-grade) spray-grade or equivalent diluted stable grade emulsion
bitumen net cold. Non-homogeneous modified measured at spraying temperature.
binders, however, shall be specified at spraying
temperature. The bid rate shall include full compensation for
providing the material and for applying the fog spray as
(b) Surface tolerances, rate of application, specified.
conditional acceptance
The completed seal shall be free from corrugations or
any other wave effect where depressions are preceded ITEM UNIT
and followed by humps or ridges no matter how small 43.03 CUTTING BACK OF LITRES OF
the distance between the top of the hump to the bottom BITUMEN (ALL MATERIALS IN THE CUTTER (l)
of the preceding or following depression. BLENDED BINDER ARE PAID FOR
ELSEWHERE)
The completed bituminous work shall comply. with the
requirements set out in SECTION 7300 regarding surface
tolerances and finish. The provisions of SECTION 7200 The unit of measurement shall be the litres of cutter
shall apply to conditional acceptance. (kerosene) admixed to the penetration grade bitumen.
Attention is drawn to the fact that the actual materials
(c) Surface appearance (bitumen and cutter) are paid for elsewhere under their
The completed seal shall be of uniform texture without respective Sections.
gaps or patches and shall be free from any loose
aggregate or bitumen spillage. Corrective work shall be The bid rates shall include full compensation for all
carried out in such a manner as to blend in colour, operations involved in blending cutter with bitumen
texture and finish with adjacent work. according to the Specifications or as directed by the
Engineer.
Any areas which show signs of bleeding or loss of
aggregate after the section has been opened to traffic
shall be corrected as specified in CLAUSE 4312.
Corrective work shall be carried out in such a manner
as to blend in colour, texture and finish with adjacent
work.

Measurement and payment will be made under the
various sections where the different seals are
described.
The following items of work shall also be measured and

paid for as stated below:
ITEM UNIT
43.01 CORRECTION FOR
BLEEDING:
(a) AGGREGATE:
3
(i) 14mm CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(ii) 10mm CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(iii) 7mm CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(b) PRECOATING OF AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE (m )
The unit of measurement for aggregate shall be the

cubic metre of aggregate supplied. The bid rates shall
include full compensation for procuring and furnishing
the materials, including all transport and, if required, for
stockpiling the aggregate at selected sites indicated by
the Engineer.
The unit of measurement for precoating the aggregate

shall be the cubic metre of material precoated. The bid
rate shall include full compensation for precoating the
material as specified, for procuring and furnishing the

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND 4402 MATERIALS

SEALS
The bituminous binder shall consist of one of the
SECTION 4400: SINGLE following binders, whichever is specified in the Special
Specifications or the Bill of Quantities or ordered by the
SURFACE DRESSINGS Engineer:
− 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen;
CONTENTS: − 150/200 penetration-grade bitumen,
− 60%, 65% or 70% spray-grade emulsion;
CLAUSE PAGE − MC-3000 cut-back bitumen;
4401 SCOPE 4000-32 − Modified binder as specified.
4403 CONSTRUCTION 4000-32 (i) Bitumen coats
4404 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4000-33 The specified bituminous binders shall comply with
the conditions of SECTION 4300.
(ii) Fog spray

4401 SCOPE Fog spray, when specified, shall be 30% or 60%
This Section covers the supplying and furnishing of all spray grade emulsion of anionic or cationic type, as
materials for the repair of existing surfaces and for the specified or ordered by the Engineer.
construction of reseals or new single seals.
(ii) Pre coating fluid
The requirements of all relevant clauses of SECTION Pre coating fluid, when pre coating of aggregate is
4300 shall apply to this Section. specified, shall be bitumen emulsion, or alternative
approved types, as specified or ordered by the
Engineer.
(b) Aggregate
Aggregate for surface dressing shall consist of clean,
tough, durable fragments of crushed stone free from
any deleterious matter and shall comply with the
requirements given in TABLES 4402/1 and 4402/2.
TABLE 4402/1
GRADING LIMITS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR CHIPPING. (CML test number)
Chipping, nominal size of aggregates, (% passing)

Grading CML 1.7
20 mm 14 mm 10 mm 7 mm
Sieves (mm):
25 100
20 85-100 100
14 0-30 85-100 100
10 0-5 0-30 85-100 100
6.3 - 0-5 0-30 85-100
5 - - 0-5 0-30
2.36 - - - 0-5
Fines: 0.425 < 0.5 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.5
Dust: 0.075 < 0.3 < 0.5 < 0.3 < 1.0
TABLE 4402/2
REQUIREMENTS FOR CHIPPING. (CML test number)
Aggregate Chipping, nominal size of aggregates, (% passing)

properties 20 mm 14 mm 10 mm 7 mm
Maximum Flakiness
20 25 30
index CML 2.4
Minimum strength, *) For AADT > 1000: 160 kN

TFV dry. CML 2.7 *) For AADT < 1000: 120 kN
Ratio dry to soaked
value of TFV. CML TFVsoaked shall be minimum 75% of the corresponding TFVdry value
2.7
*) The appropriate traffic volume that applies to any location, shall be as given in the Drawings or Special Specifications.
Where such information is not given, the decision of the Engineer shall apply.
4403 CONSTRUCTION to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the use of brooms,

water, compressed air or any other method required to
(a) Preparation of the surface give a satisfactory result.
Surface treatment shall not commence until the existing
surface has been repaired of any defects and cleaned

(b) Application of binder and aggregate indicated surface. Should it be required by the
Engineer, the layer shall be spread evenly by means of
(i) General hand brooms.
The bitumen coat and aggregate, of the types and
sizes specified in the Special Specifications, or (g) Precoating of aggregate
ordered by the Engineer, shall be applied as If stated in the Special Specifications, or if so directed
specified in SUBCLAUSE 4307(b). by the Engineer, the aggregate shall be precoated with
a precoating fluid as specified in SUBCLAUSE 4302(e).
(ii) Nominal rates of application
The nominal rates given are for information only.
The application rates for which payment is 4404 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
calculated, are given in the Bill of Quantities. If,
however, no application rates are given in the Bill of ITEM UNIT
Quantities, then the rates in TABLE 4403/1 shall be
used for bidding purposes. 44.01 SINGLE SEALS (INDICATE
TYPE OF BINDER AND HOT
SPRAYED APPLICATION RATE IN
LITRES PER SQUARE METRE):
TABLE 4403/1
NOMINAL RATES OF BINDER AND AGGREGATE APPLICATION, (a) USING 7 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
2
SINGLE SURFACE DRESSING (m )
(b) USING 10 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
2
Nominal size Nominal rates of application (m )
of aggregate (c) USING 14 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
Binder hot Aggregate 2
(mm) (m )
spray rate spread rate
2 3 2 (d) USING 20 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
( l/m ) ( m /m ) 2
(m )
20 1.80 0.015
14 1.50 0.012 The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
10 1.10 0.010 completed and accepted seal.
7 0.80 0.007
(iii) Actual rates of application furnishing all materials, marking the centre or reference
The actual rates of application for use on site on lines, spraying of binder, spreading of aggregate, rolling
any part of the Works, shall be as determined on and all other incidentals necessary for completing the
site, on approval of the Engineer. The difference in work as specified.
actual rates of application compared to the rates for
bidding purposes are paid for separately in variation
rates measured in cubic metres and litres (hot ITEM UNIT
sprayed) for aggregate and binder respectively, as
specified in CLAUSE 4404. 44.02 SINGLE SEALS. BITUMINOUS LITRES (l)
BINDER VARIATIONS:
(c) Initial rolling (a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l)
Initial rolling shall be carried out as specified in CLAUSE BITUMEN
4308. (b) 80/100 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l)
BITUMEN
(d) Final rolling
Any areas deficient in aggregate shall have additional (c) MC3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
material added so as to leave the carpet with a single (e) BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE TYPE AND LITRES (l)
layer of chippings lying shoulder to shoulder. It is COMPOSITION)
essential to ensure that only one layer of chippings is (h) PRECOATING FLUID (STATE TYPE) LITRES (l)
applied and every care shall be taken to avoid over-
application of chippings. (g) OTHER TYPES OF BITUMEN (STATE LITRES (l)
TYPE AND COMPOSITION)
The final rolling shall be done with a pneumatic-tyred or
a rubber-soled steel-wheeled roller only, applying a The unit of measurement of bituminous binder in
minimum of four coverages. respect of an increase or a decrease in the specified
rates of application shall be the litres measured at
The finished surface shall be well-knit and have a spraying temperature.
uniform appearance free of roller-tyre marks. All
aggregate contaminated by oil, fuel or grease shall be Payment for variations shall be made as specified in
removed and dumped in an approved waste site and CLAUSE 1213.
replaced by clean aggregate. All loose aggregate shall
be broomed off the surface with a rotary broom or hard Where kerosene is used to cut back the penetration-
brooms as directed by the Engineer. grade bitumen, the rate for kerosene variation shall
include full compensation for providing the kerosene
(e) Fog spray and mixing it with the bitumen.
If stated in the Special Specifications, or if so directed
by the Engineer, a fog spray of 60% anionic or cationic
emulsion shall be applied to the surface of the ITEM UNIT
aggregate by means of a pressure distributor at the 44.03 SINGLE SEALS.
required rate and dilution as approved by the Engineer. AGGREGATE VARIATIONS:
(f) Blinding (a) USING 7 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE
3
If stated in the Special Specifications, or if so directed (m )
by the Engineer, a light blinding layer of natural or (b) USING 10 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE
3
crusher sand shall be applied by the Contractor to (m )
prevent chippings from being picked up by traffic. The (c) USING 14 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE
3
blinding layer shall be spread evenly over the full (m )

(d) USING 20 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE The bid rate shall include full compensation for
3
(m ) providing the material and applying the blinding coat
complete as specified, and, should it be required,
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of stockpiling the sand at an approved locality.
increased or decreased aggregate applied, as
compared to the amounts required at the specified
nominal rate of application.
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in

CLAUSE 1213.
ITEM UNIT
44.04 APPLICATION OF FOG SPRAY:
(a) USING 60% SPRAY-GRADE EMULSION LITRES (l)
(b) USING 60% SPRAY-GRADE LITRES (l)
EMULSION
The unit of measurement shall be the litre, measured at

spraying temperature.

furnishing the material and applying the fog spray as
specified.
ITEM UNIT
44.05 PRECOATING THE CUBIC
AGGREGATE (INDICATE TYPE OF METRE
3
PRECOATING FLUID AND RATE OF (m )
APPLICATION IN LITRES PER CUBIC
METRE OF AGGREGATE)
The unit of measurement for the precoating of

aggregate shall be the cubic metre of aggregate so
treated and used on the surfacing in quantities
according to drawings or as instructed by the Engineer..

furnishing the equipment and materials and precoating
the aggregate as specified, including the handling,
stockpiling and protecting of the stockpiles against
inclement weather.
ITEM UNIT
44.06 ADDITION OF
APPROVED WETTING AGENT:
(a) PROVIDING AND SUPPLYING PRIME COST SUM
(b) HANDLING, APPLYING, PERCENTAGE OF
PROFIT AND ALL OTHER PRIME COST SUM
COSTS
Prime-cost sum will be paid for in terms of the General

Conditions of Contract for providing and supplying an
approved wetting agent to the precoating fluid as
specified or as directed by the Engineer.
The bid percentage of the prime cost sum shall include

full compensation for handling the material, storing and
introducing it into the mix, including any equipment
required, and for all other charges and profit.
ITEM UNIT
44.07 AGGREGATE FOR
BLINDING:
3
(a) NATURAL SAND CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(b) CRUSHER SAND USING CUBIC METRE (m )

sand according to drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND 4502 MATERIALS

SEALS
The bituminous binder shall consist of one of the
SECTION 4500: DOUBLE following binders, whichever is specified in the Special
Specifications or the Bill of Quantities or ordered by the
SURFACE DRESSINGS Engineer:
− 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen;
CONTENTS − 150/200 penetration-grade bitumen,
− 60%, 65% or 70% spray-grade emulsion;
CLAUSE PAGE − MC-3000 cut-back bitumen;
4501 SCOPE 4000-35 − Modified binder as specified.
4503 CONSTRUCTION 4000-35 (i) Bitumen coats
4504 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4000-36 The specified bituminous binders shall comply with
the conditions of SECTION 4300.
(ii) Fog spray

4501 SCOPE Fog spray, when specified, shall be 30% or 60%
This Section covers the supplying and furnishing of all spray grade emulsion of anionic or cationic type, as
materials for the construction of a bituminous double specified or ordered by the Engineer.
seal for resealing or new construction. The seal shall be
constructed using either 20 mm plus 10mm aggregate (ii) Pre coating fluid
or 14 mm plus 7 mm aggregate, whichever is shown in Pre coating fluid, when pre coating of aggregate is
the Bill of Quantities. specified, shall be bitumen emulsion, or alternative
approved types, as specified or ordered by the
The requirements of all relevant clauses of SECTION Engineer.
4300 shall apply to this SECTION.
(b) Aggregate
Aggregate for surface dressing shall consist of clean,
tough, durable fragments of crushed stone free from
any deleterious matter and shall comply with the
requirements given in TABLES 4502/1 and 4502/2.
TABLE 4502/1
GRADING LIMITS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR CHIPPING. (CML test number)
Chipping, nominal size of aggregates, (% passing)

Grading CML 1.7
20 mm 14 mm 10 mm 7 mm
Sieves (mm):
25 100
20 85-100 100
14 0-30 85-100 100
10 0-5 0-30 85-100 100
6.3 - 0-5 0-30 85-100
5 - - 0-5 0-30
2.36 - - - 0-5
Fines: 0.425 < 0.5 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.5
Dust: 0.075 < 0.3 < 0.5 < 0.3 < 1.0
TABLE 4502/2
REQUIREMENTS FOR CHIPPING. (CML test number)
Aggregate Chipping, nominal size of aggregates, (% passing)

properties 20 mm 14 mm 10 mm 7 mm
Maximum Flakiness
20 25 30
index CML 2.4
Minimum strength, *) For AADT > 1000: 160kN

TFV dry. CML 2.7 *) For AADT < 1000: 120kN
Ratio dry to soaked
value of TFV. CML TFVsoaked shall be minimum 75% of the corresponding TFVdry value
2.7
*) The appropriate traffic volume that applies to any location, shall be as given in the Drawings or Special Specifications.
Where such information is not given, the decision of the Engineer shall apply.
4503 CONSTRUCTION to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the use of brooms,

water, compressed air or any other method required to
(a) Preparation of the surface give a satisfactory result.
Surface treatment shall not commence until the existing
surface has been repaired of any defects and cleaned

(b) Nominal rates of application of binder and TABLE 4503/2

aggregate SECOND LAYER OF DOUBLE SURFACE DRESSINGS.
The bitumen coat and aggregate, of the types and sizes NOMINAL RATES OF BINDER AND AGGREGATE APPLICATION.
given in the Special Specifications, or ordered by the
Engineer, shall be applied as specified in SUBCLAUSE Nomi- Nominal rates of application
4307(b). Nominal rates of application of binder and nal
aggregate are given in TABLES 4503/1 4503/2 4503/3 Binder, hot bitumen (l/ m2)
size of
and 4503/4. The given nominal rates of application of aggre- Aggre-
AADT
binder and aggregate are for information only. The gate gate
application rates for which payment shall be calculated, (mm) <200 200- >1000 (m3 /m2)
are given in the Bill of Quantities. If, however, no 1000
application rates are given in the Bill of Quantities, then 10 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.009
the rates in TABLES 4503/1 and 4503/2 shall be used for
7 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.007
bidding purposes.
(c) Actual rates of application of binder and (f) Fog spray

aggregate If specified in the Special Specifications, or if so
The actual rates of application for use on site on any directed by the Engineer, a fog spray of 60% or 30%
part of the Works, shall be as determined on site, on anionic or cationic emulsion shall be applied to the
approval of the Engineer. The difference in actual rates surface of the aggregate by means of a pressure
of application compared to the rates for bidding distributor at the required rate.
purposes are paid for separately in variation rates
measured in cubic metres and litres (hot sprayed) for (g) Blinding
aggregate and binder respectively, as specified in If specified in the Special Specifications, or if so
CLAUSE 4504. directed by the Engineer, a light blinding layer of natural
or crusher sand shall be applied by the Contractor to
prevent chippings from being picked up by traffic. The
(d) First layer of double surface dressings blinding layer shall be spread evenly over the full
indicated surface. Should it be required by the
(i) Nominal rates of binder and aggregate Engineer, the layer shall be spread evenly by means of
The nominal rates of binder and aggregate shall be hand brooms.
as given in TABLE 4503/1 for the first layer of double
surface dressings. (h) Initial rolling of second layer
Initial rolling of the second layer of aggregate shall be
carried out as specified in SUBCLAUSE 4307(b). The final
TABLE 4503/1 rolling shall be done with a pneumatic-tyred or a rubber-
FIRST LAYER OF DOUBLE SURFACE DRESSINGS. NOMINAL soled steel-wheeled roller only, applying a minimum of
RATES OF BINDER AND AGGREGATE APPLICATION. four coverages.
Nomi- Nominal rates of application The finished surface shall be well-knit and have a
nal uniform appearance free of roller-tyre marks. All
Binder, hot bitumen (l/ m2) aggregate contaminated by oil, fuel or grease shall be
size of
aggre- Aggre- removed and dumped in an approved waste site and
AADT
gate gate replaced by clean aggregate. All loose aggregate shall
(mm) <200 200- >1000 (m3 /m2) be broomed off the surface with a rotary broom or hard
1000 brooms as directed by the Engineer.
20 1.8 1.5 1.2 0.015
(i) Broom drag and final rolling of second layer
14 1.4 1.1 1.0 0.011 Dragging and final rolling of the second layer of
aggregate shall be carried out as specified in
(ii) Rolling SUBCLAUSE 4307(b).
Initial rolling shall be carried out as specified in
CLAUSE 4308. Any areas deficient in aggregate (j) Fog spray
shall have additional material added so as to leave When required by the Special Specifications or if so
the carpet with a single layer of chippings lying directed by the Engineer in writing, a fog spray of 30%
shoulder to shoulder. It is essential to ensure that or 60% bitumen emulsion shall be applied to the
only one layer of chippings is applied and every surface of the second layer of aggregate by means of a
care shall be taken to avoid over-application of pressure sprayer at the rate of application specified by
chippings. the Engineer.
(e) Second layer of double surface dressings 4504 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(i) Nominal rates of binder and aggregate ITEM UNIT
The bituminous binder specified by the Engineer
shall be applied and followed by the second layer of 45.01 DOUBLE SURFACE
DRESSING USING:
aggregate of the size specified in the Special
Specifications or as ordered by the Engineer. The (a) 20 mm AND 10 mm SQUARE
ST ND 2
nominal rates of binder and aggregate shall be as AGGREGATE IN 1 AND 2 METRE (m )
given in TABLE 4503/2 for the second layer of LAYER RESPECTIVELY (STATE
double surface dressings. TYPE OF BINDER AND HOT
BINDER APPLICATION RATE FOR
The second application of binder shall preferably EACH LAYER IN LITRES PER
take place within 48 hours of the application of the SQUARE METRE)
first coat when penetration grade bitumen is used (b) 14 mm AND 7 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE
for the first coat and not less than ten days of the ST ND
IN 1 AND 2 LAYER
2
METRE (m )
application of the fist coat when cutback bitumen is RESPECTIVELY (STATE TYPE OF
used in the first coat. BINDER AND HOT BINDER

APPLICATION RATE FOR EACH The bid rate per litre of emulsion shall include full
LAYER IN LITRES PER SQUARE compensation for procuring and furnishing the binder
METRE and applying the fog spray as specified.

completed and accepted surface treatment. ITEM UNIT
45.05 PRECOATING SECOND CUBIC METRE
3
The bid rate shall include full compensation for APPLICATION OF AGGREGATE (m )
furnishing all materials, marking the centre line or (STATE TYPE OF PRECOATING
reference lines, spraying of binder, spreading of FLUID AND APPLICATION RATE
aggregate, rolling, removing of dust or deleterious IN LITRES PER CUBIC METRE)
material, supplying of water and spraying of haul roads
and construction roads, trimming the edges of the The unit of measurement for the precoating of
completed surface, and all other incidentals necessary aggregate shall be the cubic metre of aggregate so
for completing the work as specified, except the treated and used on the surfacing at the specified
application of a fog spray and precoating of aggregate, application rates according to drawings or as directed
which shall be paid for separately. by the Engineer.

ITEM UNIT furnishing the equipment and materials and precoating
45.02 BITUMINOUS BINDER VARIATION: the aggregate as specified, including the handling.
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l) Stockpiling and protecting of the stockpiles against
BITUMEN inclement weather.
(b) 80/100 PENETRATION GRADE BITUMEN LITRES (l)
(c) MC3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l) ITEM UNIT
(d) BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE TYPE AND LITRES (l) 45.06 ADDITION OF APPROVED WETTING KILO-
COMPOSITION) AGENT TO THE BINDER (STATE TYPE AND GRAMMES
(e) PRECOATING FLUID (STATE TYPE) LITRES (l) NOMINAL APPLICATION RATE PERCENT OF (kg)
BINDER):
(f) OTHER TYPES OF BITUMEN (STATE LITRES (l)
TYPE AND COMPOSITION)
providing, handling the material, storing and introducing
The unit of measurement of bituminous binder in it into the mix, including any equipment required, for the
respect of variations in the specified rates of application work.
shall be a litre, measured at spraying temperature.

CLAUSE 1213.
ITEM UNIT
45.03 AGGREGATE
VARIATION:
(a) 20 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
AGGREGATE (m3)
(b) 14 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
AGGREGATE (m3)
(c) 10 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
AGGREGATE (m3)
(d) 7 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
AGGREGATE (m3)
The unit of measurement with respect to variations in

application of aggregate shall be the cubic metre of
aggregate specified on site by the Engineer minus the
cubic metres of aggregate calculated from application
rates given in TABLE 4503/2 and already paid for in ITEM
45.01.

CLAUSE 1213.
ITEM UNIT
45.04 APPLICATION OF FOG SPRAY LITRES
CONSISTING OF BITUMEN EMULSION (l)
(STATE TYPE AND PERCENTAGE
BITUMEN CONTENT IN THE EMULSION)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of emulsion

sprayed as specified and measured at the application
temperature.

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND TABLE 4602/1

GRADING FOR OTTA SEALS
SEALS
Sieve size Percentage by mass passing
SECTION 4600: OTTA SEALS (mm) through sieve (%)
20 100
14 60-80
CONTENTS: 10 36-98
CLAUSE PAGE 5 10-70
2 0-44
4601 SCOPE 4000-38 1.18 0-38
4602 MATERIALS 4000-38 0.425 0-25
4603 CONSTRUCTION AND AFTER CARE 4000-38 0.075 0-10
(ii) Aggregate strength
The aggregate strength requirements tested
according to test method CML 2.7 shall conform to
4601 SCOPE TABLE 4602/2.
This Section covers the supply and application of Otta
Seal surface treatment for maintenance or new
construction using a crushed or natural material, and TABLE 4602/2
cover seals made of sand or crusher dust. This Section AGGREGATE STRENGTH FOR OTTA SEALS, GENERAL
also covers the case whereby a double Otta Seal is REQUIREMENT
applied.
Ten Percent Ten Percent Fines Value, TFV
Reference shall be made to SECTION 4300: as Fines Value, tested after 24 hours soaking
provisions contained therein will not necessarily be TFV tested dry (in % of TFV tested dry)
repeated or specifically referred to in this Section.
Minimum 110 kN 75%
4602 MATERIALS The aggregate strength for Otta Seals on roads with
AADT less than 100 may be reduced to the values
shown in TABLE 4602/3 on approval of the
(a) Binders
Engineer.
150/200 penetration grade bitumen or MC 3000 cutback
grade bitumen shall be used in warm weather. In cold
weather, when night temperatures are likely to fall
0 TABLE 4602/3
below 10 C, MC 800 cutback grade bitumen may be
AGGREGATE STRENGTH FOR OTTA SEALS, AADT LESS
used or alternatively 150/200 penetration grade bitumen
THAN 100
may be cut back with kerosene to the appropriate
Ten Percent Fines Ten Percent Fines
viscosity range as directed by the Engineer. TABLE 10.9
Value, TFV tested dry Value, TFV tested after
in the Pavement and Materials design Manual 1999
24 hours soaking
shall be used as guidance for the recommended type of
(in % of TFV tested dry)
binder for Otta Seals.
Minimum 90 kN 60%
(b) Kerosene for cutting back bitumen
Kerosene shall be used as the cutter where correction (iii) Flakiness Index
of viscosity is required or cutback bitumen is made on If crushed material is used the Flakiness Index
site from penetration grade bitumen. Allowance shall be should be determined in accordance with CML test
made for quantities between 0 – 25% by volume of the no 2.4, and should not exceed 30.
total quantity hot sprayed bitumen, as directed by the
Engineer. (e) Sand for cover seals
The materials used can be crusher dust, river sand or
(c) Anti-stripping agent other natural sand and shall be non-plastic, free from
When anti-stripping agent is required it shall be added organic matter and lumps of clay. All the material shall
to the bitumen immediately before the start of spraying pass the 6.3 mm sieve, unless otherwise approved by
operations and shall be circulated for a minimum period the Engineer.
of 30 minutes prior to spraying. Anti-stripping agent that
has been kept hot in the bitumen distributor for more
than 5 hours shall be considered stale, and a further 4603 CONSTRUCTION AND AFTER CARE
dosage amounting to half of the originally specified shall
be added. (a) General
This clause contains procedures for construction of Otta
Seals and sand cover seals. The operations listed
(d) Aggregate for Otta Seals
below are part of normal construction procedures for
the seals and no additional payment will be made for
(i) Grading any operation except that given in CLAUSE 4604.
The grading curve for the Otta Seal shall fall
smoothly within the envelope detailed in TABLE (i) Granular base courses of non-calcareous materials
4602/1. The upper nominal size shall not be larger do not normally require a prime, unless otherwise
than 16 mm, if not otherwise directed by the directed by the Engineer. Calcrete base courses
Engineer to be 20 mm nominal size. shall always be primed.
(ii) The sealed surface shall receive not less than 15

passes of a pneumatic tyred roller on the day of
sealing. On the same day, the Engineer may direct
one pass with a 10 - 12 tonnes heavy tandem steel
roller. During the following 2 days, the entire sealed

area, including the shoulders, shall receive a further All spray rates refer to hot spray rates of binder
minimum of 15 passes daily, unless otherwise including any cutters and shall fall within the range
2
approved by the Engineer. A minimum of two 1.5 and 2.0 l/m per layer per layer of Otta seal. For
2
pneumatic tyred rollers with a minimum weight of 12 bidding purposes 1.7 l/m should be used, however
tonnes shall be used for the rolling operations. the actual spray rate shall be established on site for
the approval of the Engineer. TABLE 10.9 in the
(iii) The Engineer may direct even trafficking of the Pavement and Materials design Manual 1999 shall
surfaced area and channelling of the traffic may be be used as guidance for the recommended spray
required for certain periods and traffic cones or rate of binder for Otta Seals.
similar may be required.
Absorbent aggregates with a water absorption of
(iv) The road should be opened to traffic immediately more than 2% shall require an additional 0.3 to 0.5
2
after the sealing operations are completed, but a l/m (in total) for both layers, as directed by the
maximum speed limit of 50 km/h should be Engineer.
enforced during the initial 2 - 3 weeks after
construction. (ii) Binder for sand cover seal
All spray rates refer to hot spray rates of binder
(v) Aggregate that has been dislodged by traffic during including any cutters and shall fall within the range
2
the immediate post construction period shall be 0.6 and 0.9 l/m for sand cover seals. For bidding
2
broomed back into the exposed areas during the purposes 0.8 l/m should be used, however the
first 2 - 3 weeks, as directed by the Engineer. actual spray rate shall be established on site for the
approval of the Engineer. TABLE 10.9 in the
(vi) After 2 - 3 weeks of trafficking the excess aggregate Pavement and Materials Design Manual 1999 shall
shall be swept off the road surface and the speed be used as guidance for the recommended spray
limitations can be lifted, unless otherwise directed rate of binder for Otta Seals.
by the Engineer. If natural gravel is used with a
fairly high content of fines, the period may be (iii) Anti-stripping agent
extended to 6 weeks or as directed by the When required, the anti-stripping agent shall be
Engineer. mixed with the hot bitumen by 0.5% to 1.0% by
weight of bitumen as directed by the Engineer.
(vii) A team shall be retained on site to deal with areas
of bleeding if required. The team will be required (iv) Aggregate for Otta Seals
during the normal construction period as well as The aggregate application rates for Otta Seals shall
3 2
during the first hot season following the completion be in the range 0.013 to 0.020 m /m .per layer. For
3 2
of sealing operations. The Contractor’s attention is bidding purposes a spread rate of 0.015 m /m per
drawn to the fact that any cost of mobilising and layer should be used, however the actual spray rate
operating this team shall be included in the pay item shall be established on site for the approval of the
rates. Engineer. TABLE 10.9 in the Pavement and
Materials Design Manual 1999 shall be used as
(viii) A minimum period of 8 - 12 weeks should guidance for the recommended spray rate of binder
elapse between construction of the subsequent for Otta Seals.
layers of the surfacing, and during that period the
road should receive as much heavy trafficking as (v) Aggregate for sand cover seals
possible, unless otherwise directed by the The application rates of crusher dust or sand shall
3 2
Engineer. fall within the range 0.010 and 0.012 m /m for sand
cover seals. For bidding purposes a spread rate of
3 2
(ix) Prior to applying subsequent seals, the surfaced 0.011 m /m should be used, however the actual
area shall be broomed free of dust and loose spray rate shall be established on site for the
stones or other foreign matter. approval of the Engineer. TABLE 10.9 in the
Pavement and Materials Design Manual 1999 shall
(x) The sand cover seal shall on the day of surfacing be used as guidance for the recommended spread
receive not less than 15 passes of a pneumatic rate of aggregate for sand cover seals
tyred roller with a minimum weight of 12 tonnes.
(xi) Aggregate that has been dislodged by traffic during 4604 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
the immediate post construction period shall be
broomed back into the exposed areas during the ITEM UNIT
first 2 - 3 weeks as directed by the Engineer.
46.01 SINGLE OTTA SEAL (STATE
WHETHER CRUSHED OR NATURAL
(b) Equipment
AGGREGATE IS USED. STATE ALSO
Plant and equipment required for the construction of
BITUMEN AND AGGREGATE
Otta Seals, as specified in SECTION 4300 shall be
APPLICATION RATES AS WELL AS
readily available on site.
PERCENTAGE ANTISTRIPPING AGENT
IN THE BINDER) USING THE
(c) Preparation of the surface
FOLLOWING TYPE OF BINDER:
The requirements of SECTIONS 4100 and 4300 shall
apply. (a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE SQUARE
2
BITUMEN METRE (m )
(d) Application of surfacing (b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE
The binders, of the type and grade required, and the VISCOSITY GRADE
2
METRE (m )
aggregates, of the size specified in the Bill of Quantities
or ordered by the Engineer, shall be applied in (c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE
2
VISCOSITY GRADE METRE (m )
accordance with the provisions of SECTION 4300.
(e) Rates of application of material
(i) Binder for Otta Seal

ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

46.02 SINGLE OTTA SEAL (STATE 46.07 VARIATIONS IN ANTI-STRIPPING KILOGRAMME
WHETHER CRUSHED OR NATURAL AGENT (kg)
BITUMEN AND AGGREGATE
APPLICATION RATES AS WELL AS ITEM UNIT
IN THE BINDER.) WITH SAND COVER 46.08 PROVIDING CONES AND CARRYING KILOMETRE
SEAL USING CRUSHER DUST OR
OUT ALL TRAFFIC CONTROL (km)
NATURAL SAND. THE FOLLOWING REQUIRED FOR CHANNELLING
TRAFFIC TO ENSURE EVEN
TYPE OF BINDER TO BE USED IN THE
TRAFFICKING ACROSS THE ROAD
OTTA SEAL:
WIDTH AS DIRECTED BY THE
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE SQUARE ENGINEER
2
BITUMEN METRE (m )
(b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE
2
VISCOSITY GRADE METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
(c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE 46.09 SWEEPING BACK DISLODGED KILOMETRE
2
VISCOSITY GRADE METRE (m ) OTTA SEAL AGGREGATE INTO THE (km)
WHEEL TRACKS, AS DIRECTED BY
THE ENGINEER
ITEM UNIT
46.03 DOUBLE OTTA SEAL (STATE
WHETHER CRUSHED OR NATURAL ITEM UNIT
AGGREGATE IS USED. STATE ALSO 46.10 SWEEPING BACK DISLODGED KILOMETRE
BITUMEN AND AGGREGATE SAND OR CRUSHER DUST INTO (km)
APPLICATION RATES AS WELL AS THE WHEEL TRACKS, AS DIRECTED
PERCENTAGE ANTISTRIPPING AGENT BY THE ENGINEER
IN THE BINDER) USING THE
FOLLOWING TYPE OF BINDER:
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE SQUARE ITEM UNIT
BITUMEN METRE
(m )
2 46.11 ATTENDING TO AREAS OF KILOMETRE
(b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE FATTINESS AND BLEEDING BY (km)
APPLYING FINE AGGREGATES OR
VISCOSITY GRADE METRE
2 SAND, AS DIRECTED BY THE
(m )
(c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE ENGINEER.
2
(m ) The bid rate shall include full compensation for
furnishing all materials, for an unlimited free haul
distance whether the crushed materials are obtained
ITEM UNIT from a commercial source or an approved borrow-pit or
46.04 SUPPLY AND MIXING OF KEROSENE LITRE (l) quarry, marking the centreline, spraying of binders,
FOR CUTTING BACK BITUMEN TO
spreading of aggregates, rolling, removing deleterious
CORRECT VISCOSITY AS DIRECTED
material, supplying of water and spraying of haul roads
BY THE ENGINEER and construction roads, trimming the edges of the
completed surface and all other incidentals necessary
for completing the work as specified.
ITEM UNIT
46.05 VARIATIONS IN BITUMINOUS
BINDER:
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l)
BITUMEN
(b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
VISCOSITY GRADE
(c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
VISCOSITY GRADE
ITEM UNIT
46.06 VARIATIONS IN AGGREGATE:
(a) OTTA SEAL, CRUSHED CUBIC
3
MATERIAL METRE (m )
(b) OTTA SEAL, NATURAL MATERIAL CUBIC
3
METRE (m )
(c) SAND COVER SEAL, CRUSHER CUBIC
3
DUST OR NATURAL SAND METRE (m )

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND TABLE 4703/2

GRADING LIMITS FOR SLURRY SEALS, CML test method
SEALS
Sieve size Percentage passing sieve
SECTION 4700 : SAND SEALS (mm)
CML 1.7
( % by mass)
Fine type Coarse type
AND SLURRY 10 100
5 100 85-100
2 90-100 50-90
CONTENTS: 1.18 60-90 32-70
CLAUSE PAGE 0.425 32-60 20-44
4701 SCOPE 4000-41 0.150 10-27 7-20
4702 BINDER 4000-41 0.075 4-12 2-8
4703 AGGREGATE 4000-41
4704 SAND SEAL CONSTRUCTION AND AFTER
CARE 4000-41 4704 SAND SEAL CONSTRUCTION AND
4705 SLURRY CONSTRUCTION AND AFTER CARE 4000-42 AFTER CARE
(a) Equipment
The following equipment shall be readily available on
the site:
4701 SCOPE − pneumatic-tyred rollers
This SECTION covers the supply and application of all − a rotary broom
materials used for constructing sand seals and slurry − a drag broom
seals. The requirements of all relevant clauses of − mechanical aggregate spreaders if spreading by
SECTION 4300 shall apply to this Section. hand is not used
(b) Preparation of surface before application of seal

4702 BINDER The road shall be cleaned of all loose or deleterious
material to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the
The following grades of binder shall be used as set out sand seal is applied.
in the Special Specifications or the Bill of Quantities or
as ordered by the Engineer: The surface of the base shall be watered, rolled and
− MC-800 cut-back bitumen swept until a smooth fine texture has been achieved.
− MC-3000 cut-back bitumen The base course shall then be primed in accordance
− Spray-grade cationic emulsion (65% or 70% of net with the provisions of SECTION 4100, or as instructed by
bitumen) the Engineer.
− Spray-grade anionic emulsion (65% or 70% of net
bitumen) (c) Binder application rate for sand seal
The nominal rate of application of binder for bidding
purposes shall be 1.2 litres per square metre of
MC3000 cutback bitumen measured at spraying
4703 AGGREGATE temperature. The exact spray rate shall be determined
on site on approval of the Engineer.
(a) Sand seal
The aggregate for sand seal shall be crusher dust clean
river sand free from lumps of clay or any other (d) Application of sand seal
deleterious matter. The grading shall conform with
TABLE 4703/1. (i) General
Granular base courses of non-calcareous materials
do not normally require a prime, unless otherwise
TABLE 4703/1
directed by the Engineer. Base courses of calcrete
GRADING LIMITS FOR SAND SEAL , CML test method
or coral material shall always be primed.
Sieve size Percentage passing sieve (% (ii) Application of surfacing
CML 1.7 by mass) The binders, of the type and grade required, and
(mm) Natural river Crusher dust the aggregates, of the size specified in the Bill of
sand Quantities or ordered by the Engineer, shall be
10 100 100 applied in accordance with the provisions of
5 85 – 100 85 – 100 SECTION 4300.
1.18 20 – 60 20 – 80
0.425 0 – 30 - (iii) Initial rolling
0.300 0 – 15 - The sealed surface shall receive not less than 15
0.150 0-5 0 - 30 passes of a pneumatic tyred roller on the day of
sealing. On the same day, the Engineer may direct
The sand shall be screened or washed as required to one pass with a 10 - 12 tonnes heavy tandem steel
ensure compliance with the Specifications. roller. During the following 2 days, the entire sealed
area, including the shoulders, shall receive a further
(b) Slurry minimum of 15 passes daily, unless otherwise
The aggregate for slurry seals shall be an approved approved by the Engineer. A minimum of two
crusher sand obtained from a parent rock having a TFV pneumatic tyred rollers with a minimum weight of 12
value of not less than 110 kN or a mixture of such tonnes shall be used for the rolling operations.
crusher sand and an approved clean natural sand,
where the mixture does not contain more than 25% of (iv) Subsequent rolling and trafficking
natural sand. The aggregate shall be clean, tough, The Engineer may direct even trafficking of the
durable, angular in shape, and shall comply with the surfaced area and channelling of the traffic may be
grading requirements given in TABLE 4703/2. required for certain periods and traffic cones or

similar may be required. The road should be (c) Mixing of slurry

opened to traffic immediately after the sealing
operations are completed, but a maximum speed (i) General
limit of 50 km/h should be enforced during the initial A mixer of a type approved by the Engineer shall be
2 - 3 weeks after construction. Aggregate that has provided in a good working order capable of
been dislodged by traffic during the immediate post producing a uniform slurry of the constituent
construction period shall be broomed back into the materials. It may either be a batch mixer or a
exposed areas during the first 2 - 3 weeks, as continuous type mixer. Hand mixing may be used if
directed by the Engineer. the result is satisfactory to the Engineer.
(v) Aftercare Material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not

After 2 - 3 weeks of trafficking the excess aggregate properly mixed or in which the emulsion shows
shall be swept off the road surface and the speed signs of having broken during mixing shall not be
limitations can be lifted, unless otherwise directed applied to the road and shall be removed from site.
by the Engineer. If natural gravel is used with a
fairly high content of fines, the period may be (ii) Batch mixer
extended to 6 weeks or as directed by the The slurry shall be mixed in an approved type of
Engineer. A team shall be retained on site to deal mixer as specified in SUBCLAUSE 4303(f).
with areas of bleeding if required. The team will be
required during the normal construction period as All the constituents of the slurry shall be accurately
well as during the first hot season following the proportioned and due care and attention shall be
completion of sealing operations. The Contractor’s given to the sequence in which the ingredients are
attention is drawn to the fact that any cost of introduced into the mixer and to the period of
mobilising and operating this team shall be included mixing. Mixing shall be continued until the materials
in the pay item rates. in each batch are thoroughly blended.
(vi) Subsequent layers (iii) Continuous mixer

A minimum period of 8 - 12 weeks should elapse Aggregate and filler contained in separate bins shall
between construction of the subsequent layers of be fed through metering devices at controlled rates
the surfacing, and during that period the road to the mixer. Water and bitumen emulsion
should receive as much heavy trafficking as contained in separate tanks shall similarly be
possible, unless otherwise directed by the pumped to the mixer at controlled rates through
Engineer. Prior to applying subsequent seals, the metering devices. The mixing of the slurry shall be
surfaced area shall be broomed free of dust and at a suitable rate adjusted to ensure complete
loose stones or other foreign matter. The sand blending of the ingredients and uniformity of mix.
cover seal shall on the day of surfacing receive not
less than 15 passes of a pneumatic tyred roller with (d) Application of slurry
a minimum weight of 12 tonnes. Aggregate that has Before slurry is applied, the road surface shall be
been dislodged by traffic during the immediate post thoroughly cleaned and lightly sprinkled with water but
construction period shall be broomed back into the no free water shall be present on the surface when the
exposed areas during the first 2 - 3 weeks as slurry is applied. The nominal rate of application of
directed by the Engineer. slurry shall be in accordance with drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The slurry shall be applied in
3 2
two layers in the case application rates of 0.008 m /m
4705 SLURRY CONSTRUCTION AND AFTER or larger, or as directed by the Engineer.
CARE
The nominal rates of application given in the Bill of
Quantities are intended for bidding purposes only and
(a) Condition of surface
the actual rates of application on the site shall be as
The surface shall be cleaned to remove all dust, mud,
directed by the Engineer. When the slurry is applied in
leaves, etc, and shall have a uniform closely knit
two layers, the first layer of slurry shall be struck off
appearance, with edges trimmed correctly to the
level with the tops of the stones in the aggregate layer
specified
so that, after application, the tops of the stones will be
width.
just visible.
(b) Composition of slurry
The second layer of slurry shall not be applied until the
The slurry shall consist of a mix of the grade of slurry
first layer has dried. If required by the Engineer, the
aggregate ordered by the Engineer and specified in
Contractor shall open the road to traffic before the
SUBCLAUSE 4302(b) together with a 60% stable-grade
second layer of slurry is applied. The surface shall be
emulsion, filler and water in the proportions as directed
well-rolled with a pneumatic-tyred roller. The second
by the Engineer. The following proportions shall apply
layer shall be applied only after sufficient time has been
for bidding purposes only:
allowed for the first layer to cure. The Engineer will
− Slurry aggregate (saturated volume) 1m
3
decide on the time necessary for proper curing, which
− Stable-grade emulsion 260 litres will in any case be not less than 24 hours.
− Cement 0.01 m
3
− Water (as directed by the Engineer) approximately The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt
235 litres or foreign materials before the second layer of slurry is
applied. For seals using 14 mm nominal sized chipping
If stated in the Special Specifications, the composition the slurry shall be applied in one layer only. The slurry
of the slurry shall be based on the following mass shall also be struck off so that the tops of the stone
proportions for bidding purposes: chipping will be just visible after the emulsion has set
− Slurry aggregate (dry 100 and cured.
− Stable-grade emulsion 20
− Cement 1-15 Where slurry is spread by hand. the squeegee squad
− Water +15 shall be allowed to complete the spreading of each
batch discharged onto the road, using squeegees,
The saturated volume of slurry shall be determined by before the next is discharged.
applying a correction for bulking of moist aggregate.

Where spreading is carried out by means of the ITEM UNIT

spreader box, the slurry shall be discharged into the 47.03 APPLICATION OF SLURRY SQUARE
spreader box by means of a chute, which shall be so (STATE NOMINAL APPLICATION
2
METRE (m )
directed that an even supply of slurry is maintained RATE IN CUBIC METRE PER
against the full width of the strike-off blade of the SQUARE METRE):
spreader box. Areas where an excess of slurry has
been applied by the spreader box shall be corrected by
squeegees being used immediately after the passage of The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
the spreader box Should breaking of the emulsion, completed and accepted slurry seal according to
segregation of the mix or formation of lumps occur drawings or where directed by the Engineer.
during the application of the slurry, the slurry operations
shall be discontinued at once and any defective The bid rate shall include full compensation, inter alia,
material removed from the road. Successive strips of for furnishing all materials, marking the centre line or
slurry shall overlap transversely by not less than 25 mm reference lines, spraying of binder, spreading of
nor more than 150 mm. Any overlapping on the aggregate, rolling, removing of dust or deleterious
longitudinal joints and any omitted areas shall be material, supplying of water and spraying of haul roads
rectified with squeegees. and construction roads, trimming the edges of the
completed surface, and all other incidentals necessary
The Contractor shall ensure that either edge of the road for completing the work as specified.
surface is finished to the specified widths and lines. All
stones dislodged in the process of applying the slurry The bid rates shall include full compensation for
shall be removed on the same day on which the slurry procuring and furnishing the material including all
seal has been applied. All spillage of slurry or excess preparatory work to the surface prior to application of
slurry shall be neatly removed from the road and buried the seal.
in an approved waste site.
If the slurry is spread with a spreader box, a moist ITEM UNIT

burlap drag shall be drawn behind the spreader box to 47.04 VARIATION IN THE RATE OF CUBIC METRE
3
ensure an overall even texture. APPLICATION OF THE SLURRY: (m )
If applied by hand, the slurry shall be worked from side The unit of measurement for slurry variations shall be
to side and criss-cross with the aid of squeegees so as the cubic metre of saturated fine aggregate.
to fill as many spaces as possible. In this case the final
layer of slurry shall be struck off flush with the tops of Payment for variations shall be made as specified in
the stone chipping so as to leave the chippings to be CLAUSE 1213.
visible after the emulsion has stiffened and hardened.
The work must be so programmed, that the two half

road widths of slurry shall be applied on two successive
days to complete a full road width section in two days.
Any damage to the slurry seal by rain or traffic before

the slurry has cured shall be rectified by the Contractor
at his own expense.

ITEM UNIT
47.01 APPLICATION OF BINDER FOR LITRES (l)
SAND SEAL (STATE TYPE):
The unit of measurement shall be the litre, measured at

spraying temperature.

procuring and furnishing the material and applying the
binder, including all preparatory work to the surface
prior to application of the binder.
ITEM UNIT
47.02 APPLICATION OF SAND CUBIC
3
FOR SAND SEAL: METRE (m )
The unit of measurement for the sand shall be the cubic

metre of sand applied to the road as specified.

supplying the sand, washing, screening and preparing
the sand as required, applying the sand as specified, as
well as brooming the sand back onto the surface as
often as is required.

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
SEALS surfacing completed in accordance with the
Specifications to the nominal thickness indicated on the
Drawings or to the instruction of the Engineer.
SECTION 4800: SURFACING OF The bid rate shall include full compensation for
BRIDGE DECKS procuring and furnishing all materials, heating the
binder and aggregate, mixing, transporting, placing and
compacting the material, and the provision and
CONTENTS: application of the surfacing. The rate shall also include
CLAUSE PAGE full compensation for variations in thickness within the
specified tolerance for bridge deck levels and for
4801 SCOPE 4000-44 cleaning of the surface to the satisfaction of the
4802 MATERIALS 4000-44 Engineer and the application of a tack coat.
4803 PREPARATION OF SURFACE 4000-44
4804 TYPE AND THICKNESS OF SURFACING 4000-44
4806 SURFACE TOLERANCES 4000-44
4801 SCOPE
This Section covers the construction of a bituminous
surfacing on bridge decks where shown on the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
4802 MATERIALS
Bituminous binders and aggregate shall comply with the
requirements of SECTIONS 4200 and 4300 for asphalt
surfacing and seals respectively.
4803 PREPARATION ON SURFACE

Before the surfacing is constructed, the concrete deck
shall be thoroughly cleaned by washing and brushing to
remove all loose material. After drying, a tack coat
consisting of 30% bituminous cationic emulsion shall be
2
applied to the surface at a rate of 0.4 l/m . The tack coat
shall then be allowed to dry.
4804 TYPE AND THICKNESS OF SURFACING

The type and nominal) thickness of the surfacing shall
be as Indicated on the Drawings and specified in the
Bill of Quantities.
Before commencing with the construction of the

surfacing, the actual levels of the bridge deck shall be
determined by means of accurate levelling. The levels
and grades to which the surfacing is to be constructed
shall be as shown on the Drawings or as indicated by
the Engineer. If the levels of the concrete deck as
constructed by the Contractor deviate by more than the
specified tolerances from the specified levels, he shall
construct a levelling layer at his own cost. The nominal
size of the aggregate in the levelling layer shall be 10
mm.
4805 CONSTRUCTION
Irrespective of the type of seal applications on the road
on both sides of the bridge, asphalt surfacing shall be
constructed in accordance with SECTION 4200, and
seals in accordance with SECTION 4300.
4806 SURFACE TOLERANCES

The completed surfacing shall comply with the
requirements for base of CLAUSE 7115 in respect of
surface tolerances for grade, smoothness, cross section
and width.

ITEM UNIT
48.01 SURFACING ON BRIDGE CUBIC
DECK (STATE TYPE AND METRE
3
THICKNESS) (m )

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND 30% or 60% cationic or anionic spray-grade bituminous
SEALS emulsion.
(b) Tack-coat binder (Treatment Type 2)

SECTION 4900: TREATMENT OF 60% bituminous emulsion (Treatment Type 2)
30% bituminous emulsion (Treatment Types 3 and 4).
SURFACE DEFECTS, PATCHING,
(c) Slurry binder (Treatment Type 3)
REPAIRING EDGE-BREAKS AND 60% stable grade bituminous emulsion.
CRACK SEALING (d) Binder for asphalt skim coat (Treatment Type 4)
80/100 penetration grade bitumen.
CONTENTS:
(e) Screed (Treatment Type 5)
CLAUSE PAGE 30% bitumen emulsion shall be used for the tack coat,
4901 SCOPE 4000-45 and the binder for the asphalt shall be approved grade
4902 MATERIALS 4000-45 of penetration grade bitumen unless otherwise
4903 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 4000-45 specified.
4904 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS 4000-46
4905 PATCHING 4000-47 (f) Binder for asphalt used in reconstructing
4906 REPAIRING EDGE BREAKS 4000-47 pavement edges
4907 CRACK SEALING 4000-47 60% stable grade bituminous emulsion for tack coat
4908 OPENING TO TRAFFIC 4000-48 and 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen in asphalt
4909 JOINTS AND THE PROTECTION OF KERBS 4000-48
4910 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4000-48 (g) Rubber pellets
Rubber pellets for crack sealing shall be obtained by
processing rubber tyres. The rubber shall be granulated
and free from fibres, steel wire and other impurities. The
4901 SCOPE rubber crumbs shall pass through a 2.00 mm sieve.
This Section covers the work in connection with the
treatment of existing road surfaces prior to the (h) Herbicide
application of a seal or asphalt surfacing, patching, Herbicide shall be a non-selective environmentally
repairing edge breaks and crack sealing. compatible herbicide approved by the Engineer.
Provision is made for treating existing seals exhibiting 4903 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
any of the following defects: All equipment shall be suitable for the specified use and
− the existing surface is deficient in binder. working areas and shall be capable of obtaining the
− marked differences in texture occur over the specified results.
surface.
− the existing surface is open-textured. (a) Planing machine
− the surface is uneven on account of bumps, slacks, The machine shall be of a design which will be suitable
etc. for planing the existing surfacing in order to remove and
− edges require trimming and/or repairs. irregularities and to leave an even surface without
tearing the underlying material. An approved milling
Patching shall be any work to existing pavement layers machine may be used.
(and in exceptional cases to fills and the roadbed) with
the purpose of repairing local failures, and which is Before planing may start, the Contractor shall
carried out in an area having a width of less than 1.0 m, demonstrate to the Engineer that the machine is
or a length of less than 25 m or an area of less than 100 capable of executing the work in accordance with the
m. This does not include the repair of edge breaks, pre- Special Specifications.
treatment of the road surface, or the rehabilitation of
concrete pavements.
(c) Patching and repairing edge breaks
Patching involves excavating the existing failed sections Only approved cutting or sawing equipment may be
and reconstructing the excavated fills and pavement used for cutting or sawing asphalt layers. The
layers with the specified pavement material. Backfilling equipment shall be capable of cutting asphalt layers to
with asphalt will be measured and paid for under depths of 200 mm in one operation without fragmenting
SECTION 4200. the material, and in straight lines within the required
tolerances.
Compensation for work in restricted areas shall not be
applicable to patching and repairing edge breaks. Note: The following items of plant and equipment shall also
SECTION 4300 - Seals: Materials and general be available and in good working order:
requirements shall apply to this Section.
(i) A vibratory roller having a mass approximately
equal to that of a Bomag 765 or similar
4902 MATERIALS vibratory roller, with an adjustable amplitude
The material shall comply with the requirements and frequency of vibration.
specified for the various types of material in the
appropriate sections of the Specifications and the (ii) A mobile compressor capable of producing at
Special Specifications. 3
least 3 m /minute compressed air at 750 kPa.
The following grades of binder may be used. The actual (iii) Appropriate paving breakers.
type or grade used shall be as specified in the Special
Specifications or the Bill of Quantities or as ordered by (iv) Manually-operated pneumatic compactors as
the Engineer. required.
(a) Binder for fog spray (Treatment Type 1) (v) Appropriate concrete mixers.

(d) Crack sealing − Where the slurry can only be applied by hand
Over and above the equipment normally used for methods or where the Engineer so directs or
surface treatments, the following additional equipment where it is specified that the slurry shall be applied
shall be available for crack sealing: by hand methods.
− Where the slurry can be applied mechanically with
(i) Special spraying equipment with 2 mm nozzle a spreader box.
openings and provided with spare nozzles.
The slurry shall be prepared, mixed and applied as
(ii) Special heating equipment where appropriate specified in CLAUSE 4705, with the following exceptions:
for cleaning cracks, and custom-built
applicators for applying sealants to cracks. − Slurry to be applied by hand may be mixed in a
suitable concrete mixer.
− When applied by hand with brooms or rubber
4904 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS squeegees, the slurry shall be worked into cracks
Before any treatment is carried out, the area to be and other open areas until a sound, uniform
treated shall be cleaned and prepared and any major surface is obtained.
failures shall be repaired as specified in the Special
Specifications. The slurry shall, in the case of application by spreader
box, be applied in a single layer at a nominal rate, for
2
(a) Treatment Type 1 bidding purposes, of 0.004 m3/m .
This treatment shall be applied where the existing
surface is deficient in binder. (d) Treatment Type 4
This treatment is intended for use where the road
The treatment shall consist of the application of a fog surface is uneven or contains slacks, bumps or minor
spray of the specified grade of emulsion to the existing rutting caused by deformation of the pavement layers,
surface by means of a pressure distributor at the rates but not by failure of these layers.
of application as directed by the Engineer, in widths that
may vary from 0.5 m to 4.0 m. The surface to be treated shall, after having been
cleaned and prepared, be given a tack coat of 30%
(b) Treatment Type 2 bitumen emulsion at rates directed in the field by the
This Treatment, or a sand seal as specified in SECTION Engineer.
4700, is intended for application where marked
differences in texture occur in the existing surfacing, in Asphalt shall consist of a medium or fine-grade asphalt
order to obtain a uniform texture before resealing. surfacing mix manufactured as specified with 6% of
80/100 penetration-grade bitumen and 1.0% active
A tack coat of the specified type and grade of emulsion filler. The actual composition of the mix shall be as
shall be applied to the surface as specified in dictated by the required thickness of the asphalt layer,
SUBCLAUSE 4307(b) followed by an application of or as directed by the Engineer.
double-washed crusher sand. The crusher sand shall
be the medium grade specified for slurry in SECTION The asphalt shall be applied as specified in SECTION
4700, but shall be on the coarse side of the grading 4200 in thicknesses varying between 6 mm and 25 mm
envelope. depending on the nature of the irregularities that occur
so that the final surface will conform to the surface
The nominal rates of application shall be: tolerances for cross section and smoothness as
specified in CLAUSE 4213. Where the thickness of
2
Emulsion 0.7 litres net bitumen per m asphalt required exceeds 25 mm, it shall be laid in
3 2
Aggregate 0.004 m /m separate layers each not exceeding 25 mm thickness.
The actual rates of application shall be as instructed by If the final surfacing shows signs of ravelling,
the Engineer. disintegration, or an uneven surface, the surface shall
be given a Type 3 Treatment or removed and replaced,
It can be anticipated that spraying and spreading will all at the Contractor's cost.
have to be carried out in narrow bands varying in width
from 0.5 m to 4.0 m. The emulsion shall be allowed to (e) Treatment Type 5
break before the aggregate is applied. This treatment is used where the road surface is
uneven and where depressions, humps or small
As soon as the aggregate has been applied, the grooves occur, which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
distribution thereof shall be corrected by light hand are the result of the deformation of the pavement
brooming or by means of a light broom drag. layers, but not of structural failure of the pavement.
Rolling shall be carried out as specified in SUBCLAUSE Where both planing and screening are specified, the
4307(b). Any excess aggregate remaining on the road screed shall be placed after the planing has been
after it has been opened for two days or more shall be completed. Where milling is required, it shall be done in
removed. accordance with the requirements of SECTION 3800.
(c) Treatment Type 3 The existing surface shall be swept clean or cleaned by
This treatment shall be used when an existing surface other approved methods to be free from dust, soil,
treatment, which is open-textured or exhibits cracking, gravel, loose stones or any other undesirable material.
requires treatment with bituminous slurry. A tack coat of 30% anionic stable-grade emulsion shall
then be applied at a rate prescribed by the Engineer.
Prior to Treatment with a slurry, the surface shall be
sprayed with a tack coat of 30% bitumen emulsion at The bituminous material used for the screed shall be
the rate prescribed by the Engineer. asphalt or course slurry as specified in the Special
Specifications.
A distinction shall be made in respect of the payment
for the following two methods of construction:

4905 PATCHING (3) Ordinary Portland cement shall be added at a

rate of 1.0% by mass to the dry aggregate
(a) Demarcation before adding water, unless otherwise
The Engineer will demarcate any failed areas to be specified.
repaired, and shall instruct the Contractor in regard to
the repair work to be done. (4) During mixing the fluid content (water plus
emulsion) shall not exceed the optimum fluid
The Contractor shall give adequate notice to the content (optimum moisture content +
Engineer of his intention to commence with repair work percentage residual bitumen) of the base.
on any specific section of the road so that the Engineer Mixing shall continue until a uniform mix of the
will have sufficient time to demarcate the areas to be base material and the emulsion is obtained.
patched and repaired.
(5) The Contractor shall place and spread the
In addition to his specified responsibilities for the stabilised material by hand in layers of
accommodation of traffic, the Contractor shall also be appropriate thickness. Each layer shall be
responsible for traffic accommodation during the compacted with a hand-operated self-propelled
demarcation work. vibratory roller to the specified density. The
process of placing, spreading and compacting
(b) Excavating pavement material shall be repeated until the required total
In addition to the provisions of SECTION 4900 the thickness of base is obtained.
various provisions of SECTIONS 3200, 3400, 3500, 3600,
3800, 4100 and 4200 amongst others shall apply with The stabilised materials shall be placed at a
changes as required. fluid content not exceeding the optimum fluid
content for the base course.
(c) Excavating pavement material
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the (e) Restrictions
patching shall have a neat rectangular shape. The Unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Engineer,
existing material shall be excavated and removed to the the excavation, backfilling and all patching work,
full specified depth. Asphalt layers and surfacing shall complete as specified, for any patch shall be carried out
be cut with approved sawing equipment. and completed on the same day. Special attention shall
be given during patching to controlling and protecting
Excavation for patching shall be cut with side slopes of traffic, as specified.
0
approximately 60 C to the horizontal.
4906 REPAIRING EDGE BREAKS
Where required, excavation shall be done with an This treatment is intended for use where trimming
approved milling plant in accordance with SECTION and/or repair of the edges of the surfaced area is
3300. required, including restoring the road edges to the true
edge lines of the original road or to such other edge line
Excavated material from each pavement layer shall be as may be required.
placed in separate stockpiles adjacent to the patch. The
stockpiled material shall be re-used or spoiled in an Where the existing edge of the surfacing is sound but
approved manner in accordance with the Engineer's exceeds the required width by more than 150 mm, the
instructions. Stockpiled material shall not be spoiled excess surfacing shall be cut back to the required width
next to the road. keeping it parallel to the centre line of the road.
After completion of the excavation to the specified Where the edges of the surfacing have broken away or
depth, the Engineer shall be afforded the opportunity to where the surfacing is narrower than the required new
examine it. Where required, the floor of the excavation width, the existing broken edges shall be cut back until
shall be compacted to the specified density for the layer a sound edge can be obtained.
concerned.
Where the edge of the surfacing, as cut back, requires
building up to bring it to the required width, all material
(d) Backfilling excavations between the edge of the surfacing and the line to which
the surfacing has to be built up, shall be removed to a
(i) Excavations shall be backfilled with pavement depth of 60 mm below the final road surface or until firm
material as specified in the Special Specifications or material is found, and the surface so enclosed shall be
2
as ordered by the Engineer, and the backfilling shall cleaned, watered and primed at a rate of 0.6 l/m with a
be compacted and finished to the required levels. 60% stable grade emulsion diluted with three parts of
The requirements for material quality, density and water to one part of emulsion. The enclosed surface
finish specified in other appropriate SECTIONS shall may also be compacted with suitably sized vibratory
remain applicable. Untested material from the sides rollers to ensure a sound surface.
of the road shall not be used.
The edges shall then be built up with the asphalt
Stabilised materials shall be mixed in concrete specified for Treatment Type 4 and shall be well
mixers or by other approved equipment. compacted by means of a suitable vibratory roller or
compactor. The built-up edges shall be finished neatly
(ii) Unless otherwise specified in the Special to the required line and levels.
Specifications, the base shall be backfilled in
accordance with the following requirements.
4907 CRACK SEALING
(1) The base material shall be placed in a concrete
mixer, and water shall be added to moisten the (a) General
material. The types of cracks treated will be specified in the
Special Specifications. The Engineer will instruct the
(2) A suitably diluted 60% stable grade anionic Contractor regarding the type of treatment to be used in
bitumen emulsion shall be added at the the various cases.
specified rate.

(b) Preparation − parts of SBR (net rubber)(anionic emulsified

The cracks shall be blown clean with compressed air, rubber)
and all foreign and loose material shall be removed
from the cracks. Water may be added to improve workability. The
mixture shall be neatly worked into the cracks by
A supply of approved environmentally compatible rubber squeegees. Excess slurry shall be removed
herbicide diluted in accordance with the requirements of from the surface as soon as the emulsion has
the Special Specifications shall be prepared.. The broken.
solution shall be sprayed into cracks on the surfaced
shoulders of the road or on such extended area as (ii) Bitumen rubber
specified in the Special Specifications by means of Bitumen rubber may be used only where the
rucksack type sprayers, and allowed to dry. Care shall Contractor is able to convince the Engineer that he
be taken to spray only undesirable plants and spray drift is able to mix, heat and apply the material
shall not affect adjacent vegetation or fall onto water satisfactorily.
courses.
The bitumen rubber shall be mixed on the site or at
Twenty-four hours after application of the herbicide, the another approved locality on condition that the
cracks shall be penetrated with primer specified by the Contractor is able to propose efficacious methods
Engineer. for controlling both the mixing process and the end
product.
(c) Cracks narrower than 3 mm
Cracks narrower than 3 mm shall be treated with an Approved heating equipment and mechanical
emulsion or by means of resealing the surface. equipment for mixing and applying the mixture shall
be used.
(d) Cracks 3 mm and wider
After the primer has been applied, anionic stable grade The rubber content of the mix shall be at least 25%
emulsion shall be mixed with synthetic modifiers, as set by mass of the total bitumen-rubber mix.
out in the Special Specifications, and applied by means
of pneumatic spraying equipment or other approved (iii) Other sealants
equipment at the rate given in the Special Other approved sealants shall comply with and be
Specifications. applied in accordance with the requirements of the
Where the cracks are to be rolled, the Contractor, in
accordance with the Special Specifications or the (e) Restrictions
prescriptions of the Engineer, shall treat the cracks as Cracks may be sealed only where the temperature of
0
described below. the road surface exceeds 10 C. Crack sealing may not
be done within three days after rain has fallen on the
Where “Volcano” cracks occur and these require to be site, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
flattened, in accordance with the Special Specifications
or the prescriptions of the Engineer, the Contractor shall The Contractor shall note that a single application of
treat the cracks as follows: crack sealant is usually insufficient and that the
application will have to be repeated.
− The cracks shall initially be treated for cleaning out
and priming the crack as described above. 4908 OPENING TO TRAFFIC
The road shall be left open to traffic for such period as
− The surface on either side of the crack shall be the Engineer may direct before further surface
sprayed with an approved rejuvenator for a width of treatment work is carried out.
300 mm on either side of the crack and allowed to
soften the existing surface. 4909 JOINTS AND THE PROTECTION OF
− The crack shall then be filled with cold rubber slurry
KERBS
which shall be worked in with rubber squeegees. The requirements of SUBCLAUSE 4307(b) regarding
Any excess slurry shall be removed from the sides joints between sprays and the protection of kerbs,
of the crack. channels, etc, shall be observed.
− Once the emulsion has broken, the crack can be

rolled with a pedestrian vibratory roller until a 4910 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
smooth finish is obtained.
ITEM UNIT
For other cracks, the instructions of the Engineer shall 49.01 TREATMENT TYPE 1 (FOG
be implemented. Cracks shall be treated with cold SPRAY):
rubber slurry, hot bitumen rubber, or any other
(a) 30% BITUMEN EMULSION LITRE (l)
approved sealant.
(b) 60% BITUMEN EMULSION LITRE (l)
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the above
treatments are not suitable for the existing cracks, the The unit of measurement for Treatment Type 1 (fog
Contractor shall treat the cracks in accordance with the spray) shall be the litre of bituminous emulsion sprayed
instructions of the Engineer. at application rates as instructed by the Engineer,
measured at spraying temperature.
(i) Rubber slurry
The rubber slurry mixture shall be proportioned as The bid rates shall include full compensation for
follows (by volume): cleaning and preparing the existing surface, for
− 10.0 parts of rubber crumbs furnishing the material and applying the fog spray and
− 4.5 parts of 60% anionic stable grade bitumen for all other incidentals necessary for completing the
emulsion work as specified.
− 0.2 parts of ordinary Portland cement

ITEM UNIT The bid rate for tack coat shall include full
49.02 APPLICATION OF SAND SEAL compensation for procuring, furnishing and applying the
(TREATMENT TYPE 2): tack coat and demarcating the areas to be sprayed, and
for all incidentals necessary for completing the work as
(a) BINDER (STATE TYPE) LITRE (l) specified.
(b) SAND CUBIC METRE
3
(m ) The bid rate for asphalt shall include full compensation
for procuring, furnishing and mixing all the materials
The unit of measurement of binder shall be the litre, required for applying the asphalt, and for all transport
measured at spraying temperature. The unit of and other incidentals necessary to complete the work
measurement for the sand shall be the cubic metre of as specified.
sand applied to the road as specified.
procuring and furnishing the material and applying the 49.06 SAWING ASPHALT OR
binder, including all preparatory work to the surface CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS FOR
prior to application of the binder. PATCHING:
The bid rate shall include full compensation for (a) CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED ASPHALT:
supplying the sand, washing, screening and preparing (i) NOT EXCEEDING 50 mm SQUARE
2
the sand, applying the sand as specified, as well as METRE (m )
brooming the sand back onto the surface as often as is (ii) EXCEEDING 50 mm BUT NOT SQUARE
2
required. EXCEEDING 100 mm METRE (m )
(iii) EXCEEDING 100 mm SQUARE
2
METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT (b) CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS TO
49.03 TREATMENT TYPE 3 SQUARE AN AVERAGE DEPTH:
2
(SLURRY): (STATE NOMINAL METRE (m ) (i) NOT EXCEEDING 50 mm SQUARE
APPLICATION RATE IN CUBIC 2
METRE (m )
METRE PER SQUARE METRE): (ii) EXCEEDING 50 mm BUT NOT SQUARE
2
EXCEEDING 100 mm METRE (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of (iii) EXCEEDING 100 mm SQUARE
completed and accepted slurry seal according to 2
METRE (m )
drawings or where directed by the Engineer.
The bid rate shall include full compensation, inter alia, sawcut area calculated in accordance with the
for furnishing all materials, marking the centre line or authorised length of sawcut and the average saw depth
reference lines, spraying of binder, spreading of measured after excavation of the material.
aggregate, rolling, removing of dust or deleterious
material, supplying of water and spraying of haul roads The bid rate shall include full compensation for all plant,
and construction roads, trimming the edges of the equipment, labour supervision, materials, transport and
completed surface, and all other incidentals necessary for all incidentals ,for sawing the asphalt and the
for completing the work as specified. cemented pavement layers, complete as specified and
prescribed by the Engineer.
procuring and furnishing the material including all
preparatory work to the surface prior to application of ITEM UNIT
the seal.
49.07 TREATMENT TYPE 5:
(SCREED):
ITEM UNIT (a) TACK COAT USING 30% BITUMEN LITRE (l)
49.04 VARIATION IN THE RATE OF CUBIC METRE EMULSION
3
APPLICATION OF THE SLURRY: (m ) (b) CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED TONNE (t)
ASPHALT (SPECIFY GRADE)
The unit of measurement for slurry variations shall be (c) COARSE GRADE SLURRY CUBIC METRE
3
the cubic metre of saturated fine aggregate. (m )
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in The unit of measurement for the tack coat shall be the
CLAUSE 1213. litre of emulsion applied, measured at spraying
temperature. The unit of measurement for asphalt shall
be the tonne of asphalt laid according to the
ITEM UNIT Specifications. The unit of measurement for coarse
49.05 TREATMENT TYPE 4: (ASPHALT grade slurry shall be the cubic metre of aggregate mix
SKIM COAT): used in the slurry.
(a) TACK COAT USING 30% BITUMEN LITRE (l) The bid rate for tack coat shall include full
EMULSION compensation for procuring, furnishing and applying the
(b) CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED ASPHALT TONNE (t) tack coat and demarcating the areas to be sprayed, and
for all incidentals necessary for completing the work as
The unit of measurement for the tack coat shall be the specified. The bid rate for asphalt shall include full
litre of emulsion applied, measured at spraying compensation for procuring, furnishing and mixing all
temperature. The unit of measurement for asphalt shall the materials required for applying the asphalt, and for
be the tonne of asphalt laid according to the all transport and other incidentals necessary to
Specifications. complete the work as specified.
The bid rate for slurry shall include full compensation for
all materials, equipment and labour for producing and
applying the slurry, irrespective of the number of others the provision and application of the stabilising
applications required to attain the required thickness. agents.
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

49.08 EXCAVATION IN EXISTING 49.10 COMPACTING THE FLOOR OF SQUARE
2
PAVEMENTS FOR PATCHING IN: EXCAVATIONS FOR PATCHING METRE (m )
(a) ASPHALT LAYERS CUBIC METRE
3
(m ) The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
(b) CEMENTED LAYERS CUBIC METRE excavation floor compacted on the instruction of the
3
(m ) Engineer, and the quantity shall be computed in
(c) OTHER LAYERS (SPECIFY SQUARE accordance with the authorised dimensions of the
2
TYPE) METRE (m ) excavation floor.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of The bid rate shall include full compensation for
material excavated from the existing pavement. The compacting the floor of excavations complete as
quantity shall be computed in accordance with the specified.
authorised dimensions of the excavation.
Payment will not distinguish between the various
The bid rate shall include full compensation for methods of compaction or various density
demarcating the excavation, excavating the material, requirements.
placing the excavated material in temporary stockpiles,
spoiling of material in the stockpiles where ordered by
the Engineer, including haul over a free-haul distance of ITEM UNIT
1.0 km, complete as specified. 49.11 EDGE BREAKS:
(a) TRIMMING EDGES OF EXISTING METRE
Payment will not distinguish between the different types SURFACING (m)
of pavement material excavated.
(b) RECONSTRUCTING EDGES FROM TONNE (t)
CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED ASPHALT
ITEM UNIT
49.09 BACKFILLING OF The unit of measurement for trimming edges shall be
EXCAVATIONS FOR PATCHING WITH: the metre of pavement edge cut back and trimmed as
specified. The unit of measurement for reconstructing
(a) CHEMICALLY STABILISED PAVEMENT pavement edges shall be the tonne of continuously-
MATERIAL (SPECIFY THE PAVEMENT graded asphalt furnished and compacted as specified.
MATERIAL AND THE STABILISING
AGENT) FOR A PATCH WITH A The bid rate for trimming the edges shall include full
SURFACE AREA: compensation for cutting back the edges as directed,
2
(i) NOT EXCEEDING 5 m CUBIC and removing and dumping of all excavated and loose
3
METRE (m ) material in an approved waste site.
2
(ii) EXCEEDING 5 m BUT NOT CUBIC
2 3
EXCEEDING 100 m METRE (m ) The bid rate for reconstructing pavement edges shall
(iii) EXCEEDING 100 m
2
CUBIC include full compensation for compacting the surface on
3
METRE (m ) which the new edge is to be constructed and procuring,
(b) BASE COURSE MATERIAL STABILISED furnishing and mixing all materials and compacting and
WITH BITUMINOUS EMULSION trimming the asphalt to the required lines and levels. It
(SPECIFY THE EMULSION) FOR A shall also include full compensation for applying a tack
PATCH WITH A SURFACE AREA: coat of emulsion to the surface to be treated.
2
(i) NOT EXCEEDING 5 m CUBIC The bid rates shall include full compensation for all
3
METRE (m ) transport, handling, labour, material and all incidentals
2
(ii) EXCEEDING 5 m BUT NOT CUBIC necessary to complete all the work specified in the
2 3
EXCEEDING 100m METRE (m ) treatment of edge breaks.
2
(iii) EXCEEDING 100 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of the 49.12 CLEANING THE CRACKS WITH KILOMETRE (km)
specified chemically or bituminously stabilised COMPRESSED AIR:
pavement material placed in accordance with the
specified requirements. The quantity will be computed (a) TRIMMING EDGES OF EXISTING METRE (m)
in accordance with the authorised dimensions of the SURFACING
layer. (b) RECONSTRUCTING EDGES FROM TONNE (t)
providing all the material, irrespective of its origin, The unit of measurement for cleaning the cracks with
including gravel (notwithstanding the provisions of compressed air shall be the kilometre of road along
SECTION 1600), for all mixing, placing, compacting and which all the cracks have been blown clean.
finishing as specified in this Section and other
appropriate Sections of the Specifications, for all The bid rate shall include full compensation for
transport, work in restricted areas, and also for all providing all equipment, labour, supervision and
machinery, equipment, labour, supervision and other incidentals for blowing clean the cracks over the full
incidentals for executing the work as specified. width of the road to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
chemical or bituminous stabilisation, including amongst

ITEM UNIT
49.13 APPLYING BITUMINOUS BINDERS,
HERBICIDES AND INSECTICIDES FOR
SEALING CRACKS:
(a) HERBICIDES LITRE (l)
(b) INSECTICIDES LITRE (l)
(c) MSP/1 OR SIMILAR PRIMER LITRE (l)
(d) ANIONIC STABLE-GRADE EMULSION MIXED LITRE (l)
WITH SYNTHETIC MODIFIERS
(e) HOT BITUMEN RUBBER LITRE (l)
(f) OTHER SPECIFIED AGENTS (TYPE LITRE (l)
INDICATED)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of material

applied as specified or as instructed by the Engineer.

providing, mixing, heating (where required) and
applying all the materials specified, and for all
equipment, labour, supervision and incidentals for
completing the work. No additional payment shall be
made for multiple applications of material, and payment
will not distinguish between the various types, widths or
lengths of cracks.
ITEM UNIT
49.14 COLD RUBBER-SLURRY CUBIC METRE
3
FOR SEALING CRACKS (m )
The unit of measurement for crack treatment with

rubber slurry shall be the cubic metre of tine rubber
crumbs used for preparing the mix.

procuring and providing all the material, including
emulsion synthetic modifiers, cement and water, and for
mixing and applying the mixture, and for all equipment,
labour, supervision, and incidentals for executing the
work in accordance with the specifications.
Payment will not be made for redundant rubber pellets

or redundant mixture or for mixture which, in the opinion
of the Engineer, has been wasted.
ITEM UNIT
49.15 ROLLING THE CRACKS METRE (m)
The unit of measurement shall be a metre of crack

rolled to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 SERIES 5000 - ANCILLIARY ROADDWORKS
SERIES 5000
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION PAGE
5100 MARKER AND KILOMETRE POSTS 5000-2
5200 GUARDRAILS 5000-3
5300 FENCING 5000-7
5400 ROAD SIGNS 5000-13
5500 ROAD MARKINGS 5000-16
5600 CATTLE GRIDS AND AXLE W EIGH-
BRIDGES 5000-20
5700 LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING 5000-24
5800 FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD
RESERVE AND TREATING OLD ROADS 5000-33
5900 PAINTING 5000-34

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
SERIES 1000 GENERAL
APPENDICES

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS Backfilling shall be compacted in 100 mm layers right
from the bottom of the hole. Surplus excavated material
shall be disposed of as directed.
SECTION 5100: MARKER AND
The marker posts shall be painted immediately after
KILOMETRE POSTS having been placed.
CONTENTS: Marker posts shall be maintained and protected during

the entire construction period and any that are
CLAUSE PAGE damaged or broken before the certificate of completion
5101 SCOPE 5000-2 has been issued, shall be repaired or replaced, as may
5102 MATERIALS 5000-2 be required, at the Contractor's own cost.
5103 FABRICATING 5000-2
5104 SPACING THE MARKER AND KILOMETRE
POSTS 5000-2 5106 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
5105 ERECTING 5000-2
5106 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5000-2 ITEM UNIT
51.01 MARKER POSTS: NUMBER (no)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of marker

5101 SCOPE posts supplied and erected in accordance with the
This Section covers the supply and erection of marker Specifications.
posts in positions and in accordance with the
dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by The bid rate shall include full compensation for
the Engineer. supplying all materials and labour, making and
transporting the marker posts, setting out, excavating
and backfilling all the holes and disposing of surplus
5102 MATERIALS excavated material, including all haulage, placing and
painting the marker posts and all the equipment, the
(a) Concrete tools and incidentals necessary for completing and
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with maintaining the Works described in this Section.
the provisions of SECTIONS 6200, 6300 and 6400.
(b) Paint ITEM UNIT

Paint for marker and kilometre posts shall be non- 51.02 KILOMETRE POSTS NUMBER (no)
reflectorised road-marking paint as specified in SECTION
5500. Paint for the recess in the marker posts shall be
Codit or a similar approved retro-reflective paint. The unit of measurement shall be the number of
kilometre posts supplied and erected in accordance
5103 FABRICATING with the Specifications.
Marker and kilometre posts shall be fabricated to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings. A mixture of four
supplying all materials and labour, making and
parts of concrete sand to one part of Portland cement
transporting the kilometre posts, setting out, excavating
shall be used. The forms shall be smooth and shall
and backfilling all the holes and disposing of surplus
have accurate dimensions. The mixture shall be placed
excavated material, including all haulage, placing and
in the forms and vibrated on a vibrating table or by other
painting the kilometre posts and all the equipment, the
approved means. The posts shall be reinforced as
tools and incidentals necessary for completing and
shown on the Drawings and shall have an F3 surface
maintaining the Works described in this Section.
finish as defined in CLAUSE 6207.
The posts shall be true to shape, smooth, and without

any honeycombing or other blemishes.
The recess near the top of the marker post shall be

painted with the reflective paint specified, while the
remainder of the exposed portion of the post shall be
painted with white road-marking paint.
5104 SPACING THE MARKER AND

KILOMETRE POSTS
The marker posts shall be spaced as shown on the
5105 ERECTING
Marker posts shall be erected after the seal has been
completed. They shall be located at such spacing as
the Engineer directs with their outside edges in line with
the shoulder breakpoint. The edge on which the recess
is located is the inner edge. The tops of the marker
blocks shall be at a constant height above the
centreline of the road.
Holes shall be excavated in the shoulder and the

marker posts placed vertically and square to the road
centre line.

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS the required length to be cut off from the bottom of
a post, provided that the exposed area is
subsequently thoroughly treated with creosote.
SECTION 5200: GUARDRAILS
Timber posts shall not exhibit excessive cracking at
the ends, particularly cracks aligned at an angle to
CONTENTS: 0
the guardrail exceeding 45 . Posts which, in the
CLAUSE PAGE opinion of the Engineer, exhibit a degree of
cracking that would render them unfit for service
5201 SCOPE 5000-3 during a shorter than normal life shall not be used.
(ii) Steel posts
5204 REQUIREMENTS 5000-4 Steel posts shall be of the type and size shown on
5205 REMOVING, RENOVATING AND RE- the Drawings or described in the Special
ERECTING THE EXISTING GUARDRAILS 5000-4
Specifications.
(c) Reflective plates
V-shaped reflective plates shall be manufactured from
1.5 mm thick mild steel plate to the dimensions shown
5201 SCOPE on the Drawings. When supplied with galvanised
This Section covers the supplying, installing and guardrails, they shall also be galvanised, and when
maintaining of metal guardrails at locations and in supplied with painted guardrails, they shall be finished
accordance with the details, dimensions and design in white baked enamel. The outer surfaces shall be
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. coated with engineering-grade retro-reflective material
which complies with the provisions of CKS 191 in the
colours shown on the Drawings. Holes for fixing shall be
5202 MATERIALS drilled before the reflective plates may be galvanised or
painted.
(a) Guardrails
Guardrails shall comply with the requirements of
AASHTO designation M180-98 or equivalent. 5203 CONSTRUCTION
The dimensions of guardrails and end units shall be in (a) Erection
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. The holes for the timber posts shall be of sufficient size
to permit the proper setting of the posts and to allow
Guardrails shall be supplied together with all the bolts, sufficient room for backfilling the hole and tamping the
nuts, washers and fixing materials required, including filling. At least 1.0 m of a post shall be embedded in the
the bolts for fixing the guardrails to the posts. ground.
(i) Galvanising The holes for the timber posts shall be spaced to suit
Unless specified otherwise in the Special the standard length of the guardrail supplied. Where
Specifications, all guardrails, bolts, nuts and shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer,
washers shall be galvanised with a hot-dip posts shall be set at half the normal spacings. The hole
(galvanised) zinc coating which complies with the for the concrete block at the end of a length of guardrail
requirements of AASHTO designation M232M/97 or shall be neatly excavated and the top 120 mm
equivalent. Galvanised guardrails shall not be shuttered.
nested when stacked for storage.
The posts, spacer blocks (if applicable) and guardrails
shall be completely erected and set true to line and
(b) Guardrail posts level, so that the guardrails will be at the required height
above the level of the completed road shoulder. Where
(i) Timber posts jointed, the end of the guardrails which overlaps on the
Timber posts shall be supplied in lengths as shown side of the traffic shall point in the direction of the traffic
on the Drawings and shall comply with the movement. The guardrail shall be suitably braced to
requirements of SABS 457 or equivalent. prevent any movement and all bolts shall be tightened
prior to any holes being backfilled.
Posts shall have a top diameter of not less than 150
mm. Posts with a top diameter up to 230 mm will be After the Engineer has signified his approval of the
acceptable, provided that posts with widely varying guardrails so erected, the holes shall be backfilled with
diameters shall not be used together in the same a 12:1 soil cement mixture. The material shall be mixed
length of guardrail. with the correct quantity of water to ensure that the
mixture will be placed while at or near the optimum
Posts shall be drilled and shaped as shown on the moisture content.
Drawings and provided with the necessary bolts,
nuts, washers and spacer blocks for fixing. The mixture shall then be placed and thoroughly
rammed in layers not exceeding 100 mm of compacted
Timber posts and spacer blocks shall be treated in thickness. The approach ends, where the guardrail has
accordance with SABS 05 or equivalent with a to be bent down and anchored, shall be constructed as
copper- chrome-arsenic compound for timber shown on the Drawings.
preservation, which complies with SABS 673 or
equivalent, or with a creosote which complies with When the backfilling has been completed and the
SABS 538 or SABS 539 or equivalent. The bracing removed, the posts shall be rigid and vertical,
preservative specified in the Special Specifications and the guardrail shall be true to line and level and
shall be used. After the posts have been treated, firmly fixed to the posts. Excess excavated material
they shall not be sawn, drilled or shaped. shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
Where, however, the cutting of posts is unavoidable Steel posts shall be erected and fixed as shown on the
after having been treated, the Engineer may permit Drawings.
All guardrails shall be so erected as to have no guardrails shall then be regalvanised or receive surface
projecting ends which might interfere with or endanger treatment and be painted as described in CLAUSE 5908.
traffic. The edges and the centre of the guardrails shall
touch either the spacer block or the post where no Timber posts suitable for re-use shall be cleaned and
spacer blocks are used. Guardrails, if specified, shall treated with a timber preservative as described in
be provided with end units as shown on the Drawings. SUBCLAUSE 5202(b). Bolts, nuts and washers to be re-
All splices of guardrails shall be at posts, and guardrails used shall be cleaned and all rust removed, and shall
shall make contact over the entire area of the splice. then be oiled.
Reflective plates shall be fixed in accordance with the (c) Re-erection

details shown on the Drawings. The reflective surfaces The guardrails shall be erected in the positions as
shall be arranged with the colours as shown on the indicated, and all the removed material suitable for re-
Drawings. use and as much supplementary new material as may
be necessary shall be used. Re-erection shall be as
(b) Painting specified for new guardrails, including fixing the retro-
The following instructions shall apply where guardrails reflective plates.
are to be painted:
(i) Before being fixed, the guardrails shall be cleaned, 5206 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
primed and painted as specified in CLAUSE 5908.
After erection, all abraded or damaged surfaces ITEM UNIT
shall be repainted as specified in CLAUSE 5908.
Galvanised guardrails shall not be painted. 52.01 GUARDRAILS ON TIMBER
POSTS:
(ii) When existing guardrails are required to be (a) GALVANISED METRE (m)
repainted, they shall be thoroughly cleaned with (b) PAINTED METRE (m)
wire brushes and descaled with suitable tools to
remove all rust and loose and oxidised paint. They
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail
shall then be washed down and all exposed steel
as erected, excluding end units.
surfaces shall be given a coat of zinc based primer.
(iii) The entire prepared surface shall then be given a
furnishing all materials and labour and for erecting and
full coat of zinc based primer and two coats of paint
painting and galvanising the guardrails, complete with
as specified in CLAUSE 5908.
posts, spacer blocks, bolts, nuts, washers and
reinforcing plates, and excavating and backfilling the
5204 REQUIREMENTS post holes and removing any surplus excavated
The completed guardrail shall have a neat appearance, material.
and shall not show any visible deviations from line and
grade. The posts shall be straight and vertical. The
guardrails shall not be warped but shall be in a vertical ITEM UNIT
plane parallel to the road centre line except at flared
terminal sections. The painted or galvanised surface on 52.02 GUARDRAILS ON STEEL
POSTS:
the guardrail shall be smooth and continuous and free
from abrasions or scratches. Any damage to the (a) GALVANISED METRE (m)
surface shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. (b) PAINTED METRE (m)
5205 REMOVING, RENOVATING AND RE- The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail
ERECTING EXISTING GUARDRAILS erected, excluding end units.
Every effort should be made to reuse existing guardrails
rather than dispose of them and purchase new units. The bid rates shall include full compensation for
Where existing guardrails have to be removed, or furnishing all materials and labour and erecting and
removed and re-erected, or removed, renovated and repainting and galvanising the guardrail, complete with
erected, the three processes of removal, renovation and posts, spacer blocks, bolts, nuts, washers and
re-erection shall be carried out as follows: reinforcing plates and excavating and backfilling the
post holes including concrete backfill, and removing any
(a) Removing the guardrails surplus excavated material.
All guardrails, reflective plates and end units shall be
loosened. Posts shall be carefully dug out and the holes
shall be filled and compacted in 150 mm layers. Items ITEM UNIT
used for fixing, such as bolts, nuts and washers,
52.03 EXTRA OVER ITEMS 52.01, METRE
together with the reflective plates, shall be placed into
52.02 AND 52.11 FOR (m)
bags, after which all the material shall be transported to HORIZONTALLY CURVED GUARD-
a store approved by the Engineer and all stored in RAILS FACTORY BENT TO A RADIUS
groups by type.
OF LESS THAN 45 m
Where material is intended for re-use, it shall first be

unpacked for inspection by the Engineer for deciding The unit of measurement shall be the metre of curved
which material will be suitable for re-use. Suitable guardrail erected and measured in place.
material shall then be stored separately from material
which is unsuitable for re-use. The bid rate extra over the rates bid for ITEMS 52.01,
52.02 and 52.11 shall include full compensation for
(b) Renovating the guardrails incidentals in respect of supplying and erecting curved
Guardrails, end units and steel posts suitable for reuse guardrails.
shall be taken to the workshop for cleaning and
painting. Rust and existing paint shall be completely
removed and minor indentations hammered out. The

ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

52.04 END UNITS: 52.08 RENOVATING GUARDRAIL
(a) END SECTIONS INCLUDING NUMBER MATERIAL:
FOUNDATION IN THE GROUND (no) (a) GUARDRAILS INCLUDING END METRE (m)
WHERE SINGLE GUARDRAIL SECTIONS
SECTIONS ARE USED (STATE (b) POSTS INCLUDING BOLTS, NUMBER
LENGTH) WASHERS AND NUTS (no)
(b) END SECTIONS INCLUDING NUMBER
FOUNDATION IN THE GROUND (no) The unit of measurement for SUBITEM (a) shall be the
WHERE DOUBLE GUARDRAIL metre of single guardrail, whether straight or bent
SECTIONS ARE USED (STATE LENGTH renovated as specified, the length of which shall be
OF END SECTION) measured in accordance with the measurements of the
(c) CABLE STAYS COMPLETE WITH NUMBER guardrail after dismantling. The unit of measurement for
ANCHOR BLOCK (no) SUBITEM (b) shall be the number of treated posts.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of end The bid rates shall include full compensation for the
units of each type erected. work as specified in SUBCLAUSE 5205(b), including the
loading, transporting to and from the workshops, off-
The bid rates shall include full compensation for all loading and storing of the material.
labour, constructional plant and materials required for
installing the end units as shown on the Drawings,
including posts and fittings and the bending of turned- ITEM UNIT
down sections, excavations, concrete, backfilling, the 52.09 RE-ERECTION OF
removal of surplus backfill and bituminous sealing at GUARDRAILS WITH RECOVERED
posts where guardrail is erected through a bituminous MATERIAL:
surface. (a) SINGLE GUARDRAIL METRE (m)
(b) DOUBLE GUARDRAIL METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
52.05 ADDITIONAL GUARDRAIL The unit of measurement shall be the metre of single or
POSTS:
double guardrail re-erected with used material and
measured between the points where they are joined to
(a) TIMBER NUMBER (no) the end units.
(b) STEEL NUMBER (no)
The bid rates shall include full compensation for re-
The unit of measurement for additional guardrail posts erecting the guardrails as specified in SUBCLAUSE
shall be the number erected over and above those 5205(c), including the loading, transporting between
erected in accordance with the normal spacing shown any two points on the site and off-loading the material,
on the Drawings. and providing new fixing material. Payment shall be
made separately for any new material required,
The bid rates shall include full compensation for including spacer blocks, but not for other fixing
supplying additional posts, excavating the necessary materials. Where sections are made entirely from new
holes, erecting the posts, and backfilling the holes. material, payment therefore shall be made under the
appropriate items for new guardrails.
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT
52.06 REFLECTIVE PLATES NUMBER (no)
52.10 RE-ERECTION OF END UNITS
WITH RECOVERED MATERIAL:
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
reflective plates installed. (a) END WINGS NUMBER (no)
(b) TERMINAL SECTIONS WITH SINGLE NUMBER (no)
The bid rate shall include full compensation for GUARDRAILS
supplying all materials and labour required for (c) TERMINAL SECTIONS WITH DOUBLE NUMBER (no)
manufacturing, painting and fixing the reflective plates GUARDRAILS
as specified and as shown on the Drawings.
(d) TERMINAL SECTIONS COMPLETE NUMBER (no)
WITH ANCHOR BLOCK
ITEM UNIT
52.07 REMOVING EXISTING METRE
The unit of measurement shall be the number of end
GUARDRAILS (m) units erected with recovered and, in part, new material.

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail erecting the end units and for providing all anchors,
removed, and the quantity shall be measured between fixing materials and anchor blocks. Apart from anchors,
the terminal points of the sections removed, including anchor blocks and fixing materials payment will be
the end units, but excluding the anchor blocks and made separately for all new materials. End units made
anchor cables, if any, projecting beyond the end units. completely from new materials shall be paid for in
accordance with the appropriate rates for new end
The bid rate shall include full compensation for the work units.
as described in SUBCLAUSE 5205(a), including loading,
transporting to any point on the Site, and off-loading ITEM UNIT
and stacking the material.
52.11 NEW MATERIAL REQUIRED
FOR THE RE-ERECTION OF GUARD-
RAILS WITH RECOVERED
MATERIALS:

(a) GUARDRAILS METRE (m)

(b) TIMBER POSTS NUMBER (no)
(c) STEEL POSTS NUMBER (no)
(d) REFLECTIVE PLATES NUMBER (no)
(e) SPACER BLOCKS NUMBER (no)
The unit of measurement for SUBITEM (a) shall be the

metre of guardrail provided, measured in accordance
with the measurements of the loose guardrail. The unit
of measurement for SUBITEMS (b), (c), (d) and (e) shall
be the number of new timber posts, steel posts,
reflective plates and spacer blocks provided,
respectively.

supplying the material as specified. ITEM 52.03 shall
also apply to horizontally bent guardrail factory bent to a
radius of less than 45 m.
ITEM UNIT
52.12 DRILLING AND BLASTING NUMBER
HOLES FOR GUARDRAIL POSTS (no)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of holes

drilled and blasted with explosives in rock material
which cannot be removed by auger.

drilling, explosives, materials, labour and equipment
and all incidentals to be incurred for making holes in
rock materials.

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS Rolled steel sections shall be provided with a protective
coating of tar or other approved material.
SECTION 5300: FENCING (b) Bolts for stays

Bolts shall be galvanised steel bolts of the required
length and a diameter which shall not be less than 12
CONTENTS: mm. All the necessary bolts, nuts and washers, shall be
CLAUSE PAGE supplied with each post.
5301 SCOPE 5000-7
5302 MATERIALS 5000-7 (c) Wire
5303 TYPES OF FENCING 5000-8
5304 PROTECTING LIVESTOCK 5000-8 (i) Barbed wire
5305 CLEARING THE FENCE LINE 5000-8 Barbed wire shall comply with the requirements of
5306 ERECTING STRAINING POSTS AND
SABS 675 or equivalent and shall be one or more
STANDARDS 5000-8 of the following types:
5307 ERECTING FENCE W IRES 5000-8
5308 ERECTING DIAMOND MESH OR W IRE
(1) High-tensile-grade single-strand 3.15 mm x 2.5
NETTING 5000-9 mm oval-shaped wire, with a 2.81 mm
5309 CLOSING OPENINGS UNDER FENCES 5000-9 equivalent diameter and fully galvanised.
5310 EXISTING FENCES 5000-9
5311 ERECTING GATES 5000-9 (2) High-tensile-grade single-strand fully
5312 TEMPORARY FENCING, GATES AND galvanised (first-class coating), 2.8 mm x 1.9
MOTOR GATES 5000-9
mm in diameter, oval-shaped wire, with a 2.31
5313 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5000-10 mm equivalent diameter. This wire shall not be
5314 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5000-10 used within 500 mm above ground level where
bush fires are common.
(3) Mild-steel-grade double-strand uni-directional

5301 SCOPE twist wire, each strand 2.5 mm in diameter, for
This Section covers the moving of existing fences use at any height above ground. The wire shall
where necessary and erecting new fences along the be fully galvanised.
boundaries of the road reserve and where elsewhere
indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Barbs shall be manufactured from 2 mm galvanised
Engineer. wire and shall be spaced at not more than 152 mm.
It shall also include the erection and later removal of (ii) Smooth wire
temporary fences. Except when the Engineer allows Smooth wire shall comply with the requirements of
otherwise, new and temporary fences shall be erected SABS 675 or equivalent and shall be of the types
before construction on a particular section of the road is specified below:
commenced with, or before temporary bypasses are
opened to traffic. (1) Straining wire shall be 4mm in diameter and
fully galvanised.
This Section also covers the dismantling of existing
fences and the stacking of the fencing material. (2) Fencing wire shall be high-tensile-grade not
less than 2.24 mm in diameter wire fully
galvanised.
5302 MATERIALS
(3) Tying wire shall be not less than 2.5 mm in
(a) Straining posts, stays, standards and droppers diameter mild-steel galvanised wire for tying
Straining posts, stays, standards and droppers shall be fencing wire to standards and droppers and 1.6
of the type and size indicated on the Drawings. Steel mm mild-steel galvanised wire for tying netting
sections shall comply with the requirements of CKS 82 and mesh wire to the fencing wire.
or equivalent and timber posts with the requirements of
SABS 457 or equivalent. Timber posts shall be treated (d) Diamond mesh
with a preservative in accordance with the requirements Diamond mesh (chain-link fencing material) shall
of SUBCLAUSE 5202(b). comply with the requirements of SABS 1373 or
equivalent. The width shall be as shown on the
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, Drawings and the edge finish shall be both sides
rolled steel posts shall be 15 or 22 kg/m rails as shown clinched or barbed.
on the Drawings. Standards shall be 2.5 kg/m Y-
sections or timber standards according to SABS 457 or The nominal diameter of the wire shall be 2.5 mm and
equivalent. the mesh size shall be 64 mm x 64 mm.
Droppers shall be 0.56 kg/m ridgeback-pattern droppers The wire shall be fully galvanised.
or timber droppers according to SABS 457 or
equivalent. (e) Wire netting
Wire netting shall be fully galvanised mild-steel wire
Tubular straining posts and stays shall be galvanised in with a minimum diameter of 1.8 mm, with 75 mm
accordance with SABS 763 or equivalent for Class B1 hexagonal mesh.
articles, or shall be painted as specified in Section 5900
as may be required on the Drawings, and shall have a The width shall be as shown on the Drawings.
wall thickness of at least 2.95 mm. Unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings, all tubular posts shall be (f) Barbed-tape concertina wire
provided with at least a 200 mm x 200 mm footplate Barbed-tape concertina wire shall comply with the
and a pressed-steel or cast-iron cap. Tubular stays requirements of CKS 592 Type A or equivalent. The
shall have a nominal bore of at least 50 mm. high-tensile steel wire shall be heavily galvanised
(Class A), and the barbed tape and concertina clamps

shall also be heavily galvanised (Class Z600). The 5305 CLEARING THE FENCE LINE
diameter of the roll shall be 950 mm or 700 mm The fence line shall be cleared over a width of at least
according to requirements. 1.0 m on each side of the centre line of the fence and
surface irregularities shall be graded so that the fence
(g) Gates will follow the general contour of the ground. Clearing
Gates shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown the line shall include the removal of all trees, scrub,
on the Drawings. stumps, isolated boulders or stones and other
obstructions which will interfere with the construction of
Gates shall be complete in every respect, including the fence. Stumps within the cleared space shall be
hinges, washers, bolts and locking chains attached to grubbed as described in SECTION 3100. The bottom of
the gate. the fence shall be located at a uniform distance above
the ground line in accordance with the requirements
Gate posts shall not be used as straining posts and shown on the Drawings. All material removed shall be
shall be according to SABS 457 or equivalent. burnt or disposed of in disused borrow pits.
(h) Timber posts for wire mats Any areas outside the road reserve where clearing is
Timber posts for holding down wire mats where the not permitted by the Owner or is impracticable shall not
fence crosses streams shall comply with the be cleared if so directed by the Engineer.
requirements of SABS 457 or equivalent and shall be in
accordance with the requirements of SUBCLAUSE 5306 ERECTING STRAINING POSTS AND
5202(b).
STANDARDS
(i) Manufacturing tolerances for wire Straining posts shall be erected at all terminal points,
The actual diameter of wire supplied shall nowhere be low points (as required), corners and bends in the
less than the specified diameter minus the following fencing and at all junctions with other fences. Straining
tolerances: posts shall not be spaced further apart than shown on
the Drawings. The length of posts above ground shall
Specified diameter Tolerance be such that the correct clearance between the lowest
1.00 - 1.80 mm 0.05 mm wire and the ground can be obtained.
2.00 - 2.80 mm 0.08 mm
3.15 - 4.00 mm 0.10 mm Straining posts shall be accurately set in holes and shall
be provided with concrete bases to the dimensions
5303 TYPES OF FENCING shown on the Drawings.
The following types of fences shall be erected in
Holes shall be dug to the full specified depth. Where, on
accordance with the dimensions shown on the
account of the presence of rock, the holes cannot be
Drawings:
excavated by hand or by pneumatic tools and the
− Stock-proof fences
Contractor has to resort to the use of explosives, he will
− Vermin-proof fences be paid separately for the drilling and blasting
− Pedestrian fences operations required.
− Security fences
All straining posts shall be braced by means of stays or
Where existing fences have to be dismantled and re- anchors as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
erected, they shall be erected either to the same design the Engineer. Tubular stays shall be bolted to the posts.
as the original, but with such modifications as may be Gate posts shall not be used as straining posts but at
required by the Engineer, or they shall be erected up to each gate post a straining post shall be placed as
one of the standards specified above, all as ordered by shown on the Drawings.
the Engineer.
Standards shall be firmly planted into the ground at the
5304 PROTECTING LIVESTOCK spacings shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
From the time of occupancy up to the date of Taking Engineer. The spacing of standards between any two
Over Certificate being issued to the Contractor, he shall successive straining posts shall be uniform and not
take all measures necessary for preventing the ingress greater than that shown on the Drawings. In rock or
of vermin, and for protecting and controlling livestock hard material standards shall be either driven or set in
etc, on the sections of the properties affected by his holes drilled into the rock. The size of drilled holes shall
operations. He shall provide gates at the positions in provide a tight fit to the standards. Care shall be taken
existing fences cut by him for gaining access and shall when driving standards to prevent their buckling or
ensure that all gates are kept closed except when they being damaged.
are opened for admitting his traffic. No fences shall be
cut without the approval of the Engineer, and All straining posts and standards shall be accurately
consultation with the Owner of the fence. aligned and set plumb. Where verandah-type security
fencing is used, the posts shall be planted with the
Where alternative arrangements cannot be made, the overhang on the road side and perpendicular to the
Engineer may direct the Contractor to erect temporary direction of the fence. After the straining posts and
fencing where necessary to protect livestock that may standards have been firmly set in accordance with the
be lost or are exposed to vermin through his operations. foregoing requirements, fence wires shall be attached
Such fencing shall be of an adequate standard and thereto at the spacings shown on the Drawings.
shall be erected ahead of construction operations. The
fencing shall be maintained in a good order during 5307 ERECTING FENCE WIRES
construction operations and, on completion of the work, All fencing wire shall be tied to the sides of standards or
it shall be removed from the site and all surfaces shall posts to prevent the wires from being displaced or
be restored. The Engineer may order that any becoming loose. The wire shall be carefully tensioned
permanent fencing which is required be erected ahead without sagging, and true to line, care being exercised
of construction operations, where practicable, instead of not to tension the wire to such an extent that it will
erecting temporary fencing. break, or that end, corner, straining or gate posts will be
pulled out, or that it will be easily damaged during fires.

Each strand of fencing wire shall be securely tied in the 5309 CLOSING OPENINGS UNDER FENCES
correct position hard up to each standard with soft At ditches, streams, drainage channels or other
galvanised tying wire. The tying wire for each strand depressions where the fence cannot be erected so as
shall pass through a hole or notch in the standard, while to follow the general ground contour, the Contractor
the ends of the tying wire shall be wound at least four shall close the opening under the fence with horizontal
times around the fencing wire to prevent it from moving barbed wires at 150 mm spacing. Stretched between
in a vertical direction. additional posts or straining posts as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. In the case of
At end, corner, straining and gate posts the fencing wire pedestrian, vermin-proof and security fences the
shall be securely wrapped twice around the post and opening shall be covered with strips of wire netting or
secured against slipping by tying the end tightly around diamond mesh 1000 mm wide, fixed to the barbed
the wire by means of at least six neat tight twists. wires.
Where high-tensile wire is used, two long twists may In the case of larger streams where damming of debris
first be made followed by the six tight, neat twists against the fence would constitute a hazard, the
around the post to prevent the wire from breaking at the opening below the bottom fencing wire shall be closed
first twist. When smooth wire is used, the loose end with loose-hanging wire nets. For this purpose
shall preferably be bent over and hooked into the notch additional straining posts shall be planted on both sides
between the fencing wire and the first twist. of the stream with a cable consisting of at least five
strands of smooth fencing wire stretched between them.
Splices in the fencing wire shall be permitted if made in Onto this cable vertical strips of diamond mesh hanging
the following manner with a splicing tool. The end of down to ground level shall be fixed. The edges of the
each wire at the splice shall be taken at least 75 mm various strips of diamond mesh shall be tied to each
past the splicing tool and wrapped around the other other so that the entire mat will be raised by water
wire by not less than six complete turns with the two flowing underneath to leave a free stream area. These
separate wire ends being turned in opposite directions. mats at streams shall be erected only when instructed
After the splicing tool has been removed, the space left by the Engineer. If it should be necessary to keep the
by it in the spliced wire shall be closed by pulling the bottoms of the mats on the ground, the Engineer may
wire ends together. Unused wire ends shall be cut close order that timber posts or pipes be fixed horizontally to
so as to leave a neat splice. the bottom ends of the diamond-mesh strips.
The gaps between gate posts and the adjacent 5310 EXISTING FENCES
straining posts shall be fenced off with short lengths of
Where a new fence joins an existing fence whether in
fencing wires.
line or at an angle, the new fence shall be erected with
a new straining post positioned at the terminal point of
Droppers shall be tied to each fence wire with soft tying
the existing fence.
wire in the required position as specified for standards
to prevent slippage in a vertical direction. The spacing
Existing fences that require to be taken down or moved
of droppers between any two straining posts shall be
to a new location shall be dismantled. Material not
uniform. Anchoring to structures shall be done as
required for re-erection or unsuitable for re-use shall be
shown on the Drawings.
neatly stacked at approved locations in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions. Fencing wire and wire
Barbed-tape concertina wire shall be attached to the
netting shall be stacked clear of the ground. Payment
fence as shown on the Drawings at maximum spaces of
will be made only for fences removed in accordance
1.0m between tying points. Barbed-tape concertina wire
with the written instruction of the Engineer.
rolls shall be spliced by overlapping for one full circle
and tied at four evenly spaced points along the
Where fences require moving, the Contractor shall re-
circumference. Spliced ends shall coincide with the
use all the material, declared to be suitable for this
positions of the standards.
purpose by the Engineer, plus such new material as
may be required to erect the fence again to the
5308 ERECTING DIAMOND MESH OR WIRE standard specified for new fences. The Engineer shall
NETTING not be responsible for any delays or costs arising from
Where vermin-proof, pedestrian or security fences are the breaking of re-used wire during straining.
erected, or where instructed by the Engineer, wire
netting or diamond mesh shall be stretched against the 5311 ERECTING GATES
fence and properly tied to the fencing wire as shown on Gates shall be erected at the positions indicated by the
the Drawings. The diamond mesh or wire netting shall Engineer. The gates shall be hung on gate fittings in
be secured by soft tying wire at 1.2 m centres along the accordance with the requirements shown on the
top and bottom wires and at 3 m centres along each of Drawings. Gates shall be so erected as to swing in a
the other fencing wires, unless otherwise shown on the horizontal plane at right angles to the gate posts, clear
Drawings. of the ground in all positions. In pedestrian and security
fences the double swing gates shall leave a gap not
In the case of vermin-proof fencing, vermin shall be exceeding 25 mm between them when closed and other
prevented from creeping under the fence by either one gates shall not be further than 25 mm from the gate
of the two methods described below as ordered by the post when closed.
Engineer:
Gates shall be stock-proof to the same extent as the
(a) By folding back the bottom 130 mm of the wire adjoining fence. The clearance below the gates shall
netting so that it lies flat on the ground and by not exceed 75 mm with the gates closed. Where the
tightly packing stones (having a minimum gate crosses a public road, it shall be fitted with a disc
dimension of 200 mm) end to end on this flap to or other device easily visible at night, as instructed by
secure it in position. the Engineer.
(b) By embedding the lower 130 mm of the wire netting 5312 TEMPORARY FENCING, GATES AND
in the ground and thoroughly compacting the earth
around it on both sides, to secure the netting. MOTOR GATES
If required, the Contractor shall erect temporary fencing,
gates and motor gates in accordance with the
Drawings, Special Specifications or the Engineer's (i) TIMBER POSTS TO BE FIXED TO METRE (m)
instructions. The material and erection shall be in THE BOTTOM OF WIRE MESH IN
accordance with the provisions of this Section, but the STREAMS (DIAMETER INDICATED)
material need not necessarily be new. Where used
materials are offered, they shall be in a good condition The quantity of material used shall be determined by
and approved in advance by the Engineer. measuring the quantities of individual items of material
used in the completed fence. The linear measurement
When no longer required, the temporary fencing, gates of the completed fence shall not apply. The appropriate
and motor gates shall be dismantled and removed. units of measurement are as follows:
5313 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (i) Fencing wire (SUBITEMS 53.02(a) and (b))
The completed fence shall be plumb, taut, true to line The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of
and ground contour, with all posts, standards and stays each type of fencing wire measured between end
firmly set. The height of the lower fencing wire above posts. Tying wire and wire used for anchoring the
the ground at posts and standards shall not deviate by posts shall not be measured for payment.
more than 25 mm from that shown on the Drawings.
Other fencing wires shall not deviate by more than 10 (ii) Diamond mesh and wire netting (SUBITEMS 53.02(c)
mm from their prescribed vertical positions. and (d))
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre
The Contractor shall, on completion of each section of of diamond mesh or wire netting, the quantity of
fence, remove all cut-offs and other loose wire or which shall be calculated according to the
netting so as not to create a hazard to grazing animals prescribed width and the length between straining
or a nuisance to the Owners of the ground. posts or gate posts, or the length of strips used for
covering openings under fences, or the length used
for covering the gates.
(iii) Barbed-tape concertina wire (SUBITEM 53.02(e))
ITEM UNIT The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of
fence provided with barbed-tape concertina wire of
53.01 CLEARING THE FENCE LINE, KILOMETRE
which each concertina is opened to the maximum
2m WIDE STRIP: (km)
effective open concertina length as specified in the
Drawings.
The unit of measurement for clearing the fence line
shall be the kilometre of fence line measured along (iv) Straining posts (SUBITEM 53.02(f))
each fence line. The unit of measurement shall be the number of
posts, as follows:
The bid rate shall be in full compensation for clearing
the fence line as specified, including the removal of All straining posts erected in accordance with the
trees, stones, and other obstructions and the disposal maximum specified spacing or such lesser spacing
of all waste material resulting from clearing operations, as authorised by the Engineer, all corner posts
as may be directed. The removal of trees and stumps authorised by the Engineer, and all end posts. Gate
with a girth exceeding 1.0 m shall be paid for as posts for new gates shall not be measured for
specified in SECTION 3100. payment.
(v) Standards and droppers (SUBITEMS 53.02(g) and

ITEM UNIT (h))
53.02 SUPPLYING AND ERECTING The unit of measurement shall be the number of
NEW FENCING MATERIAL FOR standards and droppers erected to the maximum
NEW FENCES AND FOR specified spacing or such lesser spacing as
SUPPLEMENTING MATERIAL IN authorised by the Engineer.
EXISTING FENCES WHICH ARE
BEING REPAIRED OR REMOVED: (vi) Timber posts to be fixed to the bottom of wire mesh
in streams (SUBITEM 53.02(i)).
(a) BARBED WIRE (GRADE, SIZE AND KILOMETRE
TYPE OF GALVANISING (km)
timber post of every diameter erected in
INDICATED)
accordance with the Drawings and the instructions
(b) SMOOTH WIRE (GRADE, SIZE AND KILOMETRE of the Engineer.
INDICATED) The bid rate for each straining post, standard, dropper,
(c) DIAMOND MESH SQUARE each kilometre of fencing wire and barbed-tape
2
METRE (m ) concertina wire, and each square metre of diamond
(d) WIRE NETTING SQUARE mesh or wire netting and for each metre of timber post,
2
METRE (m ) shall include full compensation for providing all the
(e) BARBED-TAPE CONCERTINA KILOMETRE materials, including all concrete, tying wire, straining
WIRE (km) wire, bolts, washers and nuts, for excavating or drilling
holes for standards, for erecting the posts, standards
(f) STEEL AND TIMBER STRAINING NUMBER (no)
and droppers and the complete putting up of the fence
POSTS, INCLUDING ANCHORS
as specified and as shown on the Drawings. No
(TYPE, SIZE AND LENGTH AND
separate payment will be made in respect of stone
WHETHER GALVANISED,
packing and/or trenching in the case of wire netting.
TREATED OR PAINTED
INDICATED)
The bid rate for posts shall include full compensation for
erecting the stays of the types shown on the Drawings.
(g) STEEL AND TIMBER STANDARDS
(LENGTH AND TYPE INDICATED) NUMBER (no)
(h) STEEL AND TIMBER DROPPERS NUMBER (no)

(LENGTH AND TYPE INDICATED)

ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

53.03 NEW GATES: 53.06 PROVIDING TEMPORARY
(a) SINGLE LEAF (SIZE AND TYPE NUMBER FENCES AND GATES:
INDICATED) (no) (a) STOCK-PROOF FENCE KILOMETRE
(b) DOUBLE LEAF (SIZE AND TYPE NUMBER (km)
INDICATED) (no) (b) VERMIN-PROOF FENCE KILOMETRE
(km)
(c) PEDESTRIAN FENCE KILOMETRE
The unit of measurement shall be the number of new (km)
gates erected. At pedestrian and security fences the (d) TEMPORARY GATES (TYPE AND NUMBER (no)
pair of gates shall be measured as one. SIZE INDICATED)
The bid rates shall include full compensation for (e) TEMPORARY MOTOR GATES NUMBER (no)
procuring and furnishing all material, including gates,
gate posts, hinges, bolts, disks, concrete and straining The unit of measurement for SUBITEMS 53,06(a), (b)
wire, and for erecting the gates as specified and as and (c) shall be the kilometre of each type of temporary
shown on the Drawings. It shall not include fencing erected on the instructions of the Engineer.
compensation for any fencing wire or mesh fitted onto
the gate. The bid rates shall include full compensation for
providing all labour, new or suitable second-hand
material, putting up the temporary fence and when no
ITEM UNIT longer required, dismantling and removing it from the
53.04 MOVING EXISTING FENCES site to any new locality where it is required.
AND GATES:
The unit of measurement for SUBITEM 53,06(d) shall be
(a) FENCES: the number of temporary gates provided by the
(i) STOCK-PROOF FENCES KILOMETRE (km) Contractor.
(ii) VERMIN-PROOF FENCES KILOMETRE (km)
(iii) PEDESTRIAN FENCES KILOMETRE (km)
procuring, supplying and erecting new or second-hand
(iv) SECURITY FENCES KILOMETRE (km) gates, their later removal, and replacing the fence.
(b) GATES NUMBER (no)
The unit of measurement for SUBITEM 53,06(e) shall be
the number of temporary motor gates provided by the
The unit of measurement for moving existing fences Contractor.
shall be the kilometre of fence, the quantity of which
shall be taken as the length of fence which has been The bid rate shall include full compensation for erecting
put up permanently with material obtained from fences the motor gates in accordance with the Drawings, by
which have been dismantled elsewhere. Additional new using new or second-hand material, and, if required,
material used during the re-erection of existing fences dismantling and removing the motor gates and again
shall be measured under ITEM 53.02. The unit of putting up any fencing removed from the positions
measurement for moving gates shall be the number of where the motor gates have been erected.
gates moved.
General
The bid rate for each kilometre of existing fence moved Where new or second-hand material is used which has
or for each existing gate moved shall include full been provided by the Employer, eg material obtained
compensation for dismantling the old fence, coiling and from taking down existing fences, such material
stacking the material unsuitable for re-use, moving all obtained from taking down the temporary fences or
material, including posts and wire and again putting up gates shall remain the property of the Employer.
the fence or gate at the new position and the provision Material provided by the Contractor for temporary
of binding, tying and straining wire. New material used fences will similarly become the Contractor's property
for re-erection of old fences shall be paid for under ITEM after the temporary fences have been dismantled.
53.02.
The bid rate for each gate moved shall include full ITEM UNIT
compensation for taking down the gate and re-erecting
it where required, including all new bolts, nuts and other 53.07 RINGBOLTS FOR ANCHORING NUMBER
accessories required but excluding new gate posts. FENCING TO STRUCTURES: (no)

ITEM UNIT ringbolts supplied and fixed to the structure.
53.05 DISMANTLING EXISTING KILOMETRE (km)
FENCES The bid rate shall include full compensation for
supplying and fixing ringbolts of the type shown on the
Drawings to the structure, including, where necessary,
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of drilling holes, anchorage, grouting ringbolts in with
existing fencing and gates taken down and dismantled epoxy resin, and for all incidentals.
on the instruction of the Engineer.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for taking ITEM UNIT
down existing fences and gates, coiling wires, rolling
netting into rolls, transporting the material to designated 53.08 DRILLING AND BLASTING NUMBER (no)
sites and stacking the material. HOLES FOR POSTS AND ANCHORS:
The unit of measurement shall be the number of holes

for posts and anchors made by drilling and/or blasting
where excavation by hand or by pneumatic tools cannot
be done economically.

The bid rate shall include full compensation for drilling

and blasting the holes and for all other expenses in
connection with providing, storing, transporting and
using explosives.

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS of guarantee have been inspected by the Engineer and
accepted.
SECTION 5400: ROAD SIGNS At any time the Engineer may request any test he thinks
necessary to verify the compliance of the material with
the Specifications.
CONTENTS:
CLAUSE PAGE All the tests shall be carried out in a specialised
laboratory previously approved by the Engineer; this
5401 SCOPE 5000-13 laboratory shall certify the results of the tests in
5402 DESCRIPTION 5000-13 question.
5404 CONSTRUCTION 5000-13 All the above-mentioned tests shall be at the expense
5405 STORAGE AND HANDLING 5000-14 of the Contractor.
5406 ERECTING ROAD SIGNS 5000-14
5407 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE 5000-14
5408 DISMANTLING, STORING AND RE-
5404 CONSTRUCTION
Road sign plates shall be manufactured from
ERECTING EXISTING ROAD SIGNS 5000-14
5409 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5000-14 galvanised steel sheet of at least 1.4 mm thickness, or
from aluminium alloy sheet of at least 2.5 mm thickness
or such other material that is approved by the Engineer.
Sign plates manufactured from sheet material shall be

5401 SCOPE stiffened when the maximum dimension of the sign
This Section covers the supply and erection of exceeds 600 mm.
permanent and temporary road traffic signs alongside
and over the carriageway, ramps and cross roads at The stiffening of the sign may be in the form of a flange
intersections and interchanges and at the locations at least 15 mm deep on all edges or by means of mild
indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the steel or aluminium sections. Material for fixing such as
Engineer. brackets, socket caps, clips, screws, bolts, nuts and
washers, shall be corrosion resistant and to the
5402 DESCRIPTION Engineer’s approval. Brass or copper will not be
This work shall consist of furnishing and placing road allowed for use in contact with aluminium.
signs, in accordance with these Specifications, at the
locations and of the dimensions shown on the Drawings The colours on all road signs, with the exception of
or as directed by the Engineer. black, will normally be reflectorised, unless otherwise
specified or ordered by the Engineer. Reflective
5403 MATERIALS sheeting shall be applied by a mechanical or
Concrete for foundations shall be Class 30/19 to be vacuum/heat application method. The sign plate shall
executed as specified in SECTIONS 6100 and 6400 of be covered with clear lacquer of a make recommended
these Specifications. by the manufacturer of the reflective material.
Sign post shall consist of steel pipe conforming to the Before painting all signs shall be pre-treated by an
requirements of ASTM A 52 Grade B, to be galvanised approved method, and all frames, brackets, metal
in accordance with ASTM A 123. stakes, clips, screws, nuts, bolts, and washers shall be
corrosion-proofed prior to painting.
Sign plate shall consist of steel sheets conforming to
the requirements of ASTM A 366 or aluminium alloy The sign shall be supported on a galvanised steel tube
sheets conforming to ASTM B 209, 6061-T6 aluminium, of not less than 50 mm internal diameter and securely
degreased and alodine treated. bolted to it. The ends of the bolts shall be hammered to
prevent the nuts being removed.
Reflective sheeting shall be reflective sheeting, high
intensity grade, SERIES 3800 with pressure sensitive Care shall be taken to prevent the forced rotation of the
adhesive or similar product, as approved by the sign round the post. A steel bar of 16 mm diameter x
Engineer. Reflective sheeting shall comply with United 450 mm long shall be welded in the middle horizontally
States Federal Specification L-S-300C. to the foot of the post to prevent the rotation of the post
in its foundation. The length of the post shall be such
The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, the that it is at least 0.65 m in the ground when the sign is
sign manufacturer’s specifications and certificate for all at its correct height.
materials he intends to adopt. The certificate shall set
forth the name or brand of the materials to be furnished, Additional road sign plates shall be provided and
the results of tests proving the products meet the mounted on the support of the road sign, as directed by
requirements, and any other data requested by the the Engineer.
Engineer. The certificate shall be sworn to for the
manufacturer by a person having legal authority to bind Posts shall be thoroughly cleaned, free from grease,
the company. scale and rust and given at least one coat of rust
inhibiting priming paint.
The Contractor shall also provide a guarantee by the
manufacturer that all materials furnished shall conform Posts and backs of signs, fittings, etc. shall be painted
to the specification requirements and that the signs as grey.
manufactured will maintain their structural quality and
the symbols will maintain their visibility by day and by The foundations for road signs shall be as shown on the
night for a period of ten years. Any sign that fails within Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Concrete
that period shall be replaced at no cost to the Employer. foundations shall be poured using formwork.
The Contractor shall not place any purchase order for After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces
road signs until the manufacturer’s certificate and form around the concrete foundation shall be refilled to the
required elevation with suitable material which shall be

thoroughly tamped in layers of not more than 150 mm Where timber posts are used for erecting the signs, all
thickness. holes that are drilled in the timber shall be impregnated
with creosote.
All road signs shall be marked with the manufacturer’s
name or trade mark, and year of make. (d) Field welding
All welding done during erection shall comply with the
Mounting of the sign plate on the support shall be made requirements for welding during manufacture.
by brackets, in accordance with the types proposed by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, before (e) On-site painting
the actual manufacture and erection in place. All painting done after the road signs have been erected
shall comply with the requirements for painting during
Signs shall be erected at a distance from the edge of manufacture.
the carriageway depending upon the design standard of
the road, as directed by the Engineer, and at a height in All places where the paintwork has been damaged
accordance with the SATCC Road Traffic Signs Manual during erection shall be repaired by the Contractor at
and as directed or shown. his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall cut back trees and vegetation as (f) Time of erection
may be necessary to ensure visibility of the signs. Road signs shall be erected immediately prior to the
road being opened to public traffic, unless otherwise
All the structures must be such as to bear the stress directed by the Engineer.
caused by a wind blowing at 130 km/h on the support
and the signs. (g) General
All destinations and route numbers shown on the
5405 STORAGE AND HANDLING Drawings shall be subject to amendment, and
All road signs or parts of road signs shall be transported confirmation of the details shall be obtained from the
and handled so as to prevent any damage and Engineer before any particular signs are made. Such
deformation. All road signs shall be stored in a vertical particulars may be available only at a late stage, for
position in a weather-proof storeroom. There shall be which allowance shall be made by the Contractor in his
sufficient space between the road signs to permit free programme.
air circulation and moisture evaporation. Contact of
road signs with treated timber, diesel, dirt or water shall 5407 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
not be permitted. When required, existing or newly The Contractor shall protect the completed road signs
erected road signs shall be fully or partially covered with against damage until they have been finally accepted
burlap or other approved adequately ventilated material by the Employer, and he shall maintain the road signs
to obscure destinations that are temporarily inapplicable until the Performance Certificate has been issued.
or irrelevant. Damage or defects caused by negligence or faulty
workmanship shall be rectified by the Contractor at his
own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5406 ERECTING ROAD SIGNS
5408 DISMANTLING, STORING AND RE-
(a) Position ERECTING EXISTING ROAD SIGNS
Road signs shall be erected in the positions shown on Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer. dismantle existing road signs, store them, and re-erect
them at new positions indicated.
(b) Excavation and backfilling
Excavations for the erection of road signs shall be Where required by the Engineer, the signs shall be
made according to the dimensions shown on the repainted or repaired and new materials shall be used
Drawings. Where the excavations are to be backfilled for part or all of the supporting structure.
with soil, a 12:1 soil-cement mixture shall be made if
required by the Engineer. 5409 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The quantity to be measured for payment shall be:
The soil or soil-cement mixture shall then be compacted
− The actual number of road signs complete in place,
by tamping at optimum moisture content in 100mm thick
including support assembly and concrete
layers in the excavation.
foundation, and accepted.
Where posts or structures are to be fixed in concrete, or − The actual number of additional road sign plates
where concrete footings are to be cast, the concrete, complete in place, regardless of the sizes.
formwork and reinforcement shall comply with the − Route direction signs (D Series) are to be
requirements of SECTIONS 6200, 6300 and 6400. The measured as one sign per site with all names, route
holes shall be completely filled with concrete up to the numbers and directional arrows shown on the one
level shown on the Drawings or indicated by the sign.
Engineer. The upper surface of the concrete shall be
neatly finished with sufficient fall to ensure proper The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be
drainage. paid for at the rate per unit of measurement for each of
the pay items listed below, that is shown in the Bill of
(c) Erection Quantities, which price and payment shall be full
Road signs shall be erected as shown on the Drawings compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,
or as directed by the Engineer. During erection the for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals
structural steelwork shall be firmly bolted and protected necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
to prevent buckling or damage during erection, or by the section, including all necessary excavation and
equipment used for erection. backfilling.
Posts to which road signs are to be fixed shall be

vertical and the undersides of road signs shall be ITEM UNIT
horizontal after having been erected. 54.01 ROAD SIGN (STANDARD, NUMBER (no)
STATE AREA FOR EACH TYPE)

ITEM UNIT
54.02 ADDITIONAL ROAD SIGN NUMBER (no)
PLATE

standard size signs of approved materials as stated in
the Specifications.
ITEM UNIT
54.03 ROUTE DIRECTION SQUARE METRE
2
SIGNS (m )

completed road sign board of approved materials.

providing the completed road sign board, frame, fixing
brackets, angle-irons, channel profiles, etc including
painting, galvanising if specified, reflective lettering,
symbols, legends and borders, attaching the road sign
board to the road sign support, or to the overhead road
sign structure, or to an over-bridge, and for all other
materials and workmanship, brackets, bolts, nuts, etc,
for the completion of the road sign boards as specified.
ITEM UNIT
54.04 DISMANTLING, STORING AND NUMBER (no)
RE-ERECTING ROAD SIGNS
(INDICATE SURFACE AREA)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of signs

dismantled and stored and re-erected in each size
group.

dismantling and storing the road signs and supporting
structures, transporting the material to a new location,
re-erecting the road signs, and restoring the location
where they were dismantled.
Payment for excavations, and the new material and

concrete required for re-erecting the road signs shall be
made under the appropriate Item, and any repairs and
painting which may be necessary, shall be paid for as
"extra work". No separate payment shall be made for
new bolts and nuts required for such re-erection, the
cost of which shall be included in the rates bid above.

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS (iv) Colour

The colours to be used shall be bright white, red or
yellow.
SECTION 5500: ROAD
The colour of the yellow and red paint shall be as
MARKINGS specified in the SATCC Road Traffic Signs Manual.
CONTENTS: (v) Skid resistance

The skid resistance of all types of marking material
CLAUSE PAGE shall comply with the requirements of SABS 731-1
5501 SCOPE 5000-16 or equivalent.
5503 WEATHER LIMITATIONS 5000-16 (b) Roadstuds
5504 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR Roadstuds shall comply with the requirements of SABS
PAINTING 5000-16 1442 or equivalent and shall be of the size and type
5505 SURFACE PREPARATION 5000-16 indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Special
5506 SETTING OUT THE ROAD MARKINGS 5000-16 Specifications. The Contractor shall, prior to delivery,
5507 APPLYING THE PAINT 5000-17 submit to the Engineer for approval, samples of the type
5508 APPLYING THE RETRO-REFLECTIVE of roadstuds he proposes to use.
BEADS 5000-17
5509 ROADSTUDS 5000-17 5503 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
5510 TOLERANCES 5000-17 Road-marking paint shall not be applied to a damp
5511 GENERAL 5000-17 surface or at temperatures lower than l0°C or when, in
5512 FAULTY W ORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS 5000-17 the opinion of the Engineer, the wind strength is such
5513 PROTECTION 5000-17 that it may adversely affect the painting operations.
5504 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR
PAINTING
The equipment shall consist of an apparatus for
5501 SCOPE cleaning the surfaces, a mechanical road-painting
This Section covers the permanent marking of the road machine and all additional hand-operated equipment
surface with white, red or yellow painted lines or necessary for completing the work. The mechanical
symbols and the supply and fixing of retro-reflective road-marking machine shall be capable of painting at
roadstuds as indicated on the Drawings or as specified least two parallel lines simultaneously and shall apply
by the Engineer. the paint to a uniform film thickness at the rates of
application specified. The machine shall be so designed
All road markings shall be of the standard regulatory, that it will be capable of painting the road markings
warning and guidance markings as detailed on the everywhere to a uniform width with sides within the
Drawings and in accordance with the SATCC Road tolerances specified, without the paint running or
Traffic Signs Manual. splashing. The machine shall further be capable of
painting lines of different widths by adjusting the spray
jets on the machine or by means of additional
5502 MATERIALS equipment attached to the machine.
(a) Paint Machines which apply the beads by means of gravity

only shall not be used. The beads shall be sprayed onto
(i) Road-marking paint the paint layer by means of a pressure sprayer.
Road-marking paint shall comply with the
requirements of Traffic paint shall conform to the The machine shall be provided with clearly visible
requirements of AASHTO M248, Type F. amber warning flashing lights which shall always be in
operation when the machine is on the road.
Glass beads shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M247, Type 1. SABS 731 or equivalent 5505 SURFACE PREPARATION
for Type 1, Type 2 or Type 4 as specified in the Road markings shall be applied to bituminous surfaces
Special Specifications. The no-pick-up time of road only after sufficient time has elapsed to ensure that
marking paint shall comply with the Class 1 damage will not be caused to the painted surface by
requirement in SABS 731-1 or equivalent. volatiles evaporating from the surfacing.
The paint shall be delivered at the Site in sealed Before the paint is applied, the surface shall be clean
containers bearing the name of the manufacturer and dry and completely free from any soil, grease, oil,
and the type of paint. The viscosity of the paint shall acid or any other material which will be detrimental to
be such that it can be applied without being thinned. the bond between the paint and the surface. The
surface where the paint is to be applied shall be
(ii) Retro-reflective road-marking paint properly cleaned by means of watering, brooming or
Retro-reflective road-marking paint shall comply compressed air if required.
with the requirements of SUBCLAUSE 5502(a)(i)
above and CKS 192. 5506 SETTING OUT THE ROAD MARKINGS
The lines, symbols, figures or marks shall be premarked
(iii) Thermo-plastic road-marking material
by means of paint spots of the same colour as that of
Where specified in the Special Specifications, hot-
the final lines and marks. These paint spots shall be at
melt plastic road-marking material shall comply with
such intervals to ensure that the road markings can be
the requirements of BS 3262. The binder shall be
accurately applied, and in no case shall they be more
plasticised synthetic resin and the material shall be
than 1.5 m apart. Spots of approximately 10 mm in
reflectorised by mixing in 20% by mass Class A
diameter should be sufficient.
glass beads in accordance with BS 6088.
The dimensions and positions of road markings shall be
as shown on the Drawings or as specified in the
appropriate statutory provisions and the SATCC Road The roadstuds shall be fixed by means of an approved
Traffic Signs Manual. After spotting, the positions of the epoxy resin in accordance with the manufacturer's
proposed road markings shall be indicated on the road. instructions, subject to such amendments to the method
These premarkings shall be approved by the Engineer as may be required by the Engineer. The studs shall be
prior to any painting operations being commenced. protected against impact until the adhesive has
hardened. Before fixing the roadstuds, the surface shall
The positions and outlines of special markings shall be be thoroughly cleaned as specified in CLAUSE 5505.
produced on the finished road in chalk and shall be
approved by the Engineer before they are painted. Roadstuds must be protected during painting of any
Approved templates may be used on condition that the lines and application of any surface treatments.
positioning of the marking is approved by the Engineer
before painting is commenced. 5510 TOLERANCES
Road markings shall be painted to an accuracy within
The position of roadstuds shall be marked out on the the tolerances given below:
road and shall be approved by the Engineer before they
are fixed in position. (a) Width
The width of lines and other markings shall not be less
5507 APPLYING THE PAINT than the specified width, nor shall it exceed the
The figures, letters, signs, symbols, broken or unbroken specified width by more than 10 mm.
lines or other marks shall be painted as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. (b) Position
The position of lines, letters, figures, arrows, retro-
Where the paint is applied by machine, it shall be reflective roadstuds and other markings shall not
applied in one layer. Before the road-marking machine deviate from the true position by more than 100 mm in
is used on the permanent Works, the satisfactory the longitudinal and 20 mm in the transverse direction.
operation of the machine shall be demonstrated on a
suitable site which is not part of the permanent Works. (c) Alignment of markings
Adjustments to the machine shall be followed by further The alignment of the edges of longitudinal lines shall
testing. Only when the machine has been correctly not deviate from the true alignment by more than 10
adjusted and its use has been approved by the mm in 15 m.
Engineer after testing, may the machine be used on the
permanent work. The operator shall be experienced in (d) Broken lines
the use of the machine. The length of segments of broken longitudinal lines
shall not deviate by more than 150 mm from the
After the machine has been satisfactorily adjusted, the specified length.
rate of application shall be checked and adjusted if
necessary before application on a large scale is 5511 GENERAL
commenced. The length of segments and the gap between segments
in broken lines shall be as indicated on the Drawings. If
Where two lines are required parallel to each other, the these lengths are altered by the Engineer, the ratio of
lines shall be applied simultaneously by the same the lengths of the painted section to the length of the
machine. The paint shall be stirred before application in gap between painted sections shall remain the same.
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Paint Lines shall not be painted more than 3 months prior to
shall be applied without the addition of thinners. the road being opened to public traffic.
Where painting is done by hand, it shall be applied in Lines on curves, whether broken or unbroken, shall not
two layers, and the second layer shall not be applied consist of chords but shall follow the correct radius.
before the first layer has dried. As most road-marking
paint reacts with the bitumen surface of the road, the Where plastic road-marking material is used, the
paint shall be applied with one stroke only of the brush manufacturer shall produce an approved guarantee as
or roller. specified in the Special Specifications. Where specified
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove existing
Ordinary road-marking paint shall be applied at a painted markings from the road surface by means of
2
nominal rate of 0.42 litre/m or as directed by the sand blasting or other approved method. The use of
Engineer while thermo-plastic road-marking paints shall black paint or chemical paint remover to obliterate
be applied at the rates specified in the Special existing markings will not be permitted, except where it
Specifications. is ordered by the Engineer as a temporary measure.
Unless otherwise prescribed by the Engineer, the road 5512 FAULTY WORKMANSHIP OR
marking shall be completed before a particular section
of the road is opened to traffic. Each layer of paint shall MATERIALS
be continuous over the entire area being painted. If any material which does not comply with the
requirements is delivered to the Site, or is used in the
5508 APPLYING THE RETRO-REFLECTIVE Works, or if any work of an unacceptable quality is
carried out, such material or work shall be removed,
BEADS replaced or repaired as required by the Engineer at the
Where retro-reflective paint is required, the retro- Contractor's own cost. Rejected road markings and
reflective beads shall be applied by means of a suitable paint which has been splashed or dripped onto the
machine in one continuous operation, immediately after pavement, kerbs, structures or other such surfaces,
the paint has been applied. The rate of application of shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost, in
the beads shall be 0.8 kg/litre of paint or such other rate an approved manner so that the markings or spilt paint
as may be directed by the Engineer. will not show up at all.
5509 ROADSTUDS 5513 PROTECTION

Roadstuds shall be of the type indicated on the After the paint has been applied, the road markings
Drawings or the Bill of Quantities and shall be fixed in shall be protected against damage by traffic or other
the positions indicated and approved by the Engineer. causes. The Contractor shall be responsible for
erecting, placing and removing all warning boards,
flags, cones, barricades and other protective measures quantity paid for shall be the actual length of line
which may be necessary in terms of any statutory painted in accordance with the instructions of the
provisions and/or as may be recommended in the Engineer, excluding the length of gaps in broken lines.
SATCC Road Traffic Signs Manual. The unit of measurement for painting the lettering,
symbols or traffic-island markings shall be the square
metre, and the quantity to be paid for shall be the actual
5514 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT surface area of lettering, symbols or traffic-island
markings completed.
ITEM UNIT
The bid rate per metre or per square metre as the case
55.01 ROAD-MARKING PAINT: may be for painting the road markings shall include full
(a) WHITE LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m) compensation for procuring and furnishing all material,
UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE including the retro-reflective beads, and the necessary
INDICATED) equipment, and for painting, protecting and
(b) YELLOW LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m) maintenance as specified, including the setting-out of
UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE lettering, symbols and traffic-island markings, but
INDICATED) excluding setting out and premarking the lines.
(c) RED LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m)
UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE
ITEM UNIT
INDICATED)
55.03 THERMO-PLASTIC ROAD-
(d) WHITE LETTERING AND SQUARE
MARKING MATERIAL
2
SYMBOLS METRE (m )
(PARTICULARS STATED):
(e) YELLOW LETTERING AND SQUARE
2 (a) WHITE LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m)
SYMBOLS METRE (m )
(f) TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS SQUARE INDICATED)
2
(ANY COLOUR) METRE (m )
(b) YELLOW LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m)
(g) KERB MARKINGS (ANY COLOUR) SQUARE UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE
2
METRE (m ) INDICATED)
The unit of measurement for painting the lines shall be
the metre of each specified width of line and the
INDICATED)
quantity paid for shall be the actual length of line
painted in accordance with the instructions of the (d) WHITE LETTERING AND SYMBOLS SQUARE
2
Engineer, excluding the length of gaps in broken lines. METRE (m )
2
The unit of measurement for painting the lettering, SYMBOLS METRE (m )
symbols or traffic-island markings shall be the square (f) TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS (ANY SQUARE
2
metre, and the quantity to be paid for shall be the actual COLOUR) METRE (m )
surface area of lettering, symbols or traffic-island
markings completed. The unit of measurement for painting the lines shall be
The bid rate per metre or per square metre as the case quantity paid for shall be the actual length of line
may be for painting the road markings shall include full painted in accordance with the instructions of the
compensation for procuring and furnishing all material Engineer, excluding the length of gaps in broken lines.
and the necessary equipment, and for painting, Approved types of acoustic lines, where specified and
protecting and maintenance as specified, including the approved by the Engineer, shall be measured as
setting-out of lettering, symbols and traffic-island continuous for payment purposes.
markings, but excluding setting out and premarking the
lines. The unit of measurement for painting the lettering,
symbols or traffic-island markings shall be the square
metre, and the quantity to be paid for shall be the actual
ITEM UNIT
surface area of lettering, symbols or traffic-island
55.02 RETRO-REFLECTIVE ROAD- markings completed.
MARKING PAINT:
(a) WHITE LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m) The bid rate per metre or per square metre as the case
UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE may be for painting the road markings shall include full
INDICATED) compensation for procuring and furnishing all material,
and the necessary equipment, and for painting,
protecting and maintenance as specified, including the
setting-out of lettering, symbols and traffic-island
INDICATED)
markings, but excluding setting out and premarking the
(c) RED LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m) lines.
INDICATED)
(d) WHITE LETTERING AND SYMBOLS SQUARE ITEM UNIT
2
METRE (m ) 55.04 VARIATIONS IN RATE OF
(e) YELLOW LETTERING AND SQUARE APPLICATION:
2
SYMBOLS METRE (m )
(a) WHITE PAINT LITRE (l)
(b) YELLOW PAINT LITRE (l)
(f) TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS (ANY SQUARE
2
METRE (m ) (c) RED PAINT LITRE (l)
COLOUR)
(d) RETRO-REFLECTIVE BEADS KILOGRAMMES
(kg)
The unit of measurement for painting the lines shall be
(e) PLASTIC ROAD-MARKING PAINTS LITRE (l)
(SPECIFY)

The unit of measurement for variations in the rate of The unit of measurement shall be the actual number of
applying of the paint and retro-reflective beads shall be roadstuds removed.
the litre and the kilogram respectively.

CLAUSE 1213.
ITEM UNIT
55.05 ROADSTUDS (TYPE NUMBER (no)
STATED)
The unit of measurement for roadstuds shall be the

actual number of approved roadstuds placed.

procuring and furnishing all the necessary material,
labour and equipment, and for fixing and maintenance
as specified. Distinction shall be made between various
types of roadstuds.
ITEM UNIT
55.06 SETTING OUT AND PRE- METRE (m)
MARKING THE LINES (EXCLUDING
TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS,
LETTERING AND SYMBOLS)
The unit of measurement for setting out lines shall be

the metre of lines set out and marked. Where two or
three lines are to be painted next to each other, the
setting-out of lines shall be measured only once.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for setting

out and premarking the lines as specified, including all
materials.
ITEM UNIT
55.07 RE-ESTABLISHING THE PAINTING LUMP SUM
UNIT AT THE END OF THE DEFECT
LIABILITY PERIOD:
The bid lump sum shall include full compensation for

the re-establishment on the site and for later removal of
all special equipment, personnel, etc, as may be
required for repainting the road markings at the end of
the maintenance period. The Contractor will be paid at
bid rates for repainting the road markings.
The re-establishment during the construction period

shall not be paid for specially, and allowance therefor
shall be made by the Contractor in his programme and
his rates for painting.
ITEM UNIT
55.08 REMOVAL OF EXISTING,
TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT
ROAD MARKING BY:
(a) SANDBLASTING SQUARE
2
METRE (m )
(b) OVER PAINTING AS A SQUARE
2
TEMPORARY MEASURE METRE (m )
(c) MILLING SQUARE
2
METRE (m )

road marking removed.
ITEM UNIT
55.09 REMOVAL OF EXISTING NUMBER
ROADSTUDS (no)

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS and unformed surfaces shall have Class U2 finish in
accordance with CLAUSE 6209.
SECTION 5600: CATTLE GRIDS

5604 AXLE WEIGH-BRIDGES
AND AXLE WEIGH-BRIDGES
(a) General
CONTENTS: If specified or upon directions of the Engineer, the
Contractor shall construct, equip and operate axle
CLAUSE PAGE weigh-bridge stations in the number and at locations
5601 SCOPE 5000-20 directed by the Engineer. Construction and equipment
5602 MATERIALS 5000-20 shall be in accordance with the Drawings and the
5603 CONSTRUCTION 5000-20 provisions in this CLAUSE. Operation of the weigh-
5604 AXLE W EIGH-BRIDGES 5000-20 bridges, if required, shall be in accordance with the
5605 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5000-22 manufacturer’s directions and practices laid down in the
latest issue of relevant guidelines from the Employer, or
The Contractor shall carry out the necessary setting

5601 SCOPE and levelling of the weigh-pads and, after installation,
This Section covers the construction of cattle grids and
the necessary dead-weight in-situ testing and
axle weigh-bridges in conformity with the details, calibration of the weigh-pads.
dimensions and design shown on the Drawings, and at
locations shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the
Where axle weighing is to be carried out during the time
Engineer. of construction, the construction and installation shall be
in accordance with the requirements for transportable
A cattle grid is a structure constructed across a road
weigh-bridges as detailed in SUBCLAUSE 5604(c).
which is designed to prevent the passage of cattle while
permitting other traffic to pass.
(b) Stationary axle weigh-bridge and accessories
Axle weigh-bridges may be of a transportable or
stationary type. (i) Layout of the weigh-bridge site
The layout of the weigh-bridge site shall be in
Fencing and gates shall be in accordance with SECTION accordance with the Drawings or in their absence
5300. the latest issue of standard drawings from the
Employer or as directed by the Engineer. The
following shall be incorporated in the layout plans:
5602 MATERIALS − scales houses
− weighbridges and approaches
(a) Concrete and structural steel − parking area and roads
Cement, aggregate, water, reinforcement and structural − street lights
steel shall comply with the relevant requirements of
− traffic signs
SERIES 6000.
− access plans
Admixtures shall not be used in the concrete mix
The site shall be provided with supplies of 220 volts
without the approval of the Engineer who may require
AC power, potable water and sewage.
tests to be performed before their use. Admixtures. if
allowed, shall comply with the requirements of SECTION
(ii) Construction of pit and approaches
6400.
The pit and approaches shall be constructed
according to the Drawings or as directed by the
Concrete shall be Class 30/19 and shall be as specified
Engineer. The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the
in SECTION 6400. Steel reinforcement shall be as shown
high standards of workmanship required in all parts
on the Drawings and as specified in SECTION 6300.
of the operation in order to fulfil the requirements for
a stable foundation built to stringent geometric
Structural steel shall be as shown on the Drawings.
tolerances. The Contractor shall in his programme
Painting of structural steel shall be in accordance with
of works allow sufficient contingencies for chemical
SECTION 5900 or as directed by the Engineer.
soil stabilisation, adjustments of mix design for
(b) Materials for earthworks and pavement layers bituminous mixes and concrete as required during
the course of the Works. The Contractor’s attention
Materials for earthworks and pavement layers shall
is furthermore drawn to the specified earth
conform with the relevant requirements set out in
conductor system to be installed below the
SERIES 3000.
foundations of the pit.
(iii) The deck

5603 CONSTRUCTION The platform deck shall be made of steel with
surface having high resistance to wear, salt and
(a) Excavation of pits moisture according to the Drawings or as directed
Excavation shall be made large enough to permit by the Engineer. The general dimensions of the
construction of the base slab to the dimensions in the deck are given in TABLE 5604/1, however the
Drawings. Excavation shall be made in accordance with Drawings or directions of the Engineer may divert
the requirements of SECTION 6100. All excavations for from these and shall govern in the case of
cattle grids and weigh-bridges shall be classified as conflicting information.
provided in SERIES 3000.
(b) Formwork and concrete finish

Formwork and concrete finish shall conform to the
requirements of SECTION 6200. Formed surfaces shall
have Class F2 finish in accordance with CLAUSE 6207
TABLE 5604/1 (vi) Type of scale and performance

NOMINAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DECK OF STATIONARY The scale shall be of an electronic type that utilises
AXLE WEIGH BRIDGES load cells giving digital output signals of a
manufacture approved by the Engineer. The load
System component Nominal requirements cell shall be made of stainless steel, have plug
connections, and be hermetically sealed against
Total length of
4 metres water and dust in accordance with the standards of
platform
NEMA 6P/IP68. The minimum number of load-cells
Total width of platform 3 metres for each platform shall be four, one load-cell in each
Minimum load corner. The cells shall be installed with protection
capacity of platform 100 tonnes against lightning and voltage surges. The design
deck shall be such that replacement of load cells is
The scale to be possible without physical calibration of the scales.
60 tonnes
adjusted to The scale shall meet the requirements given in
TABLE 5604/3.
− 15 mm or more is the
general requirement
for plate thickness.
TABLE 5604/3
− A thinner plate may be REQUIRED PERFORMANCE OF STATIONARY AXLE WEIGH
used on approval of BRIDGE SCALES
the Engineer provided
the deck is designed
Thickness of platform System properties Requirements
with sufficient bracing
steel
to give the necessary Load capacity for
25 tonnes
stiffness of the each load cell
0
structure in Temperature range Between -10 C and
0
accordance with the for operation: +60 C
Drawings or latest Complying with EN 45501
Accuracy:
guidelines from the (OILM R 76) of EU
Employer. Safe overload: 150%
(iv) Accessories for weigh-bridge equipment (vii) Type of data indicator and performance
Cables and connector boxes between load cells The data indicator shall be of an approved industrial
and processing units shall be in accordance with type capable of transferring data for storage
TABLE 5604/2. purposes and making printouts. The reading of the
scales shall be electronic, and the data indicator
shall have the option of a connection to a computer.
TABLE 5604/2 The equipment shall be able to read axle loads, or
NOMINAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DECK OF STATIONARY any axle configuration within triple axle
AXLE WEIGH BRIDGES combinations or tandem axles, up to a magnitude of
2.5 times the legal limit for each axle as well as for
System the combination. The equipment should also be
Requirements
component able to calculate gross vehicle mass from the sum
Load cell of weighed single axles, tandem axles, triple axles
Shielded in stainless steel or other multi - axle combinations.
cables
Junction boxes Stainless steel
The data indicator shall be equipped to control
Two sets red and green for two traffic lights at the weigh-bridge site and remote
Traffic lights directions with cord-connectors displays as required.
and accessories
Two sets for weigh-bridges with The equipment shall be able to handle the following
Digital remote
traffic in two directions, with cord minimum data for printouts:
display
connectors and accessories − weighbridge station
Un-interuptable One set for protection of load − date
Power Supply cells, computer, printer and
− time
device display
− ticket number
− legal axle load and gross vehicle mass
(v) Earth conductor, protection from lightning
In order to avoid a direct hit from lightning, no radio − actual axle loads, tandem-loads, triple loads
tower or tall power pole shall be attached to the and loads of other multi-axle combinations
scales house. Scales, houses, the weigh-bridge − actual gross vehicle mass
and all cable equipment shall be connected to the − overload
same approved earth conductor system. The − name of scales-operator
system shall consist of a steel matrix of sufficient − registration number of vehicle
dimensions to allow the earth-conductors from the − starting point
load cells, the platform, the cords and the scale − destination
house equipment to be connected. The anchors − type of load
shall be made of approved steel reinforcement grids
installed below the foundations of the entire weigh- The equipment should be able to process at least
bridge pit and houses as described on the Drawings three copies in one operation.
or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor’s
attention is drawn to the necessity for accurate
electric installations by competent personnel (c) Transportable axle weigh-bridge and
according to approved plans for the earth protection accessories
system. In addition to these measures, an approved
UPS device shall be installed to ensure continued (i) Layout and of the construction of site and
weigh-bridge and computer operation in the case of approaches.
power failure.

The layout of the weigh-bridge site shall be a paved TABLE 5604/5

area in perfect level in accordance with the REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PROCESSING UNITS
Drawings, or in their absence the latest issue of
standard drawings from the Employer, or as System
Requirements
directed by the Engineer. As a rule concrete properties
pavements shall be used due to the sensitivity of Power supply, AC: 230 volt
transportable weigh bridges with regards to
deformation of the surface. Power supply, DC: 10.8 to 16 volt
Data transfer: RS232
(ii) The platform LCD-dot-matrix or screen
The weighing platforms shall be waterproof and Display:
display.
made of aluminium with a very high resistance to o o
-5 C to 60 C operating
bending. They shall be easy to handle and be of a temperature
Temperature
manufacture approved by the Engineer. One weigh- range
o o
-25 C to 60 C storage
bridge set shall consist of two electronic wheel-load temperature
platforms complying with the requirements given in
the following. Keyboard: Membrane touch or keyboard
Permissible
Up to 80%
(1) Dimensions and weight humidity:
The dimensions of the platform shall conform to Weight: Up to 20 kg.
the following approximate requirements:
− Approx. height of the platforms: 20 mm
− Approx. length of the platforms: 750 mm (iv) Printer and the protocol for ticket print-out
− Approx. width of the platforms: 400 mm The system for the printout shall be included and
− Weight of each pad: less than 20 kg capable of making printouts in accordance with the
following requirements:
(2) Active surface − Paper width: 76 mm
The active surface is the area where the wheel − Characters per line: 28 characters
is allowed to activate the wheel load scales and
its dimensions shall conform to the following Information to be printed:
approximate requirements: − Roads Authority
− Length: approximately 700 mm − site
− Width: approximately 400 mm − date and time
− sequential ticket number
(3) Capacity and accuracy − weight limits
The capacity and accuracy of each platform unit
− wheel-load
shall be as given in TABLE 5604/4.
− axle-load
− gross vehicle mass (GVM)
TABLE 5604/4 − overload
CAPACITY AND ACCURACY OF TRANSPORTABLE AXLE − vehicle number
WEIGH BRIDGE UNITS − vehicle make
− driver's license number
System properties Requirements − driver's name
− drivers' signature
Capacity on each
15 tonnes − name of scales operator
wheel pad:
Axle load: 30 tonnes (v) Operation
Division: 50 kg All transportable weigh-bridges shall be operated in
OILM NR 76 Class 4 or accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and
Accuracy: by the use of all necessary accessories and
better
+/- 25 kg (0-2.500 kg) equipment such as mats for approaching the
+/- 50 kg (2.500-10.000 platforms, levelling equipment, etc.
Acceptance tolerance: kg)
(d) Orders
+/- 75 kg (10.000-15.000
kg) Before placing any order for purchase of the weigh-
0 bridge equipment and apparatus the Contractor shall
Between -20 C and
Operating temperature: 0 submit for the approval of the Engineer his programme
+60 C
of Works and Drawings showing all construction details,
weigh-bridge fitting, running of connecting cables, etc
for the transportable axle weigh-bridge station.
(iii) The processing unit
The processing unit shall be remote from the scale
platforms, but connected to them and shall meet the
requirements given in TABLE 5604/5. 5605 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
ITEM UNIT
56.01 CATTLE GRIDS NUMBER (no)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of cattle

grids supplied, the type as indicated in the Drawings.

providing the materials and constructing the cattle grids,
but shall not include compensation for excavating the in
situ material.

ITEM UNIT
56.02 EXCAVATION FOR CATTLE
GRIDS OR WEIGH BRIDGES:
(a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL TO CUBIC
3
THE DEPTH REQUIRED FOR THE METRE (m )
CONSTRUCTION OF THE CATTLE
GRID OR WEIGH BRIDGES
(b) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 56.02(a) CUBIC
3
FOR EXCAVATION IN ROCK METRE (m )

material excavated.

excavating, loading, transporting and depositing
excavated material for cattle grids.
Payment for weighing stations will be made as follows :

The construction of the lay-by shall be measured and
paid for in accordance with the provisions of the
specification for the relevant items of work such as
earthworks, bases, surfacing and incidentals, involved
in the construction of the lay-bys.
Payment for construction and maintenance of the

weigh-bridge station control room-office will be made at
the relevant Lump Sum price entered in the Bill of
Quantities when the control room-office is completed
and accepted by the Engineer, fully furnished and
equipped.
Payment for the supply, installation and maintenance of

the Transportable Twin Platform Axle Weigh-bridge will
be made at the relevant Lump Sum price entered in the
Bill of Quantities.
ITEM UNIT
56.03 INSTALLATION OF WEIGH
BRIDGES:
(a) STATIONARY WEIGH BRIDGE LUMP SUM
(b) TRANSPORTABLE WEIGH BRIDGE LUMP SUM
This rate shall be full compensation for providing and

installing the weigh-bridge including all equipment,
apparatus, excavation, concrete and frames for pits,
bearing plates, junction boxes, precision load cells,
cables, readout units, electrical system in accordance
with the Specifications, control panel and computerised
terminal, preparation of detailed construction drawings,
setting and levelling of weighpads and platforms, in-situ
testing and calibration and any other work and
incidentals necessary to complete the work in
accordance with the Specifications and the instructions
of the Engineer.

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS least six week's advance notice of his requirements to
the Employer. Upon receipt of the plants, the Contractor
shall ensure that the plants are in a good condition and
SECTION 5700: LANDSCAPING free from plant diseases and he shall accept full
responsibility for maintaining the plants in a good
AND GRASSING condition throughout the Contract and the Defects
Liability Period. The plants shall be fully maintained and
CONTENTS: watered during this period and any losses of plants on
account of lack of care or disease during the Contract
CLAUSE PAGE and Defects Liability Period, shall be replaced at the
5701 SCOPE 5000-24 Contractor's own cost.
5703 LANDSCAPING AREAS 5000-25 Each plant shall be handled and packed in the
5704 PREPARING AREAS FOR GRASSING 5000-25 approved manner for that species or variety, and all the
5705 GRASSING AND SPRIGGING 5000-26 necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the
5706 MAINTAINING THE GRASS 5000-27 plants will arrive at the site of the Works in a suitable
5707 TREES, SHRUBS AND HEDGING PLANTS 5000-28 condition for successful growth. Trucks used for
5708 GENERAL 5000-28 transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to
5709 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5000-29 protect the plants from windburn. Containers shall be in
a good condition.
Plants supplied by the Contractor shall be healthy,

correctly shaped, and well rooted. The plants must be
5701 SCOPE hardened off and be exposed to direct sunlight for at
least 6 months prior to planting in the road reserve.
(a) Scope
Roots shall not show any evidence of having been
This Section covers the landscaping of designated restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall grow
areas, the establishing of vegetation for functional and well and shall be free from insect pests and diseases.
aesthetic purposes on cut and fill slopes, landscaped
areas and such other areas where it may be required. (e) Grass sods
Grass sods shall be either nursery-grown or bush sods
(b) Definition
as described below. Both types shall be harvested,
Any declared noxious weeds, as well as any exotic tree, delivered, planted and watered within 36 hours unless
shrub, herb, grass or water plant which, in the opinion otherwise authorised by the Engineer. The grass sods
of the Engineer, may pose any problems in specified
shall be free from noxious weeds and diseases. Sods
areas at certain times, is regarded as being obtained from a nursery shall be in moist soil not less
undesirable. than 30 mm deep, and sods taken from the bush in
moist soil not less than 50 mm deep.
5702 MATERIALS (i) Nursery-grown sods
These sods shall be of the variety of grass specified
(a) Fertiliser/soil-improvement material in the Special Specifications, unless the use of an
The type of fertiliser/soil-improvement material to be alternative has been approved by the Engineer. The
used shall be one or more of the following types and grass shall have been grown specifically for sod
any other type of fertiliser/soil-improvement material purposes, mown regularly and cared for to provide
specified in the Special Specifications or prescribed by an approved uniformity to the satisfaction of the
the Engineer. Engineer.
(i) Soil-improvement materials such as dolomitic lime, (ii) Bush sods

basic slag, gypsum, superphosphate and These sods may be obtained from approved areas
agricultural lime. within or near the Site where a suitable type and
density of grass and type of soil are found.
(ii) Fertilisers such as limestone ammonium nitrate,
2:3:2 (22) and 3:2:1 (25). (f) Anti-erosion compounds
Anti-erosion compounds shall consist of an organic or
(b) Grass cuttings inorganic material to bind soil particles together and
Grass cuttings shall be fresh cuttings of an approved shall be a proven product able to suppress dust and
type of grass with sufficient root material to ensure good form an encrustation. The application rate shall conform
growth. to the manufacturer's recommendations. The materials
used shall be of such a quality that grass seeds may
(c) Grass seeds germinate and penetrate the crust.
Only fresh certified seed shall be used and the types of
seeds in the seed mixture shall be as specified in the (g) Topsoil
Special Specifications. Topsoil shall consist of fertile loamy soil, obtained from
areas with a good soil coverage of natural vegetation,
Mixing the various types of grass seeds for obtaining preferably grasses. It shall be free from deleterious
the prescribed grass-seed mixture shall be done on the matter such as large roots, stones, refuse, stiff or heavy
Site in the presence of the Engineer. Storing and clays and the seeds of noxious weeds, which will
identifying the grass seeds and the grass-seed mixtures adversely affect its suitability for grass being planted.
on the Site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Topsoil stripped from areas infested with weeds shall
be stockpiled separately.
(d) Trees, shrubs and hedge plants
Plants shall be of the variety and size shown on the Topsoil shall be obtained from wherever suitable
Drawings or in the Special Specifications. material occurs either in the road reserve or from areas
where cuts and fills are to be constructed. Topsoil
The Contractor shall supply the number of plants as stripped from borrow areas may not be removed from
shown on the Drawings or in the Special Specifications that site for topsoiling of other areas, but must be used
and/or Bill of Quantities. The Contractor shall give at to rehabilitate the borrow pit itself. The Engineer shall

communicate his requirements to the Contractor plus or minus 100 mm with all undulations following a
regarding the quantity of topsoil which is necessary and smooth curve. The above tolerance shall apply only to
the areas from which it shall be selected and removed areas where the final contours are given on the
by the Contractor. Unless otherwise specified, topsoil Drawings.
shall be taken from not deeper than 400 mm from the
surface. If the Contractor fails to conserve the topsoil as During trimming, all stones in excess of 100 mm in size
instructed, he shall obtain suitable substitute material and all excess material shall be removed. Areas which
from other sources at his own cost. require grassing shall be trimmed in such a way that,
after cultivation and the application of topsoil, the
Where so specified, the Contractor shall procure and finished surface of the area shall be approximately 25
furnish topsoil from his own sources outside the Site, mm below the top of adjacent kerbing, channelling or
after such sources have been approved by the pavement.
Engineer.
(c) Plant rates
Topsoil shall be stockpiled in separate loose heaps as The Engineer shall be entitled to pay for shaping and
tipped from the trucks and shall not be stockpiled in trimming as described above on the basis of hourly
heaps exceeding 2 m in height. Care shall be taken to plant rates. The motor grader and bulldozer to be
prevent the compaction of the topsoil in any way, provided shall each have a flywheel power of not less
especially by trucks being driven over such material. than 93 kW. All machines shall be in a good condition.
Any labour or other plant required shall be paid for as
(h) Manure extra work as specified in the Contract.
Manure shall, unless another type has been approved
by the Engineer, be pure kraal manure free from soil, 5704 PREPARING AREAS FOR GRASSING
weed seeds or other undesirable material. It shall not The various areas to be grassed shall be prepared as
contain any particles that will not pass through a 50 mm follows:
screen and shall be approved by the Engineer before
being delivered to the Site. (a) Soil ripping
Where soil is too hard to be ploughed with a light
(i) Compost tractor, the soil shall be ripped up to a depth of 300 mm
Compost shall be well decayed, friable and free from before it is loosened by plough to a depth of 150 mm.
weed seeds, dust or any other undesirable materials. It
shall not contain any particles that will not pass through (b) Areas which do not require topsoil
a 50 mm screen and shall be approved by the Engineer Where the areas to be grassed consist of organically
before being delivered to the Site. suitable material, the topsoil shall be loosened by
ploughing to a minimum depth of 150 mm. All loose
stones exceeding 50 mm in size on areas to be mowed
5703 LANDSCAPING AREAS by machine and falling within the road reserve and all
stones exceeding 150 mm in size in other areas shall
(a) Shaping be removed.
Areas within the road reserve but outside the road
prism which require shaping by means of bulk (c) Areas which require topsoil
earthworks such as contoured areas at interchanges Where areas to be grassed consist of organically
and intersections and rest areas which require unsuitable material, the surface shall be roughened to
earthworks shall be excavated, filled and compacted ensure a proper bond between the topsoil and the
when required, and shaped to the correct contours to subsoil. If required, the area shall be scarified as
within a tolerance of plus or minus 150 mm. Such work described in paragraphs (a) or (b) above.
shall be regarded as being earthworks and
measurement and payment therefore shall be made Topsoil shall be placed on the prepared surfaces and
under SECTION 3600, except that quantities may be trimmed to the uniform thickness required. The topsoil
measured by means of a grid system of levels taken at shall be scarified by means of handraking or light
10 m intervals before and after shaping or else it may rotavators and all stones removed as specified for
be determined by levelled cross-sections. areas not requiring topsoil in subparagraph (b) above.
(b) Trimming Areas inaccessible for topsoil being placed after the
Trimming shall consist of trimming the existing or construction works have been completed shall be
previously shaped ground to an even surface with the covered with topsoil and protected against erosion
final levels generally following the original surface. during construction works.
Trimming shall normally be done by grader, or in more
confined or steep areas by bulldozer. Where machine (d) Fertilising
operations are not practicable, because of confined For all areas to be planted, the Contractor shall have
spaces or steep slopes, or when approved by the the top 150 mm of the prepared surface tested to
Engineer, trimming shall be done with hand tools. When determine the quantity and type of fertiliser which will be
trimming is done on slopes steeper than 1:3, the ridges required for establishing proper growth conditions for
shall be made parallel to the contour. Such ridges shall the grass. The location of the soil sample taken shall be
be approximately 100 mm wide, and the centres indicated on plans by the Contractor. The Engineer
between the ridges approximately 400 mm. Trimming shall be furnished with the test results. Only after
shall be done where instructed by the Engineer to areas approval by the Engineer of the nature and quantity of
inside the road reserve but outside the road prism, ie the fertiliser, may its application proceed. The fertiliser
normally outside the tops of cuts or the toes of fills, but shall be evenly applied over all surfaces where grass is
trimming of rock outcrops will not be required. to be planted, and shall then be thoroughly mixed with
the soil to a depth of 100 mm either mechanically or
Trimmed surfaces shall be left slightly rough to facilitate manually. Where hydroseeding is to be performed, the
a better binding with topsoil or the natural establishing fertiliser may be mixed with the cellulose pulp and water
of vegetation. used in hydroseeding.
When subsequent grassing is required or when it is (e) General

ordered by the Engineer, areas previously shaped shall After an area has been prepared for grassing, the
be trimmed as described above to within a tolerance of grassing shall be completed before crusting. Where a
crust has been formed before grassing is done, the solely responsible for establishing an acceptable grass
Contractor shall, at his own cost, loosen the crust by cover, and any approval by the Engineer of seed or
ploughing to a depth of 150 mm. seed mixtures intended for use by the Contractor shall
not relieve him of this responsibility.
5705 GRASSING AND SPRIGGING
The method of establishing grass shall depend on the A mulch shall be added to the hydroseeding mix at an
circumstances relating to each case, and the Engineer approved rate.
shall decide which method is to be used. Provision is
made for the following methods: Hydroseeding shall then be carried out with an
− Planting grass cuttings approved hydroseeding machine at a rate of application
− Sodding of not less than 38 kg of seed mixture per hectare,
− Hydroseeding unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications.
− Topsoiling only, using, where available, topsoil
When the use of anti-erosion compounds is required
selected for the presence of natural grass seeds
and such compound is to be applied simultaneously
− Grassing with an approved grassing machine
with the hydroseeding, it shall be mixed with the
− Hand seeding hydroseeding mixture before application.
− The use of any other method specified in the
Special Specifications. (d) Topsoiling only
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the planting of
(a) Planting grass cuttings grass or hydroseeding can be dispensed with on
The areas to be grassed shall, unless already wet, be account of favourable climatic and other conditions, he
thoroughly watered before the cuttings are planted to may attempt to establish grass by topsoiling only.
ensure that the soil will be uniformly wet to a depth of at Topsoil shall be selected for the presence of natural
least 150 mm when the planting is done. grass and seeds and shall be removed and placed
whenever possible at a time that would favour the
An approved variety of grass cuttings shall be evenly establishing of grass. These areas shall be treated with
planted by hand or mechanically at a rate of at least an anti-erosion compound, if so instructed by the
600 kg of cuttings per hectare. Fresh cuttings only shall Engineer.
be used. Any grass cuttings that have been allowed to
dry out shall be discarded. Immediately after having After the topsoil has been placed it shall be lightly rolled
been planted, the grass cuttings shall be given a and well watered, and afterwards watered and mown
copious watering, and, when sufficiently dry, shall be whenever instructed by the Engineer.
rolled with a light agricultural roller.
The Contractor will not be held responsible for
(b) Sodding establishing an acceptable grass cover as defined in
Areas to be grassed by sodding shall be given a layer SUBCLAUSE 5706(b) when this procedure is followed,
of topsoil of at least 50 mm in thickness unless, where but will be responsible for the consequences of any
suitable soil is present, the Engineer orders the topsoil omission to water, weed or mow the grass as instructed
to be omitted. The areas to be sodded shall be by the Engineer.
thoroughly watered beforehand so that it will be wet to a
depth of at least 150 mm during sodding. The surface No payment for grassing shall be made other than for
shall be roughened slightly to ensure a good placing topsoil, and for mowing and watering the grass,
penetration of roots into the soil. Sods shall be which will be paid for at the bid rates, and for any
protected against drying out and kept moist from the replanting of grass on bare patches, repairs caused by
time of harvesting until they are finally placed. erosion, and similar work, which will be paid for as extra
work as allowed for in the Contract.
The first row of sods shall, where possible, be laid in a
straight line, and if on a slope, laying the sods shall start (e) Grassing with an approved grassing machine
at the bottom of the slope. The sods shall be butted Grassing shall be done with an approved grass planter
tightly against each other, and care shall be taken not to which plants the seeds in rows spaced not more than
stretch or overlap the sods. Where a good fit cannot be 250 mm apart. The planter shall plant the seeds
obtained, any intervening spaces shall be filled with approximately 6 mm deep and shall lightly compact the
topsoil. The next row shall be similarly placed tightly soil. The prescribed fertiliser may be distributed
against the bottom row with staggered joints, and so on simultaneously with the grass planting.
until the entire area has been covered with sods. On
steep slopes, when instructed by the Engineer, the sods (f) Hand seeding
shall be held in position by a sufficient number of If approved by the Engineer, sowing may be done by
wooden stakes approximately 300 mm long by 20 mm hand. The seed shall be spread uniformly over the
in thickness and these stakes shall be knocked into the surfaces and then lightly raked into the soil.
subsoil to a depth of 100 mm.
(g) Other methods
The Contractor shall water the sods directly after they Whenever specified in the Special Specifications, other
have been placed to prevent undue drying out. As methods of grassing may be employed.
sodding is completed, each section shall be Iightly
rolled and thoroughly watered. (h) The grassing of borrow pits, temporary
bypasses, camp sites, access roads and
(c) Hydroseeding stockpile sites
Where it is specified that hydroseeding is to be carried Prior to any grassing that may be required on such
out on topsoil, the thickness of the topsoil shall be as areas, the finishing-off of borrow pits as described
specified in the Special Specifications or as directed by under CLAUSE 3406, obliterating the bypasses and
the Engineer. access roads as described in CLAUSES 1514 and 5803
respectively and the clearing of camp sites as described
The types and mixtures of seeds to be used shall be as in SECTION 1300, shall have been carried out as
specified in the Special Specifications or, if not so specified in the relevant Sections.
specified therein, shall be agreed on by the Engineer
and the Contractor before any seed he may wish to use Note: With regard to SUBCLAUSES 5705(e) and (f), the
is ordered by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be areas to be grassed shall be prepared as described in

CLAUSE 5704 and the areas shall be thoroughly watered be applied until the soil is moist and in a
after completion of the operation. Also if so instructed workable condition. One or more of the
by the Engineer, an anti-erosion compound shall be following methods shall be used, whichever is
applied. shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer:
− ROW SPRIGGING: Furrows shall be opened
(i) Sprigging along the approximate contour of slopes at
the spacing and depth indicated on the
(i) Description Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
This work shall consist of planting sprigs in close Sprigs shall be placed at intervals not
conformity with these Specifications, at the exceeding 150mm in a continuous row in
locations shown on the Drawings or required by the the open furrow, and shall be covered
Engineer for the protection of slopes against immediately.
erosion.
− SPOT SPRIGGING: Spot sprigging shall be
performed as specified under row sprigging,
(ii) Materials except that, instead of planting in
continuous rows, groups of four sprigs or
(1) Sprigs more shall be spaced 400mm apart in the
Sprigs shall be healthy, living stems with rows.
attached roots of perennial turf-forming grasses
harvested without adhering soil and obtained − Alternative methods of planting shall be
from approved sources in the locality of the subject to the approval of the Engineer.
work where the sod is dense and well rooted.
The presence of weeds or detrimental materials (v) Maintenance of sprigged areas
will be cause for rejection. The Contractor shall regularly water and maintain
sprigged areas in a satisfactory condition for the
(2) Fertiliser duration of the Contract and until the end of the
Fertiliser shall consist of an approved Defects Liability Period.
compound containing not less than 10%
nitrogen, 15% phosphoric acid and 10% pot-
ash or similar approved composition. 5706 MAINTAINING THE GRASS
(a) Watering, weeding, mowing and replanting
(iii) Construction All sodded and grassed areas shall be adequately
watered at regular and frequent intervals to ensure the
(1) Topsoiling proper germination of seeds and growth of grass until
Where directed by the Engineer the face of the grass has established an acceptable cover and
slopes or benches shall be covered with a layer thereafter until the beginning of the defects liability
of topsoil, as described in CLAUSE 5702(g). period of the grass. The quantity of water and the
frequency of watering shall be subject to the Engineer's
If topsoil is not available in the project area or approval. With hydroseeding the commencement of
soil and moisture conditions are generally not watering may be postponed until a favourable time of
favourable for growth of grass, planting of grass the year, but watering shall in any case commence and
should be tried on small sections of clay and continue as soon as the seeds have germinated and
sand slopes prior to planting of large areas. growth has started.
All surfaces shall, immediately before planting, The Contractor shall further mow the grass on all areas
be reduced to a fine tilth to a depth of 150 mm where grass has been established whenever so
and free from stones greater than 25 mm. instructed by the Engineer, until the end of the defects
liability period. All grass cuttings shall be collected and
(2) Fertilisation disposed of if so directed by the Engineer. Weeds shall
Fertilisation shall be carried out with an even be controlled by approved means. Any bare patches
distribution. The rate of application shall not be where the grass has not taken or where it has been
lighter than 70 kg to 1000 square metres. damaged or has dried out shall be recultivated, planted,
sodded or hydroseeded at the Contractor's own
(iv) Sprigging expense.
(1) Harvesting sprigs All grassed areas shall have an acceptable cover as
The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s defined below at both the beginning and the end of the
approval of his source of sprigs and shall notify Defects Liability Period.
the Engineer at least 5 days before the sprigs
are to be harvested. (b) Acceptable cover
An acceptable grass cover shall mean that not less than
Sprigs that have dried out or are otherwise 75% of the area grassed or hydroseeded shall be
damaged during harvesting or delivery shall be covered with grass and that no bare patches exceeding
rejected. 2
0.25 m in any area of 1.0 m x 1.0 m shall occur. In the
case of sodding, acceptable cover shall mean that the
(2) Planting sprigs entire area shall be covered with live grass at the end of
Planting of sprigs shall preferably be carried out any period not less than three months after sodding.
at the beginning of a rainy season. Not more
than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting (c) Defects Liability Period
and planting sprigs. The Defects Liability Period in respect of grass shall
commence when an acceptable grass cover as defined
Sprigging shall not be done during windy in (b) above has been established and shall be one
weather, or when the ground is dry, excessively year. This means that the Defects Liability Period in
wet, or otherwise untillable. If the soil is not
moist when the sprigs are being set, water shall

respect of grass can commence earlier or later than the mm of crushed stone shall be placed at the bottom
Defects Liability Period for other parts of the Contract. of the hole before it is filled with soil.
If the Defects Liability Period in respect of grass expires
before the end of the defects liability period for the other (c) Planting
roadworks, the Contractor shall further mow the grass Before trees, shrubs and hedging plants are removed
on such areas as instructed by the Engineer up to the from their containers for planting, they shall be well
end of the Defects Liability Period for the other watered.
roadworks. For mowing that is executed after the
Defects Liability Period in respect of grass has expired, Directly after having been planted, each plant shall be
the Contractor shall be paid under ITEM 57.07. well watered with a view to settling the soil. After the
soil has settled, additional soil shall be added where
necessary to bring the replaced soil in the hole to within
5707 TREES, SHRUBS AND HEDGING PLANTS 150 mm of the ground surface, so as to ensure that
sufficient water can be retained in the hole around the
(a) Positions of trees and shrubs plant. All trees shall be tied to a suitable creosote-
The localities where trees and shrubs are to be planted treated timber stake with a minimum diameter of 35 mm
are as follows: or other suitable stake as approved by the Engineer
and firmly planted in the ground. The stake shall be 300
(i) Trees and shrubs shall be planted at locations mm longer than the planted tree, and its maximum
shown on the Drawings. length shall be 1.5 m above ground level. After planting,
the ground surface around the plant shall be covered
(ii) Plants in the median shall be planted in a line 1.5 m with straw or grass or any other type of mulch to
from the centre line of the median or as directed by minimise evaporation.
the Engineer.
(d) Maintenance
(iii) When the carriageways are at different levels, the During the defects liability period, which shall be twelve
plants in the median shall be planted 2 m from the months after completion of the actual planting of trees,
edge of the shoulder on the high side of the median shrubs and hedges, the Contractor shall be responsible
or as directed by the Engineer. for watering the trees, shrubs and hedges and keeping
the plants free from weeds and pests.
(iv) Where the road curves, the plants in the median
shall be planted on the inside of the median centre Every hedge plant, tree or shrub, which is not healthy or
line. shows unsatisfactory growth shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense, within one month of
(v) Where the carriageways are at different levels as having been notified by the Engineer, in writing.
well as on a curve, the plants in the median shall be
planted on the high side, provided they do not
impede on sight distance, or as directed by the 5708 GENERAL
Engineer.
(a) Time of planting
(vi) At freeway crossings over roads or rivers, shrubs Grass, trees and shrubs shall be planted as far as is
shall be planted in the positions shown on the practicable during periods of the year most likely to
Drawings. produce best growing results. The Contractor shall
make every effort to programme his operations in such
(vii) At the headwalls of culverts or similar structures, a manner that grass, trees and shrubs shall, as far as is
trees and/or shrubs shall be planted to indicate the possible, be planted during this period.
positions of these structures. The locations for
planting the plants shall be as shown on the (b) Traffic on grassed areas
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not plant any grass until all
operations which may require road-building equipment
(viii)Care shall be taken not to obscure traffic signs by to be taken over grassed areas have been completed.
plants. No road-building equipment, trucks or water carts shall
be allowed onto areas which have been grassed and
(ix) Trees shall not be planted closer than 10 m from only equipment required for the preparation of areas,
the yellow line on the outside shoulder. application of fertiliser, spreading of topsoil, watering
and mowing will be allowed to operate on areas to be
(b) Preparing plant holes grassed. All damaged areas shall be reinstated by the
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, holes shall Contractor at his own expense.
be spaced and prepared as follows:
(c) Erosion prevention
(i) All holes shall be square in plan. During construction the Contractor shall protect all
areas susceptible to erosion by installing all the
(ii) Holes for hedge plants and shrubs shall be at least necessary temporary and permanent drainage works as
500 mm square by 600 mm deep and 1.5 m from soon as possible and by taking such other measures as
centre to centre. Alternatively a 500 mm wide may be necessary to prevent the surface water from
trench 600 mm deep may be dug. being concentrated in streams and from scouring the
slopes, banks or other areas.
(iii) Holes for trees shall be at least 600 mm square by
700 mm deep. Any runnels or erosion channels developing during the
construction period or during the defects liabilty period
(iv) The holes for plants shall be refilled with selected shall be backfilled and compacted, and the areas
and approved topsoil thoroughly mixed with manure restored to a proper condition. The Contractor shall not
or compost (one heaped spadeful added to every allow erosion to develop on a large scale before
plant hole) and, depending on soil-test reports, the effecting repairs and all erosion damage shall be
required quantity and type of fertiliser. repaired as soon as possible and in any case not later
than three months before the termination of the Defects
(v) The holes shall be thoroughly watered before plants Liability Period. All topsoil or other material
are planted. Where the soil is poorly drained, 150
accumulated in side drains shall be removed at the shaped. No trimming within the road prism shall be
same time. Topsoil washed away shall be replaced. measured for payment.
(d) Proprietary brand materials used for erosion

prevention ITEM UNIT
Certain proprietary brands of materials which may be 57.02 USING MACHINES FOR
necessary for erosion prevention to enable natural TRIMMING OR SHAPING (ALTERNATIVE
grass to become established. In such case the specific TO SUBITEM 57.01(a)):
brand shall be as described in the Special
Specifications. The method of applying the material, the (a) BULLDOZER HOUR (h)
required surface preparation, the type of material to be (b) MOTOR GRADER HOUR (h)
provided and the method of payment, shall be as set
out in the Special Specifications. The unit of measurement shall be the hour actually
worked by each machine in trimming or shaping areas.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for Standing time will not be measured.
trimming the areas to the specified finishing
requirements, including the moving of a small quantity The bid rates shall include full compensation for
of material which would be inherent in this process and furnishing and using the machines, including the cost of
the removal of surplus material and stones. Payment fuel, operators, remedy of any defects, transporting the
shall distinguish between machine trimming which can machine to and from the point where it is to be used,
reasonably be done by bulldozer or motor grader, and and for all other incidentals necessary for carrying out
hand trimming. the work.
(e) Responsibility for establishing an acceptable
cover ITEM UNIT
Notwithstanding the fact that the Engineer will
determine the method of grassing and that the type of 57.03 PREPARING THE AREAS FOR
GRASSING:
seed or grass used and the rate of application of the
seed may be specified or agreed on by the Engineer, (a) RIPPING HECTARE (ha)
and that the frequency of mowing will be as ordered by (b) PLOUGHING HECTARE (ha)
him, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for
establishing an acceptable grass cover and for the cost (c) TOPSOILING WITHIN THE ROAD
RESERVE, WHERE THE FOLLOWING
of replanting grass or re-hydroseeding where no
MATERIALS ARE USED:
acceptable cover has been established. Where
however, in the opinion of the Contractor, it is doubtful (i) TOPSOIL OBTAINED FROM WITHIN CUBIC METRE
3
from the outset if it will be possible to establish an THE ROAD RESERVE OR BORROW (m )
acceptable cover he may inform the Engineer of his AREAS (FREE-HAUL 1.0 km)
reasons therefore, and the Engineer may, if he agrees, (ii) TOPSOIL OBTAINED FROM OTHER CUBIC METRE
either adopt another method of grassing or agree to SOURCES BY THE CONTRACTOR
3
(m )
accept whatever cover can be obtained, provided that (INCLUDING ALL HAUL)
all reasonable efforts shall be made to establish a good
grass cover by the proposed method. Any such (d) TOPSOILING OF BORROW PITS BY CUBIC METRE
3
agreement shall be valid only if given in writing by the USING TOPSOIL OBTAINED FROM (m )
BORROW AREAS OR FROM THE ROAD
Engineer beforehand.
RESERVE (FREE-HAUL 1.0 km)
In the case of grassing by topsoiling only, the (e) PROVIDING AND APPLYING CHEMICAL
Contractor will not be held directly responsible for FERTILISERS AND/OR SOIL-
establishing an acceptable grass cover, but will be held IMPROVEMENT MATERIAL:
responsible for the consequences of supplying (i) LIME TONNE (t)
workmanship which does not conform to the
Specifications, or for lack of proper care. (ii) SUPER-PHOSPHATE TONNE (t)
(iii) LIMESTONE AMMONIUM NITRATE TONNE (t)
(f) Re-fertilising (iv) 2:3:2(22) TONNE (t)
Should it become necessary, the Engineer may instruct
(V) 3:2:1(25) TONNE (t)
the Contractor to undertake a Re-fertilising programme
on grassed areas during the twelve month defects (vi) OTHER FERTILISERS AND/OR SOIL- TONNE (t)
liability period. Payment for re-fertilisation will be made IMPROVEMENT MATERIALS IF
under SUBITEM 57.03(e). REQUIRED (TYPE STATED)
(f) STOCKPILING TOPSOIL CUBIC METRE (m3)
5709 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (a) Ripping

The unit of measurement for ripping shall be the
ITEM UNIT hectare of soil ripped. Only areas ripped on the written
57.01 TRIMMING: instructions of the Engineer shall be measured for
(a) MACHINE TRIMMING SQUARE METRE (m
2
) payment.
2
(b) HAND TRIMMING SQUARE METRE (m ) The bid rate shall include full compensation for ripping,
complete as specified.
Note:
All bulk earth-moving operations as described under Ploughing for loosening the soil will be paid for under
shaping in SUBCLAUSE 5703(a) shall be measured and SUBITEM 57.03(b).
paid for under SECTION 3600.
(b) Ploughing
The unit of measurement for trimming shall be the The unit of measurement for loosening the topsoil by
square metre of area trimmed on the instruction of the ploughing shall be the hectare of soil loosened and
Engineer, including areas trimmed after having been prepared in accordance with the Specifications. Only

areas loosened by ploughing on the written instructions (TYPE OF GRASS AS INDICATED)

of the Engineer shall be measured for payment. (b) SODDING BY USING THE
FOLLOWING TYPES OF SODS:
loosening the topsoil by ploughing, removing stones, (i) NURSERY SODS (TYPE OF SQUARE METRE
2
and levelling and trimming the surface. GRASS SPECIFIED) (m )
(ii) BUSH SODS SQUARE METRE
2
(m )
(c) Placing the topsoil (c) HYDROSEEDING:
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of (i) PROVIDING AN APPROVED KILOGRAMME
topsoil applied at the specified thickness or as directed SEED MIXTURE FOR (kg)
by the Engineer measured in situ after the topsoil has HYDROSEEDING
been placed. The quantity shall be calculated from the
net area of the topsoiled surface multiplied by the (ii) HYDROSEEDING HECTARE (ha)
average thickness of the topsoil but before the grass (d) PLANTING GRASS SEED WITH AN HECTARE (ha)
sods are placed. Any topsoil placed in excess of the APPROVED GRASS-PLANTING
average thickness specified or prescribed will not be MACHINE
measured for payment. (e) HAND SOWING SQUARE METRE
2
(m )
Payment shall distinguish between topsoil obtained (f) OTHER METHODS (SPECIFY)
from designated areas within the road reserve or
borrow areas and topsoil obtained by the Contractor
from outside sources when sufficient topsoil is not (a) Planting grass cuttings
available from the designated areas mentioned above. The unit of measurement for planting grass cuttings
Payment shall further distinguish between topsoil shall be the hectare of established grass with an
applied to areas within the road reserve such as slopes acceptable grass cover.
and topsoil applied at borrow areas.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for furnishing and planting the cuttings, watering, weeding,
excavating and loading the topsoil, any royalties or and replanting if necessary, and all other incidentals
compensation that may be payable in the case of which may be necessary for establishing an acceptable
topsoil under SUBITEM 57.03(c), transport (except cover and maintaining the grass, except mowing.
overhaul), off-loading, placing and spreading it to the
required thickness, levelling it off to a smooth surface, (b) Sodding
for removing any stones as specified and for The unit of measurement for sodding shall be the
roughening the surface to be topsoiled. square metre covered with sods, which has an
acceptable cover.
The free-haul distance of topsoil obtained from the road
reserve or borrow areas shall be 1.0 km. The bid rate The bid rates shall include full compensation for
for topsoil under SUBITEM 57.03(c) shall also include full procuring, excavating, loading, transporting, off-loading,
compensation for transporting the topsoil to the point of placing and watering the sods, for replanting dead
eventual use. areas, for watering and weeding the grass, for
supplying and placing timber stakes and for all other
(d) (VOID) incidentals, except for mowing, which may be
necessary for establishing an acceptable cover, and
(e) Providing and applying fertiliser and/or soil- maintaining the grass. Payment shall distinguish
improvement material between nursery-grown sods and bush sods obtained
The unit of measurement for fertiliser shall be the tonne from within the road reserve or borrow areas. In the
of each type of fertiliser and/or soil-improvement case of bush sods the bid price shall include levelling-
material ordered and applied. off and trimming areas from which the sods are taken.

furnishing the fertiliser and/or soil-improvement (c) Hydroseeding
material, transporting it to the point of use, spreading
and mixing it into the scarified soil or topsoil, (i) The unit of measurement for providing seed shall
irrespective of the method of application. be the kilogram of seed of the specified seed
mixture. The mass of any pulp added shall not be
(f) Stockpiling the topsoil measured.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of The bid rate shall include full compensation for
topsoil stockpiled on the written instructions of the procuring and furnishing the seeds.
Engineer where this operation is unavoidable despite
proper advance planning. Only material actually loaded, (ii) The unit of measurement for hydrosdeeding shall
transported to and stockpiled on sites designated for be the hectare of grass established by
stockpiling will be measured, but not any material hydroseeding, which has an acceptable cover.
merely pushed or bladed into heaps next to the area
from which it is taken, unless it was done with the prior The bid rate shall include full compensation for
approval of the Engineer, and the material was furnishing cellulose pulp and mixing it with seed and
stockpiled in an approved area. water and with any anti-erosion compound if
required, applying the mixture, watering, weeding,
The bid rate shall include full compensation for loading rehydroseeding bare patches, and for any other
the topsoil, placing it in stockpile and for any payments work, except mowing, which may be necessary for
to private Owners for the use of stockpile areas. establishing an acceptable cover and maintaining
the grass.
ITEM UNIT (d) Grassing with an approved grass planter

The unit of measurement for planting any grass seeds
57.04 GRASSING: by using an approved planter shall be the hectare of
(a) PLANTING OF GRASS CUTTINGS HECTARE (ha)

grass with an acceptable cover, where the seed has monthly rainfall figure is less than 75% of the monthly
been planted with an approved planter. average, the Contractor will be compensated under this
item for the same percentage of the quantity of water
The bid rate shall include full compensation for all used for watering as that for the monthly rainfall that fell
labour, material, equipment, weeding, and all short of the average rainfall.
incidentals which may be necessary for planting the
grass seeds and establishing an acceptable grass
cover. The bid rate shall also include full compensation ITEM UNIT
for watering the planted areas until an acceptable grass 57.07 MOWING THE GRASS: HECTARE (ha)
cover has been established. Payment for the grass
seed will be separate under SUBITEM 57.04(c).
The unit of measurement shall be the hectare
(e) Hand-sowing measured each time when the grass has been cut on
The unit of measurement for hand-sowing the grass the instructions of the Engineer.
seeds shall be the square metre of grass with an
acceptable covering on surfaces instructed by the The bid rate shall include full compensation for all plant,
Engineer to be hand-sown. equipment and labour, required for every cutting of the
grass and disposing of the grass cuttings, ie payment
The bid rate shall include full compensation for all will be made every time the grass has been cut on the
labour, materials, equipment, weeding, and all instructions of the Engineer.
incidentals which may be necessary for planting the
grass seeds and establishing an acceptable grass
covering. The bid rate shall also include full ITEM UNIT
compensation for watering the planted areas until an 57.08 ANTI-EROSION KILOGRAMME
acceptable grass covering has been established. COMPOUND (SPECIFY) (kg)
Payment for the grass seeds shall be separate under
SUBITEM 57.04(c). The unit of measurement shall be the kilogram net
mass of anti-erosion compound used with the approval
(f) Other methods of the Engineer.
Whenever other methods of grassing are specified in
the Special Specifications, measurement and payment The bid rate for each kilogram of anti-erosion
shall be as specified. compound applied with the hydroseeding or by itself
shall include full compensation for furnishing the
(g) General material and mixing and applying it during hydroseeding
Half the payments under ITEM 57.04 will become due or by itself.
when the grassing or hydroseeding has been done, and
the remainder will become due when satisfactory cover
has been established. ITEM UNIT
57.09 TREES AND SHRUBS:
ITEM UNIT (a) PROVIDING THE TREES AND NUMBER (no)
SHRUBS (TYPES INDICATED)
57.05 WATERING THE GRASS WHEN KILOLITRE (kl)
ESTABLISHED BY TOPSOILING
ONLY: Unit of measurement shall be the number of each
species or variety of tree and shrub furnished and
The unit of measurement for watering areas which have established.
been topsoiled on the instruction of the Engineer but
which have not been hydroseeded or planted with The bid rate shall include full compensation for
grass, shall be the kilolitre of water applied on the furnishing the plants at the point of final use including
instructions of the Engineer and calculated from the substitutes for plants which may become diseased or
number of tank loads applied, multiplied by the capacity die.
of the tank used in each case.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for (b) PLANTING AND ESTABLISHING:
procuring, transporting and applying the water as (i) TREES NUMBER (no)
specified. (ii) SHRUBS NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT The unit of measurement shall be the number of each

type planted and established.
57.06 WATERING THE ALREADY KILOLITRE
PLANTED GRASS, TREES AND (kl) The bid rates shall include full compensation for
SHRUBS PLANTED DURING PERIODS excavating the holes to the specified dimensions,
OF DROUGHT EXPERIENCED DURING furnishing topsoil, wooden stakes crushed stone,
THE GROWING SEASON: manure and compost and mixing them together with
any fertiliser required for planting and refilling each hole
The unit of measurement for watering the grass, trees with the topsoil mixture and other soil, for watering the
and shrubs shall be the kilolitre of water used. plants until the end of the defects liability period,
furnishing and planting substitutes for plants that have
The bid rate shall include full compensation for died and for maintaining the plants as specified until the
obtaining, transporting and applying the water. end of the defects liability period, including any other
incidentals which may be necessary for properly
The Contractor shall keep a careful record of the executing the work. Where the Employer furnishes the
quantity of water used by him for watering the grass, plants, the above rates shall also include full
trees and shrubs planted and shall submit such compensation for taking delivery of the plants,
information to the Engineer on a daily basis. When maintaining them as required, transporting them to point
there are times during the normal growing season, as of final use, and for providing substitutes for plants
specified in the Special Specifications, when the which die or become diseased during storage.
Any chemical fertiliser and/or soil-improvement material

required will be measured and paid for under SUBITEM
57.03(e).
ITEM UNIT
57.10 EXTRA WORK FOR LAND- PROVISIONAL
SCAPING SUM
The provisional sum allowed shall be expended at the

discretion of the Engineer to cover the cost of work in
addition to the scheduled Items which may be required
in respect of shaping and trimming areas where plant is
used at hourly rates, e.g. the cost of loading and
transporting surplus material, establishing grass by
topsoiling only, repairing erosion damage after topsoil
has been applied, or any other Items of work required
for which no pay Items have been provided.
Payment shall be made as specified in SUBCLAUSE

1209(f).
ITEM UNIT
57.11 WEEDING ALL GRASS-SEEDED HECTARE
AREAS AND THE GRASS WHEN (ha)
ESTABLISHED BY TOPSOILING ONLY
The unit of measurement for weeding all grass-seeded

areas that have been topsoiled on the instruction of the
Engineer (but have not been hydroseeded or planted
with grass), shall be the hectare.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for weeding

the prescribed areas in accordance with the
Specifications.
(h) Sprigging
ITEM UNIT
2
57.12 SPRIGGING SQUARE METRE (m )
The quantity to be measured for payment shall be the

number of square metres of sprigging which has been
planted in accordance with these Specifications and
accepted.
The quantity measured as prescribed above shall be

paid for at the Contract unit price for the pay item, which
price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing of all materials, fertilisers, water,
labour, equipment, tools, transport and all costs
necessary to complete the work as prescribed in this
Section.
(i) Haulage
No overhaul shall be paid for any operations in this
Section.

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS of vegetation. Should the Engineer require landscaping
and grassing to be performed, it shall be done in
accordance with SECTION 5700.
SECTION 5800: FINISHING THE
5803 TREATING OLD ROADS
ROAD AND ROAD RESERVE AND All old roads, temporary diversions, haul roads and
TREATING OLD ROADS construction roads shall, in so far as is practicable, be
levelled with the original ground. Surfaces shall be
scarified and broken up to a depth of 150 mm for
CONTENTS: promoting plant growth. The old roads shall be
CLAUSE PAGE rehabilitated as shown in the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer and shall be revegetated in accordance
5801 SCOPE 5000-33 with SECTION 5700.
5802 FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD
RESERVE 5000-33 Where required by the Engineer, in order to prevent soil
5803 TREATING OLD ROADS 5000-33 erosion, banks, dykes or ditches shall be constructed
5804 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5000-33 over the old road to dimensions ordered by the
Engineer. All roads and temporary diversions treated as
above, shall be left in a neat and tidy state.
5801 SCOPE
This Section covers the final finishing and cleaning up 5804 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
of the road and road reserve after construction, and
scarifying and treating old roads and temporary ITEM UNIT
diversions.
58.01 FINISHING THE ROAD AND
ROAD RESERVE:
The Contractor shall note that this Section does not
cover the finishing which has to be done under (a) DUAL CARRIAGEWAY ROAD KILOMETRE (km)
SECTIONS 3100, 3400, 3600 and SECTION 5700. (b) SINGLE CARRIAGEWAY ROAD KILOMETRE (km)
5802 FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of road
RESERVE measured along the centre line. No separate
After completing the seal or surfacing, or gravel surface measurement shall be made of ramps at interchanges.
on gravel roads, the road and road reserve shall be
cleared of all excess earth, stones, boulders, debris and The bid rates shall include full compensation for
other waste material resulting from the construction of clearing, trimming, disposing of material, tidying and all
the Works and disposed in an approved waste site. All other work to be done for finishing off the road and road
finishing and clearing not previously done or completed reserve as specified.
in accordance with the Sections listed in CLAUSE 5801
above shall be completed. This specification, however, Any landscaping and grassing shall be measured and
does not intend the finishing, clearing and maintenance paid for under SECTION 5700.
which must be done as provided for in other Sections of
these Specifications, to be postponed until the final
finishing operations provided for in this Section. ITEM UNIT
58.02 TREATMENT OF OLD ROADS KILOMETRE
Culvert inlets and outlets, culvert barrels, and open AND TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS (km)
drains shall be cleared of all debris, soil, silt and other
material. The surfacing shall be cleared of all dirt, mud
and foreign objects. Dragging, pushing or scraping The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of old
material across the finished surfacing shall not be road or temporary diversion treated.
permitted.
Any landscaping and grassing shall be measured and
All junctions, intersections, islands, kerbing and other paid for under SECTION 5700.
elements making up the completed Works shall be
neatly finished off. The construction of banks, dykes or ditches shall be
measured and paid for under SECTION 2100.
The Contractor shall ensure that all declared noxious
weeds have been removed from the road-reserve and The bid rate shall include full compensation for levelling
borrow-pit areas. All noxious weeds shall be burnt to and scarifying any surfaces and tidying old roads and
prevent the spread of the seed and cut stumps or diversions as specified.
coppice shall be sprayed with a suitable herbicide.
No payment will be made in regard to treating haul
All soil, stones, boulders and indigenous plant material roads and construction roads, for which the Contractor
resulting from the finishing operations shall be disposed shall make allowance in his rates for constructing the
of at locations not visible from the road, and where they relevant items of work for which such roads are
will not pollute water sources or create a hazard for necessary.
livestock or wildlife (e.g. old borrow pits). All other waste
such as drums, excess steel, litter, etc which cannot be
sold or recycled shall be dumped in an approved waste
site. The Contractor himself shall make his own
arrangements with the Owners of properties on which
such materials are to be deposited. Disposal shall be
carried out in a neat and uniform manner. Any borrow
pits used for material disposal shall be finished off as
described in CLAUSE 3406. Any other areas used for
material disposal shall be shaped so as to blend with
the surrounding area and to permit the re-establishment

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS (iii) Bituminous-emulsion paint shall consist of a stable
bituminous emulsion with a minimum of 45% of
bitumen and about 5% of approved fibre.
SECTION 5900: PAINTING
5903 GENERAL
No paint shall be applied to surfaces containing
CONTENTS: physically adhering contaminants such as oil, grease,
CLAUSE PAGE dirt, marking material, water-soluble salts, wax, paint
and temporary protectives, or to surfaces containing
5901 SCOPE 5000-34 chemically bonded contaminants such as rust, mill
5902 MATERIAL 5000-34 scale, slag and flux.
5903 GENERAL 5000-34
5904 APPLYING THE PAINT 5000-34 All surfaces which are to be painted shall be dry. Unless
5905 PROTECTING THE W ORKS DURING otherwise stated, subsequent coats of paints shall be
PAINTING OPERATIONS 5000-35
applied over dry paint surfaces.
5906 PREPARING SURFACES FOR PAINTING 5000-35
5907 PAINTING STRUCTURAL STEEL 5000-35 All traces of soluble salts and corrosive airborne
5908 PAINTING GUARD RAILS 5000-36
contaminants shall be thoroughly washed from the
5909 PAINTING CONCRETE 5000-36 surface prior to painting, and the surface shall be dried
5910 PAINTING GALVANISED SURFACES 5000-36 and painted immediately afterwards.
5911 MEASURING PAINT THICKNESSES 5000-37
5912 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5000-37 Where surfaces are to be welded, unless otherwise
specified, any paint shall not be applied within 75mm of
the weld position.
5901 SCOPE After the welding has been completed, the welds and
This Section covers the painting of structural steel, adjacent parent metal shall be completely deslagged,
guard rails, overhead road sign supports and other and the surfaces shall then be inspected and approved
structures according to the requirements of the various by the Engineer. All spatter shall be removed prior to
Sections of these Specifications where painting is called the surfaces being painted. The weld area shall be
for. It does not include the treatment of timber posts abrasive-blasted and/or ground and all contaminants
which are included under SUBCLAUSE 5202(b). such as flux shall be removed prior to the surface being
painted.
5902 MATERIAL
Paints shall comply with the requirements of the Surfaces which are to rest on concrete or other floors
following Specifications: shall receive all the prescribed coats of paint prior to the
member being erected.
(a) Primers Damaged paint areas shall be cleaned, rust spots

removed and the surface again be primed so that the
(i) Zinc-chromate primers for steel: patch painting covers the damaged areas and extends
SABS 679 (Type 1 or Type 2, Grade II) or over a strip of 20 mm beyond each damaged area.
equivalent
(ii) Wash primer (metal etch primer): Where the shop coat is allowed to age for a few months
SABS 723 or equivalent before the next layer of paint is applied, light sanding
(iii) Calcium-plumbate primer: with sandpaper or rubbing with steel wool and
SABS 912 or equivalent scrubbing with clean water with a bristle brush shall be
(iv) Two-pack Zinc-rich epoxy primer: carried out.
SABS 926 or equivalent
Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be entirely
(b) Undercoat painted to a distance of 50 mm within the concrete
SABS 681 (Type II) or equivalent measured from the concrete outer surface.
The paint manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly

(c) Finishing coats adhered to.
(i) Decorative enamel for interior and exterior: Painted steel members shall be stacked so as to be off
SABS 630 or equivalent the ground.
(ii) High-gloss paint:
684 (Type A) or equivalent Friction-grip surfaces shall not be painted but shall be
(iii) Micaceous iron-ore-pigmented paint: treated in accordance with the Special Specifications.
SABS 684 or equivalent
(iv) Baking enamels: 5904 APPLYING THE PAINT
SABS 783 or equivalent Unless otherwise specified, paint may be applied either
(v) Emulsion paint for exterior use (polyacrylic): by brush, spray or roller method, or by any combination
SABS 634 or equivalent of these three methods.
(vi) Chloro-rubber paint:
SABS 1413 or equivalent Where brushes are used, they shall have sufficient
(vii) Bituminous aluminium paint: body and length of bristle for spreading the paint in a
SABS 802 or equivalent uniform coat. Paint shall be evenly spread and
thoroughly brushed out. If brush marks are visible, it will
(d) Other be considered that the paint has been improperly
(i) Epoxy-tar paints: applied, and the paint will not be accepted.
SABS 801 (Type I) or equivalent
(ii) Bonding liquid for concrete surfaces: On all surfaces which are inaccessible to painting by
CKS 564 or equivalent regular painting equipment, the paint shall be applied by
bottle brushes, sheepskin daubers, or by any other

acceptable method so as to render the required coating done at the fabricator's works but, where this is not
of paint. feasible, the Engineer may permit the application of the
finishing coats on the site, in which case an undercoat
If spray methods are used, the operator shall be shall be applied at the fabricator's works prior to the
thoroughly experienced. Runs, sags, thin areas in the members being despatched to the Works.
paint coat, skips, or where air bubbles have formed or
the paint has delaminated, shall be considered as being Unless otherwise specified, the protection described in
unsatisfactory, and the Contractor will be required to SUBCLAUSES 5907(c), (d) and (e) shall be applied to aII
repaint the surface by brush. steel work. Corrosion protection of steel work exposed
to aggressive or severe conditions shall comply with the
A water trap and an air-regulating valve acceptable to requirements of the Special Specifications.
the Engineer shall be furnished and installed on the
equipment used for spray-painting.
(b) Surface preparation
Mechanical mixers shall be used for mixing paint
properly when no ready-mixed paints are used. Prior to (i) New structures
application, the paint shall be remixed for a sufficient After all cutting, drilling, welding and punching have
length of time to mix the pigment and vehicle been completed, it shall be ascertained that all
thoroughly. Paint shall be constantly kept well stirred to sharp edges have been uniformly rounded off and
keep the pigments in suspension during its application. smoothed down. All physically adhering
All skins in the paint shall be removed by screening. If it contaminants shall be removed and the surface
cannot be removed effectively, the paint and paintwork shall then be abrasive-blasted to Sa 2½ finish in
already completed may be condemned at the discretion accordance with the Swedish Standard SIS
of the Engineer. 05/59/00 or equivalent. The profile limit of the
surface finish shall be between 30 µm and 60 µm.
Paint shall not be applied when the temperature of the The abrasive-blasting profile shall be measured in
0
surface to be painted is not at least 3 C above dew accordance with SABS Method 772 or equivalent
0
point or when the temperature of the steel is below 5 C and shall comply with SABS Code of Practice 064
0
or above 35 C, unless otherwise prescribed by the or equivalent.
Engineer.
No abrasive-blasting shall be done during rainy
Paint shall not be applied in fog or mist, when it is weather or when corrosive air conditions prevail.
raining or when rain is expected, or when the relative
humidity is above 90%. Unless the application of a primer follows within four
hours of abrasive blasting and before any oxidation
5905 PROTECTING THE WORKS DURING of the prepared surface takes place, the abrasive-
PAINTING OPERATIONS blasted surface shall immediately after abrasive
The Contractor shall protect all parts of the structure blasting be given one coat of a wash primer.
against disfigurement by spatters, splashes and/or
smirches of paint or of paint materials. The Contractor (ii) Existing structures
shall be responsible for any damage to or paint on or The surface preparation of existing structures shall
be carried out on site in accordance with SABS 064
contamination to vehicles, persons or property,
including plants and animals, as a result of his or equivalent.
operations, and he will be required to provide protective
(c) Primer
measures at his own cost to prevent such damage.
The prepared surface shall be given two coats of a zinc-
Any unsightly paint stains shall be removed by the chromate primer in accordance with SABS 679, Type 1,
Grade II or equivalent. The first coat shall be applied
Contractor at his own cost.
within 12 hours in the case of wash-primed surfaces
If passing traffic creates sufficient dust to harm or spoil and within four hours, but before any oxidation of the
surface takes place, in the case of abrasive-blasted
the appearance of painted surfaces, the Contractor
shall sprinkle the adjacent roads and shoulders with surfaces that have not been wash-primed. A fast-drying
water at his own cost, for a sufficient distance on each zinc chromate in accordance with SABS 679, Type II,
Grade II or equivalent, may be used as primer. In all
side of the location where the painting is being done, to
keep the dust away from freshly painted surfaces. The cases the dry-film thickness shall not be less than 30
Contractor shall at his own cost, also furnish and post µm per coat.
DRIVE SLOWLY signs and take other necessary
precautions to prevent dust and dirt from adhering onto When steel has to be welded after the primer has been
freshly painted surfaces. applied, the steel shall be left unpainted for a distance
of 75 mm from the weld joint unless a weldable type of
paint has been used. The welds shall be treated in
5906 PREPARING SURFACES FOR PAINTING accordance with the instructions of CLAUSES 5903 and
Before paint is applied to any surface, the appropriate 5907.
specified surface preparation shall be carried out in
accordance with the paint manufacturers (d) Undercoat
recommendations. Where the finishing coats are to be applied on the site,
the primed surfaces shall be given one coat of a
universal undercoat with a suitable colour in the
5907 PAINTING STRUCTURAL STEEL fabricator's shop before despatch. The undercoat shall
be applied as soon as the prime coat has dried
(a) General sufficiently. The dry-film thickness shall not be less than
This Section includes the painting of steel guard rail 25 µm.
posts, steel road sign supports and steel sign face
frames, where required. (e) Finishing coat
Two finishing coats of high-gloss structural paint (SABS
The surface preparation, priming and application of an 684, Type A or equivalent) of the specified colour shall
undercoat shall be carried out under cover at the be applied to leave a dry-film thickness of not less than
fabricator's works. Where possible, all painting shall be 25 µm per coat.
Where the finishing coats are applied on the site, the to corrode as a result of prolonged exposure to the
undercoat shall be lightly sanded and the members weather. Any guardrails showing signs of rust before
washed and cleaned of all contaminants. The first the application of the finishing coats shall be rubbed
finishing coat shall be applied as soon as the structural down with steel wool or fine sandpaper until all rust is
members are dry. removed, and it shall then be recoated with a zinc-
chromate primer.
Where specified in the Special Specifications, the
second finishing coat shall consist of a micaceous iron- (e) Finishing
ore-pigmented structural paint of the specified colour to Before the first finishing coat is applied, the guard rails
a dry-film thickness of not less than 30 µm. Unless shall be thoroughly washed down to remove all traces
otherwise specified, the second finishing coat shall be of salt and/or other air-borne corrosive materials and all
applied within 48 hours of the application of the first dirt or other contaminants.
finishing coat.
As soon as the rinsed guard rails are dry, a finishing
The dry-film thickness of the total paint system shall not coat of aluminium paint in accordance with SABS 802
be less than 110 µm when no undercoat is used and or equivalent or a white high-gloss enamel in
not less than 135 µm when an undercoat is used. accordance with SABS 684 or equivalent shall be
Where the second finishing coat is an iron-ore- applied to a dry-film thickness of not less than 25 µm.
pigmented paint, these thicknesses shall be increased Within 48 hours this shall be followed by a second coat
by 5 µm. as described before.
(f) Mating surfaces The guard rails shall preferably be given both finishing
When mating surfaces are brought together, both coats before erection, but, where this is impossible, the
surfaces shall already have been covered with all the Engineer may permit the finishing coats to be applied
specified coats of paint, but, where this is impossible, after the guard rails have been erected, provided that all
each surface shall be given a copious coating of primer mating surfaces and spots which are not easily
and the surfaces drawn up while the paint is still wet. accessible shall be painted with the finishing coats
before the guard rails may be erected.
(g) Back-to-back members and areas not easily
accessible The total dry-film thickness of all coats of the paint shall
Back-to-back members and areas not easily accessible not be less than 90 µm. All damaged spots shall be
shall be fully coated with all the specified coats of paint treated as specified in SUBCLAUSE 5907(h).
up to and including the finishing coats before erection.
(h) Damaged areas 5909 PAINTING CONCRETE

Damaged areas shall be treated as follows:
(a) Surface preparation
Sand down to bright metal and clean. Spot prime with The surface of the concrete to be painted shall be
two coats and sand down lightly when hard. Rinse off cleaned of all dust, loose particles, laitance, impurities
with water and allow to dry. Apply two finishing coats. and other deleterious materials, and then washed and
allowed to dry.
(i) Structural steel to be embedded below ground
Those parts of structural-steel members to be Unless the surface is to be covered with a bituminous
embedded in soil and all bases to a height of 500 mm paint, all cracks, holes and cavities shall be filled with
shall be given two coats of an epoxy-tar prime instead grout or an acrylic filler.
of the zinc-chromate prime specified for other surfaces.
(b) Sealing and priming
The surface shall be sealed with an approved clear
5908 PAINTING GUARD RAILS sealer which complies with CKS 564 or equivalent and
then primed with a primer consisting of an undercoat
(a) General diluted to 50%.
This Section covers the painting of guardrails, should it
be prescribed. The painting of steel guardrail posts is (c) Undercoat and finishing
covered in SUBCLAUSE 5907 and the treatment of timber An undercoat shall be applied after priming, followed by
guardrail posts is covered in.SUBCLAUSE 5202 (b). two finishing coats of the prescribed paint.
(b) Surface preparation and priming (d) Bituminous paint

All dirt, loose mill scale and loose corrosion products The surface shall be prepared in accordance with the
shall be removed by hand or power tools and all rust requirements of SUBCLAUSE 5909(a). Before it dries out,
and mill scale by pickling, after which the surface shall a primer shall be applied in accordance with the
be rinsed. A neutralising rinse shall also be applied, or instructions of the fabricator of the bituminous paint.
the surface shall be phosphated.
After the primer has been applied, two coats of
(c) Priming bituminous paint shall be applied at the rate of 0.75
2
Apply two coats of zinc-chromate primer to a dry-film litre/m /coat. No paint coat shall be applied unless the
thickness of not less than 20 µm per coat. previous coat has dried out completely, and no paint
shall be applied to the paintwork for so long as any
After the prime coats have hardened, the guard rails moisture occurs on the surface.
may be transported to the site.
5910 PAINTING GALVANISED SURFACES
(d) Storage on the site Galvanised surfaces shall be painted as specified in this
The primed guardrails shall be stored off the ground Section for steel surfaces, except that the surface
under cover and protected against rain and weather preparation and priming shall be as follows:
until erection. Guardrails shall be stacked individually
and not nested so as to prevent corrosion during (a) Surface preparation
storage. The finishing coats shall be applied as soon as Freshly galvanised surfaces shall be thoroughly
possible and the primed surfaces shall not be allowed scrubbed down with an approved galvanised-iron

cleaner to remove all traces of the resin protective

coating.
The surface shall be washed down and scrubbed to

remove all traces of grease, oil, dirt, etc.
(b) Priming
Two coats of calcium-plumbate primer shall be applied
to a dry-film thickness of at least 25 µm.
The undercoat shall follow within one week of the

primer.
5911 MEASURING PAINT THICKNESSES

The dry-film thickness of paint shall be determined in
accordance with SABS Method 141 or equivalent.
At least 90% of all thickness measurements shall

comply with the minimum specified requirements. The
thickness shall not in any case be less than 70% of the
specified thickness.

ITEM UNIT
59.01 PAINTING:
(a) (DESCRIBE SQUARE METRE
2
STRUCTURE/ARTICLE) (m )
(b) (DESCRIBE NUMBER (no)
STRUCTURE/ARTICLE)
(c) (DESCRIBE METRE (m)
STRUCTURE/ARTICLE)
(d) (DESCRIBE TONNE (t)
STRUCTURE/ARTICLE)

surface painted. Only the surface covered by the final
finishing coat shall be measured.
The unit of measurement may also be the number of

structures or articles painted, or a metre length of the
structures or articles painted, or a tonne of the
structures or articles painted, the quantities are
calculated as specified in ITEM 67.01.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for surface

preparation, applying all the coats of paint, repairing
any damaged surfaces, and all materials and
construction plant necessary for completing the work.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 SERIES 6000 - STRUCTURES
SERIES 6000
STRUCTURES
SECTION PAGE
6100 FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES 6000-2
6200 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK AND
CONCRETE FINISH 6000-20
6300 STEEL REINFORCEMENTS FOR
STRUCTURES 6000-27
6400 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES 6000-30
6500 PRESTRESSING 6000-38
6600 NO-FINES CONCRETE, JOINTS,
BEARINGS, BOLT GROUPS FOR
ELECTRIFICATION, PARAPETS AND
DRAINAGE FOR STRUCTURES 6000-48
6700 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 6000-59
6800 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES FOR
STRUCTURES 6000-63

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
SERIES 1000 GENERAL
APPENDICES

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES (f) Structural steel

Steel in the steel piles shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4360 or SABS 1431 or equivalent,
SECTION 6100: FOUNDATIONS BS EN 10113 and BSEN 10155 for the grade of steel
specified on the Drawings. I and H sections shall
FOR STRUCTURES comply with the requirements of BS 4:Part 1.
CONTENTS: Fabricated sections shall comply with the details shown

on the Drawings and the requirements of SECTION
CLAUSE PAGE 6700.
6101 SCOPE 6000-2
6102 MATERIALS 6000-2 (g) Permanent pile casings
6103 GENERAL 6000-2 Permanent pile casings shall be sufficiently rigid so as
6104 ACCESS AND DRAINAGE 6000-3 not to deform permanently or damage during handling
6105 EXCAVATION 6000-3 and construction. The casings shall be sufficiently
6106 FOUNDING 6000-4 dense to prevent the fluid components of the concrete
6107 UTILISATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL 6000-4 from leaking during the placing of the concrete or
6108 BACKFILL AND FILL NEAR STRUCTURES 6000-4 thereafter. Where steel casings contribute to the
6109 FOUNDATION FILL 6000-5 strength of the pile, the casings shall have a minimum
6110 GROUTING OF ROCK FISSURES 6000-5 wall thickness of 4.5 mm and shall comply with the
6111 FOUNDATION DOWELS 6000-5 requirements of ASTM A 252-68. Welded joints shall
6112 FOUNDATION LINING 6000-5 comply with the requirements of SECTION 6700.
6113 FOUNDATION PILING 6000-6
6114 CAISSONS 6000-11 (h) Driven pile casings
6115 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6000-13 Driven pile casings shall have sufficient strength to
permit their being driven and not being distorted by the
driving of adjacent piles, and they shall be sufficiently
watertight to prevent water leaking through the casing
walls during the placing of concrete.
6101 SCOPE
This Section covers all foundation work which, for the
purposes of these Specifications, shall comprise those (i) Grouting
elements of construction below the level of the bottom
surface of the footings, the pile-capping slabs or the (i) Cement grout
caisson cover slabs, collectively hereinafter referred to
Cement grout shall meet the appropriate
as base or bases, which shall include all the associated requirements of SUBCLAUSE 6503(g).
temporary works. Foundations for prefabricated culverts
are not included but are specified in SECTION 2200.
(ii) Proprietary-brand grout
Proprietary-brand grout shall be prepared and used
strictly in accordance with the instructions of the
6102 MATERIALS manufacturer.
(a) General
Material used in the permanent foundation work shall 6103 GENERAL
comply with the requirements specified for the particular
material in SERIES 6000. (a) Subsurface data
The provisions of CLAUSE 1216 shall apply in regard to
(b) Rock (for rock fill)
any information supplied regarding any subsurface
Stones shall be hard, angular, natural or quarry stones conditions likely to be encountered.
of such quality that they will not disintegrate on
exposure to water or weathering. The stones shall be
If it is found during the course of excavating, founding-
free from soil, clay or organic material. Neither the pile or caisson work that the soil or founding conditions
breadth nor thickness of a single stone shall be less
differ greatly from those shown on the Drawings, the
than one-third its length. Not more than 10% of the total Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer.
volume of rock fill shall consist of stones with a mass of
less than 0.5 times the specified mass and not more
The Engineer shall, as often as he may deem
than 10% of the total volume of rock fill shall consist of necessary during the course of excavation, be entitled
stones with a mass of more than 5 times the specified to call on the Contractor to conduct additional
mass. At least 50% of the total volume of rock fill shall
foundation investigations and/or tests at or below the
consist of stones the mass of which exceeds the respective founding levels in view of establishing safe
specified mass. bearing pressures and founding depths.
(c) Crushed stone (b) Channel preservation
Crushed stone used for the construction of crushed- The flow of the stream and the conservation of marine
stone fill shall originate from sound unweathered rock
and freshwater life shall be maintained at all times.
approved by the Engineer. Access to cofferdams, artificial islands and piling
platforms shall be effected without unnecessarily
(d) Granular fill
disrupting the flow of the stream at the point of crossing,
Granular material used for constructing the compacted unless otherwise specified.
granular fill shall be approved granular material of at
least gravel subbase quality.
Precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to
maintain water quality standards. Water contaminated
(e) Sand fill
with silt shall be settled in ponds before being pumped
Sand used for filling the caissons shall be clean, hard
into streams. Water contaminated with chemicals shall
sand free from lumps of clay or organic or other be purified before being returned to the stream or
deleterious matter. disposed of in an appropriate manner as directed by the
Engineer. Precautions shall be taken by the Contractor
to ensure that the natural pH, electrical conductivity and
other indicators as prescribed of the water are not Excavations beyond the 5 m limit shall be measured
raised or lowered. and paid for under the appropriate Items of SECTIONS
2100 and 3600.
On completion of the work, surplus excavated materials
including materials excavated from caisson (b) Surface levels agreed on for excavations
compartments and holes for piles, materials used in Prior to commencing with any excavation, the
cofferdams and other temporary works, as well as in- Contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time to
situ material, shall be removed and disposed of by the ensure that levels be taken of the undisturbed ground
Contractor to the level of the original bed or such surface for determining the ground surface from where
elevation as agreed to by the Engineer or required for the excavation can be measured, and this ground
stream channelisation. surface shall be agreed on by the Engineer and the
Contractor.
6104 ACCESS AND DRAINAGE (c) Excavation

Where in the opinion of the Engineer the casting of
(a) General concrete against the excavated earth faces is not
This Clause covers the provision of access, including permissible, or where formwork has to be provided, the
the construction of cofferdams, and draining the extremities of the excavation, for purposes of
excavations. Where it is unnecessary to provide access measurement and payment, shall be deemed to be the
in terms of SUBCLAUSE 6104(b), the Contractor shall be vertical planes parallel to and 0.5 m outside the
paid separately for draining the excavations. perimeter of the member for which formwork is to be
provided.
After completion of the permanent works, all temporary
works shall be completely removed, the ground levelled Where suitable, stable material is encountered during
and the site left neat. Where this is impracticable, such excavating, that part of the trench or foundation pit shall
portions as have not been removed, shall be dealt with be excavated to the neat dimensions of the base unless
in accordance with the Engineer's instructions. otherwise directed by the Engineer. Over-excavation
(overbreak) in hard material shall be backfilled with the
(b) Access same class of concrete as that in the base or with mass
Where temporary banks or artificial islands are concrete fill as specified or as directed by the Engineer.
constructed in view of affording access to the location
where structural members, piles or caissons are to be Where blasting is required, the Contractor shall
constructed, the banks or islands shall be adequately complete the entire foundation excavation before he
compacted in view of supporting any plant and material commences with the construction of any permanent
without any undue settling which may have a harmful concrete work, unless otherwise approved by the
effect on the end product. Engineer.
The Contractor may use any material deemed by him to Boulders, logs or any other unsuitable material
be suitable for constructing the islands, but no separate excavated shall be spoiled.
payment will be made for any obstructions, hard or
unsuitable material occurring in the material used for When hard material suitable for founding is
constructing temporary banks or artificial islands. encountered at the founding level, it shall be cut and
trimmed to a firm surface, either level, stepped or
Designing and constructing any cofferdams shall serrated, as may be required.
comply with the requirements of BS 8004. Before
starting with construction, the Contractor shall submit Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable
drawings to the Engineer, which show details of the material is encountered at founding level, such material
cofferdams and the method of construction. shall be removed and replaced with foundation fill in
accordance with CLAUSE 6109 and as directed by the
(c) Drainage Engineer.
The Contractor shall apply suitable, effective drainage
methods for preventing the ingress of water into (d) Classification of excavated material
excavations and to keep them dry. For payment purposes distinction shall be made
between common excavation in soft material and rock
The drainage measures, with the exception of pumping, excavation. All excavation for the foundations of
shall be maintained until the backfilling has been structures shall be classified in accordance with the
completed. Between the various construction stages CLAUSE 3603, which definitions are summarised as
pumping may be interrupted in consultation with the follows:
Engineer.
(i) Rock excavation:
Any draining or pumping of water shall be done in a Rock excavation shall be excavation in material
manner that will preclude the concrete or materials or which requires drilling and blasting or the use of
any part thereof from being carried away. hydraulic or pneumatic jackhammers to be
loosened and to be loaded for transportation.
6105 EXCAVATION (ii) Common excavation:

Common excavation shall be excavation in all
material other than rock as defined above.
(a) General
This work shall include excavations not provided for
(e) Blasting
elsewhere in these Specifications, which are required
Where blasting is permitted, it shall be carried out in
for founding the structures as well as for the excavating
accordance with the requirements of CLAUSE 1222.
required in respect of the demolition, extension or
modification of existing bridges and culverts.
(f) Deterioration of foundation excavations
Where soft material, or hard material which quickly
Excavation required for diverting, channelling or
deteriorates when exposed, is found at foundation level,
widening streams within 5 m of concrete structures shall
the excavation shall be excavated to the final slope and
be measured and paid for under ITEM 61.02.
level immediately before the screed is placed.

Where the bottoms or sides of excavations, in which (iii) Piles

bases are to be cast, are softened on account of The underside of the underream, bulbous base or
negligence on the part of the Contractor in allowing rock socket; the tip of the pile shoe or lower pile
storm or other water to enter the excavations, the end, as may be relevant.
softened material shall be removed and replaced with
foundation fill as directed by the Engineer, at the (iv) Caissons
Contractor's expense. The underside of the cutting edge.
(g) The safety of excavations 6107 UTILISATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to Excavated material and material recovered from
safeguard the stability and safety of the excavations temporary works shall, if suitable, be utilised for backfill.
and adjacent structures. Material unsuitable for use as backfill or in excess of the
required quantity, shall be spoiled or utilised as directed
The personal safety of no person shall be jeopardised by the Engineer.
neither shall any situation be allowed to arise which
may result in damage of whatsoever nature. Excavated material not used for backfill or not taken to
spoil but used in the construction of embankments or
Precautionary measures taken by the Contractor shall other parts of the work, as directed by the Engineer, will
comply with the appropriate legal provisions. be paid for under foundation excavation as well as
under the relevant item for the purpose for which it is
(h) Inspection used.
No concrete shall be placed before the excavation has
been properly cleaned by the Contractor and inspected The free haul distance on excavated material and
and approved by the Engineer. imported material for backfill shall be 1.0km.
(i) Excavation by hand Excavated and stockpiled material shall be so dumped
Where circumstances prevent the use of mechanical as not to endanger the uncompleted structure either by
excavators and material can be removed only by hand direct pressure or indirectly by overloading the fills
implements, the Engineer shall authorise the contiguous to the structure, or in any other way.
supplementary payment to the Contractor for such work
at the bid rates for excavation by hand should he be
satisfied that the Contractor had been unable to prevent 6108 BACKFILL AND FILL NEAR
the necessity for excavation by hand by proper planning
and precautionary measures. The supplementary rate STRUCTURES
for excavation by hand shall not apply to minor finishing
or clearing jobs in excavations which are otherwise (a) General
being done by mass excavation plant. When backfill and fill are placed, the following
precautionary measures shall be taken:
6106 FOUNDING
(i) The material shall be placed simultaneously, in so
In consequence of possible variations of the anticipated
far as is possible to approximately the same
founding conditions, the dimensions and founding levels
elevation on both sides of an abutment, pier, or wall
specified or shown on the Drawings may have to be
where appropriate. If conditions require the backfill
varied during construction.
or fill to be placed appreciably higher on one side
than on the other the additional material on the
The Engineer has full and absolute power to order such
higher side shall not be placed until authorised by
variations and to specify the actual founding level for
the Engineer, and preferably not until the concrete
each foundation fill, base or caisson during
has been in place for 14 days, or until tests show
construction.
that the concrete has attained sufficient strength to
safely withstand any pressure extended by the
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional
backfill or fill or by the method of construction.
payment in consequence of any such variation in the
dimensions or founding depths over and above that
(ii) The material behind abutments directly restrained
provided for in CLAUSE 6115, irrespective of the stage of
at the top by the superstructure eg portal type of
construction at which the instruction to alter the
structures, shall be placed as shown on the
dimensions or founding depths is given. However, if in
consequence of such order to alter the Contractor is
compelled to substitute other machines and equipment
(iii) The material behind the portal walls of portal
for machines and equipment for successfully
structures shall not be placed until the top slab has
completing the work, the Engineer may reimburse the
been placed and cured, unless otherwise
Contractor at a fair price for incidentals incurred,
authorised by the Engineer.
provided that the original machines and equipment had
been suitable for the work required prior to the order to
(b) Backfill
alter having been issued.
Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled
with approved material in horizontal layers not
No bases, caissons or piles shall be founded unless
exceeding 150 mm in thickness after compaction to the
authorised by the Engineer. Each founding level shall
level of the original ground surface. Each layer shall be
be accurately measured and recorded and agreed on.
moistened or dried to the optimum moisture content for
The term "founding level' used in these Specifications
the material and then compacted to a density of not less
shall be deemed to have the following meanings in
than 90 % of BS-Heavy density for soils and gravels,
respect of:
and not less than 100% of BS-Heavy density for
cohesionless sands, or the density of the surrounding
(i) Foundation fill
soil whichever shall be the less, except that, in the road
The surface of the in situ material that has been
prism, the material shall be compacted to a density of
prepared to receive foundation fill.
not less than 93% of BS-Heavy density.
(ii) Bases
The underside of the base.

(c) Fill A concrete screed which complies with the

Before the space between the structure and the requirements shown on the Drawings shall be placed
approach fill, or between the structure and the faces of underneath all bases except where mass concrete fill is
the surrounding excavation is backfilled, the slope of used or where authorised by the Engineer that this
the approach fill, or the faces of the excavation shall be need not be done.
shaped by benching or serrations to prevent wedge
action from occurring between the structure and the Where mass concrete fill is constructed under a base it
approach fill or the excavation faces. shall be constructed accurately to the final levels of the
underside of the base.
The distance between the exposed face of the structure
and the toe of the approach fill or the excavation face 6110 GROUTING OF ROCK FISSURES
shall not under any circumstances be less than the Where specified, fissures in the rock below and around
height of the exposed face of the structure. the bases shall be sealed by pressure grouting with a
neat cement or sand-cement grout or with a proprietary
(d) Fill within restricted area brand grout as specified.
That part of the fill within a horizontal distance of 3 m
from the vertical and inclined concrete faces of the The cement water ratio of the grout shall be approved in
structure and that part between the pillars of the spill- advance by the Engineer.
through abutments or that part shown on the Drawings,
shall be termed “fill within restricted area". The extent of the fissuring shall be established by
means of water testing under pressure.
Fill within the restricted area shall comply with the
requirements of SECTION 3600 except that it shall be Holes of at least 40 mm in diameter shall be drilled at
compacted to a density of not less than 93% of BS- places indicated by the Engineer and grout shall then
Heavy density. In order to achieve the specified density be pumped into these holes under suitable pressures.
the Contractor shall, where necessary, import material Grouting shall be done in 3 m stages to the maximum
of suitable quality. depth ordered. Care shall be taken to avoid further
fracturing of the rock strata by excessive grouting
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, only pressures.
mechanical compaction equipment that is pushed or
drawn by hand shall be used to achieve the required Grouting of the rock fissures shall be done by
density within a horizontal distance of 3 m from any specialised operators with adequate experience in this
concrete structure. Fill in spaces below concrete soffits class of work.
that are inaccessible for mechanical compaction
equipment shall be constructed by methods specified or 6111 FOUNDATION DOWELS
Where required, foundation dowels of specified
material, diameter and length shall be installed at the
Payment in accordance with ITEM 61.05 for the
positions and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings
construction of fill within restricted areas shall be made
or as directed by the Engineer. After exposing, clearing
only when specifically provided for in the Bill of
and trimming the rock formation, holes with specified
Quantities.
diameters and depths shall be drilled in the rock. After
the holes have been cleared and prewetted, they shall
6109 FOUNDATION FILL be filled with grout. Within 15 minutes of having been
If it is found during the course of excavation that the filled with grout, the dowels shall be carefully driven into
material at the indicated founding depth does not have the holes. The cement and water in the grout shall be
the required bearing capacity as specified on the mixed in the ratio of 50kg of cement to 20 litres of
Drawings, the excavations shall be extended at the water, and an approved expanding additive which
discretion of the Engineer until satisfactory founding complies with the requirements of SUBCLAUSE 6402(e)
material is encountered. The Engineer may order the shall be added.
Contractor to make up the difference in levels with
foundation fill. The dowels shall comply with the requirements of
CLAUSE 6305.
Where the foundation fill consists of rock or crushed
stone, it shall be constructed in accordance with the 6112 FOUNDATION LINING
requirements of the Special Specifications or as
Where specified or directed by the Engineer, foundation
directed by the Engineer. Foundation fill consisting of
linings shall be installed as described hereafter. The
granular material shall be constructed in layers not
Engineer shall have the right to order the use of linings
exceeding 150mm in thickness after compaction. Each
against the sides of excavations and the undersides of
layer shall be moistened or dried to the optimum
bases and slabs in lieu of formwork and concrete
moisture content for the material and compacted to a
blinding.
density of not less than 95% of BS-Heavy density for
soils and gravels, and not less than 100% BS-Heavy
All surfaces to be lined shall be covered with an
density for cohesionless sands. Mass concrete fill to be
approved sheeting to provide a clean impervious layer.
used shall be of the class or mix of concrete fill as
The material shall be of sufficient strength to provide a
specified or directed by the Engineer.
durable working surface and to support the concrete
and reinforcement without tearing. The joints of the
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer,
material between strips shall have a 150 mm overlap
the foundation fill constructed from rock, crushed stone
and the lining shall be held firmly in position by nails,
or compacted granular material shall be defined by a
pegs, etc.
prism with vertical sides. The base of the prism lies in
the founding plane and coincides with the base of a
Polyethylene sheeting with a thickness of 0.150 mm is
prismoid with trapezium-shaped inclined sides which
0 generally considered to be adequate for use below
extend downwards and outwards at an angle of 60 with
bridge approach slabs and bases.
the horizontal from each outer edge of the underside of
the footing down to the founding level. The upper plane
of the prism lies in the plane of the underside of the
footing.

6113 FOUNDATION PILING pile-capping slab dimensions and reinforcement as

a result of the layout of the piles, all as applicable.
(a) General
This Clause covers the construction of bearing piles of No work of whatsoever nature shall be commenced
concrete or steel or a combination of these materials. on the piling until the Drawings have been
submitted to and have been approved by the
(b) Piling layout Engineer, in writing.
The piling layout, the minimum pile size and/or bearing
capacity and type together with the steel reinforcement After approval of the Drawings, no departure
and class of concrete required shall be as detailed and therefrom shall be made without authorisation by
specified on the Drawings unless otherwise specified in the Engineer.
the Special Specifications.
Final working drawings shall comply with the
provisions of CLAUSE 1221.
(c) Alternative designs for piling and piling layouts
Where the alternative piles fail in regard to the load
(i) Submission test specified in Subclause 6113(u), the Contractor
The priced Bill of Quantities submitted for shall be responsible for the cost of the work
alternative designs shall be compiled strictly in required for improving the piles and pile layout so
accordance with the relevant measurement and as to comply with the design requirements.
payment clauses of these Specifications.
(iii) Basis of payment
Where pay items defined in these Specifications Where the quantities in the Bill of Quantities
have been omitted, it shall mean either that the referred to in SUBCLAUSE 6113(c), on the one part,
items do not apply, or that where the Engineer differ from the number of piles and the average pile
requires work falling under such items to be done, it length given in the submission for the alternative
shall be done without any cost to the Employer. The pile design, on the other part, the Engineer shall
inclusion of 'rate-only" items will not be permitted. accept the sum in the Bill of Quantities, correct the
quantities, and adjust the rates for the applicable
Where pay items not defined in these Specifications pay items accordingly.
are used, the measurement and payment
requirements for such items shall be specified in (d) Details to be furnished by the Contractor
detail by the Contractor. In the absence of such In all cases where the choice of the type of pile to be
definitions, or in the case of any ambiguity, the used is left to the Contractor, full particulars,
interpretation of the Engineer shall be final and specifications, calculations and drawings of the piles
binding. proposed for use by the Contractor shall be submitted
with the bid. The Contractor shall submit the following
Except in piling-only Contracts or where otherwise information to the Engineer, two weeks before any piles
provided in the Special Specifications, the are driven or holes are formed:
Contractor shall price the Bill of Quantities for the
original design irrespective of whether or not an (i) How the piles and casings will be installed or the
alternative design is offered. holes will be formed;
(ii) Design (ii) How the piles and casings will be installed or the
The critical design-load combinations acting upon holes will be made through identified obstructions;
the underside and the centre of gravity of the pile-
capping slab, the maximum permissible set of the (iii) The mass of the hammer;
pile-capping slab, and the technical data required
for designing alternative piles and or piling layouts (iv) The set during the last ten blows;
will be indicated on the Drawings. Alternative
designs shall comply with the provisions of CLAUSE (v) The expected size of the bulbous base, underream.
1212 and the prescriptions set out below. rock socket, etc, if any;
For alternative designs submitted the Contractor (vi) How concrete or grout is to be placed and
shall submit with his bid a detailed description of the compacted in the case of cast in situ piles;
method of analysis used in the design of the piles
and the pilegroup layouts. The average length of (vii) How reinforcing steel is to be placed and held in
pile and/or of the piles per group on which the place during placing and compacting the concrete
quantities in the Bill of Quantities for the alternative in cast in situ piles;
designs are based shall be stated in each case.
The type of pile offered shall be defined in terms of (viii) Details of permanent casing, if any;
size, materials, working and breaking load.
(ix) The mix design for the concrete together with an
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall adequate quantity of cement and aggregate to
bear the cost for redesigning, drafting and enable the Engineer to conduct the necessary tests.
submitting the detail drawings for any structural
element affected by the alternative pile design. Any (e) Pile-installation frames and equipment
economy or incidental caused by constructing such The pile-installation frames and equipment used for
element as compared to the original design shall be driving the piles or forming the holes or for other
for the account of the Contractor. methods of sinking the piles shall be in a good working
condition and to the prior approval of the Engineer and
The Contractor shall, as specified in CLAUSE 1212 shall comply with the relevant legal provisions.
for alternative designs, submit to the Engineer at
least three months prior to work being commenced, The Contractor shall supply the necessary equipment,
drawings detailing the piling-group layout and piles, gear and instruments required for the prescribed
incorporating such amendments to his original investigations and inspections.
design as may be required by the Engineer, and
drawings detailing the amendments required to the
The installation frames shall be so designed as to 40 times the bar diameter if no dimension has been
ensure that piles can be installed in their proper given.
positions and true to line and slope.
Splicing the reinforcing may be ordered, and the
(f) Piling platforms Contractor shall keep available on the site sufficient
Piling platforms shall include the prepared in situ steel reinforcing so that an additional length of pile
material or artificial islands or any structure (excluding reinforcing can be assembled whenever necessary.
the piling equipment) constructed for gaining access to
the position where the pile is to be installed and for The assembly of this additional reinforcing shall be
carrying out the piling operations. carried out expeditiously and before any concreting
of any specific pile commences. If splices have to
Structural piling platforms shall be rigid, and floating be provided, the longitudinal bars shall overlap for a
barges used for piling operations shall afford sufficient distance of 40 bar diameters, or as required by the
stability to enable piles to be properly installed. Engineer.
On completion of the piling, the Contractor shall remove (ii) The concreting of piles
all the artificial, constructed platforms and reinstate the The concreting of the piles shall not be commenced
site to the satisfaction of the Engineer. before the Engineer has given his permission
therefor.
(g) Setting out
The Contractor shall set out the pile positions and shall Except in self-supporting pile holes, a temporary or
stake these positions with a durable marker. Where the permanent casing shall be installed for the full
level from which the piling is undertaken is above the depth of the hole to prevent lumps of material from
underside of the pile capping slab, due allowance shall falling from the sides of the hole into the concrete.
be made for the offset of raking piles so that the pile at Where concrete is to be placed under the drilling
the underside of the pile-capping slab will be in the mud, the temporary casing may be omitted, except
correct position. at the top end of the hole.
(h) Ground surface for foundation piling The concrete shall be so proportioned as to be of
Before starting any piling work, the Contractor shall sufficient strength, but shall be sufficiently workable
notify the Engineer in good time to ensure that levels of to enable it being properly placed, and, where self-
the ground surface be taken in order that an average compacting concrete is not used, it shall be
ground surface from which the piling is to be measured thoroughly compacted by approved means.
can be established and agreed on by the Engineer and Extraction of the temporary casing during
the Contractor. Where foundation piling at a site is placement of the concrete shall be such that no
preceded by excavation or the construction of fill, the damage is caused to the pile and the advancing
surface from which the piling is to be done shall be concrete level is at all times kept considerably
formed as near as possible to the underside of the pile- above the temporary casing's trailing edge.
capping slab as directed by the Engineer. Concrete shall generally be placed in the dry, but
where this is impracticable, it shall be placed by
tremie.
(i) Cast in situ concrete piles
The requirements of SUBCLAUSE 6407(c) together
(i) Reinforcement with the following requirements shall apply when
Reinforcement shall not be placed in the pile holes concrete is placed under water by tremie:
until immediately before concreting. Before the
reinforcement is placed in position, all mud, water, (1) The cement content shall be not less than 400
3
and any loose or soft material shall be removed kg/m and the slump shall be such that the
from the hole. concrete of the specified strength and desired
density can be obtained.
Steel reinforcing shall be accurately maintained in
position without damage being done to the sides of (2) The hopper and tremie shall be a closed unit
the hole or the reinforcing itself. Spacers shall be which cannot be penetrated by water.
used to keep the reinforcing steel at the required
distance from the inside face of the pile casing and (3) The tremie shall be at least 150mm in diameter
wall of the pile hole but shall not cause zones for 20mm aggregate and larger for larger
through which aggressive ground water may aggregates.
penetrate to the reinforcement.
(4) The concrete shall be so placed as to prevent
Pile reinforcement will not be shown in the bending the mixing of water and concrete. The tremie
schedules. Only the number, diameter and type of shall at all times penetrate into the concrete.
bars and their arrangement will be shown on the
Drawings. The Contractor, with the permission of (5) Placing the concrete in that part of the pile
the Engineer, may replace the bars shown on the below the water level in the casing shall be
Drawings with bars with different diameters and done in one operation, and the same method of
spacing and of different types, on a basis of placing the concrete shall be maintained
equivalent strength. throughout.
The reinforcement shall be assembled in cages, (6) All tremies shall be scrupulously cleaned before
which shall be sufficiently robust to prevent their and after use.
permanent deformation during handling. In the case
of cast in situ piles, the inner sides of the cages (7) Before placing the concrete in the water, the
shall be kept open in view of the unrestricted Contractor shall ensure that no silt or other
placing of concrete therein. materials have collected at the bottom of the
hole, and where drilling mud is used, the
The longitudinal bars shall project above the cut-off Contractor shall ensure that no drilling mud
point by the distance shown on the Drawings, or by suspension with a relative density exceeding
1.3 has collected at the bottom of the hole.

Concrete shall be placed in a manner that prevents thickness caused by abrasion and corrosion during the
segregation. service life of the pile.
Steel piles shall be used only where permitted by the

(j) Precast concrete piles Engineer.
(i) General
The piles shall be of reinforced or prestressed (I) Driving the piles
concrete and shall be manufactured, handled,
stored and installed in accordance with BS 8004, (i) Pile-installation frames
unless otherwise specified. Piles and pile casings shall be driven with a gravity
hammer, a rapid-action power hammer or by other
(ii) Manufacture approved means. Prestressed-concrete piles shall
The piles may be manufactured in a factory or a be driven with a hammer with a mass of at least
casting yard on the site of the Works. The equal to that of the pile. Other piles shall preferably
Contractor shall ensure that the factory or casting be driven by a hammer with similar mass
yard will at all reasonable times be accessible for characteristics. The hammer shall not, during
inspection by the Engineer. driving operations, damage any permanent
component of the pile. Pile driving leaders shall be
The relevant requirements of SECTION 6400 shall constructed in such a manner as to afford freedom
apply to the concrete work. of movement of the hammer and shall be held in
position to ensure adequate support for the pile or
Transverse reinforcement shall comply with the pile casing during installation. Inclined leaders shall
requirements of BS 8004. be used for installing raking piles.
The piles shall be cast on a rigid horizontal platform The heads of precast concrete piles shall be
in approved moulds. Particular care shall be taken protected with packing of resilient material, care
to keep the reinforcement, coupler sockets and pile being taken to ensure that it is evenly spread and
shoes accurately in position. Adequate provision held in place. A helmet shall be placed over the
shall be made for lifting the piles. packing, and a dolly of hardwood or other material
not thicker than the diameter of the pile shall be
Each pile shall be clearly marked with the date of placed on top.
casting, a reference number, and from the tip of the
pile at 1.0m intervals, with distance marks. (ii) Water jetting
The Contractor may employ water jetting to install
Piles shall be cured for a period sufficient to piles in granular material. Jetting shall be
develop the strength required to withstand, without discontinued before the leading end of the pile
damage to the pile the stresses caused by reaches a depth of 80% of the anticipated final
handling, transporting, storing and driving. The piles depth or a depth as agreed on with the Engineer.
shall not be driven before the concrete in the pile After jetting, piles or their casings shall be driven to
has attained the specified strength. the required depth, level or set.
(iii) Handling, transport and storage (iii) Installation sequence

Care shall be taken at all stages of lifting, handling Unless otherwise specified or ordered the sequence
and transporting to ensure that the piles are not for installing the piles shall be left to the Contractor.
damaged or cracked. However, the sequence for driving the piles in a
group shall be programmed to minimise the
Piles shall be stored on firm ground which will not creation of consolidated blocks of ground into which
settle unequally under the weight of the stack of piles cannot be driven or which cause fictitious
piles. The piles shall be placed on timber supports penetration values. Piling shall generally commence
which are truly level and spaced so as to avoid at the centre of the group and be progressively
undue bending in the piles. The supports in the extended to the perimeter piles unless otherwise
stack shall be located vertically above one another. agreed on by the Engineer.
(iv) Lengthening of precast piles The installation of piles shall be undertaken in such
Piles shall be lengthened where required by such a manner that structural damage, distortion or
means and methods as approved by the Engineer. positioning defects will not be caused to previously
Care shall be taken to ensure that the additional installed piles or casings.
length of pile joined is truly axially in line with the
original pile within the tolerance requirements for (iv) Heaving of piles
straightness set out in SUBCLAUSE 6803(a). Driving In soils in which the installation of piles may cause
shall not be resumed until the pile extension and previously installed piles to heave, accurate level
any bonding agent used has attained the required marks shall be placed on each pile immediately
strength. after installation and all piles that have heaved shall
be redriven to the required resistance, unless
(k) Steel piles redriving tests on neighbouring piles have shown
Hollow steel piles may be filled with cast in situ concrete this to be unnecessary. Piles shall not be concreted
and, provided that adequate connections are provided neither shall any pile-capping slab be constructed
between the steel and the concrete with a view to until the piles within a heave-influence zone have
transferring the load, the concrete may be deemed to been redriven as required.
assist in carrying the load.
(v) Bulbous bases
Wherever steel piles are used, they shall be given a Where required, bulbous (enlarged) bases shall be
protective coating of bitumen, coal-tar pitch or synthetic formed after the driven casing has reached the
resins to the satisfaction of the Engineer or as specified. required depth. The base shall be formed by
The cross-sectional area of the steel shall be adapted progressively displacing the surrounding subsoil
to the aggressiveness of the subsurface conditions to with concrete placed by the repeated action of a
compensate for possible reduction in the pile wall gravity hammer. The size of the base will depend

on the compressibility of the surrounding subsoil but has been completed for approval to be given by the
shall in no case have a diameter of less than 1.5 Engineer for casting the pile.
times the diameter of the pile.
(n) Rock sockets
(vi) Piling alignment Where required, rock sockets to the required
Where the inclination of a precast concrete pile dimensions shall be formed in rock formations of
deviates from the correct slope during installation, adequate strength, quality and thickness for transmitting
the pile shall not be forced into the correct position. the specified load.
The slope of the guiding frame shall be adjusted so
as to coincide with the actual inclination of the pile
to preclude the bending of the pile. Where the (o) Obstructions
verticality or the inclination of the installed pile falls
outside the specified tolerances, the pile will be (i) Definitions
classified as being defective.
(1) Identified obstructions
Identified obstructions shall mean any
(m) Augering and boring obstruction described on the Drawings or in the
Special Specifications and for which provision
(i) Auger and bore pile holes for payment has been made in the Bill of
The augering and boring of pile holes shall be Quantities in respect of penetrating the
carried out as expeditiously as local conditions obstructions.
permit taking due account of services or other
restrictions on the site. (2) Unidentified obstructions
Where provision has been made in the Bill of
Holes shall be cleaned after augering and boring to Quantities in terms of ITEM 61.21 for penetrating
obtain a clean and level surface. identified obstructions and obstructions not
described are encountered, such obstructions
Where indicated by the Engineer, suitable casing shall be classified as unidentified obstructions
shall be installed in those parts of the augered and the penetration of such obstructions shall
holes where the sides are in danger of caving in be paid for under ITEM 61.22 subject to the
before the concreting has been completed. condition that the rate of penetration drops to
below that achieved for identified obstructions
During extraction of the casing, care shall be taken when the same method and effort are used, or
to avoid lifting the concrete and damaging the pile. subject to additional methods and effort over
and above those required for identified
The use of water for augering and boring holes obstructions being required for penetrating the
shall not be permitted unless approved by the obstruction.
Engineer. Surface water shall not be allowed to
enter the hole. or
(ii) Underreaming Where no provision has been made in the Bill of

Where required, the holes shall be enlarged or Quantities for penetrating identified obstructions
belled out to form an underream. The earth and obstructions are encountered and, after
excavated shall be removed in a manner which will resorting to the methods specified in the
not damage the walls of the hole. submission in terms of SUBCLAUSE 6113(d), it is
found to be impossible to form the holes in the
The shape of the underream shall be a truncated proper positions and at the proper inclinations
cone of which the base diameter depends on the and depths, and the Contractor has to resort to
bearing capacity of the founding material, but it additional methods for forming the pile holes
shall be not less than twice the shaft diameter. The successfully, such obstructions shall be
base angle of the cone between the inclined face classified as unidentified obstructions.
0
and horizontal plane shall be not less than 60 .
(ii) Classification of materials
Full safety measures shall be enforced to protect For piling, only the following classification of
workmen working at the bottom of the pile hole. materials shall apply to the identification and
description of obstructions.
(iii) Bulbous bases
Bulbous bases shall comply with the requirements (1) Matrix
of SUBCLAUSE 6113(I). The matrix shall comprise that part of the
material which will pass through a sieve with 50
(iv) Inspecting preformed holes mm x 50 mm openings.
Equipment for inspecting the pile shafts shall be
provided and operated in accordance with the latest (2) Coarse gravel
amendment or edition of the Code of Practice Coarse gravel shall comprise that part of the
Relating to the Safety of Men Working in Small material (stones, pebbles, cobbles, etc) which
Diameter Vertical and Near Vertical Shafts for Civil will pass through a 200 mm x 200 mm opening,
Engineering Purposes, obtainable from the South but will not pass through a 50 mm x 50 mm
African Institution of Civil Engineers, or similar opening. The gravel shall be obtained from
document. material with at least a Class R2 hardness as
defined in TABLE 6113/1 at the end of this
Immediately before the reinforcement is to be Section.
installed or the concrete placed, the Engineer shall
be informed thereof with a view to inspecting the (3) Boulders
pile holes. When piles are to be underreamed, the Boulders shall mean any rock mass with a
excavation shall be inspected twice by the hardness of at least Class R2 which will pass
Engineer, firstly to ascertain that suitable founding through a square opening with dimensions
material has been obtained before underreaming equal to the maximum size boulder specified in
may start, and, secondly, after the underreaming

the Bill of Quantities but will not pass through a (ii) A description of subsurface material, the presence
200 mm x 200 mm opening. of ground water and the quality of material on which
the pile is founded.
(4) Rock formation
A rock formation shall be any rock mass with a (iii) The quality of the materials used in the construction
hardness of at least Class R2 which will not or manufacture of the pile, as well as of the
pass through a square opening with dimensions permanent casing if used. The method of placing
equal to the maximum size boulder specified in and compacting the concrete in cast in situ piles.
the Bill of Quantities.
(iv) The method of founding of the piles e.g. bulbous
Where a boulder is cut through and part of it is bases, underreams, rock sockets, etc, and their
left imbedded in the wall of the hole, such dimensions.
boulder obstruction shall be classified as rock
formation. (v) The maximum working load of the pile.
For the identification of rock in terms of this (vi) The length of the pile and the accuracy of
Clause, the classification in TABLE 6113/1 (at installation in respect of position and inclination.
the end of the Section) shall apply.
(vii) Nominal dimensions and type of pile.
(iii) Driven displacement and prefabricated piles
Where obstructions make it difficult to install driven (viii) Length and details of any temporary and
displacement and prefabricated piles in the permanent casings used.
positions and at the inclinations shown and to the
proper lengths by the methods specified in the (r) Stripping the pile heads
submission in terms of SUBCLAUSE 6113(d), the Precast piles shall be installed to a level of at least 1.0
Contractor shall resort to additional methods which m above the cut-off level, and cast in situ piles shall be
are suitable for the type of pile. If the successful cast to a level of at least 150 mm above the cut-off
installation of a pile proves to be impossible after level. The excess concrete shall be so stripped off that
such methods have been tried, the Engineer may only sound concrete will project into the pile-capping
order an additional pile or piles to be installed. slab.
All such work and additional piles shall be paid for Before a pile head is stripped, the cut-off plane shall be
in accordance with the bid rates where applicable, marked by cutting a 20 mm deep groove with a
or where they do not apply, under ITEM 61.23. grinding-machine along the full circumference of the
pile. Heavy concrete demolishing equipment may not
(iv) Auger and bore pile holes be used for the stripping of pile heads. All loose
Where identified or unidentified obstructions are aggregate shall be removed from the cut-off plane.
encountered when shaping holes for piles, payment
for penetrating the obstructions shall be made The concrete shall be so stripped off that the pile below
against the appropriate pay items. the cut-off level will not be damaged, or, should
defective concrete be found in the completed pile, the
(p) Determining pile lengths damaged or defective concrete shall be cut away by the
The design of the piles and pile groups, and the Contractor at his own cost and replaced with new
quantities in the Bill of Quantities are based on the concrete well bonded to the old concrete, or the pile
subsurface data shown on the Drawings. shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer.
The Engineer will determine the depth of piles as work The main reinforcement of the piles shall extend at least
proceeds. 40 times the diameters of the reinforcing bar beyond the
cut-off level into the pile-capping slab. This
Where variations in the subsurface conditions occur as reinforcement shall be left straight unless otherwise
regards the material and height of the water table, the directed by the Engineer.
Engineer shall be informed immediately.
The cut-off level for piles shall be the level shown on
If the Contractor is not satisfied that the piles will be the Drawings.
capable of carrying the specified loads at the depth
determined by the Engineer he may, in consultation (s) Construction of pile-capping slab
with the Engineer, lengthen the piles to reach a suitable The Contractor shall not construct the pile-capping slab
founding depth. Where the Engineer and the Contractor before the Engineer has confirmed, in writing, that all
cannot agree on the founding depth, the Engineer may the relevant load tests have been completed and the
require the Contractor to: piles have been accepted.
(i) undertake additional foundation investigations (t) Core drilling

and/or core drilling in accordance with Subclauses The Engineer may instruct core drilling to be done with
6103(a) and 6113(t) respectively, and/or a view to obtaining cores of the founding formation
and/or of the concrete in the completed structural
(ii) install one or more test piles and conduct a load member. In the case of piling, the core drilling may
test in accordance with Subclause 6113(u). The precede the piling or may be done through the
Engineer will prescribe the positions for each test completed pile, as specified, or as instructed by the
pile. Test piles shall comply with the specified Engineer.
requirements for piling.
The Contractor shall supply the necessary construction
(q) Piling data plant on the site for drilling under the above conditions.
The following data on each pile installed shall be The plant and techniques used shall be suitable for
recorded in a form prescribed by the Engineer: ensuring 100% core recovery. The diameters, depths
and lengths of the cores shall agree with the
(i) The effort used for driving the pile and the specifications or the instructions of the Engineer.
resistance to penetration at founding level.

The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the (iv) Altering the design to fit in with the new conditions
drilling, which, together with the cores, shall be handed caused by the defective pile(s).
over to the Engineer. The cores shall be placed in the
correct sequence in a clearly identified wooden core (w) Standing time in respect of pile-installation
box with a lid. frames
Standing time shall only be paid for pile installation
frames standing during normal working hours as laid
(u) Load test down in the General Conditions on Contract for such
periods during which the pile installation work has come
(i) General to a standstill following an action by the Employer.
The Engineer may order certain selected piles to be
load tested. The procedure for loading tests shall As soon as the pile installation frames have come to a
comply with the requirements of SECTION 7100. standstill, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer, in
During the period of testing, driving of other piles writing that he intends to claim standing time, and shall
which may affect the testing shall cease. also furnish:
No working pile shall be used as an anchor pile. (i) full particulars of the action which gave rise to the
Where anchor piles or earth anchors are required claim
for providing reaction, they shall be so placed as to
have a minimal effect on the test results. (ii) a list of pile-installation frames in respect of, which
standing time will be claimed, complete with date
The Contractor shall provide the complete testing and time.
assembly, the necessary plant, equipment,
instruments and labour for carrying out the test and The period in respect of which a claim is lodged shall
for determining accurately the settlement of the become operative from the moment when the notice
piles under each increase or decrease of the load. has been handed over to the Engineer and shall
The test assembly, plant, equipment and continue until the restriction has been removed and
instruments used shall be subject to the approval of normal procedure may be resumed.
the Engineer.
(x) Nuclear integrity
Within two days of having completed the tests, the Integrity tests using both the nuclear and neutron
Contractor shall supply the Engineer with the test method shall be performed on all bored piles. The
results and neatly plotted load against settlement, purpose of these tests is to prove that the technique
load against time, and settlement against time used in constructing the piles is satisfactory, by
graphs. checking for necking of concrete in the pile shafts,
checking concrete cover to reinforcement and by
(ii) Loading checking for honeycombing, grout loss and segregation
The maximum test load applied shall be equal to of aggregates.
twice the specified working load or the ultimate test
load, whichever shall be the smaller.
6114 CAISSONS
The maximum working load shall be half of the
maximum test load or the test load which (a) General
corresponds with the allowable settlement, Caissons shall, for the purposes of these Specifications,
whichever shall be the smaller. The allowable be hollow concrete vessels which are wholly or partly
settlement shall be as specified on the Drawings. constructed at a higher level and lowered by internal
excavation or kentledge to the desired founding level to
(iii) Ultimate test load form structural bearing members. Caissons may be of
The ultimate test load in the compression-load test circular, rectangular or any other shape and may
shall be the load where settlement suddenly contain one or more excavation compartments, all as
increases disproportionately to the load applied. detailed on the Drawings.
The ultimate test load in the tension-load test shall Unless otherwise specified hereafter, the provisions of
be the load where the upward movement suddenly BS 8004 shall apply in regard to the construction of
increases disproportionately to the load applied or caissons.
the load producing a permanent rise of 10 mm at
the top of the pile, whichever is the smaller. (b) Construction and sinking
A firm horizontal base shall be prepared on which the
(v) Defective piles cutting edge of the caisson shall be laid truly
The test pile and the piles represented by the test pile horizontally. The level of the base shall be determined
shall be classified as defective if shown in terms of and shall be agreed on by the Engineer and the
SECTION 6100 to have a maximum working load of less Contractor and shall serve as the ground surface from
than the specified working load, or to exhibit excessive which the excavation inside the caisson will be
settlement. Defective piles shall also include piles measured.
damaged beyond repair, piles with structural defects, or
piles which do not comply with the tolerance Successive stages of the caisson shall be of convenient
requirements of SECTION 6800. height, or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be
lined up accurately with the preceding stages.
If required, the defective piles shall be corrected by the
Contractor at his own cost, by applying one of the All precast elements shall have properly constructed
following methods approved by the Engineer: joints in accordance with the Drawings to ensure that
they fit snugly together.
(i) Extracting the pile and replacing it with a new pile.
For in situ phase construction, all construction joints in
(ii) Installing a new pile adjacent to the defective pile. the walls shall be reinforced and the joints shall be
made as specified in CLAUSE 6408.
(iii) Lengthening the pile to the correct length if
defective in length only.

The lowest element of every caisson, which contains No concrete shall be placed in the wedge or the seal
the cutting edges, shall be cured for at least four days before the Engineer has inspected and approved the
or shall have reached a strength of at least 50% of the foundation. For this purpose the Contractor shall
specified strength before sinking is commenced. adequately dewater the caisson to enable the Engineer
Subsequent elements shall be cast in sufficient good to conduct the inspection.
time to ensure adequate strength for safely resisting the
applied forces. In the event of a caisson not being vertical or in its
correct position when it has reached the required depth,
During constructing and sinking, the caissons shall be or in the event of a caisson being cracked during the
maintained truly vertically and kept in their correct sinking process, the Contractor shall at his own cost
positions. carry out the necessary remedial work to the
The position and inclination of each caisson shall be
determined accurately by measurement after every 2m (d) Data
of sinking, or after sinking through the depth of one The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a
element, whichever distance is the smaller. complete record of the types of material excavated
during sinking, together with the level at which each
With a view to eliminating excess friction, the Contractor type of the material was found. In addition, a log
may use bentonite or a similar lubricant, or a water-jet showing the rate of sinking shall be kept by the
system. Contractor and furnished to the Engineer.
Excavation inside caisson compartments shall, unless

otherwise specified herein, comply with the provisions (e) Filling the caissons
of CLAUSE 6105.
(i) Concrete seal
In multi-compartmented caissons, the excavation in any The seal shall be constructed of mass concrete of
one compartment shall not be taken deeper than 0.6m the class specified and shall be placed in
below that in any other compartment, except where accordance with the dimensions and levels shown
necessary for correcting deviations. on the Drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer.
Cutting edges shall be frequently inspected or probed to If this seal cannot be placed in the dry and has to
locate obstacles, which shall be removed immediately. be placed under water, the method of placing this
concrete shall be approved by the Engineer. The
The Contractor shall supply all grabs, pumps, diving Contractor shall cease placing the concrete under
gear and other plant required for sinking and founding water when sufficient concrete has been placed to
all caissons and shall allow the Engineer to use the seal the foundation effectively.
diving suit and equipment for inspection purposes.
After the concrete has been placed, the concrete
The Contractor shall employ a competent diver to carry seal and the head of water over it shall remain
out work under water and shall make provision in the undisturbed for a period of at least seven days after
rates bid for the respective items for this cost. which the caisson shall be dewatered by pumping
for inspection. If more water is still leaking into the
Where the caisson strikes a hard inclined layer and caisson, the process of sealing as specified herein
work has to be carried out below the cutting edge, such shall be continued until the water level within the
work shall be measured and paid for under the relevant caisson does not rise at a rate exceeding 10 mm
items of CLAUSE 6115, and, where no applicable items per hour.
exist, such work shall be paid for as extra work.
The relevant requirements of SUBCLAUSES 6407(c)
Should the Contractor wish to apply the pneumatic and 6113(i) shall apply for placing the concrete
caisson method (with a compressed air chamber) for under water. For concrete placed under water by
construction, he shall furnish the Engineer with full methods other than by tremie, the cement content
details of the plant, equipment and method for approval. shall be 20% more than the quantity required for
ordinary concrete of the same mix but shall be not
3
(c) Founding less than 450 kg/m of concrete.
The material at the founding level, if sloping and/or
irregular, shall in so far as is possible be cut to as (ii) Filling
nearly level a surface as possible until the entire cutting Subsequent to inspection of the caisson
edge is evenly and firmly supported on the material. compartments above the concrete seal, the
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, blasting may compartments shall be filled with sand. The sand
be used for this purpose. If blasting should be resorted shall be sufficiently wetted to obviate bulking.
to, only light charges may be used and the caisson shall
be protected against damage by suitable cushioning The first 2 m of filling above the concrete seal shall
being provided. be lowered gently into position. The sand may then
be poured from the top and compacted sufficiently
Should the sloping surface be of hard rock which to prevent settlement while the cover slab concrete
cannot be cut or broken by any safe and feasible is being placed.
means, the foundation shall be built up by means of a
solid wedge of concrete which fills the entire space The top of the sand fill within the caisson shall be
between the bedrock surface and the horizontal plane finished off to the level specified below the
through the cutting edge. This concrete shall be of the underside of the caisson cover slab.
same class as that specified on the Drawings or in the
Bill of Quantities for the concrete seal. (f) Stripping
Where the walls of the caisson have been overbuilt, the
The rock or hard material on which the structure is to be concrete shall be stripped to the required level without
founded shall be completely uncovered. The founding damage being done to the concrete below the cut-off
surface shall be cleared of all loose material before level. The longitudinal reinforcement of the caisson
inspection by the Engineer immediately prior to casting shall project above the cut-off level by a distance of at
the concrete seal. least 40 times the bar diameter.

(g) Concrete screed below the caisson cover slabs vertical sides, as described in CLAUSE 6109 or as
A concrete screed of the specified thickness and class prescribed by the Engineer.
of concrete shall be provided to the level shown on the
Drawings over the area covered by the cover slab, In no case shall any of the following excavations be
including the area within the caissons on top of the included in the measurement for payment:
sand filling, except where the underside of the cover
slab is being formed with formwork. (i) The volume of excavation in excess of the above
mentioned limits.
(h) General
Water quality and marine life shall not be adversely (ii) The volume included within the excavated road
affected in any way during operations. prism, contiguous channels, ditches, etc, for which
payment is provided elsewhere in the
Specifications.
ITEM UNIT excavation in each class of material,. the spoiling or
stockpiling of materials, the hauling of excavated
61.01 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONAL material for the free-haul distance of 1.0km, any
FOUNDATION INVESTIGATIONS: SUM
additional excavation the Contractor may require for
additional working space outside the authorised limits,
A provisional sum shall be provided in the Bill of trimming and cleaning the bottoms and sides of
Quantities to cover the cost of this work. excavations, and strutting, shoring and safeguarding
the excavations.
The work authorised by the Engineer shall be paid for in
accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of If after a foundation excavation has been completed,
Contract. cleaned and trimmed ready for concrete screeding, the
Engineer orders further excavations to be made on
account of changed dimensions and/or founding
ITEM UNIT conditions, an extra over payment (SUBITEM 61.02(c))
61.02 EXCAVATION: on the additional excavation measured for payment
shall be payable in full compensation for any incidentals
(a) COMMON EXCAVATION IN SOFT to the Contractor over and above the normal excavation
MATERIAL SITUATED WITHIN THE
costs.
FOLLOWING SUCCESSIVE DEPTH
RANGES:
(i) 0 m UP TO 2 m CUBIC ITEM UNIT
3
METRE (m )
61.03 ACCESS AND DRAINAGE:
(ii) 2 m UP TO 4 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m ) (a) ACCESS LUMP SUM
(iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 2 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m ) The bid lump sum shall include full compensation for
(b) EXTRA-OVER SUBITEM 61.02(a) FOR CUBIC providing access, which, inter alia, shall include
3
EXCAVATION IN ROCK IRRESPECTIVE METRE (m ) constructing temporary banks, artificial islands and/or
OF DEPTH cofferdams, their protection, safeguarding and
maintenance draining and keeping dry the working
The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be areas and draining the excavations within the access,
measured down from the surface levels described in and any incidentals in respect of work to be done below
SECTION 6100 to the founding level agreed on. standing water.
In the case of excavations that are required for 75% of the lump sum will be paid when the access has
diverting, channelling or widening streams, the been constructed. The remaining 25% will be paid after
successive depth ranges for those portions of the the access has been removed.
excavations that are within 5 m of a concrete structure
shall be measured from the surface levels agreed on to
the invert level of the channel or stream. (b) DRAINAGE, WHERE NO LUMP SUM LUMP
ACCESS HAS BEEN PROVIDED SUM
material, measured in the original position before Payment will be made for this work by way of a lump
excavation. The quantity of excavation for each depth sum for each structure or series of structures appearing
range shall be calculated from the neat outlines of the separately in the Bill of Quantities. The lump sum shall
base or floor and the depth of excavation completed be paid on a pro rata basis as the work progresses.
within each range.
Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation, the The bid lump sum shall include full compensation for
quantity of material within each depth range shall be draining by pumping or in any other way and for any
measured and paid for separately. other work necessary for keeping the excavation dry or
for working in the dry.
At the concrete faces for which formwork has to be
provided, additional excavation shall be measured to
0.5 m outside the concrete perimeter to make provision ITEM UNIT
for a working space. 61.04 BACKFILL TO
EXCAVATIONS UTILISING:
Where foundation fill is constructed in an excavation, 3
the quantity of excavated material measured for (a) MATERIAL FROM THE CUBIC METRE (m )
payment shall be the material excavated between the EXCAVATIONS
3
average ground level, as described in SUBCLAUSE (b) IMPORTED MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
6105(b), and the founding level, from a prism with (c) SOIL CEMENT CUBIC METRE (m
3
)

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of ITEM UNIT

backfill material measured in the excavation, excluding 61.10 DRILLING OF HOLES (DIAMETER METRE
the volume occupied by the structure. The quantity AND TYPE OF DRILLING INDICATED) (m)
measured shall be calculated from within the neat
outlines defined for the excavation under ITEM 61.02
and the height to which the backfilling is constructed. The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole
The volume occupied by the structure shall be drilled.
subtracted when calculating the volume of backfilling.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for drilling
The height shall be determined by the upper surface of and clearing the holes as specified. equipment moving
the road prism or the reference ground surface and setting up in position, drilling and clearing the holes
(SUBCLAUSE 6105(b)), whichever is the lower. as specified. Where no provision has been made for
payment in the Bill of Quantities under ITEM 61.09, the
The bid rates shall include full compensation for bid rate shall also include full compensation for work
furnishing and placing all materials within the entire falling under that item.
excavation, transporting the material and preparing,
processing, shaping, watering, mixing and compacting
the material to the specified densities. ITEM UNIT
61.11 GROUTING (TYPE OF GROUT KILOGRAMME
No overhaul shall be paid. AND FOR WHICH PURPOSE IT IS (kg)
REQUIRED INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT The unit of measurement for grouting shall be the

61.08 FOUNDATION FILL kilogram of cement or proprietary brand of grout as may
CONSISTING OF: be applicable used in the grouting operation.
3
(a) ROCK FILL CUBIC METRE (m )
3 The bid rate shall include full compensation for
(b) CRUSHED STONE FILL CUBIC METRE (m ) providing the equipment and all the material, and mixing
3
(c) COMPACTED GRANULAR CUBIC METRE (m ) and pumping the grout into the prepared holes in
MATERIAL accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, and
(d) MASS CONCRETE (CLASS CUBIC METRE (m
3
) also for the water-pressure tests.
INDICATED)
3
(e) CONCRETE SCREED (THICKNESS CUBIC METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
AND CLASS OF CONCRETE
INDICATED) 61.12 DOWEL BARS (TYPE, KILOGRAMME
DIAMETER AND LENGTH OF DOWEL (kg)
BARS TOGETHER WITH TYPE OF
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of GROUT, INDICATED)
approved material placed and compacted below the
bases as specified or where directed by the Engineer.
The unit of measurement for the dowel bars shall be the
The quantity of foundation fill to be measured for kilogram of bars provided and secured in position. The
payment shall be the material contained within the bid rate shall include full compensation for supplying all
prism specified in CLAUSE 6109 or shall otherwise be the material and positioning and grouting the dowel
the quantity to the outlines shown on the Drawings or bars as specified.
procuring, furnishing, transporting, placing and 61.13 FOUNDATION LINING SQUARE
2
compacting the material. (TYPE OF MATERIAL AND METRE (m )
THICKNESS INDICATED)
No overhaul shall be paid.
The unit of measurement for foundation lining shall be
the square metre of concrete surface lined.
ITEM UNIT
61.09 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP The bid rate shall include full compensation for
FOR THE DRILLING OF HOLES (TYPE SUM procuring, furnishing and placing all material and for all
OF DRILLING INDICATED) labour and incidentals required for completing the work
as specified.
establishment on the site, moving to individual hole
positions and the subsequent removal of all special ITEM UNIT
plant for drilling the holes and additional plant for 61.14 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP
carrying out operations, the cost of which does not vary FOR PILING SUM
with the actual amount of work to be done.
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 75% of generally levelling the piling site, establishing on the site
which will become payable when all the equipment is on and subsequently removing all structural platforms,
the site and the first hole has been drilled. The rafts, and all special constructional plant and equipment
remaining 25% will become payable after all the holes for foundation piling and for carrying out operations, the
have been drilled and the equipment has been removed cost of which does not vary with the actual amount of
from the site. piling done.
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 50% of

which will become payable when all equipment is on the
site and the first pile has been installed. The second
instalment of 25% of the lump sum will be payable after
half the total number of piles have been installed, and RANGES:
the final instalment of 25% after all the piles have been (a) 0m UP TO 10m METRE (m)
completed and the equipment has been removed from
the site. (b) EXCEEDING 10m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m)
(c) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 5 m METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be
61.15 MOVING TO, AND SETTING UP NUMBER (no) measured down from the average ground surface
THE EQUIPMENT AT EACH POSITION SECTION 6100 to the agreed founding level.
FOR INSTALLING THE PILES
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole plus
The unit of measurement shall be the number of the depth of bulbous base formed as may be
positions to which the installation equipment has to be applicable. The depth of the bulbous base shall be
moved and set up in position. The quantity measured deemed to be equal to the diameter of a sphere, the
shall be the number of piles installed plus the number of volume of which shall be equal to the quantity of
piles redriven on the instruction of the Engineer, plus compacted concrete in the bulbous base. Irrespective of
any piles provided in addition for load tests, which do the total depth of the hole, the quantity within each
not form part of a specific pile group. depth range shall be measured and paid for separately.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for all costs supplying, driving and subsequently extracting the
involved in moving and setting up any equipment. temporary casing.
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

61.16 AUGERED OR BORED HOLES FOR 61.18 MANUFACTURING, SUPPLYING AND METRE
PILES WITH A DIAMETER OF (DIAMETER DELIVERING PREFABRICATED PILES (m)
INDICATED) THROUGH MATERIAL (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED).
SUCCESSIVE DEPTH RANGES: The unit of measurement shall be the metre of accepted
(a) AUGERED HOLES: prefabricated pile delivered on the site in accordance
with the Engineer's written instructions.
(i) 0 m UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
(ii) EXCEEDING 10 m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m) The bid rate shall include full compensation for
(iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 5 m METRE (m) supplying all the materials, manufacturing, transporting
and delivering to the point of use and handling the
(b) BORED HOLES: prefabricated piles.
(i) 0 m UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
(ii) EXCEEDING 10 m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
(iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 5 m METRE (m)
61.19 INSTALLATION OF
PREFABRICATED PILES (TYPE AND
The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be SIZE INDICATED) THROUGH MATERIAL
measured down from the average ground surface SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING
(SUBCLAUSE 6113(h)) to the agreed founding level SUCCESSIVE DEPTH RANGES:
(CLAUSE 6106).
(a) 0 m UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole, (b) EXCEEDING 10 m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m)
including the depth of the bulbous base formed, as may (c) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 5 m METRE (m)
be applicable. The depth of the bulbous base shall be
deemed to be equal to the diameter of a sphere, the
volume of which shall be equal to the quantity of The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be
compacted concrete in the bulbous base. measured down from the average ground surface
SECTION 6100 to the founding depth agreed on.
Irrespective of the total depth of the hole, the quantity
within each depth range shall be measured and paid for The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
separately. prefabricated pile installed. That part of the
prefabricated pile projecting above the average ground
The bid rates for forming augered holes shall include surface shall not be measured and paid for.
full compensation for augering and disposing of surplus
material resulting from the hole having been formed. Irrespective of the total length of pile installed, the
quantity installed within each depth range shall be
The bid rates for forming bored holes shall include full measured and paid for separately.
compensation for boring, supplying, installing and
extracting the driven temporary casing as well as for The bid rates shall include full compensation for
disposing of surplus material resulting from the hole hoisting and driving the pile.
having been formed.
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 61.20 EXTRA OVER ITEM 61.19,
61.17 DRIVING THE TEMPORARY IRRESPECTIVE OF THE DEPTH TO
CASING FOR DRIVEN DISPLACEMENT FORM AUGERED AND BORED PILE
PILING SYSTEMS FOR FORMING HOLES THROUGH IDENTIFIED
HOLES FOR PILES WITH A DIAMETER OBSTRUCTIONS CONSISTING OF:
OF (DIAMETER INDICATED) THROUGH (a) COARSE GRAVEL WITH A MAXIMUM METRE (m)
MATERIAL SITUATED WITHIN THE CONTENT OF LESS THAN (MAXIMUM
FOLLOWING SUCCESSIVE DEPTH PERCENTAGE INDICATED)

(b) BOULDERS (DESCRIPTION OF AND METRE (m) The unit of measurement shall be the number of pile
MAXIMUM SIZE INDICATED) holes underreamed. The bid rate shall include full
(c) ROCK FORMATION (DESCRIPTION AND METRE (m) compensation for all work to be done in forming the
CLASS OF ROCK INDICATED) underreams.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of pile hole ITEM UNIT
formed through the identified obstruction, measured
from the depth at which the identified obstruction is 61.25 FORMING THE BULBOUS BASES NUMBER
encountered to the depth at which normal auger drilling FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER INDICATED) (no)
or boring can be resumed or another type of identified
obstruction is encountered. The unit of measurement shall be the number of
bulbous bases formed.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for all
additional work and incidentals required for forming the The bid rate shall include full compensation for all work
pile hole through the identified obstruction. to be done in forming the bulbous bases but shall
exclude the concrete work.
Where obstructions other than those provided for in
ITEM 61.19 can be identified, they shall be described on
the Drawings and/or in the Special Specifications. ITEM UNIT
Provision therefor shall be made in the Bill of Quantities 61.26 SOCKETING PILES INTO ROCK NUMBER
under extensions to ITEM 61.19. FORMATION (CLASS OF ROCK AND (no)
LENGTH OF SOCKET INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
61.21 FORMING AUGERED AND PROVISIONAL sockets, the length of which shall be not less than the
BORED PILE HOLES THROUGH SUM specified length, formed in rock, the hardness of which
UNIDENTIFIED OBSTRUCTIONS shall be not less than that of the specified class of rock.
A provisional sum shall be allowed in the Bill of The bid rate shall include full compensation for all work
Quantities for covering the cost of this work. to be done for socketing into the rock formation.
Payment for the work authorised by the Engineer shall

be in accordance with the provisions of the Conditions ITEM UNIT
of Contract. 61.27 INSTALLING AND REMOVING METRE
TEMPORARY CASINGS IN AUGERED (m)
HOLES FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER
ITEM UNIT INDICATED)
61.22 DRIVING TEMPORARY PROVISIONAL
CASINGS FOR DRIVEN SUM The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
DISPLACEMENT PILING SYSTEMS OR temporary casing installed as directed by the Engineer
INSTALLING PREFABRICATED PILES or shown on the Drawings. Only the installed temporary
THROUGH IDENTIFIED OR casing below the average ground surface (SUBCLAUSE
UNIDENTIFIED OBSTRUCTIONS 6113(h)) shall be measured for payment.
A provisional sum shall be allowed in the Bill of The bid rate shall include full compensation for
Quantities for covering the cost of this work. supplying, installing and removing the temporary
casings.
The method of payment for the work authorised by the
Engineer shall be in accordance with the provisions of
the Conditions of Contract. ITEM UNIT
61.28 INSTALLING PERMANENT PILE METRE
CASING FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER (m)
61.23 EXTRA OVER ITEMS 61.16,
61.17 AND 61.19 FOR RAKING PILES: The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
(a) HOLES FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER AND METRE (m) permanent casing installed as instructed by the
RAKE INDICATED) Engineer or shown on the Drawings. The bid rate shall
(b) TEMPORARY CASING FOR DRIVEN METRE (m) include full compensation for supplying and installing
DISPLACEMENT PILE SYSTEMS permanent pile casing.
(DIAMETER AND RAKE INDICATED)
(c) PREFABRICATED PILES (TYPE, SIZE METRE (m) ITEM UNIT
AND RATE INDICATED)
61.29 STEEL REINFORCEMENT IN
CAST IN SITU PILES:
The bid rates shall include full compensation for all
additional work and incidentals for forming the pile (a) MILD-STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
holes or for driving and later extracting the temporary (b) HIGH-YIELD-STRESS-STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
casing, or for installing prefabricated piles to the rake (TYPE INDICATED)
shown.
The unit of measurement for steel bars shall be the
tonne of reinforcement in place in accordance with the
ITEM UNIT Drawings or as authorised.
61.24 FORMING UNDERREAMS FOR NUMBER (no)
PILES OF (DIAMETER INDICATED)

Ties and other steel used for keeping the reinforcing removing all the special plant and equipment required
steel in position shall be measured as steel reinforcing for conducting the load tests on piles. This cost does
under the appropriate Subitem. not vary with the number of load tests to be conducted.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for Payment for this work shall be made by way of a lump
supplying, delivering, cutting, bending, welding, trial sum, 100% of which will be paid after the testing
welds, placing and fixing the steel reinforcing, including assembly has been completely assembled and the first
all tying wires, spacers and waste. load test has been started.
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 61.35 LOAD TESTS ON PILES NUMBER (no)
61.30 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE IN CUBIC (COMPRESSION/TENSION TEST,
3
PILES, UNDERREAMS, BULBOUS BASES METRE (m ) DIAMETER/ SIZE, SPECIFIED
AND SOCKETS (CLASS OF CONCRETE WORKING LOAD INDICATED)
INDICATED)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of load
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of tests conducted on the instruction of the Engineer, for
concrete placed in the cast in situ piles underreams, each specified working load.
bulbous bases and sockets. The quantity shall be
calculated from the nominal pile diameter and length of Test piles, but not anchor piles and anchors, shall be
pile from the founding level to the specified cutting-off measured as specified above for permanent piles.
level, plus the additional quantity of concrete in the Anchor piles and anchors shall be deemed to form part
underream and bulbous base as may be relevant. of the testing equipment under this item.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for The bid rate shall include full compensation for installing
supplying and storing all material, providing all plant, the anchor piles and anchors where necessary;
mixing, transporting, placing and compacting the conducting load tests, and processing and submitting
concrete, curing the concrete and repairing defective the results.
concrete. Payment shall distinguish between the
different classes of concrete.
ITEM UNIT
61.36 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP SUM
ITEM UNIT FOR CORE DRILLING
61.31 EXTRA OVER ITEM 61.30 FOR CUBIC METRE
3
CONCRETE CAST UNDER WATER (m ) The bid lump sum shall include full compensation for
the establishment on the site and subsequently
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of removing all the equipment required for conducting the
concrete cast under water, the quantity being calculated core drilling. This cost does not vary with the quantity of
as for ITEM 61.30. work to be done. This work shall be paid for by way of a
lump sum, 100% of which will become payable when
The bid rate shall include full compensation for all the equipment has been set up at the first location and
additional work, incidentals and extra cement required drilling has started.
for placing the concrete under water.
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 61.37 MOVING THE EQUIPMENT TO AND NUMBER
61.32 SPLICING/COUPLING NUMBER ASSEMBLING IT AT EACH LOCATION (no)
PREFABRICATED PILES FOR (no) WHERE CORES ARE TO BE DRILLED
LENGTHENING(SIZE OF PILE INDICATED)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of locations to which the core-drilling equipment is to be
splices/couplings in prefabricated piles for each size of moved and at which it has to be assembled.
pile. The bid rate shall include full compensation for all
work required for splicing/coupling the piles in The bid rate shall include full compensation for the cost
accordance with the Specifications. of moving and assembling the equipment.
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

61.33 STRIPPING/CUTTING THE PILE NUMBER 61.38 DRILLING THE CORES
HEADS (TYPE AND DIAMETER/SIZE OF (no) (DIAMETER INDICATED) IN:
PILE INDICATED) (a) CONCRETE METRE (m)
(b) FOUNDING FORMATION:
The unit of measurement shall be the number of heads
of each type and diameter/size of pile stripped/cut. (i) IRRESPECTIVE OF HARDNESS METRE (m)
(ii) WITH A HARDNESS OF METRE (m)
The bid rate shall include full compensation for (HARDNESS INDICATED)
providing all tools and stripping/cutting the pile heads.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole
drilled. The bid rate shall include full compensation for
ITEM UNIT drilling, recovering and packing the cores, keeping the
61.34 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP SUM drilling records, providing core boxes, providing and
FOR THE LOAD TESTING OF PILES installing the casings, and backfilling the holes with
grout.
the establishment on the site and subsequently
ITEM UNIT The unit of measurement shall be the number of

61.39 FORMWORK FOR CAISSONS SQUARE caissons provided with cutting edges, irrespective of the
(CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED)
2
METRE (m ) material they have been constructed of.

The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of manufacturing, supplying, delivering and installing the
formwork, and only the area of formwork in contact with complete cutting edge as well as for joining the cutting
the finished face of the concrete shall be measured. edge to the caisson unit. Where the cutting edge is of
Formwork for construction joints shall be measured for concrete and forms part of the bottom element, the bid
payment under Class F1 surface finish but shall be rate shall include full compensation for all additional
measured only for construction joints shown on the work required for completing the element.
Drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for ITEM UNIT
supplying all the materials, erecting the falsework
and formwork, constructing the forms, forming the 61.43 SINKING (DIAMETER/SIZE
grooves, fillets, chamfers, stopends tor construction INDICATED) CAISSONS THROUGH
joints, treating the forms, all accessories, and MATERIAL SITUATED WITHIN THE
stripping and removing the formwork after FOLLOWING SUCCESSIVE DEPTH
completion of the work. Payment for formwork shall RANGES:
be made only after the formwork has been stripped (a) 0 m UP TO 5 m METRE (m)
and the surface finish approved. (b) EXCEEDING 5 m AND UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
The limits of the successive depth ranges shall be
61.40 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR measured down from the firm horizontal base
CAISSONS: (SUBCLAUSE 6114(b)) to the agreed founding level
(a) MILD-STEEL BARS TONNE (t) (CLAUSE 6106).
(b) HIGH-YIELD-STRESS-STEEL BARS (TYPE TONNE (t)
INDICATED) The unit of measurement shall be the metre of caisson
sunk.
The unit of measurement for steel bars shall be the Irrespective of the length of caisson sunk, the quantity
tonne of reinforcement in place in accordance with the for each depth range shall be measured and paid for
Drawings or as may have been authorised. separately.
Ties and other steel used for positioning the reinforcing The bid rates shall include full compensation for
steel shall be measured as steel reinforcing under the locating and holding in position, dewatering, pumping,
appropriate subitem. kentledge and lubricating the sides of the caisson, and
for all work in connection with the sinking of the caisson
The bid rates shall include full compensation for which is not paid for elsewhere.
supplying, delivering, cutting, bending, welding, trial
welding joints, placing and fixing the steel, including all
tying wire, spacers and waste. ITEM UNIT
61.44 EXCAVATION FOR CAISSONS:
ITEM UNIT (a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL
61.41 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE IN CUBIC METRE SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING
CAISSONS AND CONCRETE SEALS
3
(m ) SUCCESSIVE DEPTH RANGES:
(CLASS OF CONCRETE INDICATED) (i) 0 m UP TO 2 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m )
The unit of measurement for cast in situ concrete shall (ii) EXCEEDING 2 m, UP TO 4 m CUBIC
3
be the cubic metre of concrete in place. Concrete METRE (m )
quantities in the caissons shall be calculated from the (iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 2 m CUBIC
3
dimensions shown on the Drawings or authorised by DEPTHS METRE (m )
the Engineer, and the length of the caisson from the (b) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 61.44(a) FOR CUBIC
3
founding level to the specified cut-off level. The quantity EXCAVATION IN ROCK MATERIAL METRE (m )
of concrete in the concrete seal shall be calculated in IRRESPECTIVE OF DEPTH
accordance with the dimensions shown on the
Drawings or authorised by the Engineer. The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be
measured down from the firm horizontal base
The bid rate shall include full compensation for (SUBCLAUSE 6114(b)) to the excavated level inside the
procuring and furnishing all the materials, storing the caisson.
material, providing all plant, mixing, transporting,
placing and compacting the concrete, all sealing, curing The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
the concrete and repairing defective concrete. Payment material, measured in the original position before
shall distinguish between the different classes of excavation. The quantity of excavation for each depth
concrete. range shall be calculated from the gross area of the
caisson in plan and the depth of excavation completed
within each depth range.
ITEM UNIT
61.42 CUTTING EDGE FOR NUMBER (no) Irrespective of the total depth of excavation, the quantity
(DIAMETER/SIZE INDICATED) of material within each depth range shall be measured
CAISSONS and paid for separately. The bid rates shall include full
compensation for excavation in the classified material,
spoiling or stockpiling the material, hauling the
excavated material for the free-haul distance of 1.0 km,
trimming the bottom of the excavation, dewatering, ITEM UNIT

pumping and removing the material leaking into the 61.47 NUCLEAR INTEGRITY TESTING
caisson before sealing. ON BORED PILES:
(a) CONSTRUCTING 5 m LONG NUMBER
ITEM UNIT CALIBRATION PILES OF (INDICATE (no)
DIAMETER)
61.45 FILLING THE CAISSONS CUBIC METRE
3
(m ) (b) INSTALLING 65 mm INTERNAL METRE (m)
DIAMETER STEEL DUCTS IN THE PILES
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of (C) PERFORMING INTEGRITY TESTS USING:
sand placed above the concrete seal in the caisson (i) THE NUCLEAR METHOD NUMBER
compartments. (no)
(ii) THE NEUTRON METHOD NUMBER
The bid rate shall include full compensation for (no)
supplying and placing the sand, transporting the
material and compacting the material as specified. The unit of measurement for SUBITEM (a) shall be the
number of calibration piles constructed. The unit of
No overhaul shall be paid. measurement for Subitem (b) shall be the metre of 65
mm internal diameter steel duct installed. The unit of
measurement for SUBITEM (c) shall be the number of
ITEM UNIT integrity tests performed by each method.
61.46 STRIPPING THE (SIZE OF NUMBER
CAISSON INDICATED) CAISSON HEADS (no) The bid rates shall include full compensation for
procuring and furnishing all materials, constructional
The unit of measurement shall be the number of plant, equipment, labour and incidentals for forming the
caissons of each size stripped. bored holes, constructing the calibration piles, installing
the steel ducts, and performing the prescribed integrity
The bid rate shall include full compensation for cutting tests, complete as specified.
away, trimming and disposing of the concrete removed.
TABLE 6113/1
ROCK CLASSIFICATION
Description of hardness
Unconfined
Class Description Field indicator tests compression
strength (MPa)
R1 Very soft rock Material crumbles under firm (moderate) blows with the sharp 1 to 3
end of geological pick and can be peeled off with a knife, it is
too hard to cut a triaxial sample by hand. SPT refusal.
R2 Soft rock Can just be scraped and peeled with a knife, firm blows of the 3 to 10
pick point leave indentations 2 mm to 4 mm in specimens.
R3 Medium hard rock Cannot be scraped or peeled with a knife; hand-held specimen 10 to 25
can be broken with the hammer end of a geological pick with a
single firm blow.
R4 Hard rock Point load tests shall be conducted for distinguishing between 25 to 70
R5 Very hard rock these categories. These results may be verified by means of 70 to 200
R6 Extremely hard rock uniaxial compressive-strength tests. > 200
Classification after Core Logging Committee, South African Section, Association of Engineering Geologists: "A guide to Core
Logging for Rock Engineering" Bulletin of the Association of Engineering Geologists, Vol. XV, No. 3,1978.

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES surface, and shall also be free from indentations
and warps.
(iii) Void formers
SECTION 6200: FALSEWORK, Void formers used in permanent work shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
FORMWORK AND CONCRETE
Where void formers of a special design are
FINISH required, details thereof will be specified.
CONTENTS: Void formers shall be manufactured from material

which will not leak, tear or be damaged during the
CLAUSE PAGE course of construction and shall be of such tight
6201 SCOPE 6000-20 construction as to prevent undue loss of the mortar
6202 MATERIALS 6000-20 component of the concrete through leakage. The
6203 GENERAL 6000-20 units shall be sufficiently rigid so as not to deform
6204 DESIGN 6000-21 during handling or under the pressure of the wet
6205 CONSTRUCTION 6000-21 concrete.
6206 REMOVING THE FALSEWORK AND
FORMWORK 6000-23 For mild-steel spiral-lock-formed void formers, the
6207 FORMED SURFACES, CLASSES OF metal thickness shall be as follows, unless
FINISH 6000-24 otherwise specified:
6208 REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF FORMED
SURFACES 6000-24 (1) Unbraced void formers
6209 UNFORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF 0.6 mm for diameters of up to 600 mm.
FINISH 6000-25 0.8 mm for diameters exceeding 600 mm and
6210 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6000-25 up to 800 mm.
1.0 mm for diameters exceeding 800 mm and
up to 1000 mm.
6201 SCOPE (2) Braced void formers

This Section covers the design, supply and erection of 0.6 mm for diameters of up to 800 mm.
all falsework and formwork used in the construction of 0.8 mm for diameters exceeding 800 mm and
permanent work. This Section also describes the up to 1000 mm.
classes of surface finishes on formed and unformed 1.0 mm for diameters exceeding 1000 mm and
concrete surfaces. up to 1200 mm.
1.2 mm for diameters exceeding 1200 mm.
The thickness specified for braced void formers

6202 MATERIALS shall apply to formers internally braced with timber
or equivalent braces. The braces shall be at
(a) General
spacings not exceeding 2 m and not further than
The materials used in the construction of falsework and 1.0 m from the end of each unit. Timber cross
formwork shall be suitable for the purpose for which braces shall consist of members with cross-
they are required and be of such quality as to produce
sectional dimensions of at least 50 mm x 50 mm.
the specified standard of work. The type, grade and
condition of the material shall be subject to the All hollow void-former units shall be provided with a
Engineer's approval.
12 mm diameter drainage hole at each end.
(b) Falsework
(iv) Chamfer and recess fillets
The timber structural steel and scaffolding used shall be
Timber fillets used for forming chamfers and
free from defects that may prejudice the stability of the recesses on exposed surfaces shall be made from
falsework. The jacks, devices, clamps and fittings shall new material unless otherwise authorised.
all be in a good working order and of adequate design
and strength. (v) Jack rods for sliding formwork
The jack rods, base plates and couplers shall be
strong enough to carry the design load under all
(c) Formwork
operating conditions without buckling, distorting or
causing damage to the concrete. Jack rods which
(i) Tongue-and-groove boarding
are to remain permanently embedded in the
Tongue and-groove boarding shall be of suitably concrete shall comply with the requirements of
dried timber which will not warp, distort or cause CLAUSES 6303 and 6305. Under no circumstances
discolouration of the concrete. The widths of the
shall bent rods be used in the work.
boards shall be as specified on the Drawings or in
the Bill of Quantities or as prescribed by the The jack rods used shall have a diameter of at least
Engineer. Boards shall be supplied in lengths not
25 mm.
shorter than 3 m.
(ii) Steel forms to exposed surfaces 6203 GENERAL

For classes F2 and F3 surface finish the individual Notwithstanding approval given by the Engineer for the
panels shall be assembled sufficiently rigidly and so design and drawings prepared by the Contractor for the
clamped as not to deform or kick during handling or falsework and formwork, and the acceptance of the
under the pressure of the wet concrete. falsework and formwork as constructed, the Contractor
shall be solely responsible for the safety and adequacy
The surfaces of forms which are to be in contact of the falsework and formwork and shall indemnify and
with the concrete shall be clean, free from deposits keep indemnified the Employer and Engineer against
or adhering matter, ridges or spatter which will any losses claims or damage to persons or property
impart irregularities and blemishes to the concrete whatsoever which may arise out of or in consequence
of the design, construction, use and maintenance of the
falsework and formwork and against all claims,
demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and concrete cast in one operation and the method of
expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation placing and compaction.
thereto.
(ii) Sliding formwork
For Works on, over, under or adjacent to any railway The Contractor shall be responsible for the design
line which is controlled by a Rail Authority, the of the sliding formwork. Prior to fabrication or
Contractor shall comply, inter alia, with the bringing the sliding formwork and any additional
requirements for the preparation and submission of equipment to the site, the Contractor shall submit
drawings for falsework and formwork, and the drawings of the complete sliding- formwork
submission of certificates for the proper construction assembly to the Engineer for approval. The
thereof, all in accordance with the relevant Rail drawings shall show full details of the forms, jacking
Authority Specification. frames, access ladders, hanging platforms, safety
rails and curing skirts as well as details of the jacks
After having constructed the falsework and formwork, and jack layouts.
and prior to placing the reinforcing steel and/or the
concrete, the Contractor shall inspect the falsework and The Contractor shall be required to submit to the
formwork. Dimensions shall be checked, unevenness Engineer, before slide casting commences, an
of surface shall be corrected, and special attention paid, instruction manual in which the sliding techniques,
to the adequacy and tightness of all bolts, ties and jacking procedure, methods of keeping the
bracings as well as to the soundness of the formwork level, the procedure to be adopted to
foundations. prevent bonding of the concrete to the forms and a
method for releasing the forms in the event of
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours bonding, the instrumentation and monitoring of the
notice of his intention to place the concrete to enable slide casting and correcting for verticality, twisting
the Engineer to inspect all aspects of the completed and levelness are described in detail.
work. However, before notifying the Engineer, the
Contractor shall satisfy himself that the work complies The formwork panels shall be inclined to give a
in all respects with the Specifications. small taper, the forms being slightly wider at the
bottom than at the top.
Concrete sections with dimension of smaller than 200
mm shall not be formed with sliding formwork unless The taper shall be so designed as to produce
authorised by the Engineer. specified concrete thickness at the mid-lift level of
the form.
6204 DESIGN The spacing of the jacks with their jack rods shall
be so designed that the dead load of the sliding-
(a) General formwork assembly, the frictional load, and the
The Contractor's design and drawings of the falsework mass of materials, personnel and equipment will be
and formwork shall comply amongst others with all evenly distributed and within the design capacity of
statutory requirements. the jacks used.
The Engineer may require the Contractor to submit to

him for consideration and approval the design and 6205 CONSTRUCTION
drawings of the falsework and formwork for any
structure. The Contractor shall submit his design criteria (a) Falsework
and calculations and detail drawings of the falsework Falsework shall be erected in accordance with the
and formwork to the Engineer at least 14 days before approved drawings incorporating such modifications as
the Engineer's approval is required. required by the Engineer.
(b) Falsework The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent

The Contractor shall make his own assessment of the deterioration of the foundations during the course of
allowable bearing pressure on the foundation material construction.
and shall design the footings and falsework to prevent
overloading, differential settlement and unacceptable The falsework shall incorporate features which will
overall settlement. In assessing the allowable bearing permit adjustment to the alignment of the formwork to
pressure, due account shall be taken of the effect of neutralise the elected settlement and deflection under
wetting on the foundation material. load.
In designing the falsework, cognisance shall also be

taken of the redistribution of load which may occur on (b) Formwork
account of the effect of temperature, wind force, the
prestressing of curved and skewed structures, stage (i) General
construction, flooding and debris. The formwork for bridge decks shall be erected to
levels calculated from the information given on the
Particular attention shall be given to providing plans for roadworks and bridges. The levels shall
transverse and diagonal bracing as well as rib stiffeners be adapted to make provision for the specified
on cross bearers. precamber as well as for the expected deflection
and settlement of the fully loaded falsework and
formwork. The levels shall be set out and checked
(c) Formwork at intervals not exceeding 2.5 m.
(i) General For constructing the formwork, the Contractor may,

Formwork shall be so designed as to be sufficiently subject to the provisions of CLAUSE 6202, use any
rigid to ensure that the specified dimensional material suitable for and compatible with the class
tolerances can be achieved under the combined of surface finish and dimensional tolerances
action of self-weight, dead load and imposed loads specified for the particular member.
as well as the additional loads resulting from the
rate of concreting, the layer thickness of the
Formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the construction of the formwork shall permit its
forms in their correct position, shape and profile and complete removal to form the open joint.
shall be of such tight construction that the concrete
can be placed and compacted without undue loss No solvent shall be used to remove formwork
or leakage of the mortar component of the concrete. unless approved by the Engineer.
The joints between contiguous formwork elements (iv) Openings and wall chases
shall be of a tight fit and, where necessary, the Openings and wall chases shall be provided only
joints shall be caulked, taped or packed with a where indicated on the Drawings or as authorised
sealing gasket, all at no extra payment if undue by the Engineer. Frames for openings shall be rigid
leakage occurs or can be expected. Paper, cloth or and firmly secured in position to prevent their
similar material shall not be used for this purpose. moving. Temporary holes shall be so formed that
they will not create an irregular pattern in relation to
The formwork construction shall permit accurate the rest of the exposed formed concrete surface.
erection and easy stripping without shock,
disturbance or damage to the cast concrete. Where
necessary, the formwork assembly shall permit the (v) Sliding formwork
removal or release of side forms independently of
the soffit forms. (1) Plant and equipment
Unless otherwise specified in the Special
Metal supports, ties, hangers and accessories Specifications, hoisting equipment for sliding
embedded in the concrete shall be removed to a formwork, which operates stepwise with upward
depth of not less than the cover specified for the movements of between 10 mm and 100 mm will
reinforcement. No wire ties shall be used. be acceptable. However, the use of linked
hydraulic or pneumatic jacks is preferable,
All external corners shall be chamfered by fillet which are reversible and driven by an
strips being fixed into the corners of the formwork to electrically operated pump, and which can hoist
form 25 mm x 25 mm chamfers. Re-entrant angles at a steady rate. The jacks shall have
need not be chamfered unless specified. independent controls for regulating verticality
and levelness. The jacking system shall ensure
Where polystyrene or similar material, susceptible that the sliding-formwork assembly can be
to damage is used, it shall be lined with a hard hoisted evenly.
surface on the side to be concreted. The hard
material shall be sufficiently resilient to ensure that The use of hoisting systems which operate
the required quality of work can be achieved. without jack rods shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
Where it is specified, all formwork ties shall be
provided with recoverable truncated cones between All equipment shall be thoroughly tested and
sleeve ends and formwork faces to ensure that inspected before installation and shall be
sleeve ends are not explosed on concrete surfaces. maintained in a good working order throughout
The cones shall have a minimum depth of 15 mm. the entire sliding operation.
(ii) Formwork to enclosed surfaces The Contractor shall keep adequate back-up
The formwork and boards shall be so arranged as plant, equipment and quantities of materials on
to form a uniform and regular pattern in line with the site to ensure that the slide casting can
and perpendicular to the main axis of the member, proceed without interruption.
unless otherwise approved or directed by the
Engineer. (2) Instrumentation and monitoring
The Contractor shall supply and install suitable
Joints between contiguous members shall, after instrumentation on the sliding platform and
caulking, taping or sealing, be treated to prevent foundations and against the sides of the
blemishes, stains and undue marks from being structure for monitoring the height, verticality,
imparted to the concrete surface. levelness and twisting at regular distances. The
equipment used, its utilisation and the
Bolt and tie positions shall be so arranged that they frequency of recording any readings shall be
conform to the symmetry of the formwork panels or approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
boards. Bolt and rivet heads which will be in contact be responsible for all monitoring work and shall
with the formed surface shall be of the countersunk ensure that records of all readings and
type and shall be treated to prevent marks from measurements taken are filed systematically
forming on the concrete surface. and are at all times available to the Engineer
and the person in control of the sliding
The formwork at construction joints shall be braced operation.
to prevent steps from forming in the concrete
surfaces at the joints between successive stages of Unless otherwise specified, the verticality of the
construction. Where moulding or recess strips are structure shall be controlled with laser
specified, they shall be neatly butted or mitred. alignment apparatus or optical plummets and
the levelness of the sliding forms with a water-
(iii) Formwork for open joints level system with reference control points
The requirements for formwork for open joints shall, placed at strategic locations.
unless otherwise specified, apply only to cases
where the distance between opposite concrete Height and verticality shall be monitored at
surfaces is equal to or less than 150 mm. intervals not exceeding four hours. The
readings shall be plotted immediately on
Formwork for open joints shall be constructed to graphs. When the structure is more than 10mm
produce a Class F1 surface finish to concealed out of vertical, the Engineer shall be notified
surfaces or a Class F2 or F3 surface finish immediately.
corresponding to the in-plane surface finish of the
bordering concrete surfaces. The material used and

(3) Supervision them slightly every 10 minutes, or alternatively,

During the entire period of the sliding operation where reversible jacks are used, by lowering
a competent person who is fully acquainted with the forms by 10 mm to 25 mm. Wherever
the sliding technique and the Contractor's interruptions occur, emergency construction
methods of construction shall be in attendance joints shall be formed and treated in
on the sliding platform and in control of the accordance with CLAUSE 6408. Before
sliding operations. concreting is restarted, the form shall be
adjusted to fit snugly onto the hardened
(4) Construction concrete so as to prevent steps from being
The jacking frame shall be constructed with formed on the exposed concrete surface. When
adequate clearance between the underside of slide casting is recommenced, care shall be
the cross members and top of the formwork to taken to prevent the fresh concrete from being
allow the horizontal reinforcement and lifted off from the old concrete.
embedded items to be correctly installed. A
control procedure shall be agreed on by the (vi) Permanent formwork
Contractor and the Engineer to ensure that all Void formers shall be secured in position at regular
the reinforcement is placed. At all times there intervals to prevent displacement and distortion
shall be horizontal reinforcement above the during concreting. The void formers shall be
level of the top of the formwork panel. supported on precast concrete blocks or rigid
welded steel cradles, all subject to approval by the
Guides shall be provided to ensure that the Engineer. The ties securing the void formers shall
vertical reinforcement can be correctly placed be attached to the formwork and cross bearers of
and the specified concrete cover over the the falsework. The void formers shall not be tied to
reinforcement maintained. or supported on the reinforcement.
Where the jack rods are to be recovered, Fibre-cement plates shall be supported so that the
adequate precautions shall be taken in respect plate spans in the direction parallel to the
of their removal without damage being caused orientation of the asbestos fibres.
to the concrete.
(vii) Preparing the formwork
Where jack rods occur at openings or wall The surfaces of forms which are to be in contact
chases, adequate lateral support shall be with fresh (wet) concrete shall be treated to ensure
provided to prevent their buckling. Equipment non-adhesion of the concrete to the forms and easy
and material shall be so distributed on the release from the concrete during the stripping of the
working platforms that the load will be evenly formwork.
distributed over the jacks.
Release agents shall be applied strictly in
Guard plates shall be provided at the tops of accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
the forms to the outside walls to prevent the and every precaution shall be taken to avoid the
concrete from falling down the outside. contamination of the reinforcement prestressing
tendons and anchorages. In the selection of release
The framework, forms and platforms shall be agents, due regard shall be given to the necessity
regularly cleared and the accumulation thereon for maintaining a uniform colour and appearance
of redundant concrete prevented. throughout on the exposed concrete surfaces.
The Contractor shall take all precautions to Before the concrete is placed, all dirt and foreign
prevent contamination of the concrete by matter shall be removed from the forms and the
leaking oil or other causes. forms shall be thoroughly wetted with water.
(5) The sliding process 6206 REMOVING THE FALSEWORK AND

The Contractor shall give the Engineer 24 FORMWORK
hours' notice of his intention to commence with
Falsework and formwork shall not be removed before
slide casting. Permission to commence with the
the concrete has attained sufficient strength to support
sliding shall not be given by the Engineer
its own mass and any loads which may be imposed on
before the sliding-formwork assembly is fully
it. This condition shall be assumed to require the
operative and the complete stock of all
formwork to remain in place after the concrete has been
materials required for the slide casting as well
placed, for the appropriate minimum period of time
as back-up plant and equipment are on the site.
given in TABLES 6206/1 to 6206/3, unless the Contractor
can prove, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that
The Contractor shall ensure that the rate of
shorter periods are sufficient to fulfil this condition. In
sliding is such that the concrete at the bottom of
such case the formwork may be removed after the
the formwork has obtained sufficient strength to
shorter periods of time agreed on by the Engineer.
support itself and all loads which may be placed
on the concrete at the time, and that the
concrete does not adhere to the sides of the
forms.
The slide-casting operation shall be continuous,

without any interruptions, until the full height of
the structure has been reached, and shall be
geared and organised so as to maintain an
average rate of sliding of 350 mm per hour.
(6) Interruptions
When the sliding operations are delayed for
more than 45 minutes, the Contractor shall
prevent adhesion of the setting concrete to the
formwork panels by easing the forms or moving

TABLE 6206/1 supporting formwork shall be removed as specified or

REMOVING FALSEWORK AND FRAMEWORK - ORDINARY authorised.
PORTLAND CEMENT
On prestressed-concrete structures the falsework and
Falsework and formwork Days supporting formwork shall be removed after the full
for: Normal Cold prestressing face relating to the particular stage of
weather weather construction has been applied, unless otherwise
specified or authorised.
Beam sides, walls and 1 1.5
unloaded columns
Soffits of slabs and beams 6207 FORMED SURFACES, CLASSES OF
− Spans up to 3 m 4 7 FINISH
− Spans 3 m to 6 m 10 17
− Spans 6 m to 12 m 14 24
(a) General
− Spans over 12 m 21 30
In addition to complying with the tolerances specified in
CLAUSE 6803, the surface finish on formed concrete
surfaces shall also comply with the following
TABLE 6206/2 requirements.
REMOVING FALSEWORK AND FRAMEWORK - RAPID (b) Class F1 surface finish
HARDENING ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT After repair work has been done to surface defects in
accordance with SUBCLAUSE 6208(b), no further
Falsework and formwork Days treatment of the as-stripped finish will be required. This
for: Normal Cold *) finish is required on concealed formed surfaces.
weather weather
(c) Class F2 surface finish
Beam sides, walls and 0.5 1
unloaded columns This finish shall be equivalent to that obtained from the
use of square-edged timber panels and boards wrought
Soffits of slabs and beams to the correct thickness, or shutter boards or steel forms
− Spans up to 3 m 2 4 arranged in a regular pattern. This finish is intended to
− Spans 3 m to 6 m 5 10 be left as struck but surface defects shall be remedied
− Spans 6 m to 12 m 10 18 in accordance with SUBCLAUSE 6208(b). Although minor
− Spans over 12 m 18 28 surface blemishes and slight discolourations will be
*) Shorter periods may be used for sections thicker permitted, large blemishes and severe stains and
than 300 mm on approval of the Engineer. discolouration shall be repaired where so directed by
the Engineer.
TABLE 6206/3 (d) Class F3 surface finish

REMOVING FALSEWORK AND FRAMEWORK – CEMENTS This finish shall be that obtained by first producing a
WITH MORE THAN 15% BLAST FURNACE SLAG OR FLYASH
Class F2 surface finish with joint marks which form an
approved regular pattern to fit in with the appearance of
Falsework and formwork Days the structure. All projections shall then be removed,
for: irregularities repaired and the surface rubbed or treated
Normal Cold to form a smooth finish of uniform texture, appearance
weather weather and colour. This surface finish is required on all
Beam sides, walls and 2 4 exposed formed surfaces unless a Class F2 finish is
unloaded columns specified.
Soffits of slabs and beams
− Spans up to 3 m 6 10 Unless specified to the contrary, steel forms may be
14 24 used to form surfaces with a Class F3 surface finish.
− Spans 3 m to 6 m
− Spans 6 m to 12 m 21 28
28 36 (e) Board surface finish
− Spans over 12 m This finish shall be that obtained by using tongue-and-
groove timber boarding arranged in an approved
Falsework and formwork shall be carefully removed regular pattern. The finish is intended to be left as
without exposing the cast concrete to damage, struck but surface defects shall be remedied in
disturbance or shock. accordance with SUBCLAUSE 6208(b) and large fins
trimmed where directed by the Engineer.
Weather may be regarded as being 'normal" when
atmospheric temperatures adjacent to the concrete, as (f) Protecting the surfaces
measured by a maximum-and-minimum thermometer, The Contractor shall ensure that permanently enclosed
0
do not fall below 15 C, and as "cold" when concrete surfaces are protected from rust marks,
0
temperatures, similarly measured, fall below 5 C. When spillage and stains of all kinds and other damage during
the minimum temperatures fall between these values, construction.
the length of the period after which the formwork may
be removed, shall be between the periods specified for
normal and cold weather.
6208 REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF FORMED
Any period during which the temperature remains below SURFACES
0
2 C shall be disregarded in calculating the minimum
time which shall elapse before the forms are removed. (a) General
Agreement shall be reached between the Engineer and
On continuously reinforced concrete structures the the Contractor regarding any remedial treatment to be
falsework and supporting formwork shall not be given after the surfaces have been inspected
removed before the concrete of the last pour has immediately after the formwork has been removed,
reached the appropriate minimum age given in TABLE which treatment shall be carried out without delay. No
6206/1 or the appropriate minimum strength. Where the surfaces may be treated before inspection by the
structure is constructed in stages, the falsework and Engineer.

(b) Repairs to surface defects (b) Class U2 surface finish (floated)

Surface defects such as small areas of honeycombing, This surface finish is required on sidewalks, the tops of
cavities produced by form ties, large isolated blow- wing walls and retaining walls, exposed concrete
holes, broken corner edges, etc, shall be repaired with shoulders and unsurfaced areas on bridge decks, and
mortar having a cement and sand ratio equal to that of the inverts of box culverts.
the concrete being repaired.
The surface shall first be given a Class U1 surface
For the repair of large or deep areas of honeycombing finish and after the concrete has hardened sufficiently, it
and defects, special approved methods and techniques, shall be wood-floated to a uniform surface free from
such as pneumatically applied mortar pressure trowel marks. For non-skid surfaces such as on
grouting, epoxy bonding agents, etc, may be used. sidewalk's and bridge decks, the surface shall then be
given a broom finish. The corrugations so produced
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the extent of the shall be approximately 1.0 mm deep, uniform of
honeycombing or defects is of such a degree that doubt appearance and width and shall be perpendicular to the
exists about the effectiveness of repair work, the centre line of the pavement.
Contractor shall at his own cost perform a load test in
accordance with SUBCLAUSE 6414(b) to prove that the (c) Class U3 surface finish (smoothly finished)
structural safety of the repaired member has not been This surface finish shall be required at bearing areas
prejudiced. failing which, the structure shall be rebuilt in and the tops of concrete railings. The surface shall first
part or in full at the Contractor's cost. be given a Class U1 surface finish, and after the
concrete has hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated
Where the concrete has been damaged by adhesion to with a steel float to a smooth surface to within the
the formwork panel, the cracked and loose concrete dimensional tolerances specified in SUBCLAUSE
shall be removed; or where the fresh concrete has lifted 6803(h).
off at construction joints, the crack shall be scraped out
immediately on both sides of the wall to a depth of at Rubbing with carborundum stone after the concrete has
least 50 mm. The cavities so formed shall then be hardened shall be allowed but under no circumstances
repaired as described above. will plastering of the surface be permitted.
(c) Rubbing the surfaces

If the finish of exposed formed surfaces does not 6210 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
comply with the requirements for uniformity of texture,
appearance and colour, the Contractor shall, when so ITEM UNIT
instructed by the Engineer, rub down the exposed
surfaces of the entire structure or of any part of it as 62.01 FORMWORK TO PROVIDE (CLASS SQUARE
2
OF FINISH INDICATED AS F1, F2, F3 METRE (m )
specified below.
OR BOARD) SURFACE FINISH TO
The surface shall be saturated with water for at least (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER TO WHICH
APPLICABLE)
one hour. Initial rubbing shall be done with a medium-
coarse carborundum stone, where a small amount of
mortar, having a sand and cement ratio equal to that of
the concrete being repaired is used on the surface. ITEM UNIT
Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, 62.02 VERTICAL FORMWORK TO SQUARE
projections and irregularities have been removed and a PROVIDE (CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED
2
METRE (m )
uniform surface has been obtained. The paste AS F1, F2, F3 OR BOARD) SURFACE
produced by the rubbing shall be left in place. The final FINISH TO (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER
rubbing shall be carried out with a fine carborundum TO WHICH APPLICABLE)
stone and water. This rubbing shall continue until the
entire surface is of a smooth, even texture and is
uniform in colour. The surface shall then be washed
ITEM UNIT
with a brush to remove surplus paste and powder.
62.03 HORIZONTAL FORMWORK TO SQUARE
2
Where the concrete surfaces formed by sliding PROVIDE (CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED METRE (m )
formwork require treatment to achieve the surface finish AS F1, F2, F3 OR BOARD) SURFACE
specified for the member, the concrete shall, as soon as FINISH TO (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER
the surfaces under the formwork are exposed, be TO WHICH APPLICABLE)
floated with rubber- lined floats to the desired finish.
ITEM UNIT
6209 UNFORMED SURFACES: CLASSES OF 62.04 INCLINED FORMWORK TO SQUARE
2
FINISH PROVIDE (CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED METRE (m )
AS F1, F2, F3 OR BOARD) SURFACE
(a) Class U1 surface finish (rough) FINISH TO (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER
This surface finish is required on those portions of TO WHICH APPLICABLE)
bridge decks or culvert decks which are to receive
bituminous or concrete surfacing or which are to be The unit of measurement shall be the square metre,
covered by backfilling material. and only the actual area of formwork in contact with the
finished face of the concrete shall be measured.
Where the placing and compacting of the concrete have Formwork for the different classes of finish shall be
been completed as specified in CLAUSE 6407, the top measured separately. Formwork for construction joints
surface shall be screeded off with a template to the shall be measured for payment under Class F1 surface
required cross-section and tamped with a tamping finish, but only formwork for mandatory construction
board to compact the surface thoroughly and to bring joints shall be measured for payment.
mortar to the surface, so as to leave the surface slightly
rough but generally at the required elevation. The bid rates shall include full compensation for
procuring and furnishing all materials required, erecting
the falsework and formwork, constructing the forms,

forming the grooves, fillets, chamfers and stop-ends for ITEM UNIT
construction joints, treating and preparing the forms, all 62.08 TRANSPORTING TO AND SETTING NUMBER
bolts, nuts, ties, struts and stays, stripping and UP THE SLIDING FORMWORK ASSEMBLY (no)
removing the formwork after completion of the work, all AT (DESCRIPTION OF EACH STRUCTURE)
labour, equipment and incidentals, and rubbing and
surface treatment. Payment of 80% of the amount due
for formwork will be made when the formwork has been The unit of measurement shall be the number of
removed, and payment of the remaining 20% will be structures to which the complete sliding-formwork
made on approval of the concrete surface finish. assembly has to be transported and set up in position
ready to be commissioned.
Note: Vertical and horizontal formwork shall be the
formwork of which inclination of the finishing surface in The bid rate shall include full compensation for all costs
relation to the horizontal level shall be larger and involved in dismantling, transporting and erecting of the
0
smaller than 40 respectively. Inclined formwork shall complete sliding-formwork assembly.
be the formwork described as such in the Bill of
Quantities.
ITEM UNIT
62.09 FORMING THE CONCRETE BY METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT SLIDING FORMWORK FOR
62.05 PERMANENT FORMWORK SQUARE (DESCRIPTION OF EACH STRUCTURE
2 AND CLASS OF SURFACE FINISH TO
(DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER TO WHICH METRE (m )
APPLICABLE) EXPOSED SURFACES INDICATED)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of The unit of measurement shall be the metre height of
concrete area formed with permanent formwork. each structure formed by sliding formwork. The quantity
measured shall be the actual height of each structure
The bid rates shall include full compensation for formed by the sliding technique.
procuring and furnishing all the materials required,
installing the formwork, and labour, equipment and The bid rate shall include full compensation for sliding,
incidentals. instrumentation and monitoring, the maintenance of the
complete sliding-formwork assembly, plant and
equipment, supplying, installing and recovering the jack
ITEM UNIT rods, floating, repairing and treating the concrete
surfaces, forming the emergency construction joints,
62.06 FORMWORK TO FORM OPEN SQUARE and all labour, equipment and incidentals.
JOINTS (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER TO METRE
2
WHICH APPLICABLE, AND LOCATION) (m )

concrete area formed.
Surfaces formed prior to the construction of the final

surface for completing the joint, shall be measured
under ITEMS 62.01, 62.02, 62.03 or 62.04, as may be
applicable.

procuring and furnishing all the materials required,
constructing the formwork and subsequently removing
all the material within the joint space, as well as labour,
equipment and incidentals. Payment for formwork to
open joints shall be made only after the forms and filler
material have been completely removed and approval
of the surface finish has been obtained.
ITEM UNIT
62.07 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE FOR LUMP SUM
SLIDING FORMWORK OPERATIONS

the establishment on the site and the subsequent
removal of the complete sliding-formwork assembly,
special plant and equipment, and incidentals for the
sliding work, the cost of which does not vary with the
actual amount of sliding work done.
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 75% of

which will become payable when the sliding-formwork
assembly, plant and equipment have been fully installed
at the first structural member on the site, and the
remaining 25% will become payable after all sliding
work has been completed and the said items have been
removed from the site.

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES bending is approved, the bars shall be heated slowly to
0
a cherry-red heat (not exceeding 840 C) and shall be
allowed to cool slowly in air after bending. Quenching
SECTION 6300: STEEL REIN- with water shall not be permitted.
FORCEMENT FOR STRUCTURES Already bent reinforcing bars shall not be re-bent at the
same spot without authorisation.
CONTENTS:
6305 SURFACE CONDITION
CLAUSE PAGE When the concrete is placed around the reinforcing
6301 SCOPE 6000-27 steel and/or dowels, the reinforcing steel and/or dowels
6302 MATERIALS 6000-27 shall be clean, free from mud, oil, grease, paint, loose
6303 STORING THE MATERIALS 6000-27 rust, loose mill scale or any other substance which
6304 BENDING THE REINFORCING STEEL 6000-27 could have an adverse chemical effect on the steel or
6305 SURFACE CONDITION 6000-27 concrete, or which could reduce the strength of bond.
6306 PLACING AND FIXING 6000-27
6307 COVER AND SUPPORTS 6000-27 6306 PLACING AND FIXING
6308 LAPS AND JOINTS 6000-28 Reinforcement shall be positioned as shown on the
6309 WELDING 6000-28 Drawings and shall be firmly secured in position within
6310 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6000-28 the tolerance given in SUBCLAUSE 6803(f) by being tied
with 1.6 mm or 1.25 mm diameter annealed wire or by
suitable clips being used, or, where authorised, by tack
welding. Any cover and spacer blocks required to
6301 SCOPE support the reinforcement shall be as small as may be
This Section covers the furnishing and placing of consistent with their use and shall be of an approved
reinforcing steel in concrete structures. material and design.
The concrete cover over the projecting ends of ties or

6302 MATERIALS clamps shall comply with the specifications for concrete
cover over reinforcement detailed in TABLE 6306/1 at
(a) Steel bars the end of the Section.
Steel reinforcing bars shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4449 or equivalent on the approval Where protruding bars are exposed to the elements for
of the Engineer unless where otherwise noted on the an indefinite period, the bars shall be adequately
Drawings. For each consignment of steel reinforcement protected against corrosion and damage and shall be
delivered on the site, the Contractor shall submit a properly cleaned before being permanently encased in
certificate issued by a recognised testing authority to concrete.
confirm that the steel complies with the specified
requirements. In members which are formed with sliding formwork,
spacer ladders for placing and fixing the wall
(b) Welded steel fabric reinforcement shall be used at spacings indicated on
Welded steel fabric shall comply with the requirements the Drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer. The
of AASHTO M55 or equivalent on approval of the spacer ladders shall consist of two bars 3.7 m in length
Engineer. The grade of wire shall be W4 in accordance with ties 4 mm in diameter welded to them to resemble
with AASHTO M32 or equivalent on approval of the a ladder. The ties shall be spaced at multiples of the
Engineer unless where otherwise noted on the horizontal bar spacing in the wall, and shall be used to
Drawings. The grid shall be 100 mm x 100 mm unless secure the horizontal reinforcement. The laps in the
where otherwise noted on the Drawings. horizontal reinforcement shall be staggered to ensure
that no part of two laps in any four consecutive layers
(c) Mechanical couplers lie in the same vertical plane.
All mechanical couplers used shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The tensile properties 6307 COVER AND SUPPORTS
determined on a test sample which consists of The term "cover" in this context shall mean the
reinforcing bars butt-jointed by a mechanical coupler minimum thickness of concrete between the surface of
shall comply with requirements as given in the Special the reinforcement and the face of the concrete.
Specifications.
The minimum cover shall be as shown on the Drawings.
6303 STORING THE MATERIALS Where no cover is indicated, the minimum cover
Reinforcing steel shall be stacked off the ground and, in provided shall be at least equal to the appropriate
aggressive environments, shall be stored under cover. values shown in TABLE 6306/1 at the end of the
Section.
6304 BENDING THE REINFORCING STEEL The cover shall be increased by the expected depth of
Reinforcement shall be cut or cut and bent to the any surface treatment, e.g. when concrete is bush
dimensions shown on the bending schedules and in hammered or when rebates are provided.
accordance with BS 4466 or as prescribed by the
Engineer. Additional cover as prescribed by the Engineer shall be
provided if porous aggregates are used.
No flame-cutting of high-tensile steel bars shall be
permitted except when authorised. The cover blocks or spacers required for ensuring that
the specified cover is obtained shall be of a material,
All bars with less than 32 mm in diameter shall be bent
shape and design acceptable to the Engineer.
cold and bending shall be done slowly, a steady, even
pressure being exerted without jerking or impact. Concrete spacer blocks shall be made with 5 mm
maximum sized aggregate and shall be of the same
If approved, the hot bending of bars of at least 32 mm in strength and material source as those of the
diameter will be permitted, provided that the bars do not surrounding concrete. The blocks shall be formed in
depend on cold working for their strength. When hot
specially manufactured moulds and the concrete The unit of measurement for welded steel fabric shall
compacted on a vibratory table, and cured under water be the tonne of welded steel fabric in place, the quantity
for a period of at least 14 days, all to the satisfaction of of which shall be calculated from the area of the mesh
the Engineer. used in accordance with the Drawings or as authorised.
Ties cast into spacer blocks shall not extend deeper Ties, stools and other steel used for positioning the
into the spacer block than half the depth of the spacer reinforcing steel shall be measured as steel
block. reinforcement under the appropriate Subitem.
The Contractor shall provide stools as shown on the The bid rates shall include full compensation for
Drawings, or where they are not detailed on the supplying, delivering, cutting, bending, welding, trial
Drawings, wherever the Engineer requires them to be weld joints, placing and fixing the steel reinforcement,
installed. The stools shall be suitably robust, and fixed including all tying wire, spacers and waste.
securely so that they can not swivel or move. The stools
shall have sufficient strength to perform the required
functions, taking into account amongst others
temporary loads such as the weight of workmen and
wet concrete, and forces caused by vibrators and other
methods of compacting the concrete.
6308 LAPS AND JOINTS

Laps, joints, splices and mechanical couplings shall be
applied only by the specified methods and at the
positions shown on the Drawings or as authorised.
6309 WELDING
Reinforcement shall be welded only where shown on
the Drawings or as authorised.
Flash butt welding shall be done only with the

combination of flashing, heating, upsetting and
annealing to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and only
those machines which control this cycle of operations
automatically shall be used.
Metal-arc welding of reinforcement shall be done in

accordance with BS 5135, and with the
recommendations of the reinforcement manufacturers,
subject to approval by the Engineer and the satisfactory
performance of trial joints. Hot-rolled high-yield-stress
0 0
steel shall be preheated to between 240 C and 280 C
and low-hydrogen electrodes only may be used.
Trial welding joints shall be made on the site in

circumstances similar to those which will govern during
the making of production welding joints by the person
who will be responsible for the production welding
joints.
Other methods of welding eg resistance welding, may

be used subject to approval by the Engineer and to their
satisfactory performance in trial joints.
Welded joints shall be full-strength welds and their

strength shall be assessed by destruction tests on
samples selected by the Engineer.

ITEM UNIT
63.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR:
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF PORTION OF
STRUCTURE TO WHICH APPLICABLE):
(i) MILD STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
(ii) HIGH-YIELD-STRESS-STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
(TYPE INDICATED)
(iii) WELDED STEEL FABRIC TONNE (t)
(b) ETC FOR OTHER STRUCTURES OR TONNE (t)
PARTS OF STRUCTURES
The unit of measurement for steel bars shall be the

tonne of reinforcing steel in place in accordance with
the Drawings or as authorised.

TABLE 6306/1
MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER OVER REINFORCEMENT
Condition of exposure Description of members/surface to which the Min cover

cover applies (mm)
Class of concrete
20 25 30 40 50
1. MODERATE:: 1.1 Surfaces protected by the superstructure, viz.

Concrete surfaces above the sides of beams and the undersides of
ground level and protected slabs and other surfaces not likely to be
against alternately wet and moistened by condensation 50 45 40 35 25
dry conditions caused by
water, rain and sea-water 1.2 Surfaces protected by a waterproof cover or
spray permanent formwork not likely to be
subjected to weathering or corrosion 50 45 40 35 25
1.3 Enclosed surfaces 50 45 40 35 25
1.4 Structures/members permanently submerged 50 45 40 35 25
1.5 Railway structures:

(i) Surfaces of precast elements not in
contact with soil NA NA NA 30 30
(ii) Surfaces protected by permanent
formwork not likely to be subjected to
weathering or corrosion NA 30 30 30 30
(iii) Surfaces in contact with ballast NA 55 50 50 45
(iv) All other surfaces NA 50 40 40 35
2. SEVERE: 2.1 All exposed surfaces NA 50 45 40 35

Concrete surfaces 2.2 Surfaces on which condensation takes place NA 50 45 40 35
exposed to hard rain and 2.3 Surfaces in contact with soil NA 50 45 40 35
alternately wet and dry 2.4 Surfaces permanently under running water NA 50 45 40 35
conditions 2.5 Railway structures:
(i) Surfaces of precast elements not in
contact with soil NA NA NA 30 30
(ii) Surfaces protected by permanent
formwork not likely to be subjected to
weathering or corrosion NA 30 30 30 30
(iii) Surfaces in contact with ballast NA 55 50 50 45
(iv) All other surfaces NA 50 40 40 35
2.6 Cast in situ piles:

(i) Wet cast against casing 50 50 50 50 50
(ii) Wet cast against soil 75 75 75 75 75
(iii) Dry cast against soil 75 75 75 75 75
3. VERY SEVERE: 3.1 All exposed surfaces of structures within

Concrete surfaces 30km from the sea NA NA NA 60 50
exposed to aggressive
water, sea-water spray or a 3.2 Surfaces in rivers polluted by industries NA NA NA 60 50
saline atmosphere
3.3 Cast in situ piles, wet cast against casings NA NA NA 80 80
4. EXTREME: 4.1 Surfaces in contact with sea water or

Concrete surfaces industrially polluted water NA NA NA 65 65
exposed to the abrasive
action of sea water or very 4.2 Surfaces in contact with marshy conditions NA NA NA 65 55
aggressive water

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES (2) For use in other reinforced concrete members
the shrinkage of the fine aggregate shall not
exceed 175% and of the coarse aggregate
SECTION 6400: CONCRETE FOR 150% of that of the reference aggregate.
STRUCTURES (3) For use in mass concrete substructures and

unreinforced concrete head walls and wing
CONTENTS: walls, the shrinkage of both the fine and coarse
aggregate shall not exceed 200% of that of the
CLAUSE PAGE reference aggregate.
6401 SCOPE 6000-30
6402 MATERIALS 6000-30 Where there is any doubt about the shrinkage
6403 STORING THE MATERIALS 6000-31 characteristics of aggregates, the Contractor shall
6404 CONCRETE QUALITY 6000-31 submit a certificate by an approved laboratory
6405 MEASURING THE MATERIALS 6000-32 which gives the shrinkage characteristics of the
6406 MIXING 6000-33 aggregate.
6407 PLACING AND COMPACTING 6000-33
6408 CONSTRUCTIQN JOINTS 6000-34 The drying shrinkage of concrete samples made
6409 CURING AND PROTECTING 6000-35 from each of the required three concrete mixtures
6410 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS 6000-35 for preparing the compressive-strength and flexural-
6411 PIPES AND CONDUITS 6000-36 strength samples shall not exceed 0.04%.
6412 APPLIED LOADING 6000-36
6413 PRECAST CONCRETE 6000-36 (ii) The flakiness index of the stone as determined by
6414 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND CML Method 2.4 shall not exceed 35%.
WORKMANSHIP 6000-36
6415 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF (iii) Aggregates shall not contain any deleterious
EXISTING STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 6000-36 amounts of organic materials such as grass, timber
6416 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6000-37 or similar materials.
(iv) Where there is any danger of a particular

combination of aggregate and cement giving rise to
a harmful alkali-aggregate reaction, the particular
6401 SCOPE combination shall be tested in accordance with the
This Section covers the manufacture, transport, placing relevant testing methods as described in CLAUSE
and testing of concrete used in the Works where plain,
7502, and, where the result points to such reaction,
reinforced or prestressed concrete is specified. either the aggregate or the cement or both shall be
replaced so that an acceptable combination may be
obtained.
6402 MATERIALS
(v) The fineness modulus of the tine aggregate shall
(a) Cement not vary by more than ±0.2 from the approved
Cement used for concrete shall be any of the following: modulus.
(i) Ordinary Portland cement or rapid-hardening (c) Plums

Portland cement complying with the requirements of Plums used in concrete shall comply with the following
TZS 177:1999, BS 12 of the latest issue or
equivalent standard on approval of the Engineer. (i) The plums shall be clean, durable and inert.
(ii) Portland blast-furnace cement complying with the (ii) The aggregate crushing value may not exceed
requirements of AASHTO M240-97 or equivalent 25%.
standard on approval of the Engineer.
(iii) The mass of each plum shall be between 15 kg and
(ii) Sulphate-resistant cement, but only where shown 55 kg.
on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
(iv) No dimension of any plum shall be less than 150
(iv) In prestressed concrete members or units the use mm or exceed 500 mm.
of Portland blast-furnace cement will not be
permitted. A 50/50 mixture of ordinary Portland (d) Water
cement and ground granulated blast-furnace slag Water shall be clean and free from detrimental
may be used only if authorised in the Special concentrations of acids, alkalis, salts, sugar and other
Specifications or by the Engineer, in writing. organic or chemical substances that could impair the
durability and strength of the concrete or the imbedded
(b) Aggregates steel. The Contractor shall prove the suitability of the
Both coarse aggregate (stone) and fine aggregate water by way of tests conducted by an approved
(sand) shall comply with the requirements of CML laboratory to the satisfaction of the Engineer. For
Materials Testing Manual or equivalent, subject to the reinforced and prestressed concrete the chloride
following: content of the mixing water shall not exceed 500 mg/l
when tested in accordance with SABS 202 or
(i) The drying shrinkage of both the fine and coarse equivalent.
aggregate when tested in accordance with CML
Laboratory Testing Manual or equivalent shall not (e) Admixtures
exceed the following limits: Admixtures shall not be used in concrete without the
approval of the Engineer who may require that tests be
(1) For use in prestressed concrete, concrete conducted before the admixtures be used to prove their
bridge decks and slender columns the suitability. Admixtures, if their use is allowed, shall
shrinkage of both fine and coarse aggregate comply with the following requirements:
shall not exceed 130 % of that of the reference
aggregate.

(i) Admixtures shall be used only in liquid form and 6404 CONCRETE QUALITY
shall be batched in solution in the mixing water by
mechanical batcher capable of dispensing the (a) General
admixture in quantities accurate to within 5% of the Concrete shall comply with the requirements for
required quantity. strength concrete or prescribed-mix concrete, as
specified in SUBCLAUSES 6404(b) and (c) below.
(ii) All admixtures shall comply with the requirements of
ASTM C-494 or AASHTO M-194 and shall be of an The total alkaline content (Na20 equivalent) of the
approved brand and type. concrete shall be limited taking into account the degree
of reactivity.
(iii) Air entraining agents shall comply with the
requirements of ASTM C-260 or AASHTO M-154. (b) Strength concrete
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of
(iv) Admixtures shall not contain any chlorides. the concrete mix and for the proportions of the
constituent materials necessary for producing concrete
(f) Curing agents which complies with the requirements specified below
Curing agents shall be tested in accordance with ASTM for each class of concrete.
C-156 and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
C-309, except that the loss of water within 72 hours The class of concrete is indicated by the characteristic
2
shall not exceed 0.40kg/m . Approved curing agents 28-day cube crushing strength in MPa and the
only shall be used. maximum size of coarse aggregate in the mix.
E.g. CLASS 30/38 concrete means concrete with a

6403 STORING THE MATERIALS characteristic cube crushing strength of 30
MPa after 28 days and a maximum sized
(a) Cement coarse aggregate of 38 mm.
Cement stored on the site shall be kept under cover
which provides adequate protection against moisture The aggregate size shall be selected in accordance
and other factors which may promote deterioration of with SABS 1083 or equivalent.
the cement.
The characteristic cube crushing strength of strength
When the cement is supplied in bags, the bags shall be concrete shall be of any strength from 15 MPa, in
closely and neatly stacked to a height not exceeding 12 increments of 5 MPa, up to 60 MPa, as indicated on the
bags and arranged so that they will not be in contact Drawings or in the Bill of Quantities or as may be
with the ground or the walls and can be used in the prescribed by the Engineer. The strengths preferred are
order in which they were delivered to the site. 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 and 60 MPa.
Cement in bulk shall be stored in waterproof containers The cement content for any class of concrete shall not
so designed as to prevent any dead spots from forming, exceed 500 kg per cubic metre of concrete.
and the cement drawn for use shall be measured by
mass. Where for reasons of durability or other considerations
concrete is designated by the prefix "W".
Cement shall not be kept in storage for longer than
eight weeks without the Engineer's permission, and E.g. CLASS W30/19, such designations shall
different brands and/or types of the same brand of denote concrete having a cementitious
cement shall be stored separately. content not less than and a water:cement
ratio not exceeding the limits given in the
(b) Aggregates Special Specifications.
Aggregates of different nominal sizes shall be stored
separately and in such a manner as to avoid In such cases, characteristic cube compressive
segregation occurring. Intermixing of different materials strengths should be:
and contamination by foreign matter shall be avoided.
Aggregates exposed to a marine environment shall be (i) the specified 28-day characteristic cube
covered to protect them from salt contamination. compressive strength, or
Where concrete is batched on site the aggregates shall (ii) a characteristic cube compressive strength
be stored in bins with a 3 m wide concrete apron slab corresponding to the designated maximum
constructed around the outer edge of the aggregate water:cement ratio, or
stockpile area to prevent contamination during the
process of tipping and hoisting the aggregate. The (iii) a characteristic cube compressive strength
aggregates shall be tipped on the concrete apron slab. corresponding to the designated cementitious
The storage bin shall have a concrete floor of 150 mm content.
thickness.
Before starting with any concrete work on the site, the
(c) Storage capacity Contractor shall submit, for approval, samples of the
The storage capacity provided and the quantity of constituent materials of the concrete and a statement of
material stored (whether cement, aggregates or water) the mix proportions which he proposes to use for each
shall be sufficient to ensure that no interruptions to the class of concrete indicated in the Bill of Quantities.
progress of the work will be occasioned by any lack of
materials. Where any change occurs in the material sources, the
aggregate sizes, or any other components of the
(d) Deteriorated material concrete, the above procedure shall be repeated.
Deteriorated or contaminated or otherwise damaged
material shall not be used in concrete. Such material The samples submitted shall be accompanied by
shall be removed from the site without delay. evidence that they comply with the requirements for the
various materials specified. The statement regarding
the mix proportions shall be accompanied by evidence
establishing that concrete made from the materials in
the proposed proportions will have the specified Slump measurements obtained in accordance with the
properties. test method described in CML Method 2.11 on concrete
used in the Works shall fall within the ranges specified
Evidence shall be in the form of: in TABLE 6404/2.
(i) a statement regarding the test results, which shall

be furnished by an approved laboratory; or TABLE 6404/2
SLUMP VALUES
(ii) an authoritative report on previous use of and
experience in regard to the material. Type of construction Slump (mm) *)
Max Min
The actual mix proportions used as well as any
changes thereto shall be subject to the Engineer's Prestressed concrete 75 25
approval, but such approval shall not in any way relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility for producing Concrete nosings and pre-
concrete with the specified properties. fabricated units 75 50
The Contractor is cautioned that the quality of cement Mass concrete 100 25
may vary considerably from consignment to
consignment so as to necessitate adjustments in the Reinforced concrete footings,
cement content of mixes. In order to ensure a uniform cast in situ piles (except dry-cast
quality of concrete, the Contractor shall obtain from the piles), slabs, beams and
manufacturer the data regarding the relevant cement columns 125 50
quality for each consignment with a view to ascertaining *) Where high-frequency vibrators are used, the
the required adjustment in the cement content. This values shall be reduced by one-third.
information shall be submitted to the Engineer.
(f) Sulphate content
(c) Prescribed-mix concrete
The total water soluble sulphate content of the concrete
The Contractor shall submit samples of every
mix, expressed as SO, shall not exceed 4% (m/m) of
constituent of the concrete in accordance with the
the cementitious binder content of the mix. The
appropriate provisions of SECTION 7200 and SUBCLAUSE
sulphate content shall be calculated as the total from
6404(b) for approval.
the various constituents of the mix using the following
test methods:
The nominal mixes for prescribed-mix concrete for
− Cementitious binder : SABS 741 or
which no strength requirements have been laid down
are shown in TABLE 6404/1. equivalent
− Aggregates : SABS 850 or
The class of concrete is indicated by the mix and the equivalent
maximum size of the coarse aggregate in the mix. − Water : SABS 212 or
equivalent
E.g. CLASS 1:7:7/38 concrete shall mean concrete
with a prescribed mix in a volume ratio of: (g) Pumped concrete
one part of cement Where pumping of the concrete is approved by the
seven parts of sand Engineer, the concrete mix to be pumped shall be so
seven parts of stone designed that:
nominal stone size of 38 mm.
(i) settlement will not exceed 125 mm;
(d) Bleeding
The concrete shall be so proportioned with suitable (ii) graded aggregate and suitable admixtures be used,
materials that bleeding is not excessive. wherever necessary, with a view to improving the
pumpability of the mix; and
TABLE 6404/1 (iii) its shrinkage capacity shall not be excessively

NOMINAL MIXES higher than that of ordinary concrete mixes.
Constituent or property Mix

6405 MEASURING THE MATERIALS
1:7:7 1:5:5 1:4:4
(a) Cement
Cement (kg) 50 50 50
Where cement is supplied in standard bags, the bags
Total quantity of shall be assumed to contain 50 kg. All cement taken
aggregate (m )
3
0.46 0.33 0.26 from bulk-storage containers and from partly used bags
shall be batched by mass, accurate to within 3% of the
Max total quantity of required mass.
water (l) 62 46 37
(b) Water
Estimated average 28 day The mixing water for each batch shall be measured,
compressive strength either by mass or by volume, accurate to within 3% of
(MPa) 8 17 24 the required quantity. The quantity of water added to
the mix shall be adjusted to make allowance for
(e) Consistency and workability moisture in the aggregates.
The concrete shall be of suitable workability without the
(c) Aggregates
excessive use of water so that it can be readily
All aggregates for strength concrete shall be measured
compacted into the corners of the formwork and around
separately by mass, except as otherwise provided in
the reinforcement, tendons and ducts without the
this Clause, accurate to within 3% of the required
material segregating.
quantity.

Aggregates for strength concrete may be volume particular attention being given to the removal of any
batched subject to the approval of the Engineer, and to build-up of materials in the drum, in the loader, and
the quantity of cement being increased, at the cost of around the blades or paddles. Worn or bent blades and
3
the Contractor, by 25 kg/m of concrete, over and above paddles shall be replaced.
the quantity which would have been necessary were the
aggregate to have been batched by mass. Before any concrete is mixed, the inner surfaces of the
mixer shall be cleaned and all hardened concrete shall
Aggregates for prescribed-mix concrete as specified in be removed.
SUBCLAUSE 6404(c) may be measured separately by
volume. Batching boxes for volume batching shall be (e) Standby mixer
filled without any tamping, ramming or consolidating the When sections are cast where it is important for the
material (other than that occurring naturally during the casting to continue without interruption, a standby mixer
filling of the container), and shall be screeded off level shall be held in readiness to run on 15 minutes notice
with their topmost edges. should the stock mixers break down.
Any adjustment to the volume shall be made by (f) Ready-mixed concrete

supplementary containers of a suitable size being used. Where ready-mixed concrete is delivered at the site, the
Adjustments to the volume, by the incomplete filling of requirements of SABS 878 or equivalent shall have
batching boxes to marks on their inside faces will not be priority over the requirements specified in this Section
permitted. should inconsistencies occur.
Fine aggregate shall be tested for bulking at the

beginning of and halfway through each concreting shift, 6407 PLACING AND COMPACTING
and adjustment shall be made to the batch volume to
give the true volume required. (a) General
Concrete shall be transported and placed in a manner
The measurement of cement in gauge boxes will not be that will prevent segregation or loss of constituent
permitted and volume batching shall be so planned as materials or the contamination of the concrete.
to use full bags of cement.
Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the Works
until the Engineer's approval has been given. If
6406 MIXING concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval
having been given, approval shall again be obtained
(a) General from the Engineer.
Mixing the material for concrete shall be conducted by
an experienced operator. Unless otherwise authorised, Concreting operations shall be carried out only during
mixing shall be carried out in a mechanical batch-mixer daylight hours unless proper lighting arrangements
of an approved type which will be capable of producing have been made and the lights are in working order by
a uniform distribution of ingredients throughout the noon. Workmen shall not be allowed to work double
batch. shifts and the Contractor shall provide a fresh team for
night shifts.
(b) Charging the mixer
The sequence of charging the ingredients shall be Placing and compacting the concrete shall at all times
subject to approval by the Engineer, and, unless be under the direct supervision of an experienced
otherwise instructed, the same sequence of charging concrete supervisor.
the ingredients shall be maintained.
Once the casting of concrete has begun, it shall be
The volume of the mixed material by batch shall not carried out in a continuous process between
exceed the volume recommended by the manufacturer construction joints. Concrete shall be placed within 60
of the mixer. minutes from the start of mixing. These times may be
extended by the Engineer where a retarding admixture
(c) Mixing and discharging has been used. All excavations and other contact
The period of mixing shall be measured from the time surfaces of an absorbent nature such as timber
when all the materials are in the drum until the formwork shall be damp but no standing water shall be
commencement of discharge. permitted to remain on these surfaces. The formwork
shall be clean on the inside.
The mixing period for the materials shall be 90 seconds
and may be reduced only if the Engineer is satisfied Water quality, marine life or any other sensitive
that the reduced mixing time will produce concrete with environment shall not be adversely affected in any way.
the same strength and uniformity as concrete mixed for
90 seconds. The reduced mixing time, however, shall (b) Placing
be not less than 50 seconds or the manufacturer's Whenever possible, concrete shall be deposited
recommended mixing time. whichever is the longer. A vertically into its final position. Where chutes are used,
suitable timing device shall be attached to the mixer to their length and slope shall be such as not to cause
ensure that the minimum mixing time for the materials segregation, and suitable spouts and baffles shall be
has been complied with. provided at the lower end to minimise segregation. The
displacement of concrete by vibration instead of by
The first batch to be run when starting with a clean direct placing shall be done only when approved by the
mixer, shall contain only 2/3 of the required quantity of Engineer.
coarse aggregate to make provision for "coating" the
mixer drum. Discharge shall be so carried out that no Care shall be taken when casting bridge decks of a
segregation of the materials will occur in the mix. The substantial thickness to avoid layering of the concrete,
mixer shall be emptied completely before it is recharged and the entire thickness shall be placed in one pass.
with fresh materials. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete
which has been in position for more than 30 minutes
(d) Maintaining and cleaning the mixer unless a construction joint has been formed or unless a
If the mixer has stopped running for a period in excess retarding additive has been used in the concrete.
of 30 minutes, it shall be thoroughly cleaned-out
The pumping of concrete shall be subject to approval by as to ensure efficient compaction and avoidance of
the Engineer. Aluminium pipes shall not be used for this surface blemishes.
purpose.
Special attention shall be given to the compaction of
In plain concrete with a thickness of not less than 300 concrete in the anchorage zones and behind the anchor
mm, plums may, if approved, be included to displace plates and in all places where high concentrations of
concrete for up to 20% of the total volume, provided reinforcing steel or cables occur.
that:
Where the placing and compaction of concrete is
(i) the plums are spread evenly throughout the difficult, a mix containing smaller sized aggregate may
concrete; be used but only with the approval of the Engineer and
after a mix containing such aggregate has been
(ii) no plum laid shall have a dimension exceeding one designed and tested.
third of the smallest dimension of the concrete in
any plane, and (e) Requirements in respect of sliding formwork
Where sliding formwork is used, the following additional
(iii) each plum is surrounded by at least 75 mm of requirements shall apply:
concrete.
(i) The Contractor shall take all the necessary
(c) Placing under water measures to ensure the continuity of operations. All
Placing under water shall be allowed only in exceptional the necessary lighting and standby equipment for
circumstances where it is not feasible to dewater the mixing, hoisting, placing and compacting shall be
location before the concrete is placed. No concrete provided and all the materials required for
shall be placed in running water. completing each structure shall be ready on the site
before casting commences.
Underwater concrete shall be placed by means of
tremies. Full details of the method proposed by the (ii) Concrete shall be cast in uniform layers in the
Contractor shall be submitted in advance for approval. formwork so that the level of the top surface of the
Placing by skip or pipeline will also be considered in concrete differs by no more than 250 mm between
certain circumstances. any two points in the formwork. In addition, the top
level of the concrete shall never be so low down in
During concreting by tremie, the pipe shall be kept filled the formwork as will cause structural instability in
with concrete at all times to prevent air and water form the formwork. The working platform shall be kept
entering the tremie. When the tremie is charged, an clean and no concrete which has dried out in part
approved sliding plug shall be used. Once concreting may be swept into the formwork.
has begun by tremie, the discharge end of the tremie
shall be kept well below the surface of the concrete. (iii) The concrete shall be compacted during and
Should this seal be broken, the tremie shall be lifted immediately after placing. Care shall be taken not to
and plugged before concreting is recommenced. damage or disturb previously placed concrete. To
Distribution of concrete by lateral movement of the ensure the proper bonding of successive layers not
tremie will not be permitted. more than one hour shall elapse between the
placing of successive layers except where an
The concrete mix to be placed underwater shall be approved admixture has been applied, in which
specially designed and approved for this purpose to case the delay may be amended in consideration of
ensure good flowability, plasticity and cohesion. such circumstances.
Increased sand and cement contents over those of
normal mixes will usually be required. (iv) The slump of concrete may be up to 150mm should
the approved method of sliding so require.
(d) Compaction
Concrete shall be fully compacted by approved means
during and immediately after placing. It shall be 6408 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
thoroughly worked against the formwork, around
reinforcement bars, tendons, ducts and embedded (a) General
fittings and into corners to form a solid mass free from Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the
voids. construction joints shown on the working drawings or as
approved, except that if, because of an emergency
The concrete shall be free from honeycombing and (such as breakdown of the mixing plant or the
planes of weakness, and successive layers of the same occurrence of unsuitable weather), concreting has to be
lift shall be thoroughly bonded together. interrupted, a construction joint shall be formed at the
place of stoppage and in the manner which will least
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete impair the durability, appearance, and proper
shall be compacted by means of vibrators. Internal functioning of the concrete.
vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than
10000 cycles per minute and external vibrators not less Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the exact
than 3000 cycles per minute. Sufficient standby position of horizontal construction joints shall be marked
vibrators shall be kept available in case of breakdowns. on the framework by means of grout checks in order to
obtain truly horizontal joints.
Vibration shall be applied by experienced labourers,
and over-vibration resulting in segregation, surface Stub columns, stub walls and stays on footings shall be
water and leakage shall be avoided. Contact with cast integrally with the footings and not afterwards,
reinforcement and formwork shall, in so far as is even where another class of concrete is being used.
practicable, be avoided when internal vibrators are
used. Concrete shall not be subjected to disturbance by (b) Preparing the surfaces
vibration within 4 to 24 hours of it having been When the concrete has set and while it is still green the
compacted. surface film and all loose material shall be removed,
without disturbing the aggregate, by means of a water
Whenever vibration is applied externally, the design of jet assisted by light brushing to expose the aggregate
the formwork and positioning of vibrators shall be such and leave a sound, irregular surface. Where this is not
possible, the surface film shall be removed after the (f) Method 6
concrete has hardened, by mechanical means Using an approved curing compound applied in
appropriate to the degree of hardness of the concrete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except
so as to expose the aggregate and leave a sound, that, where the surface has to be subsequently
irregular surface. The roughened surface shall be waterproofed, coated or gunited, this method may not
washed with clean water to remove all laitance, dirt and be used.
loose particles.
(g) Method 7
Surface retarding agents may be used only with the Steam curing the concrete (precast units).
approval of the Engineer.
(h) General
(c) Placing fresh concrete at construction joints The method of curing adopted shall be subject to the
Where fresh concrete is placed the same day as that on Engineer's approval and shall not cause staining,
which the construction joint was formed, the fresh contamination, or marring of the surface of the
concrete shall be cast directly against the face of the concrete.
construction joint.
The curing period shall be continuous for at least seven
When concreting recommences a day or more after the days for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement
construction joint has been formed, the following or ordinary Portland cement 15, rapid-hardening
procedure shall be followed: Portland cement or rapid-hardening Portland cement
15, and at least 10 days if Portland blast-furnace
(i) The construction joint shall be kept constantly wet cement or a 50/50 mixture of Portland cement and
for a period of at least six hours. The surface shall ground granulated blast-furnace slag is used. When the
0
be in a saturated, surface dry condition when temperature of concrete falls below 5 C, these minimum
concreting has to recommence. curing periods shall be extended by the period during
0
which the temperature of the concrete was below 5 C.
(ii) Any dirt, excess water and loose particles shall be
removed prior to reconcreting being started. When sliding formwork is used, the concrete shall be
protected against the weather and rapid drying out by
(iii) For horizontal construction joints a 25 mm thick means of a 4 m wide skirt attached to the lower
concrete layer of the same grade of concrete made perimeter of the formwork and hanging over the working
richer by reducing the coarse aggregate content by platform. The skirt shall consist of hessian in summer
25% shall be placed on the joint plane immediately months and of canvas or other suitable material in
before concreting. winter. The skirt shall be weighted at the bottom to
prevent it flapping in windy conditions.
(iv) For vertical construction joints the fresh concrete
shall be placed against a surface prepared in The concrete shall be cured by means of a fog spray to
accordance with SUBCLAUSE 6408(b), which is in a keep it wet constantly for the periods stated above or
saturated, surface-dry condition. until a curing compound is applied. Wetting the
concrete by spraying shall be by means of a fixed
Epoxy resins specially designed for bonding old spraybar along the full length of the sliding formwork.
concrete to new shall be used at construction joints The spraybar shall be connected to a suitable high-
where so specified. The preparation of the construction pressure water supply. Wetting shall be discontinued
0
joint surface and the application of the epoxy resin shall when the ambient air temperature drops below 5 C, and
be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's care shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure that the
recommendations and the Engineer's instructions. The water will not erode the surface of the fresh concrete.
actual brand and type of resin used shall be subject to
the Engineer's approval.
6410 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
6409 CURING AND PROTECTING
Formwork shall be retained in position for the (a) Cold weather
appropriate times given in CLAUSE 6206, and as soon Concrete shall not be placed during falling temperatures
0
as may be practicable, all exposed concrete surfaces when the ambient air temperature falls below 7 C or
shall be protected from loss of moisture by one or more during rising temperatures when the ambient air
0
of the following methods: temperature is below 3 C. When concrete is placed at
0
air temperatures below 5 C the concrete temperature
0
(a) Method 1 shall not be below 10 C, for which purpose heating of
Retaining formwork in place for the full curing period. the water and/or the aggregate shall be permitted. The
Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements
(b) Method 2 for heating the material. Heated water and aggregate
Ponding the exposed surfaces with water, except where shall first be mixed and the cement shall then be added
0
atmospheric temperatures are low, i.e. less than 50C. only while the temperature is below 30 C.
(c) Method 3 The temperature of placed concrete shall not be

0
Covering it with sand or mats made from a moisture- allowed to fall below 5 C until the concrete has attained
retaining material, and keeping the covering constantly a strength of at least 5 MPa, and the Contractor shall be
wet. responsible for all protective measures necessary to
this end. All concrete damaged by frost or by the
(d) Method 4 formation of ice in the concrete shall be removed and
Constantly spraying the entire area of the exposed replaced by the Contractor at this own expense.
surfaces with water (only on surfaces where sand cover
or ponding is impossible). (b) Hot weather
0
When the ambient air temperature exceeds 30 C during
(e) Method 5 concreting, the Contractor shall take measures to
Covering with a waterproof or plastic sheeting firmly control the temperature of the concrete ingredients so
anchored at the edges. that the temperature of the placed concrete will not
0
exceed 30 C unless otherwise determined by the
Engineer. Such measures include spraying aggregate
stockpiles with water to promote cooling down by visible when the structural member is placed in its final
evaporation and, where feasible, shading the stockpiles position in the completed structure.
and the area where concreting is carried out. Curing
shall commence immediately after concrete has been (d) All precast members which have been chipped,
placed to prevent an excessive loss of moisture. cracked, warped or otherwise damaged to the extent
that such damage will, in the opinion of the Engineer,
(c) Precautionary measures for using sliding prejudice the appearance, function or structural integrity
formwork of the members shall be rejected or, where so allowed,
During sliding operations in cold weather, the water repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
only, or the water and the aggregate, shall be heated to
ensure that the concrete temperature will not drop
0
below l0 C until it has attained a strength of 5MPa. 6414 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP AND
MATERIALS
During cold weather the rate of sliding shall be suitably
decreased to ensure sufficient strength in the concrete
(a) Criteria for compliance with the requirements
which leaves the bottom of the formwork.
Routine inspection and quality control will be done by
the Engineer as specified in SECTION 7200. The criteria
6411 PIPES AND CONDUITS for compliance with the requirements specified for 28-
No pipes and conduits other than those shown on the day characteristic compressive strength shall be as
Drawings shall be embedded in the concrete without specified in CLAUSE 7205 for full acceptance, and as
the Engineer's approval. The clear space between such specified in CLAUSE 7207 for conditional acceptance.
pipes or between such pipes and any reinforcing steel The re-submission of concrete lots on the basis of cores
shall be at least 40mm or the maximum size of the for full or conditional acceptance shall not be allowed.
aggregate plus 5 mm, whichever is the greater. The The Contractor's attention is drawn to CLAUSE 7208. If
thickness of the concrete cover over pipes and fittings the Engineer is satisfied that the requirements of the
shall be at least 25mm. Contractor's process control have been met, the
Engineer may decide at his discretion to use the
The ends of all ferrules used for bracing formwork shall Contractor's test results in the evaluation of the
be neatly finished off to the details shown on the concrete.
Drawings. Where no details are given on the Drawings,
ferrules shall be cut back to a depth of at least the (b) Procedure in the event of non-compliance with
specified cover, and the holes shall be filled in with the requirements
mortar and finished off flush with the concrete surface. Any lot represented by test cubes failing to comply with
the criteria specified for the characteristic strength shall
6412 APPLIED LOADING be rejected, or the Engineer may at his discretion allow
No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until the following tests to be conducted in order to decide
the specified curing period has expired, after which whether the concrete may be left in position at further
applied loading shall be allowed only when approved by reduced payment:
the Engineer. The Engineer's decision will be based on
the type of load to be applied, the age of the concrete, (i) The Engineer may allow the elements or units
the magnitude of stress induced and the propping of the concerned to be cured for an additional period not
structure. No structure shall be opened to traffic until exceeding 56 days. Thereafter the Contractor shall
test cubes made from the concrete in all parts of the drill cores in accordance with SABS 865 or
structure have attained the specified minimum 28-day equivalent, and the Engineer will evaluate these
compressive strength. cores in accordance with SABS 0100 - Part II or
equivalent.
6413 PRECAST CONCRETE
This Clause applies to all reinforced and prestressed (ii) Where the Engineer so directs, full-scale load tests
concrete members other than precast concrete piles, shall be conducted in accordance with SABS 0100
culverts and pipes in so far as they are dealt with Part II or equivalent to determine whether any
separately elsewhere in these Specifications. particular structure or member can be left in
position. The cost of such tests shall be for the
All precast members shall be manufactured in Contractor's account regardless of the outcome of
accordance with the requirements specified for cast in the tests.
situ members in so far as these requirements are
relevant. In addition, the following shall apply: In all cases where concrete has been supplied which
fails to comply with the strength requirements, the
(a) The Contractor shall take all necessary safety and Contractor shall immediately take the required remedial
precautionary measures during the handling and action by changing the mix proportions to obtain the
erection of precast members and for ensuring the required strength.
stability of members as positioned and prior to their
being cast in. (c) Tests ordered by the Engineer
Where the routine testing of concrete cubes is not
(b) Where precast concrete members have not been conducted on the site by the Engineer, he may order
manufactured on the site, the manufacturer shall keep the Contractor to have the concrete cubes, which have
and make available to the Engineer complete records of been made by the Engineer, tested at an approved
all the concrete mixes and strength tests pertaining to testing laboratory, in which case no separate payment
the members cast. The Contractor shall notify the will be made for such tests.
Engineer in advance of the dates on which members
are to be cast so that arrangements for inspecting and 6415 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF
testing the precast members can be made. EXISTING CONCRETE
Where partial demolition is required for extension work
(c) For the purposes of identification, all members shall to existing structures the first three paragraphs of
be marked with paint in neat lettering with the member CLAUSE 2214 shall apply. In addition the following shall
number shown on the Drawings or as agreed on and an apply:
identification number relating to the manufacturing
records. Letters etc shall be so positioned as not to be

(a) The Contractor shall take great care to ensure that The bid rate for each precast member shall include full
the reinforcement required to tie in the extension work compensation for all work, costs and equipment
is not cut off or damaged in the demolition process. required for transporting, erecting and placing into
Where reinforcement has been cut off, or where in the position the precast concrete members.
opinion of the Engineer, the reinforcement has been
damaged to such an extent that it will not adequately
perform its function, the Contractor shall, at his own ITEM UNIT
expense, install dowel bars of the same diameter as the 64.04 EPOXY BONDING OF NEW SQUARE
bar cut off or damaged, all to the satisfaction of the CONCRETE SURFACES TO OLD
2
METRE (m )
Engineer.
(b) Only hand operated breaking equipment shall be The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
used for the demolition of concrete where extension new concrete surface bonded to old by means of an
work is required. approved epoxy bonding agent as set out in the
Specifications. The bid rate shall include full
compensation for preparing the surfaces and for
furnishing and applying the bonding agent and for
6416 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT chamfering the concrete on visible joints, complete as
ITEM UNIT
64.01 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE:
(a) (CLASS OF CONCRETE AND PART OF CUBIC ITEM UNIT
3
STRUCTURE OR USE INDICATED) METRE (m ) 64.05 EXTRA OVER ITEM 64.01 OR CUBIC METRE
3
(b) ETC FOR OTHER CLASSES OF CUBIC 64.02 FOR THE USE OF SULPHATE- (m )
3 RESISTANT CEMENT IN CONCRETE
CONCRETE AND OTHER USES OR METRE (m )
PARTS OF THE STRUCTURE
The unit of measurement for cast in situ concrete shall concrete manufactured with sulphate-resistant cement
be the cubic metre of concrete in place. Quantities shall and placed in accordance with the details on the
be calculated from the dimensions shown on the Drawings, or as instructed by the Engineer.
Drawings or as authorised. No deduction in volume
measured for payment shall be made for the volume of The bid rate shall be extra over each of the relevant
any reinforcing steel, inserts and pipes or conduits rates for which sulphate resistance cement is used.
under 150 mm in diameter embedded in the concrete.
ITEM UNIT
The bid rate shall include full compensation for 64.06 DEMOLISHING EXISTING
procuring and furnishing all the materials, storing the CONCRETE:
materials, providing all plant, mixing, transporting, (a) PLAIN CONCRETE(MEMBER CUBIC METRE
placing and compacting the concrete, forming the INDICATED)
3
(m )
inserts, construction joints (except mandatory
construction joints), and contraction joints, curing and (b) REINFORCED CONCRETE (MEMBER CUBIC METRE
3
protecting the concrete, repairing defective surfaces, INDICATED) (m )
and finishing the concrete surfaces as specified.
Payment shall distinguish between the different classes The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
of concrete. plain or reinforced concrete demolished for each
member or portion thereof scheduled separately in the
Bill of Quantities.
ITEM UNIT
64.02 MANUFACTURING PRECAST NUMBER The bid rate shall include full compensation for all
CONCRETE MEMBERS (DESCRIPTION OF (no) labour, plant and equipment required to demolish the
MEMBER WITH REFERENCE TO DRAWING) existing concrete and disposal of the product of the
demolition to an approved disposal site. The bid rate
shall also include full compensation for any necessary
The unit of measurement shall be the number of measures to ensure no debris falls into rivers and for
complete members or elements of each type and size in any debris that has fallen into rivers to be recovered.
position in the Works.
The bid rate for each precast member shall include full
compensation for concrete work, formwork, reinforcing
steel and prestressing as required for manufacturing the
member complete, excluding only prestressing in
connection with in situ concrete cast subsequent to the
placing of the precast members for which prestressing
separate payment is provided elsewhere in the Bill of
Quantities.
ITEM UNIT
64.03 TRANSPORTING AND ERECTING NUMBER
PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS (no)
(DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER AND
APPROXIMATE MASS TO BE GIVEN)

precast concrete members of each type and size placed
into position.

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES (i) Pre-tensioned concrete

Pre-tensioned concrete is prestressed concrete where
the tendon is tensioned before the concrete has been
SECTION 6500: PRESTRESSING cast.
(j) Post-tensioned concrete

CONTENTS: Post-tensioned concrete is prestressed concrete where
CLAUSE PAGE the tendon is tensioned after the concrete has
hardened.
6501 SCOPE 6000-38
6502 DEFINITIONS 6000-38 (k) Pull-in
Pull-in is the elastic shortening of the tendon caused by
6504 EQUIPMENT 6000-40 relative movement between the anchorage or coupler
6505 TECHNICAL DATA 6000-41 components on account of seating and gripping action
6506 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM 6000-42
during or immediately after transfer.
6507 DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE
CONTRACTOR 6000-42 (I) Release
6508 PRECASTING 6000-42
Release is the specified elastic shortening of the tendon
6509 PRE-TENSIONING 6000-43 at the anchorage achieved before or during transfer.
6510 POST-TENSIONING 6000-43
6511 LOSS OF PRESTRESS 6000-46 (m) Sheath
6512 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6000-46 Sheath is the tube or casing enclosing the tendon and
which temporarily or permanently allows a relative
movement between the tendon and the surrounding
concrete.
6501 SCOPE
This Section covers the materials, equipment and work (n) Tendon
required for prestressing structural concrete members. Tendon is the prestressing steel consisting of the bar,
wire or strand individually placed, or of bars, wires or
6502 DEFINITIONS strands placed in a duct, all of which are tensioned to
The following definitions shall apply to these impart prestress to a concrete member.
Specifications:
(o) Tensioning
(a) Anchorage Tensioning is the action of inducing and regulating the
Anchorage is the device comprising all the components force in a tendon by means of tensioning and
and materials required for retaining the force in a measuring equipment.
tensioned tendon and to transmit this force to the
concrete of the structure. (p) Transfer
Transfer in the case of post-tensioned concrete is the
(b) Anchorage reinforcement action of transferring the tensioning force from the
Anchorage reinforcement is the spiral and other tensioning equipment (jack) to the anchorage.
reinforcement which forms part of the anchorage and is
required for strengthening the anchorage and/or Transfer in the case of pre-tensioned concrete is the
assisting in transmitting the tendon force to the action of transferring the force in the tensioned
concrete. tendon(s) to the concrete.
(c) Bursting reinforcement (q) Bond breaker

Bursting reinforcement is the reinforcing steel required Bond breaker is the coating or sheath placed on a
in and adjacent to the anchorage zones to resist the tendon to prevent it from bonding to the surrounding
tensile stresses induced in the concrete by the concrete.
anchorage(s).
(r) Coupler
(d) Cable Coupler is the device comprising all components
Cable is the tendon, together with the anchorage, required to join two tendons.
sheathing and all fittings.
(s) Deflector
(e) Characteristic strength Deflector is the device used to deflect a tendon
Characteristic strength of prestressing steel is the alignment within a structural element.
manufacturer's guaranteed tensile strength below which
no more than 5% of the test results in a statistical (t) Transmission length
population shall fall. Transmission length is the tendon length required to
transmit via bond stresses the full force in the tendon to
(f) Duct the concrete.
Duct is the void formed to house the tendon(s) and may
be formed by coring, or by using sheaths or by way of
extractable cores. 6503 MATERIALS
(g) Prestress (a) General
Prestress is the stress induced in concrete by tensioned All materials and prestressing systems used in the
tendons. prestressing of structural concrete members shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.
(h) Prestressed concrete
Prestressed concrete is structural concrete in which
effective internal stresses are induced by means of (b) Prestressing steel
tensioned tendons.
(i) General
The type of prestressing steel shall be designated
in accordance with the requirements of SUBCLAUSE
6503(b). The Contractor shall keep proper records used for cleaning without the approval of the
of all material analyses and test certificates for the Engineer.
batches of prestressing steel used in the Works. Prestressing steel shall be delivered at the site
Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor suitably protected against damage and corrosion.
shall produce certificates from recognised testing Such protection or the use of a corrosion inhibitor
authorities certifying compliance of the prestressing where allowed by the Engineer, shall not have any
steel with the specified requirements. deleterious effect on the steel or concrete or impair
the bond between the two.
Where prestressing steel is available in weld-free
lengths (production lengths) and lengths containing (vi) Galvanising
welds (standard lengths), the batches delivered at Galvanised prestressing steel shall not be used
the site shall be clearly labelled for identification unless specified. In no circumstances shall
purposes. prestressing steel be subjected to galvanising after
manufacture.
In no circumstances shall prestressing steel after
manufacture be subjected to heat treatment other (vii) Welds
than provided for in the Specifications. Prestressing steel used in structural prestressed
concrete shall be weld-free. Where the steel is
(ii) Bars supplied in standard lengths, the welds shall be cut
Cold-worked high-tensile alloy steel bars for out and delivered to the Engineer.
prestressed concrete shall comply at least with the
requirements of BS 4486. (c) Anchorages and couplers
Anchorages and couplers to be used in prestressed
The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in concrete shall comply with the requirements of BS 4447
accordance with the requirements of CLAUSE 4.2 of and shall be of a proved and approved type,
BS 4486 eg BS 4486-RR-32-1230 for 32mm constructed from durable material completely free from
diameter double-ridged bar with a characteristic imperfections and shall not damage, distort or kink the
strength of 1230 MPa. prestressing steel in a manner that will result in ultimate
tensile strength reduction. They shall resist, without
(iii) Wires and seven-wire steel strand failure and/or excessive deformation or relaxation of the
Steel wire and seven-wire steel strand for force in the tendons, the full ultimate tensile strength of
prestressed concrete shall comply at least with the the tendons. The characteristic value for anchorages
requirements of BS 5896. and couplers, determined in accordance with BS 4447,
shall not be less than 90%.
The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in
accordance with the requirements of clauses 14 The anchorages shall effectively distribute the force in
and 20 of BS 5896 for wire and strands the tendon to the structural member, and the resulting
respectively, eg: local stresses and strains in the member shall be so
limited as to prevent damage. Unless otherwise
(1) BS 5896/2 wire 1770-7-PE-relax 1 for a 7 mm approved by the Engineer, all anchorages and couplers
diameter plain wire of Class 1 relaxation with a shall be provided with anchorage reinforcement.
characteristic strength of 1770 MPa; and
Wedges and the insides of barrels or cones shall be
(2) BS 5896/3 superstrand 1860-12.9-relax 2 for a clean to allow the free movement and seating of the
12.9 mm diameter superstrand of Class 2 wedges inside the taper.
relaxation with a characteristic strength of 1860
MPa. The threads of bars. nuts, anchorages and couplers
shall be suitably protected against damage and
(iv) Straightness corrosion. The protection shall be removed at the last
Prestressing bars delivered at the site shall be moment and the threads properly lubricated before use.
straight. Only small adjustments for straightness
may be made, which shall be done by hand on the (d) Sheaths
0
site at a temperature above 5 C and under the Sheaths shall be grout-tight and of such material and
supervision of the Engineer. Where heating of the configuration that bond forces can be transferred from
bars is required, this shall be by means of steam or the grout to the surrounding concrete. The properties of
hot water. Bars bent in the threaded portion shall the sheath material shall be such that no corrosion
not be used. attack of the prestressing steel will be induced. The
sheath shall be sufficiently flexible to accept the
Prestressing wire and stand shall be supplied in required curvature without kinking, and strong enough
coils with a sufficiently large diameter to ensure that to retain its cross-section and alignment and to resist
the wire and strand will pay off straight. damage on account of handling, transporting, tying and
contact with vibrators during concreting. Unless
(v) Surface condition otherwise approved by the Engineer the thickness of
Prestressing steel shall be clean, free from faults or the metal of steel sheaths shall not be less than 0.4
defects, and without any harmful films and matter mm.
which may impair adhesion to the grout or concrete.
A film of rust is not necessarily harmful and may Metal sheathing shall be delivered at the site suitably
improve the bond. It may, however, increase the protected against damage and corrosion. At the time of
friction between the tendon and duct. The depth of incorporation into the structural member, the sheathing
imperfections or pits on the surface of prestressing shall be free from loose mill scale, loose rust, lubricants
steel shall not exceed 0.1 mm for wire with a and harmful matter.
diameter up to and including 8 mm, or 0.2 mm for
bars or wire with a diameter exceeding 8 mm. Galvanised sheathing shall not be used unless
specified.
Tendons may be cleaned by wire brushing or by
passing through a pressure box containing Unless otherwise specified, the internal diameter of the
carborundum powder. Solvent solutions shall not be sheath shall be at least 10 mm greater than the
diameter of the tendon. For vertical tendons and where

tendons are to be drawn into cast-in sheaths, the cross- shall not exceed 2500 cP and 1 500 cP for
sectional duct area shall be at least three times the horizontal and vertical cables respectively.
cross-sectional area of the tendon.
0
(3) Bleeding at 20 C measured in accordance with
(e) Cable supports Subclause 7112(b) shall not exceed 2% by
Supports of reinforcing steel or structural steel suitably volume three hours after the grout has been
braced to prevent buckling under load shall be used to mixed, and the maximum bleeding shall not
support the cables. The cable saddles shall be rigid and exceed 4%. In addition, the separated (bleed)
secured in position by welding or by equivalent water must be reabsorbed after 24 hours.
mechanical means to resist both gravitational and
buoyancy forces. (4) The compressive strength of 100 mm cubes
made of the grout and cured in a moist
Normal web reinforcement shall not be utilised to atmosphere for the first 24 hours and then in
0
support cables. water at 20 C shall exceed 20 MPa at seven
days.
Saddles for external cables shall be of special design
and material to ensure low friction and to prevent the (h) Protecting agents for unbonded tendons
tendon or parts thereof from grooving the surface. The The material used for permanent protection of
saddle plates shall be curved to the requisite radius to unbonded tendons shall have the following properties:
prevent the tendon or part thereof from bearing on the
end of the plate and shall incorporate features to ensure (i) It shall remain free from cracks and shall not
that individual bars, wires and strands are seated become brittle or fluid within the temperature range
0 0
separately. of –20 C to 70 C.
(f) Tendon spacers (ii) It shall be chemically stable for the entire life of the
Tendon spacers used inside the ducts to separate structure.
individual bars, wires or strands of the tendon shall be
of a proved and approved type and manufactured from (iii) It shall be non-reactive with the surrounding
material which will not induce corrosion of the materials, i.e. concrete, tendons, wrapping or
prestressing steel. sheathing.
(iv) It shall be non-corrosive or corrosion-inhibiting.

(g) Grout
(v) It shall be impervious to moisture.
(i) Materials
In addition to the requirements of SUBCLAUSE (vi) It shall be sufficiently tough to withstand the
6402(d), water shall not contain more than 500 mg abrasion caused when a tendon, precoated with the
of chloride ions per litre of water. material, is drawn into the sheath.
Only ordinary Portland cement which complies with (vii) It shall have no appreciable shrinkage or excessive
the requirements of SABS 471 or equivalent and volume increase.
ordinary Portland cement 15 which complies with
the requirements of SABS 831 or equivalent shall (viii) It shall have a suitable viscosity at ambient
be used. The temperature of the cement shall be temperature or require only moderate preheating to
0
less than 40 C, and the cement shall be stored in permit injection.
accordance with the requirements of SUBCLAUSE
6403(a). (i) Testing
Prestressing steel, anchorages and couplers, and grout
Fine aggregate shall consist of siliceous granules, shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
finely ground limestones. trass or very fine sand. SUBCLAUSE 7111(b). Testing shall be carried out at the
The aggregate used shall pass through a 0.600 mm frequencies as directed by the Engineer.
sieve. The use of fine aggregate shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer and shall be restricted
to grout for ducts with a diameter exceeding 150 6504 EQUIPMENT
mm. The aggregate content in the grout shall not
exceed 30% of the mass of the cement. (a) General
All equipment used shall be in a good working order
The use of admixtures shall be subject to tests and properly maintained.
having shown that their use improves the properties
of the grout, eg by increasing workability, reducing (b) Tensioning and measuring equipment
bleeding, entraining air, or expanding the grout. Tensioning and measuring equipment shall be such that
Admixtures shall be free from any product liable to the tendon force can be established to an accuracy of
damage the steel or the grout itself, such as +2% during any stage of the tensioning operation.
halides, nitrates, sulphides, sulphates, etc. The
quantity of admixture to be used shall be in Unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer, the
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. tensioning equipment shall be power driven and
capable of gradually applying a controlled total force
(ii) Properties of the grout without inducing dangerous secondary stresses in the
The mixed grout shall have the following properties: tendon, anchorage or concrete.
(1) The chloride ions content shall not exceed 750 The force in the tendon during tensioning shall be
mg/litre. measured by a direct-reading dynamometer or obtained
direct from pressure gauges fitted in the hydraulic
(2) The viscosity of the grout measured in system to determine the pressure in the jacks.
accordance with SUBCLAUSE 7111 (b) for
horizontal cables shall be 500 to 2 500 cP and Pressure gauges shall have concentric scale dials
for vertical cables 400 to 1 500 cP. The which comply with the requirements of BS 1780. The
viscosity of the grout, 20 minutes after mixing, dials shall not be less than 150 mm in diameter and the
gauges shall be used within the range of 50 to 90% of (a) Tendon alignment
their full capacity at maximum service pressure. A diagram showing the alignment of each tendon or
group of tendons in both the horizontal and vertical
When pressure gauges not using glycerine are used, a planes, together with the horizontal and vertical
snubber or similar device shall be fitted to protect the coordinates, and curve equations of the centroid of the
gauge against any sudden release of pressure. tendon(s), as may be relevant.
Provision shall also be made for T-connections for the
attachment, when required, for supplementary control (b) Tendon system
gauges. The design shall be based on the system shown on the
Drawings, but the Contractor may use any suitable
Only self-sealing connections shall be used in the system which will meet all the specified requirements,
hydraulic circuit. Where the pressure input pipe is subject to approval by the Engineer.
connected to the jack, a pipe rupture valve shall be
installed in the circuit. (c) Tensioning the tendons
Full particulars regarding the partial tensioning of the
Tensioning equipment shall be calibrated before the tendons, the stage during which the tendons shall be
tensioning operation and thereafter at frequent tensioned, and the sequence of tensioning to be
intervals, as directed by the Engineer, with a master followed.
gauge or proving ring, and the Engineer shall be
furnished with a calibration chart. The load-measuring (d) Tensioning force
devices shall be calibrated to an accuracy of +2%. The maximum tensioning force and the effective force
at the live anchorages, after transfer, as well as the
The extension of tendons shall be measured to an corresponding stress level in the prestressing steel, for
accuracy of +2% or +2 mm, whichever is the more each tendon or group of tendons. The forces will be
accurate, and pull-in and release to an accuracy of +2 given in MN units, and the stress levels will be
mm. expressed as a percentage of the characteristic
strength.
(c) Grouting equipment (e) Extension

The extension per tendon or group of tendons under the
(i) Mixer maximum tensioning force, together with the modulus of
Mechanically operated mixers only, of a type elasticity (E) on which it has been based. The release to
capable of producing high local turbulences while be attained at each live anchorage as well as the pull-in
imparting only a slow motion to the body of the for which provision has been made.
grout shall be used.
The Contractor shall show on his drawings the
The mixer shall be equipped with a screen with expected extension based on the actual modulus of
openings not exceeding 1.0 mm and shall be elasticity of the strand as well as the expected wedge
capable of consistently producing grout with a pull-in and any provision for shimming.
colloidal consistency.
(f) Prestressing losses in tendons
(ii) Agitator The losses allowed for in the design from the causes
Where the capacity of the mixer is insufficient to fill listed below will be given as follows:
the duct completely with grout, an agitator shall be
used. (i) Friction loss
The formula used for determining the tendon/duct
Mechanical agitators only shall be used, which are friction loss together with the values adopted for the
capable of maintaining the colloidal condition of the friction coefficient (µ) caused by curvature, and the
grout fill during the storing and injection processes. wobble factor (k) caused by unintentional variation
The grout shall be delivered at the structure from from the specified alignment.
the agitator, and the system shall make provision
for re-circulating the grout from the pump back to (ii) Elastic deformation of concrete
the agitator. The elastic factor, which, when multiplied by the
compressive stress in the concrete adjacent to the
(iii) Injection equipment tendon, will give the loss caused by the deformation
The pump shall be of the positive displacement type of the concrete.
(piston, screw or similar type), capable of exerting a
constant pressure of at least 10 bars on completely (iii) Creep of the concrete
grouted cables and shall incorporate a safety The creep factor, which, when multiplied by the
device for preventing the build-up of pressure compressive stress in the concrete adjacent to the
above 20 bars. The pump shall be fitted with a tendon, will give the loss caused by the creep of the
pressure gauge and a valve which can be locked- concrete.
off without loss of pressure in the cable.
(iv) Shrinkage of the concrete
The pump shall be capable of delivering grout at a The stress loss in MPa caused by the shrinkage of
speed that will produce a speed of the grout in the the concrete.
cable of between 6 and 12 m/minute.
(v) Relaxation of prestressing steel
All connections in the pipes and between the pipe The stress loss in MPa at a stress level of 70% of
and the cable shall be airtight. Only bayonet, the characteristic strength of the prestressing steel
threaded, or similar types of connectors shall be caused by the relaxation of the prestressing steel.
used.
(g) Anchorages
6505 TECHNICAL DATA The positions where loop or fan-type dead-end
The following technical data for pre-tensioned and post- anchorage may be used.
tensioned structural members required for the Contract
will be furnished on the Drawings:

(h) Bursting reinforcement After approval by the Engineer of the Drawings and
The bursting reinforcement for the prestressing system calculations prepared by the Contractor, no departure
on which the design is based. shall be permitted from the forces, stresses and
extensions shown thereon, without authorisation by the
(i) Precamber Engineer.
The precamber at intervals not exceeding 0.25 times
the span length. The prestressing work shall not be commenced before
(j) Compressive strength of the concrete during the relevant drawings have been accepted by the
transfer Engineer. The Contractor shall make full allowance in
The compressive strength to be attained by the his bid rates for all costs in connection with the
concrete in the relevant member before transfer may be furnishing of information, making calculations, and
effected. preparing and submitting the Drawings. However, no
allowance need be made for the cost of checking,
6506 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM undertaken by the Engineer, of drawings and
The use of all prestressing systems will be subject to calculations for work which does not qualify as an
approval by the Engineer. Bidders are advised to obtain alternative design.
approval for the prestressing system they intend using,
prior to submitting their bids. Alternative designs shall comply with the requirements
of CLAUSE 1212 and the relevant provisions of this
Within one month of the bid having been awarded, or Section.
within a period agreed on with the Engineer, the
Contractor shall submit full details regarding the
prestressing system(s), materials and equipment he 6508 PRECASTING
intends using, as well as regarding the methods he
proposes to adopt in the prestressing and related (a) Casting yard on the site
operations. Subject to approval by the Engineer, precast work may
be done at any location selected by the Contractor.
The Engineer, at his own discretion. may call for further
information in the form of detailed drawings, proof of Before the casting yard is established, the Contractor
successful previous use, performance certificates from shall submit plans to the Engineer which demarcate the
an approved independent testing authority, and site and detail the layout of the Works, together with a
calculations substantiating the adequacy of the system. flow diagram of the construction stages and storage.
The Contractor shall furnish such information within two
weeks of being called upon to do so or within a period (b) Manufacture off the site
agreed on with the Engineer. If, after investigating all The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of
the information, the Engineer is not satisfied that the the dates when tensioning of tendons, casting of
prestressing of the structural member can be carried members and transfer, will be undertaken.
out satisfactorily with the prestressing system offered by
the Contractor, the Engineer reserves the right to order Within seven days of transfer, the Contractor shall
the Contractor to use any system which is suited to the submit to the Engineer a certificate giving the tendon
work and which is readily available to the Contractor. force(s) and extension(s) attained as well as records of
the cube crushing strength and age of concrete at
Only minor alterations to the concrete dimensions transfer.
shown on the Drawings will be considered in order to
accommodate the prestressing system finally selected. Test results relating to all aspects of the work shall be
Major alterations occasioned by the prestressing sent to the Engineer immediately upon their becoming
system offered by the Contractor and which is at available.
variance with the tendon system specified in
SUBCLAUSE 6505(b) shall be treated as alternative Where the Engineer requires tests to be conducted on
designs and shall be dealt with as specified in CLAUSE completed members, no member to which the tests
1212. relate shall be dispatched to the site until the tests have
been satisfactorily completed and the members
6507 DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE accepted by the Engineer.
CONTRACTOR (c) Manufacture
All drawings prepared by the Contractor and submitted
Before work is commenced, details of the manufacture
to the Engineer for consideration shall comply with the
and phasing of the work shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. After approval no changes shall
be made to the methods or systems without approval by
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer at least two
the Engineer.
months before he intends commencing with the
prestressing work, drawings detailing the layout and
The Contractor shall ensure that the specified
alignment for the individual tendons, the cable supports,
precamber is incorporated in the formwork. The
modifications to the bursting and other reinforcement,
magnitude of the precamber shown on the Drawings
anchorage recesses, tensioning sequence, tensioning
shall be subject to variation depending on the
loads and extensions, as well as requirements for
Contractor's construction programme; and the
controlling the tensioning operations. For the
Contractor shall, before manufacture, ascertain in
prestressing system finally selected, the technical data
writing from the Engineer, the increase or decrease in
which are at variance with the information given on the
precamber. This procedure shall also apply to the cases
Drawings shall be shown on the Drawings. Each tendon
where no precamber has been specified.
shall be separately numbered for identification.
Lifting and supporting the precast members shall be
Where required, the Contractor shall submit
made only at the points marked and provided on the
calculations in respect of the variation of the tendon
members.
force along the length of the tendon, the expected
extension and the bursting forces.
Precast members which have not been fully tensioned
or fully stage extensioned or which have ungrouted

tensioned tendons shall not be handled without corrosive conditions in coastal, damp and wet areas
authorisation by the Engineer. and under aggressive conditions the materials shall be
stored in weatherproof sheds. All materials shall be
Where members with ungrouted tensioned tendons are stored clear of the ground and while in storage shall not
handled. control shall be exercised to guard against be enclosed to the weather.
possible slip of the tendon at the anchorage.
When prestressing steel has been stored for a
Prestressed precast concrete members shall also prolonged period and there is evidence of its
comply with the requirements of CLAUSE 6413. deterioration, the Contractor may be called on to prove
by tests that the quality of the steel has not been
6509 PRE-TENSIONING significantly impaired and that the prestressing steel still
During the period between tensioning and transfer, the complies with the provisions of these Specifications.
force in the tendon shall be fully maintained by some
positive means. At transfer, detensioning shall take Suitable protection shall be provided to the threaded
place slowly to minimise any shock which could ends of bars.
adversely affect the transmission length of the tendon.
After fabrication, the cable ends shall be covered with
In the long-line method of pre-tensioning, sufficient protective wrapping to prevent the ingress of moisture
locator plates shall be distributed through-out the length into the duct.
of the bed to ensure that the straight tendons are
maintained in their proper position during concreting. When the tendon is to be left untensioned for a
Where a number of units are manufactured in line, they prolonged period after installation, precautions shall be
shall be free to slide in the direction of their length so as taken to protect the tendon against corrosion. Corrosion
to permit transfer of the tendon force to the concrete inhibitors, oils or similar materials used as lubrication or
along the entire line. to provide temporary protection shall be such that they
can be completely removed before permanent
In the individual-mould system, the moulds shall be protection is effected.
sufficiently rigid to provide the reaction to the tendon
force without distortion. (b) Fabrication
All cutting of prestressing steel shall be performed with
Where possible, the mechanism for holding down or a high-speed abrasive cutting wheel or by a method
holding up deflected tendons shall ensure that the part approved by the Engineer. Flame cutting will not be
in contact with the tendon will be free to move in the line permitted.
of the tendon so that friction losses are eliminated. If,
however, a system is used which develops a frictional Care shall be taken to prevent the prestressing steel or
force, this force shall be determined by test and due anchorages from coming into contact with splashes
allowance made therefor. from flame-cutting or welding processes in the vicinity.
For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the Where possible, all bars, wires or strands tensioned in
tendon shall have a radius of not (less than 5 times the one operation shall be taken from the same parcel of
tendon diameter for wire, or 10 times the tendon prestressing steel. The tendon or cable shall be labelled
diameter for a strand, and the total angle of deflection to show the tendon or cable number, as well as identify
shall not exceed 15". from which parcel the steel has been taken.
Transfer of the tendon force to the concrete shall be Where bars, wires or strands in a tendon are not
effected in conjunction with the release of hold-down tensioned simultaneously, tendon spacers shall be used
and hold-up forces in accordance with an approved in accordance with the recommendations for the
method. prestressing system or, in the absence thereof, as
directed by the Engineer.
Transfer shall not be effected until compressive-
strength tests on the concrete show that the concrete of Cables shall be fitted at both ends with pipes with a
the particular member has attained a compressive diameter of at least 10 mm for the injection of grout or
strength of at least the compressive strength shown on protection agents. The ends of the injection pipes shall
the Drawings. The transmission length is affected by be fitted with a clamp, valve or device capable of
the concrete strength, and the necessary modification withstanding a pressure of at least 15 bars without loss
for the concrete strength at transfer shall be made in of grout or protection agent.
conjunction with the Engineer.
Vent pipes with a diameter of at least 25 mm shall be
The tendons shall be cut off flush with the end of the provided in the duct at every high point, change of
member and the exposed ends covered with a heavy sheath cross-section and at such intermediate positions
coat of approved bituminous material or epoxy resin. as may be shown on the Drawings or required by the
The cutting of the prestressing steel shall be performed Engineer. The vent pipes shall extend to at least 500
with a high-speed abrasive cutting wheel. Flame cutting mm above the concrete and shall comply with the
will not be permitted. requirements for injection pipes.
Connections to, and joints in sheaths shall be made

6510 POST-TENSIONING grout-tight by using special sheathing couplings and
taping. With bonded cables, the length of taping shall
not exceed six sheath diameters. Where over sleeves
(a) Storage, handling and protection
are used, equal overlaps shall be provided over each
During storage, transit, construction and after
length of sheathing. Joints in adjacent sheaths shall be
installation the sheaths, prestressing steel, anchorages
spaced at least 300 mm apart.
and couplers shall be protected against corrosion,
damage or permanent deformation. The manner and
(c) Installation
extent of protection required will depend on the
The installation of tendons shall not commence until the
environmental factors and the length of time before
requirements of CLAUSE 6507 have been complied with.
permanent corrosion protection is applied, and shall be
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Under severe

The cable, sheath or extractable core shall be permits, that all tendons are free to move in the
accurately installed to the specified alignment and ducts. All water in the ducts shall then be expelled
securely held in position both vertically and horizontally with compressed air and the cables sealed until
at intervals appropriate to its rigidity and so as not to be tensioning takes place.
displaced during concreting, either by the weight of the
concrete or by buoyancy. The spacing of the cable Before tensioning is commenced, the side forms
supports shall furthermore ensure that the tendon can and other restraining elements shall be released or
be installed to a smooth alignment without kinks and removed to give the structural member the freedom
within the tolerance specified in SUBCLAUSE 6803(g). to deform under the induced force.
Cable sheaths shall be supported and held in position
by means of separate reinforcing steel supports with a (ii) Tensioning sequence
diameter of not less than 16 mm. The transverse bars The sequence of tensioning to be followed shall be
must be welded to the vertical bars or must rest on lugs as shown on the Drawings and/or on drawings
welded to the vertical bars. The spacing of the vertical prepared by the Contractor in terms of CLAUSE
supports shall not exceed 1.0 m 6507. The Contractor shall make allowance in his
bid rates for all incidentals which he may have to
Extractable cores shall not be coated with release agent incur as a result of having to tension fully only some
unless approved by the Engineer. of the tendons at any one stage or instant. Where
partial tensioning of tendons is required, the work
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the shall be executed in accordance with the details on
alignment of the tendon within a distance of 1.0 m from the Drawings or as specified. The Contractor shall,
the live anchorage and/or coupler shall be straight. The in his bid rates, make provision for all incidentals he
tendon axis shall be set perpendicular to the bearing may have to incur as a result of having to tension
surface of its anchorage and firmly secured in position partially only some of or all the tendons at any one
so as not to move during concreting. External stage or instant.
anchorages shall be seated on a thin mortar bedding to
bear evenly on the concrete bearing (iii) Assembling the equipment, and safety precautions
surface, and the tendon axis shall be perpendicular to The tensioning and measuring equipment shall be
the bearing surface of the anchorage. assembled for tensioning in exactly the same way
as they are combined for calibration.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the minimum
concrete cover over the outside surface of the sheath or The Contractor shall take all the necessary safety
cable support shall comply with the requirements of precautions to prevent accidents caused by the
CLAUSE 6307, except that, for sheaths, the cover shall malfunctioning or failure of any part of the
not be less than 50 mm. equipment or material and shall accept full
responsibility for injury sustained by persons or
The spacing of cables will depend on the size of the damage to property resulting therefrom.
cable and shall be such that the concrete can be
properly placed and compacted. (iv) Friction
The Engineer may require the Contractor to perform
Immediately before concreting, the Contractor shall friction tests on designated tendons and to revise
inspect the sheaths for grout-tightness and shall seal all the relevant theoretical extensions to compensate
damaged and suspect sections. for the discrepancy between the values adopted in
the design and the test results. Payment for these
External tendons shall be installed to the same tests shall be made under ITEM 71.01.
standards and accuracy specified herein for internal
tendons. The tendons shall be temporarily supported at Where applicable, allowance shall be made in the
regular intervals along the straight length between tensioning force to compensate for friction loss in
saddles. The supports shall consist of rigidly the jack and in the anchorage.
constructed frames secured to the concrete face.
(v) Tensioning
(d) Concrete strength Tensioning shall be carried out under the
Full tensioning of all or some of the tendons shall not supervision of a technician skilled in the use of the
commence until the compressive-strength of the prestressing system and equipment and the
concrete is 35 MPa or the strength shown on the methods of tensioning to be adopted.
Drawings, whichever is the greater.
Tensioning shall not be commenced before the
The compressive strength of the concrete shall be Engineer has been advised of each tensioning
determined from cubes manufactured and tested in operation and has given his approval for the work to
accordance with SUBCLAUSE 7106(a) which have been be started.
cured under the same conditions as the structural
member which is to be prestressed. The number of The technician and operators shall be supplied with
concrete cubes required for this purpose shall be as a schedule listing the sequence of tensioning the
agreed on with the Engineer. various tendons and a tensioning record sheet
showing the theoretical gauge readings, jacking
Where initially all or some of the tendons are to be forces, extensions, release and pull-in for each
partially tensioned, tensioning shall not commence tensioning operation. The record sheet shall
before the concrete has attained the compressive furthermore provide room for entering the
strength indicated on the Drawings. corresponding information recorded and
observations made during tensioning. A graph of
the tensioning force and/or gauge reading versus
(e) Tensioning theoretical extensions shall, where required, be
appended to the record sheet and the actual
(i) Preparation extensions measured for each load increment shall
Within two hours of the concrete having been be plotted on the graph. Copies of the completed
placed, the Contractor shall demonstrate that record sheets and graphs shall be submitted to the
sheaths are free from obstructions, that extractable Engineer within 24 hours of each tensioning
cores can be removed and, where the design operation having been completed.

The Contractor shall note that the extensions shall SUBCLAUSE 6503(h) and subject to approval by the
be regarded as an indirect measurement of the Engineer.
tensioning force and shall serve as a control on the
tensioning force applied. Tendons located outside the structural section (ie
external tendons) shall be encased with a dense
The protruding ends of all bars, wires and strands concrete, dense mortar or material sufficiently
shall be clearly marked for the accurate stable and hard, all subject to approval. The
measurement of extension, release and pull-in. encasement shall be of the thickness shown on the
Drawings. Where bonding of the tendon to the
Before tensioning is commenced on external structural concrete is required, this shall be
tendons, a small load shall be applied to each achieved by bonding the concrete encasement to
tendon, commencing with the uppermost tendon. the structure with reinforcing steel as detailed on
The force shall be sufficient to take up all slack and the Drawings.
prevent entanglement of the tendons. Protection and bonding of the tendons shall be
effected within seven days of the final tensioning of
The jacking force shall be increased to the tendons, or as specified on the Drawings, but
approximately 5% to 10% of the final jacking force shall not take place without the prior approval of the
to take up the tendon slack and to determine the Engineer having been obtained.
zero position for measuring the extension and to
check the gripping devices and the position and After the permanent protection or bonding has been
alignment of the jacks. The load shall then be completed the anchorages shall be encased in
increased gradually to the full specified tensioning concrete or grout which shall be bonded to the old
force while intermediate gauge readings and concrete with epoxy resin designed for this
extensions are recorded at regular intervals. purpose, or shall be completely coated with a
corrosion-resistant material. The protection
The final stage of tensioning shall be deemed to provided shall in all cases prevent the ingress of
have been satisfactorily accomplished when all the water or aggressive agents.
following requirements have been complied with:
(ii) Preparation of ducts
(1) The tendons have been tensioned to the Before permanent protection and/or bonding of
required force. tendons is effected, the following precautions shall
be taken:
(2) The measured extension on individual tendons
is within ±6% of the theoretical extensions. (1) The cables shall be checked for blockages by
water or compressed air being injected.
(3) The average variation between the measured
and theoretical extensions of all the tendons in (2) Unlined ducts which are to be filled with grout
a structural member is less than ±3%. shall be flushed with water to wet the concrete.
(4) The release and/or pull-in is within +2 mm of (3) Temporary protection or lubricants which are
the theoretical values. incompatible with the permanent protection or
bonding, shall be removed by flushing the duct
Where the above conditions are not met individually with water or an inert solution, or by any
and collectively, the Contractor shall immediately suitable approved method.
advise the Engineer and obtain a ruling as to the
procedure to be followed. (4) On completion of the above, any excess fluid
shall be expelled from the ducts by means of
In the event of the tendon friction being too high, compressed air or shall be displaced by the
the Contractor may, subject to approval by the protecting agent or grout, as may be relevant.
Engineer, inject an approved lubricant into the
sheath after first having detensioned the tendon. (5) Any blockages, leakages or factors which in
any way may affect the permanent protection or
The cost of the remedial and corrective measures bonding shall immediately be reported to the
and of the release and retensioning of tendons, Engineer.
which have been occasioned by failure of the
operations to meet the above requirements shall be
for the Contractor's account. (iii) Mixing
After the tensioning has been accepted by the (1) Protecting agents
Engineer, the Contractor may cut off the tendons The mixing of protecting agents shall be strictly
behind the anchorage as described in SUBCLAUSE in accordance with the manufacturer's
6510(b). instructions.
(2) Grout
(f) Permanent protection and bonding of tendons The aggregate, if used, and the cement shall be
measured by mass, and the water by mass or
(i) General by volume.
After tensioning, all tendons shall receive
permanent protection against mechanical damage The water:cement ratio by mass shall be as low as
and corrosion. possible within the range between 0.36 to 0.45, and
shall be consistent with the fluidity requirements of
Internal tendons shall be protected and bonded to SUBCLAUSE 6503(g).
the structural member by cement grout or, when
permitted by the Engineer, by sand-cement grout. Where an admixture is used, it shall be dissolved in
Where bond is not important, protection may be a part of the mixing water before it is added to the
effected by the use of bitumen, petroleum-based grout.
compounds, epoxy resins, plastics and similar
products, all complying with the requirements of

Mixing shall be commenced by two-thirds of the mould shall be slightly tapped to permit any
cement being added to the greater part of the entrapped air to escape.
mixing water, and, it used, an additive predissolved
in part of the mixing water, and finally the remainder Precautions shall be taken not to discharge the
of the cement. Mixing shall continue for not longer escaping grout onto railway lines, public roads,
than four minutes after which the grout shall be water courses or private property.
continually agitated at slow speed throughout the
injection operation. If a blockage occurs during the course of
grouting, the grouting shall be stopped before
Where aggregate is used in the grout mix, the word the maximum grouting pressure is reached. The
“cement” in the preceding paragraph shall be duct shall then be flushed out immediately and
replaced by the term “cement/aggregate the blockage cleared.
component”.
Grouting shall not be carried out during very
cold weather when the ambient air temperature
0
(iv) Injection drops below 5 C. Care shall be taken that the
ducts are completely free from frost or ice
(1) General before grouting commences after frosty
The injection of permanent protecting agents or weather.
grout shall not commence before approval has
been granted that the work may start. 6511 LOSS OF PRESTRESS
Any structural member which has lost all or part of its
Before injection commences all air shall be prestress through the failure or malfunctioning of any
expelled from the injection equipment and part of the prestressing component may be rejected by
hoses and all connections checked for the Engineer and shall be removed from the Works
airtightness. unless approved remedial measures have been
successfully carried out on the member. No payment
Injection shall take place from the anchorage or will be made in respect of such remedial work or loss
coupler, whichever is situated at the lower end suffered by the Contractor in this regard.
of the cable. Grout injection shall proceed
without any interruption until the cable has been
completely filled and closed off. 6512 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(2) Protecting agents
ITEM UNIT
The injection of protecting agents shall be
strictly in accordance with the instructions, and 65.01 PRESTRESSING
with the equipment specified by the TENDONS:
manufacturer. (a) LONGITUDINAL MEGANEWTON - METRE
TENDONS (MN-m)
(3) Grout
(b) TRANSVERSE TENDONS MEGANEWTON - METRE
Immediately after mixing, and also during
(MN-m)
injection, the fluidity of the grout shall be tested
(c) VERTICAL TENDONS MEGANEWTON - METRE
at regular intervals in accordance with
(MN-m)
SUBCLAUSE 6503(i).
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton-
Injection shall be continuous at a rate of 6 to 12
metre which is calculated as the product of the
m per minute. As soon as grout with the original
characteristic strength in megapascals of the
consistency flows from the intermediate vent
prestressing steel, the cross-sectional area of the
pipes they shall be successively closed.
tendon in square metres and the length of the tendon in
Injection shall continue until the grout flowing
metres between the faces of the anchorages. In the
from the vent at the free end is of the same
case of fan and loop anchorages the "length of the
consistency as that of the injected grout. At this
tendon" shall include the length of tendon forming the
stage the vent shall be closed and the final
loop or fan.
pressure or a pressure of 5 bars, whichever is
the greater, shall have been maintained on the
grout column for five minutes before the valve
preparing and submitting the Drawings, supplying,
at the injection end is closed.
storing, handling and protecting all materials (excluding
anchorages and couplers), fabricating, supporting and
All vents shall be kept closed and supported
installing the cables; lubricating, permanently protecting
vertically until the grout has finally settled. On
and bonding the tendons, for the using of all the
vertical cables, a riser pipe with funnel shall be
equipment, as well as for all work and incidentals
fitted to the top anchor to ensure that the
required for completing the work as specified.
separated water migrates upwards and will not
remain in the cable.
ITEM UNIT
If an expanding agent is used in the grout mix,
the air vents shall be re-opened after grouting 65.02 ANCHORAGES AND
to release any separated water, and shall then COUPLERS:
again be closed. (a) END ANCHORAGE AT MEGANEWTON (MN)
JACKING
Unless a retarder is used in the grout mix, the
(b) ANCHORAGE AT DEAD END MEGANEWTON (MN)
grout not used within 60 minutes of mixing shall
be discarded. (c) COUPLER AT JACKING END MEGANEWTON (MN)
(d) COUPLER AT DEAD END MEGANEWTON (MN)
During the course of grouting 100mm cubes
shall be made for testing in accordance with The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton
SUBCLAUSE 6503(i). Whilst the grout is being
which is calculated as the product of the characteristic
poured into the cube mould, the sides of the

strength in megapascals of the prestressing steel and

the cross-sectional area of the tendon in square metres,
effectively anchored or coupled.

supplying, storing, handling, fabricating and protecting
the complete anchorage or coupler assembly,
anchorage reinforcing, constructing the recesses for the
anchorage or coupler, tensioning, anchoring and/or
coupling, trimming the tendon ends, using all the
equipment, as well as for all work and incidentals
required for completing the work as specified.
The coupler shall include the complete assembly

consisting of the anchorage built into the first-stage
construction and the part coupled to it.
The bid rate for loop or fan anchorages shall exclude

the cost of the length of tendon forming the loop or fan.
ITEM UNIT
65.03 EXTRA OVER ITEM 65.02 MEGANEWTON
FOR PARTIALLY TENSIONING (MN)
THE TENDONS
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton,

which is calculated as for ITEM 65.02.
The bid rate shall include full compensation for the use
of all equipment, as well as for all work and incidentals
required for tensioning and anchoring the tendons to
the specified partial force.

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES The aggregate shall be moist or wetted before the
cement is added. Where drum mixers are used, about
20% of the water shall be poured into the drum before
SECTION 6600: NO-FINES the aggregate and cement are loaded. The mixing time
in the drum shall be about 45 to 50 seconds.
CONCRETE, JOINTS, BEARINGS,
The quantity of water added shall be just sufficient to
PARAPETS AND DRAINAGE FOR form a smooth grout which will adhere to and
STRUCTURES completely coat each and every particle of aggregate,
and which is just wet enough to ensure that, at points of
contact of aggregate, the grout will run together to form
CONTENTS: a small fillet to bond the aggregate together. The mix
CLAUSE PAGE shall contain no more than 20 litres of water for every
50 kg of cement.
6601 SCOPE 6000-48
6602 NO-FINES CONCRETE 6000-48 Mixing shall be done in an approved batch-type
6603 JOINTS IN STRUCTURES 6000-48 mechanical mixer, but small quantities may be hand
6604 BEARINGS FOR STRUCTURES 6000-51 mixed.
6605 PARAPETS, RAILINGS AND SIDEWALKS 6000-54
6606 DRAINAGE FOR STRUCTURES 6000-55 (d) Placing
6607 BOLT GROUPS FOR ELECTRIFICATION No-fines concrete shall be placed in accordance with
BRACKETS 6000-55 the procedure approved by the Engineer. It shall be
6608 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6000-55 placed in its final position within 15 minutes of having
been mixed.
The concrete shall be worked sufficiently to ensure that

6601 SCOPE it will completely fill the space to be concreted and that
This Section covers: adjacent aggregate particles are in contact with one
− the manufacture and placing of no-fines concrete another. Excessive tamping shall be avoided and the
used in the Works; concrete shall not in any circumstances be vibrated.
− the supply and installation of all permanent joints
which will permit relative movement between (e) Protection
contiguous structural members; All no-fines concrete shall be protected from the
− the construction, supply and installation of bearings elements' and loss of moisture. Protection against loss
for structures; of moisture shall be accomplished by one or more of
− the construction of parapets, railings and sidewalks the following methods:
on structures;
− the construction and/or installation of drainage (i) Retaining formwork in place.
works such as weep holes, drainage pipes and
gulleys, no-fines concrete blocks, filter lining and (ii) Covering enclosed surfaces with sacking or other
concrete channelling; approved material kept continuously wet.
− bolt groups for electrification brackets.
(iii) Covering enclosed surfaces with plastic sheeting.
No-fines concrete placed during cold weather shall be

6602 NO-FINES CONCRETE adequately protected against frost for at least three
days.
(a) Materials
Cement, aggregate and water shall comply with the
6603 JOINTS IN STRUCTURES
Each size of aggregate shall be a single size aggregate
(a) Materials
graded in accordance with SABS 1083 Part II or
equivalent.
(i) General
(b) Classes of no-fines concrete All materials used in forming, constructing and
No-fines concrete shall be classified by the prefix NF sealing permanent joints as well as all proprietary or
and the size of aggregate to be used. E.g. CLASS NF 19 custom-built expansion-joint assemblies shall be
means a no fines concrete with a 19.0 mm nominal size subject to the approval of the Engineer.
aggregate.
When required by the Engineer, the Contractor
The volume of aggregate per 50 kg of cement for each shall submit test certificates issued by an approved,
class of concrete shall be as detailed in TABLE 6602/1. independent testing authority to confirm that the
respective materials comply with the specified
requirements, or a certificate by the patent holder or
TABLE 6602/1 designer certifying that the manufactured item
VOLUMES OF AGGREGATE complies in all respects with relevant product
specifications.
Class of cement Aggregate per 50 kg
3
(ii) Joint filler
NF38 0.33 m Joint filler shall consist of sheets or strips of the
3
NF19 0.30 m following materials complying with the requirements
3
NF13 0.27 m of the relevant specifications listed:
(c) Batching and mixing (1) Bitumen-impregnated fibreboard and bitumen
Cement shall be measured by mass or in full pockets of impregnated corkboard - US Federal
50 kg each and aggregate shall be measured by Specification HH-F-341 F or AASHTO
volume in approved measuring boxes or barrows. Specification M-213.

(2) Resin-impregnated corkboard - US Federal (vi) Cover plates

Specification HH-F-341F.
(1) Steel cover plates shall be of
(3) Flexible foams of expanded polyethylene, − Grade 43A steel which complies with the
polyurethane, PVC or polypropylene – requirements of BS 4360, or
AASHTO Specification M-153. − Grade 300W steel which complies with the
requirements of SABS 1431 or equivalent.
(4) Rigid foams of expanded polyethylene,
polyurethane or polystyrene - BS 4840 or BS (2) Galvanising shall comply with the requirements
3837. of SABS 763 or equivalent.
Other joint filler materials may be used if approved (3) Anchor bolts shall be of stainless steel Grade
by the Engineer after he has been furnished with 302 S.21, which complies with the requirements
full specifications and information by the Contractor. of BS 970 Part 4.
(iii) Sealants
Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall comply (b) Filled and unfilled joints
with the requirements of US Federal Specification
SS-S-1401 B, BS 2499 or AASHTO Specification (i) General
M-173. The sealants shall be of the rubberised Wherever polystyrene or similar material
bituminous type containing a minimum of 20% susceptible to damage is used for forming joints, it
natural or synthetic rubber. shall be lined with a hard surface on the side to be
concreted. The hard surface shall be sufficiently
Thermoplastic cold-applied sealants shall comply resilient to ensure that the joint and surfaces can be
with the requirements of US Federal Specification formed free from defects.
SS-S-156. The sealant shall be of the rubberised
bituminous type containing a minimum of 20% (ii) Filled joints
natural or synthetic rubber. Filled joints shall be accurately formed to the
dimensions shown and with the filler material
Thermosetting chemically curing sealants shall specified on the Drawings. The filler shall be
comply with the requirements of ASTM C-920 or BS secured in position not to displace during concreting
4254. or thereafter if the filler is to remain permanently in
the joint.
The final IRHD (International Rubber Hardness
Degree) hardness of the sealant shall be 20 +5. Where the removal of the filter is required, it shall
be done prior to the installation of the proprietary
Silicone sealants shall comply with the joint.
requirements of the Special Specifications.
(iii) Unfilled joints
Other sealants may be used if approved by the Unfilled joints shall be accurately formed to the
Engineer after he has been furnished with full dimensions given on the Drawings and all external
information and specifications by the Contractor. corners chamfered or rounded for at least 5 mm.
The concrete face against which the fresh concrete
(iv) Waterstops is placed shall be treated in good time with an
Waterstops shall be of natural rubber or flexible approved bond breaker.
PVC and of the type specified or shown on the
Drawings. (c) Concrete nosings
Concrete nosings forming the edges of expansion joints
Natural-rubber waterstops shall comply with the shall be constructed as follows:
requirements of CKS 388.
(i) After the concrete in the structural member has
Flexible PVC rubber waterstops shall comply with hardened sufficiently, the protruding ends of the
the requirements of CKS 389. reinforcing steel shall be bent flat onto the concrete
surface of the formed recess.
(v) Accessory material (ii) Before the asphalt surfacing is laid, the recess shall
be filled with well-compacted crusher run, sand or
(1) Primers weak mortar. The Contractor shall ensure that the
Where a primer is to be used in conjunction concrete surfaces of the recess and the reinforcing
with the sealant, it shall be of the prescribed steel are not contaminated with bituminous agents.
proprietary material. The asphalt surfacing shall then be laid
continuously over the joint.
(2) Bond breakers
Polyethylene tape coated paper, metal foil or (iii) The asphalt surfacing shall be cut with a diamond
similar material may be used where bond saw blade to correspond to the width of the nosing
breakers are required. and all material shall be removed from the nosing
recess. The concrete surfaces of the recess shall
(3) Backup material then be roughened to expose the aggregate and
Backup material shall consist of a compressible leave sound, irregular surfaces. The reinforcing
material of correct width and shape to ensure steel shall then be bent, fixed and placed as shown
that, after installation, it will be in approximately on the Drawings.
50% compression and the sealant can be
formed to the specified depth. (iv) The prepared concrete surfaces of the recesses
shall be treated with an approved epoxy-resin
Backup materials shall be compatible with the adhesive, immediately before the concrete nosings
sealant used. Material containing bitumen or are cast. Opposite concrete nosings, separated by
solvents shall not be used with thermosetting a joint filler strip, shall be cast simultaneously in
chemically curing sealants. accordance with SUBCLAUSE 6408(c), and

compacted by vibrator. The nosing shall be The Contractor shall ensure that primers are
screeded flush with the premix surfacing and be applied only to surfaces which are absolutely dry.
given a Class U2 surface finish. The primer shall be applied strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Unless
(v) Curing shall be in accordance with Method (f) of otherwise specified, the primer shall be applied
0 0
CLAUSE 6409. within the temperature range of 10 C and 40 C, and
the sealant shall be applied after the curing period
(vi) After three days, the gap between the nosings shall of the primer and within the period when the primer
be enlarged to the requisite dimensions by cutting remains active.
both sides with parallel diamond saw blades. The
depth of the saw cut shall be such that a ledge is (iii) Sealants
formed along the lower edge of the cut on which the Sealants shall be applied strictly in accordance with
sealer unit can be supported. the manufacturer's instructions by a person skilled
in the use of the particular type of sealant. Trapping
(vii) The exposed corners of the nosings shall be ground of air and the forming of voids in the sealant shall
to a 10 mm chamfer. be avoided. The sealant shall be finished to a neat
appearance to the specified depth.
(viii) After the joint has been sealed, the wearing
surface of the nosings shall be treated with a Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall not be
bituminous primer to the satisfaction of the poured into the joints when the temperature of the
0
Engineer. joint is below 10 C. The safe heating temperature
shall not exceed the specified pouring temperature
0
Unless otherwise specified, traffic shall not be by more than 10 C.
permitted to pass over the joint before the concrete
in the nosing has aged for at least 10 days. Two-part thermosetting chemically curing sealants
shall not be applied after expiry of the specified pot-
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the life period which commences once the base and
concrete used in the construction of the nosings activator of the sealant have been combined.
shall be Class 40/13 and shall have a slump of not
less than 50 mm and not exceeding 75 mm. (iv) Waterstops
Waterstops shall be securely and accurately
Concrete nosings shall be constructed under the located in position so that they will not be displaced
direct supervision of experienced and skilled or deformed during construction.
personnel.
(d) Plug type expansion joints (f) Proprietary expansion joints

Plug type expansion joint systems, shall be constructed
in accordance with the details on the Drawings and the (i) General
specifications and instructions of the licences. The use of any type of expansion joint shall be
subject to approval. Bidders shall obtain approval
for the type of expansion joint they intend using
(e) Sealing the joints prior to submitting their bids.
(i) General (ii) Dimensions

Sealed joints shall be made watertight over the full The Contractor shall note the overall dimensions of
length of the joint, including the full height of the the expansion joints and the limiting dimensions of
kerbing, unless otherwise prescribed in the Special that portion of the concrete structure which is to
Specifications. Unless a waterstop is equipped with accommodate the joints. No alterations to the
an effective watertight interlocking system for concrete which will be visible in the final structure or
joining sections, all joints in waterstops shall be major re-arrangement of the prestressing
bonded or fused to have a tensile strength of at anchorages will be permitted in order to
least 50% of that of the unjointed material. At accommodate joints of excessive size.
intersections and abrupt changes of direction,
waterstops shall be jointed with prefabricated All joints to be installed skew shall be accurately
junction pieces. dimensioned to ensure compliance with the
requirements of SUBCLAUSE 6603(g).
Restrictions on joint width and on the temperature
at the time of installing the sealant or seal will be Unless otherwise specified, proprietary expansion
shown on the Drawings. In the absence of such joints shall include the complete expansion-joint
restrictions on the Drawings, and unless otherwise assembly, traversing the entire roadway, kerbs,
specified, installation shall be carried out only within sidewalks and median, and shall include the coping
0 0
the temperature range between 5 C and 30 C. and parapet cover plates as well as the drainage
system to drain the expansion joint.
(ii) Preparing the joints
Where required, joints shall be sawn at a suitable (iii) Design and manufacture
time so as to avoid edge spalling or ravelling. The expansion joint shall be designed to withstand
the movements, displacements and rotations
After the temporary filler material has been specified on the Drawings in conjunction with the
removed or the excess concrete has been broken loads described in the code of practice adopted for
out, the inside faces of the joint shall be the design of the structure without exceeding in any
wirebrushed or sand-blasted to remove all laitance member the requirement for serviceability limit
and contaminants. The joint shall then be cleaned state. Any strengthening of the supporting member
and blown out with compressed air to remove all required to resist forces imparted by the joint to the
traces of dust. Solvents shall not be used for structure shall be for the Contractor's account.
removing contaminants from the concrete and
porous surfaces. The specified movements, displacements and
rotations shall be withstood without the efficacy or
riding quality of the joint being impaired.

The joint shall be vibration free, resistant to (ii) Roofing felt

mechanical wear and other forms of abrasion, and Roofing felt shall be 3-ply and comply with the
shall resist corrosion. It shall have good riding requirements of SABS 92 or equivalent for Type 1
characteristics, shall be highly skid resistant, silent, roofing felt.
and of watertight construction or have provision for
the disposal of water debris or grit collecting in the (iii) Elastomer
joint. It shall be of a construction that will facilitate The elastomer used in the manufacture of bearings
easy inspection, maintenance and repair. shall be natural rubber or synthetic rubber.
Apart from stainless steel, all steel surfaces shall be Natural rubber shall comply with the requirements
prepared in accordance with the requirements of of BS 1154 for specified IRHD hardness.
SUBCLAUSE 5907(b) and sprayed with a galvanising
coat which complies with the requirements of SABS Synthetic rubber shall comply with the requirements
1391 Part I or equivalent for Zn 150 coverage. All of BS 2752 for specified IRHD hardness.
enclosed surfaces sprayed with zinc shall, within
four hours, be covered with a sealant suitable for (iv) Stainless steel plate
use with the zinc and the subsequent layer. Two The texture of the sliding surface of stainless steel
coats of chlorinated rubber paint with a combined plate used in conjunction with PTFE to form low-
dry-coat thickness of not less than 150 µm shall friction sliding surfaces shall be equal to or better
then be applied. They shall be of two different than 0.2 µm Ra in accordance with the
colours. requirements of BS 1134.
Prior to manufacture of the joints, the Contractor (v) Stainless steel dowels and bolts
shall submit for approval detail drawings in Stainless steel used for the manufacture of dowels
accordance with the requirements of CLAUSE 1221 and anchor bolts shall comply with the requirements
of each expansion joint. The expansion joints of BS 970 : Part 4 for steel 316S16.
delivered at the site shall be suitably marked to
show clearly the sequence and position of (vi) Mortar
installation. Mortar beddings for seating the bearings shall be
composed of an approved sand and either cement
(g) Installing the expansion joints or epoxy resin, or may consist of an approved
Proprietary expansion joints shall be installed by proprietary mortar. The mortar shall comply with the
approved specialist subcontractors only. Installed following strength requirements:
proprietary expansion joints shall have a 15 year written
guarantee. No expansion joint or part thereof shall be (1) Sand-cement mortar
installed prior to the construction of the final surfacing, The 7-day compressive strength of 150 mm
unless otherwise approved. cubes made from the mortar and cured in a
moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours and
0
The expansion joint shall form an even surface with the afterwards in water at 20 C shall be not less
road surface on either side and the deviation across than 1.5 times the average contact stress under
and along the expansion joint shall comply with the the bearing or 15 MPa, whichever is the
requirements of SUBCLAUSE 3405(e) and SUBCLAUSE greater.
3405(f) for surface regularity measured by ordinary
straight-edge. (2) Sand-epoxy resin mortar.
The cured compressive cube strength of the
On completion of the installation of the proprietary mortar shall be not less than two times the
expansion joints, the Contractor shall submit to the average contact stress under the bearing, or
Engineer a certificate from the manufacturer or supplier 20MPa, whichever is the greater.
of the joints, certifying acceptance of the installation.
Notwithstanding the issuing of such certificate, it shall (3) Proprietary mortar
not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility under the The strength requirements for proprietary
Contract. No separate payment will be made for the mortars shall be in accordance with either
inspection of the joints and the issuing of the certificate SUBCLAUSE 6604(a)(vi)(1) or (2) as may be
by the manufacturer or supplier. It will be regarded as relevant.
an obligation of the Contractor to be covered by the
contract prices paid for joints. (b) Concrete hinges
Concrete hinges shall be constructed in accordance
with the details shown on the Drawings.
6604 BEARINGS FOR STRUCTURES
Construction joints shall not be formed in the throat
(a) Materials area. Where a joint is necessary, it shall be formed as a
recess below the throat, level with the top reinforcement
(i) General mat. The width of the recess shall be slightly greater
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor than that of the throat.
shall submit test certificates from an approved,
independent testing authority to show that the Care shall be taken to eliminate the formation of
respective materials comply with the specified shrinkage cracks within the throat.
requirements, or a certificate from the patent holder
or designer certifying that the manufactured item During construction, adequate bracing and support shall
complies in all respects with relevant product be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer to
specifications. prevent rotation in the throat from the time of casting to
completion of the structure incorporating the hinge.
Unless otherwise specified, all the materials used During the course of construction the hinge shall not be
for manufacturing the bearings shall comply with subjected to conditions which will induce tensile
the requirements of BS 5400 : Part 9.2. stresses in the throat area. Upon completion of the
structural members incorporating the hinge, the space
around the throat shall be filled and sealed with an
approved compressible material.

(c) Roofing felt tests, for bearings damaged, and for sample
Roofing felt used as bearing strips shall consist of at bearings.
least three layers.
Copies of test results and certificates for the above
Where lubricated linings are specified, the roofing felt mentioned tests shall be submitted by the
shall be saturated with used motor oil and then liberally Contractor to the Engineer in good time to enable
dusted with graphite powder before it is laid on the the Engineer to assess the information before the
bearing surface. bearings are installed.
The dimensional tolerances for the bearings shall

(d) Elastomeric bearings comply with the requirements of SUBCLAUSE
6803(h).
(i) Technical data
The following technical data for the elastomeric Before the bearings are dispatched to the site of the
bearings will be supplied on the Drawings, and shall Works, each bearing, with the exception of large
also be supplied on drawings prepared by the bearings as provided for in the Special
Contractor for submission to the Engineer: Specifications shall be subjected simultaneously to
a vertical load equal to 150% of the maximum
(1) Design loads and deformations design load, and to a shear distortion equal to
The critical design-load combinations and co- 150% of the maximum design value. The bearings
existing rotations and horizontal displacements shall be visually inspected for defects by the
for each bearing or each group of identical Engineer or his nominee and shall not at any stage
bearings. under this test show any cracks visible to the naked
eye or any other defects. The cost of this testing
(2) Size and construction of bearing shall be included in the rate bid for ITEM 71.01.
The size and construction of the bearing shall
be designated by: The Engineer may instruct that one bearing of each
consignment shall be cut open with a view to a
L x B x n(t) visual assessment of the bonding and the thickness
of layers.
where:
L = length of bearing in the (e) Proprietary bearings

transverse direction, in mm
B = width of bearing in the span (i) General
direction, in mm This Clause covers custom-built bearings and
n = number of elastomer layers. bearings manufactured under licence, except
t = thickness of individual elastomeric bearings. Combined bearings,
elastomer layers, in mm consisting of an assembly of an elastomeric bearing
in conjunction with a low-friction sliding or
The steel plates shall be encased in a 3mm mechanical component shall fall under this Clause.
thick elastomer layer.
The bidder may base his bid on any bearing which
(3) Hardness and type of elastomer complies with the specified requirements, provided
The IRHD hardness and type of elastomer, ie that the efficacy of the bearing has been verified by
natural or synthetic rubber, from which the tests and successful previous use. Evidence hereof
specified bearings are to be manufactured. as well as information on the durability and
suitability of the bearings for the specified use shall
(4) Identification be submitted to the Engineer for consideration.
Each bearing shall be identified by a number.
Details of the product guarantee shall be submitted
(ii) Alternative bearings with the bid.
Where alternative bearings are offered by the
Contractor, they shall be designed in accordance (ii) Drawings and approval
with the requirements of BS 5400 Part 9.1 for the Prior to manufacturing the bearings, the Contractor
loadings and deformations shown on the Drawings. or his nominee shall submit the following
information to the Engineer for consideration:
Where a bearing consisting of a type of rubber is
offered which differs from that which is specified, (1) The manufacturer's specification containing
the bearing shall be redesigned to make provision detailed information on the design standards,
for the variation in hardness and/or type of rubber. materials, manufacture and technical data.
(iii) Inspection and testing (2) Drawings complying with the provision in
On completion of the manufacture of the bearings, CLAUSE 1221 showing the bearing construction
the Contractor shall submit bearings selected by the and installation details.
Engineer, or specially manufactured bearings to
serve as samples as authorised by the Engineer, to (3) Friction properties based on actual tests
an independent testing authority for testing. conducted on the relevant materials.
The testing facilities of the manufacturer or supplier (iii) Technical requirements

may be used if so approved and on condition that The following technical requirements will be
the tests are conducted in the presence of the supplied on the Drawings, and shall also be
Engineer. supplied on the Drawings prepared by the
Contractor for submission to the Engineer:
The Engineer shall determine which tests are to be
conducted, and the tests shall comply with the (1) Design loads and movement
appropriate requirements of SUBCLAUSE 7111(a). The maximum and minimum vertical loads and
Payment will be made under ITEM 71.01 for these co-existing horizontal loads as well as the

maximum horizontal load and co-existing − Spraying the surfaces with zinc to comply
vertical load. The maximum values in each with the requirements of AASHTO M32-97
direction of the reversible and irreversible or equivalent on approval of the Engineer
movements and the rotation about each axis. for Type Zn 150 surfacing.
− Coating the zinc-sprayed surfaces within

(2) Identification four hours with a sealer compatible with the
Identification of each bearing by a number, data zinc and the subsequent coats of paint.
on the degree of freedom of movement (fixed,
multi-directional or unidirectional bearings) and − Applying a coat of chlorinated rubber paint
the type of bearing (spherical, elastomer-pot, with a minimum of 75 µm of dry-film
etc) shall appear on each bearing. thickness and of a colour which differs from
that of the final coat of paint.
(iv) Design
The bearings shall be designed in accordance with − Applying a final coat of chlorinated rubber
the requirements and recommendations of BS 5400 paint with a minimum of 75µm of dry-film
Part 9.1. The following shall also be complied with: thickness and of dark grey colour.
(1) The average pressure on the area of the − Surfaces in contact with concrete shall be
elastomer shall not exceed 25MPa under the sprayed with zinc so that it complies with
serviceability limit state, unless otherwise the requirements of AASHTO M32-97 or
prescribed by the Engineer. equivalent on approval of the Engineer for
Type Zn 150 surfacing.
(2) The maximum average contact stress and
maximum edge stress on the concrete or (vi) Inspection and testing
mortar bedding shall not exceed 0.5 and 0.6 The Engineer may require tests to be conducted to
times the 28-day cube characteristic verify compliance of the bearing with the
compressive strength under the serviceability specifications and/or its satisfactory performance
limit state respectively, unless otherwise under the design loads. Payment for this testing will
prescribed by the Engineer. be made under ITEM 71.01.
(3) The bearing pad shall be of dimensions as will Test certificates of all the tests conducted shall be
fit into the space allowed for its installation. submitted to the Engineer.
Major alterations to the contiguous members
will not be permitted. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least
seven days notice prior to final assembly of the
(v) Construction bearings to enable the Engineer to inspect the
Unless otherwise specified, the following shall be bearings at the factory.
complied with:
Under no circumstances shall bearings be taken
(1) The thickness of the elastomer disc shall be not apart and reassembled on the site, except where it
less than 0.066 times its diameter. is an unavoidable feature of the installation
procedure, in which case the dismantling,
(2) Approved lubricants only shall be used on the installation and reassembly shall be under the
PTFE sliding surfaces. supervision of qualified personnel.
(3) The bearing shall be provided with tight-fitting Rehabilitation, modification and repair work to
seals to prevent the ingress of dust or bearings shall be carried out only in the factory or in
deleterious matter onto the moving parts. The an approved engineering Works.
seals shall be of an approved type and
sufficiently durable to last in excess of 50 years. (f) Dowels and guides
Where dowels and guides are used in conjunction with
(4) The assembled bearing shall be supplied with bearings they shall not complicate or prevent the
welded or bolted lugs or straps, temporarily removal of the bearings.
securing the moving parts firmly in position to
ensure that no undesirable relative movement (g) Storage and handling
occurs before or during construction. The bearings shall at all times be stored under cover
and clear of the ground, away from sunlight, heat, oils
(5) The bearing shall be recessed into adapter and chemicals deleterious to the bearings. The
plates or be of such construction as to facilitate bearings shall not be stacked in a manner or on a
removal of the bearing from the installed surface which will cause distortion of the bearings.
position without damage to any part of the
bearing or the surrounding material after the The bearings shall be handled with care to ensure that
relevant structural member has been raised by they are not subjected to impact loads or any other
15 mm or the distance specified. conditions which may be harmful.
(6) Anchors and holding-down bolts shall be of the (h) Installation
specified material. The concrete surfaces of elements required to receive
bearings shall comply with the requirements of
(7) Corrosion protection of all exposed steel SUBCLAUSE 6209(c). Plastering of the surface will not
surfaces, with the exception of the stainless- under any circumstances be permitted.
steel sliding plate, shall involve the following
treatment: Before the mortar bedding is constructed, the concrete
surface shall be chipped back to expose the aggregate
− Preparing the surfaces by abrasive blasting and leave a sound irregular surface. Bonding of the
to a finish equal to the Sa3 finish of mortar bedding to the concrete surface shall be in
Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00 or
equivalent.

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations The pipes and fittings to be used for the construction of
and the Engineer's instructions. the ducting shall be rigid PVC pipes and fittings with
flexible rubber joints which comply with the
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the bearings requirements of SABS 967 or equivalent. Duct ends
shall be installed on a horizontal plane and shall be in shall be provided with suitable conical wooden stoppers
full contact with the concrete and bedding surfaces. to prevent dirt, concrete, etc, from entering the ducts.
Two strands of 2.5 mm diameter galvanised steel wire
To accommodate soffit irregularities and camber in the shall be threaded through each duct. The strands shall
case of precast members, the member shall be lowered extend 2 m beyond each end and be wedged firmly into
onto a mortar skim on top of the bearing. The member position with the wooden stoppers. Inspection eyes for
shall then be propped until the mortar skim has the ducts shall be constructed in accordance with the
hardened into a wedge. details shown on the Drawings.
The bearings shall be accurately installed to the No separate payment will be made for service ducts in
specified level, alignment and orientation, all within the parapets and end blocks and the rates bid for the
construction tolerances set out in SUBCLAUSE 6803(h) parapets and end blocks shall include full compensation
and the details shown on the Drawings. for the provision and installation of service ducts
complete with stoppers, draw wire and inspection eyes.
Where the bearing has long sliding plates, the latter
shall be rigidly supported to prevent their being (c) Steel railings
distorted under the weight of the wet concrete and the All steelwork shall be manufactured in accordance with
construction loads. Before the bearing is incorporated the requirements of SECTION 6700.
into the structure, it shall be cleaned to remove all
deleterious substances and adhering matter, after A mortar bed, not less than 10 mm in thickness, shall
which it shall be wrapped in polyethylene sheeting and be provided below all steel base plates over the full
so sealed as to prevent the ingress of mortar and/or dimensions of the plate. The sides of the beds shall be
0
slush onto the bearing during the course of neatly chamfered at 45 . All open spaces between the
construction. bolt and the sides of the holes in the base plate shall be
grout filled.
After installation, the polyethylene wrapping shall be
removed, the bearing and the space around the bearing Steelwork which is to be cast or grouted into concrete
thoroughly cleaned and the lugs removed as prescribed shall be completely painted to a distance of 75 mm in
by the Engineer. the concrete or grout, and shall be cleaned of all loose
rust, mill scale, oil or other material which may impair
On completion of installation of proprietary bearings, the the bond between the concrete and steel.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a certificate
from the manufacturer or supplier of the bearings All steelwork shall be painted in the shop and on site in
certifying acceptance of the installation. The issuing of accordance with the provisions of SECTION 5900.
such a certificate shall not relieve the Contractor of his Surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection of the
responsibility under this Contract. No separate payment units shall be painted before erection commences. If
will be made for the inspection of the bearings by the called for on the Drawings or in the Bill of Quantities
manufacturer or supplier and the issuing of the steelwork shall be galvanised and painted. Galvanising
certificate. shall be done after fabrication, in accordance with
SABS 763 or equivalent for Type A1 articles.
6605 PARAPETS, RAILINGS AND SIDEWALKS

(d) Numbers for structures
(a) Materials
(i) Number plates
(i) Concrete Number plates shall be fixed in the positions and
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance according to the method of fixing shown on the
with the requirements of SECTIONS 6200, 6300, Drawings.
6400 and CLAUSE 6603.
(ii) Painted numbers
(ii) Structural steel The surface onto which the numbers are to be
Structural steel work shall comply with the painted shall be prepared in accordance with the
provisions of SUBCLAUSE 6702(a). requirements of SUBCLAUSE 5909(a). The
background shall be of at least two coats of the
(iii) Mortar prescribed paint. The letters and figures shall be in
Mortar shall comply with the requirements of accordance with the details given on the Drawings
SUBCLAUSE 6604(a). and shall be written at the prescribed positions with
a template.
(b) Concrete parapets
Concrete parapets shall be either cast in situ or precast (iii) Numbers shaped in concrete
or a combination of the two as shown on the Drawings. Bridge numbers shall be placed and shaped in
Where possible, precast elements shall be placed with accordance with the requirements shown on the
the unformed surface downwards or outwards. Drawings. The minimum concrete cover over the
steel reinforcement behind the numbers shall not be
Concrete parapets shall be constructed after the less than the prescribed cover for the structural
removal of the falsework and the completion of the member in question.
prestressing but not before the bridge deck has been
accurately measured so as to determine the final lines (e) Concrete sidewalks
and levels. After completion of the prestressing and the removal of
the formwork, the sidewalks and kerbing shall be
Service ducts in parapets and blocks shall be fixed and constructed, but not before the bridge deck has been
cast into position in accordance with the requirements accurately surveyed to establish final lines and levels.
of CLAUSE 6411 and the details shown on the Drawings.

The previously cast bridge deck area shall be prepared The fabric shall comply with the requirements of
as specified in CLAUSE 6408 to receive the sidewalk SUBCLAUSE 2104(a).
concrete.
6607 BOLT GROUPS FOR ELECTRIFICATION
Forms shall be accurately set to the final lines and BRACKETS
levels and shall be firmly held in position during the
The Contractor shall supply and install bolt groups in
placing of the concrete. Stops at the ends of sections
bridge decks for the electrification brackets of Railway
shall be accurately placed to ensure that joints between
Owners. The bolt groups shall consist of stainless-steel
adjacent sections will be truly perpendicular to the
sockets complete with stainless-steel bolts and mild-
surface of the concrete and at right angles to the edge
steel plates. The sockets, bolts and plates shall be
of the road or to the skew angle of the deck at the
manufactured in accordance with the details shown on
expansion joint.
the Drawings. The Contractor shall install the sockets in
bridge decks in the positions and in the manner shown
After removal of the forms, the enclosed surfaces of the
on the Drawings.
kerbs and copings shall be rubbed and finished in
accordance with the requirements of SUBCLAUSES
On completion of the deck, the Contractor shall ensure
6208(a), 6208(c) and 6209(b). All edges shall be
that the threads of the bolts and sockets are clean and
rounded to a radius of 20 mm unless otherwise shown
that the bolts can be secured in the sockets. The
on the Drawings.
Railway Owner will supply and install the brackets at a
later stage.
(f) Concrete surface finish requirements
All formed concrete surfaces shall have a Class F3
surface finish as specified in SUBCLAUSE 6207(d) and all
unformed concrete surfaces shall have a Class U3 6608 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
surface finish in accordance with SUBCLAUSE 6209(c).
ITEM UNIT
(g) Transition blocks 66.01 CAST IN SITU NO-FINES CUBIC METRE
3
Transition blocks shall be constructed in accordance CONCRETE (m )
with the details shown on the Drawings.
The provisions of CLAUSE 6415 ITEM 64.01 shall apply
(h) Nose endings
with changes as required.
Nose endings at balustrades shall be constructed in
accordance with the details on the Drawings.
ITEM UNIT
6606 DRAINAGE FOR STRUCTURES 66.02 PRECAST NO-FINES CONCRETE NUMBER

UNITS (CLASS OF CONCRETE AND (no)
DESCRIPTION OF UNIT)
(a) Weep holes, drainage pipes and channelling
Weep holes shall not be placed within 40mm of any
reinforcement and shall be carefully cleaned and kept The unit of measurement shall be the number of
clean. Drainage pipes shall be of the material complete units of each size and type in position in the
prescribed on the Drawings, and the interior surface Works.
shall, on completion, be smooth and clean.
The bid rate for each precast concrete unit shall include
Cast in situ concrete channelling shall be provided next full compensation for providing all the materials, labour,
to the kerbing if shown on the Drawings and according plant and formwork required for manufacturing the unit
to the details provided. Concrete work shall be carried complete as shown on the Drawings and for
out in accordance with the provisions of SECTION 6400 transporting and placing the unit in position.
and channelling shall be given a Class U2 surface finish
as specified in SUBCLAUSE 6209(b). The channelling
shall be bonded to the bridge deck concrete in ITEM UNIT
accordance with the provisions of CLAUSE 6408. 66.03 PROPRIETARY EXPANSION
JOINTS:
(b) No-fines concrete blocks
(a) PRIME COST SUM ALLOWED FOR PRIME COST
Blocks shall be of the class of prescribed no-fines
PURCHASING AND TAKING DELIVERY SUM
concrete and to the required dimensions and shall be
OF EXPANSION JOINTS
placed in advance of backfilling.
(b) PERCENTAGE ON PRIME COST SUM PER CENT (%)
No-fines concrete shall comply with the requirements of FOR CHARGES AND PROFIT
CLAUSE 6602.
Payment for purchasing and taking delivery of
(c) Synthetic-fibre filter fabric proprietary expansion joints shall be in accordance with
Synthetic-fibre filter fabric shall be of the type and grade the provisions of the Conditions of Contract (see Note 2
shown on the Drawings or specified in the Special below).
Specifications. Filter fabric shall be placed as shown on
the Drawings and shall be protected against sunlight
and mechanical damage during storage and installation. ITEM UNIT
The fabric shall comply with the requirements of
PROPRIETARY EXPANSION JOINTS:
SUBCLAUSE 2104(a).
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT MEASURED METRE (m)
(d) Crushed stone in drainage strips behind walls PER METRE)
The crushed stone used in drainage strips shall comply (b) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT MEASURED NUMBER (no)
with the requirements for 20 mm nominal size stone. BY NUMBER
The crushed stone shall be wrapped in synthetic-fibre
geotextile and placed in accordance with the details The unit of measurement shall be either the metre of
shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the complete joint of each type installed or the number of
Engineer.
complete joints of each type installed. The bid rates The bid rates shall include full compensation for
shall include full compensation for supplying all providing and applying the bond breaker and all
materials not covered under ITEM 66.03, transporting, materials not paid for under ITEM 66.08, also for the
handling and storing, and all labour, equipment, labour and incidentals required for completing the
shaping the recesses, and incidentals required for unfilled joint as prescribed.
installing the expansion joint complete in accordance
with instructions (see Notes 1 and 2 below).
ITEM UNIT
The bid rate shall be final and binding, irrespective of 66.08 SEALING JOINTS WITH:
the type or make of joint finally installed.
(a) SEALANT (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT, METRE (m)
SEALANT AND SIZE)
ITEM UNIT (b) SEAL (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT, METRE (m)
SEALANT AND SIZE)
66.05 EXPANSION JOINTS:
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT MEASURED METRE (m) (c) WATERSTOP (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT, METRE (m)
PER METRE) WATERSTOP AND SIZE)
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT MEASURED NUMBER

BY NUMBER (no) The unit of measurement shall be the metre of sealant,
seal or waterstop of each type installed.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of complete The bid rates shall include full compensation for
expansion joint of each type installed or the number of supplying all materials, forming or cutting the concrete
completed joints of each type installed. to the required shape and size, all labour, equipment
and incidentals required for sealing the joint complete in
The bid rates shall include full compensation for accordance with the prescriptions, and for all waste
supplying all the materials, manufacturing the materials (see Note 2 below).
expansion joint, transporting, handling and storing, and
all labour equipment, shaping the recesses, and
incidentals required for installing the expansion joint ITEM UNIT
complete in accordance with instructions (see Notes 1
and 2 below). 66.09 PROPRIETARY BEARINGS:
(a) PRIME COST SUM ALLOWED FOR PRIME COST
PURCHASING AND TAKING DELIVERY SUM
ITEM UNIT OF BEARINGS
66.06 FILLED JOINTS: (b) PERCENTAGE ON PRIME COST SUM PERCENTAGE
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF AND THICKNESS SQUARE
FOR CHARGES AND PROFIT (%)
2
OF JOINT FILLER FOR JOINTS METRE (m )
MEASURED PER SQUARE METRE) Payment for purchasing and taking delivery of
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF AND THICKNESS METRE (m)
proprietary bearings, complete with anchor bolts and/or
OF JOINT FILLER FOR JOINTS dowels, shall be in accordance with the provisions of
MEASURED PER METRE)
the Conditions of Contract.
The unit of measurement shall be the squire metre of ITEM UNIT

filled joint calculated from the surface area of the joint.
Where the filled joint is 150 mm or less in depth, the 66.10 INSTALLING THE PROPRIETARY NUMBER
unit of measurement shall be the metre of filled joints BEARINGS (DESCRIPTION OF EACH TYPE, (no)
measured along the joint centre line. Concrete surfaces AND STATE CLASS)
formed prior to the construction of the final surface for
completing the filled joint shall be measured under The unit of measurement shall be the number of
ITEMS 62.01, 62.02, 62.03 or 62.04, as may be complete bearings of each type and class installed.
applicable.
The bid rates shall include full compensation for supplying all the materials not covered under ITEM
supplying and installing the joint filler and all materials 66.09, constructing the bedding, transporting, handling
not covered under ITEM 66.08, and for all labour and and storing, and all labour, equipment and incidentals
incidentals required for completing the filled joint as required for installing the bearings complete as detailed.
prescribed.
The bid rate shall be final and binding, irrespective of
the type or make of bearing finally installed.
ITEM UNIT
66.07 UNFILLED JOINTS:
ITEM UNIT
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT FOR JOINTS SQUARE
MEASURED PER SQUARE METRE) METRE (m2) 66.11 BEARINGS (DESCRIPTION OF NUMBER
EACH TYPE AND CLASS) (no)
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT FOR JOINTS METRE (m)
MEASURED PER LINEAR METRE)
complete bearings of each type and class installed.
unfilled joint, calculated in accordance with the joint The bid rate shall include full compensation for
area. Where, however, the depth of the joint is 150 mm supplying all the materials, including anchor bolts
or less, the unit of measurement shall be the metre of and/or dowels, constructing the bedding, manufacturing
unfilled joint measured along the joint centre line. the bearings, transporting, handling and storing, and all
Concrete areas formed before the final surface is labour, equipment and incidentals required for installing
constructed to complete the unfilled joint, shall be the bearings complete as detailed.
measured under ITEMS 62.01, 62.02, 62.03 or 62.04, as
may be applicable.

ITEM UNIT The unit of measurement for steel railings shall be the
66.12 CONCRETE HINGES: metre of railing complete in accordance with the
Drawings.
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF HINGE MEASURED METRE (m)
PER METRE) The bid rate for steel railings shall include full
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF HINGE MEASURED NUMBER compensation for all steelwork and corrosion protection,
BY NUMBER) (no) including fastenings, anchor bolts, mortar bedding, etc,
as may be required for erecting the railings.
The unit of measurement shall be either the metre of
complete hinge of each type manufactured and installed
or the number of complete hinges of each type ITEM UNIT
manufactured and installed. 66.17 END BLOCKS NUMBER (no)
supplying all materials, including formwork, The unit of measurement of bridge end blocks shall be
manufacturing the hinges, transporting, handling and the number of end blocks constructed complete in
storing, sealing the hinges, and all labour, equipment accordance with the Drawings.
and incidentals required for installing the hinges
complete as detailed. The bid rate shall include full compensation for all
materials, labour, plant, and other incidentals required
for constructing the end blocks complete as specified,
ITEM UNIT excluding only reinforcing steel.
66.13 BEARING STRIPS SQUARE METRE
2
(DESCRIPTION OF THE MATERIAL (m )
AND NUMBER OF LAYERS) ITEM UNIT
66.18 NUMBERS FOR
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of STRUCTURES:
bearing area lined with the specified material (a) NUMBER PLATES NUMBER (no)
irrespective of the number of layers placed.
(b) PAINTED NUMBERS NUMBER (no)
The bid rate shall include full compensation for (c) NUMBERS FORMED IN NUMBER (no)
supplying all the materials, transporting, handling and CONCRETE
storing, and all labour and incidentals required for
installing the bearing strips complete as detailed. The unit of measurement shall be either the number of
bridge number plates provided and installed, or the
number of complete numbers painted on the structures,
ITEM UNIT or the number of complete numbers formed in concrete.
66.14 DOWELS/GUIDES NUMBER A bridge number may consist of a combination of letters
(DESCRIPTION OF EACH TYPE) (no) and digits; eg B1533.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of The bid rates shall include full compensation for
dowels/guides of each type installed. providing and installing either the number plates, or
preparing the surface and painting the numbers, or
The bid rate shall include full compensation for forming the numbers in concrete, and for all material,
supplying all materials, including anchor bolts, labour and equipment required in this connection.
manufacturing the dowels/guides, Transporting,
handling and storing, and all labour, equipment and
incidentals required for installing the dowels/guides ITEM UNIT
complete as detailed. 66.19 DRAINAGE PIPES AND WEEP
HOLES:
(a) DRAINAGE PIPES: ∙
ITEM UNIT
(i) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) METRE (m)
66.15 CONCRETE PARAPETS METRE (m)
(ii) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) NUMBER (no)
The unit of measurement for concrete parapets shall be (b) WEEP HOLES:
the metre of concrete parapet complete in accordance (i) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) METRE (m)
with the Drawings. Concrete parapets shall include all (ii) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) NUMBER (no)
work above the top level of the sidewalks or, where not
placed on a sidewalk, above the top of the bridge deck
concrete, wingwalls or retaining walls and shall also The unit of measurement shall be either the metre of
include any kerbing and coping forming an integral part pipe/weep hole or the number of pipes/weep holes of
of the concrete parapet. each type and size of pipe/weep hole completed.
The bid rate for concrete parapets shall include full The bid rates shall include full compensation for
compensation for all concrete, formwork, service ducts, supplying all the materials, manufacturing and installing
drawing wires and accessories. The rates will exclude the pipes and making weep holes.
only the cost of reinforcing steel as this will be
measured and paid for under another pay item. ITEM UNIT
66.20 DRAINAGE GULLEYS NUMBER
(DESCRIPTION OF EACH TYPE GIVEN) (no)
ITEM UNIT
66.16 STEEL RAILINGS (TYPE METRE The unit of measurement shall be the number of
DESCRIBED) (m) drainage gulleys of each type installed.

The bid rate shall include full compensation for ITEM UNIT
providing all the material and manufacturing and 66.26 SUPPLYING AND INSTALLATION
installing the drainage inlets. OF BOLT GROUPS COMPLETE FOR
ELECTRIFICATION BRACKETS:
ITEM UNIT (a) SINGLE-BOLT GROUPS NUMBER (no)
66.21 SYNTHETIC-FIBRE FILTER SQUARE METRE (b) DOUBLE-BOLT GROUPS NUMBER (no)
2
FABRIC (TYPE INDICATED AND (m )
DESCRIPTION) The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
type of bolt group installed complete in position in
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
filter fabric installed as specified, including the specified
overlap. The bid rate shall include full compensation for The bid rates shall include full compensation for
supplying, cutting and installing the filter fabric, and for procuring and furnishing all materials, manufacturing,
waste material. transporting and storing, and all labour, constructional
plant and materials required for installing the bolt
groups as specified.
ITEM UNIT Notes:
66.22 CONCRETE CHANNELLING METRE (1) The cost of forming the open joint(s) shall not
(SIZE INDICATED) (m) be included in the rates bid for ITEMS 66.04 and
66.05 as payment for this work shall be made
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of under ITEM 62.06.
completed concrete channelling of each size
constructed. (2) Separate payment shall not be made for
supplying and/or installing the seal in
The bid rate shall include full compensation for proprietary expansion joints or the seal between
providing all the material, all labour equipment and concrete or synthetic nosings.-
expenses required for completing the work.
(3) Measurement of and payment for concrete
sidewalks (including kerbing and coping) shall
ITEM UNIT be made in accordance with CLAUSES 6210,
66.23 CRUSHED STONE IN CUBIC METRE (m
3
) 6310 and 6415.
DRAINAGE STRIPS

crushed stone placed in position as specified, in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer.

procuring, furnishing and placing the crushed stone,
and for wrapping it in synthetic-fibre geotextile as
specified. The geotextile will be measured for payment
under ITEM 66.21.
ITEM UNIT
66.24 NOSE ENDINGS AT NUMBER
BALUSTRADES (no)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of nose

endings constructed complete in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings.

labour, constructional plant and materials required, for
filling the recesses with concrete or nosing material, 20
mm x 20 mm plastijoint seal between the end block and
the transition block, steel cover plate complete with
anchor bolts, and all incidentals required for
constructing the nose endings complete.
ITEM UNIT
66.25 CONCRETE TRANSITION NUMBER (no)
BLOCKS (LENGTH INDICATED)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each

size of concrete transition block constructed complete in

labour, constructional plant, materials and all incidentals
required for constructing the transition blocks.

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES (e) Welding consumables

Welding electrodes shall comply with the requirements
of SABS 455 or equivalent.
SECTION 6700: STRUCTURAL
The quality, handling and storage of all consumables
STEELWORK shall be so as to achieve the desirable properties of the
weld metal.
CONTENTS:
The welding consumables used shall be appropriate to
CLAUSE PAGE produce weld metal which will yield all the weld-metal
6701 SCOPE 6000-59 test specimens as specified in BS 709 having both
6702 MATERIALS 6000-59 minimum yield and minimum tensile strengths not less
6703 CODES OF PRACTICE 6000-59 than those of the parent metal.
6704 SHOP DETAILS 6000-59
6705 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY 6000-59 (f) Test certificates
6706 ERECTION 6000-60 The Contractor shall submit test certificates, as required
6707 TESTING 6000-61 by the Engineer, of the structural steel and anchor bolts
6708 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6000-61 that will be used.
6703 CODES OF PRACTICE

The design, where undertaken by the Contractor, of all
6701 SCOPE work shall comply with the requirements of SABS 0162
This Section covers the manufacture, transport and or equivalent.
erection of structural steelwork for minor structures, eg
overhead road-sign structures. Major steel structures 6704 SHOP DETAILS
such as steel bridges, shall be covered in the Special Where shop details have not been furnished on the
Specifications and shall conform to SPECIFICATIONS FOR Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare his own shop
HIGHWAY WORKS, PART 6 1800, STRUCTURAL STEEL details in accordance with the provisions of CLAUSE
WORK, published by HMSO, London, UK, or approved 1221. Shop details shall be approved and signed by the
equivalent standards. Engineer prior to the fabrication of any items.
6702 MATERIALS 6705 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY

(a) Structural steel (a) General
Structural steel shall comply with the following All structural steel both before and after fabrication shall
requirements: be within the tolerances specified in SUBCLAUSE 6803(j)
and shall be flat, straight (unless required to be formed
− Mild steel: BS 4360, Grade 43A; or SABS 1431, to another shape) and free from twists.
Grade300W.
− High-yield stress steel: BS 4360, Grade 50B; or (b) Marking the steel
SABS 1431, Grade 350W. At all stages of fabrication, all structural steel other than
Grade 300W and Grade 43A steel shall be clearly
The dimensions and properties of rolled steel sections marked by grade by means of a suitable marking
shall comply with the prescriptions given in the system.
structural steel tables issued by the South African
Institute of Steel Construction or are equivalent. (c) Cutting
Steel shall be cut by sawing, shearing with shears,
(b) Steel tubes cropping, or flame-cutting.
Steel tubes shall comply with the requirements of SABS
657, Part I or equivalent. Edges shall be free from any defects or distortions and
all burrs, notches and similar defects shall be removed.
(c) Bolts, nuts and washers
Ordinary bolts and nuts shall be bolts and nuts used for All structural welds shall be full-strength joints.
transferring forces by tensile stress, compressive stress
and shear stress without any friction-grip action being (d) Holes for fasteners
considered. Ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with Holes for fasteners shall not be formed by flame cutting.
SABS 135, SABS 136 or SABS 1143 or equivalent. Holes in light members not thicker than 12 mm or the
Washers for ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with diameter of the hole, whichever is the smaller, may be
the requirements of SABS 1149 or equivalent. punched.
High-strength friction-grip bolts, nuts and washers shall Holes for fasteners of up to 25 mm in diameter shall not
comply with the requirements of SABS 1282 or be more than 2 mm larger than the diameter of the
equivalent. fastener and holes for larger fasteners not more than 3
mm larger than the diameter of the fastener.
Other approved friction-grip fasteners equal to the
above may be used. Holes for friction-grip fasteners shall be in accordance
with SABS 094 or equivalent.
(d) Rivets
Mild-steel rivets shall comply with the requirements of All burrs shall be removed from holes before assembly.
SABS 435 or equivalent. High-tensile rivets shall be so
manufactured that they can be driven and their heads (e) Joints in compression
formed satisfactorily without the physical properties of The abutting surfaces of joints dependent on contact for
the steel being impaired. the transmission of load shall be accurately prepared so
that the full area intended for bearing will be in contact
as specified in SUBCLAUSE 6803(j).

(f) Hollow sections (I) Trimming

Unless protection against corrosion is provided by other All fabricated steel work shall be neatly trimmed so as
means, the interior of any hollow section shall be sealed not to show any sharp edges. Acute angles shall be
to prevent the ingress of moisture. Where a sealed rounded off to a radius of at least 1.0 mm.
hollow members holed for a fastener or pin,
precautionary measures shall be taken to prevent the
ingress of water to the interior of the member. Vent (m) Corrosion prevention
holes for galvanising shall be sealed after galvanising
has been completed. (i) Painting
Before removal from the place of manufacture the
(g) Alignment of holes steelwork shall be painted as specified in SECTION
All matching holes for fasteners or pins shall be 5900.
accurately aligned so that the fasteners can be inserted
freely through the assembled members in a direction at Where the finishing coats are to be applied on the
right angles to the faces in contact. Drifting for aligning site, the shop painting shall include the application
the holes shall not distort the metal or enlarge the of an undercoat as specified in SECTION 5900.
holes.
Galvanised steel shall not be painted unless
(h) Welding painting is specifically called for in the
Welding shall be done in accordance with the specifications.
requirements of BS 5135.
(ii) Sprayed metal coatings
The welding techniques shall be such as to avoid undue Where the sprayed metal coating of steel surfaces
distortion and to minimise shrinking stresses. is called for, it shall be done in accordance with the
requirements of SABS 1391 Part I or equivalent.
All slag shall be removed. The type of metal used shall be as specified, and,
unless otherwise specified, the metal coating shall
Where required for certain welding: comply with the requirements of Type AI 150 or
Type Zn 150.
(i) the manufacturer shall hold a valid welding-
procedures certificate in accordance with SABS 044 (iii) Galvanising
Part III or equivalent for Grade B welding joints, and Where the galvanising of structural steelwork is
the welding shall be done by a welder qualified in required, the members shall be hot-dip galvanised.
accordance with SABS 044 Part IV or equivalent; Structural steel members shall be given an 85µm
coating or such other thickness as may be
(ii) or… the welder shall hold a valid certificate of specified, in accordance with SABS 763 or
competency in accordance with SABS 044 Part V equivalent and sheet steel and strip a Class M
or equivalent for the specified type of welding. coating in accordance with SABS 934 or equivalent.
(i) Bolting All nuts, bolts, screws and threaded articles shall be
The jointed parts shall be firmly drawn together. Where hot-dipped galvanised in accordance with the
necessary, tapering washers shall be used for each bolt appropriate requirements of SABS 763 or
head and nut to transfer the compressive stress over its equivalent for Type C1 or Type C2 articles.
full surface. Where bolt holes have greater than normal
clearance, washers shall be placed under the bolt Cut ends and small damaged areas shall be
heads and nuts. repaired by the application of a zinc-rich paint or by
zinc spraying.
The length of each bolt shall be such that, after
tightening, at least one full thread projects through the
nut on the outside and at least one full thread (in 6706 ERECTION
addition to the thread run-out) remains clear between
the nut and the bolt head. (a) General
Where specified, details of the method of erection shall
(j) Friction-grip fastening be submitted to the Engineer for approval. All structural
The use of friction-grip bolts shall be in accordance with steel shall be stored, transported, handled and erected
SABS 094 or equivalent. Where use is made of so as not to subject it to undue stress or damage.
equivalent types of friction-grip fasteners, they shall
comply with the requirements of SABS 094 or Erection over traffic is not permitted, and a temporary
equivalent for equivalent fasteners and shall be diversion for traffic shall be provided.
installed in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of SABS 094 or equivalent. Provision for traffic accommodation will be paid for in
accordance with the appropriate items under SECTION
(k) Riveting 1500.
Wherever possible, riveting shall be done with
pneumatic equipment. (b) Safety during erection
During the erection of a structure, the steelwork shall be
Riveted units shall have all parts firmly drawn together bolted, braced or otherwise secured so as to make
and aligned before riveting. Every rivet shall, when adequate provision for all erection loads.
driven, completely fill the hole and shall have a well-
formed head or, if countersunk, fill the countersink (c) Alignment
completely. Each part of a structure shall be aligned as soon as
possible after erection. Members shall not be
All loose, eccentric-headed, badly formed, burnt or permanently connected until sufficiently large members
otherwise defective rivets shall be cut out and replaced. of the structure have been aligned, plumbed, levelled,
and temporarily secured to prevent their displacement
during the erection or alignment of the remainder of the
structure.

(d) Corrections DESCRIBED)

Drift pins, jacking equipment and the like shall not be (b) (STRUCTURE/ARTICLE METRE (m)
used for bringing improperly fabricated members into DESCRIBED)
place. A moderate degree of cutting and reaming may
be done to correct minor misfits if, in the opinion of the (c) (STRUCTURE/ARTICLE NUMBER (no)
Engineer, this will not be detrimental to the appearance DESCRIBED)
or strength of the structure. The burning of holes will not
be permitted without written approval. The unit of measurement shall be either the tonne or
the metre of erected permanent steel structures or
(e) Repairs to painting and site painting articles, or the number of erected permanent steel
Repairs to painting and site painting shall be effected in structures or articles. Where the unit of measurement is
accordance with the provisions of CLAUSE 5907. the tonne the mass of the steel waste caused by
punching, drilling, sheared edges, milling or planning, or
(f) Grouting metal cut-outs shall not be deducted, and the mass of
The grout shall be poured under and around the base rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, welding fillets or temporary
plates of columns after the steelwork has been finally bracing shall not be added. In computing the mass of
checked for alignment and height and after the approval steel, the nominal mass per unit of length or area will be
of the Engineer has been obtained to proceed with the used and tolerances and other permissible deviations
grouting. The column base plates shall be supported by will be ignored.
the top and bottom nuts and by steel wedges. The area
under the steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be The bid rates shall include full compensation for
dust and oil-free, and the concrete shall be thoroughly preparing shop details where not provided on the
rinsed with water to leave the surface clean and moist. Drawings, the supply of all the required materials,
fabrication, process control, loading, transporting to the
The grout shall be an approved non-shrinking, site, off-loading, and erecting. It shall also include full
pourable, cementitious grout. The grout shall be compensation for all nuts, bolts, washers, rivets, cutting,
prepared and applied strictly in accordance with the waste, and any temporary bracing necessary for
manufacturer's recommendations and the Engineer's transporting and erecting.
directives.
Leak-proof formwork shall be used for the pourable supplying and pouring the specified grout under and
grout, and all corners shall be chamfered. The surface around the base plates of steel columns, for procuring
finish shall be Class F2 and Class U2 as applicable. and supplying all the necessary labour, constructional
plant, tools and materials, as well as waste, formwork
for the grout, and finishing to obtain the required
6707 TESTING surface finish for the grout under and around base
plates of steel columns.
(a) Testing by the Engineer
The Engineer may nominate a testing authority to
inspect the Works and to conduct such tests as he may ITEM UNIT
deem to be necessary to test compliance with the 67.02 ANCHOR BOLTS:
specifications. Where required, test samples of welds (a) (DESCRIPTION OF EACH ASSEMBLY, KILOGRAMME
shall be prepared by the Contractor, free of charge. AND GRADE/TYPE OF STEEL, (kg)
DIAMETER AND LENGTH INDICATED)
Payment for these tests shall be made under ITEM
71.01. (b) (DESCRIPTION OF EACH ASSEMBLY, NUMBER (no)
AND GRADE/TYPE OF STEEL,
(b) Process control DIAMETER AND LENGTH INDICATED)
Welds shall be regularly inspected and tested by the
Contractor in terms of his obligations in regard to The unit of measurement shall be either the kilogram of
process control, as described in CLAUSE 1205. This installed anchor-bolt assemblies or the number of
shall include visual inspection of welds to ensure that installed anchor-bolt assemblies.
no undercutting, uneven lengths, porosity, or evidence
of cracking occurs and that full fusion of the metals has The bid rates shall include full compensation for the
been achieved. In doubtful areas, cores containing weld materials, fabrication, handling, transporting and
metal and adjacent parent material shall, if so required installing the anchor-bolt assemblies, including
by the Engineer, be cut out, polished and examined and corrosion protection.
the hole repaired.
At least 30% of the welds shall be examined by ITEM UNIT

ultrasonic or radiographic means. If more than 5% of 67.03 CORROSION PROTECTION:
the examined welds show unsatisfactory results,
additional examinations covering all welds shall be (a) SPRAYED-ON METAL:
performed. Certificates of the examination confirming (i) (TYPE OF METAL AND TONNE (t)
that the steel plates and welds comply with the THICKNESS OR TYPE SYMBOL
requirements of SABS 044 Part III or equivalent shall be OF COATING INDICATED)
submitted to the Engineer. (Ii) (TYPE OF METAL AND METRE (m)
THICKNESS OR TYPE SYMBOL
The cost of testing shall be deemed to be included in OF COATING INDICATED)
the rate bid for ITEM 67.01 Structural steel.
(IIi) (TYPE OF METAL AND NUMBER (no)
OF COATING INDICATED)
(b) HOT-DIP GALVANISING:
ITEM UNIT (i) (TYPE OF METAL AND TONNE (t)
67.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL: THICKNESS OR TYPE SYMBOL
OF ZINK COAT INDICATED)
(a) (STRUCTURE/ARTICLE TONNE (t)

(Ii) (TYPE OF METAL AND METRE (m)

The unit of measurement shall be either a tonne or a

metre of steel structures or articles protected against
corrosion, or the number of steel structures or articles
protected against corrosion. The quantities are
calculated as specified in ITEM 67.01.
The bid rates shall be extra over the rates for ITEM
67.01 and shall include full compensation for applying
the specified corrosion protection, including surface
preparation, materials, labour, tools, equipment and all
incidentals required.
Note:
Payment for painting shall be made under ITEM 59.01.

SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES (a) Foundations, footings, pile capping slabs,

columns, walls, piers, abutments, bridge and
culvert superstructures
SECTION 6800: CONSTRUCTION The tolerances are given in TABLES 6801/1, 6801/2,
6801/3, 6801/4 and 6801/5.
TOLERANCES FOR
STRUCTURES TABLE 6801/1
TOLERANCES OF PILE FOUNDATIONS
CONTENTS:
CLAUSE PAGE Position:
6801 SCOPE 6000-63 0.167 times the diameter of the pile, or 100 mm,
6802 DEFINITIONS 6000-63 whichever shall be the greater
6803 TOLERANCES 6000-63 External dimensions:
Prefabricated piles +25 mm -5 mm
Cast in situ piles plus-tolerance not specified,
minus-tolerance 0 mm
6801 SCOPE Pile-head level: Average level of trimmed cut
This Section covers the requirements in regard to the pile head +25 mm
construction tolerances applicable to the various Verticality or rake 1.5
0
structures and structural members.
Straightness:
6802 DEFINITIONS For precast piles the permissible maximum deviation
Except where otherwise specified, the following aspects from straight is 5 mm for piles up to 3 m in length
of construction to which tolerances apply shall have the and 1.0 mm more for each additional metre of pile
meanings attributed to them below: length.
(a) Position
The position of a structure or structural member shall be TABLE 6801/2
the horizontal position of its centre line(s) and/or centre TOLERANCES OF CAISSIONS
point(s) in relation to the overall layout of the Works as
Position of top of caisson:
(b) Alignment 10% of the smallest outer dimension of the caisson,
The alignment of a structure or structural member shall measured in plan.
be the alignment of its centre line(s) in relation to the Verticality:
overall layout of the Works as shown on the Drawings. 0
1.5
Deviation from true alignment shall be measured in
degrees of an arc. Dimensions:
Wall thickness +25 mm -5 mm
(c) Leading and cross-sectional dimensions Outer dimension of +25 mm
The leading and cross-sectional dimensions of a circular, rectangular or
structure or structural member shall be the dimensions square cross-section
relating to width, length, height, thickness, etc, which
collectively determine its shape, and are shown on the Level: Upper level of trimmed/cut caisson head:
Drawings. Dimensional tolerances not relating to Maximum deviation of +25mm
leading or cross-sectional dimensions shall be shown average level
on the Drawings. Maximum deviation of +50mm
any individual level
(d) Levels
The level of any structure or structural member shall be Foundation fill:
the level of the upper or lower surface, as may be Average level of top of ±25mm
relevant, with reference to an established datum-level fill
on the site.
(e) Surface regularity TABLE 6801/3

Surface regularity is the shape of a surface with TOLERANCES OF FOOTINGS, PILE CAPPINGS, CAISSION
reference to a 3m straight-edge (or template in the case COVER SLABS ETC.
of curved surfaces) placed on the surface.
The tolerance for surface regularity is expressed as a Position:

distance by which the surface tested may deviate from 15 mm
a straight-edge (or template in the case of curved Alignment:
surfaces) Individual members 5
0
held against the surface.
Members as they collectively 1 minute
determine the alignment of the
6803 TOLERANCES structure as a whole
The tolerances given below shall be the maximum
permissible deviations from the specified dimensions, Dimensions:
levels, alignment, positions, etc, shown on the Drawings Leading dimensions in plan +25 mm
of the structures or structural members. Thickness + 25 mm
-15 mm
Levels:
Average level of slabs, footings, +25mm
etc

TABLE 6801/4 The width of the gap between contiguous beams shall
TOLERANCES OF COLUMNS, WALLS, PIERS, ABUTMENTS, not exceed twice the width of the specified nominal gap
ETC. shown on the Drawings or the width of the nominal gap
plus 40 mm. whichever is the less, and the overall width
between the outermost beams of the bridge deck shall
Position: be within 40 mm of the specified width.
10 mm
STRAIGHTNESS OR BOW: The deviation from the
Alignment:
prescribed line measured on the overall length of the
Walls, piers, abutments and 2 minutes
beam shall not exceed the following:
column groups
Dimensions: (i) In the horizontal plane:
Leading dimensions of walls, piers +25mm 0.5 mm per metre length of the beam within the
and abutments tolerance range of 6 mm to 15 mm.
Thickness of walls, piers and abutments and cross-
sectional dimensions of columns: (ii) In the vertical plane:
Plus-tolerance 25 mm (1) i-beams: 2 mm per metre length of the beam
within the tolerance range of 6 mm to 20 mm.
Minus-tolerance 3% of the specified
(2) Other beams: 1.0 mm per metre length of the
dimensions within the
beam within the tolerance range of 3 mm to 20
range of 5 mm to 25 mm
mm.
Levels:
Levels: Average level of finished +10mm CAMBER: The soffits of adjacent beams when placed
or trimmed/cut columns, piers, side by side on the bridge deck shall not at any place
walls, abutments, etc differ by more than 2 mm per metre length of the beam
within the tolerance range of 6 mm to 20 mm.
Verticality:
Using ordinary 1 in 400. Maximum 25 mm THE LENGTHS OF PRECAST BEAMS: Before stressing the
formwork length shall be ±0.1% of the total length within the
Using sliding 1 in 200. Maximum 50 mm tolerance range of ±5 mm to 20 mm.
formwork
SURFACE REGULARITY: 6 mm
Surface regularity:
Using ordinary 3 mm (f) Reinforcing steel
formwork Except for the requirements given below, no tolerances
Using sliding 6 mm are given for the placing and fixing of reinforcing steel.
formwork 1 in 200. The steel, however, shall be neatly and accurately fixed
in a manner which is consistent with proper
workmanship and the structural integrity of the
TABLE 6801/5 structural member. Specifically the following
TOLERANCES OF BRIDGE AND CULVERT requirements shall apply:
SUPERSTRUCTURES
(i) Tension steel
The actual position of tension steel shall not deviate
Position:
from the true position by a distance which would
10 mm reduce the effective lever arm by more than 2% of
Alignment: the overall depth of the member, or 10 mm,
Superstructure as a whole 1 minute whichever is the greater.
Dimensions: (ii) Concrete cover

Leading dimensions in +25 mm The concrete cover on reinforcing steel shall
plan nowhere be less than the specified cover.
Thickness of slabs, width and depth of beams:
Plus tolerance 15 mm (iii) Spacing between bars
Minus tolerance 3% of the specified The spacing between closely spaced parallel bars,
dimensions within the especially in beams and columns, shall, unless
range of 5 mm to 15 otherwise specified, be not less than the maximum
mm size of the aggregate used in the concrete.
Surface regularity: (iv) Bending of reinforcement

All surfaces other than 3 mm The requirements of SABS 82 or equivalent
upper surface of deck regarding dimensional tolerances for cutting and
Bridge and culvert decks, surface tolerances: bending of the reinforcing steel shall apply, with the
The tolerances specified in SECTION 7100 for the proviso that the other requirements set out in this
base in respect of level, grade, cross-section Clause shall be complied with even if the tolerances
and surface regularity shall apply. Surface in SABS 82 or equivalent are not exceeded.
regularity shall be tested by straight-edge.
(g) Prestressing
(b) (refer to SUBCLAUSE 6803(a)) Sheaths for prestressing tendons shall be placed and
(c) (refer to SUBCLAUSE 6803(a)) maintained in position within the following tolerances:
(d) (refer to SUBCLAUSE 6803(a))
(i) In the direction of the width of the member:
(e) Precast beams For members of up to 200 mm in depth: +20 mm
The following tolerances shall apply to precast beams in For members exceeding 200 mm in depth: +10 mm
addition to the requirements stated in TABLES 6801/1 to
6801/5 for the superstructure. (ii) In the direction of the depth of the member:
For members of up to 200 mm in depth:
+0.025 x depth

For members exceeding 200 mm in depth: shall not exceed 1.0 mm when the members in
+0.01 x depth within the tolerance range of +5 contact are aligned.
mm to +25 mm.
(vi) Accuracy of erection
(h) Bearings Steelwork shall not be out of plumb over any
Bearings for structures shall be installed to within 5 mm vertical distance by more than 5 mm or one
of the position shown on the Drawings and to within 2 thousandth of the distance, whichever is the
mm of the required level. greater.
Dimensional tolerances for elastomeric bearings shall

comply with the requirements of BS 5400 Part 9.2. (k) Fabricating and construction tolerances for
reinforced-earth structures
(i) Miscellaneous (i) Individual concrete panels:

Surface regularity:
(i) Chamfers − When tested with a 1.5 m straight-edge, the
Fillets used for forming chamfers shall be within a deviation shall not exceed 5mm.
tolerance of 1.0 mm in cross-sectional dimensions, − Leading dimensions +5 mm
and the actual chamfer on the concrete shall not
vary by more than 3 mm from the specified (ii) Completed walls:
dimensions. Surface regularity:
− When tested with a 3 m straight-edge, the
(ii) Kerbs, copings, sidewalks, bridge railings, parapets, deviation shall not exceed 20 mm.
etc − No point of the structure shall be out of position
The members shall be constructed within a vertically by more than 10 mm per metre height
tolerance of +5 mm for all dimensions. The of the structure, with a maximum of 50 mm.
alignment shall not deviate from the true alignment
by more than 10 mm in any place, nor shall the
alignment deviate by more than 5 mm from the true
alignment over any length of 5 m.
(j) Fabrication and assembly tolerances for

structural steel
(i) General
The fabrication and assembly tolerances on all
dimensions for structural steel shall be +2 mm.
Holes for connections shall be drilled/punched and
aligned as specified in SUBCLAUSES 6705(d) and (g)
respectively.
(ii) Cross-section
The tolerances on cross-sectional dimensions of
rolled sections shall be as specified in the Structural
Steel Tables, published by the SA Institute of Steel
Construction or equivalent.
(iii) Straightness
A structural member before erection shall not
deviate from straightness (or the specified shape)
by more than the following:
For compression members and beams, one-

thousandth of the length between points which are
laterally restrained. For other members, one five
hundredth of the overall length, but not exceeding
25mm.
(iv) Length
The length of a member shall not deviate from its
prescribed length by more than the following:
For compression members faced at both ends for

bearing, +1.0 mm
For other members: +0 mm and -4 mm
For such members as trusses and lattice girders,

the above tolerances shall apply to the members as
a whole. The lengths of component parts shall be
such that the structural member can be properly
assembled with the required accuracy.
(v) Bearing surfaces

Where two steel surfaces are required to be in
contact for transferring compressive forces, the
maximum clearance between the bearing surfaces

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 SERIES 7000 - TOLERANCES, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
SERIES 7000
TOLERANCES, TESTING AND QUALITY
CONTROL
SECTION PAGE
7100 TESTING OF MATERIALS AND
WORKMANSHIP 7000-2
7200 QUALITY CONTROL 7000-11
7300 SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES 7000-16
7400 RECTIFICATION OF EARTHWORKS AND
PAVEMENT LAYERS OUTSIDE
PERMITTED GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES 7000-18
7500 SPECIFICATIONS AND TEST METHODS 7000-19

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
SERIES 1000 GENERAL
APPENDICES

SERIES 7000: TOLERANCES, TESTING AND Laboratory (CML) of the Ministry of Works are listed
together with the other standards test methods referred
QUALITY CONTROL
to in the CML Laboratory Testing Manual in Section
7500.
SECTION 7100: TESTING OF Materials shall comply with, the requirements of the
MATERIALS AND current edition of Specifications issued by the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation
WORKMANSHIP Officials (AASHTO) or American Society for Testing
Materials (ASTM) or British Standard (BS) or, where
CONTENTS: applicable, an equivalent Specification called for in the
contract documents or as directed by the Engineer.
CLAUSE PAGE
7101 SCOPE 7000-2 Other equivalent national standard specifications may
7102 MATERIALS GENERALLY 7000-2 only be substituted for the above at the sole discretion
7103 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 7000-2 of the Engineer.
7104 MATERIALS TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 7000-2
7105 LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER 7000-2 7104 MATERIALS TESTING AND
7106 TESTING BY THE CONTRACTOR 7000-2 ACCEPTANCE
7107 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS OR As soon as possible after the Contract has been
MATERIALS 7000-3 awarded, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
7108 THE COST OF TESTING 7000-3 complete statements as to the origin, composition and
7109 TAKING AND SUBMITTING SAMPLES 7000-3 manufacture of all materials to be used in the Works
7110 TESTING METHODS 7000-3 together with a list of the suppliers from whom he
7111 TESTING CEMENTITIOUS BINDERS AND proposes to purchase these materials.
CONCRETE 7000-4
7112 TESTING SOILS, GRAVELS AND Prior to delivery of materials to the job site, the
CRUSHED AGGREGATE FOR Contractor shall submit certified test reports and
EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT LAYERS 7000-5 samples to the Engineer of all materials proposed for
7113 TESTING BITUMINOUS BINDERS AND use in the Works, whether from an outside supplier or
MIXES 7000-5 whether supplied by the Contractor from his own
7114 FIELD DENSITY TESTING 7000-5 resources. The certification(s) shall show the
7115 TESTS OF SURFACE REGULARITY, appropriate test(s) for each material, the test results,
LEVELS AND LAYER THICKNESS 7000-6 and a statement that the material meets the
7116 LABORATORY TRIALS AND SITE TRIALS 7000-8 specification requirement. The Engineer's approval
7117 TESTS ON STRUCTURES 7000-9 shall be received prior to any materials being delivered
7118 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7000-10 in bulk to the works. The Engineer may request further
samples for testing, prior to and during construction to
verify the quality of the materials and to ensure
conformance with the applicable specifications. The
7101 SCOPE Contractor shall provide all samples free of charge.
This SECTION covers the tests and methods of testing
which are required for the selection and control of the The Contractor shall test samples as specified from
materials and for control of workmanship, trials and each quarry location and borrow pit proposed for use in
construction control testing. the Works, in accordance with these Specifications. The
results of these tests shall be submitted to the Engineer
During the progress of the Work tests shall be for approval at least 14 days before the quarry or
conducted on materials and workmanship to ensure borrow pit is required for use. Should any quarry or
compliance with the requirements of the Specifications. borrow pit prove to be unsuitable, the Contractor shall
investigate further sites until suitable materials are
7102 MATERIALS GENERALLY found and approved.
All materials shall conform to the requirements of the
Contract, the Drawings and the Specifications. The Contractor’s programme shall allow sufficient time
for materials testing and no claim for delays or extra
All materials shall be of approved manufacture and costs arising out of this will be accepted.
origin and the best quality of their respective kinds.
Unless otherwise specified such materials shall be new All materials supplied for use in the Works shall
(as compared to used or reprocessed). conform within specified tolerances, to the quality of the
approved samples which will be retained at the
No materials of any description shall be used without Engineer’s office until the completion of the Contract.
the prior sanction of the Engineer and any materials
condemned as unsuitable for use in the Works shall be Where a material has been specified by a
removed immediately from the Site by and without manufacturer’s trade name, the product of another
recompense to the Contractor. manufacturer will be accepted provided that, in the
opinion of the Engineer, it is in all respects of an
equivalent or higher quality.
7103 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Where in the Specifications tests on materials, tests on
completed Works and construction control tests are 7105 LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER
called for or implied, they shall be carried out according The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain for the
to the Laboratory Testing Manual of the Central duration of the Contract a laboratory adjacent to the
Materials Laboratory(CML) of the Ministry of Works Engineers Representative’s office or where directed by
unless the test in question is not covered by this the Engineer, in accordance with SECTION 1410.
standard. When a particular test is not covered by the
CML standard, then the method shall be an equivalent 7106 TESTING BY THE CONTRACTOR
standard called for in the contract documents or as The Contractor shall provide, use and maintain on the
directed by the Engineer. The tests described in the site throughout the period of execution of the works a
Laboratory Testing Manual of the Central Materials suitable laboratory and adequate equipment operated

by competent staff for carrying out tests required for the consequence of such default. All samples shall be
selection and control of the quality of materials and for submitted in sufficient time for proper testing.
the control of workmanship in accordance with this The Engineer’s approval of any materials or mixtures
specification. The contractor shall assume that tests will shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to
be required on all materials used in the works and on all provide materials, mixtures and workmanship which
finished work. comply with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall carry out all necessary tests and All samples for testing shall be taken in a random
shall report to the Engineer the results of such tests pattern or as prescribed by the Engineer. Where
before submitting materials and finished work to the specified or required by the Engineer, stratified random
Engineer for approval. In appropriate circumstances, sampling methods shall be followed. For the testing of
tests may be carried out at the place of manufacture. layer work stratified random sampling methods shall be
used for obtaining all the sample portions and for
7107 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS OR determining the locations of in situ test sites.
MATERIALS
The method of taking samples shall be as specified in
All materials used in or upon the works shall comply
the appropriate sampling and testing methods. The
with this Specification and the Special Specification and
sampling methods described in TMH5 of South Africa,
shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Where so
or similar approved by the Engineer, shall apply.
specified, the material shall comply with the national
specification named or with an alternative national
The Engineer shall have full access to the Works for the
specification on the approval of the Engineer.
purpose of taking samples. The Contractor shall render
any assistance necessary for taking the samples and
Similarly, where a material has been specified by
shall be responsible for the reinstatement of pavement
manufacturer’s trade name, the product of another
layers or other structures at the positions where the
manufacturer will be acceptable provided it is in all
samples have been taken. Full compensation for
respects of equivalent or higher quality and provided
rendering assistance with sampling and for
that the Engineer’s approval has been obtained.
reinstatement where samples have been taken shall be
included in the rates tendered for the various items of
Samples of all materials proposed to be used shall be
work tested, and no additional payment will be made in
submitted to the Engineer and shall, where required, be
this respect.
tested prior to the material being delivered in bulk upon
the works.
(b) Sampling frequency
Samples shall be taken for laboratory testing for each
new material encountered, or when there is a significant
7108 THE COST OF TESTING change in material properties in the opinion of the
Engineer.
(a) Process control
The cost of testing undertaken by the Contractor in The sampling frequencies shall be minimum as given in
terms of his obligations under CLAUSE 1205 for TABLE 7105/1. Samples for tests which are not
purposes of process control, including the taking of mentioned in TABLE 7105/1, but for which there are
samples, reinstating where samples have been taken, material requirements in these Specifications, shall be
and all testing equipment, labour, materials, etc, shall taken as required in the opinion of the Engineer.
be included in the rates bid for the various items of work
supplied and will not be paid for separately. 7110 TESTING METHODS
All tests shall be conducted in accordance with the
(b) Producing certificates
standard methods specified in the Specifications. Other
Where the properties of materials or manufactured
equivalent national standard specifications may only
products are required in these Specifications to comply
substitute the prescribed test method at the sole
with specified specifications published by a Standards
discretion of the Engineer.
Authority approved by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall produce, when called upon to do so, certificates
Where in the Specifications tests on materials, tests on
from the manufacturer confirming that the materials or
completed Works and construction control tests are
products supplied comply with the relevant
called for or implied, they shall be carried out according
specifications. All costs of providing such certificates
to the Laboratory Testing Manual of the Central
shall be borne by the Contractor.
Materials Laboratory (CML) of the Ministry of Works
unless the test in question is not covered by this
(c) Testing materials and products covered by
standard. When a particular test is not covered by the
certificates
CML standard, then the method shall be an equivalent
The Engineer shall be entitled to take samples of, and
standard called for in the contract documents or as
order tests to be made on, products and materials in
directed by the Engineer. Tables in CLAUSE 7205 shows
respect of which certificates of compliance may be
the tests described in the Laboratory testing Manual of
required. The Contractor shall only be paid at the
the (CML) of the Ministry of Works listed together with
appropriate rates if the costs of such tests are itemised
the other standards test methods referred to in the CML
in the Bill of Quantities.
Laboratory Testing Manual.
In addition to the above standard methods of testing,

7109 TAKING AND SUBMITTING SAMPLES equivalent standard specifications or test methods of
other bodies may be used in these specifications if
(a) General approved by the Engineer.
Where the Contractor is required in these Specifications
to submit samples of materials or mixtures to the In all cases the latest amendment or revision current at
Engineer for approval prior to their being used in the the closing date of the tender is implied when reference
Works, the use of these materials or mixtures without is made to one of the above standards in the
the Engineer’s written approval shall constitute default Specification.
on the part of the Contractor, who shall be liable for the

TABLE 7105/1
SAMPLING FREQUENCIES, CML TEST NUMBER
Tests to be
Layer and nominal class of material Sampling frequency, minimum
carried out 1)
2
CBR 1 sample per 10000 m
Roadbed 2
MDD, PI, grading 1 sample per 5000 m
3
CBR, PI, grading 1 sample per 2000 m
Earthworks fill using soils: (G3) 3
MDD 1 sample per 1000 m
3
Backfill to culverts and structures 3
2
Improved subgrade (G7, G15) or CBR, PI, grading 1 sample per 10000 m
Gravel wearing course (GW) MDD 1 sample per 5000 m
2
2
Subbase: (G25, G45) 2
2
USC, PI 1 sample per 5000 m
Subbase: (CM, C1) 2
2
Base course: (G60, G80) 2
2
USC, PI 1 sample per 5000 m
Base course: (C1, C2) 2
2
LS, grading 1 sample per 5000 m
Base course using crushed aggregate: (CRS) 2
2
LS, grading 1 sample per 5000 m
Base course using crushed aggregate: (CRR) Apparent density, 2
1 sample per 10000 m
TFV
2
Base course of a bituminous mix or asphalt concrete Extraction, grading 1 sample per 10000 m
surfacing Marshall test 1 sample per 5000 m
2
2
TFV 1 sample per 20000 m
Surface treatments 2
Grading, flakiness 1 sample per 5000 m
1) The referred tests shall be carried out in accordance with the following CML Test methods:
CBR CML 1.11 LS CML 1.4 PI CML 1.2 and 1.3
MDD CML 1.9 TFV CML 2.7 Apparent density 2.2
Flakiness index CML 2.4 Grading CML 1.7 Marshall test CML 3.18
Extraction of bituminous materials CML 3.22
It is emphasised that the Atterberg limits of soil fines The appropriate test methods shall be those included
shall be measured according to the CML test methods. under the respective CLAUSES of the Specifications, or
These methods follow British Standard (BS) procedures any other relevant tests prescribed by the Engineer.
and utilise BS equipment. Other laboratory test
procedures and equipment do not give comparable Accelerated tests shall be carried out to determine the
results and shall not be used unless proper correlation potential alkali reactivity of aggregates where this is
to CML/BS has been carried out to the satisfaction of considered appropriate by the Engineer.
the Engineer.
(b) Test for cementitious- binder content
All CBR testing shall be carried out using the three point The test method used for determining the cementitious
method as described in CML Test 1.11. All CBR tests binder content of soils, gravels or crushed stone mixed
relate to material compacted to the dry density obtained with a chemical stabilising agent shall be determined by
using the compaction test as specified in the respective the Engineer and may be any test method currently
CLAUSES for material requirements. The CBR testing recognised by the Employer as being acceptable.
shall be carried out at a moisture content as specified
inn the respective Clauses for material requirements. Where the cementitious binder content is determined
due allowance shall made for the presence in the un-
stabilised material of naturally occurring MgO or CaO
7111 TESTING CEMENTITIOUS BINDERS AND which affects the result of such tests. If the standard
CONCRETE deviation of the natural CaO plus MgO content of the
untreated material exceeds 0.35% any determination of
the cementitious- binder content shall be ignored.
(a) Testing aggregates for concrete
Aggregates shall be regularly tested by the Contractor
Sample holes shall randomly spaced transversely as
at a frequency to the satisfaction of the Engineer as part
well as longitudinally over the area to be tested, or as
of the Contractor’s process control as they are being
directed by the Engineer, and if the material is road –
manufactured or brought onto the site and used or
mixed, samples shall be taken from the top and bottom
taken to stockpile.
of each hole. The minimum number of samples per test
shall be 10.

(c) Canvas patch test for the spreading rate of investigated by extracting and testing concrete cores,
cementitious binder 100 mm or 150 mm cores shall be drilled and tested.
The following method shall be used for determining the The sampling and testing procedure to be followed shall
spreading rate of a chemical stabilising agent where be in accordance with the publication Concrete core
bulk distributors are used. Testing for Strength – Concrete Society Technical
Report No.11, published by the Concrete Society of
At least 10 clean canvas patches, each measuring 1.0 Great Britain.
m x 1.0 m shall be placed flat on the road in selected
positions in relation to the bulk distributor’s track. After The instructions of this report shall be followed for
the stabilising agent has been spread by the bulk determining the “estimated potential strength”, which
distributor, the canvas patches shall be carefully lifted shall be compared with the 28 days cube strength
and all the material on the patches transferred to a specified for each type of concrete. Corrections to the
container and weighed. The total mass of stabilising actual core strength to allow for excess voids, included
agent on each patch is then recorded and the average steel and the length :diameter ratio of cores shall be as
rate of application determined. Instead of canvas stated in this publication, and the correction for curing
patches, flat metal trays may be used for collecting the shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with
stabilising agent. this publication and such other information as he may
deem to be appropriate.
(d) Test for mix uniformity in chemically stabilised
layers The Engineer’s decision regarding the degree to which
Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall the concrete which is represented by the cores tested
determine the mix uniformity in chemically stabilised as described above, complies with the requirements
layers by means of unconfined compressive strength and also regarding the properties and suitability of the
tests, using an approved method. concrete, shall be final and binding.
The Contractor shall without delay make the necessary 7112 TESTING SOILS, GRAVEL AND
arrangements to take samples in accordance with the CRUSHED AGGREGATE FOR
requirements in the method used.
EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT
(e) Test for initial consumption of lime LAYERS
The objective of the gravel ICL test is the control of the Specimens of soils, gravel and crushed stone materials
pH in lime and cement stabilised soil in ordered to allow in earthworks and pavement layers shall be taken in
the possible formation of cement minerals, calcium accordance with CLAUSE 7109. And subjected to tests
silica hydrate in particular, and for proper modification as prescribed for each respective layer in the relevant
to take place. It is recommended that the stabiliser to be sections of SERIES 3000.
used during construction (or the nearest equivalent )
should be used to carry out this test. The method shall 7113 TESTING BITUMINOUS BINDERS AND
be in accordance with CML Test 1.22. MIXES
Specimens of soils, gravel and crushed stone materials
(f) Determining the compressive strength
in earthworks and pavement layers shall be taken in
The procedure for sampling and manufacturing, storing,
accordance with CLAUSE 7109. And subjected to tests
curing and testing test cubes shall be in accordance
as prescribed for each respective layer in the relevant
with CML Tests 2.12 and 2.13..
sections of SERIES 4000.
Where specified in the Special Specifications, the
The Engineer shall be entitled to order the Contractor to
compaction of concrete specimens in the moulds by
have material tested by an approved laboratory for
means of a vibrating table shall be obligatory. In such
compliance with all of the requirements specified, and
case the method of compaction shall be as follows:
the results of such tests shall be submitted direct to the
Engineer by the testing laboratory with copies, if
(i) Plastic concrete
requested, to the Contractor.
Fill the mould halfway and vibrate it and spade it on
all four sides with a suitable trowel to remove air
The cost of such tests shall be borne as specified in
bubbles. Stop the vibration as soon as a wet sheen
CLAUSE 7108.
appears on the surface. Fill the mould and repeat
the procedure, but stop when again a wet sheet
appears on the surface.
7114 FIELD DENSITY TESTING
(ii) Stiff Concrete
The same procedure is followed, except that the (a) General
mould is filled in three to four steps instead of in All earthwork, pavement layers and backfill to drainage
two. The vibration is stopped for each layer when a works and structures, will be subject to construction
wet sheen appears. control testing by the Engineer, and the Contractor must
allow for any disturbance or delays to the sequence of
(g) Consistency his operations occasioned by such control testing.
The test method described in CML Test 2.11 shall apply
in regard to the slump test. The contractor shall request, in writing, the Engineer’s
approval for each layer of each section of earthworks
(h) Air content and pavement construction and backfill to drainage
The air content of the freshly mixed concrete shall be works and structures. Such requests shall be made only
tested by the method given in TMH1 Method D5 of when the Contractor is fully satisfied that the section of
South Africa or equivalent. Air content tests shall be the work concerned is in the condition required by this
conducted on the same samples of concrete from which Specification. Such requests shall be accompanied by
cubes were made for the 28 – day compressive the test results required by in accordance with this
strength tests. Specification.
(i) Drilling and testing the cores The Engineer shall thereupon without undue delay
Where sections of concrete which have failed to comply inspect the section for any visible wet spots,
with the Specifications are required to be further laminations, heaving material (visible during compaction

or on proof rolling), segregation, and for the uniformity request re-approval of the layer and the layer will again
of the mixing and compaction. Providing the visual be subject to proof rolling, construction control testing,
aspects are satisfactory the Engineer shall test the and tolerance checks in accordance with this
section of the works submitted and inform the Specification.
Contractor in writing of the results of the tests at the
same time accepting or rejecting the section or layer Notwithstanding the Engineer’s approval of a layer, the
concerned. Contractor shall be responsible for making good any
subsequent damage doe to traffic, ingress of water or
Work on layers shall in no circumstances commence any other reason and should any damage occur the
until the preceding layer has been approved and layer will again be subject to proof rolling, construction
accepted by the Engineer in writing. The Contractor is control testing and tolerance checks in accordance with
wholly responsible for protecting and maintaining the this Specification.
condition of the work which has been submitted for
approval. (b) Testing frequency
The testing frequencies shall be minimum as given in
Should any layer be left unprotected for more than 24 TABLE 7110/1.
hours subsequent to approval the Contractor shall
TABLE 7110/1
TESTING FREQUENCIES FOR FIELD DENSITY TESTING
Layer and nominal class of material Frequency, minimum Absolute minimum
2 3 tests per section and

Roadbed 1 test per 1000 m
1 test per 50m
3
Earthworks fill using soils: (G3) 1 test per 200 m 3 per section per layer
3
Backfill to culverts and structures 2 tests per 10 m 2 per section
Fill or improved subgrade layers using
dump rock: (DR) Method specification
Improved subgrade layers using 2
gravel/soils: (G7, G15) 1 test per 1000 m 4 per section per layer
Gravel wearing course used on gravel 2
roads: (GW) 1 test per 1000 m 4 per section
2
Subbase: (G25, G45,CM, C1) 1 test per 750 m 5 per section
2
Base course: (G60, G80, CRS, CRR) 1 test per 500 m 6 per section
Base course of bituminous mix: 2
(BEMIX, FBMIX, DBM, LAMBS) 1 test per 500 m 6 per section
Base course of penetration macadam:
(PM80, PM60, PM30) Method specification
Asphalt concrete surfacing 2
(AC20, AC14, AC10) 1 test per 400 m 6 per section
(c) Testing methods (d) Field density requirements

If a nuclear method is used for determining density and The required field densities for each material type shall
moisture content, tests will be done at least at the same be as shown in TABLE 7110/2. The values shown are
frequency required when using the sand replacement nominal values to which an assessment of the results
method but at each nuclear densometer test location, shall be applied in accordance with SECTION 7200.
the average of two readings taken at positions rotated
0
by 180 shall be used. A check/comparison test using
the sand replacement method shall be carried out as 7115 TESTS OF SURFACE REGULARITY,
required by the Engineer. LEVELS AND LAYER THICKNESS
Initial calibration of the nuclear testing equipment shall
(a) General
be done by carrying out at least fifty tests in parallel with
the sand replacement method for each different
(i) Straight edge measurements, normal conditions
material encountered.
Measurements of surface regularity shall be carried
out with a 3 m straight edge having sharp right
When starting to use a new material source, or
angled corners at the bottom, and shall be placed
whenever there is a change of material type, a
on the road at any angle to the centreline as
calibration shall be carried out in accordance with the
directed by the Engineer. Measurements shall be
manufacturer’s guidelines or as required by the
carried out by measuring the largest deviation from
Engineer to establish a moisture correction and any
true surface along the straightedge.
correction of density required. Check tests will be used
to update the initial calibration of the nuclear density
Using the rolling straight edge for measuring
testing equipment.
surface irregularities the apparatus and testing
method for which this shall be in accordance with
testing Method ST3 of TMH6 of South Africa.

TABLE 7110/2
MINIMUM FIELD DENSITY, NOMINAL VALUES
Layer and nominal class of material Minimum field density, nominal value
Depends on the depth below formation, reference is made to

Roadbed
TABLE 3606/1
To be the same as adjacent layers at the same level, not less
Backfill to culverts and structures
than 93% BS-Heavy
Fill or improved subgrade layers using dump rock: (DR) Method specification
Earthworks fill using soils: (G3) 90% of BS-Heavy
Lower improved subgrade layers using gravel/soils: (G7) 93% of BS-Heavy
Upper improved subgrade layers using gravel/soils: (G15) 95% of BS-Heavy
Gravel wearing course used on gravel roads: (GW) 95% of BS-Heavy
Subbase of natural gravel: (G25, G45) 95% of BS-Heavy
Subbase of cemented material: (CM, C1) 95% of BS-Heavy
Base course of natural gravel: (G60, G80) 98% of BS-Heavy
Base course of cemented material: (C1, C2) 97% of BS-Heavy
Base course of crushed aggregate: CRS 100% of BS-Heavy
88% of aggregate apparent density, or

Base course of crushed aggregate: CRR
104% BS-Heavy if approved by Engineer
96% of Marshall density, or
Base course of cold bituminous mix: (BEMIX, FBMIX)
method specifications 1)
Base course of hot bituminous mix: (DBM40, DBM30,
Method specification) 1)
LAMBS)
Base course of penetration macadam: (PM80, PM60, PM30) Method specification) 1)

Asphalt concrete surfacing: (AC20, AC14, AC10)
96% of Marshall density
1) Marshall density cannot be used on coarse bituminous material types, i.e. with nominal aggregate size 30mm or larger.
Whether or not Marshall compaction can be applied for a specific type of cold bituminous mix shall be decided by the
Engineer.
(ii) Straight edge measurements, severe conditions

Where surface irregularities are measured on (b) Surface regularity, straight edge measurements
surface with a coarse surface texture in the opinion The required surface regularity, measured with a 3 m
of the Engineer, such as grooved concrete straight edge at any angle in relation to the centreline,
pavements, crushed aggregate pavement layers, shall be within the limits shown in TABLE 7111/1.
natural gravel base course, asphalt with rolled in
such chipping, seals and other like surface, the TABLE 7111/1
following procedure shall be followed: SURFACE REGULARITY, MEASUREMENTS WITH 3 METRE
STRAIGHT EDGE
A metal wedge of 100 mm in length and 50 mm in
width shall be constructed with a taper of 7.5 Maximum straight
horizontal to 1.0 vertical and tapering to a feather Layer
edge deviation (mm)
edge (50 mm wide ). Parallel lines spaced at 7.5
Bituminous wearing
mm intervals shall be engraved on the sloping face 6
course
and numbered to indicate the positions where the
wedge is 1.0 mm , 2.0 mm, etc, thick. Bituminous binder
8
course
(iii) Horizontal tolerances Base course (not PM
At no point shall the distance between the centre- 10
materials)
line and the edge of the top of a layer be less than
that detailed or more than 150 mm in excess of that Gravel wearing course 15
detailed.
Subbase 30
(iv) Shoulders
Shoulders shall be constructed to the same
thickness, level, crossfall and surface regularity
requirements as for the adjacent pavement layers. (c) Surface levels
The maximum deviation in levels, shall be as shown in
TABLE 7111/2.

TABLE 7111/2
SURFACE LEVELS
Maximum deviation in levels (mm)
Layer and material class High (+) Low (-)
Absolute max Hmax Absolute max Hmax

H90 value 1) H90 value 1)
value value
Base course, when
10 20 10 15
followed by a seal only
Base course, when
NIL NIL 10 20
followed by AC surfacing
Subbase NIL NIL 25 35
Formation NIL NIL 50 75
Gravel wearing course 15 30 15 20
1) H90 is the limit within which 90% of the measurements shall fall when assessing 50 or more measurements against the
specified level at the respective locations the measurements were taken..
(d) Surface crossfall TABLE 7111/4

The maximum deviation in slope or crossfall, shall be as LAYER THICKNESS
shown in TABLE 7111/3. The values shown are nominal
values to which an assessment of the results shall be Maximum deviation in
applied in accordance with SECTION 7200. layer thickness (mm)
Layer
Absolute max
T90 value 1)
Tmax value
TABLE 7111/3
SURFACE CROSSFALL Bituminous wearing
5 10
course
Maximum crossfall Bituminous base
Layer course (not PM 10 15
deviation + (%)
materials)
Bituminous wearing
0.25 Base course,
course
aggregate or natural 10 20
Base course (not PM gravel
0.25
materials)
Subbase 15 25
Subbase 0.50
Improved subgrade
20 35
Formation 0.50 layers
Gravel wearing
15 25
Gravel wearing course 0.50 course
1) T90 is the value with which 90% of the
measurements shall comply when assessing 20 or
(e) Layer thickness more measurements against the specified layer
The final compacted layer thickness measured by thickness.
excavating trial pits or core drilling shall not be less than
the maximum deviations shown in TABLE 7111/4. The For mixed materials the composition which meets the
measurements shall be taken at locations as directed specified requirements and is accepted by the Engineer
by the Engineer at intervals not less frequent than 25 shall then be used in the site trials to establish that all
metres. specified requirements of the completed pavement
course can be achieved.
7116 LABORATORY TRIALS AND SITE TRIALS The Laboratory trials on mixed materials shall be
undertaken, and the Contractor’s proposals based
(a) Laboratory trials thereon submitted to the Engineer, at least two weeks
Laboratory trials shall be carried out by the Contractor before the Contractor proposes to use the mixed
and the Engineer on concrete, earthwork and pavement material in the site trials.
materials which are to be used in the works in their
natural state to establish a relationship between their (b) Site trials
specified end product requirements and properties Full scale laying and compaction site trials shall be
which can be readily determined in the field for carried out by the Contractor on all earthwork and
construction control purposes. pavement materials proposed for the works using the
constructional plant and methods proposed by the
Laboratory trial mixes and site trials for bituminous Contractor for constructing the works. The trials shall be
mixes and concrete mixes shall be carried out in carried out with the agreement, and in the presence of
accordance with the requirements of SERIES 4000 and the Engineer.
SERIES 6000 respectively of this Specification.
The trials shall be carried out to enable the Contractor
to demonstrate the suitability of his mixing and
compaction equipment to provide and compact the

material to the specified density and to confirm that the (b) Prestressed concrete
other specified requirements of the completed
earthwork or pavement layer can be achieved. (i) General
Where so directed by the Engineer the contractor
Each trial area shall be at least 100 metres long and to shall make arrangements for samples of the
the full construction width and shall be laid to the materials he intends to use in the Works to be
specified depth for the material. It may form part of the tested by an Independent testing authority. The cost
works provided it complies with this Specification. Any of testing prestressing steel, anchorage assemblies
areas which do not comply with this Specification shall and couplings shall be included in his rates.
be removed and a new trial shall be laid.
Material represented by samples which do not
The Contractor shall allow in his programme for comply with the specified requirements shall be
conducting site trials and for carrying out the removed and replaced with suitable material.
appropriate tests on them. The trial on each pavement
layer shall be undertaken at least 21 days ahead of the (ii) Anchorage’s and couplers
Contractor proposing to commence full scale work on Anchorage’s and couplers shall be tested in
that layer. accordance with the requirements of CLAUSE 6503.
The anchorages and couplers shall be assembled
The Contractor shall compact each section of trial over in accordance with their practical application on the
the range of compactive effort the Contractor is site where all components necessary for anchoring
proposing and if appropriate, the following data shall be shall be used, but excluding the ducts.
recorded for each level of compactive effort at each site
trial: (iii) Prestressing steel
(i) The composition and grading of the material before Prestressing steel shall be tested in accordance
the site trial. with the requirements of CLAUSE 6503. Should any
(ii) The composition and grading of the material test piece fail to comply with the requirements
including the cement, lime or bitumen content. specified for the prestressing steel, the material
(iii) The moisture content at the time of compaction and represented by that sample shall be replaced with
the optimum moisture content for the specified materials conforming to the specifications if further
compaction. testing confirms that they do not comply with the
(iv) The type, size, tyre pressure, frequency of vibration specifications.
and the number of passes of the compaction
equipment. (iv) Grout
(v) The maximum dry density or target density as The fluidity of grout shall be measured with a flow
appropriate measured on a sample before and at cone, immersion apparatus or viscometer. The
intervals through the site trials. instrument shall be accurately calibrated in a
(vi) The density achieved. laboratory so that the specified viscosity of grout
(vii) The compacted thickness of the layer. can be controlled satisfactorily.
(viii) Any other relevant information as directed by the
Engineer. The readings obtained during grouting shall be
compared with the times determined in the laboratory
At least eight sets of tests shall be made by the for grouts of the specified viscosities.
Contractor and the Engineer on each 100 metres of trial
for each level of compactive effort and provided all eight The bleeding of grout shall be measured in a metal or
sets of results over the range of compactive effort glass container with an internal diameter of
proposed by the Contractor meet the specified approximately 100 mm and a height of approximately
requirements for the material the site trial shall be 120 mm. The grout and water levels in the container
deemed successful. The above data recorded in the shall be controlled with a metal bridge into which two
trial shall become the agreed basis on which the adjustable studs A and B are secured.
particular material shall be provided and processed to
achieve the specified requirements. The procedure for determining the bleeding of grout
shall be as follows:
If during the execution of the works, the construction Studs A and B in the metal bridge shall be adjusted and
control tests indicate that the requirements for a locked so that the distance from the lower tips of studs
material are not being consistently achieved, then work to the bottom of the container will be approximately 100
on that layer shall stop until the cause is investigated by mm and 107 mm respectively. The volume Va and Vb
the Contractor. Such investigation may include further for the container at the respective levels of the stud
laboratory and site trials on the material to determine a settings shall then be determined to the nearest
revised set of data as above which, when agreed, shall millilitre.
be the basis on which all subsequent material will be
provided and processed to achieve the specified The container shall be filled with freshly mixed grout to
requirements. a level where the grout will just touch the tip of stud A
which points downwards. The bridge shall then be
Agreement by the Engineer to a set of data recorded in removed and the container tightly sealed to prevent
0
a site trial shall not relieve the Contractor of any evaporation. The container shall then be stored at 20 C
responsibility to comply with the requirements of this and kept free from vibrations for the entire duration of
Specification and the Special Specification. the test.
Three hours after the grout has been mixed, the

7117 TESTS ON STRUCTURES container shall be opened and the free (bleed) water
poured off. The bridge shall be placed over the
(a) Test on elastomeric bearings container with tip of stud B pointing downwards and
Tests on elastomeric bearings shall be conducted in water poured onto the grout with measuring apparatus
accordance with BS 5400 Part 9.2 and the bearings until the water level touches the tip of stud B. The
shall comply with the test requirements specified in the volume of water added shall be determined to the
said specification. nearest millilitre.

(c) Load test on foundation piles During the test, the pile shall be loaded with up to 100%
The head of the test pile shall be exposed for checking of the specified working load and the load shall then be
position and slope. Where necessary, the head shall be removed. It shall then be loaded to the maximum test
cut further back so as to expose a full bond length of load after which the test load shall be removed.
main reinforcing steel, and a suitable pile head slab for
applying an axial load to the pile shall be cast. As an 7118 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
alternative the head may be cut at right angles and the Payment for the Engineer’s laboratory shall be in
load applied directly to the pile. accordance with SECTION 1400.
The test load shall be applied to the top of the pile with
a hydraulic jack. Where more than one jack is used for ITEM UNIT
applying the load, all the jacks in the circuit shall be
activated by the same pumping unit. The jack (s) shall 71.01 SPECIAL TESTS
REQUESTED BY THE ENGINEER
be placed so as to ensure that the load is applied
axially. (STATE MATERIAL AND TEST
METHOD):
The applied load shall be calculated in accordance with (a) TESTS PROVISIONAL SUM
the hydraulic pressure which is being monitored by two (b) CONTRACTOR’S OVERHEAD %
pressure meters in the circuit. The pressure meter shall AND PROFITS
be calibrated in divisions not exceeding 2% of the
maximum pressure applied, and the range of the
metres shall not exceed 150% of the maximum
pressure. The jack (s) and meters shall be calibrated by
an approved testing laboratory not more than four
weeks before the test will commence.
The deflection of the pile head shall be measured with

two scale rulers and two dial extensometers. The scale
rulers shall be fixed to the pile and placed on both sides
of the pile on a diameter line and the dial
extensometers shall be similarly placed but on a
diameter line at right angles to that in which the scale
rulers have been mounted.
Level measurements shall be taken on the scale rulers

and reduced as a level mark to a similar scale ruler
placed at a distance from the test pile. All tree scale
rulers shall be calibrated in millimetres and the level –
indicating instrument shall be capable of taking
readings to 0.5 mm, and approximate readings of up to
0.1 mm.
The dial extensometers shall have a range of 50 mm

and shall be marked in 0.1 mm divisions to enable
measurements to 0.05 mm to be taken. The plungers of
the extensometer shall rest on a machined metal or
glass surface.
The extensometer shall be supported by one or more

beans kept in the shade. The supports for the beams
shall be so placed as to limit the effect of earth
movements around the test pile on the deflection
readings.
The test load shall be applied in increments of 20% of

the specified working load to a maximum test load
equal to twice the specified working load or the ultimate
test load whichever is the smaller.
A load increment may not be applied before the

subsidence or have rate has stabilised at a rate of not
more than 0.10 mm in 20 minutes under the load
applied.
After the load loading has been completed, the

maximum test load shall be maintained until the
movement is less than 0.2 mm within a period of 24
hours. The load shall be removed in decrements of 20%
of the specified working load at intervals of not less than
20 minutes.
After the loading has been removed, the readings on

both meters registering the movement of the pile shall
be recorded accurately to 0.1 mm at intervals of 5.10
and 20 minutes and then every 30 minutes until the
load is changed. The final recovery shall be recorded
24 hours after the maximum test load has been
removed.

SERIES 7000: TOLERANCES, TESTING AND (a) Lot

A lot is a sizeable portion of work or quantity of material
QUALITY CONTROL
which is assessed as a unit for the purpose of quality
control, and selected to represent material or work
SECTION 7200: QUALITY produced by essentially the same process and from
essentially the same materials.
CONTROL (b) Random Sample
A random samples are test measurements at separate
CONTENTS: test positions or on separate sample portions obtained
CLAUSE PAGE from the lot in an unbiased manner.
7201 SCOPE 7000-11 (e) Nominal value or specification limit
7202 JUDGEMENT PLANS: GENERAL 7000-11 This is the limit value of the property of any product
7203 DEFINITIONS 7000-11 outside which not more than a specified percentage of
7204 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 7000-11 the population of values representing an acceptable
7205 PROCEDURES 7000-12 product property is allowed to lie. The specification limit
7206 CONDITIONAL ACCCEPTANCE 7000-13 may be a single lower limit or a single upper limit or a
7207 ROUTINE TESTS AND INSPECTION BY double limit consisting of a lower limit and an upper
THE ENGINEER. 7000-14 limit.
(f) Acceptance limit for sample mean
This is the limit value of a product property within which
the sample mean shall lie for a product to be
7201 SCOPE acceptable.
This Section describes the scheme used for
determining, by means of tests and measurements and (g) Acceptance limits for individual test values
by applying statistical judgement plans, whether certain These are the limit values of a product property within
specified requirements in regard to the properties of which the sample values representing a product shall lie
materials and workmanship are being complied with. for the product to be acceptable.
It also covers the requirements in regard to the control (h) Conditional acceptance
to be exercised by the Contractor for monitoring the This is the acceptance of a lot at conditions that specific
quality of his work and materials and the routine tests rectification measures are taken and carried through to
and inspections to be carried out by the Engineer. completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the
lot can be approved in the permanent Works and
7202 JUDGEMENT PLANS: GENERAL certified for payment. Conditional acceptance shall be
Certain requirements and nominal limit values are laid subject to the provisions of CLAUSE 7202.
down in the Specifications in regard to the properties of
materials and workmanship to be supplied. Tests shall (i) Outliers
be conducted and measurements taken for controlling Where, in a sample, one or more test results differ
the relevant properties of the workmanship and significantly from the other values obtained, this
materials supplied, and the results of such tests and difference could be ascribed to an assignable cause if
measurements shall be assessed on the basis of the so deemed by the Engineer, in which case such test
prescribed criteria for compliance with the specified result shall be regarded as an outlier and disregarded
requirements. when assessing the lot.
Wherever possible, acceptance criteria shall be

determined by way of statistical principles described in 7204 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
this Section. Wherever statistical acceptance criteria
are deemed inappropriate in the opinion of the (a) Determining the lot size
Engineer, the specified requirements and nominal limit
values shall be fully complied with. (i) Road-construction layers
The lot size shall be a section compacted in one
Despite acceptance of those properties judged by these process where essentially the same materials and
statistical methods, the materials or work submitted will construction equipment have been used.
be rejected when other properties (which are not
controlled by statistical methods) fail to comply with the Where production is on a continuous basis, a lot
requirements of the Specifications, or where there are shall normally mean the product of one day’s work
other causes for rejection such as obviously defective and shall not exceed the product of two full days’
workmanship or excessively variable properties, visible work. However, a lot of any smaller size may be
signs of poor workmanship, and similar considerations ordered by the Engineer where:
which constitute sufficient grounds for rejecting the work
without any further testing in the opinion of the (1) The properties under investigation exhibit
Engineer. abnormal local variation within the normal lot
size.
The Engineer shall be entitled to assess separately any (2) An area is obviously of a different quality than
specified portion of a lot if, in his opinion, it exhibits the rest;
significant deviations as compared with the remainder (3) The rate of production is very high.
of the lot.
(ii) Concrete
7203 DEFINITIONS The lot size shall be determined by the Engineer,
The limit values will depend on the sample sizes and with due regard being had to the size and the type
may be a lower limit L, an upper limit or double limits. of structure in which the concrete is placed, the
For the purposes of this SECTION the following words specific portion of the structure, and the total
and symbols shall have the following meanings: quantity of concrete placed in a day. The lot sizes in
concrete structures could therefore vary
considerably, and, particularly in the case of small
structures, it could be necessary to combine undertaken, at least 90% of the level measurements
samples of the same grade of concrete from show a deviation from the specified levels which is
different structures at the discretion of the Engineer, smaller than the tolerance specified in TABLE 7111/2
provided that the concrete has been obtained from and no measurements fall outside the maximum
the same concrete plant and has been cast in the allowed deviation Hmax.
same period.
Isolated spots, where the surface levels deviate by
(iii) Other more than the appropriate tolerance of the specified
In certain cases, as for example in material levels shall be repaired to bring the deviation to within
stockpiles, others where the definition of a lot in the tolerance.
accordance with this Section does not apply directly
in the opinion of the Engineer, the Engineer will (d) Crossfall
determine lot sizes in accordance with All measurements of crossfall as directed by the
circumstances pertaining to each case. Engineer shall fall within the limits given in TABLE
7111/3.
(b) Random sampling
When any lot is tested, whether a normally sized lot or Isolated spots, where the crossfall deviate by more than
an isolated section which clearly exhibits an abnormal the appropriate tolerance of the specified crossfall shall
variation of the properties under consideration, all be repaired to bring the deviation to within the
samples shall be taken in a random pattern. tolerance.
For this purpose use shall be made of tables of random (e) Layer thickness
numbers according to the instructions in TMH5 of South At least 20, but preferably more, layer thickness shall
Africa, or equivalent as directed by the Engineer. be determined in accordance with a stratified random
pattern for each lot of completed layer work. Layer
(c) Sample Sizes thickness may not be determined by means of level
For purposes of acceptance control, the Engineer will measurements, but shall be measured by core drilling
determine sample size, i.e. the number of values to be of excavation of sample pits at locations approved by
assessed in a lot. the Engineer.
(d) Outliers The lot will be considered to comply with the

Test results shall be scanned for possible outliers. requirements for layer thickness if both the following
Where there is reason to believe that a test result may conditions are fulfilled:
be erroneous, it shall, if possible, be re-examined by − at least 90% of all the thickness measurements
further testing, and, if there is reasonable evidence to taken before any thickness repairs are made are
suggest that the test result is erroneous, it shall be equal to or greater than the specified nominal
regarded as an outlier, rejected and replaced with a thickness, minus the T90 tolerance specified in
fresh result. Test results shall be deemed outliers, or TABLE 7111/4.
not outliers respectively, at the sole discretion of the − the mean layer thickness of the lot is not less than
Engineer. the specified nominal thickness
(e) Resubmission Isolated spots where the actual thickness is less than
Where a lot has been accepted conditionally, or has the specified thickness less the Tmax tolerance given in
been rejected, the Engineer may agree to its shall be repaired so as to fall within the tolerance.
resubmission for approval if it has been rectified to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. In such case a fresh (f) Relative compaction of earthworks and
sample shall be taken, and a fresh (second) set of test pavement layers
values determined. At least the following number of relative density
determinations shall be taken in a random pattern on
The first and second sets of test values shall then be each section or as directed by the Engineer and
compared with each other to determine whether their assessed as a lot:
properties differ significantly. − Roadbed, fill:
− Improved subgrade layers, gravel wearing course:
Where in the opinion of the Engineer a significant − Subbase
difference does occur, the submission of the lot shall be − Base course, surfacing:
regarded as a first submission and assessed as such,
and only the second set of test values shall then be After outliers have been examined and replaced as
used for this purpose. directed by the Engineer, compliance with the specified
density requirements shall be determined as shown in
TABLE 7205/1 (at the end of the Section).
7205 PROCEDURES
The lot will be considered to comply with the
(a) General requirements for field density if the following conditions
The statistical judgement procedures described below are both fulfilled in respect of the limits given in TABLE
shall apply to the corresponding product properties for 7205/1:
the purpose of acceptance control. Outliers shall be − the average value shall be at least equal to or
identified, disregarded, and, if possible, replaced at the higher than the acceptance limit for average density
discretion of the Engineer. − no single test value shall be lower than the
acceptance limit for single values
(b) Straight edge measurements
All measurements taken as directed by the Engineer
shall fall within the limits given in TABLE 7111/1.
(c) Surface levels

At least 50, but preferably more, levels shall be
determined for each lot of completed work The lot will
be considered to comply with the requirements in
respect of surface levels if, before any repair work is
(g) Cementitious binder content of cemented layers TABLE 7205/3

MINIMUM NUMBER OF TESTS OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
(i) Method FOR COMPRESSION STRENGTH
(1) Take 50 samples according to a random pattern Minimum number of

and determine their cementitious binder Volume of lot (m3)
tests in lot. 1)
content.
0 – 20 4
(2) Examine the results for outliers and replace
them if any in the opinion of the Engineer. 21 – 40 6
41 – 70 9
(ii) Analysis
The lot will be considered to comply with the 71 – 100 12
requirements for cementitious binder content if the 101 – 150 14
following conditions are both fulfilled:
(1) The mean cementitious-binder content shall be > 150 16
not less than 91% of the specified binder 1) Each test consists of the average value of a set of
content. three cubes.
(2) The cementitious binder content in not more
than 12 of the 50 samples may be lower than (ii) Analysis
70% of the specified binder content. Examine the results for outliers and disregard as
required in the opinion of the Engineer. The results
are then assessed according to the criteria set out
(h) Binder content of bituminous mixes below. A lot will comply with the requirements for
the characteristic strength denoted X, if it meets the
(i) Method following requirements by using the acceptance
(1) Take at least four specimens of bituminous mix factors A and B given in TABLE 7205/4:
in a random pattern and determine the binder
content. − Mean value: minimum ( X + A )
(2) Examine the results and replace any outliers as − Single test value: minimum ( X - B )
directed by the Engineer. Determine the sample
mean and assess the lot by using the following Where: X is required characteristic strength.
criteria. A and B are found in TABLE 7205/4.
(ii) Analysis TABLE 7205/4

The binder content of bituminous mixes shall not ACCEPTANCE FACTORS FOR STRENGTH OF STRUCTURAL
deviate from the specified binder content by more CONCRETE
than the values given in TABLE 7205/2.
Acceptance factors for strength of
Number of structural concrete
TABLE 7205/2 tests in lot A B
ACCEPTANCE LIMITS FOR BITUMINOUS BINDER CONTENT (MPa) (MPa)
IN MIXES 3 0.5 3.9
Maximum deviation from the 4 1.1 4.2
Number of
specified binder content 5 1.4 4.5
tests in lot
(% of binder)
6 1.7 4.7
Sample mean Single values
7 1.9 4.9
2 0.37 0.54
8 2.1 5.0
3 0.33 0.58
9 2.2 5.2
4 0.30 0.60
10 2.3 5.3
5 0.28 0.62
11 2.4 5.4
6 0.27 0.64
12 2.5 5.5
7 0.26 0.65
13 2.6 5.6
8 or more 0.25 0.66
14 2.7 5.7
15 2.7 5.8
(f) Concrete cube compressive strength, 28-day
(i) Method 7206 CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE

Take at least the minimum number of samples as
given in Table 7205/3 according to a random (a) General
pattern and make test cubes. Test them for cube Where a lot is rejected under a statistical judgement,
compressive strength after 28 days.
plan described in this Section, but the test results are
such that the lot complies with the requirements for
conditional acceptance specified in this Clause, the
Engineer may accept the lot conditionally. The Engineer
may then apply a number of conditions for rectification
of the layer at his own discretion for the product to be
approved and certified for payment. Conditional
acceptance shall be the sole discretion of the Engineer
and is not an option which may be exercised by the
Contractor or a right he may claim.

The Contractor shall have the option to remove and 7208 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
reinstate completely at his own cost conditionally No separate measurement or payment apply to this
accepted work with work which complies with the Section.
requirements.
(b) Application
Conditional acceptance may be applied in respect of
the properties of structures as shown in TABLE 7206/1.
(c) Criteria
When properties to which conditional acceptance may
apply are assessed in accordance with this Section, two
requirements shall always apply, viz one in relation to
the sample mean and one in relation to individual tests
value. A lot may be conditionally accepted when it
complies with one of the two requirements for
acceptance, but not with the second requirement
provided that it complies with the requirements for
conditional acceptance in relation to the second
requirement.
TABLE 7206/1
PROPERTIES TO WHICH CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE MAY
APPLY
Property Structure
− Bituminous base course or

Relative surfacing
compaction − Cemented layers
− Plant mixed, paver laid layers
Bituminous
Layers of bituminous mixes
binder content
Cementitious
Cemented layers
binder content
28-day cube All structural concrete (excepting
strength concrete pavements
Levels Earthworks and pavement layers
Layer
Earthworks and pavement layers
thickness
(d) Resubmission
Where a lot has been accepted conditionally or has
been rejected, the Engineer may agree to its
resubmission for approval if it has been reworked and
the Engineer is satisfied that a proper attempt was
made to improve the properties which were
unacceptable A fresh sample shall be taken, and a
fresh (second) set of test values determined. The first
and second sets of test values shall then be compared
with each other to determine whether their properties
differ significantly. Where in the opinion of the Engineer
a significant difference does occur, the submission of
the lot shall be regarded as a first submission and
assessed as such, and only the second set of test
values shall then be used for this purpose.
7207 ROUTINE TESTS AND INSPECTION BY

THE ENGINEER
The Engineer will at regular intervals inspect and test
materials and completed work for compliance with the
specified requirements, and, where applicable the
various specified judgement plans will be applied. The
testing frequencies and sample and lot sizes for routine
testing shall be at the Engineer’s discretion.
All sections of completed work shall be submitted to the

Engineer for routine inspection and testing, and the
Contractor shall not cover up or construct any work on
top of sections of completed work before being advised
by the Engineer of the outcome of his tests and
inspection. The Contractor shall arrange the submission
of work for testing in a manner as will afford the
Engineer reasonable opportunity for inspecting and
testing.

TABLE 7205/1
ACCEPTANCE LIMITS IN RESPECT OF FIELD DENSITY
Minimum average value (% relative density) Minimum value of any single test (% relative density)
Specified
Reference
Layer and nominal class nominal
compaction Number of tests assessed in the lot Number of tests assessed in the lot
of material density
method 9 or 9 or
(%) 3 or 4 5 6 7 8 3 or 4 5 6 7 8
more more
Roadbed 1) 100 BS-Light 100.1 100.3 100.5 100.6 100.7 100.8 97.1 96.9 96.8 96.7 96.6 96.5
Roadbed and fill layers:
(G3) 1) 90 BS-Heavy 90.1 90.4 90.6 90.7 90.9 91.0 86.4 86.2 86 85.9 85.8 85.7
Roadbed and lower
improved subgrade layers: 93 BS-Heavy 93.2 93.6 93.8 94.0 94.2 94.3 87.9 87.6 87.4 87.2 87.0 86.9
(G7) 1)
− Roadbed and upper
improved subgrade
layers: (G15) 1)
− Gravel wearing
course: (GW)
− Subbase of natural 95 BS-Heavy 95.2 95.6 95.8 96.0 96.2 96.3 91.4 91.2 91.0 90.9 90.8 90.7
gravel: (G25, G45)
− Subbase of cemented
material: (CM, C1)
Base course of cemented

97 BS-Heavy 97.1 97.4 97.6 97.7 97.9 98.0 93.4 93.2 93.0 92.9 92.8 92.7
material: (C1, C2)
Base course of natural
98 BS-Heavy 98.1 98.4 98.6 98.7 98.9 99.0 94.4 94.2 94.0 93.9 93.8 93.7
gravel: (G60, G80)
Base course of crushed
100 BS-Heavy 100.1 100.3 100.5 100.6 100.7 100.8 97.1 96.9 96.8 96.7 96.6 96.5
aggregate: CRS
Aggregate
88 apparent 88.4 88.6 88.7 88.8 88.9 89.0 85.6 85.5 85.3 85.2 85.1 85.0
Base course of crushed density
aggregate: CRR
104 2) BS-Heavy 104.1 104.4 104.6 104.7 104.9 105.0 100.4 100.2 100.0 99.9 88.8 99.7
− Asphalt concrete
surfacing: (AC20, AC14,
AC10)
96 Marshall 96.1 96.3 96.5 96.6 96.7 96.8 93.0 92.9 92.8 92.7 92.6 92.5
− Base course of cold
bituminous mix:
(BEMIX, FBMIX)
1) Specified nominal density for the roadbed depends on the depth below formation, reference is made to TABLE 3606/1.
2) 104% BS-Heavy can be used instead of 88% aggregate’s apparent density if approved by Engineer.

SERIES 7000: TOLERANCES, TESTING AND intervals of 25 m along the road centreline and along
QUALITY CONTROL the centreline of all culverts and structures. These shall
be plotted to a natural scale of 1:100 on a stable
transparent material and a copy of the plot submitted to
SECTION 7300: SETTING OUT the Engineer for agreement. If the Contractor fails to
take requisite levels, levels determined by the Engineer
AND TOLERANCES shall be taken as correct.
The Contractor shall programme for a period of 30 days

CONTENTS: between submitting the ground crossections and being
CLAUSE PAGE issued with final road, culvert and structure levels. A
minimum 5 km section of road shall be submitted, but
7301 SCOPE 7000-16 where the Contractor submits crossections for more
7302 GENERAL 7000-16 than 10 km of road within the same 30 day period the
7303 DETAILED SETTING OUT 7000-16
initial 30 days shall be extended by 30 days for each
7304 TOLERANCES 7000-16 additional 10 kms or part thereof. Final road, culvert or
7305 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7000-17 structure levels will be determined by the Engineer and
may be different from the levels shown on the
Drawings.
7301 SCOPE On receipt of the final road levels the Contractor shall
This Section covers the procedures for setting out and mark up the details on the transparencies and the
gives the limits for geometric tolerances for earthworks original and one print of the cross-sections shall be
and layer work. provided free of charge by the Contractor for the
Engineer.
7302 GENERAL
The Engineer will provide sufficient basic survey On completion of the earthworks but before starting
information to enable the contractor to set out the works formation or pavement layers the Contractor shall
and the Contractor shall be responsible for setting out establish steel pins at a constant offset to the edges of
all necessary reference points and for the maintenance the carriageway shoulders. The offset may however
thereof. vary between sections in cut and those in fill. The steel
pins will be clearly and indelibly marked with all the
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy relevant information necessary to directly establish the
in line, level and dimension of the basic survey and centreline and level at any point across the carriageway
setting out details provided and should the Contractor by using either boning rods or a string line.
discover any error in the information provided by the
Engineer, he should at once notify the Engineer. If the The interval between pins shall not be more that 12.5 m
information is confirmed to be in error the Engineer will and the pins shall be maintained by the Contractor for
issue amended drawings or instructions regarding the as long as they are needed by the Engineer to check
correction of the error. the work.
Prior to commencing construction, the Contractor shall

establish the road reserve boundary posts, or if no 7304 TOLERANCES
boundary posts are instructed, then the Contractor shall
establish reference points to define the road reserve at (a) General
100 m intervals on both sides. In addition to the requirements set out in this Clause
attention is drawn to the requirements of CLAUSE 7115
The Contractor shall establish temporary benchmarks which shall all be fulfilled.
along the road at intervals not exceeding 200 m and
shall provide the Engineer with a schedule of their (b) Horizontal alignments
levels and locations. Horizontal alignments shall be determined from the
centreline of the pavement surface as constructed, and
The Contractor shall not remove, damage, alter or all other parallel a alignments shall be corrected within
destroy in any way plot beacons or survey beacons. a tolerance of +13 mm therefrom.
Should the Contractor consider that any beacon will be
interfered with by the works he shall notify the Engineer (c) Thickness of pavement layers
who, if he considers necessary, will make arrangements The thickness of any pavement layer as specified or
for the removal and replacement of the beacon. ordered by the Engineer, measured at five points in any
length of 100 m, shall meet the requirements given in
If the Contractor removes or disturbs a beacon without TABLE 7111/4.
permission of the Engineer, he shall be liable for the full
cost of its replacement and any legal consequences (d) Surface levels of payment layers and formation
thereof. The level measured at any point on the surface of a
pavement layer or the formation level shall not deviate
7303 DETAILED SETTING OUT from the corresponding level calculated from the
The Contractor shall set out the line and level of the Drawings by more than the tolerances shown in TABLE
works at intervals of not more than 25 m or such lesser 7111/2.
intervals as are required to construct the Works to the
tolerances specified in this Specification. Reference For checking compliance with TABLE 7111/2
pegs and batter rails clearly and indelibly marked with measurements of surface levels will be taken at points
all the relevant information shall be provided clear of the to be selected by the Engineer at 12.5 m centres
road and at right angles to it from which the centreline, longitudinally and at 2 m centres transversely. At
level and batter slope can be directly established at any junctions, the grid point spacing shall be determined by
time. These shall be maintained by the Contractor for the Engineer.
as long as they are needed to check the work.
(e) Surface regularity
After completion of the setting out and site clearance The surface regularity of pavement layers and the
the Contractor shall take ground cross sections at formation shall be tested at points decided by the
Engineer with a rigid, steel straightedge 3 m long

placed at any angle to the centreline of the road. The
maximum allowable deviation of the surface below the
straightedge shall be as given in TABLE 7111/1.
In addition the longitudinal slope or transverse crossfall

shall not deviate from that shown on the Drawings by
more than the tolerances given in TABLE 7111/3.
(f) Shoulders
Shoulders shall be constructed to the same thickness,
level and surface regularity requirements as for the
adjacent pavement layers.
(g) Cutting and embankment slopes

In the final trimmed slope of cuttings a tolerance of
+0.25 will be permitted, i.e. if a slope of 1 in 2 is
specified, the acceptable slope shall be not steeper
than 1 in 2 or slacker than 1 in 2.25
In the final trimmed slopes of embankments, a

tolerance of +0.25 will be permitted, i.e. if the specified
slope is 1 in 2, the acceptable slope shall be not
steeper than 1 in 2 or slacker than 1 in 2.25.
(h) Width of cuttings and embankments

The tolerance permitted in the width of the bottom of
cuttings shall be 200 mm between the centreline of the
road and the toe of the cutting slope.
The width of embankments measured as the horizontal

distance from the centreline of the road to the top of the
embankment shall not be less than that shown on the
Drawing or more than that shown on the Drawings plus
0.25 m.
(i) Depth of side drains

The depth of side drains measured as the vertical
height difference from the centreline of the finished
pavement and the invert of the side drain shall not be
less than that shown on the Drawings nor more than
that shown on the Drawings plus 0.15 m.
(j) Construction control testing

Unless otherwise directed values given in this
Specification are minimum values and the workmanship
will only be considered as satisfactory if all tests, taken
at the frequency specified in SECTION 7100 of this
Specification are at least equal to that specified in the
relevant section.

No separate payment shall be made for work described
in this Section.

SERIES 7000: TOLERANCES, TESTING AND wide or such area to be determined by the Engineer as
QUALITY CONTROL necessary to obtain compliance with this Specification.
Where the results of the construction control tests are

SECTION 7400: RECTIFICATION less than that specified the full depth of the layer shall
be reworked to specification. The area treated shall be
OF EARTHWORKS AND the whole section submitted for approval or following a
retest a length of at least 50 m both sides of each test
PAVEMENT LAYERS OUTSIDE and retest, failure.
PERMITTED GEOMETRIC (c) Base course and subbase
TOLERANCES Where these consist of unbound (i.e. natural or graded
stone) material the full depth of the material shall be
removed from the pavement and replaced to
CONTENTS: specification. The area treated shall be at least 30 m
CLAUSE PAGE long and 3 m wide or such area to the determined by
the Engineer as necessary to obtain compliance with
7401 SCOPE 7000-18 this Specification.
7402 RECTIFICATION MEASURES 7000-18
7403 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7000-18 Where the courses consist of cement or lime treated
material or lean concrete the full depth of the layer shall
be removed from the pavement and replaced to
specification. The area treated shall be at least 5m long
7401 SCOPE and the full width of the paving laid in one operation. If
This Section sets out the methods for rectification of areas are corrected within 7 days of laying no
earthworks and pavement layers constructed outside construction traffic or compaction plant shall use the
permitted geometric tolerances. Where any tolerances surrounding satisfactory areas.
in SECTION 7300 are exceeded, the Contractor shall
determine the full extent of the area which is out of For bituminous bases the full depth of layer shall be
tolerance and shall make good the surface of the removed and replaced with fresh material laid and
pavement course, earthworks or formation in the compacted to specification. Any area so treated shall be
manner described below. at least 5 m long and the full width of the paving laid in
one operation.
7402 RECTIFICATION MEASURES Where the results of the construction control tests for
any of the base or subbase materials are less than that
(a) Earthworks excluding improved subgrade specified the full depth of the layer shall be removed
layers and replaced to specification. The area treated shall be
Where a cutting slope is steeper, and an embankment the whole section submitted for approval or, following a
slope is slacker, than the specified slope then the slope retest, a length of at least 50 m both sides of each test
shall be trimmed to the specified slope. Where a cutting and retest failure or such area to be determined by the
slope in slacker, and an embankment slope is steeper, Engineer as necessary to obtain compliance with the
than the specified slope then the slope shall be Specification.
benched and fill material placed and compacted and the
slope shall be trimmed all in accordance with (d) Asphalt concrete surfacing
requirements of SERIES 3000 and any other relevant These shall have the full depth of the layer removed
part of this Specification. and replaced with fresh material laid and compacted to
specification. The area rectified shall be the full width of
Where the width of a cutting is less than, and the width the paving laid in one operation and at least 15 m long.
of an embankment more than, the specified width then
the cutting or embankment shall be trimmed to the Where the results of the construction control tests for
specified width. Where the width of a cutting is more the wearing course are less than that specified the full
than, and the width of an embankment is less than, the depth of the layer shall be removed and replaced to
specified width then the embankment or cutting shall be specification. The area treated shall be the whole
benched and fill material placed and compacted and the section submitted for approval or, following a retest, a
slopes shall be trimmed all in accordance with the length of at least 50 m both sides of each test and
requirements of this Specification. retest failure or such area to be determined by the
Engineer as necessary to obtain compliance with this
Where the depth of a side drain is less than that Specification.
specified the side drain shall be trimmed to the
specified depth. Where the depth of a side drain is 7403 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
more than specified the side drain shall be backfilled The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his
with fill material compacted to a dry density of at least general rates and prices for the cost of complying with
90% MDD of BS-Heavy up to the specified depth. the requirements in this Section and no additional
payment will be made.
Where the results of the construction control tests are
less than that specified the full depth of the layer shall Notwithstanding the provisions of this Specification,
be reworked to specification. The area treated shall be measurement and payment for earthworks and
the whole section submitted for approval or, following a pavement works shall be made on the basis of the net
retest, a length of at least 50 m both sides of each test crossection Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer
and retest failure or such area to be determined by the and no additional payment shall be made in respect of
Engineer as necessary to obtain compliance with this variation within or without the specified tolerances.
Specification.
(b) Improved subgrade layers

Where the levels or widths are out of tolerance then the
full depth of the layer shall be reworked to specification.
The area treated shall be at least 12.5 m long and 3 m
SERIES 7000: TOLERANCES, TESTING AND

QUALITY CONTROL 7501 INSTITUTIONS
− Central Materials Laboratory of Ministry of Works.
− Tanzania Bureau of Standards
SECTION 7500: SPECIFICATIONS − Norwegian Public Roads Administration
− American Association of State Highway and
AND TEST METHODS Transport Officials (AASHTO)
− American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
CONTENTS: − British Standards Institute (BS)
− Standard Coordination Specification (CKS)
CLAUSE PAGE
− Deutshe Ingineur Norme (DIN)
7501 INSTITUTION 7000-19 − South African Bureau of Standards (SABS)
7502 STANDARDS AND TEST METHODS 7000-19 − Southern African Bitumen and Tar Association
7503 ADDRESSES 7000-21 (SABITA)
− Swedish Standard (SIS)
− Technical methods for highways (TMH)
− Technical recommendations for highways (TRH)
− US Federal
7502 STANDARDS AND TEST METHODS

(a) Central Materials Laboratory (CML), Ministry of
Works, Tanzania
CML test
Name of test: Reference to test method:
number:
(i) Tests on Soils and Gravel:

1.1 Moisture Content BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.2 Liquid Limit (Cone Penetrometer) BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.3 Plastic Limit & Plasticity Index BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.4 Linear Shrinkage BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.5 Particle Density Determination - Pyknometer BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.6 Bulk Density for undisturbed samples BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.7 Particle Size Distribution - Wet sieving BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.8 Particle Size Distribution - Hydrometer Method BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.9 Compaction Test - BS Light and BS Heavy BS1377:Part 4:1990
1.10 CBR Test - One point method BS1377:Part 4:1990
BS1377:Part 4:1990 and
1.11 CBR Test - Three point method
TMH1:method A8:1986
1.12 Consolidation Test - Oedometer BS1377:Part 5:1990
1.13 Triaxial Test BS1377:Part 7:1990
1.14 Shear Box Test BS1377:Part 7:1990
1.15 Permeability Test - Constant Head BS1377:Part 5:1990
BS1377:Part 3:1990 and
1.16 Organic Content - Ignition Loss Method
NPRA 014 test 14.445
1.17 Crumb Test BS1377:Part 5:1990
1.18 pH Value (pH meter) BS1377:Part 3:1990
TMH1:method A14:1986 and
1.19 Preparation of Stabilised Samples for (UCS)
BS1924:Part 2:1990
TMH1:method A14:1986 and
1.20 Compaction Test - Stabilised Materials
BS1924:Part 2:1990
1.21 UCS of Stabilised Materials TMH1:method A14:1986
1.22 Initial Consumption of Lime - ICL BS1924:Part 2:1990
(ii) Tests on Aggregates and Concrete:

2.1 Moisture Content of Aggregates BS812:Part 109:1990
2.2 Relative Density and Water Absorption BS812:Part 2:1975
2.3 Sieve Tests on Aggregates BS812:Part 103.1:1985
2.4 Flakiness Index (FI) and Average Least Dimension (ALD) BS812:Section 105.1:1989
2.5 Elongation Index BS812:Section 105.2:1990
2.6 Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV) BS812:Part 110:1990
2.7 Ten Percent Fines Value (TFV) BS812:Part 111:1990
2.8 Aggregate Impact Value (AIV) BS812:Part 112:1990
2.9 Los Angeles Abrasion Test (LAA) ASTM C535-89
2.10 Sodium Soundness Test (SSS) ASTM C88-90
2.11 Slump Test BS1881:Part 102:1983
2.12 Making of Concrete Test Cubes BS1881:Part 108:1983
2.13 Concrete Cube Strength BS1881:Part 116:1983

(iii) Tests on Asphalt and Bituminous Materials

3.1 Preconditioning of Bitumen Samples Prior to Mixing or Testing NPRA 014 test 14.511
3.2 Density of Bituminous Binders ASTM D70-97
3.3 Flash and Fire Point by Cleveland Open Cup ASTM D92-90
3.4 Thin-Film Oven Test (TFOT) ASTM D1754-87
3.5 Penetration of Bituminous Materials ASTM D5-86
3.6 Softening Point Test ASTM D36-70
3.7 Ductility ASTM D113-86
3.8 Viscosity Determination using the Brookfield Thermosel Apparatus ASTM D4402-91
3.9 Density and Water Absorption of Aggregates Retrieved on a 4.75 mm ASTM C127-88
Sieve
3.10 Density and Water Absorption of Aggregates Passing the 4.75 mm ASTM C128-88
Sieve
3.11 Calibration of Glass Pycnometers (0.5-1 litre) NPRA 014 test 14.5922
3.12 Mixing of Test Specimens; Hot Bituminous Mixes NPRA 014 test 14.5532
3.13 Determination of Maximum Theoretical Density of Asphalt Mixes ASTM D2041-95 and D4469-85
and Absorption of Binder into Aggregates
3.14 Bulk Density of Saturated Surface Dry Asphalt Mix Samples ASTM D2726-96
3.15 Bulk Density of Paraffin-Coated Asphalt Mix Samples ASTM D1188-89
3.16 Bulk Density of Asphalt Mix Samples, Calliper Measurements NPRA 014 test 14.5622
3.17 Calculation of Void Content in Bituminous Mixes ASTM D3203 and AASHTO pp19-93
3.18 Marshall Test ASTM D1559-89
3.19 Marshall Mix Design ASTM D1559-89
3.20 Refusal Density Mix Design TRL Overseas Road Note 31, app. D:1990
3.21 Indirect Tensile Strength Test ASTM D3967 and NPRA 014 test 14.554
3.22 Determination of Binder Content and Aggregate Grading by Extraction ASTM D2172-88, method B
3.23 Effect of Water on Bituminous Coated Aggregates, Boiling Test ASTM D3625-96
(b) Tanzania Bureau of Standard (TBS) BS – 1474 Aluminum sections

TZC 177:1999 Ordinary Portland Cement - BS – 1721 Fire extinguishers
specifications BS – 1780 Pressure gauges
TZC 178:1990 Cement - methods of testing BS – 2499 Joint sealant
BS – 2752 Synthetic rubber
(c) American Association Of State Highway And BS – 3662 Plastic road marking paint
Transport Officials (AASHTO) BS – 3837 Joint filler (rigid foams)
M – 85 Ordinary Portland Cement BS – 4254 Joint sealant
M – 140 Bituminous prime coat BS – 4360 Structural steel
M – 153 Joint filler BS – 4447 Anchorages and couplers
M – 154 Air entraining agents. BS – 4486 High tensile alloy steel bars
M – 173 Thermoplastic hot poured sealant BS – 4840 Joint filler (rigid foams)
M – 194 Concrete Admixtures BS – 5135 Welding
M – 213 Joint filler BS – 5400 Bridge bearings
M – 216 Road lime BS – 5896 Steel wire
M – 240 Portland blast furnace cement BS – 6088 Glass beads
T – 87 Atterberg limits test method BS – 8004 Structures
T – 89 Atterberg limits test method EN – 10113 Structural steel
T – 90 Atterberg limits test method EN – 10155 Structural steel
T – 132 Sealand tests
T – 180 Maximum dry density test method (f) Standard Coordination Specification (CKS)
CKS – 82 Steel sections
(d) American Society For Testing And Materials CKS – 176 Corrugated metal culverts
(ASTM) CKS – 191 Retro-reflective material
A – 252-68 Pile castings CKS – 192 Retro-reflective road marking paint
C – 156 Curing agents CKS – 388 Natural rubber water stops
C – 260 Air entraining agents CKS – 389 PVC rubber water stops
C – 309 Curing agents CKS – 437 Corrugated metal culverts
C – 494 Concrete admixtures CKS – 564 Bonding liquid for concrete surfaces
C – 719 Sealant tests CKS – 592 Barbed tape concertina wire
C – 920 Thermosetting chemically cured sealant
C – 227-90 Test method for alkali reactivity of (g) Deutshe Ingineur Norme (DIN)
aggregates DIN – 52013 Bitumen tests (ductility and elastic
D – 36 Bitumen tests (Softening point) recovery)
D – 244 Bitumen tests (binder content test)
D – 1557 Maximum dry density tests (h) South African Bureau of Standards (SABS)
D – 4402 Bitumen tests (dynamic viscosity) SABS – 044 Welding procedures
SABS – 064 Abrasive blasting
(e) British Standards Institute (BS) SABS – 094 Holes for friction grip fasteners
BS – 162 Working under power lines SABS – 0100 Concrete cores
BS – 470 Aluminum plate SABS – 0142 Electrical installations
BS – 709 Welding SABS – 0162 Design of work/codes of practice
BS – 812 Fillers for asphalt SABS – 05 Timber treatment
BS – 881 VEBE test SABS – 82 Steel reinforcing bars
BS – 970 Stainless Steel SABS – 92 Roofing felt (bridge bearings)
BS – 1134 Stainless steel plate SABS – 113 pH test (Water)
BS – 1154 Natural rubber SABS – 134 Paint

SABS – 135 Bolts and nuts SABS – 1260 Prime

SABS – 136 Bolts and nuts SABS – 1282 Friction grip nuts and bolts
SABS – 141 Paint thickness test SABS – 1350 Guardrails
SABS – 202 Chloride content (Water) SABS – 1373 Diamond mesh
SABS – 212 Sulphate content (Water) SABS – 1391 Galvanising
SABS – 213 Total dissolved solids (Water) SABS – 1413 Finishing coats (paint)
SABS – 227 Bricks SABS – 1431 Structure steel
SABS – 307 Penetration grade bitumen SABS – 1442 Road Studs
SABS – 308 Prime SABS – 1500 Electrical installations
SABS – 309 Bitumen emulsion
SABS – 435 Rivets (i) Technical Methods for Highways (TMH), South
SABS – 455 Welding electrodes Africa
SABS – 457 Timber Posts TMH – 1 Standard methods of testing road
SABS – 471 Ordinary Portland Cement construction material
SABS – 533 Pipes TMH – 5 Sampling methods for road construction
SABS – 538 Timber treatment materials
SABS – 539 Timber treatment TMH – 6 Special methods for testing roads
SABS – 548 Bitumen emulsion
SABS – 558 Manhole covers 7503 ADDRESSES
SABS – 626 Portland blast furnace cement The Tanzanian, AASHTO, ASTM, BS, CKS, DIN,
SABS – 630 Finishing coats (paint) SABS, SIS and US Federal specification and test
SABS – 634 Finishing coats (paint) method documents referred to in this document can be
SABS – 657 Steel tubes obtained from the following sources:
SABS – 673 Timber treatment
SABS – 675 Wire Central materials Laboratory, Ministry of Works
SABS – 677 Pipes P.O.Box 9452
SABS – 679 Primer (paint) DarEsSalaam
SABS – 681 Undercoat (paint) Phone/fax: +255-51-866088
SABS – 684 Finishing coats (paint)
SABS – 723 Primer (paint)
SABS – 731 Road marking paint Tanzania Bureau of Standards
SABS – 741 Sulphate content (cementitious binders) Morogoro Road
SABS – 748 Prime DarEsSalaam
SABS – 1519 Paint Tel +255 514 3298
SABS – 1555 Delineation signs Fax +255 514 3583
SABS – 1580 Wire mesh
SABS – 749 Prime
SABS – 754 Timber posts Botswana Bureau of Standards
SABS – 763 Galvanishing Private Bag B 048
SABS – 772 Abrasive blasting Gaborone
SABS – 783 Finishing coats (paint) Tel +267 351 420
SABS – 791 Pipes Fax +267 324 064
SABS – 801 Epoxy tar paint
SABS – 802 Finishing coats (paint)
SABS – 821 Road Lime Norwegian Public Roads Administration
SABS – 831 Rapid hardening cement (OPC15) P.O. Box 8142 Dep.
SABS – 836 Aggregate test 0033 Oslo
SABS – 837 Sugar Content (Water) Norway
SABS – 838 Sand equivalent test
SABS – 841 Alkali carbonates and bicarbonates
(water) South African Bureau of Standards
SABS – 844 Relative density tests Private Bag x 191
SABS – 845 Compacted bulk density Pretoria
SABS – 848 Polished stone value tests 0001
SABS – 850 Sulphate content (aggregates) Tel +2712 428 6925
SABS – 855 Free water content (aggregates) Fax +2712 428 6928
SABS – 856 Bulking of fine aggregates
SABS – 862 Slump (concrete)
SABS – 864 Flexure strength test (concrete) The SABITA specification and test method documents
SABS – 865 Compression strength (Concrete cores) can be obtained from:
SABS – 878 Ready mix concrete SABITA
SABS – 912 Primer (paint) P. O. Box 6946
SABS – 920 Steel reinforcing bars Roggebaai
SABS – 921 Pipes South Africa
SABS – 926 Zinc rich epoxy 8012
SABS – 927 Kerbing Tel +2721 421 2577
SABS – 934 Galvanishing Fax +2721 425 1279
SABS – 967 Rubber joints for pipes
SABS – 986 Culverts
SABS – 1024 Welded steel fabric The TMH and TRH documents can be obtained from:
SABS – 1058 Paving blocks Department of Transport (Publications Department)
SABS – 1077 Joint sealant P.O. Box 415
SABS – 1083 Aggregate Pretoria
SABS – 1085 Sand South Africa
SABS – 1091 Paint 0001
SABS – 1143 Steel bolts and nuts Tel +2712 309 3310
SABS – 1149 Washers Fax +2712 328 5102
SABS – 1223 Pipes

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 APPENDIX 1 - SUMMARY OF PAY ITEMS
Appendices
Appendix 1: Summary of Pay Items
PAY ITEMS PAGE
IN SERIES 1000 A1 - 2
Appendix 2: List of Clauses Referring

to the Special Specifications or
Drawings
REFERENCES PAGE
THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE A1 - 1

SERIES 1000: GENERAL MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR TYPE I UNIT)

Section 1100: Definitions And Terms (g) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE
(NO SEPARATE PAY ITEM) MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR TYPE II UNIT)
Section 1200: General Requirements And (h) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE
Provisions MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR TYPE III UNIT)
ITEM UNIT EQUIPPED FOR THE ENGINEER
12.01 LAND ACQUISITION: (i) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE
MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR MULTIPLE UNIT)
(a) ARRANGE AND PAY COMPENSATION PROVISIONAL ACCOMMODATION UNITS FULLY X (MONTH)
FOR ACQUISITION OF LAND FOR THE SUM FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE
WORKS. ENGINEER
(b) ALLOW FOR CONTRACTOR’S PERCENT (%) (j) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE
OVERHEADS AND PROFITS AS A MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR FULLY UNIT)
PERCENTAGE OF SUBITEM 12.01(a) FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED X (MONTH)
TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION AND
OFFICES FOR THE ENGINEER
ITEM UNIT
12.02 RELOCATION OF SERVICES:
(a) ARRANGE AND PAY FOR REMOVAL PROVISIONAL
ITEM UNIT
AND/OR ALTERATION TO SERVICES SUM 14.02 OFFICES FOR THE ENGINEER
PROVIDED BY AGENCIES FOR (a) PROVIDE FULLY FURNISHED AND LUMP SUM
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY, WATER EQUIPPED OFFICES FOR THE ENGINEER
SUPPLY OR TELECOMMUNICATION
SERVICES. (b) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (OFFICE
MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR FULLY UNIT)X
(b) ALLOW FOR CONTRACTOR’S PERCENT (%) FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED OFFICES (MONTH)
OVERHEADS AND PROFITS AS A FOR THE ENGINEER
ITEM UNIT
Section 1300: Contractor’s Establishment On 14.03 WASH HOUSE FOR THE
Site And General Obligations ENGINEER:
(a) PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN FULLY LUMP SUM
ITEM UNIT
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED WASH
13.01 CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS: HOUSE FOR THE ENGINEER
(a) SURETIES LUMP SUM (b) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (WASH HOUSE
(b) INSURANCE OF W ORKS LUMP SUM MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR FULLY UNIT) X
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED WASH (MONTH)
(c) INSURANCE OF CONSTRUCTIONAL LUMP SUM
HOUSE FOR THE ENGINEER
PLANT & EQUIPMENT
(d) THIRD PARTY INSURANCE LUMP SUM
ITEM UNIT
14.04 SITE CABIN/OFFICE FOR THE
Section 1400: Engineer’s Accommodation And ENGINEER:
Attendance Upon Engineer And His Site (a) PROVIDE FULLY FURNISHED AND LUMP SUM
Personnel EQUIPPED SITE CABIN / OFFICE
FOR THE ENGINEER
ITEM UNIT
(b) cabin / office for the Engineer (SITE CABIN
14.01 HOUSES FOR THE ENGINEER: MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS /OFFICE UNIT)
(a) PROVIDE TYPE I HOUSE FULLY LUMP SUM AND MUNICIPAL SERVICES FOR X (MONTH)
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE FULLY FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED
ENGINEER SITE
(b) PROVIDE TYPE II HOUSE FULLY LUMP SUM

FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE
ENGINEER ITEM UNIT
(c) PROVIDE TYPE III HOUSE FULLY LUMP SUM 14.05 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE STATION
FURNISHED AND EQUIPPED FOR THE WAGON FOR THE ENGINEER:
ENGINEER (a) PROVIDE VEHICLES FOR THE LUMP SUM
(d) PROVIDE MULTIPLE ACCOMMODATION LUMP SUM ENGINEER (SPECIFY TYPE AND
UNITS FULLY FURNISHED AND NUMBER)
EQUIPPED FOR THE ENGINEER (b) OPERATE AND MAINTAIN VEHICLES VEHICLE
(e) PROVIDE FULLY FURNISHED AND LUMP SUM (SPECIFY TYPE AND NUMBER) FOR AN X MONTH
EQUIPPED TEMPORARY AVERAGE OF 2500 KM PER MONTH
ACCOMMODATION AND OFFICES FOR (c) OPERATE VEHICLES SPECIFIED FOR KILOMETRES
THE ENGINEER TRAVEL DISTANCE IN EXCESS OF (km)
AVERAGE 2500 KM PER MONTH
(f) MAINTAIN AND PAY ALL RENTS AND (HOUSE

ITEM UNIT Section 1700: Environmental Protection And

14.06 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE DOUBLE Waste Disposal
CAB PICK-UP FOR THE ENGINEER (NO SEPARATE PAY ITEMS)
(a) PROVIDE VEHICLES FOR THE LUMP SUM
ENGINEER AND EMPLOYER (SPECIFY (LS)
TYPE AND NUMBER)
(b) OPERATE AND MAINTAIN VEHICLES VEHICLE X
(SPECIFY TYPE AND NUMBER) FOR MONTH
AN AVERAGE OF 2500 KM PER
MONTH
(c) OPERATE VEHICLES SPECIFIED FOR KIILOMETRES
AVERAGE 2500 KM PER MONTH
ITEM UNIT
14.07 SURVEY EQUIPMENT FOR THE LUMP SUM
ENGINEER
(a) PROVIDE SPECIFIED SURVEY LUMP SUM
(b) MAINTAIN SPECIFIED SURVEY MONTH
ITEM UNIT
14.08 LABORATORY FOR THE LUMP SUM
ENGINEER
(a) PROVIDE LABORATORY FULLY LUMP SUM
(b) MAINTAIN LABORATORY FULLY MONTH
ITEM UNIT
14.9 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT FOR LUMP SUM
THE ENGINEER
(a) PROVIDE SPECIFIED LABORATORY LUMP SUM
(b) MAINTAIN SPECIFIED LABORATORY MONTH
ITEM UNIT
14.10 MEALS IN CONTRACTOR’S MESS NUMBER
HALL FOR THE EMPLOYER’S STAFF (no)
Section 1500: Accommodation Of Traffic

(NO SEPARATE PAY ITEMS)
Section 1600: Overhaul

ITEM UNIT
16.01 OVERHAUL OF MATERIAL
HAULED IN EXCESS OF ITS
RESPECTIVE FREE HAUL DISTANCE
(a) MATERIAL FOR FILL OR IMPROVED CUBIC METRE
SUBGRADE LAYERS X KILOMETRE
3
(m km)
(b) MATERIAL FOR PAVEMENT LAYERS CUBIC METRE
AS SPECIFIED X KILOMETRE
3
(m km)
(c) MATERIAL FOR GRAVEL WEARING CUBIC METRE
COURSE X KILOMETRE
3
(m km)

SERIES 2000: DRAINAGE ITEM UNIT

21.07 NATURAL PERMEABLE
MATERIAL IN SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
Section 2100: Drains SYSTEMS (SAND):
(a) SAND OBTAINED FROM CUBIC
ITEM UNIT APPROVED SOURCES ON THE METRE
3
21.01 EXCAVATION FOR OPEN DRAINS: SITE (STATE GRADE) (m )
(a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL (b) SAND OBTAINED FROM CUBIC
SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING APPROVED SOURCES OUTSIDE METRE
3
DEPTH RANGES BELOW THE THE SITE (STATE GRADE) (m )
SURFACE LEVEL:
(i) 0.5 m UP TO 1.5 m CUBIC METRE
3 ITEM UNIT
(m )
(ii) Exceeding 1.5 m AND UP TO CUBIC METRE 21.08 PIPES IN SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
3
3.0 m (m ) SYSTEMS:
(iii) Exceeding 3.0 m PER CUBIC METRE (a) PITCH-FIBRE PIPES AND FITTINGS METRE
3
INCREMENT OF 1.5 m (m ) COMPLETE WITH COUPLING (STATE (m)
(b) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 21.01(a) FOR CUBIC METRE SIZE AND WHETHER OR NOT
EXCAVATION IN ROCK AS DEFINED IN
3
(m ) PERFORATED)
CLAUSE 3603, IRRESPECTIVE OF (b) UNPLASTICISED PVC PIPES AND METRE
DEPTH: FITTINGS, NORMAL DUTY, COMPLETE (m)
WITH COUPLINGS (STATE SIZE AND
WHETHER OR NOT PERFORATED
ITEM UNIT SLOTTED)
21.02 CLEARING AND SHAPING CUBIC (c) HIGH-DENSITY TYPE POLY-ETHYLENE METRE
EXISTING DRAINS:
3
METRE (m ) PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS, (m)
COMPLETE WITH COUPLINGS (STATE
SIZE, TYPE AND CLASS AND WHETHER
OR NOT PERFORATED)
ITEM UNIT
(d) CONCRETE PIPES (STATE TYPE AND METRE
21.03 EXCAVATION FOR SUBSOIL
DIAMETER) (m)
DRAINAGE SYSTEMS:
ITEM UNIT
SURFACE LEVEL: 21.09 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING, SQUARE
2
0.15 mm THICK, OR SIMILAR METRE (m )
(I) 0.5 m UP TO 1.5 m CUBIC METRE
3 APPROVED MATERIAL, FOR
(m )
LINING SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
(II) Exceeding 1.5 m AND UP TO CUBIC METRE
3 SYSTEM
3.0 m (m )
3
ITEM UNIT
3 21.10 SYNTHETIC-FIBRE FILTER SQUARE
FOR EXCAVATION IN ROCK AS (m ) 2
FABRIC (DESCRIBE TYPE AND METRE (m )
DEFINED IN CLAUSE 3603,
GRADE)
IRRESPECTIVE OF DEPTH:
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT
21.11 COMPOSITE IN-PLANE SQUARE
21.04 IMPERMEABLE BACKFILLING CUBIC 2
3 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS METRE (m )
TO SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS METRE (m )
(DESCRIBE TYPE AND GRADE)
ITEM UNIT
3
ITEM UNIT
21.05 BANKS AND DYKES CUBIC METRE (m )
21.12 CONCRETE OUTLET
STRUCTURES, MANHOLE BOXES,
JUNCTION BOXES AND CLEANING
ITEM UNIT EYES FOR SUBSOIL DRAINAGE:
21.06 NATURAL PERMEABLE (a) OUTLET STRUCTURES NUMBER (no)
MATERIAL IN SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
(b) MANHOLE BOXES NUMBER (no)
SYSTEMS(CRUSHED STONE):
(c) JUNCTION BOXES NUMBER (no)
(a) CRUSHED STONE OBTAINED CUBIC
FROM APPROVED SOURCES ON
3
METRE (m ) (d) CLEANING EYES NUMBER (no)
THE SITE (STATE GRADE)
(b) CRUSHED STONE OBTAINED CUBIC
FROM COMMERCIAL SOURCES ON METRE ITEM UNIT
3
THE SITE (STATE GRADE) (m ) 21.13 CONCRETE CAPS FOR SUB SOIL NUMBER
DRAIN PIPES (no)

ITEM UNIT (b) ON CLASS B BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m)

21.14 REPAIRING OR REPLACING PROVISIONAL DIAMETER INDICATED)
EXISTING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS SUM (c) ON CLASS C BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m)
DIAMETER INDICATED)
(d) ON CLASS D BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT DIAMETER INDICATED)
21.15 BACKFILLING EXISTING CUBIC
3
ERODED SIDE DRAINS METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
22.04 METAL CULVERTS:
ITEM UNIT (a) SIZE, WALL THICKNESS AND TYPE METRE (m)
21.16 TEST FLUSHING OF PIPE NUMBER INDICATED
SUBSOIL DRAINS (no) (b) CUTTING OFF BEVELLED AND/ OR NUMBER (no)
SKEW ENDS (SIZE AND TYPE
INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT (c) ANCHOR BOLTS NUMBER (no)
21.17 EXCAVATION FOR THE
CLEARING OF EXISTING DRAINAGE
SYSTEMS: ITEM UNIT
(a) MANHOLES AND INLET AN OUTLET CUBIC METRE 22.05 PORTAL AND RECTANGULAR
3
STRUCTURES (m ) CULVERTS:
(b) CULVERT BARRELS CUBIC METRE (a) COMPLETE WITH PREFABRICATED METRE (m)
3
(m ) FLOOR SLABS (SIZE AND TYPE
(c) CONCRETE SIDE DRAINS CUBIC METRE INDICATED)
3
(m )
(b) WITHOUT PREFABRICATED FLOOR METRE (m)
SLABS (SIZE AND TYPE INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
21.18 SELECTED BACKFILL CUBIC METRE
MATERIAL UNDER CONCRETE-
3
(m ) ITEM UNIT
LINED SIDE DRAINS COMPACTED 22.06 EXTRA OVER ITEMS 22.03 METRE
TO 90 % BS-HEAVY DENSITY 22.04 AND 22.05 FOR (m)
CONSTRUCTING INCLINED CULVERTS
STEEPER THAN 1:4.
Section 2200: Prefabricated Culverts

ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT
22.01 EXCAVATION: 22.07 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE AND
FORM WORK:
SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING (a) IN CLASS A BEDDING, SCREEDS AND CUBIC
DEPTH RANGES BELOW THE THE ENCASING FOR PIPES, INCLUDING METRE
3
SURFACE LEVEL: FORMWORK, (CLASS OF CONCRETE (m )
INDICATED)
(I) 0.5 m UP TO 1.5 m CUBIC METRE
3
(m ) (b) IN FLOOR SLABS FOR PORTAL OR CUBIC
(II) Exceeding 1.5 m AND UP TO CUBIC METRE RECTANGULAR CULVERTS, INCLUDING METRE
3
3.0 m
3
(m ) FORMWORK AND CLASS U2 SURFACE (m )
FINISH (CLASS OF CONCRETE
INDICATED)
3
(c) IN INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES, CUBIC
CATCHPITS, MANHOLES, THRUST AND METRE
3
FOR EXCAVATION IN ROCK AS (m ) ANCHOR BLOCKS, EXCLUDING
3
(m )
DEFINED IN CLAUSE 3603,
FORMWORK BUT INCLUDING CLASS
IRRESPECTIVE OF DEPTH:
CONCRETE INDICATED)
(d) FORMWORK OF CONCRETE UNDER SQUARE
ITEM UNIT SUB ITEM 22.07 (a) ABOVE TYPE OF METRE
2
22.02 BACKFILLING: FINISH INDICATED) (m )
(a) USING EXCAVATED MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (e) IN CONCRETE LININGS FOR THE CUBIC
3
(m ) INVERTS OF METAL CULVERTS, METRE
3
(b) USING IMPORTED SELECTED CUBIC METRE INCLUDING FORMWORK AND CLASS (m )
3
MATERIAL (m ) U2 SURFACE FINISH (CLASS OF
(c) EXTRA OVER SUBITEMS 22.02 CUBIC METRE CONCRETE INDICATED)
3
(a) AND (b) FOR SOIL CEMENT (m )
BACKFILLING (PERCENTAGE OF
CEMENT INDICATED) ITEM UNIT
22.08 CONCRETE BACKFILL FOR CUBIC
3
CULVERT (CLASS INDICATED) METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
22.03 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS:
(a) ON CLASS A BEDDING (TYPE AND METRE (m)
DIAMETER INDICATED)

ITEM UNIT (e) EXTRA OVER OR LESS THAN SUB ITEM METRE
22.09 PREFABRICATED CONCRETE NUMBER 22.17 (b) FOR VARIATIONS IN THE (m)
INLETS AND OUTLETS TO CULVERTS (no) DEPTHS OF CATCHPITS FROM THE
(SIZE AND TYPE INDICATED) STANDARD DEPTH DESIGNATED FOR
BIDDING PURPOSES (STANDARD DEPTH
AND TYPE OF CATCHPIT INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
22.10 STEEL TEM UNIT
REINFORCEMENT:
22.18 BRICKWORK:
(a) MILD STEEL BARS TONNE (t) 2
(a) 115 mm THICK SQUARE METRE (m )
(b) HIGH-TENSILE STEEL BARS TONNE (t) 2
(b) 230 mm THICK SQUARE METRE (m )
(c) WELDED STEEL FABRIC KILOGRAMME (kg) 2
(c) 345 mm THICK SQUARE METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT
22.11 DOWELS FOR JOINING OLD KILOGRAMME 2
AND NEW CONCRETE (kg) 22.19 PLASTER: SQUARE METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

2
22.12 REMOVING EXISTING 22.20 BENCHING: SQUARE METRE (m )
CONCRETE:
3
(a) PLAIN CONCRETE CUBIC METRE (m )
3 ITEM UNIT
(b) REINFORCED CONCRETE CUBIC METRE (m )
22.21 ACCESSORIES:
(a) MANHOLE COVERS INCLUDING NUMBER
ITEM UNIT FRAMES (DESCRIPTION) (no)
22.13 REMOVING AND RE-LAYING METRE (m) (b) INLET GRIDS INCLUDING FRAMES NUMBER
EXISTING PIPES (SIZE AND TYPE OF (DESCRIPTION) (no)
BEDDING INDICATED) (c) STEP IRONS (DESCRIPTION) NUMBER
(no)
(d) ETC. FOR OTHER ACCESSORIES NUMBER
ITEM UNIT (no)
22.14 REMOVING AND STACKING METRE
EXISTING PREFABRICATED PIPES (m) ITEM UNIT
(ALL SIZES)
22.22 ANCHORS FOR PIPES NUMBER
(DESCRIPTION) (no)
ITEM UNIT
22.15 TREATING SURFACES WITH LITRE (l) ITEM UNIT
EPOXY RESIN FOR JOINING NEW TO
OLD CONCRETE (TYPE OF EPOXY 22.23 SERVICE DUCTS:
RESIN SPECIFIED) (a) ORDINARY PIPES (TYPE AND METRE
DIAMETER INDICATED) (m)
(b) SPLIT PIPES (TYPE AND DIAMETER METRE
ITEM UNIT INDICATED) (m)
22.16 PROTECTIVE MASTIC SQUARE
2
ASPHALT COATING FOR METRE (m )
CORRUGATED METAL CULVERT ITEM UNIT
UNITS (STATE WHETHER TO BE 22.24 DUCT MARKER BLOCKS NUMBER
APPLIED BY BRUSH OR BY (TYPE INDICATED) (no)
SPRAY GUN)
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT
22.25 HAND EXCAVATION TO CUBIC
22.17 MANHOLES, CATCHPITS, PRECAST DETERMINE THE POSITIONS OF METRE
INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES EXISTING SERVICES (m )
3
COMPLETE:
(a) MANHOLES (TYPE INDICATED) NUMBER
(no) ITEM UNIT
(b) CATCHPITS (TYPE INDICATED) NUMBER
(no) 22.26 REINSTATING TRENCHES
(c) PRECAST INLET AND OUTLET NUMBER CROSSING ROADS:
STRUCTURES (TYPE INDICATED) (no) (a) IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYERS SQUARE
2
METRE (m )
(d) EXTRA OVER OR LESS THAN SUBITEM METRE
22.17 (a) FOR VARIATIONS IN THE (m) (b) SUBBASE LAYERS SQUARE
2
DEPTHS OF MAN HOLES FROM THE METRE (m )
STANDARD DEPTH DESIGNATED FOR (c) BASE COURSE LAYERS SQUARE
2
BIDDING PURPOSES (STANDARD DEPTH METRE (m )
AND TYPE OF CATCHPIT INDICATED)

(d) BITUMINOUS SURFACING SQUARE ITEM UNIT

2
INCLUDING TACK COAT) METRE (m ) 23.06 INLET, OUTLET,
(e) KERBING METRE (m) TRANSITION AND SIMILAR
STRUCTURES (MEASURED BY
COMPONENTS):
ITEM UNIT (a) CONCRETE (CLASS INDICATED) CUBIC METRE
3
22.27 PREFABRICATED REINFORCED NUMBER (m )
CONCRETE SKEW END UNITS FOR (no) (b) FORMWORK (SURFACE FINISH SQUARE
2
CONCRETE CULVERTS CONSTRUCTED INDICATED ) METRE (m )
AT A SKEW ANGLE (TYPE AND (c) OTHER COMPONENTS NUMBER (no)
DIMENSIONS OF UNIT AND CLASS OF
BEDDING INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
23.07 TRIMMING OF
Section 2300: Concrete Kerbing, Concrete EXCAVATIONS FOR CONCRETE-
Channelling, Open Concrete Chutes And LINED OPEN DRAINS:
Concrete Linings For Open Drains (a) IN SOFT MATERIAL AS DEFINED IN SQUARE
2
CLAUSE 3603 METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT (b) IN ROCK AS DEFINED IN CLAUSE SQUARE
2
23.01 CONCRETE KERBING (CLASS 3603 METRE (m )
OF CONCRETE INDICATED FOR CAST
IN SITU CONCRETE):
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF TYPE WITH METRE (m) ITEM UNIT
REFERENCE OF DRAWING) 23.08 CONCRETE LINING FOR
(b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES METRE (m) OPENS DRAINS:
(a) CAST IN SITU CONCRETE LINING CUBIC METRE
3
(CLASS OF CONCRETE AND TYPE (m )
ITEM UNIT OF OPEN DRAIN INDICATED)
23.02 CONCRETE KERBING – (b) CLASS U2 SURFACE FINISH TO SQUARE

2
CHANNELLING COMBINATION (CLASS CAST IN SITU CONCRETE (TYPE OF METRE (m )
OF CONCRETE INDICATED FOR CAST OPEN DRAIN INDICATED )
IN SITU CONCRETE):
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF TYPE WITH METRE (m)
REFERENCE OF DRAWING) ITEM UNIT
(b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES METRE (m) 23.09 FORMWORK TO CAST IN SITU
CONCRETE LINING FOR OPEN DRAINS
(CLASS F2 SURFACE FINISH):
ITEM UNIT (a) TO SIDES WITH FORMWORK ON THE SQUARE
2
INTERNAL FACE ONLY METRE (m )
23.03 CONCRETE CHUTES (TYPICAL
DESIGNS ): (b) TO SIDES WITH FORMWORK ON SQUARE
2
BOTH INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL METRE (m )
(a) (DESCRIPTIONS OF TYPE WITH METRE (m)
FACES (EACH FACE MEASURED)
REFERENCE TO DRAWING. STATE
WHETHER PREFABRICATED OR CAST (c) TO ENDS OF SLABS SQUARE
2
IN SITU AND CLASS OF CONCRETE METRE (m )
(b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 23.10 SEALED JOINTS IN CONCRETE METRE

LININGS OF OPEN DRAINS (m)
23.04 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE (DESCRIPTION OF TYPE WITH
CHUTES (MEASURED BY REFERENCES TO DRAWING)
COMPONENTS):
(a) CONCRETE (CLASS INDICATED ) CUBIC METRE
3
(m ) ITEM UNIT
(b) FORMWORK (SURFACE FINISH SQUARE
INDICATED )
2
METRE (m )
23.11 CONCRETE SCREED OR CUBIC
BACKFILL BELOW CHUTES (CLASS OF METRE
3
CONCRETE INDICATED) (m )
ITEM UNIT
23.05 INLET , OUTLET, TRANSITION ITEM UNIT
AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES (TYPICAL
DESIGNS):
23.12 STEEL REINFORCEMENT:
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE, NUMBER (no)
TYPE, ETC, WITH REFERENCE TO (b) HIGH TENSILE STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
DRAWING AND CLASS OF (c) WELDED STEEL FABRIC TONNE (t)
CONCRETE)
(b) ETC FOR OTHER TYPES NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT
23.13 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING SQUARE
2
(0.15 mm THICK ) FOR CONCRETE- METRE (m )

LINED OPEN DRAINS OF STONES INDICATED)

3
ITEM UNIT (b) DUMPED RIPRAP (CRITICAL CUBIC METRE (m )
23.14 CUTTING BITUMINOUS METRE (m) MASS OF STONE INDICATED )
PAVEMENT LAYERS FOR CONCRETE (c) FILTER BACKING (SUBCLAUSE
KERBING, CHANNELLING OR 2104 (a) (ii) AND 2504 (b)
CONCRETE-LINED DRAINS CONSISTING OF:
3
(i) CRUSHED STONE CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(ii) FILTER SAND OBTAINED CUBIC METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT FROM BORROW PITS
23.15 PRECAST CONCRETE NUMBER (d) SYNTHETIC FIBRE FILTER FABRIC SQUARE METRE
BLOCKS IN OUTLET STRUCTURES (no) (TYPE , CLASS AND GRADE (m )
2
STATED)
Section 2400: Asphalt And Concrete Berms

ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT
25.03 STONE MASONRY
24.01 ASPHALT BERMS: WALLS:
3
(a) PLACED WHERE THERE ARE NO METRE (m) (a) PLAIN PACKED STONE WALLS CUBIC METRE (m )
GUARDRAILS (TYPES OF ASPHALT AND 3
(b) CEMENT-MORTARED STONE CUBIC METRE (m )
BINDER INDICATED)
WALLS
(TYPES OF ASPHALT AND BINDER
INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
25.04 CONCRETE PITCHING AND
BLOCK PAVING:
ITEM UNIT
(a) CAST IN SITU CONCRETE SQUARE
24.02 CONCRETE BERMS: PITCHING (CLASS OF CONCRETE
2
METRE (m )
(a) PLACED WHERE THERE ARE NO METRE (m) AND THICKNESS OF PITCHING
GUARDRAILS (CLASS OF CONCRETE INDICATED)
INDICATED)
(b) SEGMENTAL BLOCK PAVING SQUARE
2
(b) PLACED AT EXISTING GUARDRAILS METRE (m) (TYPE AND THICKNESS METRE (m )
(CLASS OF CONCRETE INDICATED) INDICATED)
(c) PREFABRICATED CONCRETE SQUARE
2
GRASS BLOCKS METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
(d) PREFABRICATED CONCRETE SQUARE
2
24.03 PRIME AND TACK COATS: PAVING BLOCKS FOR SIDEWALK METRE (m )
(a) PRIME COAT: PAVEMENT (THICKNESS
INDICATED)
(i) UNDER ASPHALT BERMS SQUARE
2
(PRIME INDICATED) METRE (m )
(ii) UNDER CONCRETE BERMS SQUARE
ITEM UNIT
2
(PRIME INDICATED ) METRE (m )
25.05 CONCRETE EDGE BEAMS CUBIC METRE
(b) TACK COAT (TYPE INDICATED) SQUARE
(CLASS OF CONCRETE
3
(m )
2
METRE (m )
INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
25.06 PROVISION OF HERBICIDE
24.04 TRANSITION SECTIONS FOR NUMBER
AND ANT POISON:
NEW JERSEY TYPE OF RAILS) (no)
(a) PROVISION OF MATERIALS PRIME COST
SUM
(b) CONTRACTOR’S CHARGES AND PER CENT (%)
Section 2500: Pitching, Stonework And PROFIT ADDED TO THE PRIME
Protection Against Erosion COST SUM
ITEM UNIT
25.01 STONE PITCHING: ITEM UNIT
3
(a) PLAIN PITCHING 25.07 FOUNDATION TRENCHES CUBIC METRE (m )
2
(i) METHOD 1 SQUARE METRE (m )
2
(ii) METHOD 2 SQUARE METRE (m )
2 Section 2600: Gabions
(b) GROUND STONE PITCHING SQUARE METRE (m )
2
(c) WIRED AND GROUTED STONE SQUARE METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
PITCHING (TOTAL THICKNESS
26.01 FOUNDATION TRENCH
INDICATED)
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING:
(a) IN SOLID ROCK AS DEFINED IN CUBIC METRE
3
CLAUSE 3603 (m )
ITEM UNIT (b) IN ALL OTHER MATERIAL THAN ROCK CUBIC METRE
3
AS DEFINED IN CLAUSE 3603 (m )
25.02 RIPRAP:
3
(a) PACKED RIPRAP (CRITICAL MASS CUBIC METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
26.02 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR SQUARE
2
BEDDING THE GABIONS METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
26.03 GABIONS:
(a) GALVANISED GABION BOXES CUBIC
3
SIZE INDICATED)
(b) PVC- COATED GABION BOXES CUBIC
3
SIZE INDICATED)
(c) GALVANISED GABION CUBIC
3
MATTRESSES ( DIMENSIONS OF METRE (m )
MATTRESS, MESH SIZE AND
DIAPHRAGM INDICATED )
(d) PVC- COATED GABION CUBIC
3
MATTRESSES, MESH SIZE AND METRE (m )
DIAPHRAGM SPACING INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
26.04 FILTER FABRIC (TYPE AND SQUARE
2
GRADE INDICATED) METRE (m )

SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS:
LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED STONE (a) BITUMINOUS MATERIAL LINEAR METRE (m)
(b) CEMENTED MATERIAL LINEAR METRE (m)
(c) PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE LINEAR METRE (m)
Section 3100: Clearing, Grubbing And Removal (INDICATE WHETHER
Of Topsoil REINFORCED OR UN-
REINFORCED)
ITEM UNIT
31.01 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND
REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL: ITEM UNIT
(a) CLEARING AND GRUBBING HECTARE 33.03 DRILLING AND TESTING
(ha) CORES FROM CONCRETE, ASPHALT
(b) REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL CUBIC OR CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS:
3
METRE (m ) (a) BITUMINOUS MATERIAL NUMBER (no)
(b) CEMENTED MATERIAL NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT (c) PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE NUMBER (no)
31.02 REMOVAL AND GRUBBING OF (INDICATE WHETHER REINFORCED
OR UN-REINFORCED)
LARGE TREES AND TREE STUMPS:
(a) GIRTH EXCEEDING 1.0 m UP TO UP NUMBER
INCLUDING 2.0 m (no)
Section 3400: Borrow Pit And Quarry
(b) GIRTH EXCEEDING 2.0 m UP TO UP NUMBER
INCLUDING 3.0 m (no) Acquisition And Exploitation
(NO SEPARATE PAY ITEM)
(c) GIRTH EXCEEDING 3.0 m IN STEPS NUMBER
OF 1.0M OF GIRTH (no)
Section 3500: Selecting And Utilising Material
ITEM UNIT From Borrow Pits And Cuttings
31.03 APPLYING APPROVED PESTICIDES LITRES (l)
TO ANT AND TERMITE NESTS
Section 3600: Earthworks

Section 3200: Removal Of Existing Structures ITEM UNIT
36.01 EXCAVATIONS:
ITEM UNIT 3
(a) COMMON EXCAVATION TO SPOIL CUBIC METRE (m )
32.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING 3
STRUCTURES: (b) ROCK EXCAVATION CUBIC METRE (m )
(a) REMOVAL OF EXISTING PIPE NUMBER (no)
CULVERT INCLUDING
HEADWALLS, WINGWALL AND
ITEM UNIT
APRON 36.02 FILL AND IMPROVED
(b) REMOVAL OF BOX CULVERTS AND NUMBER (no) SUBGRADE LAYERS:
SLABS INCLUDING HEADWALLS, (a) IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYER AS CUBIC METRE
3
WINGWALL AND APRON SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS TO (m )
(c) REMOVAL OF BRIDGE INCLUDING NUMBER (no) REQUIRE MINIMUM G15 QUALITY
ABUTMENT, WINGWALL AND MATERIAL
APRON (b) IMPROVED SUBGRADE LAYER AS CUBIC METRE
3
(d) REMOVAL OF KERB AND CHANNEL LINEAR METRE SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS TO (m )
REQUIRE MINIMUM G7 QUALITY
(lm)
MATERIAL
(e) REMOVAL OF EXISTING GROUTED SQUARE
2
STONE PITCHING METRE (m ) (c) FILL AS SPECIFIED IN THE CUBIC METRE
3
DRAWINGS TO REQUIRE MINIMUM (m )
G3 QUALITY MATERIAL
Section 3300: Breaking Up Existing Pavement (d) FILL OR IMPROVED SUBGRADE CUBIC METRE
3
Layers LAYER USING ROCK FILL (m )
(e) CROSSFILL CUBIC METRE
3
ITEM UNIT (m )
(f) SIDE FILL COMPACTED BY DOZERS CUBIC METRE
33.01 EXCAVATING MATERIAL 3
OR AS SPECIFIED (m )
FROM AN EXISTING PAVEMENTS:
3 (g) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 36.02(a) CUBIC METRE
(a) GRANULAR MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m ) 3
TO (e) RESPECTIVELY, FOR (m )
3
(b) BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m ) CONSTRUCTION OF SAND
3 BLANKETS AS SPECIFIED
(c) CEMENTED MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(d) PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE CUBIC METRE (m )
(INDICATE WHETHER
REINFORCED OR UN-
REINFORCED)
ITEM UNIT
33.02 SAWING OR CUTTING
CONCRETE, ASPHALT OR

Section 3700: Pavement Layers Of Natural (c) PORTLAND BLAST-FURNACE CEMENT TONNE (t)
Gravel Materials (d) MILLED GRANULATED BLAST- TONNE (t)

FURNACE SLAG
ITEM UNIT (e) OTHER STABILISING AGENT (STATE TONNE (t)
37.01 NATURAL GRAVEL FOR TYPE)
BASE COURSE:
3
(a) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G80 CUBIC METRE (m )
(b) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G60 CUBIC METRE (m
3
) Section 3900: Crushed Aggregate Base Course
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 39.01 CRUSHED AGGREGATE
FOR BASE COURSE:
37.02 NATURAL GRAVEL FOR
SUBBASE: (a) CRUSHED AGGREGATE CLASS CUBIC METRE
3
3 CRS (m )
(a) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G45 CUBIC METRE (m )
3 (b) CRUSHED AGGREGATE CLASS CUBIC METRE
(b) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS G25 CUBIC METRE (m ) CRR
3
(m )
ITEM UNIT
37.03 NATURAL GRAVEL FOR GRAVEL
WEARING COURSE AND UNPAVED
SHOULDERS:
(a) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS GW USED CUBIC
3
FOR UNPAVED SHOULDERS FOR METRE (m )
BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS
(b) NATURAL GRAVEL CLASS GW USED CUBIC
3
FOR GRAVEL WEARING COURSE METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
37.04 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING
GRAVEL ROADS:
(a) SHAPING EXISTING GRAVEL SQUARE METRE
2
ROADS WITHOUT SCARIFICATION (m )
OF THE SURFACE
(b) SCARIFICATION, MIXING, SQUARE METRE
2
WATERING AND COMPACTION (m )
Section 3800 : Stabilisation

ITEM UNIT
EXTRA-OVER THE RELEVANT PAY
ITEM FOR STABILISING
MATERIALS ALREADY PAID FOR
UNDER SECTION 3600 OR
SECTION 3700
3
(a) EARTHWORKS MATERIALS CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(b) PAVEMENT MATERIALS CUBIC METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
PAYMENT FOR FULL COST OF
PROVIDING:
3
(a) STABILISED LAYER, MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
CLASS C2
3
(b) STABILISED LAYER, MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
CLASS C1
3
(c) STABILISED LAYER, MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m )
CLASS CM
ITEM UNIT
38.03 CHEMICAL STABILISER AGENTS:
(a) SLAKED ROAD LIME TONNE (t)
(b) ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT TONNE (t)

SERIES 4000 ITEM UNIT

42.03 TACK COAT OF 30% STABLE LITRES
GRADE BITUMEN EMULSION (l)
Section 4100: Prime And Curing Membranes
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT
41.01 PRIME COAT: 42.04 ADDITIVES (STATE KILOGRAMME
(a) MC-30 CUT-BACK BITUMEN LITRES (l) TYPE) (kg)
(c) INVERT BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE LITRE (l)
TYPE AND BITUMEN CONTENT) Section 4300: General Requirements For Seals
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 43.01 CORRECTION FOR
BLEEDING:
41.02 BITUMINOUS CURING
MEMBRANE: (a) AGGREGATE:
3
(a) MC-30 CUT-BACK BITUMEN LITRES (l) (i) 14mm CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(b) MC-70 CUT-BACK BITUMEN LITRES (l) (ii) 10mm CUBIC METRE (m )
3
(c) BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE TYPE AND LITRES (l) (iii) 7mm CUBIC METRE (m )
3
BITUMEN CONTENT) (b) PRECOATING OF AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

41.03 AGGREGATE FOR CUBIC METRE 43.02 APPLICATION OF A FOG SPRAY
3
BLINDING: (m ) OF 30% SPRAY-GRADE OR
EQUIVALENT DILUTED STABLE GRADE
EMULSION:
Section 4200: Bituminous Base Course And (a) SPRAY-GRADE EMULSION LITRE (l)
Asphalt Concrete Surfacing (b) STABLE-GRADE EMULSION LITRE (l)
ITEM UNIT
42.01 BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE: ITEM UNIT
(a) HOT MIX (STATE TYPE, MAXIMUM CUBIC METRE 43.03 CUTTING BACK OF LITRES OF
3
COMPACTED THICKNESS, TYPE OF (m ) BITUMEN (ALL MATERIALS IN THE CUTTER (l)
BITUMEN AND MAXIMUM SIZE OF BLENDED BINDER ARE PAID FOR
AGGREGATE) ELSEWHERE)
(b) COLD MIX (STATE TYPE, MAXIMUM CUBIC METRE

3
COMPACTED THICKNESS, TYPE OF (m )
BITUMEN AND MAXIMUM SIZE OF Section 4400: Single Surface Dressings
AGGREGATE)
(c) BITUMEN FOR BITUMINOUS BASE TONNES (t) ITEM UNIT
COURSE MIXES (STATE TYPE OF 44.01 SINGLE SEALS (INDICATE
BITUMEN) TYPE OF BINDER AND HOT
(d) PENETRATION MACADAM (STATE SPRAYED APPLICATION RATE IN
TYPE OF BITUMEN AND MAXIMUM LITRES PER SQUARE METRE):
SIZE OF AGGREGATE) (a) USING 7 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
2
(i) MAIN FRACTION OF CUBIC METRE (m )
AGGREGATE (STATE MAXIMUM
3
(m ) (b) USING 10 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
2
SIZE) (m )
(c) USING 14 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
(ii) AGGREGATE KEY STONE CUBIC METRE 2
3 (m )
(STATE MAXIMUM SIZE) (m )
(d) USING 20 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE METRE
(iii) BITUMINOUS MIX INSTEAD OF CUBIC METRE (m )
2
3
KEY STONE (STATE MATERIAL (m )
TYPE AND MAXIMUM SIZE)
(IV) BITUMEN FOR PENETRATION LITRES (l) ITEM UNIT
(STATE TYPE), MEASURED AT 44.02 SINGLE SEALS. BITUMINOUS LITRES (l)
SPRAYING TEMPERATURE BINDER VARIATIONS:
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l)
BITUMEN
ITEM UNIT
(b) 80/100 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l)
42.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE BITUMEN
SURFACING:
(c) MC3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
(a) ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING CUBIC METRE
3 (e) BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE TYPE AND LITRES (l)
(STATE TYPE OF BINDER AND (m )
COMPOSITION)
MAXIMUM SIZE OF AGGREGATE)
(h) PRECOATING FLUID (STATE TYPE) LITRES (l)
(b) BITUMEN FOR ASPHALT TONNES (t)
CONCRETE SURFACING (STATE (g) OTHER TYPES OF BITUMEN (STATE LITRES (l)
TYPE OF BITUMEN) TYPE AND COMPOSITION)

ITEM UNIT (c) MC3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)

44.03 SINGLE SEALS. (d) BITUMEN EMULSION (STATE TYPE AND LITRES (l)
AGGREGATE VARIATIONS: COMPOSITION)
(a) USING 7 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE (e) PRECOATING FLUID (STATE TYPE) LITRES (l)
3
(m ) (f) OTHER TYPES OF BITUMEN (STATE LITRES (l)
(b) USING 10 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE TYPE AND COMPOSITION)
3
(m )
(c) USING 14 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE
3
(m )
(d) USING 20 mm AGGREGATE CUBIC METRE
ITEM UNIT
3
(m ) 45.03 AGGREGATE
VARIATION:
(a) 20 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
ITEM UNIT AGGREGATE (m3)
44.04 APPLICATION OF FOG SPRAY: (b) 14 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
(a) USING 60% SPRAY-GRADE EMULSION LITRES (l) AGGREGATE (m3)
(b) USING 60% SPRAY-GRADE LITRES (l) (c) 10 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
EMULSION AGGREGATE (m3)
(d) 7 mm NOMINAL SIZE CUBIC METRE
AGGREGATE (m3)
ITEM UNIT
44.05 PRECOATING THE CUBIC
AGGREGATE (INDICATE TYPE OF METRE ITEM UNIT
3
PRECOATING FLUID AND RATE OF (m ) 45.04 APPLICATION OF FOG SPRAY LITRES
APPLICATION IN LITRES PER CUBIC CONSISTING OF BITUMEN EMULSION (l)
METRE OF AGGREGATE) (STATE TYPE AND PERCENTAGE
BITUMEN CONTENT IN THE EMULSION)
ITEM UNIT
44.06 ADDITION OF ITEM UNIT
APPROVED WETTING AGENT: 45.05 PRECOATING SECOND CUBIC METRE
3
(a) PROVIDING AND SUPPLYING PRIME COST SUM APPLICATION OF AGGREGATE (m )
(b) HANDLING, APPLYING, PERCENTAGE OF (STATE TYPE OF PRECOATING
FLUID AND APPLICATION RATE
PROFIT AND ALL OTHER PRIME COST SUM
IN LITRES PER CUBIC METRE)
COSTS
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

44.07 AGGREGATE FOR 45.06 ADDITION OF APPROVED WETTING KILO-
BLINDING: AGENT TO THE BINDER (STATE TYPE AND GRAMMES
3 NOMINAL APPLICATION RATE PERCENT OF (kg)
(a) NATURAL SAND CUBIC METRE (m ) BINDER):
3
(b) CRUSHER SAND USING CUBIC METRE (m )
Section 4600: Otta Seals

Section 4500: Double Surface Dressings
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 46.01 SINGLE OTTA SEAL (STATE
45.01 DOUBLE SURFACE WHETHER CRUSHED OR NATURAL
DRESSING USING: AGGREGATE IS USED. STATE ALSO
(a) 20 mm AND 10 mm SQUARE BITUMEN AND AGGREGATE
ST
AGGREGATE IN 1 AND 2
ND 2
METRE (m ) APPLICATION RATES AS WELL AS
LAYER RESPECTIVELY (STATE PERCENTAGE ANTISTRIPPING AGENT
TYPE OF BINDER AND HOT IN THE BINDER) USING THE
BINDER APPLICATION RATE FOR FOLLOWING TYPE OF BINDER:
EACH LAYER IN LITRES PER (a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE SQUARE
2
SQUARE METRE) BITUMEN METRE (m )
(b) 14 mm AND 7 mm AGGREGATE SQUARE (b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE
ST ND 2 2
IN 1 AND 2 LAYER METRE (m ) VISCOSITY GRADE METRE (m )
RESPECTIVELY (STATE TYPE OF (c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE
BINDER AND HOT BINDER VISCOSITY GRADE
2
METRE (m )
APPLICATION RATE FOR EACH
LAYER IN LITRES PER SQUARE
METRE
ITEM UNIT
46.02 SINGLE OTTA SEAL (STATE
ITEM UNIT WHETHER CRUSHED OR NATURAL
45.02 BITUMINOUS BINDER VARIATION: BITUMEN AND AGGREGATE
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l) APPLICATION RATES AS WELL AS
BITUMEN PERCENTAGE ANTISTRIPPING AGENT
(b) 80/100 PENETRATION GRADE BITUMEN LITRES (l) IN THE BINDER.) WITH SAND COVER
SEAL USING CRUSHER DUST OR

NATURAL SAND. THE FOLLOWING WIDTH AS DIRECTED BY THE

TYPE OF BINDER TO BE USED IN THE ENGINEER
OTTA SEAL:
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE SQUARE
2
BITUMEN METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
(b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE 46.09 SWEEPING BACK DISLODGED KILOMETRE
2
VISCOSITY GRADE METRE (m ) OTTA SEAL AGGREGATE INTO THE (km)
(c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE WHEEL TRACKS, AS DIRECTED BY
VISCOSITY GRADE
2
METRE (m ) THE ENGINEER
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

46.03 DOUBLE OTTA SEAL (STATE 46.10 SWEEPING BACK DISLODGED KILOMETRE
WHETHER CRUSHED OR NATURAL SAND OR CRUSHER DUST INTO (km)
AGGREGATE IS USED. STATE ALSO THE WHEEL TRACKS, AS DIRECTED
BITUMEN AND AGGREGATE BY THE ENGINEER
APPLICATION RATES AS WELL AS
IN THE BINDER) USING THE ITEM UNIT
FOLLOWING TYPE OF BINDER: 46.11 ATTENDING TO AREAS OF KILOMETRE
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE SQUARE FATTINESS AND BLEEDING BY (km)
BITUMEN METRE APPLYING FINE AGGREGATES OR
2
(m ) SAND, AS DIRECTED BY THE
(b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE ENGINEER.
2
(m )
(c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN SQUARE
Section 4700 : Sand Seals And Slurry
2
(m )
ITEM UNIT
47.01 APPLICATION OF BINDER FOR LITRES (l)
ITEM UNIT SAND SEAL (STATE TYPE):
46.04 SUPPLY AND MIXING OF KEROSENE LITRE (l)

FOR CUTTING BACK BITUMEN TO
CORRECT VISCOSITY AS DIRECTED ITEM UNIT
BY THE ENGINEER 47.02 APPLICATION OF SAND CUBIC
3
FOR SAND SEAL: METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
46.05 VARIATIONS IN BITUMINOUS ITEM UNIT
BINDER: 47.03 APPLICATION OF SLURRY SQUARE
2
(a) 150/200 PENETRATION GRADE LITRES (l) (STATE NOMINAL APPLICATION METRE (m )
BITUMEN RATE IN CUBIC METRE PER
SQUARE METRE):
(b) MC 3000 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
VISCOSITY GRADE
(c) MC 800 CUTBACK BITUMEN LITRES (l)
ITEM UNIT
VISCOSITY GRADE
47.04 VARIATION IN THE RATE OF CUBIC METRE
3
APPLICATION OF THE SLURRY: (m )
ITEM UNIT
Section 4800: Surfacing Of Bridge Decks
46.06 VARIATIONS IN AGGREGATE:
(a) OTTA SEAL, CRUSHED CUBIC ITEM UNIT
3
MATERIAL METRE (m )
48.01 SURFACING ON BRIDGE CUBIC
(b) OTTA SEAL, NATURAL MATERIAL CUBIC DECK (STATE TYPE AND METRE
3
METRE (m ) THICKNESS) (m )
3
(c) SAND COVER SEAL, CRUSHER CUBIC

3
DUST OR NATURAL SAND METRE (m )
Section 4900: Treatment Of Surface Defects,

ITEM UNIT Patching, Repairing Edge-Breaks And Crack
46.07 VARIATIONS IN ANTI-STRIPPING KILOGRAMME
Sealing
AGENT (kg)
ITEM UNIT
49.01 TREATMENT TYPE 1 (FOG
SPRAY):
ITEM UNIT
46.08 PROVIDING CONES AND CARRYING KILOMETRE
(a) 30% BITUMEN EMULSION LITRE (l)
OUT ALL TRAFFIC CONTROL (km) (b) 60% BITUMEN EMULSION LITRE (l)
REQUIRED FOR CHANNELLING
TRAFFIC TO ENSURE EVEN
TRAFFICKING ACROSS THE ROAD

ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

49.02 APPLICATION OF SAND SEAL 49.09 BACKFILLING OF
(TREATMENT TYPE 2): EXCAVATIONS FOR PATCHING WITH:
(a) BINDER (STATE TYPE) LITRE (l) (a) CHEMICALLY STABILISED PAVEMENT
(b) SAND CUBIC METRE MATERIAL (SPECIFY THE PAVEMENT
3
(m ) MATERIAL AND THE STABILISING
AGENT) FOR A PATCH WITH A
SURFACE AREA:
2
ITEM UNIT (i) NOT EXCEEDING 5 m CUBIC
3
49.03 TREATMENT TYPE 3 SQUARE METRE (m )
2
(SLURRY): (STATE NOMINAL
2
METRE (m ) (ii) EXCEEDING 5 m BUT NOT CUBIC
2 3
APPLICATION RATE IN CUBIC EXCEEDING 100 m METRE (m )
2
METRE PER SQUARE METRE): (iii) EXCEEDING 100 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m )
(b) BASE COURSE MATERIAL STABILISED
ITEM UNIT WITH BITUMINOUS EMULSION
(SPECIFY THE EMULSION) FOR A
49.04 VARIATION IN THE RATE OF CUBIC METRE PATCH WITH A SURFACE AREA:
3
APPLICATION OF THE SLURRY: (m ) 2
(i) NOT EXCEEDING 5 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m )
2
(ii) EXCEEDING 5 m BUT NOT CUBIC
ITEM UNIT EXCEEDING 100m
2 3
METRE (m )
49.05 TREATMENT TYPE 4: (ASPHALT (iii) EXCEEDING 100 m
2
CUBIC
SKIM COAT): 3
METRE (m )
(a) TACK COAT USING 30% BITUMEN LITRE (l)
EMULSION
(b) CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED ASPHALT TONNE (t) ITEM UNIT
49.10 COMPACTING THE FLOOR OF SQUARE
2
EXCAVATIONS FOR PATCHING METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
49.06 SAWING ASPHALT OR
CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS FOR ITEM UNIT
PATCHING: 49.11 EDGE BREAKS:
(a) CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED ASPHALT: (a) TRIMMING EDGES OF EXISTING METRE
(i) NOT EXCEEDING 50 mm SQUARE SURFACING (m)
2
METRE (m ) (b) RECONSTRUCTING EDGES FROM TONNE (t)
(ii) EXCEEDING 50 mm BUT NOT SQUARE CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED ASPHALT
2
EXCEEDING 100 mm METRE (m )
2
METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
(b) CEMENTED PAVEMENT LAYERS TO 49.12 CLEANING THE CRACKS WITH KILOMETRE
AN AVERAGE DEPTH: COMPRESSED AIR: (km)
(i) NOT EXCEEDING 50 mm SQUARE
(a) TRIMMING EDGES OF EXISTING METRE (m)
2
METRE (m ) SURFACING
(ii) EXCEEDING 50 mm BUT NOT SQUARE
EXCEEDING 100 mm
2
METRE (m ) (b) RECONSTRUCTING EDGES FROM TONNE (t)
2
METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 49.13 APPLYING BITUMINOUS BINDERS,
49.07 TREATMENT TYPE 5: HERBICIDES AND INSECTICIDES FOR
(SCREED): SEALING CRACKS:
(a) TACK COAT USING 30% BITUMEN LITRE (l) (a) HERBICIDES LITRE (l)
EMULSION (b) INSECTICIDES LITRE (l)
(b) CONTINUOUSLY-GRADED TONNE (t) (c) MSP/1 OR SIMILAR PRIMER LITRE (l)
ASPHALT (SPECIFY GRADE) (d) ANIONIC STABLE-GRADE EMULSION MIXED LITRE (l)
(c) COARSE GRADE SLURRY CUBIC METRE WITH SYNTHETIC MODIFIERS
3
(m ) (e) HOT BITUMEN RUBBER LITRE (l)
(f) OTHER SPECIFIED AGENTS (TYPE LITRE (l)
49.08 EXCAVATION IN EXISTING

PAVEMENTS FOR PATCHING IN:
ITEM UNIT
(a) ASPHALT LAYERS CUBIC METRE
(m )
3 49.14 COLD RUBBER-SLURRY CUBIC METRE
3
(b) CEMENTED LAYERS CUBIC METRE FOR SEALING CRACKS (m )
3
(m )
(c) OTHER LAYERS (SPECIFY SQUARE
2
TYPE) METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
49.15 ROLLING THE CRACKS METRE (m)

SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS ITEM UNIT

52.08 RENOVATING GUARDRAIL
MATERIAL:
Section 5100: Marker And Kilometre Posts (a) GUARDRAILS INCLUDING END METRE (m)
SECTIONS
ITEM UNIT
(b) POSTS INCLUDING BOLTS, NUMBER
51.01 MARKER POSTS: NUMBER (no) WASHERS AND NUTS (no)
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

51.02 KILOMETRE POSTS NUMBER (no) 52.09 RE-ERECTION OF
GUARDRAILS WITH RECOVERED
MATERIAL:
Section 5200: Guardrails (a) SINGLE GUARDRAIL METRE (m)
(b) DOUBLE GUARDRAIL METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
52.01 GUARDRAILS ON TIMBER
POSTS: ITEM UNIT
(a) GALVANISED METRE (m) 52.10 RE-ERECTION OF END UNITS
(b) PAINTED METRE (m) WITH RECOVERED MATERIAL:
(a) END WINGS NUMBER (no)
(b) TERMINAL SECTIONS WITH SINGLE NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT GUARDRAILS
52.02 GUARDRAILS ON STEEL (c) TERMINAL SECTIONS WITH DOUBLE NUMBER (no)
POSTS: GUARDRAILS
(a) GALVANISED METRE (m) (d) TERMINAL SECTIONS COMPLETE NUMBER (no)
(b) PAINTED METRE (m) WITH ANCHOR BLOCK
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

52.03 EXTRA OVER ITEMS 52.01, METRE 52.11 NEW MATERIAL REQUIRED
52.02 AND 52.11 FOR (m) FOR THE RE-ERECTION OF GUARD-
HORIZONTALLY CURVED GUARD- RAILS WITH RECOVERED
RAILS FACTORY BENT TO A RADIUS MATERIALS:
OF LESS THAN 45 m (a) GUARDRAILS METRE (m)
(b) TIMBER POSTS NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT (c) STEEL POSTS NUMBER (no)

(d) REFLECTIVE PLATES NUMBER (no)
52.04 END UNITS:
(e) SPACER BLOCKS NUMBER (no)
(a) END SECTIONS INCLUDING NUMBER
FOUNDATION IN THE GROUND (no)
WHERE SINGLE GUARDRAIL
SECTIONS ARE USED (STATE ITEM UNIT
LENGTH) 52.12 DRILLING AND BLASTING NUMBER
(b) END SECTIONS INCLUDING NUMBER HOLES FOR GUARDRAIL POSTS (no)
FOUNDATION IN THE GROUND (no)
WHERE DOUBLE GUARDRAIL
SECTIONS ARE USED (STATE LENGTH
Section 5300: Fencing
OF END SECTION)
(c) CABLE STAYS COMPLETE WITH NUMBER ITEM UNIT
ANCHOR BLOCK (no)
53.01 CLEARING THE FENCE LINE, KILOMETRE
2m WIDE STRIP: (km)
ITEM UNIT
52.05 ADDITIONAL GUARDRAIL ITEM UNIT
POSTS:
53.02 SUPPLYING AND ERECTING
(a) TIMBER NUMBER (no) NEW FENCING MATERIAL FOR
(b) STEEL NUMBER (no) NEW FENCES AND FOR
SUPPLEMENTING MATERIAL IN
EXISTING FENCES WHICH ARE
BEING REPAIRED OR REMOVED:
ITEM UNIT
(a) BARBED WIRE (GRADE, SIZE AND KILOMETRE
52.06 REFLECTIVE PLATES NUMBER (no)
INDICATED)
(b) SMOOTH WIRE (GRADE, SIZE AND KILOMETRE
ITEM UNIT
52.07 REMOVING EXISTING METRE INDICATED)
GUARDRAILS (m)
(c) DIAMOND MESH SQUARE
2
METRE (m )

(d) WIRE NETTING SQUARE Section 5400: Road Signs

2
METRE (m )
(e) BARBED-TAPE CONCERTINA KILOMETRE ITEM UNIT
WIRE (km)
54.01 ROAD SIGN (STANDARD, NUMBER (no)
(f) STEEL AND TIMBER STRAINING NUMBER (no) STATE AREA FOR EACH TYPE)
POSTS, INCLUDING ANCHORS
(TYPE, SIZE AND LENGTH AND
WHETHER GALVANISED,
ITEM UNIT
TREATED OR PAINTED
INDICATED) 54.02 ADDITIONAL ROAD SIGN NUMBER (no)
PLATE
(g) STEEL AND TIMBER STANDARDS

(LENGTH AND TYPE INDICATED) NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT
(h) STEEL AND TIMBER DROPPERS NUMBER (no)
(LENGTH AND TYPE INDICATED) 54.03 ROUTE DIRECTION SQUARE METRE
2
SIGNS (m )
(i) TIMBER POSTS TO BE FIXED TO METRE (m)
THE BOTTOM OF WIRE MESH IN
STREAMS (DIAMETER INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
54.04 DISMANTLING, STORING AND NUMBER (no)
RE-ERECTING ROAD SIGNS
ITEM UNIT
(INDICATE SURFACE AREA)
53.03 NEW GATES:
(a) SINGLE LEAF (SIZE AND TYPE NUMBER
INDICATED) (no) Section 5500: Road Markings
(b) DOUBLE LEAF (SIZE AND TYPE NUMBER
INDICATED) (no) ITEM UNIT
55.01 ROAD-MARKING PAINT:
(a) WHITE LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
53.04 MOVING EXISTING FENCES INDICATED)
AND GATES:
(a) FENCES: UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE
(i) STOCK-PROOF FENCES KILOMETRE (km) INDICATED)
(ii) VERMIN-PROOF FENCES KILOMETRE (km) (c) RED LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m)
(iii) PEDESTRIAN FENCES KILOMETRE (km)
INDICATED)
(iv) SECURITY FENCES KILOMETRE (km)
(d) WHITE LETTERING AND SQUARE
(b) GATES NUMBER (no) SYMBOLS
2
METRE (m )
2
SYMBOLS METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
(f) TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS SQUARE
53.05 DISMANTLING EXISTING KILOMETRE (km) (ANY COLOUR)
2
METRE (m )
FENCES
(g) KERB MARKINGS (ANY COLOUR) SQUARE
2
METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
53.06 PROVIDING TEMPORARY ITEM UNIT
FENCES AND GATES: 55.02 RETRO-REFLECTIVE ROAD-
(a) STOCK-PROOF FENCE KILOMETRE MARKING PAINT:
(km) (a) WHITE LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m)
(b) VERMIN-PROOF FENCE KILOMETRE UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE
(km) INDICATED)
(c) PEDESTRIAN FENCE KILOMETRE
(km)
(d) TEMPORARY GATES (TYPE AND NUMBER (no)
INDICATED)
SIZE INDICATED)
(e) TEMPORARY MOTOR GATES NUMBER (no)
INDICATED)
(d) WHITE LETTERING AND SYMBOLS SQUARE
ITEM UNIT 2
METRE (m )
53.07 RINGBOLTS FOR ANCHORING NUMBER (e) YELLOW LETTERING AND SQUARE
FENCING TO STRUCTURES: (no) SYMBOLS
2
METRE (m )
(f) TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS (ANY SQUARE
2
COLOUR) METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT
55.03 THERMO-PLASTIC ROAD-
53.08 DRILLING AND BLASTING NUMBER (no)
MARKING MATERIAL
HOLES FOR POSTS AND ANCHORS:
(PARTICULARS STATED):
(a) WHITE LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m)

UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE ITEM UNIT

INDICATED) 56.02 EXCAVATION FOR CATTLE
(b) YELLOW LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m) GRIDS OR WEIGH BRIDGES:
UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE (a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL TO CUBIC
INDICATED) THE DEPTH REQUIRED FOR THE
3
METRE (m )
(c) RED LINES (BROKEN OR METRE (m) CONSTRUCTION OF THE CATTLE
UNBROKEN) (WIDTH OF LINE GRID OR WEIGH BRIDGES
INDICATED) (b) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 56.02(a) CUBIC
3
(d) WHITE LETTERING AND SYMBOLS SQUARE FOR EXCAVATION IN ROCK METRE (m )
2
METRE (m )
2
SYMBOLS METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
(f) TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS (ANY SQUARE 56.03 INSTALLATION OF WEIGH
2
COLOUR) METRE (m ) BRIDGES:
(a) STATIONARY WEIGH BRIDGE LUMP SUM
ITEM UNIT (b) TRANSPORTABLE WEIGH BRIDGE LUMP SUM
55.04 VARIATIONS IN RATE OF

APPLICATION:
(a) WHITE PAINT LITRE (l)
Section 5700: Landscaping And Grassing
(b) YELLOW PAINT LITRE (l) ITEM UNIT
(c) RED PAINT LITRE (l) 57.01 TRIMMING:
(d) RETRO-REFLECTIVE BEADS KILOGRAMMES (a) MACHINE TRIMMING SQUARE METRE (m
2
)
(kg) 2
(e) PLASTIC ROAD-MARKING PAINTS LITRE (l)
(b) HAND TRIMMING SQUARE METRE (m )
(SPECIFY)
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 57.02 USING MACHINES FOR
TRIMMING OR SHAPING (ALTERNATIVE
55.05 ROADSTUDS (TYPE NUMBER (no)
TO SUBITEM 57.01(a)):
STATED)
(a) BULLDOZER HOUR (h)
(b) MOTOR GRADER HOUR (h)
ITEM UNIT
55.06 SETTING OUT AND PRE- METRE (m)
MARKING THE LINES (EXCLUDING ITEM UNIT
TRAFFIC-ISLAND MARKINGS, 57.03 PREPARING THE AREAS FOR
LETTERING AND SYMBOLS) GRASSING:
(a) RIPPING HECTARE (ha)
ITEM UNIT (b) PLOUGHING HECTARE (ha)

(c) TOPSOILING WITHIN THE ROAD
55.07 RE-ESTABLISHING THE PAINTING LUMP SUM
RESERVE, WHERE THE FOLLOWING
UNIT AT THE END OF THE DEFECT
MATERIALS ARE USED:
LIABILITY PERIOD:
(i) TOPSOIL OBTAINED FROM WITHIN CUBIC METRE
3
THE ROAD RESERVE OR BORROW (m )
AREAS (FREE-HAUL 1.0 km)
ITEM UNIT
(ii) TOPSOIL OBTAINED FROM OTHER CUBIC METRE
55.08 REMOVAL OF EXISTING, 3
SOURCES BY THE CONTRACTOR (m )
TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT
ROAD MARKING BY:
(INCLUDING ALL HAUL)
(d) TOPSOILING OF BORROW PITS BY CUBIC METRE
(a) SANDBLASTING SQUARE 3
2
METRE (m )
USING TOPSOIL OBTAINED FROM (m )
BORROW AREAS OR FROM THE ROAD
(b) OVER PAINTING AS A SQUARE
2 RESERVE (FREE-HAUL 1.0 km)
TEMPORARY MEASURE METRE (m )
(e) PROVIDING AND APPLYING CHEMICAL
(c) MILLING SQUARE
2 FERTILISERS AND/OR SOIL-
METRE (m )
IMPROVEMENT MATERIAL:
(i) LIME TONNE (t)
ITEM UNIT (ii) SUPER-PHOSPHATE TONNE (t)
55.09 REMOVAL OF EXISTING NUMBER (iii) LIMESTONE AMMONIUM NITRATE TONNE (t)
ROADSTUDS (no)
(iv) 2:3:2(22) TONNE (t)
(V) 3:2:1(25) TONNE (t)
Section 5600: Cattle Grids And Axle Weigh- (vi) OTHER FERTILISERS AND/OR SOIL- TONNE (t)
IMPROVEMENT MATERIALS IF
Bridges REQUIRED (TYPE STATED)
ITEM UNIT (f) STOCKPILING TOPSOIL CUBIC METRE (m3)
56.01 CATTLE GRIDS NUMBER (no)

ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

2
57.04 GRASSING: 57.12 SPRIGGING SQUARE METRE (m )
(a) PLANTING OF GRASS CUTTINGS HECTARE (ha)
(TYPE OF GRASS AS INDICATED)
(b) SODDING BY USING THE Section 5800: Finishing The Road And Road
FOLLOWING TYPES OF SODS: Reserve And Treating Old Roads
(i) NURSERY SODS (TYPE OF SQUARE METRE
GRASS SPECIFIED) (m )
2
ITEM UNIT
(ii) BUSH SODS SQUARE METRE 58.01 FINISHING THE ROAD AND
2
(m ) ROAD RESERVE:
(c) HYDROSEEDING: (a) DUAL CARRIAGEWAY ROAD KILOMETRE (km)
(i) PROVIDING AN APPROVED KILOGRAMME (b) SINGLE CARRIAGEWAY ROAD KILOMETRE (km)
SEED MIXTURE FOR (kg)
HYDROSEEDING
(ii) HYDROSEEDING HECTARE (ha) ITEM UNIT
(d) PLANTING GRASS SEED WITH AN HECTARE (ha) 58.02 TREATMENT OF OLD ROADS KILOMETRE
APPROVED GRASS-PLANTING AND TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS (km)
MACHINE
(e) HAND SOWING SQUARE METRE
2
(m ) Section 5900: Painting
(f) OTHER METHODS (SPECIFY)
ITEM UNIT
59.01 PAINTING:
ITEM UNIT
(a) (DESCRIBE SQUARE METRE
57.05 WATERING THE GRASS WHEN KILOLITRE (kl)
STRUCTURE/ARTICLE) (m )
2
ESTABLISHED BY TOPSOILING
ONLY: (b) (DESCRIBE NUMBER (no)
STRUCTURE/ARTICLE)
(c) (DESCRIBE METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT STRUCTURE/ARTICLE)
57.06 WATERING THE ALREADY KILOLITRE (d) (DESCRIBE TONNE (t)

PLANTED GRASS, TREES AND (kl) STRUCTURE/ARTICLE)
SHRUBS PLANTED DURING PERIODS
OF DROUGHT EXPERIENCED DURING
THE GROWING SEASON:
ITEM UNIT
57.07 MOWING THE GRASS: HECTARE (ha)
ITEM UNIT
57.08 ANTI-EROSION KILOGRAMME
COMPOUND (SPECIFY) (kg)
ITEM UNIT
57.09 TREES AND SHRUBS:
(a) PROVIDING THE TREES AND NUMBER (no)
SHRUBS (TYPES INDICATED)
(b) PLANTING AND ESTABLISHING:

(i) TREES NUMBER (no)
(ii) SHRUBS NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT
57.10 EXTRA WORK FOR LAND- PROVISIONAL
SCAPING SUM
ITEM UNIT
57.11 WEEDING ALL GRASS-SEEDED HECTARE
AREAS AND THE GRASS WHEN (ha)
ESTABLISHED BY TOPSOILING ONLY

SERIES 6000 61.11 GROUTING (TYPE OF GROUT KILOGRAMME

AND FOR WHICH PURPOSE IT IS (kg)
REQUIRED INDICATED)
Section 6100: Foundations For Structures

ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT
61.01 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONAL 61.12 DOWEL BARS (TYPE, KILOGRAMME
FOUNDATION INVESTIGATIONS: SUM DIAMETER AND LENGTH OF DOWEL (kg)
BARS TOGETHER WITH TYPE OF
GROUT, INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
61.02 EXCAVATION:
ITEM UNIT
(a) COMMON EXCAVATION IN SOFT
61.13 FOUNDATION LINING SQUARE
MATERIAL SITUATED WITHIN THE 2
(TYPE OF MATERIAL AND METRE (m )
THICKNESS INDICATED)
RANGES:
(i) 0 m UP TO 2 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m )
ITEM UNIT
(ii) 2 m UP TO 4 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m ) 61.14 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP
(iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 2 m CUBIC FOR PILING SUM
3
METRE (m )
(b) EXTRA-OVER SUBITEM 61.02(a) FOR CUBIC
3
EXCAVATION IN ROCK IRRESPECTIVE METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
OF DEPTH
61.15 MOVING TO, AND SETTING UP NUMBER (no)
THE EQUIPMENT AT EACH POSITION
FOR INSTALLING THE PILES
ITEM UNIT
61.03 ACCESS AND DRAINAGE:
(a) ACCESS LUMP SUM ITEM UNIT
(b) DRAINAGE, WHERE NO LUMP SUM LUMP 61.16 AUGERED OR BORED HOLES FOR
ACCESS HAS BEEN PROVIDED SUM PILES WITH A DIAMETER OF (DIAMETER
INDICATED) THROUGH MATERIAL
SUCCESSIVE DEPTH RANGES:
ITEM UNIT
(a) AUGERED HOLES:
61.04 BACKFILL TO
EXCAVATIONS UTILISING: (i) 0 m UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
(a) MATERIAL FROM THE CUBIC METRE (m

3
) (ii) EXCEEDING 10 m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m)
EXCAVATIONS (iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 5 m METRE (m)
3
(b) IMPORTED MATERIAL CUBIC METRE (m ) (b) BORED HOLES:
3
(c) SOIL CEMENT CUBIC METRE (m ) (i) 0 m UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
(ii) EXCEEDING 10 m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m)
(iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 5 m METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
61.08 FOUNDATION FILL
CONSISTING OF:
ITEM UNIT
3
(a) ROCK FILL CUBIC METRE (m )
3
61.17 DRIVING THE TEMPORARY
(b) CRUSHED STONE FILL CUBIC METRE (m ) CASING FOR DRIVEN DISPLACEMENT
3 PILING SYSTEMS FOR FORMING
(c) COMPACTED GRANULAR CUBIC METRE (m )
MATERIAL HOLES FOR PILES WITH A DIAMETER
3 OF (DIAMETER INDICATED) THROUGH
(d) MASS CONCRETE (CLASS CUBIC METRE (m )
MATERIAL SITUATED WITHIN THE
INDICATED)
3
(e) CONCRETE SCREED (THICKNESS CUBIC METRE (m ) RANGES:
AND CLASS OF CONCRETE
(a) 0m UP TO 10m METRE (m)
INDICATED)
(b) EXCEEDING 10m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
61.09 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP
FOR THE DRILLING OF HOLES (TYPE SUM ITEM UNIT
OF DRILLING INDICATED) 61.18 MANUFACTURING, SUPPLYING AND METRE
DELIVERING PREFABRICATED PILES (m)
(TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED).
ITEM UNIT
61.10 DRILLING OF HOLES (DIAMETER METRE
AND TYPE OF DRILLING INDICATED) (m) ITEM UNIT
PREFABRICATED PILES (TYPE AND
ITEM UNIT SIZE INDICATED) THROUGH MATERIAL

SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING INDICATED)

(a) 0 m UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
(b) EXCEEDING 10 m, UP TO 15 m METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
(c) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 5 m METRE (m) 61.28 INSTALLING PERMANENT PILE METRE
CASING FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER (m)
INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
61.20 EXTRA OVER ITEM 61.19, ITEM UNIT
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE DEPTH TO
FORM AUGERED AND BORED PILE 61.29 STEEL REINFORCEMENT IN
HOLES THROUGH IDENTIFIED CAST IN SITU PILES:
OBSTRUCTIONS CONSISTING OF: (a) MILD-STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
(a) COARSE GRAVEL WITH A MAXIMUM METRE (m) (b) HIGH-YIELD-STRESS-STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
CONTENT OF LESS THAN (MAXIMUM (TYPE INDICATED)
PERCENTAGE INDICATED)
(b) BOULDERS (DESCRIPTION OF AND METRE (m)
MAXIMUM SIZE INDICATED) ITEM UNIT
(c) ROCK FORMATION (DESCRIPTION AND METRE (m) 61.30 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE IN CUBIC
3
CLASS OF ROCK INDICATED) PILES, UNDERREAMS, BULBOUS BASES METRE (m )
AND SOCKETS (CLASS OF CONCRETE
INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
61.21 FORMING AUGERED AND PROVISIONAL
BORED PILE HOLES THROUGH SUM
ITEM UNIT
UNIDENTIFIED OBSTRUCTIONS 61.31 EXTRA OVER ITEM 61.30 FOR CUBIC METRE
3
CONCRETE CAST UNDER WATER (m )
ITEM UNIT
61.22 DRIVING TEMPORARY PROVISIONAL
ITEM UNIT
CASINGS FOR DRIVEN SUM 61.32 SPLICING/COUPLING NUMBER
DISPLACEMENT PILING SYSTEMS OR PREFABRICATED PILES FOR (no)
INSTALLING PREFABRICATED PILES LENGTHENING(SIZE OF PILE INDICATED)
THROUGH IDENTIFIED OR
UNIDENTIFIED OBSTRUCTIONS
ITEM UNIT
61.33 STRIPPING/CUTTING THE PILE NUMBER
ITEM UNIT HEADS (TYPE AND DIAMETER/SIZE OF (no)
61.23 EXTRA OVER ITEMS 61.16, PILE INDICATED)
61.17 AND 61.19 FOR RAKING PILES:
(a) HOLES FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER AND METRE (m)
RAKE INDICATED) ITEM UNIT
(b) TEMPORARY CASING FOR DRIVEN METRE (m) 61.34 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP SUM
DISPLACEMENT PILE SYSTEMS FOR THE LOAD TESTING OF PILES
(DIAMETER AND RAKE INDICATED)
(c) PREFABRICATED PILES (TYPE, SIZE METRE (m)
AND RATE INDICATED) ITEM UNIT
61.35 LOAD TESTS ON PILES NUMBER (no)
(COMPRESSION/TENSION TEST,
ITEM UNIT DIAMETER/ SIZE, SPECIFIED
61.24 FORMING UNDERREAMS FOR NUMBER (no) WORKING LOAD INDICATED)
PILES OF (DIAMETER INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 61.36 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE LUMP SUM
61.25 FORMING THE BULBOUS BASES NUMBER FOR CORE DRILLING
FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER INDICATED) (no)
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 61.37 MOVING THE EQUIPMENT TO AND NUMBER
61.26 SOCKETING PILES INTO ROCK NUMBER ASSEMBLING IT AT EACH LOCATION (no)
FORMATION (CLASS OF ROCK AND (no) WHERE CORES ARE TO BE DRILLED
LENGTH OF SOCKET INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

61.27 INSTALLING AND REMOVING METRE 61.38 DRILLING THE CORES
TEMPORARY CASINGS IN AUGERED (m) (DIAMETER INDICATED) IN:
HOLES FOR PILES OF (DIAMETER (a) CONCRETE METRE (m)

(b) FOUNDING FORMATION: ITEM UNIT

(i) IRRESPECTIVE OF HARDNESS METRE (m) 61.47 NUCLEAR INTEGRITY TESTING
(ii) WITH A HARDNESS OF METRE (m) ON BORED PILES:
(HARDNESS INDICATED) (a) CONSTRUCTING 5 m LONG NUMBER
CALIBRATION PILES OF (INDICATE (no)
DIAMETER)
ITEM UNIT (b) INSTALLING 65 mm INTERNAL METRE (m)
61.39 FORMWORK FOR CAISSONS SQUARE DIAMETER STEEL DUCTS IN THE PILES
2
(CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED) METRE (m ) (C) PERFORMING INTEGRITY TESTS USING:
(i) THE NUCLEAR METHOD NUMBER
(no)
ITEM UNIT (ii) THE NEUTRON METHOD NUMBER
61.40 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR (no)
CAISSONS:
(a) MILD-STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
Section 6200: Falsework, Formwork And
(b) HIGH-YIELD-STRESS-STEEL BARS (TYPE TONNE (t)
Concrete Finish
INDICATED)
ITEM UNIT
62.01 FORMWORK TO PROVIDE (CLASS SQUARE
ITEM UNIT 2
OF FINISH INDICATED AS F1, F2, F3 METRE (m )
61.41 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE IN CUBIC METRE OR BOARD) SURFACE FINISH TO
3
CAISSONS AND CONCRETE SEALS (m ) (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER TO WHICH
(CLASS OF CONCRETE INDICATED) APPLICABLE)
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

61.42 CUTTING EDGE FOR NUMBER (no) 62.02 VERTICAL FORMWORK TO SQUARE
(DIAMETER/SIZE INDICATED) PROVIDE (CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED
2
METRE (m )
CAISSONS AS F1, F2, F3 OR BOARD) SURFACE
FINISH TO (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER
TO WHICH APPLICABLE)
ITEM UNIT
61.43 SINKING (DIAMETER/SIZE
INDICATED) CAISSONS THROUGH ITEM UNIT
MATERIAL SITUATED WITHIN THE 62.03 HORIZONTAL FORMWORK TO SQUARE
FOLLOWING SUCCESSIVE DEPTH 2
PROVIDE (CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED METRE (m )
RANGES: AS F1, F2, F3 OR BOARD) SURFACE
(a) 0 m UP TO 5 m METRE (m) FINISH TO (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER
TO WHICH APPLICABLE)
(b) EXCEEDING 5 m AND UP TO 10 m METRE (m)
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 62.04 INCLINED FORMWORK TO SQUARE

2
PROVIDE (CLASS OF FINISH INDICATED METRE (m )
61.44 EXCAVATION FOR CAISSONS: AS F1, F2, F3 OR BOARD) SURFACE
(a) EXCAVATING SOFT MATERIAL FINISH TO (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER
SITUATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING TO WHICH APPLICABLE)
(i) 0 m UP TO 2 m CUBIC
3
METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
(ii) EXCEEDING 2 m, UP TO 4 m CUBIC 62.05 PERMANENT FORMWORK SQUARE
3
METRE (m ) (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER TO WHICH
2
METRE (m )
(iii) FURTHER INCREMENTS OF 2 m CUBIC APPLICABLE)
3
DEPTHS METRE (m )
(b) EXTRA OVER SUBITEM 61.44(a) FOR CUBIC
3
EXCAVATION IN ROCK MATERIAL METRE (m ) ITEM UNIT
IRRESPECTIVE OF DEPTH
62.06 FORMWORK TO FORM OPEN SQUARE
JOINTS (DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER TO METRE
2
WHICH APPLICABLE, AND LOCATION) (m )
ITEM UNIT
61.45 FILLING THE CAISSONS CUBIC METRE
3
(m ) ITEM UNIT
62.07 ESTABLISHMENT ON THE SITE FOR LUMP SUM
SLIDING FORMWORK OPERATIONS
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

61.46 STRIPPING THE (SIZE OF NUMBER 62.08 TRANSPORTING TO AND SETTING NUMBER
CAISSON INDICATED) CAISSON HEADS (no) UP THE SLIDING FORMWORK ASSEMBLY (no)
AT (DESCRIPTION OF EACH STRUCTURE)

ITEM UNIT Section 6500: Prestressing

62.09 FORMING THE CONCRETE BY METRE (m)
SLIDING FORMWORK FOR ITEM UNIT
(DESCRIPTION OF EACH STRUCTURE 65.01 PRESTRESSING
AND CLASS OF SURFACE FINISH TO TENDONS:
EXPOSED SURFACES INDICATED)
(a) LONGITUDINAL MEGANEWTON - METRE
TENDONS (MN-m)
(b) TRANSVERSE TENDONS MEGANEWTON - METRE
Section 6300: Steel Rein-Forcement For (MN-m)
Structures (c) VERTICAL TENDONS MEGANEWTON - METRE
(MN-m)
ITEM UNIT
63.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR:
ITEM UNIT
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF PORTION OF
STRUCTURE TO WHICH APPLICABLE): 65.02 ANCHORAGES AND
COUPLERS:
(i) MILD STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
(a) END ANCHORAGE AT MEGANEWTON (MN)
(ii) HIGH-YIELD-STRESS-STEEL BARS TONNE (t)
JACKING
(TYPE INDICATED)
(b) ANCHORAGE AT DEAD END MEGANEWTON (MN)
(iii) WELDED STEEL FABRIC TONNE (t)
(c) COUPLER AT JACKING END MEGANEWTON (MN)
(b) ETC FOR OTHER STRUCTURES OR TONNE (t)
PARTS OF STRUCTURES (d) COUPLER AT DEAD END MEGANEWTON (MN)
ITEM UNIT
Section 6400: Concrete For Structures
65.03 EXTRA OVER ITEM 65.02 MEGANEWTON
ITEM UNIT FOR PARTIALLY TENSIONING (MN)
THE TENDONS
64.01 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE:
(a) (CLASS OF CONCRETE AND PART OF CUBIC
3
STRUCTURE OR USE INDICATED) METRE (m )
Section 6600: No-Fines Concrete, Joints,
(b) ETC FOR OTHER CLASSES OF CUBIC
CONCRETE AND OTHER USES OR
3
METRE (m )
Bearings, Parapets And Drainage For
PARTS OF THE STRUCTURE Structures
ITEM UNIT
ITEM UNIT 66.01 CAST IN SITU NO-FINES CUBIC METRE
3
64.02 MANUFACTURING PRECAST NUMBER
CONCRETE (m )
CONCRETE MEMBERS (DESCRIPTION OF (no)
MEMBER WITH REFERENCE TO DRAWING)
ITEM UNIT
66.02 PRECAST NO-FINES CONCRETE NUMBER
ITEM UNIT UNITS (CLASS OF CONCRETE AND (no)
DESCRIPTION OF UNIT)
64.03 TRANSPORTING AND ERECTING NUMBER
PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS (no)
(DESCRIPTION OF MEMBER AND
APPROXIMATE MASS TO BE GIVEN) ITEM UNIT
66.03 PROPRIETARY EXPANSION
JOINTS:
ITEM UNIT (a) PRIME COST SUM ALLOWED FOR PRIME COST
64.04 EPOXY BONDING OF NEW SQUARE PURCHASING AND TAKING DELIVERY SUM
2
CONCRETE SURFACES TO OLD METRE (m ) OF EXPANSION JOINTS
(b) PERCENTAGE ON PRIME COST SUM PER CENT (%)
FOR CHARGES AND PROFIT
ITEM UNIT
64.05 EXTRA OVER ITEM 64.01 OR CUBIC METRE
3
64.02 FOR THE USE OF SULPHATE- (m ) ITEM UNIT
RESISTANT CEMENT IN CONCRETE 66.04 INSTALLATION OF
PROPRIETARY EXPANSION JOINTS:
ITEM UNIT PER METRE)
64.06 DEMOLISHING EXISTING (b) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT MEASURED NUMBER (no)
CONCRETE: BY NUMBER
(a) PLAIN CONCRETE(MEMBER CUBIC METRE
3
INDICATED) (m )
(b) REINFORCED CONCRETE (MEMBER CUBIC METRE ITEM UNIT
3
INDICATED) (m ) 66.05 EXPANSION JOINTS:
PER METRE)

(b) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT MEASURED NUMBER ITEM UNIT

BY NUMBER (no) 66.14 DOWELS/GUIDES NUMBER
(DESCRIPTION OF EACH TYPE) (no)
ITEM UNIT
66.06 FILLED JOINTS: ITEM UNIT
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF AND THICKNESS SQUARE 66.15 CONCRETE PARAPETS METRE (m)
2
OF JOINT FILLER FOR JOINTS METRE (m )
MEASURED PER SQUARE METRE)
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF AND THICKNESS METRE (m) ITEM UNIT
OF JOINT FILLER FOR JOINTS 66.16 STEEL RAILINGS (TYPE METRE
MEASURED PER METRE) DESCRIBED) (m)
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

66.07 UNFILLED JOINTS: 66.17 END BLOCKS NUMBER (no)
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT FOR JOINTS SQUARE
MEASURED PER SQUARE METRE) METRE (m2)
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT FOR JOINTS METRE (m) ITEM UNIT
MEASURED PER LINEAR METRE) 66.18 NUMBERS FOR
STRUCTURES:
(a) NUMBER PLATES NUMBER (no)
ITEM UNIT
(b) PAINTED NUMBERS NUMBER (no)
66.08 SEALING JOINTS WITH:
(c) NUMBERS FORMED IN NUMBER (no)
(a) SEALANT (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT, METRE (m) CONCRETE
SEALANT AND SIZE)
(b) SEAL (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT, METRE (m)
SEALANT AND SIZE) ITEM UNIT
(c) WATERSTOP (DESCRIPTION OF JOINT, METRE (m) 66.19 DRAINAGE PIPES AND WEEP
WATERSTOP AND SIZE) HOLES:
(a) DRAINAGE PIPES: ∙
ITEM UNIT (i) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) METRE (m)
66.09 PROPRIETARY BEARINGS: (ii) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) NUMBER (no)
(a) PRIME COST SUM ALLOWED FOR PRIME COST (b) WEEP HOLES:
PURCHASING AND TAKING DELIVERY SUM (i) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) METRE (m)
OF BEARINGS (ii) (TYPE AND SIZE INDICATED) NUMBER (no)
(b) PERCENTAGE ON PRIME COST SUM PERCENTAGE
FOR CHARGES AND PROFIT (%)
ITEM UNIT
66.20 DRAINAGE GULLEYS NUMBER
ITEM UNIT (DESCRIPTION OF EACH TYPE GIVEN) (no)
66.10 INSTALLING THE PROPRIETARY NUMBER
BEARINGS (DESCRIPTION OF EACH TYPE, (no)
AND STATE CLASS) ITEM UNIT
66.21 SYNTHETIC-FIBRE FILTER SQUARE METRE
2
FABRIC (TYPE INDICATED AND (m )
ITEM UNIT DESCRIPTION)
66.11 BEARINGS (DESCRIPTION OF NUMBER
EACH TYPE AND CLASS) (no)
ITEM UNIT
66.22 CONCRETE CHANNELLING METRE
ITEM UNIT (SIZE INDICATED) (m)
66.12 CONCRETE HINGES:
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF HINGE MEASURED METRE (m)
PER METRE) ITEM UNIT
3
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF HINGE MEASURED NUMBER 66.23 CRUSHED STONE IN CUBIC METRE (m )
BY NUMBER) (no) DRAINAGE STRIPS
ITEM UNIT ITEM UNIT

66.13 BEARING STRIPS SQUARE METRE 66.24 NOSE ENDINGS AT NUMBER
2
(DESCRIPTION OF THE MATERIAL (m ) BALUSTRADES (no)
AND NUMBER OF LAYERS)
ITEM UNIT
66.25 CONCRETE TRANSITION NUMBER (no)
BLOCKS (LENGTH INDICATED)

ITEM UNIT
66.26 SUPPLYING AND INSTALLATION
OF BOLT GROUPS COMPLETE FOR
ELECTRIFICATION BRACKETS:
(a) SINGLE-BOLT GROUPS NUMBER (no)
(b) DOUBLE-BOLT GROUPS NUMBER (no)
Section 6700: Structural Steelwork

ITEM UNIT
67.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL:
(a) (STRUCTURE/ARTICLE TONNE (t)
DESCRIBED)
(b) (STRUCTURE/ARTICLE METRE (m)
DESCRIBED)
(c) (STRUCTURE/ARTICLE NUMBER (no)
DESCRIBED)
ITEM UNIT
67.02 ANCHOR BOLTS:
(a) (DESCRIPTION OF EACH ASSEMBLY, KILOGRAMME
AND GRADE/TYPE OF STEEL, (kg)
(b) (DESCRIPTION OF EACH ASSEMBLY, NUMBER (no)
AND GRADE/TYPE OF STEEL,
ITEM UNIT
67.03 CORROSION PROTECTION:
(a) SPRAYED-ON METAL:
(i) (TYPE OF METAL AND TONNE (t)
(b) HOT-DIP GALVANISING:
(i) (TYPE OF METAL AND TONNE (t)
Section 6800: Construction Tolerances For

Structures

SERIES 7000: TOLERANCES, TESTING AND

QUALITY CONTROL
Section 7100: Testing Of Materials And

Workmanship
ITEM UNIT
71.01 SPECIAL TESTS
REQUESTED BY THE ENGINEER
(STATE MATERIAL AND TEST
METHOD):
(a) TESTS PROVISIONAL SUM
(b) CONTRACTOR’S OVERHEAD %
AND PROFITS
Section 7200: Quality Control

Section 7300: Setting Out And Tolerances

Section 7400: Rectification Of Earthworks And

Pavement Layers Outside Permitted Geometric
Tolerances
Section 7500: Specifications And Test Methods


STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD W ORKS-2000 APPENDIX 2 - LIST OF CLAUSES REFERRING TO THE SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS OR DRAWINGS
Appendix 2: List of Clauses Referring

to the Special Specifications or
Drawings
REFERENCES PAGE

SERIES 1000: GENERAL SECTION 2200: PREFABRICATED CULVERTS

CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
SECTION 1100: DEFINITIONS AND TERMS SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIAL 2211 2218 2202 2203
DRAWINGS 2204 2205
SPECIFICATIONS
1117 1140 1116 1127 2207 2210
1152 1144 1150 2211 2212
1165 2213 2214
2215 2216
SECTION 1200: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND 2218
PROVISIONS
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: SECTION 2300: CONCRETE KERBING, CONCRETE
SPECIAL CHANNELLING, CHUTES AND DOWNPIPES, AND CONCRETE
DRAWINGS LININGS FOR OPEN DRAINS
SPECIFICATIONS
1201 1202 1202 1204 CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
1206 1209 1205 1206 SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
1215 1218 1207 1208 SPECIFICATIONS
1222 1223 1209 1212 2305 2307 2301 2304
1224 1227 1217 1220 2305 2306
1230 1221 1227 2307
1232
SECTION 2400: ASPHALT AND CONCRETE BERMS
SECTION 1300: CONTRACTOR’S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
AND GENERAL OBLIGATIONS SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIAL (NONE) 2401 2402
DRAWINGS 2402 2405
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) 1303 2406
SECTION 1400: ENGINEER’S ACCOMMODATION AND SECTION 2500: PITCHING, STONEWORK AND PROTECTION
ATTENDANCE UPON ENGINEER AND HIS SITE PERSONNEL AGAINST EROSION
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
SPECIAL SPECIAL
DRAWINGS DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
1402 1403 1402 1403 (NONE) 2501 2502
1404 1405 1404 1409 2505 2506
1406 1407 1410 2508
1409 1410
SECTION 2600: GABIONS
SECTION 1500: ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS
DRAWINGS 2603 2604 2605
SPECIFICATIONS
1502 1504 1503 1504
1511 1516 1511
SERIES 3000: EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT
SECTION 1600: OVERHAUL LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED STONE
SPECIAL SECTION 3100: CLEARING, GRUBBING AND REMOVAL OF
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS TOPSOIL
1601 1602 1602 CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
SPECIAL
SECTION 1700: ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND WASTE DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
DISPOSAL (NONE) 3102 3103
SPECIAL SECTION 3200: REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
1703 1705 1704 SPECIAL
1710 1713 DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) 3207
SERIES 2000: STRUCTURES SECTION 3300: BREAKING UP EXISTING PAVEMENT

LAYERS
SECTION 2100: DRAINS CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
DRAWINGS
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS (NONE) 3305
(NONE) 2101 2102
2104 2106
2107

SECTION 3400: BORROW PIT ACQUISITION AND SECTION 4500: DOUBLE SURFACE DRESSINGS
EXPLOITATION CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
DRAWINGS
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS (NONE) 4502 4504
(NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 4600: OTTA SEALS
SECTION 3500: SELECTING AND UTILISING MATERIALS CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
FROM BORROW PITS AND CUTTINGS SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIAL (NONE) (NONE)
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) 3506 SECTION 4700: SAND SEALS AND SLURRY
SECTION 3600: EARTHWORKS SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIAL (NONE) 4705 4706
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) 3602 3603 SECTION 4800: SURFACING OF BRIDGE DECKS
3604 3605 CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
3608 3610 SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) 4801 4804
SECTION 3700: PAVEMENT LAYERS OF NATURAL GRAVEL 4807
MATERIAL
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: SECTION 4900: TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS,
SPECIAL PATCHING, REPAIRING EDGE BREAKS AND CRACK
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS SEALING
(NONE) 3702 3708 CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SECTION 3800: STABILISATION SPECIFICATIONS
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: (NONE) 4910
SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) 3802 SERIES 5000: ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION 3900: CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE SECTION 5100: MARKER AND KILOMETRE POSTS
SPECIAL SPECIAL
DRAWINGS DRAWINGS
(NONE) 3902 3906 (NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 5200: GUARDRAILS

SERIES 4000: BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
SEALS SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 4100: PRIME AND CURING MEMBRANES (NONE) (NONE)
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: SECTION 5300: FENCING
SPECIAL CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
DRAWINGS SPECIAL
SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS
(NONE) 4106 SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 4200: BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT
CONCRETE SURFACINGS SECTION 5400: ROAD SIGNS
SPECIAL SPECIAL
DRAWINGS DRAWINGS
(NONE) 4202 4205 (NONE) (NONE)
4208 4214
SECTION 5500: ROAD MARKINGS
SECTION 4300: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SEALS CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
DRAWINGS
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS (NONE) (NONE)
4312 (NONE)
SECTION 5600: CATTLE GRIDS AND AXLE WEIGH-BRIDGES
SECTION 4400: SINGLE SURFACE DRESSINGS CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
DRAWINGS
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS (NONE) (NONE)
(NONE) 4402 4404

SECTION 5700: LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING SECTION 6800: CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES FOR
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: STRUCTURES
SPECIAL CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
(NONE) (NONE) SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 5800: FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD RESERVE
AND TREATING OLD ROADS
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: SERIES 7000: TOLERANCES, TESTING AND
SPECIAL QUALITY CONTROL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) (NONE) SECTION 7100: TESTING OF MATERIALS AND
WORKMANSHIP
SECTION 5900: PAINTING CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
SPECIAL DRAWINGS
DRAWINGS SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS (NONE) 7102
(NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 7200: QUALITY CONTROL
SERIES 6000: STRUCTURES SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 6100: FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES (NONE) (NONE)
SPECIAL SECTION 7300: SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
(NONE) (NONE) SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 6200: FALSEWORK, FORMWORK AND CONCRETE (NONE) 7302 7303
FINISH 7304
SPECIAL SECTION 7400: RECTIFICATION OF EARTHWORKS AND
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS PAVEMENT LAYERS OUTSIDE PERMITTED GEOMETRIC
(NONE) (NONE) TOLERANCES
SECTION 6300: STEEL REINFORCEMENTS FOR SPECIAL
STRUCTURES DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: (NONE) 7403
SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 7500: SPECIFICATIONS AND TEST METHODS
(NONE) (NONE) CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO:
SPECIAL
SECTION 6400: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
CLAUSES WITH REFERENCE TO: (NONE) (NONE)
SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 6500: PRESTRESSING

SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 6600: NO-FINES CONCRETE, JOINTS, BEARINGS,

BOLT GROUPS FOR ELECTRIFICATION, PARAPETS AND
DRAINAGE FOR STRUCTURES
SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) (NONE)
SECTION 6700: STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

SPECIAL
DRAWINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
(NONE) (NONE)

Standard - Specifications For Road Works 2000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard - Specifications For Road Works 2000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA

Standard Specification for Road Works - 2000

Reproduction of extracts from this document may

Printed by: Novum Grafisk AS, Skjetten, Norway

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS ,,

The Working Group consisted of the following members:

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS ,,,

Series 1000 General

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS ,9

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS 9

CONTENTS OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD WORKS 2000:

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 1

SERIES 1000: GENERAL Unless inconsistent with the context, in these

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 2

1113 CARRIAGEWAY classified as fill when placed below the improved

1118 CROSSFILL 1130 INLET AND OUTLET DRAINS

G15 natural gravel/soils with nominal CBR value 1136 OVERBURDEN

Cemented materials for base course or subbase: 1141 ROADBED

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 4

1153 SPOIL (MATERIAL)

1156 SUBGRADE, IMPROVED

1157 SUBSIDIARY WORKS

1159 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM

1160 SUITABLE MATERIAL

1162 TRAVELLED WAY

1163 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 5

SERIES 1000: GENERAL 1201 SCOPE

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 6

(c) Safety by overhead power lines (g) Payment

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 7

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 8

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 9

(c) Measurement of completed Work (i) Procuring and furnishing (material).

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 10

(h) Retention money (c) Preliminary calculations

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 11

(e) Quantities No work which will be affected by an alternative design

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 12

(a) Statutory provisions (e) Use of land outside provided area

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 13

stored on such land. which conclusions can be drawn from any

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 14

deleterious salts and from any matter in quantities

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 17

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 18

Transportation of any material by the Contractor shall

Arrangement shall be made with the appropriate

1238 METHOD OF WORKING

The Engineer may at any time withdraw his approval

1239 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The Provisional Sum shall be for reimbursed the net

The Provisional Sum shall be for reimbursement of the

The percentage inserted by the Contractor shall be for

THE UNITED REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA, MINISTRY OF W ORKS PAGE 1000 - 19

SERIES: 1000 GENERAL comply with the Conditions of Contact, particularly in

ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE (f) Liaison with Government and Police Officials

However, offices for the Contractor’s supervisory staff

(c) Contractor’s quarters and camps

All sites selected by the Contractor for the erection of

(d) First aid

(e) Measurements and payment

Payment of the lump sum bid under SUBITEMS 13.01(a),